This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 GENTLY FLOWING WATERS.

AN EASY, PRACTICAL

HEBREW GRAMMAR:

WITH EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION

FROM HEBBEW INTO ENGLISH, AND FEOM ENGLISH INTO HEBBEW ;

ARRANGED IN A SERIES OF LETTERS FROM A TEACHER OF LANGUAGES

TO AN ENGLISH DUCHESS.
TO WHICH IS ATTACHED,

THE FOUNTAINS OF SALVATION,

BEING A TRANSLATION, WITH NOTES CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY, 07
ISAIAH Lin.
ALSO,
WW?
KEY TO THE EXERCISES.

IN TWO VOLUMES.

VOL. I.

BY THE REV. P. H. MASON, M.A.,

TTRWHITT'S UNIVERSITY HEBREW SCHOLAR, ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE;
A*D
HERMANN HEDWIG BERNARD,
HEBREW TEACHER IK THE UNIVERSITY, CAMBRIDGE,
AUTHOR OF "CREED AND ETHICS 07 THE JEWS, EXHIBITED IN SELECTIONS FROM THE
YAD HACHAZAKAH OF MAIMONIDES," AND EDITOR OF "(^TTJTpn) THE GUIDE OF THE
HEBREW STUDENT."

CAMBBIDG-E :
J. HALL AND SON;
WHITTAKBR AND CO., AVE MABIA-LANE ; G. BELL, 186, FLEET-STREET, LONDON ;
AND J. H. PAEKEE, OXFORD.
MDCCCLIII.
 ALEX. MACINTOSH,
PRINTER,
GREAT NEW-STREET, LONDON.
 v./

TO THE READER.

Myfriend andformerpupil, the Rev. Peter H. Mason, M.A.,

having, whilst compiling the following pages, done me the
honour to consult me on the niceties of Hebrew Grammar,
as well as upon the plan best calculated to render the
progress in the Language more smooth and easy to the student,
very kindly and modestly insisted, on bringing his labours
before the public, to have my name joined to his as an
author of the work. After a long resistance I have at last
been prevailed upon to accept this proffered, though unde
served, honour, but Ifeel it to be my duty in justice to Mr.
Mason, no less than to myself, publicly to declare that,
although, as far as mere rules of grammar are concerned, I
am fully prepared to share the responsibility with Mr.
Mason, yet in all other respects he should be considered as
the real and only responsible author of the work. Indeed
those who know that it has pleased Providence to deprive me
of my sight, and, moreover, that I was labouring under this
affliction some time before Mr. Mason even had an idea of
writing a Hebrew Grammar, will easily imagine that beyond
discussing the subjects of grammar, and venturing now and

369
 iv

then, as a practical teacher, to suggest, what seemed to me

the best method of arranging the same, I could not possibly
have done anything which would entitle me to lay claim to
the authorship of this work. If, therefore, the learner
should think that he has been benefited by this Grammar,
his thanks will be entirely and exclusively due to Mr.
Mason, its actual author.

HERMANN HEBWIG BEENABB.

 CONTENTS.

VOLUME I.

THE ELEMENTS.

LETTER I.—Pages 1—4.

What gave rise to the following Series of Letters.

LETTER II.—Pages 5—7.

The plan on which the course of instruction will be conducted.

LETTER III.—Pages 8—11.

Consideration of the differences between the modes of writing
Hebrew and the modern languages (§ 1). —An attempt to assimilate
the writing of an European language to the Hebrew system (§ 2).—
The introduction of a cypher in the system of Consonants seen to be
necessary (§ 3).
LETTER IV.—Pages 12—16.
The same subject continued.—The introduction of a cypher into
the system of Vowels also seen to be necessary (§ 1).—The cypher in
the system of consonants represented by (M) Aleph—And that in the
system of Vowels by ( ■• ) Shvah—The latter, by mere convention,
dispensed with at the end of a word terminating in one consonant—
But retained when the word ends in two Consonants (§ 2).— Shvah
quiescent, and Shvah moving (§ 3).—Exercise I.
a
 CONTENTS.

LETTER V.—Pages 17—24.

Headed by the Hebrew Alphabet in square as well as Rabbinic
characters—The letters have a dot in some manner inherent
in them—The letters Fl B 3 2) have a different sound when the dot
is taken out—The letters 3 and 1 have the same sound without the
dot as with it, the difference having been lost—The letters 2 Q 3 !3 3
take another form when they stand at the end of a word—The letters
grouped according to the Organs of Speech from which they proceed.
—Remarks on the several letters (§ 1—22).—Practice on the
Alphabet.
LETTER VI—Pages 25—31.
The five long and five short Vowels (§ 1— 10).—The mode
of spelling when they are attached (1) to N, (2) to a regular
Consonant (§ 11). —Long-Cherik and Short-Cherik (§ 12).—The
full, as well as deficient, form of Chowlem—The latter never to
be used when this Vowel is attached to the last letter of a word
(§ 13).— Shurik the only Vowel placed in the line—Also the only one
which may open a word without being attached to M (§ 14).—Short-
Kawmets and Long-Kawmets (§ 15).

LETTER VII.—Pages 32—35.

When a word ends in M preceded by a Consonant without a Vowel,
Shvah is given only to the Consonant, not to the M — Shvah
expressed in a final Caph when without a Vowel (§ !)•—
Shvah Moving is read with the Syllable following it — Shvah
Quiescent with the syllable preceding it (§ 2). — Chateph-Pathach,
Chateph- Segol, and Chateph-Kawmets—All such Compound Shvahs
are moving (§ 3).—P.S. Anomalous occurrence of Compound Shvahs
beneath other letters than those to which they belong.
LETTER VIII.—Pages 36—41.
Eighteen only of the twenty-two letters are regular Consonants(§l.)—
The four letters s 1 n H termed quiescents (§ 2).—M quiescent after any
vowel (§ 3).— H may be quiescent at the end, but not in the middle, of
a word— When not quiescent, though at the end of a word—Mappih
(§ 4).— Cases in which 1 is quiescent, and the contrary (§ 5).—Cases
in which 11 is quiescent, and the contrary— When mute (§ 6).—Two
quiescent letters cannot follow each other in the midst of a word—
 CONTENTS.

Nor at the end of a word, except the second one be N (§ 7).— Simple
and Compound syllables (§ 8).—P.S. The Anomaly of H with a Simple
Shvah.
LETTER IX.—Pages 42—48.
Accents—(1) Mark the syllable to which the emphasis belongs—
Which must always be either the Ultimate or the Penultimate (§ 1)—
(2) They serve the purposes of Interpunctuation—Distinctive and
Conjunctive Accents (§ 2).—The two Pause Accents—These may
lengthen Short into Long Vowels, and Shvahs into Vowels —The
Vowel thus produced must have the Accent of the word (§ 3, 4).—
The Accent Segol always stands on the last letter of the word (§ 5).
—Five Accents of less distinctive power (§ 6— 10).—Two Con
junctive Accents (§ 11, 12).—Mahkiph (§ 13). — Metheg (§ 14).—
P.S. (a) The Accents used as Musical Notes.—P.S. (b) Accents
attached only to letters bearing Vowels.—P.S. (c) Gahya and other
spurious marks resembling Metheg.
LETTER X.—Pages 49—54.
A dot in a letter made use of for various purposes—
Mappik to be carefully distinguished from Mahkiph (§ 1).— Dagesh-
Lene—Afifects only Pronunciation, having nothing to do with Gram
mar—Never can stand after Moving Shvah ( § 2).—Is placed in any
of the letters n B 3 2 a at the beginning of a word, or when
opening a syllable in the midst of a word after Shvah quiescent. —
Dagesh-Forte—Always preceded by a Vowel—May stand in any
letter except UnnS —Doubles the letter in which it stands—Of
great importance in a Grammatical point of view (§ 3).—The
necessity of bearing in mind the great distinction between these two
kinds of Dagesh (§ 4).—The letter having Dagesh-Forte being
always doubled, the implied letter is supposed to stand before it with
a quiescent Shvah—And so to form one syllable with the vowel
preceding the Dagesh (§ 5).— A vowel followed by Dagesh (in one
word) forms, consequently, a compound syllable (§ 6).—The twenty-
two letters of the Alphabet exhibited in three classes according to
their nature with regard to Dagesh (§ 7).—P.S. Letters doubled by
Dagesh-Forte need not be pronounced as doubled.

LETTER XI.—Pages 55—58.

Dagesh-Lene not retained at the beginning of a word, when the
preceding word ends in a quiescent letter or a Long Vowel (§ 1).—
a 2
iv CONTENTS.

Except when the preceding word has a Distinctive Accent, for then
the Dagesh-Lene may stand (§ 2).—It may also stand if the preceding
word end in or in 1 or ^ when not quiescent (§ 3).—It cannot be
retained in the first letter of a word when a letter bearing Shvah is
prefixed (§ 4). —Dagesh-Forte (or, a Quiescent Shvah) should
properly come after a Short Vowel without an Accent, to
aid that Short Vowel in forming a syllable (§ 5),—Not re
quired when the Short Vowel has an Accent — And particu
larly if this Short Vowel is followed by another Short Vowel (§ 6).
—Cannot come after one of the quiescent letters (§ 7).—Nor after a
Long Vowel, unless that Vowel have an Accent (§ 8).—Nor after
Metheg (§ 9).—May come after a Long Vowel with an Accent (if not
followed by a quiescent letter)—May, but need not necessarily, since
an accented Long Vowel is often not followed by Dagesh—Especially
when it is followed by a Short Vowel— hVn perhaps the only excep
tion to the latter remark (§ 10). —P.S. A case, or two, in which the
Dagesh-Lene in the first letter of a word is not affected by a quiescent
letter terminating the preceding word.

LETTER XII.—Pages 59—64.

Shvah at the beginning of a word, of course, always moving—
Shvah, or two Shvahs, at the end of a word, of course, always qui
escent (§ 1). —Rules for determining when Shvah in the midst of a
word is moving (§ 2).—Of two Shvahs standing together in the midst
of a word, that to the right is quiescent, and the other moving (§ 3).—
Two Shvahs cannot stand together at the beginning of a word (§ 4).—
Rules for determining when Shvah in the midst of a word is quiescent
(§ 5).—Rules for distinguishing Short from Long Kawmets (§ 6).—
P.S. (a). Remarks on the words "'flttf, DVltf.—p.S. (b). Spurious
Meihegs.
LETTER XIII.—Pages 65—68.
A Vowel substituted for Shvah not looked upon as a real Vowel—
Cannot be followed by a quiescent Shvah (§ 1—3).—Called
nb|2 nyian a Slight Vowel (§ 4).—Cannot be followed by Dagesh
(§ 5).
LETTER XlV.-Pages 69—74.
The dot of the letter t2? sometimes performs two functions (§ 1, 2).—
Provided it be not immediately preceded by H quiescent (§ 3).—The
 CONTENTS. V

dot of *D likewise performs sometimes two functions (§ 4).—Provided

it has neither a Vowel nor Shvah attached to it (§ 5).—When *D lias
two dots (thus their natures must be determined by the position
of the letter in the word (§ 6).—Cases in which * must not be mis
taken for Full Chowlem (§ 7).—Cases in which 1 must not be mis
taken for Shurik (§ 8).—Pathach Furtivum under H and W (S 9).—
P.S. Also under 37.

LETTER XV.—Pages 75—84.

The commemoration of the Virtuous Woman [Prov. xxxi. 10—31],
with a literal English translation, given as a Reading Lesson at
the close of the Elementary Course—Also a free translation of the
same.

THE GEAMMAR.

FIRST COURSE.

LETTER XVI.—Pages 87—91.

The use of Prefixes and Affixes one chief cause of the conciseness
of The Language (§ 1).—Radical and Servile letters (§ 2).—Only
half of the letters of the Alphabet serve as the latter (§ 3).—The
Prefix n (with Pathach followed by Dagesh) used to represent the
Definite Article (§ 4).— Compensation for Dagesh (§ 5).— Generally
refused by <"l and n (§ 6).—The Vowel-point of this Prefix (H) is
sometimes Segol (§ 7, 8).—The n of Interrogation or Surprise
(§ 9—11).—P.S. (a). The Prefix representing the Definite Article
used sometimes as a Relative Pronoun.—P.S. (b). Sometimes as a
mark of the Vocative Case. — P.S. (c). An anomalous form in The
Bible noticed.—P.S. (d). Liberty sometimes taken with the Dagesh
that should follow the H of the Definite Article, when the letter that
should receive the Dagesh bears a Shvah.—P.S. (e). The Inter
rogative H receives in some cases Scgol, for the sake of Euphony.
vi CONTENTS.

LETTER XVII.—Pages 92—97.

The Conjunction 1 —Its natural Vowel-point (§ 2). —The changes
which this undergoes (§ 3—7).—The Prefixed Prepositions 3,3,
and b—Their natural punctuation, and the changes it undergoes
(§ 8). —The Prefixed Preposition —Its natural point, and the
changes it undergoes (§ 9).—The punctuation of the Prefixes
b 3 3 1 before Cn^St (§ 10).—Also before The Sacred Name *TjrP
(§ 11).—The contractions often made when the Prefixes v 3 3 come
before a Noun in the Definite State—This privilege denied to the
Prefixes 1 and » (§ 12).—The Preposition 1? (§ 13).— P.S. (a). Cases
in which the interrogative H is pointed as the Definite Article.—
P.S. (b). Cases in which the Conjunctive 1 takes Short-Cherik, or
Segol when placed before a Compound Shvah.—Exercise II.—
Exercise III.

LETTER XVIIL—Pages 98—106.

A Noun Indefinite declined in the Singular Number (§ 1).—
Genitive- Case wanting—The State of Construction (§ 2) Some
Nouns change their punctuation when put into the State of Con
struction—Others do not—The latter can only be known to be in
Construction by the context (§ 3).—A Noun in the State of Con
struction cannot have the Definite Article—Which may, however,
be prefixed to the word with which that Noun is construed (§ 4).—
Two, or more, Nouns in the State of Construction may follow each
other (§ 5).—A Noun in the Definite State may take the Particle
■TlS (a mere mark) before the Accusative Case—A Definite Noun
declined in the Singular Number (§ 6).— Hebrew has only two
Genders, Masculine and Feminine—The latter taking, for the most
part, the Affix H preceded by Long-Kawmets—Especially when
derived from the Masculine—This Affix sometimes does not cause a
change in the Vowel-points—And sometimes does (§ 8).— Some Femi
nine Nouns without any distinguishing mark (§ 9). —Proper names, and
functions, of men are Masculine—And those of women, Feminine—
Abstract Nouns ending in H preceded by Long-Kawmets are likewise
Feminine (§ 10).—The Gender ofother Abstract Nouns rather doubtful
—A remark of Aben Ezra on this matter—In assigning a Gender to
such Nouns, in Composition, ihemost common usage of Scripture should
be followed (§ 11).—Hebrew has Three Numbers, Singular, Dual,
 CONTENTS.

and Plural—Mark of the Plural for the Masculine is O preceded \tjLong-

Cherik—This Affix, in some instances, does not change the punctua
tion of the Noun, and in others does (§ 12).—Nouns terminating
in quiescent H drop it on receiving this mark (§ 13).—The mark of
the Feminine Plural is fi preceded by Chowlem—This also, in some
instances, leaves the punctuation unchanged, and in others alters
it (§ 14). — The Dual applied to things double, whether by nature
or by art—Its mark is &\ preceded by Pathach (in Pause, Long-
Kawmets)—Things double by nature can, but those double by art
cannot be used in the Singular (§ 15). —Neither of these can be used
in the Plural—Which we find supplied by the Dual (§ 16).—Some
Nouns admit of both Plural and Dual (§ 17).—The Dual form
sometimes applied to Nouns not having a double sense (§ 18).—Some
Nouns can only be used in the Singular, and others only in the Plural
Number (§ 19).—Some Masculine Nouns take the Feminine, and
some Feminine Nouns the Masculine form of the Plural (§ 20).—
Some Nouns may be used with the Masculine, as well as with
the Feminine form of the Plural (§ 21).—P.S. (a). The full Particle
^ sometimes used for the Prefix * .—P.S. (b). The Definite Article
sometimes anomalously prefixed to a Noun in the State of Construction.
—P.S. (c). f on dropping its Accent, becomes "fiy—This Particle
sometimes anomalously placed before the Accusatives of undefined
Nouns.—P.S. (d). The Plural form, Cribs, used for GOD.

LETTER XIX.—Pages 107—122.

The Affix n preceded by Long-Kawmets nearly synonymous with
the Prefix ?—Sometimes does not, and sometimes does affect the
Punctuation (§ 1).—May be used with a Noun in the Definite State
—Also with a Noun in the State of Construction (§ 2).—H Paragogic
—Sometimes does not, and sometimes does affect the Punctuation
(§ 3).—The letters D , 11 , 1 , 3 , 2 , H affixed to words to express
Possessive Pronouns.—Declension of the Noun "Wp a song (§ 4).—
Declension of the Noun ITVlPl a law (§ 5).—Declension of a
Masculine Noun taking the Feminine form of the Plural (§ 6).—
Declension of a Feminine Noun not terminating in H quiescent (§ 7).
—The Dual of Nouns declined exactly like the Plural Masculine
(§ 8).—Declension of a Noun terminating in a Furtive Pathach (§ £))•
—Declension of a Noun terminating in quiescent n preceded by
 viii CONTENTS.

Segol (§ 10).—A Noun with a Possessive Affix cannot take the

Definite Article—But may be declined with the Prefixes D b 3 3—
And may also take the Particle in the Accusative Case (§ 11).—
Proper Names cannot take the Definite Article—Nor can they take
Possessive Affixes—Are very fond of the Particle riN before their
Accusative Case (§ 12).—Nouns terminating in a quiescent H
preceded by Kawmets generally change the n into and the
Kawmets into Pathach, when put in Construction (§ 13).—Some
Nouns, however, of this description change the H into fi and the
Kawmets into Segol, when in Construction (§ 14).— Such Nouns, on
taking Possessive Affixes, derive their forms from the Constructive
State (§ 15).—The termination of the Constructive State of the
Plural Masculine, as well as that of the Dual of Nouns, is quiescent s
preceded by Tsayre (§ 16).—The Plural Feminine termination of
Nouns remains unchanged in Construction—Although in some
instances the punctuation may be otherwise disturbed (§ 17).—
Some Nouns, when put in Construction,—or when taking the Plural
form, or the Affixes,—change their appearance altogether— Some
general rules respecting such changes (§ 18).—Declension of the Noun
"Q'J a word (§ 19). —Declension of the Noun a king (§ 20).—
Declension of the Irregular Noun 2N a father—Declension of the
Irregular Noun HN a brother—Declension of the Irregular Noun
H3 a daughter—Declension of the Irregular Noun OPN a man—
Declension of the Irregular Noun nt£S a woman — Declension of the
Irregular Noun a mouth (§ 21).—Five rules respecting the
changes of the punctuation of Nouns in their inflections (§ 22). —
Prepositions declined with Possessive Affixes—Declension of the
Preposition 05 with—Declension of the Preposition f!M with—
Declension of the Preposition V? between—Declension of the Preposi
tion upon —Declension of the Preposition ?*J to (§ 23).—P.S. (a).
Plural of excellency.—P.S. (b). The distinction between the words
Bfatf., -12?, ttftj, DIN as applied to man—DSP3N (the Plural of
B7'IN j derived probably from tP?M.—p.S. (c). ntpS a woman, derived
from 2? uN, and not from t27,W.—P.S. (d). A few names of places
and rivers take the Definite Article.

LETTER XX.—Pages 123—130.

The Nature of the Hebrew Exercises (§ 1).—The plan adopted in
them—The Substantive Verb to be generally understood (not expressed)
 CONTENTS. ix

in Hebrew—The Hebrew Verb involves within itself the Person

referred to by it—The Verb precedes its Nominative Case in most
instances— Gen. i. 1 construed as an example—A mention of the
Personal Pronouns—Also of the Negative Particles and —
answering to the Latin nonne ?—And ^V) to neque.—
Exercise IV.—Exercise V.

LETTER XXL—Pages 131—138.

The functions of Hebrew Adjectives (§ 1).—They generally
follow the Noun—And agree with it in Gender and Number (§ 2).—
When the Noun qualified by the Adjective is Definite, the Adjective
also takes the Definite Article—Otherwise, the Substantive Verb is
understood before it (§ 3).—The Substantive Verb is understood
after the Adjective, when it precedes its Noun (§ 4).—The Feminine
termination Singular, and the Masculine as well as Feminine termina
tions Plural, the same for Adjectives as for Nouns— Gentilic names
(§ 5).—May receive the Definite Article (§ 6).—Two or more Adjec
tives qualifying a Noun are all placed after it (§ 7).—Hebrew Adjec
tives may be used as concrete in the Singular as well as Plural
Number (§ 8).—A Noun qualified sometimes by another Noun by
being put in Construction with the latter (§ 9).—The Prefix 3 used
to express likeness or similitude (§ 10).—The Prefix B used to express
superiority, or the Comparative Degree (§ 11).—The Particle IP
sometimes used for this purpose (§ 12).—The Prefix 3 used to
express the Superlative Degree (§ 13).—Precise similitude between
two Nouns expressed by prefixing 3 to each (§ 14).—P.S. (a).
Instances in which the Adjective has the Definite Article, while
the Noun, with which it agrees, is undefined.—P.S. (b). Instances in
which the Adjective has a Definite H, and the Noun a Possessive
Affix P.S. (c). The Particle i»3 used in Poetry for the Prefix 3 .
—Exercise VI.—Exercise VII.

LETTER XXII.—Pages 139—147.

Cardinal Numbers Masculine and Feminine, in their Absolute and
Constructive forms, from One to Ten inclusive—Contrary to what is
usually the case, the Masculine takes, and the Feminine drops,
the termination H (§ 1).—The force of Construct Numbers in
Hebrew can scarcely be expressed in English—The Absolute and
Constructive forms used almost indiscriminately in Scripture (§ 2).—
X CONTENTS.

The Cardinal Numbers, Masculine and Feminine, after Ten, to

Nineteen inclusive—The Feminine here recovers the n from the
Masculine (§ 3).— Cardinal Numbers after Nineteen, to Ninety
inclusive—The termination of the Plural Masculine used for the
several multiples of Ten (§ 4).—Cardinal Numbers from One
Hundred to Nine Hundred inclusive—The several multiples of the
number Hundred expressed by the Feminine Plural of HS!3 5).—
Cardinal Numbers from One Thousand to Ten Thousand inclusive—
The double, triple, quadruple, &c, of the number Thousand expressed
by the Plural Masculine of —But a myriad takes again
the Feminine form in the Plural (§ 6).—The Cardinal Numbers agree
with their Nouns in Gender, and are generally placed before them—
Excepting the Number TJS one, which is placed after its Noun—
When several articles are enumerated in a kind of list, the Cardinal
Numbers may elegantly be placed after them—After Numbers
from Two to Ten, the Noun must be in the Plural; but after
Numbers above Ten, in the Singular (§ 7).— Ordinal Numbers
Masculine and Feminine from First to Tenth inclusive —Three rules
respecting them (§ 8).—Ordinal Numbers above Ten are expressed
by the Cardinals—Which then generally are placed after the Noun,
and take the Definite Article (§ 9).—Ordinal Numbers sometimes
expressed by Cardinals followed by the Preposition v (§ 10).—
mft0$ expresses a decade— Sometimes stands for the Tenth day of the
month (§ 11).—Fractional Numbers (§ 12).—On the word ^3 all, the
whole, or every—With a Negative Particle, it stands for not any—
declined with Affixes (§ 13).—Vocabulary, by means of which
Gen. v. 4—21 may be construed.—P. S. (a). "fltlfr for
-ibs tn«.—p.s. (b). isn. and trni:n ._p.s. (c). "'sq half,
sometimes used in the Absolute.—P.S. (d). For the sake of
perspicuity, the Noun, to which the Numeral refers, is sometimes
repeated.

LETTER XXIII.—Pages 148—157.

Declension of the Personal Pronouns (§ 1).—A few remarks on
the distinction between 1^, &c, and *P^8, &c. (§ 2—4)
The former sometimes express respecting (§ 2).—Also, belonging-to
(§ 3).—Also, possession (§ 4).—The Accusatives of these Declensions
are formed from (the mark of the Accusative Case)—This mark,
in its Absolute State, has the same form as the Preposition riS—
 CONTENTS.

Though they differ in Declension (§ 5).—The Context only can deter

mine when ^HJ? signifies from us, and when—-from him (§ 6).—Such
expressions as *PB3 ""JlES (§ 7).—The Pronoun sometimes placed
Hfter the word serving as its Predicate (§ 8).—Exercise VIII.—
Exercise IX.

LETTER XXIV.—Pages 158-167.

The Relative Pronoun TWf who, or which —May refer to persons
as well as things in either Gender, and in either Number (§ 1).
— coupled with the Cases of the Personal Pronouns to express
its oblique Cases—The Accusative Case, however, of the Personal
Pronoun may be expressed, or not, indifferently (§ 2, 3).—The Case of
the Personal Pronoun sometimes elegantly separated from the Relative
(§ 4).— So also, when the Relative is coupled with a Preposition (§ 5).
— coupled with a Noun having a Possessive Affix to express whose
(§ 6).—""PS often elegantly omitted in Hebrew, as is frequently the
case with the English Relative—An Ellipsis employed to a far greater
extent in Hebrew than in English (§ 7).—The Relative "W^. some
times declined with prefixes (§ 8).—"'^^ ^S? corresponds to the
English whomsoever, whatsoever (§ 9).— followed by Dagesh often
used, as a Prefix, instead of the full form —In such cases,
Compensation generally not made for Dagesh (§ 10). —"l^N also
used as a Conjunction, signifying that, for, or because —The Context
only can distinguish this from the Relative Pronoun (§ 11).—"^tj,
as a Conjunction also, may receive Prefixes ($ 12).—The Prefix V?
followed by Dagesh used also for when a Conjunction (§ 13).—
P.S. (a). The Prefix B7, when used for the Conjunction some
times takes Pathach ; and, in one instance, Kawmets.— P.S. (b). The
Prefix £f> used for It?H? —And fa for .—P.S. (c). ^ used
for ^ "ittfy .—Exercise X.—Exercise XI.

LETTER XXV.—Pages 168—174.

The Demonstrative Pronouns (§ 1).—The Substantive Verb under
stood before them when they stand alone—But after them when
followed by a Noun (§ 2).—The Substantive Verb not understood
when the Demonstrative Pronoun follows the Noun—It then takes
the Definite Article (§ 3). —Demonstrative Pronouns declined with
Prefixes (§ 4).—The Feminine M^t used, when thing is understood
xii CONTENTS.

after the Pronoun (§ 5).—For pointing out distant Objects, the

Personal Pronouns of the Third Person, with the Definite Article,
are used (§ 6).—WT, NTl, &c., . . . followed by the mark of
the Definite Article (used as a Relative), express the English thl
same who, or the same which (§ 7).— These Pronouns also used to
express the English that is (§ 8).—P.S. (a). The Pronouns
njbn, ttbn, and tbn._p.s. (b). ntha, &c., for nrfta, &c.
—P.S. (c). bN for n^S._P.S. (d). W supposed by some, but
without sufficient reason, to have sometimes the force of a Eelative
Pronoun—HJ sometimes used as an Adverb.— Exercise XII.—
Exercise XIII.

LETTER XXVI.—Pages 175—179.

The Interrogative Pronouns ^ ,—and «"JJ3 , } n» ($ 1)
Declension of the Interrogative *0 (§ 2).—The mode of ex
pressing the English Whose? in Hebrew (§ 3).— The Particles
nS3, naa, n»3, nsb (§ 4).—nn used as an Adverb of
Exclamation (§ 5).—P.S. (a). Cases in which Hp and na are
respectively used.—P.S. (b). The form <,pba?2.—Exercise XIV. —
Exercise XV.

LETTER XXVIL—Pages 180—196.

The term btfQ used by Hebrew Grammarians to denote a Verb.—
N2V btfS to denote a Transitive, and TO'S btfQ to denote an
Intransitive Verb (§ 1).—The term b^Q also used as an emblem of
every word of three radical letters (§ 2).—The Third Person Singular
Masc. of the Past Tense considered in Hebrew as the Root of the
Verb (§ 3).—E"0\?2 <"t37^ti7 the term used by Hebrew Grammarians
to denote the seven ways in which a complete Transitive Verb may be
Conjugated (§ 4).—The terms b?B, b?Q3, bSB, b?B, b>?7Sn, bjJpn,
and bsSfpn, used to designate these Seven Voices—The names of
these Voices illustrated by means of figures (§ 5). —The Voices
Pi-al, Pu-al, Hithpd-Al have Dagesh in the second radical—The
Voice Paw-dl, distinguished from all the others by having no peculiar
mark or criterion, and hence termed b,l (§ 6).—P.S. More convenient
to take the Infinitive Mood for the root than the Past Tense, in
some verbs.—A complete Conjugation of the Verb to visit.
 CONTENTS. xiii

LETTER XXVIII.—Pages 197—208.

Verbs not used in Kal, having in the Niph. the sense of the Kal—
Others used in Kal and Aiph. with the same sense (§ 1).—The
Niph. used sometimes in a Reflective sense (§ 2).—The Pi. imparts
Intensity to the action expressed by the Verb—In some cases has an
entirely different signification from that of the Kal—In others, it has
the signification of the Kal, the Kal being not used (§ 3).—The
Hiph. loses its Causative sense in Verbs that have no Kal (§ 4).
—The Hithp., too, loses its Reflective sense where there is no Kal—
Is sometimes used to express feigning, pretending (§5).—The Con
structive Infinitive, assuming the nature of a Verbal Noun, may be put
in regimen with a Noun—May also be declined with Possessive Affixes
(§ 6).—Also with the Prefixes Q ' 3 2 —Also, both with these
Prefixes, and with the Affixes, at once (§ 7).—The Infin. Absol.
sometimes used for an Imperative (§ 8).—When coupled with a
Tense, it expresses Emphasis (§ 9).—No Imperative First and Third
Persons in Hebrew—The Future Tense used to express them (§ 10).
—No Negative Imperative in Hebrew—The Future Tense used with
a Negative Particle to supply it (§ 1 1).—Participles assume sometimes
the character of Nouns—And, as such, may be put in Construction
with a Noun (§ 12).—Hebrew has only Two Tenses, Past and Future
—The context deciding whether these are to be used in an Indicative
or in a Conditional sense (§ 13). —The peculiar shades likewise in the
sense of the Future easily determined by the Context (§ 14). —A
list of similar forms with different meanings, to be distinguished from
each other by the Context.—P.S. Three anomalous forms of the
Infinitive Niph.—Exercise XVI. —Exercise XVII.

LETTER XXIX.—Pages 209—227.

The Future very often used as a Frequentative (§ 1).—1 Conver-
sivum (§ 2).—When converting a Future into a Past, its punctuation
is Pathack followed by Dagesh— Or Kawmets when the Dagesh is
inadmissible (§ 3).—The letter 1 , when bearing Shvah, dispenses
with this Dagesh (§ 4).— 1, bearing Shvah, prefixed to a Future
Tense, is merely Conjunctive and by no means Conversive (§ 5).—
The punctuation of the 1 which converts a Past into a Future is
simply Shvah (6).—This 1 liable to the same changes of punctu
ation as the Conjunctive 1 (§ 7).—Each 1 Conversivum mentioned
xiv CONTENTS.

above has its full Conjunctive force (§ 8).—Remarks upon the

attempts that have been recently made to deny the existence of a
Future Tense and a 1 Conversivum (§ 9).— The Converted Past very
often used as a Frequentative, exactly as a Future Tense (§ 10).—
The Present Tense expressed in Hebrew by the Participle, as
sometimes in English (§ 11).—It requires the Personal Pronoun
when referring to the First or Second Person—But not when
referring to the Third (§ 12).—The Substantive Verb to be, generally
understood before the Participle—Sometimes in a Present Tense —
Sometimes in a Past Tense, as the Context may require (§ 13).—
Features common to all the Seven Voices (§ 14).—The Future formed
from the Imperative (§ 15).—The characteristic 3 of the Niph.
dropped when a letter is prefixed to form a Tense or a Mood—Its
place being supplied by Dagesh in the first radical letter of the Verb
(§ 16).—Compensation made for this Dagesh, when the first radical is
incapable of receiving it (§ 1 7).—The Voices Pi., Pu., Hithp. have
Dagesh in the second radical as their characteristic—Are therefore
called sometimes the Dageshed Voices—This Dagesh, too, must be
Compensated for when the second radical is incapable of receiving it
(§ 18).—The letters H and H frequently refuse to make the due Com
pensation for the Dagesh which they cannot receive (§ 19).—Peculiar
formations of the Hithp. when the first radical of the Verb is & , tP, D ;
or 2 ; or tS (§ 20).—P.S. (a). An instance in which the 1 convert
ing the Past into a Future takes Short- Cherik.—P.S. (b). Some
remarks of the Hebrew Grammarians to be discussed hereafter.—
P.S. (c). The n of the Hithp. dropped sometimes, and its place
supplied by Dagesh in the first radical, when that letter is ^ or fl .—
P.S. (d). Ben Zev's words on the letters VrOBHn to be taken in a
modified sense.—Exercise XVIII.—Exercise XIX.

LETTER XXX.—Pages 228—246.

Changes of Punctuation in Verbs (§ 1).—When the first radical is 37

(§ 2—5).—When thefirst radical is H ( § 6).—When thefirst radical is n
(§ 7).—Owing to Compensation forDagesh (§ 8).—When the secondradi
cal is one ofthe letters 37 n H N (§ 9).—When the third radical is H or
37 , it takes a Furtive Pathach in every instance in which it happens
to be preceded by any Long Vowel excepting Kawmets (§ 10).—When,
 CONTENTS. XV

in such instances, the second radical has Tsayre, this Vowel is some
times dropped, and the Furtive Pathach then takes its place (§ 11).—
In the Singular Fem. of the Present Participles, the two Segols
are changed into Pathachs, when the third radical is n or 37—The
first Shvah in the Second Person Sing. (/) Past Kal changed into
Pathach, when the third radical is n or 37 (§ 12).—When the third
radical is H with Mappih, it also receives a Furtive Pathach, when
(being at the end of the word) it is preceded by Tsayre, or Long-
Cherik (§ 1 3).—Paragogic n and Pacagogic 1 (§ 14— 16).—The
terminating n in the Second Person Plural Fern, of the Imperative,
and in the Second and Third Persons Plural of the Future, sometimes
dropped— Such forms called Apocopated (§ 17).—The Pause Accent
may produce changes in the punctuation—Rules respecting these
changes (§ 18).—Minutiae of Kal (§ 19-23).—The forms ^25 and
bsa (§ 19 ).—Declension of the Participle Prestnt Kal of the
form Q (§ 20).—Kibbuts very frequently, though unaccountably,
supplants Shurik (§ 21).—Intransitive Verbs have generally Pathach
instead of Chowlem for the Vowel of the second radical in the Second
Person Sing. Masc. of the Imperative Kal—Likewise in the Third
Person Sing. Masc, and the First Person Sing, of the Future (§ 22).
—Cases in which the third radical (when fl) is dropped (§ 23).—
Minutiae of Niph-al (§ 24) —Minutiae of Pi-al (§ 25).—Minutiae of
Pu-dl (§ 26).—Minutiae of Hiph-el (§ 27) Minutiae of Hoph-dl
(§ 28).— Minutiae of Hithpa-al (§ 29).—P.S. (a). Paragogic ) with
the Second Person Sing. Fem. of the Future, in a few instances.—
—P.S. (b). In the Infinitive Kal the second radical sometimes with
Pathach.—P.S. (c). In a very few instances the second radical takes
Long-Cherik in the Present Participle Kal.—P.S. (d). The first
radical sometimes takes Kawmets in the 2 Sing. Fem. of the Impera
tive Kal.—P.S. (e). Anomalous Paragogic letters.—Exercise XX.—
Exercise XXI.

LETTER XXXI.—Pages 247—254.

The Short- Cherik under1? 3 3f when prefixed to the Infinitive of
the Kal, is their natural Vowel, and not in the place of Shvah (§ 1).—
Verbs deviating from the Regular Conjugation of "fpS —When the
first radical is 3 —When the first radical is H —When the first radical
is 11 —When the second radical is 1 quiescent —When the third
radical is M —When the third radical is n quiescent—When the
xvi CONTENTS.
second and third radicals are the same (§ 2).—The terms Osa!?»_
D,npn_D,n3_D,'VlD3 (§ 3).— The terms 3"D — S"D_vej —
V3 — M"b —n"b— Geminata (§ 4).—Directions respecting the manner
in which the 1 Conversivum is to be used in the Exercises (§ 5).
—Exercise XXII.—Exercise XXIII.

LETTER XXXII.—Page 255—273.

The distinguishing feature of the Verbs 3"0—For which the Verb
12^33 is selected as a standard—It drops the first radical in every
instance where the first radical of the Regular Verb TpS bears Shvah—
Excepting the Second Persons Plural of the Past, and the Plurals of
the Past Participle Kal—Whenever the Verb has a prefixed letter,
the Dagesh in the second radical is Forte, indicating the elision of
the first radical *3 —The Verb deviates from th? in the Infin.
Constr., the Imperative, and Future, Kal—In the Past and Participle
Niph-al—The whole of Hiph-el—And the whole of Hoph-al—But
agrees with "ffrs in the Past, the Participle Present, and Participle Past
Kal.—The Infinitive, Imperative, and Future Niph- al—The whole of
Pi-al, Pu-al, and Hithpa-al (§ 1).—The Verbs VB3 , bh3 , SD3 (§ 2).—
-123 (§ 3).—The Verbs Y«? , Dhj , ph3, Vh3, D*3 , Fjta
preserve the 3 in the Future Kal (§ 4).—The Verb npb (§ 5).—The
Verb 1^3 (§ 6).— [The Future formed from the Imperative, and not
from the Infinitive Constructive as some modern G-rammarians will
have it].—The forms ntp? , nnp , H3^1 (§ 7)._P.S. Liberties some
times taken with Dagesh when it should stand in a letter bearing
Shvah—Conjugations of the Verbs to approach, Hpb to take,
"|J"I3 to give.—Exercise XXIV.

LETTER XXXIII.—Pages 274—286.

The Verbs N"D should by right undergo no further modifications
than those whose first radical is any other one of the guttural letters
—As is the case with most of them— Some few, however, undergo
further changes—Of such, the Verb to eat, selected as a standard
(§ i)._lb«l? for "ibS1? (§ 2).—The forms H>?N\ *»H\
(§ 3).—The Verbs *)bs, 3hW (§ 4).—Peculiarity of the Verb Ettte
(§ 5).—Compensation for Dagesh in the Niph-al of the Verbs N"Q
(§ 6).—P.S. (a). The Verbs nSS, nh«._p.S. (b). The anomalous
 CONTENTS.

forms tnhll, ni?h._P.S. (c). The anomalous forms TJV}, artNl ,

and 2HS._P.S. (d). The form thsn .—P.S. (e). The reason
assigned by Kimchi for the second radical of the Verb ^SN not taking
Chowlem in the Future Kal, as it does in the Imperative.—Conjuga
tion of the Verb *?bs to eat.—Also the Futures Kal of to gather,
and to love.—Exercise XXV.

LETTER XXXIV.—Pages 287—303.

The Verb afc^ selected as a standard for the Verbs V'B —In those
forms in which the first radical of "IpS has a Vowel, attT differs from
the Regular Conjugation only in the Niph-dl (§ I ).—In the Pi-al, Pu-al,
Hilhpa-dl, 207^ is Conjugated like "fp?—Excepting the Verbs S"P (
nS"1 , HT , which give respectively in Hithpa-dl JHVjin , nainn ,
TJVprt 2).—Changes which aWj undergoes in those forms in which
the first radical of "fpQ has Shvah not preceded by a servile (§ 3).—
Changes which at£7J undergoes in those forms of the Kal in which the
first radical of TpS has Shvah, and is preceded by a servile letter
(§ 4).—The first radical 1 changed in the Niph-al into 1 quiescent
after Chowlem given to the Servile (§ 5).—So in the Hiph-el (§ 6).—
In the Hoph-al the s is replaced by Shurik (§ 7).—Verbs of this
Conjugation having 37 or PI for their third radical (§ 8).—The Verbs
pb;, ab;($ 9).—The Verbs ttTV, tfo; (§ 10).—Verbs of the V'S
which have 2 for their second radical—The Verb nas—The forms
rati, rrn, nri (§ n)._p.s. (a). The forms nyib, rrn$,
rhbi, ntfa1;, afara.—p.s. (b). The forms an, ••an, nan—The
form nan used as an Interjection.—P.S. (c). The forms P§ and P^s. .
P.S. (d). I1? for njb ._Tpb for nwb .—P.S. (e). The Verb nV
—P.S. (f). The forms and a^. —P.S. (g). The anomalous
form asrUHT .—Conjugation of the Verb attP to sit.

LETTER XXXV. Pages 304—312.

The accent on the last syllable of all Future Tenses not having
affixes—In those of such forms which have only two Vowels, the
1 Conversivum draws back the accent to the Penultimate syllable
—Provided that the Vowel forming the Penultimate syllable be not
immediately followed by either Shvah or Dagesh Forte—On the accent
b
xviii CONTENTS.

being thus drawn back, the long Vowel ofthe ultimate syllable is changed
into a short one (§ 1).—The 1 Conversivum has not power to draw
back the accent over a Shvah (§ 2).—Or to make it come to stand
before Dagesh-Forte (§ 3).—Or before a guttural letter when
that letter ought to have a Dagesh-Forte if it could admit it
(§ 4).—The 1 Conversivum ceases to affect the accent when
separated from it by more than one vowel (§ 5).—Also when
the accent is a Pause-accent (§ 6).—The reason for having deferred
till now the mention of this drawing-back of the accent (§ 7).
— The form HPt1 for TO^T (§ 8).—^tpV for JNjJirP. (§ 9).
—The Proper Names V&rP and Wtt>2 stand for V^TT) — OTt# the
Name of the MESSIAH (§' 10).—The two words Safin blended
together to form the word Hosanna (§ 11).—P.S. (a). The 1 which
converts the Past Tense into a Future shifts the accent in some
instances from the Penultimate to the Ultimate syllable—But without
causing any change in the punctuation.—P.S. (b). The 1 Conversivum
does not draw back the accent when prefixed to the first Person Singular
of the Future.—Exercise XXVI.

LETTER XXXVI.—Pages 313-351.

The study of Hebrew not attended with such insuperable difficulties
as many' seem to imagine— The Verb Dip selected as a standard
for the Verbs V*J> f i.e,} whose second radical is 1 quiescent—Those
which have for their second radical 1 not quiescent are Conjugated
like "f^S (§ 1).—The Conjugation of Dip totally different from that of
"TpS —As in some instances it drops the second radical—In others
changes it from Shurik into full Chowlem—And again, in others,
makes of it a 11 quiescent after Cherik—In the Pi., Pu., and Hithp.
the third radical is doubled (§ 2).—The 3 Sing. Past Kal Dp dis
tinguished by the context only from Dp the Sing. Masc. Participle—
The 3 Sing. (f. ) Past npp^ distinguished from nttp the Sing. Fem.
Participle Present, by the position of the accent—The Sing . Fem. Partic.
Past <"ID/lp likewise distinguished by the position of the accent from
nclp the 2 Sing, (m.) Imperative with Paragogic n—2ttT sometimes
used for the more common form SltiP —The Past Tense of the Pu-al
differs from that of the Pi-al only in the 3 Sing, (m.)—The Future of
the Pu-al different from that of the Pi-al only in those forms in
which that one of the doubled letters which stands to the right has a
vowel—The Past Hiph. Conjugated in two ways—In the Hoph-dl
 CONTENTS. xix
the Verbs V'5 agree in every particular with the Verbs v'0 (§ 3).—
On receiving 1 Conversivum, D!|P^ becomes Oj7Jl (§ 4).—And E^jV
becomes DP.'l (§ 5).—In like manner 3127J becomes and
becomes (§ 6).—Owing to the third radical being n ,
and n\J^ both give l"I3*l—And in like manner, owing to the
third radical being "I , "WD^ and "Ftfa both give HJJJ (§ 7) The
Verb r>1a gives in the Past A'aZ the forms rip , nnp. , np , &c.
(§ 8)—The Verb ttfia gives in the Past JiTaf BfiS, ntt?i3, Wtp3 ,
&c.—In the Future the 1 fP N receive Tsayre : as ttMa^ , ttJian f
&c. (§ 9)—Doubtful Verbs—Those classed by some among the
YV TD, and by others denominated v'2> TO (§ 10).—Those of
which it is uncertain whether they belong to a Voice called or
whether their root is quadriliteral.—Kimchi himself seems to have
entertained doubts upon this head (§ 11).—Verbs forming, according
to some, a Voice termed bD^Bfin, but, according to Ben Zev, to
be termed rather (§ 12).—A list of some Verbs whose
second radical is 1 not quiescent—These have for the most part either
their first or their third radical a Guttural letter—Verbs whose second
radical is s not quiescent (§ 13).—P.S. (a). The accent not affected
by a ^ Conversivum prefixed to the First Person Sing, of the Future.
—P.S. (b). A reason for preferring the Infinitive to the Past Tense
for the root of the Verb.—P.S. (c). The Sing. Fem. Partic. Past Kal
•TP/lp distinguished from nfflj? , the 2 Sing. Masc. Imper. with H
Paragogic, by the position of the accent— the 2 Sing. Masc.
Imper. Kal with H Paragogic, similarly distinguished from the Noun
nya .—P.S. (d). Uncertainty whether the forms nin3 , rria? are
Infinitives Kal or Constructive forms of the Noun njp .—P.S. (e).
Distinction as to signification between the forms 5H.D or Vyi ,
YQorVV, tc,-8nd?nn, Tl), &c—P.S. (f). Verbs decidedly
Quadriliteral.—Conjugation of the Verb tMp to rise.—Also some
forms of niB and »i3 .—Exercise XXVII.

LETTER XXXVII.—Pages 352—380.

Kawmets the legitimate point for the ' of D 3 3 when prefixed
to the Infinitive Kal of the Verbs Y'V—Which tends to corroborate
a remark of Ben Zev mentioned in a former Letter (§ 1).—The Verb
selected as a standard for the Verbs (§ 2).—Chief features
of this Conjugation (§ 3).—The Conjugation of compared with
b 2
XX CONTENTS.

that of "»|7Q —The forms and HS?ia (§ 4). _ Important

difference between corresponding forms of ip9 and (§ 5).—
Some Verbs of this Conjugation of the form (§ 6).—Present
Participle Kal of the Verb N»2_Present Participle Kal of the Verb
WW (§ 7).—The forms Drfba, n*$3tp (§ 8).—P.S. (a). Another
convincing proof that the Future is formed from the Imperative and
not from the Infinitive Constructive.—P.S. (b). The form riN'lp
spelt by Kimchi more regularly in his Michlol than it is in Van der
Hoogh.es Edition of The Hebrew Bible.—P.S. (c). The form N£iD
(with Segol) admitted by some Editors of the Hebrew Bible, and
rejected by others.—Conjugation of the Verb ^2Jp to find.—
Exercise XXVIII.

LETTER XXXVIII.—Pages 381—414.

rtba selected as a standard of the Verbs H"1?—Verbs whose third
radical is n having Mappik do not belong to this Conjugation, but
agree with the Regular Verbs (§ 1).—Chief features of the Verbs
of which the third radical is n quiescent (§ 2).—The Third Person
Plu. Past Kal of the Verbs f"b distinguished from the corresponding
form of the Verbs Y'JJ by the position of the accent—The forms
!Qttf and 'Qtp quoted as examples—The n of nba radical, but that of
n?a the Feminine termination (§ 3).— nb?3 the Third Person Sing.
(»».) Past Niph. and n1??? the Sing, (f.) Participle, though similar in
appearance, are different in their Grammar (§ 4.)—The Future Hiph-el
of this Conjugation distinguished from that of the Kal only by the
Punctuation of the letters ]fVN —A distinction which is lost in Verbs
whose first radical is one of those gutturals which take Chateph-
Pathach (§ 5).'—P.S. (a). Ben Zev's view of the form
Seems to have been entertained also by Kimchi—And, if adopted,
should be extended to the Infinitives Constructive.—P.S. (b). Ben
Zev's opinion just mentioned supported by the form fltpyi [Levit.
xxv. 21].—P.S. (c). The anomalous form fib?? for nban Infin.
Absol. Niph.—P.S. (d). The forms rOJ) , rtWV, rrtn .—P.S. (e).
The form "ba for nba , and for nhl?L_Letters of the same
Organ of speech sometimes interchange—The letters O and 3 are also
sometimes interchanged.—Conjugation of the Verb riba to reveal.
Also some forms of the Verbs nsn t n^n , nhttf f and ni*"i .
 CONTENTS. XXI

LETTER XXXIX.—Pages 415—430.

Some more instances of the changes of the letters vlnN—The
form n;pn__The form n»3i2_The forms and |V$r£—The
forms nin and nin (§ 1).—The Present Participle Kal of n^n
formed in quite a peculiar manner (§ 2).—The Verb nntP inserts,
throughout the Hithpa-al, a "I after the second radical—This 1 in every
instance heard in pronunciation (§ 3).—The influence of the 1 which
converts the Future into a Past on the Verbs H"b—The H struck
out, and the Punctuation in general completely disturbed by it—
™?1 made ngfc made (§ 4).— TVffi. made Vtip. (§ 5).
—The forms "10*1 and "WTJ3 (§ 6).—The Punctuation the same for the
Futures of the Kal and Hiph-el in this Conjugation, when the first
radical is <"I or £—In forms such as the context alone can
determine to which of these Voices it belongs (§ 7).—The letters
1 n s S take in some instances Tsayre when the 1 Conversivum is
prefixed (§ 8).—The disturbance in the Punctuation caused by the 1
Conversivum more remarkable in the case of the Verbs H^n and
rPn_The forms and VgJ, V^} and TJ*J (§ 9).—The influence
of this 1 on the Verb H^T still more remarkable—'"'j!H,. made —
Which latter is also the form of the Hiph-el— made M"101 —
made —The form is found unaltered, giving
nSH3] 10).—The third radical H similarly dropped in the Future
of the jV«/>A. on its taking 1 Conversivum—""^"J? made M"T!3 , and
ns-j« made N"JN!J—The Hiph. of nVn expresses the English to
show ; its Hoph., the English to be shown ; and its Niph., the English
to appear (§ 11).—The Dagesh of the second radical of a Future
Pi-dl to be taken out whenever the third radical is dropped through
the influence of the 1 Conversivum (§ 12).—The same applies to the
Hithpa-al (§ 13).—Two cases in which the 1, inserted in the I/ithp.
of nnttf after the second radical, is made quiescent through the power
of the 1 which converts the Future into the Past—All this surely
proves that this 1 performs some higher function than that merely of a
Conjunction (§ 14).—The Apocopated forms of the Imperatives Pi-dl
and Hithpa-al—Require also the Dagesh to be taken out from the
second radical (§ 1 5).—In those cases in which the Future must be
used as an Imperative, the third radical H is in general dropped.—
The ] n ^ H in such cases sometimes take Tsar/re.—The Negative
Imperative is apocopated by the Negative Particle only, and never
by rfb.—The absurdity of attempting to set down as Present Tenses
xxii CONTENTS.

Futures used as Imperatives (§ 16).—Peculiar form of the Future of

Verbs H"b having for their second radical one of the letters
213 pi lriC (§ 17).—P.S. (a). The anomalous forms and
Wirn._P.S. (b). Maran-atha («ny I"??).—Exercise XXIX."

LETTER XL.—Pages 431—459.

selected as a standard for the Verbs designated D^Bj)
Geminata (§ 1).—The chief features of this Conjugation (§ 2).—
Some Verbs of the Geminata follow the Regular Verb "IpS—Others
follow, in some instances, the Conjugation of "TpB , and, in other
instances, that of —The Standard Verb itself in some
instances Conjugated regularly like "Ipf , and in others both regu
larly and irregularly at the same time (§ 3).—How far a parallel may
be drawn between the Conjugations of and "IpS—Some few
rules for the Punctuation of the second radical in forms disagreeing
with the corresponding forms of tp3 (§ 4).—Ben Zev's remark as to
when the Participle Present Kal of the Geminata has the form proper
to this Conjugation—The 3 Sing, (/.) Past Kal and the Sing. (/!)
Participle distinguished in this Conjugation only by the position of
the accent—The forms DBn, pian (§ 5).—The forms n2D3,
sivto—The forms DB3 , nap? (§ 6).—The Futures Kal and Hiph. of
the Geminata affected by the 1 Conversivum in exactly the same way
as those of the Verbs in these same two Voices—The unac
countable form (§ 7).—The Infinitive, the 3 Sing, (m.) Past,
and 3 Sing, (m.) Fut. of the Hoph-al of this Verb have respectively the
same Punctuation as those of the Verbs V'B andT'E (§ 8).—The Pi-al,
Pu-al, and Hithpa-al of the Geminata have, in appearance, the same
forms as the corresponding Voices of the Verbs 1"S (§ 9, 10).—But
are widely different from them in point of Grammar (§ 11).—
Ambiguities respecting the root, which arise from this similarity of
appearance (§ 12).—The Verb pi (§ 13).—The Verb V?n_
n;--lVpn Hallelujah (§ 14).—The Verb V?p (§ 15).—The Conju
gation of the Verb 23D to encompass.

LETTER XLL—Pages 460—469.

An extraordinary Class of Geminata (§ 1).—A rule on Dagesh
given by Rabbi Elijah Ba-chur in rhyme (§ 2).—This Class of
 CONTENTS. xxiii

Geminata, contrary to all rules of Grammar, supply in the Future

Kal the omission of the second radical by Dagesh placed in the first
radical—An anomaly which induced the father of Rabbi David
Kimchi to class these Verbs among the 3"2—Rabbi David's own
suggestion respecting the form Ofaril—Seems not borne out by
comparing the forms and 1S.IIP (§ 3).—The same remarks apply
to the forms oVl , *S?. , and Wf, (§ 4).— TO Wil and
Em rniaijl TO (§ 5.)—The form "Ift"! and the various opinions
upon it (§ 6).—The forms Wfcjp* and ^T? (§ 7).—P.S. (a). The
forms "in and .—P.S. (b). The form «?W , and the variety of
opinions upon it.—P.S. (c). The anomalous forms TJ??^ , n?P?1 •—
P. S. (d). Mendelssohn's opinion on the anomalous form ^l??^ .—
P.S. (e).—Another instance in which it is more convenient to take
the Infinitive Kal than the Past for the root of the Verb.—
Exercise XXX.

LETTER XLII.—Pages 470—496.

Verbs Doubly Irregular—Seven Classes in which they may be
arranged—Class I. 3"D and TS , 3"D and «"V , and 3"S and n"b —
—Class II. «*B and VS, «"0 and M"b , and «"0 and H"b _
Class IIL V'S and H"V, and V'S and H»b —Class TV. YV and N"1?—
Class V. 3"3 and ntyD? ( Geminata)—Class VI. N"B and db-IC?
(Geminata)—Class VII. v'0 and D^D? (Geminata) (§ 1).—These
Seven Classes detailed in order (§ 2—8).—The Verb H13 , which
may be said to be 3*0, YS , and N"b all at once (§ 9).—The Defective
Verbs and (§ 10 and 11).—Exercise XXXI.

LETTER XLIII.—Pages 497—519.

The letters D s 1 3 3 n used to express Objective as well as
Possessive Pronominal Affixes (§ 1).—A view of the form "lf<? with its
Objective Affixes—Which are Ten in number (§ 2).—The Second
Persons ean admit of only Six Affixes (§ 3).—The First Persons
admit of only Eight (§ 4).—The only Voices admitting Objective
Affixes are the Kal, Pi-al, and Hiph-el (§ 5).—And these only in
the case of Transitive Verbs (§ 6).—Cases where the first radical has
a Vowel in which its punctuation is, or is not, affected by the addition
of Affixes (§7).—Cases where the first radical has (*) Shvah quiescent,
xxiv CONTENTS.
(b) Shvah moving (§ 8).—Cases in which the Punctuation of the
second radical is, or is not, affected by the addition of affixes (§ 9).—
The various modes of linking the Objective Affixes with the Verb
(§ 10).—Cases in which the Punctuation of the Prefixes ) fi M of
the Kal and Hiph-el, and that of the H and H of the latter Voice is
permanent, or disturbed, respectively (§ 11 and 12) — Kawmets
sometimes given to the second radical in place of Shvah for the sake
of Euphony (§ 13).—Forms taken by the Imperative Kal when the
third or second radical is guttural (§ 14).—A distinction that should
be observed between the forms ^IP!^ and ''JTPB? , and between those .
of TPBj and TJO^ in the declension of the Infinitive Kal (§ 15).—
Ben Zev's proof that the Participles are capable of receiving, not
merely Possessive, but also Objective Affixes (§ 16).—The distinction
that should be made between the forms npfc and '•JipW in the
declension of the Participle (§ 17).—The Feminine Participle in the
Singular receives Affixes only under the form fT1|?B (§ 18).—Forms
which, though differing from each other in the simple state, assume
the same appearance on receiving Affixes (§ 19).—P.S. (a). Intransi
tive Verbs anomalously found sometimes with Objective Affixes.—
P.S. (b). The forms n^H, *Jtf"lN( and nM>.—P.S. (c). The
form "OW:??1? for ^l-PS1? .—P.S. (d). The forms IBB? and iottrnin .
—P.S. (e). The form in^D4!*) ._RS. (f). The forms ^N^P'! and
.—Tables of Objective Affixes.

LETTER XLIV.—Pages 520—531.

A remark or two in passing 1).—The Impersonal Verbs
and V$—Declined with Pronominal Affixes—The Verb then ceases
to be Impersonal—Difficulty of assigning to these Affixes a proper
denomination—Which the Hebrew Grammarians refrain from doing
—Not so the Modern Philosophical Grammarians—A sentiment from
the Talmud (§ 2).—P.S. (a). Instances in which the Verbs Hfc and
Tfc? cease to be Impersonal, even without an Affix.—P.S. (b). An
instance where uipj stands for ©1 .■—Exercise XXXII.—Psalm lxvii.
—Psalm cxxi.—lumbers vi. 24—26.—Exercise XXXIII.

LETTER XLV.—Pages 532—568.

Particles—Those which take Singular Affixes—Those which take
Plural Affixes—Those which take no Affixes (§ 1).—Adverbs formed
 CONTENTS. XXV

from Nouns (§ 2). — Nouns used as Adverbs — The Adverbs

Dian and nV?n (§ 3).—The Adverbs nann and "ino ($ 4) —
The Pronoun "W^t sometimes used Adverbially, and sometimes as
a Conjunction (§ 5).—The Verbs , f)DJ , ^TH used sometimes
Adverbially, when coupled with another Verb (§ 6).—Jarchii
observation on <"l$ip ,N 7) Applied by Ben Zev to na^N—
May likewise be applied to HS^M—Strictures on what has been
said of late respecting the Particles *iTO , nawp , and "^"W (§ 8, 9).
Ben Zev's remark on the lattter Particle (§10, 11).—List of Particles.
—Exercises XXXIV—LX inclusive.
END OF VOLUME I.

VOLUME II.

THE GRAMMAR.—SECOND COURSE.

LETTER XLVL—Pages 1—12.

The plan pursued in the Syntax (§ 1).—The letter H prefixed
even to Verbs, when it represents the Relative Pronoun—In which
capacity it may be prefixed to a Verb having an Objective Affix
(§ 2).—When marking the Vocative Case, it may be prefixed to
words in the State of Construction (§ 3).—The Context the only
means of discerning whether the Prefix H represents the Definite
Article, or whether it marks the Vocative Case—Instanced in the
Third and Fifth Verses of the Hundred-and-Fourteenth Psalm (§ 4).
—nbst&n n and niSTin n (§ 5).—The mode of expressing two
Consecutive Questions (§ 6).—The Prefix or Particle expressing
Interrogation sometimes ■ omitted in the second question (§ 7).—
As it sometimes is also, when there is but one question (§ 8).—
The Particle 0*?n (§ 9).—Observations on the position of the
Interrogative H in the sentence (§ 10).—In a few instances used
for rf'n (§ 11).—The Negative rf^rj used sometimes to give
emphasis to a Positive assertion, or to a command (§ 12).—Some
of the peculiar uses of the Prefix 1 (§ 13).—Some of the peculiar
uses of the Prefix 2 (§ 14),—A seeming contradiction in PmT'
 xxvi CONTENTS.

xxvi. 4 and 5, avoided by attention being paid to two distinct

uses of the Prefix 3 (§ 15).—Some distinct significations of the
Prefix ' (§ 16).—To be observed also when this Prefix is declined
(§ 17).—The same remarks applicable to the Preposition (§ 18).—
The Prefix ? not unfrequently used to mark merely the Objective
Case—So also sometimes the Preposition vl§ (§ 19).—The Poetical
forms "lES t iD? , "lD^—The latter to be carefully distinguished from
fob (§ 20).—The Prefix 13 used sometimes in a Negative sense,
before Verbs as well as before Nouns (§ 21).—The same Prefix used
sometimes in a Partitive sense (§ 22).—Sometimes in a Causative
sense ($ 23) The Particles riN» and D?E (§ 24).—Exercise LXI.

LETTER XLVII.—Pages 13—26.

Various modifications of sense expressed by the State of Con
struction (§ 1).—Some other Preposition than of sometimes required
in its English rendering (§ 2).—The Constructive State sometimes
anomalously used for the Absolute 3).—And the Converse (§ 4).—
Two or more words in the State of Construction may follow each
other (§ 5).—TIN, the mark of the Accusative Case, may precede
a Noun defined otherwise than by the Definite Article (§ 6).—
The same mark sometimes placed before the Subject of a Passive
Verb (§ 7).—Sometimes placed before a Noun merely to make it
Absolute (§ 8).—A Noun more commonly known to be used in
an Absolute sense by being followed by a Pronominal Affix referring
to it—Though sometimes merely by the Context (§ 9).—Some
remarks on the Gender of Abstract Nouns (§ 10).—The Synonymous
Nouns PHS and njTT?, ph and nj?n (§ H).—Collective Nouns
(§ 12).—On the Verbs agreeing with them (§ 13).—Nouns of
Multitude, and the Verbs agreeing with them (§ 14).—Ambiguity
involved in the Possessive Pronominal Affixes (§ 15).—Paragogic 1
and *7 (§ 16).—The use of for vW, and vice versa (§ 17).
—The Negative Prohibitive rather, and Deprecative—The
latter may, but the former may not, produce Apocopation in Verbs
of the n"b (§ 18).—P. S. (a). A suggestion on the difficult
Construction of VnN B^M [Gen. ix. 5].—P.S. (b). Repetition
of nM before several consecutive Accusative Cases.—P.S. (c). Ben
Zev's judicious remark on the Subject referred to in the first
Thirteen Verses of Lament, iii.—P.S. (d). Paragogic s affixed even
to a word having a Pronominal Affix.—P.S. (e). Some Nouns used in
both the Masculine and Feminine Gender.—Exercise LXII.
 C0NTENT8. xxvii

LETTER XLVin.—Pages 27—47.

Adjectives in general follow their Noun—But the Adjective D?p
precedes its Noun—Except in a few instances—The Adjective 3"} ,
too, sometimes precedes its Noun ($ 1).—The 3 expressing the
comparison of one object with another, sometimes omitted—An
omission which adds force to the sentence (§ 2).—The Adjective
sometimes omitted in the Comparative Degree, to produce greater
effect (§ 3).—A few instances of remarkable Ellipses (though
not exactly of the same nature) quoted from Ps. cxviii. 7,
Ps. xciL 12, Ps. vi. 4, Ps. cxxxvii. 5 (§ 4).—Pleonasms used
sometimes by way of elegance (§ 5).—Supcrlativeness may be
expressed: I. By iW, i«P 1NZ2 "fKaa • U. By repetition
of a word ; III. By coupling a word with one of the Attributes
of The Deity ; IV. By certain numbers ; V. By coupling together a
Verb and a Noun of kindred root and signification; VI. By putting
a Noun in Construction with the same Noun in the Plural Number or
in the Dual (§ 6).—Repetition of words employed to give the idea of
exclusiveness (§ 7).—The mode of expressing two similar ideas,
of which the one is employed to illustrate the other (§ 8).—Ellipsis
sometimes employed in such cases (§ 9).—Examples of Ellipses
generally (§ 10—15).—The Substantive Verb in the Present Tense
always understood, not expressed— Sometimes expressed, when in
the Past Tense, but more frequently omitted—The Tense and
Number of it can then be known only by the Context—The
Infinitive Mood also of this Verb sometimes understood, not ex
pressed (§ 10).—Words and Prefixes occurring in the first hemistich
of a verse frequently understood, not expressed, in the second
(§ 11).—Sometimes, though not so frequently, Words and Prefixes
occurring in the second hemistich understood, not expressed, in the
first (§ 12).—Instances of Ellipsis in which a word or prefix not occur
ring in any part of the sentence must be altogether supplied (§ 13).—
The Relative Pronoun "'{P*? very frequently, and sometimes also
Dtp omitted (§ 14).—A Personal Pronoun sometimes omitted—
Also Possessive Pronominal Affixes—Also Objective Pronouns and
Affixes (§ 15).—A Pronoun sometimes repeated to produce Emphasis
(§ 16).—Pronouns sometimes used in an Absolute sense (§ 17).—A
Pronoun sometimes, for the sake of Emphasis, placed quite at the end of
the sentence (§ 18).—Pronouns sometimes used Pleonastically (§ 19).—
The Verbs *T?n , "|V , and sometimes coupled with a Personal
xxviii CONTENTS.

Pronoun to produce a Reflective sense (§ 20).—The Noun t£7?3 with

Possessive Pronominal Affixes assumes sometimes a Reflective sense
(§ 21).—A Noun sometimes used where a Pronoun would suffice (§ 22).
—The Conjunction ^3 sometimes used for the Relative Pronoun
(§ 23).—The Demonstrative Pronoun «TJ used sometimes in a
peculiarly elliptical manner (§ 24).—The same Pronoun sometimes
used in the sense of Such (§ 25).—A remark on the use of nrft
(§ 26).—>t? sometimes used for n» (§ 27).—P.S. (a). The repetition
of a word sometimes used to express pain or woe.—P.S. (b). The use
of WT and DH 0r Hiarj to express the Substantive Verb.—P.S. (c).
for .—P.S. (d). Phrases formed by HD coupled with a Dative.
—[P.S. (e). ft* used Pleonastically after n» and nfib._p.S. (f).
The mark of the Dual appended sometimes to Feminine Plural
Nouns— Sometimes used with a number to express so many fold.*~\
—Exercise LXIII.
LETTER XLIX.—Pages 48—63.
The Verb generally precedes its Nominative Case—Excepting
when Emphasis is laid on the latter (§ 1).—This is particularly
the case in the midst of a sentence—A word considered to be in
the midst of the sentence when it merely has 1 prefixed (§ 2).—
A remark on the necessity of paying attention to the relative
position of the Verb and its Nominative Case—Illustrated by
an example from Gen. i. 2 — Mendelssohn's remark on
nwpri Di;n n^n rabpn [i Kings xx. 18] (§ 3)—A
remark of Ben Zev on this subject (§ 4).—Three rules respecting
the position of a Nominative Case that has two Verbs (§ 5).—
When the Verb follows the Nominative Case it must agree with
the same in Gender and Number (§ 6).—A Singular Verb referring
to a Plural Noun preceding it, refers to each of the individuals
expressed by the Plural Noun (§ 7).—The Verb, when preceding the
Nominative Case, may, but need not, agree with it in Gender and
Number (§ 8).—Rules for the agreement of a Verb referring to two
Nominative Cases, the one Masculine, and the other Feminine (§ 9).
—Whenever a Personal Pronoun is coupled with either a Tense
of a Verb, or with the Imperative Mood, it marks great stress upon
the Person (§ 10).—Which is not the case with the Participle—
With it the Pronoun must be twice expressed to produce Emphasis on
the Person (§ 11) —The Third Person of a Tense sometimes used
* For these two Postscripts, see Addenda.
 CONTENTS. xxix

Impersonally (§ 12).—Which is particularly the case with the

Verb fPn to be (§ 13).—A Transitive Verb usually precedes its
Accusative Case—Except when stress is laid upon the latter—Or
when several Accusatives are mentioned as treated each in a different
manner (§ 14).—A Transitive or Causative Verb may govern two
Accusative Cases (§ 15).—When the Nominative Case to a Verb
is a Noun in the State of Construction, the Verb should agree
with the Antecedent (§ 16).—An Infinitive Mood, or a whole
sentence, may form the Subject of which something is predicated
17).—Some Verbs seem formed to coincide in appearance and
sound with the Nouns with which they are coupled—Others formed
from Nouns to express, some the making or producing, and some the
removing or destroying, of the object represented by the Noun (§ 18).
—The difference of signification of the Verb ION when construed
with and when construed with 3 —Likewise of the Verb
when construed with HH, and when construed with 3 (§ 19).—
P.S. (a). Remarks on an anomalous agreement in Exod. xxi. 4.—
P.S. (b). Some remarks on the Verbs mn, and 3t5* ; and on
the expressions ^7 , and s7 ">?? .—Exercise LXIV.

LETTER L.—Pages 64—74.

A Verb that is found in all the three Voices, Kal, Pi-al, and
Hiph-el, has generally a distinct, and sometimes even a different
meaning in each (§ 1).—If the Pi-al has not altogether a distinct
sense from that of the Kal, it then expresses Intensity (§ 2).—
The Pi-dl has, in a few instances, a Causative sense (§ 3).—
The Hiph-el used sometimes in the sense of declaring or pro
nouncing (§ 4).—The Hiph-el coupled sometimes with an Infi
nitive Mood to qualify the action expressed by the latter (§ 5).
—The Hithpa-dl sometimes used to express the manner of one's
behaving himself (§ 6).—Sometimes also used in a Mutual sense
(§ 7).—The Niph-dl used sometimes in a Hithpa-dl sense, and
vice versa (§ 8).—A peculiar use of the Hithpa-dl of the Verb
"Of, as pointed out by Mendelssohn (§ 9).—Some remarks on
the Constructive Infinitive (§ 10).—The Infinitive Absolute used
sometimes for an Imperative—An instance in which the Infinitive
Constructive is also so used ($11 )•—The Infinitive used sometimes
for a Past Tense (§ 12).—A Tense sometimes used for an .Infinitive
Mood (§ 13).—The Infinitive that is coupled with a Tense to give
XXX CONTENTS.

Emphasis ought to precede the Tense, and be in the same Voice with
it—Instances in which this rule is not observed (§ 14).—Remarks
on the position of the Negative Particle, when used with an Infinitive
that is coupled with a Tense (§ 15).—An Infinitive coupled sometimes
with an Imperative to express Emphasis (§ 16).—The Participle,
in its Verbal capacity, may govern an Accusative Case ; and again, as
a Noun, may be put in Construction (§ 17).—The advantage of
carefully observing this distinction in the uses of the Participle
illustrated from Ps. cxxx. (§ 18).—P.S. (a). The Past Participle used
sometimes in Construction.—P.S. (b). Paragogic H changed into H.
—Exercise LXV.

LETTER LI.—Pages 75—87.

Retrospective view of the Tenses—That the want of the Con
ditional and Subjunctive Mood, as well as of Auxiliary Verbs, is not
felt in Hebrew illustrated by additional examples (§ 1).—A quotation
from Ben Zev respecting the Future being used in a Frequentative
sense—This use illustrated by additional examples (§ 2).—Further
examples of the Converted Past being used as a Frequentative—A
remark of Jarchi on this head (§ 3).—A Future Tense preceded by
W then, converted sometimes by it into a Past (§ 4).—Additional
examples of the Present Tense being expressed by the Participle
(§ 5).—The Past Tense of the Verb ?V frequently used in a Present
signification (§ 6).—An observation of Rabbi David Kimchi upon the
1 which converts the Past into a Future—Modified and restricted by
another Rabbi, but not sufficiently (§ 7).—The language of Prophets
and Poets not fettered by a strict attention to the proper use of the
Tenses—A quotation from Ben Zee on thi3 subject.—Examples in
illustration (§ 8).—P.S. (a). The Future Tense not always affected
by the Particle W preceding it, in Prophetic and Poetical language.—
P.S. (b). The Persons also, as well as the Tenses, are often disre
garded in Poetry—A quotation on this subject from Wolfsohn and
BriVs Commentary on Cantic. i. 2.—Exercise LXVI.

LETTER LII.—Pages 88—107.

The impracticability of applying to The Hebrew Bible certain new
Theories respecting the Tenses—Shown by reference to the published
Works of the Originator of those Theories (§ 1).—His translation of
 CONTENTS. xxxi

Gen. i. 3, 4, and 5—Reason forbids to give an Imperative force to a

Present Tense (§ 2).—According to these Theories there could be no
Imperative First or Third Person (§ 3).—Neither could there be any
Negative Imperative—Consequently we should lose the Ten Com
mandments (§ 4).—His assertions respecting the force given to Verbs
by Apocopation involve the learned Author in contradictions (§ 5).—
His translation of Isaiah ix. 5 (§ 6).—The unwarranted powers given
to 1 Paragogic and Epenthetic 3 , likewise involve the learned Author
in Contradictions—His translation of Exod. xxiii. 10, 11 (§ 7).—His
strange translation of Gen. xii. 2 (§ 8).—The blessing of a father
turned by this distinguished Author into a most terrible curse (§ 9).
—P.S. (a). On the nature of an Imperative Mood.—P.S. (b). Onkelos'
Chaldee version of the word •—Exercise LXVII.

LETTER LIII.—Pages 108—120.

Kimchi and Aben Ezra quoted, but not translated, by the Originator
of the New Theories, with a view to the support of those Theories—The
translation here supplied after the quotation and translation of a few
lines that immediately precede that passage—The passage, quoted by
the Originator of the new Theories in support of those Theories, proved
to be utterly opposed to them (§ 1).—A remark or two on this learned
Author (§ 2).—A passage from KimchVs Comment on Psalm iii. 5
quoted and translated, in which the force of the 1 which converts a
Future Tense into a Past is most plainly asserted (§ 3).—Another
passage quoted and translated, from KimchVs Michlol, in which this
1 is stated and proved to have a stillfurther Converting power (§ 4).
—P.S. The celebrated Author of the W Vlbsa fully agrees with
Kimchi with regard to this further Conversive power of the 1.—
Exercise LXVIII.

LETTER LIV.—Pages 121—136.

The 1 that converts the Past Tense into a Future, how viewed by
the Originator of the new Theory—His actual translation ofpassages
in a manner at variance with his own Theory—The Laws of the
Tenses should be derived from the Narrative Language of The Bible
(§ 1).—This part of Scripture rather avoided than otherwise by the
Learned Originator of the new Theories- -His unaccountable translation
xxxii CONTENTS.

of Gen. xxviii. 20, 21 (§ 2).—The denial of the 1 which converts the

Past Tense into a Future, more inconsistent than that of the 1 which
converts the Future into a Past (§ 3).—Some few quotations from The
Book of Ruth (§ 4).—The only means of accountingfor the modern
error of denying that the 1 converts the Past into a Future—A very
important quotation from a valuable MS. Grammar to be found in
the Bodleian Library, Oxford (§ 5).—P.S. Mendelssohn's translation
of, and Jarchts remark on, Gen. xxiii. 13. —Exeroise LXLX.

LETTER LV.—Pages 137—152.

A quotation from an eminent modern Grammarian—In which
he endeavours to reduce the question of a 1 Conversivum to a
mere matter of Idiom— Some strictures on this attempt (§ 1).—
Some remarks on [Prov. iii. 12]—Distinction between the Future,
when used in its Frequentative sense, and the Present Participle
when used as a Present Tense (§ 2).—Distinction between the
Future, when used in its Frequentative sense referring to a time past,
and the simple Past Tense—A quotation from Sril on [Ps. xlii. 5]
(§ 3).—The unreasonableness of denying the existence of a Future
Tense in Hebrew, because there occur a few Futures which may
appear to have an import not properly belonging to that Tense—The
existence of the Past Tense, or the use of Genders, might as well be
denied—Examples in which both the latter are used anomalously
(§ 4).—The injurious consequences resulting from the denial of the
Future Tense to one of the most vital doctrines of the Old Testament
Revelation—Its grievous effects also on the import of the All Sacred
Name TXp] (§ 5).—Exercise LXX.

LETTER LVL—Pages 153—172.

The Objective Personal Pronouns sometimes Pleonastically ex
pressed (§ 1).—And sometimes entirely omitted (§ 2).—An Objective
Affix sometimes used, where properly a Pronoun governed by r
Preposition would be required (§ 3).—Additional remarks on tt£ am
(§ 4).—The form in pause — T1!? erroneously suppose<
by some to be the Constructive form of (§ 5).—Distinctio;
between T£ and & — sometimes used for ^ (§ 6).'—rhr
construed with ? signifies, in some instances, having or possessing
 CONTENTS. xxxiii

(§ 7).—The rpn sometimes understood, but not expressed, before

the b (§ 8).—Cases in which rib may stand before any Part of
Speech (§ 9).—Another signification of HV! when construed
with '—This b sometimes understood, not expressed, after
the Tri (§ 10).—Additional examples of Nouns used Adverbially
(§ 11).—rS ...r?, and b...r» (§ 12).—"a?1? and (J 13).
—Phrases formed by the Verb 212?—By the Verb 'nbn (§ 14).
—The Imperatives of and 21T used sometimes as Interjections
(§ 15).—Transposition of words and sentences sometimes necessary
(§ 16).—Examples of Metonymy (§ 17).—Parenthesis (§ 18).—
Inverted Commas—And Dialogues (§ 19).—The importance of
supplying Inverted Commas shown by [Ps. xxvii. 8]—Also by
The Judgment of Solomon (§ 20).—P.S. On reading Hebrew
without Points.— pja ^ , A Moral Fable.

LETTER LVn.—Pages 173—211.

The Poetry of The Hebrew BIBLE (§ 1).—The distinction to
be made between Poetry in Verse, and Poetry not in Verse— Where
the former is especially to be looked for—Simple Sublimity its most
distinguishing feature (§ 2).—Binary, Ternary, Quaternary, and
Mixed Verse—JTOW mbaa TWrt nV>D3—IBS irwi VOZD -ft&TO
—Two words connected by Mahkiph generally (though not always)
counted as one (§ 3).—Poetical License—Conjunctions, and Historical
Expressions, generally omitted (§ 4).—Examples of Binary Verse—
Examples of Ternary Verse—Examples of Quaternary Verse—
Examples of Mixed Verse (§ 5).—An incomplete Member sometimes
completed by borrowing a word from another Member (§ 6).—A
word, or expression (occurring Historically) sometimes not counted
($ 7).—Repetition of Members to heighten the effect (§ 8).—The
Interweaving of Members with each other (§ 9).—Play upon words
(§ 10).—Lamech's ecstatic speech to his wives, and other scattered
instances of Verse in Narrative parts (§ 11—13).—Alphabe
tical Arrangement (§ 14).—Refinements introduced into the later
Poetry of the Hebrews—The term VP—A Hymn from the
Hebrew Liturgy arranged in the Metre Wl HUTl frV
—Another Hymn from the same Liturgy, arranged in
n"tn im JTB7 l/Vl n"t» (§ 15).—The more Modern Poets
• n"*>i is the Abbreviation used by Ben Zev for rtown <mh.
C
xxxiv CONTENTS.

far more attentive to the strictest rules of Grammar than those

Ancients—Specimens of Wessley's Poetry, arranged in the Metre
b^bai rraisn a"\ and b^ybiai msian vr> (§ 16).—A Couplet on
Mendelssohn—The most Eminent Hebrew Poets of the present day
—An Epigram by Rabbi Solomon Ben G'veril (§ 17).—P.S. A
short Poem by Aben Ezra.

LETTER LVIIL—Pages 212—263.

Nouns (§ 1).—The Formula bSS made use of to express the

Types of the several Classes of Simple Nouns—By attaching to
it the Vowels of the several Classes, as bsB, b?B , by3, &c. (§ 2).
—The forms V>3, VlS, &c. ; TOB, PTOS, &c. (§ 3).—The forms
nb*B, nb?s, &c. (§ 4).—The forms bspy , bsop , Vysn, &c. ;
nbsB, &c. ; nbySW, nbjJBfi,' &c. (§ 5).—The forms
bsp , bwa , n?a , &c. (§ 6).—The forms bsp , b$-p , byin , nb?
(§ 7).—The forms bs, and nbs (§ 8).—The forms »B, &c. ;
^a, ftoB (§ 9).—The forms bb, &c. ; nbe>, nbsp, nbaj-i
($ 10).—The importance of tracing Nouns to their proper forms
(§ 11)-
Additional Remarks on the Accents.—Two divisions of the
subject—(1) The position of the Accent relatively to the syllables of
a word^—(2) General remarks upon all the Accents, and the Order of
their Consecution.
Eighteen Principal Rules for the position of the Accent relatively
to the syllables of a word (§ 12).—Position of the Accent in the case of
the Personal Pronouns Absolute and Inflected (§ 13).—The Accent
on the Prepositions with Affixes (§ 14).—That on nby (§ 15).—
Position of the Accent in the case of Verbs without Pronominal
Affixes (§ 16).—Importance of attending to the position of the
Accents exemplified (§ 17).—O-BSBn SYVp >5BB THIN 2103 (§ 18).
—Cases in which this does not take place (§ 19).—The Accent,
in a very few instances, Antepenultimate (§ 20).— Two Accents
on one word (§ 21).—Distinctive Accents (E^btjjiQ), Conjunctive
Accents ( HNTfltpp )—The former subdivided into the four classes
D^DR, B'oba, Ov?k\ t^Ti??—Table of Accents—Accents
termed sometimes ■Hw'1?? and D^psp—The Accents irregular in
the n "B "N T!BP—Aben Ezra's injunction to construe Scripture
according to the Accents (§ 22).—The great principle that regulates
 CONTENTS. XXXV

the Interpunctuation of The Hebrew Bible—Exemplified in the two

opening verses of Genesis (§ 23).—Remarks and Rules with regard
to the Accentuation of passages (§ 24).—b??" N3Hi n?"7? , An
Epigram.—Table of Declensions of Nouns and Concrete Adjectives.

LETTER LIX.—Pages 264—292.

The Commemoration of The Virtuous Woman [Prov. xxxi.
10—31], arranged in its Metrical Order.—Notes Critical and
Exegetical.—Analysis.—Lines from Herder translated into Hebrew
Verse.—List of Hebrew Grammatical Terms.

LETTER LX.—Pages 293—349.

A Hebrew Prayer in English Verse.—
Fountains of Salvation [Isai., ch. lii., vers. 13—15, and ch. liii.,
arranged in Metrical Order].—A Literal Translation.—Notes Critical
and Exegetical.—A Free English Translation.—Analysis.

Paradigms of Verbs Page 351 to 367.

Supplement to Paradigms » 368 „ 371.
nwsan Key to the Exercises „ 375 „ 426.
Addenda ....••••» 427 „ 429.
Index of Texts referred to, or explained in this
Work » 430.
Corrigenda.
 \* At the end of the Second Volume will be found Addenda to
the following passages :—
Letter. Page. Vol.
v. 18 i.
xvii. § 8 93 i.
xxiv. 165 * i.
xlviii. 46 ii.
Supplement to ) ^ „
the Paradigms J
* Line 2 of Exercise.
 The Authors cannot too warmly express their acknow
ledgments to the Rev. Richard Shawcross for his extreme
kindness in Reviewing all the Proofsheets in order with
the greatest care, and for the many very judicious and
highly important suggestions with which he has from time to
time favoured them.
They beg also to acknowledge their obligations to the
Rev. E. B. Whyley, M.A., of Trinity College, Cambridge,
Crosse's University Theological Scholar,—who, having
done them the honour of accepting a Copy of the Work
before Publication, has perused it with the most diligent
care, and has not only pointed out several Errata which
could only have been detected by one well practised in
Hebrew Composition, but has also kindly supplied the
Work with the Index of Texts therein referred to or
explained. Whatever benefit, therefore, the Student may
derive from this Index, it is to the Rev. E. B. Whyley
alone that his thanks will be due.
 *#* Critics are respectfully requested to defer their
judgment of the Translation of Proverbs xxxi. 10—81,
given in Letter xv., until the Notes in Letter lix. have
been consulted.
 THE ELEMENTS

OF THE

HEBEEW LANGUAGE.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER I.

My Ladt Duchess,
Your Grace has done me the honour to intimate to
me your desire of making yourself acquainted with the
Original Language of the Old Testament, and, at the
same time, to express a wish that I should introduce
you to the same by a series of Letters written on the
subject.
" Although I have,"—(your Grace will, I trust, pardon
an old man if, to his satisfaction and his great joy, he
takes the liberty of transcribing your own words) —
" Although I have many domestic duties to discharge,
" yet I never can, nor ever will, forget that the
" first of all my duties is that of a Christian : I was
" a Christian before any of my present duties devolved
" upon me, and I am convinced that the faithful
"discharge of that one and most sacred of all duties
" must needs involve the faithful discharge of all
" others. As a Christian, I conceive it my chief obli-
" gation to use my best efforts daily and hourly to
" strengthen myself in the love and faith of that Saviour
B
2 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

" in Whom my sole hope of salvation rests : Him, in the

" fifty-third chapter of Isaiah—that groundwork of
" Christianity—I see dying in agony on the cross to
" expiate my sins and to do away my offences. That in
" this chapter I see His crucifixion I am as fully con-
" vinced as I am of my own existence while reading it ;
" but yet, while I read it only in a translation, it seems
" to me that I behold His crucifixion as I should the sun
" through a mist ; and this mist, I must confess, rather
" thickens than otherwise the more the translations in
" which I read it, for scarcely two of them have I found
" to agree on all points. To be able, therefore, to read
" that chapter in the original Hebrew is what my heart
" and my soul long for. If you think that such an
" undertaking is not altogether beyond the reach of
" woman, and if you will be good enough to impart to
" me a knowledge of the Language sufficient for that
" purpose by means of Letters— as you have since leaving
" us, at the suggestion of Mrs. N , at that time my
" governess, imparted to us both a knowledge of German
" —I shall owe you eternal thanks, and shall have to
" bless the day on which I make this application."
Such, my Lady, are your words : words that deserve
to be published in golden letters, as a proof that Religior
and Piety are by no means incompatible with youth anc
rank—yea, high rank—nor undervalued by one fron
whom not one of the favours has been withholden whicl
the Muses and the Graces have to bestow.
If to words such as these I did not respond with that
readiness and promptitude which profound respect would
command, and eagerness to serve would suggest, it was
not, rest assured, my Lady, from any such doubts and
scruples as you, in your modesty, seem to entertain ; it
 LETTER I.

was not, I mean, owing to any apprehension on ray part

that the object your Grace is seeking is unattainable by
a lady : on this point I should have thought that your
Grace's favourite German Author would have completely
reassured you, when he tells you that Woman was intended
to be the masterpiece of creation, and that, with the sole
exception of physical strength, everything is better in *
your sex than in the other.*
So Lessing tells your Grace in plain and unequivocal
language ; but he who has the honour of having taught
your Grace first Latin and French vivd voce, and then
German by means of Letters, can tell you something
which Lessing has not told you, and this is, that, as far
as phraseology and syntax are concerned, Hebrew must
be to an English learner far more easy than either the
Latin or French language ; and as to the mere read
ing and pronunciation, the rules are infinitely fewer
and more simple in Hebrew than they are in French,
and, it may be, even than they are in German. If,
therefore, your Grace's teacher has for a few days de
murred accepting the honourable trust which you have
condescended to repose in him, it is entirely because he
is diffident of his being able fully to justify such confi
dence: your Grace will not forget that when he was
instructing you in the other languages, he was already
an old man ; but now he is a very old man, and fast
approaching those years which have by the Royal Bard
been assigned as the ordinary limit of human existence,
years certainly not well suited to a task of this

* " Ich hab' es immer gesagt : Das Weib wollte die Natur zu ihrem
Meisterstiicke machen. Aber sie vergriff sich im Thone ; sie nahm
ihn zu fein. Sonst ist alles besser an euch, als an uns."—Edoardo
Gahtti.
B 2
4 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nature: and if, notwithstanding such well-grounded

misgivings, he still has made up his mind to offer
to your Grace his humble services, it is because
he trusts to the grace and mercy of Him—for
the love and glory of Whom your Grace is about to
undertake a study so sacred and, at the same time,
so sublime—that while He will reward you for your
religious zeal, by pouring out upon you all the blessings
this life can afford, He will also not forsake in his old age
Trim whom your Grace has chosen to be your guide
to conduct and bring you to the object of your aim.
With this hope I shall in my next Letter have the
honour to submit to your Grace an outline of the plan
which I mean to pursue ; and meanwhile,

I have the honour to remain,

My Lady Duchess,
Your Grace's obedient, humble servant,

Plownee Almownee.
 LETTER IT. 5

LETTER 11.

The plan, on which it is my intention to proceed, is the

following :—
First, while going through the extent of grammar,
not to introduce any new theories, but to proceed along
the old beaten path trodden by almost all celebrated
Hebrew Grammarians, —men who wrote Hebrew as
fluently as your Grace would write English, and, there
fore, wrote their grammars in such Hebrew as must
convince every one who is able to read and understand
them, and who can appreciate their authors' skill and
unbounded power over the Language, that these are the
men to whom we must look for a knowledge of Hebrew :
indeed, they may justly be considered the legislators, so
to speak, of the Language ; and, as far as grammar is
concerned, we cannot in reading and construing the
Scriptures have better guides than they are ; and it is
therefore their words, and only their words, that your
Grace must expect me to lay before you; my only
endeavour being to render their words as perspicuous as
the subject will admit, and to make the stepping-stones
as even, and the gradations as easy, as I possibly
can :—
Secondly, to accompany the Rules of Grammar with
easy Exercises to be translated both from Hebrew into
English, and from English into Hebrew ; as I deem it an
utter impossibility for any one to master the Language
without trying to write it. With reference to these, it
will of course be my care to furnish your Grace from
6 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

time to time with my own translations of them, in order

to enable you, when necessary, to correct your own :—
Thirdly, to give first the Rules of Grammar on a
broad and comprehensive scale ; not at once entering
into all the details and minutiae, but preferring rather to
return to the same subject in another, or, if necessary, in
more than another Letter. Where, however, the excep
tions to the rules and the modifications of them may
happen to be of such a nature as not to admit of delay,
they will be added to the Letter in the shape of Post
scripts: —
Fourthly, so to arrange the Letters and the Exercises
pertaining to them, that no one of them should require
more than an hour and a half of your Grace's valuable
time to do justice to it.
Even when we shall have gone through an extent of
grammar sufficient for the purpose, it will, in my humble
opinion, be still premature for your Grace to attempt at
once to construe a prophecy so sublime as the fifty-third
chapter of Isaiah ; it will, therefore, be advisable first to
go through a less difficult piece, and for this purpose I
intend selecting that part of the last chapter of the book
of Proverbs, in which the royal sage commemorates the
Virtuous Woman : of this I shall give a literal transla
tion, with notes critical and explanatory.
Your Grace will see your own image reflected in this
commemoration.
I shall, after this, have the honour to send your Grace
a literal translation of the fifty-third chapter of the
Prophet Isaiah, accompanied by notes grammatical,
philological, and exegetical: by means of which your
Grace will, I hope, so clearly and so distinctly behold
that wondrous scene of your Saviour hanging and
 LETTER II. 7

dying on the cross, as to be convinced that those, who

do not so behold Him, must be as completely blind as
those who see not the sun in his noonday radiancy.
Should your Grace approve of this plan, I shall then
have the happiness of proceeding to carry it out to the
best of my ability. Meanwhile,
I have the honour to remain, &c.
8 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTEB III.

Your Grace having kindly condescended to approve of

the plan sketched out by me, I shall now begin by
calling your attention to the differences which, in the
system of writing, exist between Hebrew and the
European languages, and which are two :—
First, instead of being written from left to right,
Hebrew is written from right to left; and, secondly,
instead of using for vowels letters written in the same
line with the consonants, Hebrew has for its vowels not
letters but certain marks, commonly designated by the
name of points, which consist of small lines and dots,
and are ten in number ; one only of which is put in the
line, and again, one only above the line in which the
consonants are, and all the others below that line.
Now, all this your Grace probably knows already, and
I might, perhaps, have therefore spared you the trouble
of reading what has been hitherto written ; but what
your Grace has, in all probability, never tried to do,
and which I would now beg of you to attempt, is, to
assimilate the mode of writing any of the European
languages to that adopted in Hebrew. As long as your
Grace had nothing to do with Hebrew, to attempt
anything of this nature would have been to trifle away
time in a manner neither useful nor amusing; but I can
boldly assure your Grace that it will now be of the
highest importance, since, as a teacher of long expe
rience, I know that the chief difficulty which beginners
in Hebrew have to encounter, is to read a language that
 LETTER III. 9

is written on a system so entirely different from that of the

languages to which they are accustomed ; a familiarity,
therefore, with the writing and reading of any of those
languages after this system must needs remove nine-
tenths of the difficulty. I see no reason to employ for
this purpose any other language than your Grace's own.
2. If, therefore, we try to write English after the
manner in which Hebrew is written, we shall have,
in the first place, to invert in every word the order of
the consonants ; and next to write the vowels and
diphthongs above and below the line of consonants,
with the exception of only one, which will be written in
the line : and, in order to make the assimilation as near
as possible, I would propose that u should be the vowel
written in the line, ow the diphthong written above the
line, and that all the other vowels as well as diphthongs
should be written under the line ; but, in doing so, we
must quite forget that vowels or diphthongs, be they
what they may, are letters, but we must instead con
sider them as mere marks, every one of them cor
responding to the sound usually assigned to it ; and for
this very reason—namely, because we shall not consider
them as letters, but as marks—there will be no occasion
to invert the order of the vowels forming the several
diphthongs; so that, e.g., ea, ei, eo, ow, &c, will be
written in their usual way and preserve their usual
sound.
Supposing, then, your Grace to have no objection to
all this, you will perceive that the words
wo
; tf ; lc ; th ; puc ; tp ; th ; np
ee ea o a a
would correspond to the words
; feet ; cowl ; heat ; cup ; pot ; hat ; pen
10 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

and that the sentence drL ht b dsslB,

o e e e e
would correspond to Blessed be the Lord.

And again, that thgL b rht tL

i e ee e
would correspond to Let there be Light.

3. So far so good, and hitherto all has gone on smoothly ;

but as in the hurry of writing it must be an utter
impossibility always to place the vowel precisely under
the consonant to which it belongs, there would, when
ever it should happen to stand a little too much on one
side, arise great ambiguity as to whether the vowel is to
be read before or after the consonant, e.g., in the word
n if the o should stand a little too much to the right of
o
the n, we should not know whether it was meant to be
read before the n, when the word would be on, or after
the n, when the word would be no. In like manner in
the word t , should the diphthong ea happen to stand
ea
rather to the right of the t, doubt would arise as to
whether the word was meant for eat or tea. To remove
such ambiguities, therefore, it would be absolutely
necessary to introduce some mark (a small cross thus +
suppose) which, in the system of the consonants, should
serve as a sort of cypher to denote that the vowel, above
which this mark stands, is not to be preceded by any
consonant in the same syllable, but that it is to open a
syllable, when it may of course have one or even two
consonants after it, but by no means one before it. I
beg again to observe that a mark like this might justly
be called a cypher n the system of consonants, for
exactly as a cypher in arithmetic does, according to the
place it occupies, tell us that there are no units, tens,
 LETTER III. 11

hundreds, &c, so would this mark tell us that there is

no consonant to precede in the same syllable the vowel
or diphthong which stands beneath it.
Thus would n + always be read on, and n be
e o
always read no, however much to the right the o might
stand.
Again, t + would always be read eat, whereas t would
ea t ea
always be read tea, however much the diphthong might
stand to the right. In one word, such a mark being
once introduced, we should know that any vowel or
diphthong, when it has not that mark above it, must
needs be preceded by a consonant in the same syllable ;
but, on the contrary, when it has that mark above it, it
must open a syllable, and on no account have a conso
nant before it in the same syllable, though it may have
one or two after it.*
Requesting permission to continue this subject in my
next, I have the honour to remain, &c.

* English words, consisting of only one vowel, would, of course,

then be represented by a cross in the line, and the vowel under it,
e.g., the pronoun 2", would be written + ; the indefinite article a would
be represented by + ; the interjection 0! would be represented by + ;
a O
as in all these instances the cross would plainly tell us that there
is only a vowel to be pronounced without a consonant either before or
after it.
12 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER IV.

In my last I flatter myself that I have shown your Grace

with sufficient clearness that should we attempt to write
English after the manner adopted in Hebrew, a mark
which should serve as a sort of cypher in the system
of consonants would be indispensable, if we wished to
avoid ambiguities. I hope that I shall also succeed in
proving now to your Grace in as satisfactory a manner
that another mark, which should serve as a sort of
cypher in the system of vowels, would be equally neces
sary, and that for the same reason, namely, because it
cannot be supposed possible, in the hurry of writing,
always to place the vowels so precisely under the con
sonants to which they may belong, as would be necessary
in order to avoid all doubt as to whether they are to be
read before or after the consonants: e.g., if we were to
write—
nr b
B
we should not know whether the word should be read
barn or bran : again, in the word
drb
ea
we should be at a loss to know whether beard was
meant or bread: in the word
drb
oa
there would be doubt whether board or broad should be
read. A mark, therefore (suppose an asterisk), which
would serve as a sort of cypher in the system of vowels
—that is, which would tell us that any consonant,
 LETTER IV. 13

beneath which it should be placed, should have no

vowel after it, but be united either to the preceding or
the following syllable—would remove all doubt on the
subject ; inasmuch as we then should know that every
consonant must have either a vowel, or this asterisk to
show that the consonant has no vowel. (In Hebrew,
however, four letters, termed quiescents, will have to be
excepted, of which mention will be made hereafter.)
Thus, the words above mentioned, however irregularly
written, would be sure to be read as intended by
the writer ; for the word written
n r b \
• *a J
must needs be read barn, but if written (
n r b (
• a* I
it must be read bran. )
Again,—
drb \
• *ea |
must be meant for beard ; but I
drb [
» ea*
for bread. )
Lastly,—
drb \
• *oa I
must be read board ; but f
drb (
• oa* 1
must be read broad. J
2. To render the assimilation of the two language?
still nearer and closer, I would beg leave to change the
shape of these two cyphers, and to introduce the mark K
instead of the cross, and to denominate it Aleph, this
being its shape and name in Hebrew ; and two dots in
14 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

the same vertical line, thus ( : ) instead of the asterisk,

and to call it Shvah, also because this is its shape and
name in that Language.
In like manner, I would beg to be allowed to dispense
with the Shvah at the end of words terminating in one
consonant, but to preserve it when the word ends in two
consonants, precisely as is done in Hebrew; which, of
course, is a mere convention, just as Algebraists, when
they use letters to denote quantities, have agreed to
write a, b, c, x, y, z, instead of la, lb, lc, &c.
3. Taking it for granted that your Grace will not
object to the changes thus proposed, which, though
immaterial in themselves, tend to render the assimilation
more complete, I would beg you to try to read the
word
rtfX (after)
e: a
Your Grace will perceive that this word, if divided
in syllables, would be read thus : —
rt-.fS (af.-ter)
b : a
the Shvah under the letter f would here be said to be a
Shvah Quiescent, because we rest ourselves after it before
we pronounce the second syllable ; but the word
t s r b X (abreast)
: : ea : a
if divided in syllables would be written
t s r b - - K (a- - breast)
: : ea : a
and, in this instance, the Shvah under the b would be
said to be a Moving Shvah, because we cannot stop
at the consonant beneath which it stands, but must move
on by uniting it to the succeeding syllable.
To quote a few more instances, the Shvah in each of
the words
 LETTER IV. 15

tprc (carpet), rtrm (mortar), rtsm (master)

e : a a : o e : a
is quiescent ; but that in each of the words
r m s b (besmear), h t r t b (betroth), k p s b (bespeak)
ea : e o : e M : e
moving.
These two kinds of Shvahs are by modern Grammarians
denoted by the names Shvah Final and S/ivah Initial ;
but I shall, by your Grace's permission, continue to call
them Shvah Quiescent and Shvah Moving, as they are
termed by all the Hebrew Grammarians—I mean those
grammarians who have written their grammars in most
clear and elegant Hebrew, and by this very fact command
my respect, and to whom I prefer doing homage by not
introducing any new terms where those given by them
are equally lucid and expressive.
I shall conclude by requesting your Grace to go, by
way of practice, through the following disconnected
passages in English, written out according to the system
detailed above, which will, in fact, be the first Exercise I
have the honour to submit to your notice.
It may, to be sure, at first look uncouth and dis
couraging, but a little practice will render the matter
more amusing than tiresome ; and of this I am certain,
that when your Grace shall have so far succeeded as to
read without hesitation any English written on this
system, you will have advanced more than half way
towards being able to read Hebrew with ease and
fluency.

EXERCISE I.

(Which of course must be read from right to left, and

sh as well as th each be considered as one letter; also
16 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

the letter e, at the end of a word, made silent where it

is mute; the vowels of a diphthong are, as observed
above, written in their usual order.)
ow
llhs hS ; hslf m fS hslf dnK ,snb m fX nb n sK shT
::a e e:y o e: : i a eoy oeo i i
.nM tS nkt sw hs scb ,nmW dllc b
a o ou ea ae eaue ao e : a e
.dG m dG ht dnX ,lpp m b llhs lpp hT
o y o y : : a e : eo y e : a e : eo y
.slS knrd slmc ht vg llw N dnX ,knrD
o: a : : e a y ei : : 1 I : : a : : i :
.ht htsruc tht h sX dsruc dntf 5ht htsslb tht h dsslB
ee e: a e i e: : : a ee e:e: a e i e:e:
.Uuf tn s ht ty ; s ht tnK nur srvr ht US
:: o ieae e eae o : i : : ei e :: a
.sprup rvi* t mt X dnN 5nss X rht gnht rvN T
eo: yeeoeia::a oeaa iee ::iyeeo
.dsslb b htrN ht fK slmf ht 11K llhs ds ht nS dnX ht nS
e : e : e : : ea e oieiae : : a : : a eey i : : a ee i
.rp ht htrdsnc tht h stf dsslB
oo e ee i : o a e i e:e:
ow
.tpw dnS nd ts w nlbB ft* srvr ht B
:: e : : a ae oya o : : ei e y
ht htrf tht nmw K tub ; nv tb dnS 5luftcd sK rvi
«ea a a o a aii yeau : : a :eie i ou a
.dsrp b llhs hs ,drL
eai : e : : a e : : o
 17

HEBREW ALPHABET.

FORKS. RABBINIC XAMIS. POWERS. NUMERICAL

CHARACTERS. TALCS.

K Aleph. • • • 1
3 Beth. b 2
J 3 Gimel. g, as in gold. 3
7 Daleth. d 4
n P He. h, as in home. 5
t 1 Vaw. V 6
r. t Zain. z 7
n P Cheth. ch, guttural, as in the
German Buck. 8
ID 15 Teth. t 9
> Yod. y, as in yes. 10
3 Kaph. k 20
b J Lamed. 1 30
P Mem. m 40
*: Nun. n 50
D 0 Samech. s, as in son. 60
If Ayin. • • • 70
*a P Pe. P 80
•if Tsadik. ts 90
J
Koof. k 100
P P
T Resh. r 200
Shin. \ sh |
300
fl Sin. j s, as in son. )
n D Taw. t 400

* The five letters thus marked have a different form when they
stand at the end of a word ; see the reverse page.
c
18 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Letters that have a dot in some manner inherent in

them, whenever they open a syllable, are six, viz.,
n, 2, 3, 3, 3;
Of which those that have a different sound, when the
dot is taken out, are four, viz. :—
2 , which will then sound as v,
3, „ ,, ch, guttural, as in the
German Buck,
D, „ „ ph, or f,
n, „ „ th.
3 and 1 do not change their sound when the dot is
taken out, the difference of sound having been lost.
The letters which change their form, when they end
a word, are five, viz. :—
Rabbinic.
2 , which takes then the form 1 i
e, D o
3, ] 1
1 <|
f r
The letters .ynriN are termed Gutturals.
p3sJ „ Palatals.
JWEOT „ Linguals.
ptfDr „ Dentafo.
'jDia ,y Labials.

LETTER V.

It was an excellent idea of your Grace to transcribe into

regular English the Exercise which I had the honour of
 LETTER V. 19

sending in my last, and to allow me to have a sight of

it so transcribed ; for while it must certainly have been
very good practice for yourself, it proves to me that the
principles of the system on which Hebrew is written
have been fully entered into and comprehended by your
Grace.
It is time now to direct your Grace's attention to the
Table of the Hebrew Alphabet by which this sheet
is headed, and which, as you will perceive, is divided
into five columns.
The first contains the forms of the letters, as you will
find them in the Hebrew, as well as in the Chaldee of
The Bible, and, likewise, in other books written in pure
Hebrew and Chaldee ; such letters are always placed in
the line destined for the consonants, and have the vowel-
points under them, with the exception of one, which is
placed above, and again one which is placed in the line
of consonants, as has been already mentioned (Letter
iii. § 1).
The second (which I would beg of your Grace, for the
present, to pass over unnoticed,) exhibits the same letters
in the characters as used by the Rabbins, who generally
do not use vowel-points in their writings.
The third gives you the names of the letters, as they
are designated by Hebrew scholars; most of which may
not be without a meaning, though this is a point on
which we need not dwell.
The fourth represents the powers of the several letters,
as they are pronounced by most scholars in the Uni
versity of Cambridge, and, with the exception of the last
one of the alphabet, as they are also pronounced
in Germany and Poland, where, it cannot be denied,
Hebrew literature is in the zenith of its glory.
c 2
20 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The fifth and last column states the numerical value

of each letter ; for instead of figures the Hebrews
used the letters of the alphabet to express their
numbers.
If your Grace will take the trouble to count the
letters, you will find them twenty-two in number (the
two that are bracketed together counting only for one).
I will now beg leave to dwell upon each of them at some
length.
2. K (Aleph), when it has a vowel, serves for a kind of
cypher (Letter iv. § 2) to show that the vowel has no con
sonant before it in the syllable, but must itself open the
syllable. But although, in reference to its vowel, the X
may fairly be said to be a sort of cypher ; yet, in refer
ence to orthography, it is as essential as any other letter of
the alphabet, and can by no means be spared or dropped
without either altering the meaning of the word or
depriving it of meaning altogether. And this will be
the case even when the X has no vowel, when it will, of
course, without serving any purpose, merely stand as a
mute-letter would in any other language, but can as little
be spared as could such a mute-letter : thus, e.g., in the
English word honour, the h, although it cannot be said
to serve any purpose, is, nevertheless, indispensable to
the meaning of the word ; since, were the h left out, the
word would cease to have any signification.
3. 2 (Beth), sounds as b. It is one of those six
letters exhibited at the foot of the alphabet, on the
reverse page, as having a dot inherent in them when
opening a syllable. On this dot I shall have a
great deal to say by and by ; but it will suflice for the
present cursorily to mention that, in some cases, the
dot must be taken out of the letter, (which will
 LETTER V. 21

then be Written 3), and it then will sound as V, and be

called Vetji.
4. 3 (Gimel), sounds as g in gold. \
^ (Daleth), „ d. )
These two letters have also a dot inherent in them
when opening a syllable, which also must be taken out
in certain cases ; but the difference in their respective
pronunciation, when deprived of the dot, is lost to us.
5. H (.Hi?), when it has a vowel or Shvah (Letter iv.
§ 2), sounds like an aspirated h ; but when it has neither
vowel nor Shvah (which can only be the case when it
ends a word), it is not heard in pronunciation. In some
cases, however, it receives a dot, thus PI (which can also
only be the case when it stands at the end of a word),
and then it is heard as an aspirated h, although at
the end of the word.
6. T (Vaw), sounds like v. This letter, too, is, in
some cases, not heard in pronunciation, as will be men
tioned hereafter.
7. T (Zain), sounds as z. This letter should be care
fully distinguished from 1 , which has a straight stem,
whereas the T , as will be observed, is curved a little, so
as to form a kind of zigzag.
8. n ( Cheth), has a guttural sound, like the German
ch in Buck. I shall here beg leave, once for all, to
write ch with a dash over it thus (ch) to express this
German guttural sound. This letter, too, must be care
fully distinguished from the letter P! , the left limb of
which does not quite reach the head or horizontal part,
but leaves a small opening.
9. D (Teth), sounds as t.
10. 1 (Yod), sounds as y in yes. When it has no
22 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

vowel, it is sometimes not heard in pronunciation, as

will be stated to your Grace in due time. It will
be observed that the s consists only of a head, and must,
therefore, be always written in the same level with the
heads of the other letters.
11. 3 (Kaph), sounds like k. This is the fourth
letter among those exhibited on the back of the
page containing the alphabet as having an in
herent dot when opening a syllable. This dot must,
in certain cases, be taken out, and then the letter
will sound like the German ch in Buch, and be called
Chaph. This letter assumes a different form when it
stands at the end of a word, thus ( 1 ), which will also
have a guttural sound when the dot is taken out, and is
distinguished from 1 (Daleth), by its dropping below the
line, whereas the stem of the Daleth ends in the
same. This is the only final letter which, on receiving
a vowel-point or Shvah, allows it to be placed within
instead of below itself.
The letter 3 is distinguished from 2 {Beth) by being
more rounded.
12. 7 {Lamed), sounds as I.
13. D {Mem), sounds as m. When at the end of a
word, it takes the form D .
14. 2 {Nun), sounds like n. This letter may be dis
tinguished from 2 by the circumstance of the base of
this last {Gimel) not reaching the stem, but leaving
a small opening. At the end of a word, Nun takes the
form ] , which is distinguished from T {Zairi) by hanging
down below the line.
15. D {Samech), sounds like s in son, and is dis
tinguished from D {final Mem) by being more rounded.
 LETTER V. 23

16. V (Ayiri). This letter corresponds to no sound

either in this country, or in Germany, or in Poland, and
may, therefore, be considered to perform the same
function, so far as pronunciation is concerned, as the
letter X ; viz., when it has a vowel it shows that the
syllable is opened, not by a consonant, but by a vowel;
and when it has no vowel, it stands as a mute-letter,
which cannot be spared without injuring the sense of
the word. In France and Portugal a nasal sound, not
generally known in this country, is attributed to it.
17. 2 (-Pe), which sounds as p, is the fifth letter
mentioned, after the alphabet, as having an inherent
dot when opening a syllable. In cases where the dot
is taken out, it sounds as ph, and should accord
ingly be called Phe. At the end of a word it takes the
form *1 , which never has the dot.
18. V (I'sadik), sounds like ts. To distinguish it
from V (Ayin), it must be observed that in this last the
lines from both the heads go quite down to the base,
where they unite; but in the former, If (Tsadik), the
line from the left hand head alone goes down to the base
in a kind of curve, the line from the right hand head
running into the first line half way down, and so being
very short. At the end of a word this letter assumes the
form y.
19. p (Koof), sounds as k.
20. 1 (Hesh), which sounds as r, is distinguished from
1 (Daleth) by being more curved.

of the letters exhibited on the reverse of the page

containing the alphabet as having a dot inherent in them
24 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

when opening a syllable. When deprived of the dot

(thus H), it sounds in this country as th, but everywhere
on the Continent its sound is then like that of s in son.
In this country, therefore, it should, when deprived of its
dot, be called Thaw. This letter is distinguished from n
( Cheth) by having a slight projection at the foot of the
left limb.
I would now, in conclusion, beg of your Grace to
practise the names, as well as the powers, of the letters as
given here below, where you will please to observe that
the groups, in which those letters are placed together,
which require care to distinguish them from each other,
are by no means intended to represent any Hebrew
words.
b do )2 d v f)as> fx p i w nn
N 22 3i 11 n 1 t n to * 1133
totf jnt dd toD ]n nn Till 2222
:nnn
 LETTER VI, '25

LETTER VI.

I have again to thank your Grace for your having con

descended to let me see the paper on which you tran
scribed in English letters the names as well as the
powers of the Hebrew letters which in my last I recom
mended you to practise. I find that they were transcribed
most correctly from beginning to end, which shows that
your Grace has begun the work in good earnest, and
which augurs well for the future.
It is now time to introduce to your Grace's notice the
Vowel Points, which are ten in number, and of which
five are termed long, and five short.
As I do not consider it advisable to exhibit to your
Grace these vowel-points detached from consonants,
I shall at first give you them as they are seen when,
being attached to K , they open a syllable ; and next, as
they appear when, attached to one of the regular conso
nants, they are heard after it in forming a syllable.

The Five Long Vowels.

1. N . The point under the X (consisting of a mark
somewhat resembling an English capital T) is termed
Kawmets. Its sound is like that of aw in saw.
2. S . The point under the N (consisting of two dots
in a horizontal line) is termed Tsayre. Its sound is
like that of a in name.
3. ^ . Here the point under the N (consisting of one
dot) is termed Cherik, and when followed by \ as it is
here, Long Cherik ; it sounds as e in me.
26 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

4. , or K . The letter 1 with a dot over it to the

left of the X in one instance, and the dot (without the
letter 1) over the left of the X in the second instance, are
each termed Chowlem, there not being the least differ
ence between the one and the other. Its sound is like
that of ow in cow.
5. IX . The letter 1 with a dot in it to the left of the
N is termed Sh&rik, and sounds as the French u in the
word vu (seen), or as the German u in the word griin
(green).
The Short Vowels.
6. N . The point under the K (consisting of a small
horizontal line) is termed Pathach, and sounds as a in man.
7. £ . The point under the K (consisting of three
dots placed in a triangular position) is termed Segol, and
sounds as e in men.
8. X . The point under the X (consisting of one dot,
not followed by ^ , by way of distinguishing it from
Long Cherik, § 3), is termed Short Cherik, and sounds
as i in pin.
9. X . The point under the N (which, though undis-
tinguishable in shape from Long Kawmets, is known by
certain unerring rules of grammar to be explained here
after) is termed Kawmets Chateph, or Short Kawmets,
and sounds short, as o in not.
10. ^ . The point under the H (consisting of three
dots in an oblique line) is termed Kibbuts, and sounds
as the French u in the partitive article du (some), or in
the german Gluck (happiness).
. . N.B. It will be observed that with the exception
of Chowlem, which stands above the line, and
 LETTER VI.

SMrik which stands in the line, all the vowels,

whether long or short, are placed below the line in
which the consonants stand.
11. I beg here to observe that in representing Hebrew
sounds by English letters, A will be used by me to
represent the sound of the French u in vu (seen) ; u to
represent that of the French u in du (some); d to repre
sent the long sound of a in name, and a to represent the
short sound of a in man ; e to represent the long
sound of e in me, and e to represent the short sound
of e in men ; i to represent the short sound of i in pin ;
6 to represent the short sound of o in not. With regard
to the guttural sound, it has already been mentioned
that it will be represented by ch ; and to this I shall
now add that y will be used to denote that the y is to be
read as a consonant, and not as a vowel. This premised,
let us see how the vowel-points will be spelled when
attached to N .
Long Vowels.
£ , Aleph Kawmets, is pronounced aw.
S! , Aleph Tsayre, „ a.
^ , Aleph Long-Cherik, „ e.

or, > Aleph Chowlem, „ ow.

IX, Aleph Shtirik, „ ti.

Short Vowels.
1$ , Aleph Pathach, is pronounced a.
X, Aleph Segol, „ e.
X, Aleph Shoj't-Cherik „ i.
1S« , Aleph Kawmets- Chataph (or Aleph
Short-Kawmets), „ 6.
X , Aleph Kibbuts, ,, u.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The same would be the spelling also with V in the

place of N in this country, where the V has no sound :
e.g., Vr is pronounced aw ; V.. d, &c.
With a regular consonant the spelling would be as
follows :—

Long Vowels.
3 , Beth Kawmets, is pronounced baw.
3 , Beth Tsayre, „ bd,
"3 , Beth Long-cherik, „ be.
13,) _
«. >Beth Chowlem „ bow.
™> J
13 , Beth Shurik, „ b&.

Short Vowels.

3 , Beth Pathach, is pronounced ba.

3 , Beth Segol, ,, be.
3 , Beth Short-Cherik, „ bi.
3 , Beth Kawmets-Chatuph(pr, Beth Short-
Kawmets), „ bo.
3 , Beth Kibbuts, „ bu.

It need scarcely be observed that the spelling would

be exactly the same with any other of the regular conso
nants instead of 3 : as, for instance,

| , Gimel Kawmets, gaw, &c.

"i , Daleth Kawmets, daw, &c.
\, Yod Kawmets, yaw, &c.
i , Yod Tsayre, yd, &c.

Before dismissing this subject, I may perhaps be per

 LETTER VI. 29

mitted to come back to some of the vowel-points, and to

dwell upon them at somewhat greater length than I have
done in this Letter.
12. Long-Cherik, as has been observed, is distinguished
from Short- Cherik by its being followed by the letter s
placed in the line : in the spelling, therefore, the ^ need
not be named, its existence being sufficiently implied by
the term Long- Cherik. Thus, for instance, when I have
to spell the word My Father, I spell it thus:—
Aleph Kawmets aw, Veth Long-cherik ve (without
mentioning the "<), together forming aw-vi.
13. Chowlem, as was stated (§ 4), may be expressed
either by a dot placed over the letter 1 , or merely by a
dot placed over the letter which precedes it in the
syllable ; the first is called the Full, and the second the
Deficient Chowlem. With regard to sound, there is no
difference whatever between them ; but in point of
grammar there are some niceties to be observed, as to
when the one and when the other should be used ; niceties
into which I need not enter now ; and I shall, for the
present, limit myself to observing only, First, that
when Chowlem is attached to the last letter of a word,
the full, and never the deficient, form must be employed ;
and, Secondly, that when the deficient Chowlem is used,
the dot is uniformly placed on the left of the letter
preceding it in the syllable ; wherever your Grace may
happen to find it placed on the right of a letter (which
is mostly the case with N), you may be sure that it
belongs to the letter on the right of the one over which
it is placed. Thus, e.g., when I have to spell the word
we shall, or may, eat, I spell it :—Nun Chowlem
30 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Aleph, now ; Chaph Tsayre Lamed, chdl : together

giving now-chdl.
14. Shurik, which is the only vowel-point that is
placed in the line, is likewise the only vowel which, at
the beginning of a word, may open a syllable without
being preceded by e.g., |31 And a son, the spelling
of which would be thus :—Shurik, u ; Veth Tsayre Nun,
van : together, u-vdn.
All other vowels, without exception, must be attached
to an X (or to an V , in this country) when they open a
syllable, whether it be at the beginning or in the middle
of a word.
15. Kawmets Chatuph (or, Short-Kawmets) may seem
to your Grace a rather troublesome vowel, as, in its
shape, it has nothing to distinguish it from Long-
Kawmets ; your Grace need not, however, feel the
least uneasy about it, as you will in due course be
supplied with safe and very simple rules, by which you
will be always able to discern it. Suffice it for the
present to know that the Short-Kawmets is comparatively
of rare occurrence ; and surely the difference of sound
between aw in saw, which we have appropriated to
Long-Kawmets, and that of o in not, which is the sound
of Short-Kawmets, is not so very great as to go for much
in so ancient a language, and ought not to be a source of
embarrassment to a learner.
At the foot of this sheet your Grace will find a few
Hebrew words which, if properly spelled and pronounced
by your Grace, will prove you to have completely
mastered the Hebrew vowel-points, as in these words
not one of them is omitted.
By way of rendering a little assistance, the syllables
 LETTER VI. 31
►
will be divided by hyphens, and over the letter having
Short-Kawmets will be placed K. Ch., the initials of
Kawmets Chatuph.

P.S.—Kaiomets Chatuph is, in a very few instances, distinguished

from Long-Kawmets by having Shvah placed on its right, as in
balm, and a very few other words.

PRACTICE.

bl'X one (m.) mourning. a slave.

IV1^ his song, P"J£ an eye.
, K.Ch.
in-ft a formless mass. b3 all.
nn"3 ease. ]n-^ he shall be pitied.
32 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER VII.

We have seen (Letter iv. § 2) that two dots in a vertical

line placed under the letter (called Shvah) denote that
the letter is destitute of a vowel ; and, likewise, that, by
a mere convention, this mark is omitted at the end of a
word terminating in only one consonant, but is retained
when two consonants destitute of vowels terminate a
word ; e.g., "lj a lamp, where the Shvah, which should by
right have been under the letter 1 is dispensed with; but,
in T13 spikenard, the Shvahs are retained under the two
consonants that are destitute of vowels. If, however, the
last letter of the word is , the Shvah is not written
under it ; as NEpn sin.
I would here add that Shvah is also retained in a
Final Caph ( 1 ), though not preceded by another conso
nant destitute of a vowel ; as in y? , to thee (* feminine) ;
*=|3 , in thee (* feminine).
Again, we have seen (Letter iv. § 3) that Shvah, when
it stands under a letter which opens a syllable, is said to
be Shvah Moving ; and that when it stands under a letter
which closes a syllable, it is said to be Shvah Quiescent :
thus, for instance, in "03 my son, the Shvah is moving ;
but in "^N! but, the Shvah is quiescent. Likewise in 3N
a father, the Shvah (understood though not expressed)
under 3 is quiescent. In like manner in HE"1? they
learned, the Shvah is moving ; but in I shall
learn, the Shvah is quiescent.
* In future (f.) will be used to denotefeminine, and (m.) to denote
masculine.
 LETTER VII. 33

2. When your Grace will try to pronounce all the

words quoted above as examples, you will perceive that
in forming a syllable the letter bearing Shvah moving is
united, to the letter bearing a vowel which follows it,
whereas the letter bearing Shvah quiescent is united to the
letter bearing a vowel which next precedes it, there not
being the least sound caused by the Shvah between these
two consonants in either case. Some Grammarians indeed
tell us that Shvah moving (or Shvah initial, as they name
it) sounds as a very short e. Now this is quite true as a
matter offact, but utterly false in theory. It is true as a
matter offact, because in pronouncing the English words
bread, pride, plum, your Grace will perceive also a little
hesitation or hiatus between b and r, p and r, p and I
respectively, somewhat resembling a very short e (a
hiatus which is still more perceived in such words when
pronounced by children before their organs of speech are
completely formed), but who would venture to define the
sound produced by the hiatus in those words as amount
ing to a very short e ? In point, however, of theory and
principle, to attribute to the Shvah the sound of any one
of the vowels, however short, is to deprive it of that very
function which it was intended to fulfil ; which is,
according to the very first grammarians, to indicate that
the consonant under which it stands has no vowel whatever.
3. When the letters ynilK receive Shvah moving,
either Pathach, or Segol, or Short-Kawmets is invariably
placed on the left of the Shvah ; these compound Shvahs
are respectively termed Chateph Pathach, Chateph Segol,
Chateph Kawmets (the latter to be carefully distinguished
from Kawmets Chateph, which in my preceding Letter
is seen to be one of the short vowels). Thus, in
i)
34 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Iby stand thou (m), the V has Chateph Pathach,

^Di* eat thou (rn), the N has Chateph Segol,
a ship, the X has Chateph Kawmets ;
and likewise in the midst of a word : —
lfo,i^ he will stand, V has a Chateph Pathach,
pj&JO he will gather, S has a Chateph Segol,
"TDjL^ he shall be caused, or made, to stand, V has a
Chateph Kawmets;
all these Compound Shvahs being moving.
That Shvah at the beginning of a word should be
moving, and Shvah (whether expressed or understood) at
the end of a word, and likewise two Shvahs at the end
of a word should be quiescent, are axioms needing no
rule : likewise that Compound Shvahs, even when found
in the midst of a word, should be considered moving
Shvahs, is clear from what has just been stated respect
ing them ; and it is equally clear that whenever the
letters, under which moving Shvahs always become
compound, have under them simple Shvahs, such Shvahs
must necessarily be quiescent. But a simple Shvah,
when found in the midst of a word, requires particular
attention and consideration before it can be pronounced
to be moving or quiescent. I must, therefore, reserve to
myself the privilege of returning to this subject by and
by, when your Grace will be furnished with certain
rules for discerning these two kinds of Shvah.
For the present I shall conclude by recommending
to your Grace to spell and pronounce the words given at
the foot of this sheet, of which those having a simple
Shvah in the midst of them are divided by a hyphen, in
cases where as yet no rule has been given for determining
 LETTER VII. 3d

whether, in forming a syllable, the letter to which the

Shvah is attached is to be joined to the preceding or suc
ceeding letter that bears a vowel, as the case may be.

P.S. Compound Shvahs are in a few instances found under other

letters than those to which they are appropriated as stated above (§ 3) ;
e.g., Sntl (Gen. ii. 12), ^7^\ (Gen. xxix. 8), which are anomalies.

PEACTICE.

fruit. angj he will love.

*h"2 a vessel.
"\72V keep thou (m.).
bxitf ask thou (m.).
"n"1^ thy (f) song.
TH thy (f.) lamp.
7jrr"vin thy (m.) law.
F\?$2 thou (f.) didst rise.
rr\12X thou (f.) didst say.
■ng a lion.
niD« truth,
''■jrj anger.
IJJl^, he will pass over.
""Sni* my tent.
rfrnx thy (m.) tent.
")3"^S I shall break.
Hp"3 visit ye (m.)
my king.
1ni3^"b his kingdom.
iTIT. he shall live,
ye (m.) shall be.
"Ttorin thou (m.) shalt
covet.
f&rP he will desire.
36 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER VIII.

Of the twenty-two letters contained in the alphabet

eighteen will always be sounded, whether they open or
close a syllable, and may therefore be called regular conso
nants ; e.g., in the word ^2 my son, the 2 is heard as open
ing a syllable ; and in £7T*"}2 iron, the letters 1 and *? are
heard in pronunciation as closing syllables, the former
having a quiescent Shvah expressed, and the latter having
one understood. Even the letter)/ we have no right to ex
clude from the number of regular consonants ; for though
in this as well as some other countries no sound is given to
it, there are at least as many, if not more, countries in
which it has a nasal sound not generally known here ;
so in the word he journeyed, the syllable Pp would
in France be pronounced exactly like the French word
sang (blood) ; and the preposition /J/ upon, would be
pronounced in France gnal, the gn having somewhat the
sound of gn in the French ignorant (ignorant).
2. The four letters M H 8 differ in this respect
from the rest of the consonants, inasmuch as each
of them may, more or less (according to its
nature), blend with the vowel by which it is preceded
in such a manner as not to be perceived at all in pro
nunciation, and not even to require a quiescent Shvah,
either expressed, when in the midst, or understood, when
at the end of a word ; they are, therefore, designated by
the term Quiescents, the rules respecting which I will, by
your Grace's permission, proceed to detail to you.
 LETTER VIII. 37

3. X may be quiescent after—that is to say, it may

blend with — any one of the vowels whatever ; e.g.,—

; jr^'iO beginning ; my head ; D^'IO chiefs

: iriDNSp his work ; littf"8") first
in each of which words the X blends together and forms
one syllable with the preceding vowel, without having a
quiescent Shvah expressed. Again in

; S1!! she ; N¥ go thou (m) forth ; he came

: S^S a ivonder ; NTH he ; come thou (m)

the S blends together, and forms one syllable with the

preceding vowel, without having a quiescent Shvah
understood.
••4. D never can be quiescent in the middle of a word,
but it may be so at the end of a word ; as
; lis here ; iTin be thou (m) ; '"12"Nt he was willing
: nt this (m) ; HO what
in all which cases a quiescent Shvah is by no means
understood under the letter H .
H in the midst of a word with a simple Shvah under
it has a regular aspirate sound, though closing a syllable,
and is, of course, then to be considered as full and
regular a consonant as any other ; as in i"P"T he shall
be, where the Shvah, being simple, is of course quiescent
(Letter vii. § 3).
Again, D is sometimes aspirated and considered a
regular consonant, even at the end of a word, in which
case (Letter v. § 5) it will have a dot placed in it ; e.g.,
: n"l",ti' her song ; in her
this dot is called Mappik.
When H bears a vowel or a compound Shvah it has,
38 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

of course, its full aspirate sound, and is considered a

regular consonant ; as
; riVn whether not ? (nonne ?) ; \H behold
: *]"TQ"J he shall push away

5. 1 is quiescent after Chowlem ; as in

; iTl'ifl a law ; 13 in him
{Full Chowlem [Letter vi. § 1 3] being in reality nothing
but a dot above the line, followed by a 1 quiescent—
the dot alone representing the vowel, and the 1 being a
quiescent letter after it).
Again, 1 is quiescent after Shurik ; as
; IJ'Tpt^ our song ; would that
: we shall be enabled
(Shurik being, in fact, nothing but a dot in the line—the dot
forming the vowel—and a 1 quiescent blended together
with it in order to prevent mistakes which would other
wise arise ; since dots sometimes occur in the midst of
letters for many other purposes, as may be seen in the
Table of the alphabet.)
After other vowels 1 is not quiescent, but has its full
sound as v ; e.g.,
: IT a hook ; 13 a back ; IV command thou (to)
6. s is quiescent after Tsayre and Segol ; as in
; waters of ; HJV^ her house ; his eye
'• V^"^ upon thee (to) ; 1 to thee (to) ; ^ days of
Again, 11 is quiescent after Cherik ; as in
; ^12 who ; thy (to) mouth • ^"V"^ thy (f) song
: ""B my mouth
(Long- Cherik being, in fact, nothing more than a dot
 LETTER VIII. 39

under the line, which forms the vowel, followed by a

quiescent 11 in the line to distinguish it from Short
Cherik.)
In all the words quoted above, the ^ has not Shvah
quiescent either expressed, when in the midst, or under
stood, when at the end of a word.
has its full sound as y (consonant) after Kawmets,
Chowlem, ShOirik, and Pathach ; as
; Mil a nation ; living ; s"f~J my hands
: ^b'i revealed

1 is, however, mute after Kawmets, when, being

followed by 1 , it terminates a word ; e.g.,
upon him, pronounced aw-lawv.
T0"3 his sons, pronounced baw-nawv.
7. Two quiescent letters never can follow each other
in the midst of a word, nor at the end of a word unless
the second be K ; as

: N\3 a valley ; he caused to come, or he brought

In spelling, the letters 1 H X when quiescent,

should be named after the vowel with which they are to
be blended ; e.g.,
Dn-^-jn their (m) chiefs, should be spelled Resh
Kawmets Aleph, Raw ; Shin Tsayre Yod, sha ; He
Segol Mem, hem ; together Raw-shu-hem : H^HX how,
a
should be spelled, Aleph Tsayre Yod, A ; Chaph
Kawmets He, chaw ; together A-chaw. In the case of
Long-Cherik, however, the Yod need not be named, its
presence being already implied by the term Long-
Cherik (Letter vi. § 3).
40 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

For the same reason Vaw need not be mentioned in

Chowlem and Shurik ; words, therefore, like i")""1^ his
song, M"h abide ye (m), should simply be spelled
thus: — Shin Long-Cherik, she; Resh Chowlem, row ;
together, She-row ; and, Lamed Long-Cherik, Le; Nun
Shurik, nk ; together, Le-nu.
8. Before dismissing this subject, I would beg to
observe that a syllable not ending in a quiescent Shvah
is termed a simple syllable, even though it have a
quiescent letter attached to it : but a syllable terminating
in a quiescent Shvah, whether expressed or understood,
is said to be a compound syllable. Thus, for example,—
N3 he came, is a simple ; but
Dj? he rose, a compound syllable.
nb'J he revealed, is said to be a word consisting of
two simple syllables.
one (m) eating, consists of one simple and
one compound syllable.
C03"3R a girdle, consists of two compound syllables.
JH't he knew, has one simple and one compound
syllable.
^2 without, is a word of one simple syllable.
D'0',n3 men blessed, has one simple and one com
pound syllable.
There may be words consisting of three, four, and
even five syllables ; as 1"vyj£#"3"!) and in thy (m)
gates.
If your Grace will take the trouble to go through the
spelling of all the words given below, you will be sure to
have done full justice to the subject of which I have had
the honour to treat in this Letter.
In cases where a simple Shvah may occur, for the
 LETTER VIII. 41

determination of the nature of which (that is, whether it

be moving or quiescent) no rule has yet been given, the
nature of the Shvah will be shown by means of a
hyphen placed either before or after it, as the case
may be.

P.S. In the word "H^S (Exod. xv. 6), the M has a simple Shvah,
which is altogether an extraordinary case.

niCK"} high things. Wri3« we.

■'JlNV? on my going forth, ^r^lf besides thee [in.]
our head, 1j? a line.
behold. iy] and he commanded.
|iBfm3 in the first. IX'nri thou [m.] shalt
NVQ find thou [m.] desire,
nbi
T T he revealed. tranquil.
do thou [m.] sp^I thy [m.] olives.
113 thus. ^"I3,j; thy [m.] eyes.
Hip getting of. 1^3 our mouth.
JIB/ a lamb, understand ye [m.]
nj'pp cattle. ^22 my countenance.
nfe/#0 work. ">1n ho!
"jjn thou [f.] shalt be. ^(f (poetical for !TTi&>)
1V£ they [m.] shall be. a field.
FH3 her lamp, VJYh^l his generations.
t : her son. TOT 2T his countenance.
it has longed for. THJ3 his garments.
irn
T T he was. N"On ne disallowed.
ye [m.] have been. K'O1?
* T a lion.
D^lin turtle doves, a prophet.
our voice.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER IX.

Allow me, my Lady Duchess, to offer my congratulations

on the scrupulous accuracy with which you have spelled
and transcribed the words which I transmitted to you in
my last Letter : this promises admirably well ; and I
proceed in my course with renewed confidence.
On opening The Hebrew Bible, your Grace will find,
both above and below the lines, numerous other marks,
besides the vowel points with which you are now
familiar. These are termed Accents, of which the use is
twofold ; namely,
First, to show that the syllable, over or under
which any one of them stands, has the emphasis.
In Hebrew this syllable must always be either the
ultimate or the penultimate of the word, so that in
no word can the stress be ever laid on the ante-penulti
mate syllable :
2. Secondly, to serve the purposes of interpunctuation,
answering to the English periods, colons, semi-colons,
and commas ; so that by attending to them we know
how to divide the several members of a sentence, and
where we are to make a greater or a less pause.
In modern languages, interpunctuation is only intro
duced to point out where our ideas are to rest or pause ;
but suppose that a language should have the caprice
(and all languages, as your Grace well knows, have
their caprices) to make use also of other marks not
to act as stops, but the contrary; that is, to show not
where our ideas are to pause, but where they are to
 LETTER IX. 43

follow in rapid succession (suppose, for instance, brackets,

vincula, or any other such marks used for the purpose) ;
we should then have two distinct classes of marks for the
interpunctuation of sentences, the one serving as stops of
various degrees, the other as connecting links to carry on
the ideas without pausing at all.
That the latter will appear to your Grace a rather
cumbersome set of marks, and one scarcely deserving
notice, I can easily imagine.
Now The Hebrew Language is furnished with such a
system of marks, denoting that words to which they
are attached must be read in close connexion with
what follows ; and the Hebrew scholar should be
familiarly acquainted with them: but, to the learner,
they must be worse than useless, inasmuch as, by
devoting himself to subjects of such minor importance,
his attention must be diverted from other parts of the
grammar much more requisite for his progress in The
Language.
Most grammarians have presented to the student in
his earliest stage full Tables of both these classes of
marks ; Tables which wear a rather formidable aspect ;
and, as a practical teacher of long experience, I know that
many students have at the very outset, as it were, of their
course been deterred by the appearance of these from
pursuing a study in which they might otherwise have
made great progress.
I shall not follow the example of such grammarians,
but shall for the present introduce to your Grace's notice
only eight of those accents which show where we are
more or less to rest our ideas, and which are generally
termed Distinctive ; and two of those which, on the
contrary, show that the word to which any one of them
44 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

is attached is to be read in close connexion with that

following it, which last are usually termed Conjunctive
accents.
These ten accents also I shall, for the sake of perspi
cuity, represent to you, as I did the vowel-points,
attached to words as they occur in The Bible.
3. JfJJJC the earth (Gen. i. 1). In this word your
Grace will perceive a small vertical line under the X ;
this is termed Silluk, and answers to a full stop or period.
It is only to be found at the end of a verse, which verse
is uniformly closed by two dots in a vertical line, such
as will be perceived to the left of the letter If in this
word.
4. D\i/S GOD (Gen. i. 1). Here a mark somewhat
resembling a horse-shoe is seen under the H ; this is
termed Ethnach, It answers to a colon, and generally
divides the verse into two parts ; in long verses, how
ever, more than one Ethnach is sometimes found ; and,
on the other hand, very short verses sometimes occur, in
which no Ethnach is found at all.
These two, being the principal stops, will henceforth
be designated by the name Pause Accents ; and it may
here be observed that these are the only two that have a
proper right to lengthen, by way of euphony, short into
long vowels, and even Shvahs into vowels ; a right of
which they in general avail themselves. Thus, for
example, y~!# earth, will become jHX ; D)D water, will
become D?£3 ; npt£^ they (m) shall observe, will become
: ; and ?|T# thy (m) song, will become ^Jttf . It
may be also here observed, as a rule to which there is
no exception, that the long vowel thus produced always
has the accent of the word.
 LETTER IX. 45

When less distinctive accents usurp the same right, it

is considered an anomaly.
5. j^i?!'"? the firmament (Gen. i. 7). The three points
placed in a triangular position over the J! form the accent
called Segol, which is easily distinguished from the
vowel-point bearing the same name (Letter vi. § 7) both
by its being placed above instead of below the line of
consonants, and also by its inverted form. It answers
nearly to an English semicolon. It differs from the
other nine accents which I introduce in this Letter by its
peculiar habit of standing over the last letter of a word,
whether that letter has a vowel or not ; as is seen in the
word &rh$ GOD (Gen. i. 28). The scholar of course,
in spite of the irregular position of the accent, would
give the emphasis in each of these words to the Long-
Cherik, as properly it should be given.
The following five accents have somewhat the same
power as an English comma, some having a greater, and
others a less, distinctive power, according to the order
in which they are here placed.
6. irD"! and emptiness (Gen. i. 2). The two dots in a
vertical line over the letter 2 form the accent named
Zakeph Kawtown. It is distinguished from Shvah by
having its position above the line of consonants.
7. ^"-pn1? for the purpose of causing a distinction
(Gen. i. 14). The small vertical line, accompanied by
two dots on its right, above the letter 1 form the vowel
named Zakeph Gawdowl.
8. n?0! and the earth (Gen- 'l' 2)- The dot above
the X is the accent named Rve-ah. Your Grace may
certainly be surprised at this accent presenting exactly
the same appearance as the vowel Chowlem (Letter vi.
46 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

$ 4), but you will easily see that it can never be

mistaken for Chowlem, since the letter over which
it stands must always have a vowel of its own, and
no letter, of course, can have more than one vowel.
9. D?pt^n the heaven (Gen. i. 1). The small mark
beneath the D , curved from left to right, is the accent
Tipcha.
10. "H3 fruit (Gen. i. 12). The small mark curved
from right to left, with a dot placed within it, which
your Grace will perceive under the letter "1 , is the
accent Tever.
We now come to the two conjunctive accents, to
which I shall at present confine your attention.
11. \3S face of (Gen. i. 2, the last word but one in
the verse). The small mark, curved from right to left,
which is seen beneath the 3 , is the accent named
Mercha (to be carefully distinguished from the accent
Tipcha 9], which is curved from left to right).
12. NTjl He created (Gen. i. 1). The small mark in
the form of a right angle beneath the letter 1 is the
accent named Munach.
13. "When a word, for reasons to be stated hereafter,
happens to be deprived of its accent, a small horizontal
line, termed Makkiph, is always placed between it and
the word following it (i.e., of course the word to its
left) ; as may be seen between the words HiCp"^
that [it was] good (Gen. i. 4), where the Makkiph shows .
that the word to its right is deprived of its accent.
14. Besides the regular accents there is an inferior
one termed Metheg (Heb. JH£ a curb, or check), whose
place is always under the line of consonants ; it generally
takes up its position with the vowel that is next but one
 LETTER IX. 47

to the right of that which has the regular accent of the

word ; as in and I (Gen. xviii. 27) ; or before a
moving Shvah, whether simple, as in nfVH she (or it) was
(Gen. i. 2), or compound, as in fi^jJ We will make, or
rather, Let us make (Gen. i. 26). This semi-accent (as
some denominate it) has indeed the form of a Silltik
(§ 3), but it cannot possibly be mistaken for one, first,
because there generally is a regular accent on the word
which has the Metheg ; and secondly, because Silluk is
only to be found at the end of a verse which is always
closed by the two dots in a vertical line, as mentioned
above.
It may here be observed that no one of the accents
whatever, whether of those already mentioned or of
those to be mentioned hereafter, can ever change its
position with reference to the line of consonants; for
those that occur above that line never can be written
below it ; and, on the contrary, those whose position
is below that line never can be written above it.
I close this subject by assuring your Grace that the
ten accents above enumerated are amply sufficient not
merely to answer all the purposes for which a learner
would require a knowledge of them, but even to enable
a decent Hebrew scholar to read and construe The Bible
with ease and accuracy: at the same time, however, I
pledge myself to lay before your Grace in due season
a complete Table of the accents, which even then I shall
recommend to your attention more as a subject of
curiosity than as one of sterling utility.

P.S. (a). Though to the scholar the accents have only the two uses
above described, yet they have a third use, with which, however, the
scholar has nothing- whatever to do. This is, they form a complete
system of musical notes, by which The Hebrew Scriptures are chanted
in the synagogues. This fact may serve to remove the surprise, which
48 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

must be felt at the occurrence of so complicated a system of interpunc-

tuation, in which so much occurs that appears altogether superfluous ;
for it will easily be imagined that the many varieties of sound which
such a system would have to denote by distinct signs must require a
very full supply of characters to represent with accuracy not merely
the several musical notes, but even the degree of rapidity or slowness
with which the chanter must connect the words.
P.S. (b). As the syllable, to which any one of the accents is
attached (with the exception of the Segol, and one or two others yet
to be mentioned, which stand always over the final letter of the word),
takes, of course, the emphasis of the word, we see at once that an accent
can only be attached to a letter bearing a vowel.
P.S. (c). In a few instances a small vertical line, similar in its
appearance to Metheg, may be found at the side of a Shvah ; as W\
know ye (m) (Job xix. 6), when it is altogether without meaning and
utterly unnoticed and disregarded even by first-rate Hebrew scholars ;
Grammarians designate it by the name Gahya. There are, however,
found in many editions of The Bible several marks resembling Metheg,
which occur even with vowels ; but being subject to no fixed rules
they receive no regard even from the first scholars, and are by them
considered quite as spurious as the Gahyas just mentioned.
 LETTER X. 49

LETTER X.

Languages sometimes make use, not only of one and the

same word, but also of one and the same mark, to serve
for more than one purpose. Thus when we write,
I can't, I don't, the apostrophe shows that the vowel o is
omitted ; but in writing The Queen's Birthday, the same
mark indicates the genitive case.
I thought that it would be well to remind your Grace
of this before treating of the dot which is found in the
midst of letters, and to which I purpose to devote this
sheet.
We have seen (Letter viii. § 4) that a dot is some
times placed in il at the end of a word to indicate that it
is not quiescent, but has its full aspirate sound, and that
it is then to be considered a regular consonant ; in which
case the dot is termed Mappik (to be carefully distin
guished from Makkiph [Letter ix. § 13] which has to do
with accents, and not with pronunciation).
2. Again, in the Table of the Alphabet, by which my
fifth Letter was headed, it was seen that the letters

T\ £> 3 1 2 3
have a dot in some manner inherent in them which
determines the pronunciation of four of them ; the
difference of pronunciation (which, without doubt, must
in former times have existed) having been lost in the
case of two of them, namely, 3 and 1 (see Letter v.
H 3, 4, 11, 17, 22). Now this dot is named Dagesh-
Lene {i.e., the Gentle DagesK), and has to do exclusively
E
50 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

with pronunciation, and not at all, even in the slightest

degree, with grammar.
The six letters mentioned above have this dot inherent
in them whenever they open syllables, whether at the
beginning of a word, or in the midst of a word after
Shvah quiescent; excepting, however, certain cases to
be mentioned hereafter, in which the dot must be taken
out of them.
By the Dagesh-Lene being said to be inherent, it is
intended to imply that whenever these letters stand
at the beginning of a word, or in the midst of a word
after Shvah quiescent, not the existence of the Dagesh-
Lene, but its non-existence, requires to be accounted for ;
as, for example, in the word morning, if any one
should ask me why there is a Dagesh-Lene in the Beth,
I should hardly understand the question, 2 being one of
the six letters which have an inherent Dagesh-Lene
when opening a syllable: but in and it was
morning (Gen. i. 5), if I were to be asked, " Why
is the Beth deprived of its Dagesh-Lene f " this would be
a fair question. In like manner in the case of my
king, it would be altogether unreasonable to require me
to account for the appearance of a Dagesh-Lene in the
Chaph, since it opens a syllable after a quiescent Shvah ;
but in DiTO1^ their (m) kings, I should have to prove
that the Shvah is by no means quiescent but moving, so
that the division into syllables would be DrT'O'TD ; and,
consequently, the Chaph does not open a syllable, and,
therefore, has not Dagesh-Lene, as there never can be a
Dagesh-Lene after a moving Shvah.
3. From what has been hitherto said, your Grace
will perceive that the Dagesh-Lene has its place
only and exclusively in the letters D Si 3 1 2 2 , either
 LETTER X. 51

at the beginning of a word, or in the midst of a

word after a quiescent Shvah ; and that we must
not pay to it the slightest attention with regard to
grammar. But the very same mark (namely, this dot in
the midst of a letter) when preceded by a vowel, whether
long or short, may stand in any other of the letters
besides T\ 2 3 1 i 3 (with the exception only of "I J! PI PI X,
which are incapable of receiving it) ; it then assumes an
altogether different function, doubles the letter in which
it is placed, becomes one of the most important subjects
of which a grammar has to treat, and receives the name
Dagesh-Forte (i.e., the Strong Dagesh) ; e.g., "7p.D he
diligently visited, the Dagesh in the S is Lene (gentle),
has nothing to do with grammar, but only shows that
the letter is to be pronounced as p, and not as ph ; on
the contrary, the Dagesh in p is forte (strong), doubles
the p , and imparts intensity to the action implied by
the verb. In some cases the meaning of a word is
altogether different when it has not, from what it
is when it has a Dagesh-Forte ; e.g.,

where the only difference between the two words is that

the former has not, and the latter has, a Dagesh in the
letter D .
4. The difference in the nature of the two kinds
of Dagesh is so great, and the errors into which learners
fall from mistaking the one for the other I know to be so
frequent, that I cannot either too strongly or too fre
quently recommend to your Grace to bear in mind that
a Dagesh at the beginning of a word or in the midst of
a word after Shvah, has nothing whatever to do with
e 2
52 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

grammar, but only affects the pronunciation ; but a

Dagesh, when preceded by a vowel, becomes altogether
a subject of grammar of the very highest degree of
importance. To make this observation still more clear,
I would beg to dwell on the word |3 a son. Here I am
taught by the Dagesh to pronounce the first letter of
the word as b and not as v, but cannot attach to the
Dagesh the least importance in a grammatical point of
view, on account of its having no vowel before it. But
this very same Dagesh, when preceded by a vowel, as
for example, in the word 13H THE son, at once changes
its character ; and, while reminding me that the 3 is to
be pronounced b, at the same time teaches me that the 3
is doubled, and that the letter He with Pathach under it,
by which the Beth is preceded, stands for the definite
article, as will be more particularly laid before your
Grace when we come to treat of the grammatical
structure of The Language.
5. A Dagesh-Forte, doubling, as it always does, the
letter in which it is placed, attributes a quiescent JShvah
to the implied letter (which is supposed to stand to its
right), which letter, therefore, forms one syllable with
the vowel preceding the Dagesh : e.g., "Tj?S> stands for
*TE"R9; "f©1? for lD-p*? .
6. From what has just been said it results that every
vowel, immediately followed by a Dagesh in the same
word, forms a compound syllable (Letter viii. § 8).
7. While treating of this subject, I ought perhaps to
mention the cases in which the Dagesh-Lene, inherent in
the letters ft B 3 2 3 , is to be taken out from them ;
but bearing in mind the promise I made not to occupy
your Grace's attention too long at one time, I shall make
this the subject of my next Letter, and for the present
 LETTER X. 53

confine myself to the exhibiting to you the twenty-two

letters of the alphabet, according to their nature as
regards Dagesh, in the three following classes.
The 6 letters fi 2 2 1 i 3 admit, according to their
position in the word, of
each kind of Dagesh.
The 1 1 letters D "» b Tl 3 y p D CO admit of only
Dagesh- Forte, and not
Dagesh-Lene.
(Out of respect to the Hebrew
Grammarians I give you these as they
represent them, though not in alpha
betical order.)
The 5 letters 1 Jl n H 8 admit neither of Dagesh-
Lene nor of Dagesh-
Forte, as was mentioned
— above.
22

P.S. That Dagesh-Forte doubles the letter in which it stands no one

can doubt ; indeed to raise any scruples on this head would be to en
danger the fundamental principles of Hebrew Grammar. But whether or
not we are bound to make the doubling of the letter heard in pronuncia
tion is quite another question. No one will for a moment deny that the
English words hammer, letter, copper, must be spelled with double
letters, and that the spelling would be barbarous, and the words be
almost deprived of their meaning, were the double letters not given in
these several cases ; but would not a person be considered pedantic
who should be bent upon always showing by his pronunciation that
he knew the exact spelling of these words ? As for myself, I confess
that I never pronounce as double the letters having Dagesh-Forte ;
and I also beg to assure your Grace that I am personally and intimately
acquainted with the greater part of the most eminent Hebraists of the
day on the Continent, and that I never have heard them pronounce
the Dageshed letters as double; while, on the other hand, I have
54 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

known many to be most scrupulously particular about so doing who

knew but very little of The Language. Your Grace may, however, on
this point consult your own inclination, and if you can bring yourself
to constrain your melodious voice to utter such forced and harsh
sounds, of course he who has the honour of being your teacher can
have no objection to it, though for your own sake he would be sorry
to hear of your doing so.
 LETTER XI. 55

LETTER XI.

The letters fl 2 3 T 3 3 at the beginning of a word are

deprived of Dagesh-Lene when the preceding word ends
either in a quiescent letter (Letter viii. § 2), or in a long
vowel; provided that the word so ending has not a
distinctive accent (Letter ix. § 2), but is linked with
the word beginning with one of those six letters; e.g.,
njna lOj?'.] and Pharaoh called (Gen. xli. 45).
Ilin nJV.n it (f) was a formless mass (Gen. i. 2).
s5 123? to my mouth (Job xl. 4).
13 13)^331 and they shall be blessed in thee (Gen.
xxviii. 14).
DiHfl MS [the] face of [the'] deep (Gen. i. 2).
15 ^iT] and it was so (Gen. i. 7).
In all these instances the Dagesh-Lene is taken out on
account ofthe preceding word ending in a quiescent letter.
I'lpnil rPHi Thou hast led in Thy mercy
(Exod. xv. 13).
Here the Dagesh-Lene is taken out on account of the
preceding word ending in a long vowel.
2. In cases, however, where the word ending in a
quiescent letter or long vowel has a distinctive accent
(Letter ix. § 2), and, consequently, is not read in close
connexion with the words following, the letters
DSSin retain their Dagesh-Lene : e.g., iOS) rQpJl
[male] and female he created (Gen. i. 27), where the
distinctive accent Tipcha (Letter ix. $ 9) in the word to
the right separates that word from the next, and is
56 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

the cause of the Dagesh-Lene of the 3 being not influ

enced by the quiescent D .
3. In like manner, when the word preceding ends in
PI (i.e., in H with Mappik [Letter x. § 1] ) or in 1 or 1
that are not quiescent but felt in pronunciation (Letter
viii. § 5 and 6), these, being of course considered as
regular consonants, cease respectively to influence the
letters D £ 3 T 2 3 following them in the next word,
e.g.,—
a^tyr? Pny? in its side thou shalt put (Gen. vi. 16).
iTJH 3 IV1! and Pharaoh commanded (Exod. i. 22).
*73 "»in Ho, every one (Isa. lv. 1).
nttDfi ^^tf my lips Thou shalt open (Ps. li. 17).

4. It need scarcely be observed that any one of the

letters T\ 2 3 1 2 3 commencing a word must lose its
Dagesh-Lene on the word's receiving one of the prefixes
bearing Shvah (of which mention will be made here
after) ; as in the case of 3^3 « dog, which becomes
3^3"] and a dog, 3t?3t7 to a dog, Sec, without a Dagesh-
Lene in the 3 ; for this letter, ceasing then to open a
syllable, cannot retain its Dagesh-Lene.
5. Having fulfilled my promise of giving you some
rules respecting the Dagesh-Lene I shall now request
your Grace's permission to say a few words on the
Dagesh-Forte.
This Dagesh ought properly to stand after a short
vowel, which, being short in utterance, likes to be
supported either by an actual Shvah quiescent, or by
Dagesh-Forte, which, doubling as it does the letter,
virtually carries a quiescent Shvah with it (Letter x.

323 a thief, stands for 32"22 ; rjv>3 a bride, for H1?"'?? .

 LETTER XI. 57

6. However, when a short vowel has the accent, it is

considered to be sufficiently lengthened, and does not then
require the support of Dagesh-Forte, particularly when
it is followed by another short vowel ; as, for example,
"T3j£ a slave ; 1}2 a garment.
7. After any of the quiescent letters 11 1 H Dageslu
Forte can never come ; e.g.,

HDTD one (f) blessed ; 3313 a star ;

"73K'' Ae shall perish ; r?3^0 strife ; H^K how ?

8. Nor can Dagesh-Forte come after a long vowel

(though not followed by any of the quiescents), unless
that vowel have the accent ; e.g.,

"13T he remembered ; 12R he perished.

9. Neither can Dagesh-Forte come after Metheg

(Letter ix. 14), as
rnJIl she dealt faithlessly ; rn^t she remembered.

10. A long vowel (not followed by a quiescent letter)

may, when having an accent, be followed by Dagesh-
Forte, as
13Dfi ye (m) shall encompass ;
li'JT they (m) shall celebrate a feast.

Your Grace will please to observe that I said em

phatically " may be followed ; " this being by no means
a matter of necessity, as there are many cases in which
a long vowel, though bearing an accent, is not followed
by Dagesh, as in
T*b^j?n I have caused to stand, or have raised up ;
ilZlD thou (ni) hast encompassed ;
58 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

this being more particularly the case when the long

vowel bearing the accent is followed by a short
vowel, as
a sceptre, l§p. a book,
and many others; the word PI^N these, presenting
perhaps the only exception to this latter observation,
where the accented long vowel, though followed by a
short vowel, has nevertheless Dagesh-Forte in the next
letter.

P.S. When a word ends in a quiescent PI preceded by either of the

vowels Pathach or Segol, and is joined by Makkiph (Letter ix. §13)
to the following word, the H will not affect the Dagesh-Lene of the
first letter of this word ; e.g.,
IDSrnjtpJM and double money (Gen. xliii. 15) ;
V?S"niD what benefit (Gen. xxxvii. 26).
One or two cases might be mentioned in addition to the above in
which a quiescent letter at the close of a word does not affect the
Dagesh-Lene of a letter that opens the next word ; but really I feel
that I have already taken up so much of your Grace's time upon a
subject not in the least connected with grammar, but only with
Euphony, that it is rather for a crime of commission than for one of
omission that I ought to offer an apology.
 LETTER XIT. 59

LETTER XII.

Hoping that my apology for having so long detained

your Grace upon a subject not forming an essential part
of grammar, but merely a matter of Euphony, may have
been kindly received, I now pass on to lay before you
a subject that is a most essential part of grammar,
namely, that which treats of the laws of Shvah, and
which in a former Letter (vii. § 3) I promised to discuss
in detail by furnishing you with sure rules whereby the
nature of a Shvah should in all cases be known with
certainty.
Shvah moving, being so named because we cannot
rest upon the letter to which it is attached, but must
pass on by annexing it to the syllable following, and
Shvah quiescent being thus named because we must rest
upon the letter to which it is attached (Letter iv. § 3)
by closing with it the syllable at the end of which it
stands, it is clear that Shvah at the beginning of a word
must be moving, as
}!?2U? hear thou (m) ; "H£ rebellion ;
and also that Shvah at the end of a word, whether
expressed or understood, as well as two Shvahs at the end
of a word, must be quiescent, as
3$ he returned ; Dj? he rose ;
JjOJi' thou (f) didst return ; JpDj? thou (f) didst rise.

That, therefore, which here requires our consideration is

merely how to determine the nature of a Shvah in the
60 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

midst of a word ; for which I crave your attention to the

following rules :—
2. Shvah in the midst of a word is moving—
First, beneath a Dageshed letter, as

T)y\ they spake ; H721? they taught ;

Secondly, when it stands beneath the first of two

similar letters following each other, as

i^V his shadow ; behold me ;

Thirdly, when it is compounded with any one of the short

vowels, Pathach, Segol, or Kawmets (Letter vii. § 3), as

"ICS^.Q a standing-place ; 3n.K} he shall love ;

he shall stand ;
Fourthly, when it is preceded by Metheg, as
they heard ; '*n3T she remembered ;

Fifthly, after a long vowel, when it has no accent, as

m'lpj/ (women) standing ; OHEty (men) standing ;

Sixthly, when followed by one of the letters
T\ S 3 T 3 2 without its Dagesh-Lene, as

MftVl they (m) shall stand ;

ISP^tJ. they were gathered together.
3. Of two Shvahs in the midst of a word the first, i.e.,
the one to the right, is quiescent, and the second,
i.e., the one to the left, is moving, as

Hp!51 they (m) shall visit ; TlDSt'II ye (m) shall keep.

4. N.B. That two Shvahs should occur together at

the beginning of a word is an utter impossibility. To
 LETTER XII. Gl

this remark I beg to call your Grace's particular atten

tion by prefixing the mark N.B. to the paragraph (as
will always be done in similar cases hereafter) ; for this
is an observation of the utmost importance, being,
in fact, the point upon which most of the changes in the
vowel-points turn, as will be seen farther on.
5. Shvah in the midst of a word is quiescent^-
First, when it occurs in its simple form under any
of the letters V T\ H N (Letter vii. § 3), as

iTnfi she shall be ; "IDir he shall want ;

Secondly, when followed by Dagesh-Lene, as

22$) he shall lie down ; he shall judge ;

Thirdly, when preceded by an accent that is attached

to either a short or a long vowel, as

Fn3*1 thou (m) hast spoken ; ^/'^ I have prevailed ;

Fourthly, after a short vowel not bearing Metheg, as

he shall cause to visit ; "lOt^J he was guarded.

This last rule requires some important modification

which will form the subject of my next Letter. Before,
however, concluding this, I shall, I am happy to say,
now be able to redeem my promise, given in a former
Letter (vi. § 15), of furnishing you with rules for
discerning the Short from the Long-Kawmets.
6. First, Kawmets, not bearing an accent, and yet
followed by Shvah quiescent, whether expressed or
understood, is Short-Kawmets (§ 2, Rule 5) ; as

DP1! and he arose,

where the accent is on the last syllable but one, and the
62 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Kawrriets which forms the last syllable is without an

accent, and yet is followed by a quiescent Shvah understood
under the D , and, therefore, I conclude that it must be a
Short-Kawmets, for there cannot be a quiescent Shvah
after a long vowel unless this vowel have an accent.
Again, t^N'^.S every man. Here the ^3 has no accent,
it being joined to the next word by Makkiph (Letter ix.
§ 13), and yet the Kawmets is followed by the quiescent
Shvah understood under the *7 . Consequently the
Kawmets is here Short-Kawmets.
Secondly, Kawmets bearing no accent, and yet
followed by Dagesh, must be Short-Kawmets, as
D^PIJNQ dyed red ; "0311 pity me.
Thus have I returned, as soon as our advance in The
Language would permit, to treat at length of subjects
mentioned in an earlier Letter. Your Grace will perceive
that those points were only left unfinished then, because
their full explanation required a further amount of
knowledge than had been communicated. And thus I
hope that the farther we progress, the more the subject
will be gradually developed and expanded, until a
complete knowledge of The Hebrew Language shall
be the reward of your Grace's confidence in him whom
you have condescended to honour with the pleasing task
of guiding you to such an object.

P.S. (a). The words

Grammarians, as here, contrary to all rule, there occurs a Dagesh-
Lene in a letter not opening a syllable. This anomaly is so extra
ordinary that some of the ancient Hebrew Grammarians have
actually recommended to supply fc? at the beginning of them, and to
consider them as though they were written
 LETTER XII. 63

P.S. (b) I beg to inform your Grace that what I said above (§ 2)
respecting Shvah following Metheg is taken almost verbatim from the
great Hebrew Grammarian Ben Zev—a greater authority than whom
I cannot quote. Should Methegs occur in the course of your reading
which may appear to clash with the rules here given, I must beg of
you to bear in mind what I said in a former Letter (ix. P.S. c) that
very many of the Methegs found in our printed copies of The Bible
are spurious, and not deserving a moment's consideration.

The following words will serve as examples, by means

of which your Grace may practise the rules given in this
Letter :—

PRACTICE.

Wi^ lift ye (m.) up. in his dream,

3*1 p draw thou (m.) [men] loving,
near. we shall gather,
h\M} pit, or grave. for thy (f.) sake,
thou ( f. ) hast your husbands,
wrought. : it they went,
ITll spikenard. : i" they (m.) shall
rP^ril and thou (f.) shalt descend,
g°- inquirers of.
n^?^1 and thou (f.) shalt they ( m. ) will
dip. possess,
la^ZP they (m.) shall ye (m.) shall suck,
seek. as honey,
I^fl ye (m.) shall fall. they reigned,
CHinsi I will speak, kings of.
slain of. their (m.) gar
song of. ments.
TTT3 they moved. Thy (m.) holiness,
rife curse of. thy (m.) way.
64 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

VJQItfil and they (m.) ")1CtP a psalm.

heard. tD33S a girdle.
Tlftf^! and they (m.) "ITDN
tT " a cruel man.
sewed. 2^t rr- and he returned.
n^r\F\ they (f.) shall be. N3"*12T
JT T : remember thou
"Tbnn thou (m.) shalt (m.) now.
covet. 3^3] and we encom
*lpnj3 she shall want. passed.
tDSttfp judgment. 1$S~'?3 all who, i.e., who
"f£1P a briar. soever,
purple. and he died.
"»ri3bj? I was little. 133)1 pity us.
I have grown old. "^Jf my strength.
U"}Z?#J we were guarded.
 LETTER XIII. 65

LETTER XIII.

One of the rules laid down in my last Letter (§ 5,

Rule 4) was, that Shvah after a short vowel not bearing
Metheg is quiescent : a rule which is altogether in unison
with what was observed in a former Letter (xi. § 5)
namely, that a short vowel, owing to the shortness of its
sound, likes to be supported either by a quiescent Shvah
in reality, or by a Dagesh-Forte, which, by doubling the
letter in which it is placed, virtually carries a quiescent
Shvah with it. The modification required for this rule
is, that the short vowel should be one originally a vowel,
and not a short vowel substituted for Shvah.
That I may be enabled to explain this now, I must
beg permission to anticipate a few rules of grammar
which will be more fully unfolded hereafter, but which
your Grace will please at present to take for granted.
2. In Hebrew, letters prefixed to words are often used
instead of prepositions in the usual sense of the word ;
thus, for example,

3 signifies in, with, or by ;

5 ,, as, or like ;
7 n to, or for ;

which three letters so used bear, in their natural state,

Shvah, as is here seen.
But when they are to be prefixed to words beginning
with Shvah it would be an utter impossibility for them
to retain their natural point, seeing that The Language
F
66 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

never can admit of two Shvahs standing together at the

beginning of a word (Letter xii. § 4). Hence their
Shvah must be changed into a short vowel, which of
course is not an original voivel, but one substituted for
Shvah ; and as such, this short vowel is in a manner
degraded to such an extent as not to be worthy of the
support of a quiescent Shvah ; and, consequently, a
Shvah following it is not quiescent but moving ; e.g.,
13?1? thy (m) heart : but when I wish to write in thy (m)
heart, were the natural point of the prefix 3 left to it, we
should have ^33^3; where two Shvahs stand together
.at the beginning of the word, which must not be.* I am
therefore compelled to change the Shvah under the letter
3 into a short vowel (which in this instance, according to a
rule of grammar to be given hereafter, is Short- Cherik),
and to write ^33^3 ; the Short- Cherik therefore is here
not an original vowel, but a substitute for Shvah, and,
consequently, not worthy of being supported by a
quiescent Shvah; whence the Shvah under the h is
moving, as is proved by the following letter 3 being
without its Dagesh- Lene, which it would retain were the
Shvah quiescent.
Again, ^21: honey, &yi.$ as, or like honey : here, too,
the Short-Cherik under the prefix 3 is a substitute for
Shvah, and, therefore, the Shvah under the 1 moving,
and the 3 following this Shvah, without its Dagesh-
Lene: so
my word ; ^"13'7I? to my word ;

in which instance the Shvah under the 1 is again

moving for the reason just explained, and the 3 follow
ing it without its Dagesh-Lene.
 LETTER XIII. 67

3. In like manner, signifying a king, when I wish

to write my king, the rule of grammar bids me write,
, the Segol under the 7 being changed into Shvah,
and that under the D into Pathach. Now this change of
Segol into Pathach is a mere matter of euphony, and not
of necessity ; as, were the Segol to be retained (which
usage however forbids), and the word written ,
there would be no trespass against the rules of grammar.
But the case is quite otherwise in the Plural, which is
D^D^p kings : when I have to write their (m) kings,
grammar bids me write DITJ^P ; the Kawmets beneath
the 7 being changed into Shvah, and the Shvah under
the 12 into Pathach : but this changing of Shvah into
Pathach is by no means owing to euphony, but to real
necessity, in order to prevent the existence of two
Shvahs at the beginning of a word ; the Pathach
therefore is not an original vowel, but one substi
tuted for Shvah ; whence the Shvah under 7 is
moving, and the 0 following it without its Dagesh-
. Lene.
4. The cases in which this modification is to be applied
are very numerous indeed ; and for this reason I could
not leave your Grace uninformed of it. Had I been the
discoverer of this rule, I should have termed any short
vowel thus substituted for Shvah a compulsory vowel ;
Rabbi Solomon Heyney, however, the first discoverer of
this valuable rule, gave to such a vowel the name
nVj? ry/Uiri « slight vowel, and I have too much respect
for so distinguished a Grammarian to use any other name
for it in my future Letters.
5. Just as a Slight Vowel is not worthy of the support
f 2
68 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

of a quiescent Shvah, so neither is it of the support of a

Dagesh : hence when words beginning with one of the
letters F\ 3 3 1 3 3 take a prefix with a Slight Vowel,
the Dagesh-Lene must be taken out from such initial
letters ; e.g., D,3'?3 dogs, D^Spb to dogs.
 LETTER XIV. 69

LETTER XIV.

We have seen (Letter vi. §$4 and 13) that the vowel
Chowlem may be written either in its full form, i.e., as a
dot over a 1 , or in its deficient form, i.e., as a mere dot
placed over the left of a letter ; now when the letter ti> ,
which sounds sh, is preceded by a consonant requiring
Chowlem, in order to avoid the concurrence of two dots,
the dot of the V} is sometimes made use of to supply that
Chowlem, in which case that dot fulfils two distinct
functions, namely, it shows that the letter sounds as sh,
and also it serves as a Chowlem to the preceding letter ;
thus, instead of writing Ht^iJ a creditor, we sometimes
find H^J , in which case the letter 2 having neither
vowel nor Shvah, we naturally conclude that the dot
over the $ must serve here both as a point determining
the pronunciation of the letter over which it stands to be
sh, and also as a Chowlem to the 2 .
2. When the letter preceding bears either a vowel or
Shvah then we know, of course, that the dot serves no
other purpose than to determine the sound of the letter
to be sh : e.g., htt/D a proverb, must be read Maw-shawl ;
and "Vti'Q rule thou (m), must be read Mshawl ; but
a ruler, must be read Mow-shdl, because the □
bearing neither a vowel nor Shvah, we must look to the
dot of the Shin to serve as its vowel.
3. It should be borne in mind that the dot over the
Vj is never used to perform these two functions when it
70 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

is preceded by X ; e.g., t^KI a head, must not be read as

two syllables, Row-owsh, but as one syllable, Rowsh.
Also, jill'N"! first, must not be read as three syllables,
Ri-ow-shown, but as two syllables, Ri-shown.
4. Again, in the case of tf (which sounds as s), when
it requires the vowel Chowlem, the dot on the left
may likewise be used to perform two distinct functions,
namely, to show that the pronunciation of the letter is to
be s, and also that its vowel point is Chowlem. Thus,
for example, instead of Niiti' one (m) hating, in order to
avoid the concurrence of the two dots we frequently find
; where the & , having neither vowel nor Shvah,
we are led to conclude that its own dot must also be its
vowel.
5. It is however otherwise when the \tf has either a
vowel or Shvah, when, of course, the dot of the \tf cannot
serve also as a vowel, seeing that a letter cannot have at
the same time two vowels, or a vowel and a Shvah ; thus
iMtS' he hated, must be read Satv-nd ; and hating,
must be read Snow.
6. Your Grace will sometimes find the letter IP with
two dots over it, one to the right and the other to the
left (thus St* ), and in such a case the determining of the
respective functions of these two dots will depend on the
position of the letter :—
First, When it stands at the beginning of a word,
or when in the midst of a word it is preceded by a
letter having a vowel or Shvah, the dot to the right
determines the pronunciation of the letter to be sh, and
that to the left serves as its Chowlem ; e.g., "1??^ a keeper,
should be read Show-mar; "l?pttfn the keeper should be
read Hd-show-mdr ; IDJJ'S as, or like a keeper, should be
read Cshow-mar ;
 LETTER XIV.

Secondly, When with two dots (thus W) terminates a

word, or when, standing in the midst of a word, it is pre
ceded by a letter having neither a vowel nor a Shvah (in
which case the must have either a vowel or Shvah), the
dot to the right serves as a Chowlem to the preceding letter,
and that to the left determines the pronunciation of the
W to be s ; e.g., W^7\ to seize, or take hold of, should be
read Taw-phows ; 0^3 spice, should be read Bow-sem ;
and a^St^a men carrying, should be read Now-s'em.
7. "When the letter Vaw, with a dot over it, is preceded
by a letter bearing a vowel or a Shvah whether simple
or compound, the Vaw with the dot must never be
taken for a Chowlem, but the 1 must be taken to repre
sent the letter v, and the dot to be its vowel ; e.g.,
]!}! iniquity, must be read Aw-vown, as the letter ]}
cannot possibly have a Kawmets and a Chowlem at the
same time; so fiiJlV. iniquities, should be read 'Vow-
nowth, seeing that# cannot have a compound Shvah and a
Chowlem at the same time. And again, when Vaw, with
a dot over it, has a vowel attached to it, the dot must
serve as a Chowlem to the preceding letter, and the
T serve as a v to the vowel beneath it ; as in Hin one (m)
existing, which must be read How-veh.
8. Again, a Vaw with a dot in it, bearing a vowel or
a Shvah, must not be taken for Shurik, but as a 1 having
Dagesh ; e.g., T\y$ he commanded, must be read TsUvaw,
seeing that if 1 were here to represent the vowel Shurik,
there could not be a Kaivmets under it : so Dmif t : 1 she
commanded, should be read Tsuvthawh, seeing that
Shurik could not have a Shvah beneath it.
Your Grace will perhaps be surprised at my en
cumbering you with so many rules upon a point on
72 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

which I might have trusted to your own unassisted

reason as a sufficient guide to preserve you from falling
into error. I considered it to be my duty however
to treat of the subject at full length, lest, through my
failing to present you with a complete discussion, you
might at any time be embarrassed at meeting with
instances of this description.
9. One more observation and I shall have finished
the rules for Hebrew pronunciation.
In all the instances hitherto quoted, your Grace will
have perceived that in Hebrew the vowels are always
heard after the consonants to which they are attached ;
the letters n and fl (i.e., PI with Mappik) however, at the
end of a word, when bearing Pathach, and preceded by
one of the four long vowels Tsayre, Long-Cherik,
Chowlem, or Shurik, are read in an inverted order;
namely, instead of being read Cha, Ha, they are to be
read ach, ah. The Pathach in such instances being said
to be Pathach Furtivum (from the Latin fur, a thief ), on
account of its stealthily creeping in between the conso
nant, beneath which it stands, and the long vowel pre
ceding it. Thus, for example,—

PP! scent, must be read, not Rd-cha, but Rd-ach ;

PPtfc' a plant, „ not Si-chd, but St-ach ;
POS high (m), „ not Gaw-vow-ha, but
Gaw-vow-ah ;
Pjn wind „ not Ru-cha, but Ru-hch.

P.S.—This is also the case with the letter "2 bearing Pathach at the
end of a word (when preceded by one of the four long vowels above
 LETTER XIV. 73

mentioned), which, in countries where a nasal sound is given to it,

would be heard not before, but after the Pathach attached to it ; thus
in the dissyllabical word a companion, the last syllable would be
sounded by them precisely as the French preposition en (in).

The words given below are intended to exemplify the

rules laid down in this Letter.

PRACTICE.

Moses. nfcflJ to do.

I have drawn him Pl^jtP he shall do.
out. nt£ty one (m.) doing.
the ruler, NiW to carry.
dominion, one (m.) carrying.
to rule, niNt^ (women) carry
riches. ing.
I have made rich, ED&ttf one (m.) judging.
T three, D3ttf he judged.
thirty. £3S#Q judgment.
they (m.) shall "sjtfn to withhold.
grope about, rOfcTI thou (m.) didst
heads, withhold,
our head, one (m.) watch
the first {phi. m.) ing,
at the first, he watched.
satiety. IpW1? for the purpose of
I have been satis watching.
fied with, D^nirijn by your (m.)
they (m.) shall be iniquities.
satisfied with. "OljtfS to my iniquity.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

one (m.) borrow to cause to be

ing, high,
njn calamity, ni^ a tablet.
nitt* equivalent. H3 strength.
niK
T • he desired. np^D booty.
rvi.X thou (m.) hast n¥i~l one (m.) murder
desired, ing.
thou (m.) wast Vjy\U) one (m.) hearing.
commanded. JTJ?"1 a firmament.
PHV? one (m.) com an awl.
manding, J71„-i|)V a frog.
njl/ an overthrow. J/bttf to obey.
n^5JO one (m.) causing one (m.) leprous.
to be high.
 LETTER XV. 75

LETTER XV.

I promised in the opening of my course to furnish your

Grace with a literal translation, accompanied with
notes explanatory and critical, of the Commemoration of
the Virtuous Woman, given in the last chapter of The
Proverbs. Now, though I am not able at present to give
you a grammatical analysis of the words, and to point
out the construction of the sentences ; yet I see no reason
to withhold me, now at the close of the Elementary Part
of our subject, from presenting you with that portion of
The Bible as a Reading Lesson : and, forasmuch as it
always seems a tedious task to read and pronounce words
of which the meaning is unknown, I give the words
in their order, one under another, and to each word its
literal signification at its side ; at the end also of each
verse I put two dots in a vertical line, thus ( : ), to the
left of the final word, and, besides, draw two lines, thus
( = ), beneath it, in order to mark the distinction of the
verses. You will perceive, likewise, that the first letter
of each verse is given in a larger form than the other
letters, that you may observe the alphabetical arrange
ment of the piece in the Hebrew original, namely, that the
successive verses commence with the successive letters of
the alphabet, beginning with N and ending with T\ .
I should, however, strongly recommend your Grace,
after having gone through this Reading Lesson, to read
the same passage (Proverbs xxxi. verse 10 to the end of
the book) in your Hebrew Bible, in order that you may
render yourself more familiar with reading from right to
76 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

left. At the same time I should advise you not to pay

the least attention to the accents, which in the Books of
Job, The Psalms, and The Proverbs, are anything but
regular, and, therefore, are altogether disregarded by
Scholars.
Your Grace will, no doubt, be induced to read the
translation of the above-named passage in The English
Bible, when you will perceive a great difference in the
Tenses, since almost all the Past Tenses here translated as
such are, in The English Bible, rendered as Present
Tenses. I might indeed plead in my defence that
the translation here given is literal, but I cannot help
stating, in addition to this, my impression that the whole
passage refers to some departed "Woman, whose equal in
female virtues the Royal eulogist thought that it would
be difficult to find ; and if so (which the expression
" all the days of her life" in verse 12, seems strongly to
confirm), the Past Tenses stand most fitly and properly.
Verses 25, 26, and 27, plainly refer to the declining
years of the subject of the Eulogy, when, as in verses 28
and 29, her family seemed to think it right to cheer her
drooping spirits by well-timed praises.
In the last two verses, however, we read again the
words of Solomon, who concludes his Eulogy by de
claring how well deserved were his commendations, and
by calling on all others to unite with him in celebrating
the memory of one who was a fearer of GOD.

fj~j~ In the following translation italics are used not to express

emphasis, as in the Letters, but to point out the words, not expressed
in the Hebrew, which must be supplied in English.
 LETTER XV.

PROVERBS, Chapter xxxi.

V. 10. JlBM A woman of) . . L .

T " >- (i.e., a virtuous woman)
Tn virtue \
who
will find (English, can find) ?
prPT seeing that far
I (i.e., her value is far
beyond rubies / t e
' ' ; . 'greater than that ot
: FHjP *s her price ^ rubies)

V. 11. nC23 It hath trusted^ , , -

(Erie., the heart of
PJ3
l in her
, ,
lher ,
her Ikhusband trusted
21 the heart of . . .
l " i i ■• I in her)
n7#3 her husband I
bhT0 and so gain \ (Eng., and therefore
K1? not ( he used not to be in
: "IDJT. he would lack j want of gain).

V. 12. inn1??^ She did him

3i£D good
tib] and not (Eng., and no)
in harm
bi all
^D) the days of
: iT'.n her life.

V. 13. nt^"!"! She sought for

"lip^ wool
78 HEBREW GRAMMA E.

0^^551 and flax ;

(J>J/F0 and wrought it
p$rq with the willingness of) (Eng., with
: rT§3 her hands | willing hands).

V. 14. nrvH She was

ni"3»2> like ships of) (Eng., like trading
"iniD a merchant £ vessels) ;
. ) (Eng., inasmuch as
pmEO
' T :v from
, afar,, , . / she
, was wont, to
. ,bring
.
W2r\ she would bring > , ,
" 7 , . . I her provision from a
nori7
=L=L^ her provision
r \ ,. „ N
I distance).

V. 15. Ei^l Yea she rose

Tij/3 in its being yet) (Eng., while it yet
PlS?S night C was night) ;
\F\iy\ and she gave
food
PHV37 for her household,
phi and a rule
I fTTH,!^1? for her maidens,

V. 16. •"JPPJ She contemplated the purchase of

mfr
*.* T a field
I'^nn^l and bought it ;
"HSD by means of the fruit of (Eng., by
means of the produce of )
iTBD
T V - her hands
njypi she planted
: D"13 a vineyard.
 LETTER XV. 79

v. 17. mjft She girded

(Eng., she girded her
with might
loins with vigour).
rronn her loins
and she strengthened
: !TriJ7i"lt her arms.

V. 18. tt Hath she perceived (Eng., When

that once she perceived
good was that her traffic
mriD her traffic 1 was prosperous,
fAe/i not then would not
nam would go out her lamp go out
even in the night even in the
her lamp night).

V. 19. Her hands

t : • she hath put forth (Eng., laid)
on the spindle ;
yea her hands
have laid hold of
the distaff.

V. 20. T - Her hand

PlfcHB she spread out
ityh to the poor man ;
rpTl yea, her hands
she put forth
: \V^^7 to the needy man.

V. 21. itb Not (Eng., never)

80 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

KTfl would she be in fear

nrV3^
T " '• for her household
on account of snow ;
^3 for
*72 the whole of
HJV3 her household
was clothed with
.' D,3t^ scarlet garments.

V. 22. D^3")D Embroidered coverings

Tttfi/Jl she wrought
H1? for herself ;
\t}$ fine linen
and purple
: rft^lh1? for her clothing.

V. 23. JflO Well known

DV^3 in the gates
was her husband,
if13ttf3 on his sitting (Eng., when he sat)
D# with
*$>\ the elders of
^eland.

V. 24. l^D A linen vesture

nr\jyj/ she wrought
"131D^T and sold it;
"lijrn yea, a girdle
she delivered
: >3Jt;a^7 to the merchant
 LETTER XV. 81

(i.e., Enrobed in
V. 25. Might the character of
•nrn and glory were fortitude and glory
her clothing evinced by her life,
and so she smiled she smiled on the
at the day coming of the latter
even the latter day J day, i.e., the decline
of life).

(i.e., When her

\
strength failed, so
V. 26. T • Her mouth
rr>3
that she could no
she then opened
■with wisdom, longer be occupied in
t : t; active domestic duties,
rnirn and the law of
she employed herself
kindness
in giving instruction
was upon
in wisdom and huma
her tongue
nity to her children
and household).

(i.e., Though un-

V. 27. At the same time 1
lable herself to
she was watchingj
'work any longer,
the movements of
she kept a watch
her house ;
ful eye over her
on1?] so that the bread of,
domestic affairs,
idleness
and by no means
not
| would eat the
she would eat
bread of idleness).

V. 28. lOjJ They rose,

rPJP
T V T viz.,' her children rose,'
G
82 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nn#8?! and pronounced her blessed,

her husband also rose
I pMrn and praised her : saying,

V. 29. Mia"! " " Many

daughters
ItfJJ have practised
virtue,
int?! but thou (f.)
T\hy
"T hast risen)I (Eng., ,hast surpassed)
ill above )
» : H3^3 them (f.) all."

V. 30. ">J?^ Fallacious is i (i.e., Female

| O'f the gracefulness, ( gracefulness and
^rn and vain is ( beauty are falla-
the beauty ofwoman J cious and vain) ;
nt^N
T ' a woman
n^'V wAo is a fearer of
m.T JEHOVAH,
she only
: bhntVli should be praised.

V. 31. Wfl Give ye (m.)

unto her
n&O of the fruit of
iTT
T VT her hands *;
m^iTO and they shall
(Eng., Let her
praise her
own works pub
Onj}f2 in the gates
licly proclaim
ItVtySJQ viz., her works shall)
her praise).
praise her \
 LETTER XV. 83

This Eulogy might, therefore, without altering the

true force of the Tenses, be rendered in intelligible
English as follows: —

10. A virtuous woman who can find ?

For far doth her value exceed that of rubies.
11. The heart of her husband hath trusted in her, .
And therefore he could not have lack of gain.
12. Good hath she done him, and no harm,
All the days of her life.
13. For wool she sought, and for flax ;
And with willing hands she wrought it.
14. Like the ships of the merchant was she,
She brought in her provision from far.
15. While yet it was night she rose,
And gave forth food for her household,
And appointed a task for her maidens.
16. A field she thought to buy, and she bought it,
By the produce of her handiwork she planted a
vineyard.
17. She girded her loins with vigour,
And her arms she strengthened.
18. Perceived she that good was her traffic?
Then even at night was her lamp not extinguished.
19. Her hands she put forth to the spindle,
And her hands laid hold of the distaff.
20. Her hand she opened wide to the poor,
Yea she stretched out her hands to the needy.
21. Never would she fear the snow for her household,
For her household were all clothed in vestures of
scarlet.
22. Embroidered robes she wrought for herself,
Fine linen and purple for her clothing.
84 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

23. Well known in the gates was her husband,

On his sitting with the elders of the land.
24. She wrought a linen vesture and sold it,
And to the merchant she delivered a girdle.
25. Might and glory were her clothing,
And she smiled therefore at the coming of the latter
day.
26. Her mouth then she opened with wisdom,
And the law of kindness was upon her tongue ;
27. Still was she watching the movements of her house
hold,
For the bread of idleness she would not eat.
28. Her children rose up and called her blessed,
Her husband, too, and he praised her, saying,
29. " Many daughters have done virtuously,
" But thou hastybr surpassed them all."—
30. Fallacious is Gracefulness, and Beauty is vain ;
A woman fearing Jehovah, let her be praised :
31. Give ye to her of the fruit of her hands,
And in the gates let her own works praise her.
 THE GEAMMAR

(IN CONTINUATION OF THE ELEMENTS)

01

THE HEBEEW LANGUAGE.

FIRST COURSE.

H
 HEBREW GRAMMAR

LETTER XVI.

My Lady Dochess,
Haying arrived at the conclusion of the Elementary
part of our study, which in this, as in all other languages,
is the least interesting, we come now to treat of a
more engaging subject, the Grammatical Structure of
The Language.
Your Grace has doubtless heard that the Hebrew is a
very concise Language. This conciseness chiefly results
from the privilege which it has of using letters, sometimes
prefixed to words, and sometimes affixed to them, where
complete words would in other languages be required.
For example, if to 11 a lamp, I prefix *7 , so as to obtain
the signification of the word thus produced is to a
lamp ; and again, if to this I affix ?[ , I have ^i1? ,
which signifies to thy (m) lamp. If again to this I
prefix 1 , I have IIJ1?! , signifying and to thy (m)
lamp. Thus in Hebrew we have one word, to express
which in English four words are required.
In verbs this disparity in the two languages is even
more conspicuous ; e.g., of the verb 25~\ to ride, I can
h 2
88 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

form ?pr03irn , to express which in English I must

use seven words, viz., and I will came thee (m) to ride.
2. A language surely which enjoys such privileges
may well be concise ; and as this conciseness, arising
from the capability of words to receive prefixes and
affixes, forms one of the most important features of The
Language, I desire to direct to it your Grace's earliest
attention. Before, however, doing so, I must premise that,
in words quoted here as examples, the letters composing
the original words in each case are said to be Radical
letters ; and those which form prefixes and affixes are
said to be Servile : e.g., in the word ?J"j3l?!) and to thy (m)
lamp, the letters 2 and "I are said to be Radical, and all
the rest Servile : and again in the.word 'pj?34H0! and I
will cause thee (m) to ride, the letters 3 3 1 are Radical,
and all the rest Servile.
3. All the letters of the Alphabet may be used for
Radicals, but for Serviles only half of them, namely,
3/DT HMD ] J"P N : these may be seen to be eleven
in number, and are thus written, though not in alpha
betical order, after the example of the Hebrew Gram
marians.
The prefix, on which it is my intention to dwell in this
letter, is fl ; this prefix is used for two different purposes,
to be distinguished by its punctuation ; namely,—

FIRST—
4. H bearing Pathach, and followed by Dagesh in the
next letter, represents the Definite Article, e.g., Tits' an ox,
")Wn the ox ; a king, tfjlpn the king.
5. When it happens to be prefixed to a word beginning
with one of the letters ~\ J} H K , which are incapable of
receiving Dagesh (Letter x. § 7), the Pathach under the
 LETTER XVI. 89

H is made Long-Kawmets ; e.g., "litf light, "liXH the

fo^A? "in a mountain, PHPI * towards a mountain, rnnn
towards the mountain ; *T3# a slave, "T?#n the sifat;e ;
Eton a Aead, Bfthll the Aead.
N.B. The lengthening of a short into a long vowel in
this and such like cases is said to be a Compensation for
the Dagesh which the following letter ought to have, but
cannot receive. Under such circumstances

Pathach will generally become Kawmets,

Short- Cherik and Segol „ ,, Tsayre,
And Kibbuts „ „ Chowlem.
6. The letter n , though it cannot receive Dagesh, in
general obstinately refuses to compensate for it, refuses,
that is, to lengthen the Pathach of the Definite Article into
Long-Kawmets, the broad sound of the Pathach suiting
this letter too well for it to be dispensed with ; e.g., flN!3n
a sin-offering, nNESnn the sin-offering. This is also some
times the case with H ; as one (m) going, Tj^hfl the
one (m) going.
7. When the Definite Article happens to stand before
a word beginning with n bearing Long-Kawmets,
Euphony requires that the Pathach beneath the PI
should be changed into Segol, whether the word be
monosyllabic or dissyllabic, e.g., JPJ (in pause Jn) a feast,
jnn the feast ; D3PI a wise man, D3nn the wise man.
8. This is likewise the case with dissyllabic words
beginning with H or ]J bearing Long-Kawmets, and
having the accent on the last syllable ; as D^C mountains,
tynnn
r T v the mountains ; D,_IJ/
>. f cities,' D1!!/!!
J* T v the cities.
* The regular form, though in Gen. xiv. 10 we find <"Pn for the
sake of Euphony.
90 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

SECONDLY—
9. The letter H bearing Chateph-Pathach (Letter vii.
§ 3) is used, when prefixed to words, to denote Interro
gation ( Whether ?), and sometimes also to express
Surprise (corresponding in some manner to the French
est-ce que) ; e.g., l^SH K1H he [is] the king, Nin "^90
whether a king [is] he ? i.e., is he a king f TV will go
down, "TPn whether will he go down ? i.e., will he go down ?
(Your Grace will, I hope, excuse my sacrificing the
English idiom whenever I wish to be literal.)
10. As two Shvahs can never stand together at the
beginning of a word (Letter xii. § 4), whenever this fT of
Interrogation is prefixed to a word the first letter of
which bears a Shvah, the Chateph-Pathach of the H
is turned into Pathach ; in which case this prefix is
distinguished from the Definite Article, (1) by its not
being followed by Dagesh, and (2) by its not having its
Pathach lengthened into Kawmets before letters which
cannot admit Dagesh : e.g., !"D"13 a blessing ; nZP3n
[Deut. xxxiii. 1] the blessing, n2n;jn [Gen. xxvii. 38]
whether a blessing ? (where the H is known to be Inter
rogative by its not being followed by Dagesh).
Again truth, ^5?C [Gen. xxxii. 11] the truth,
r^gn [Gen. xlii. 16] whether truth ? (where the H is
known to be Interrogative by its Pathach not being
made Long-Kawmets).
11. The Interrogative H will mostly have Pathach
instead of Chateph-Pathach before words beginning with
a guttural letter, though bearing a vowel : e.g., GOD,
COS^D r\W.) *7Sn [Job. viii. 3] whether will GOD pervert
justice? "Ij?n searching, ")j?nn [Job. xi. 7] whether search
ing ? D# time, [2 Kings v. 26] whether (is if) a time?
 LETTER XVI. 91

In all these instances the prefix cannot be mistaken for the

Definite Article, as the Pathach is not lengthened into
Long-Kawmets.
As I hope to be able to conclude the subject of the
Prefixes in my next Letter I beg to defer giving practice
upon the rules laid down in this until then, in order that
the complete subject may be embraced in one Exercise.
I have the honour, &c, &c.

P.S. (a). The prefix used, as stated above (§ 4), to represent the
Definite Article, is sometimes also made use of as a Relative Pronoun
corresponding to the English that tchich : e.g., 2it3ni. "lE^n /TiDE"!
[Deut vi. 18), literally, And thou (m) shalt do the right and the
good; i.e., That which is right, and that which is good.
P.S. (b). The same prefix is also sometimes used to mark the
Vocative Case: e.g., Tffin [Jer ii. 31] 0 generation, 2?iSn [Psalm
ix. 7] O enemy.
P.S. (c). The word <"l3"T3n f quoted above (§ 10) from Gen.
xxvii. 38, is here written, as it properly should be, with a simple
Shvah under the 2 , though in The Bible the 3 appears with a
Chateph-Pathach, which is a great anomaly.
P.S. (d). "When the first letter of a word having the Definite
Article happens to bear Shvah, great liberties are sometimes taken
with the Dagesh-Forte by which the Definite 1 should by right be
followed. Thus, for example, in the words "ll^n the river,
the Levites, whenever they occur in The Scriptures, no
Dagesh is seen after the Definite Article. Hence it is clear that the
rules laid down in § 10 may not always be found to hold good
in Scripture : in composition, however, they should always be strictly
adhered to.
P.S. (e). Before words beginning with a guttural letter bearing
Kawmets the Interrogative n takes Segol for the sake of Euphony :
thus ^^NrT [Num. xi. 12] Have I (conceived all this people)?
Pjnn [Num. xiii. 18] Whether strong? rftyp [Job xiii. 25]
Whether a leaf?
92 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XVII.

The Prefixes, on which I intend to dwell in this Letter,

are five in number, of which one, namely the letter T , is
used as a Conjunction, and the four D 733 as Prepo
sitions.
2. The letter 1 , when used merely as a conjunction
to signify and, or, seeing that, whereas, Sec, has for its
natural point Shvah : e.g.,
in^ijtl D"T$n [Gen. ii. 25] the man and his wife ;
iSKI [Exod. xxi. 15] his father or his mother ;
[Gen. xviii. 18] seeing that Abraham.
3. Before words beginning with Shvah, the Conjunc
tion 1 becomes 1 , because two Shvahs cannot stand
together at the beginning of a word ; e.g., $21. honey,
!£*3"P and honey.
4. This is also the case (but only for the sake of
Euphony) before any one of the labial letters ^03: e.g.,
P3 between, ^31 and between ; tOSt^D justice, CDSti'ZJI and
justice ; njns Pharaoh, njnQl and Pharaoh.
5. Before words beginning with 1 bearing Shvah,
since in such cases also the Shvah of the prefix cannot
stand for the same reason as in § 3, the 1 takes a Cherik,
and the 11 then, dropping its Shvah, blends with the
Cherik preceding it, and thus forms a Long- Cherik ; e.g.,
fP"3^ her children, HH^l [Exod. xxi. 4] and her chil
dren.
6. Before compound Shvahs, the Shvah of the 1 (being
forced, as in the cases treated of in § 3 and § 5, to become
a vowel), assimilates itself to the compound Shvah
 LETTER XVII. 93

by becoming the short vowel with which that Shvah is

compounded; e.g., I?1?^ your (f) father, IS^NI and
your (f) father ; TV^X. truth, riDgl and truth; a ship,
^Sl and a ship.
7. When preceding a word which has a distinctive
accent on its first syllable, 1 , for the sake of Euphony,
receives Kawmets ; e.g., nffll D^l fT$Tl [Gen.
viii. 22] and summer and winter, and day and night.
8. The prefixes
3 signifying in, or with,)
2 „ as, or like, >
h „ to, or for, )
are all perfectly alike in their natural punctuation, as
well as in the changes which that punctuation has
to undergo ; namely,
I. Their natural point is Shvah ; e.g., ^"1*1 a way,
■=IT73 in, or with a way, ^"VJ3 as, or like a way,
"=!~n? to, or for a way.
II. Before words beginning with Shvah these prefixes
change their Shvah into Short- Cherik (which is of course
a Slight Vowel, Letter xiii. $ 4) ; e.g, ^5 a kid, HJ3 in,
or with a kid, HJ? as, or like a kid, ",-TJ*7 to, or for a
kid.
III. Before a word beginning with one of the com
pound Shvahs the Shvahs of these prefixes (being forced
to become vowels) assimilate themselves to the short
vowel which appears in that compound Shvah ; e.g,
lion an ass, "liDOg in, or with an ass, &c. ; a
fool, h^vtl to, or for a fool, &c. ; nl"}*? ships, ni^S| as,
or like ships, &c.
IV. Before words beginning with ^ bearing Shvah,
these prefixes take a Cherik. and the ^ then, dropping its
Shvah, blends with the Cherik preceding it, and thus
94 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

forms Long-Cherik ; e.g., '^"P'l my right hand; TPS3 in,

or with, &c, TP"3 os, or like, &c, TOv to, or
for, &c.
9. I. The prefix £ signifying from, of, or dint of,
bears Short-Cherik always followed by Dagesh- Forte ;
e.g., Dr6 bread, Dfl^O from, or of bread.
II. Before words beginning with letters which cannot
receive Dagesh, the Short-Cherik (according to the rule
for Compensation mentioned in a former Letter [xvi.
$ 5, N.B.]) becomes Tsayre ; e.g., ti^l* a man, B^ljtQ from
a man.
III. When this O is prefixed to a word beginning with
1 bearing Shvah, this 1 , dropping its Shvah, blends with
the Cherik preceding it, and so forms Long-Cherik;
as his right hand, i^D^D from his right hand.
10. Before O^ri1?^ God, the prefixes 7 3 3 1 take each
one of them Tsayre, and then the X , dropping its com
pound Shvah, becomes quiescent ; i.e., we have D^ri^K."! ,

11. Before the Sacred Name PlJiT) JEHOVAH, these

four prefixes receive Pathach, as HiiTl , n1«T^ , &c,
the 11 dropping its Shvah.
The prefix D , however, then takes Tsayre, and the i
retains its Shvah ; as niiTD from JEHOVAH.
12. When any one of the three prefixes 7 3 3 is to be
placed before a Noun in the definite state (i.e., having the
Definite Article), the H of the Definite Article is in
general dropped, and its vowel point given to the prefix ;
thus, D^Dttf heaven has its definite state, CDt^n the
heaven ; but instead of D^pt^HS. in the heaven — a form
which, however, is found in the Scriptures, though rarely
—the contracted forms 0?ID#3 , , D?Dt£>'? in, as,
to the heaven, more frequently occur.
 LETTER XVII. 95

In like manner T# a city, has its definite state TJ7H

the city, which on taking these affixes gives , ,

Again a cloud, has its definite state IJJ/n (Letter xvi.

§ 8), which on taking these affixes gives ]2tJ3,
N.B. The prefixes 1 and D have not, however, this
privilege, hut in their case we must write the full forms ;
as, for instance, , DJCt^O; T#ni , T^HD ;

13. In some cases, however, the full particle |D from, or

o£ is given instead of its abbreviated form the prefix Q ;
e.y., D^Dt^n )? /rem £A« heaven, |3J^n ]D yrom £Ae
cloud, &c.
Though the rules for the punctuation of the several
prefixes and their various modifications have been fully
detailed in this Letter, perhaps too fully for one so ready
of apprehension as I know your Grace to be, yet the
many shades of the significations of these prefixes, and
the different purposes to which they are applied in The
Language have, I confess, been entirely unnoticed.
This, however, I must beg to defer to a subsequent
period, lest, by laying before your notice now things for
which you will have no occasion as yet, I should create
confusion and embarrassment ; and, therefore, I will for
the present only ask your attention to the following
Exercises, which will serve as Practice upon the rules
here laid down ; and I would here beg, once for all, to
enter an apology for entirely sacrificing the English
idiom to the Hebrew throughout the Exercises.

P.S. (a). In cases where there can be no ambiguity, the same punc
tuation is sometimes given to the Interrogative n as to that which repre
sents the Definite Article: as in 0,?0^?'} [Num. xiii. 19] whether in
encampments ? where the H cannot be mistaken for the Definite Article,
for the Definite Article must come between the Preposition and the Noun
96 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

(see § 12), the same as in English, and, consequently, we must then

have had D>?0'?U? . This, however, is a liberty we ought not to take
in composition, and, therefore, when we have to write the Hebrew foi"
whether as a king ? we ought to write , without a Dagesh in
the 2 —the regular form according to rule, and, in fact, not uncommon
in The Scriptures. And so again we find <I?-,W,!7 [Num. xi. 12]
whether I? where too the n cannot be mistaken for the Definite
Article, as this could not be prefixed to a Pronoun.
P.S. (b). When the conjunctive 1 is prefixed to words beginning
with either H or n bearing a compound Shvah and followed by , , the
Shvah of the 1 is changed into Short- Cherik, or Segol, while the
compound Shvah attached to the H or H is turned into a simple
Shvah ; e.g., Vn live ye (m), [Gen. xlii. 18] and live ye (m) ;
T.n oe thou (m), fP^O [Gen. xii. 2] and be thou (m).

EXERCISE II.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

,TJJ?1 ,T^3p ,TJ33 ,TJ33 ,TJfl ,'TJJ

,TJ3ij»»1 ,TJ3I?1 .TJjn^l ,TJ331 , TjaHDI ,1^331

:TJ33H ,Tjjn
,igmoe ,T3^n" ,s"i3J? '
:-r3^3r? ,-T3#n ,-13^31 ,T3#31 ,"T3J?3
j DSnnii , osnoi , u^rh , 3 Dsn
,nn3j;pT , nniaj/ni .rrjigrri ,rn:uc£ ' ,*rrp%

: n^Ti
.rrjla'p ,nnla"ft .rrrta-p ,rni3Ti ,,rrrto£|

1 A prince. i A slave. 3 A wise man. 4 Service.

5 An inheritance. 6 A bee.
 LETTER XVII. 91

EXERCISE in.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
(In cases admitting two forms, it will be well to write both.—
Where the particle Whether f written within brackets, is used, it is to
be rendered by H Interrogative.)

A chief.—And a chief.—In, or with a chief.—To the chief.—And

as a chief.—From the chief.—And to a chief.—And from a chief.—

—As the chief.—[Whether] as a chief ?—And from the chief.—And
to the chief.
A man.—The man.—And a man. —And to a man.—And to the

man.—[Whether] to a man?—[Whether] to the man?—And from

the man.—And in, or with the man.
A fooL—And a fool.—And the fool.—To a fool.—And to a fool.—
V>1H
And to the fool.—[Whether] to a fool ?—And from a fool.—And from
the fool.—As a fool.—As the fool.— [Whether] as a fool?

Salvation.—The salvation.—To, or for salvation.—From salvation.

t :
—And from salvation.
Honey.—As honey.—In, or with honey.—To honey.—[Whether]

as honey ?—And from the honey. —And as the honey.—And to the

98 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XVIII.

From what has been hitherto said of the prefixes your

Grace will have perceived that no one of them affects in
the slightest degree the punctuation of the Noun to
which it is prefixed. The prefix fl indeed, when it
represents the Definite Article, puts a Dagesh-Forte into
the first letter of the Noun to which it is joined, and so
does also the prefix D ; but neither of these disturbs the
punctuation of the Noun. Had this been also the case
with the affixes, I might have at once proceeded to lay
them before your Grace's notice, but unfortunately this
is not the case ; I say unfortunately, for the rules on
Nouns Substantive being by far more numerous and
intricate than those on any other part of speech, I should
have gladly delayed dwelling on them at all until we
should have gone through a much greater extent of
Grammar; and this especially, because I know from
experience that owing to the great length at which some
grammarians have treated of this subject at so early a
stage, many students have, almost at the opening of their
course, been deterred from further pursuing it. As,
however, the manner in which they are affected by the
affixes renders it absolutely necessary to dwell upon the
nature of the Nouns to some extent, I must crave your
attention to the following remarks, which I purpose to
make as short as possible, intending to give some further
details hereafter, though not until we shall have arrived
at a much later period of our study, almost, indeed,
at its close.
 LETTER XVIII. 99

A Hebrew Noun in the Singular Number may be

declined thus :—
JV3 Nom., A house ;
IT31? Dat., To, ox for a house ;
rP3 Accus., A house;
Ablat i^n' or w^ a h°use >
r\]2D) ' (From a house ;
T\)32 Comparative, As, or like a house ;
JT3 Vocative, O house, [in a few instances JVSH
(Letter xvi. P.S. b)].
2. We here see that the original punctuation of the
Noun has not been disturbed in any of the Cases, but we
also see that the Genitive Case is missing ; and for very
good reason it is so, for The Hebrew Language has no
Genitive Case, in which regard it is wholly different from
any of the European languages, whether living or dead,
that have Cases. To this peculiar Feature of The
Language I beg your Grace's particular attention ; and
in order to clearly exhibit the manner in which the
Hebrew differs in this respect from any of those lan
guages, I must beg your permission to introduce one of
them here, as, for instance, the Latin.
The word TV3 corresponds, as we have seen, to the
Latin Domus, a house; again, the word corres
ponds to the Latin oratio, prayer : now if we wished to
express in Latin A house of prayer, we should have to
write Domus orationis ; or, if I may be allowed to write
after the Hebrew manner from right to left,
2 1
orationis Domus
which in Hebrew must
be given by
n^DJp prayer T^^l house of
100 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

■where we see that the word representing oratio under

goes no change, but that the one which represents
domus does undergo a change; and again that the
particle of, which in Latin lies in the word orationis, lies
in Hebrew in the change of the word representing
Domus ; so that if any one should write down JT3 , and
ask me to translate it into English, I must say that it
signifies house of; and if asked why I say " house of,"
the reply would be, that " For the word house alone, an
altogether different form would be required, namely,

Now though the words H;?5JH , when taken

together, express the English " house of prayer " as
clearly as do the Latin words Domus orationis, yet we
are at a loss with regard to the denomination of the
word ]T3 ; to designate it (being, as it is, nothing but an
inflected form of the word representing domus) as the
Genitive Case, would be in the highest degree absurd,
and, therefore, Grammarians have invented an altogether
different name for it, and denominated it The State of
Construction, that is to say that the word JV3 , just as
the English house of, would give no sense unless joined
with some other word.
3. Before proceeding further, I will just observe that
though the word under consideration, namely JV3 ,
undergoes a change when used in construction, it does
not follow that this will be the case with all other
Nouns, there being several which remain the same when
in construction as in their absolute state ; in such cases
the context alone can decide whether they are in the
State of Construction or not ; e.g., a tree, D^H yjl a
tree of life ; "^YQ a king, *78"tfl^ "^D a king of Israel.
4. I now proceed to observe next, that in Hebrew a
 LETTER XVIII. 101

Noun in the State of Construction is considered so

defined that it cannot possibly admit of a Definite Article
before it ; so that to say in Hebrew D,!,n WH the tree of
life, or ^NHSi'? "^©i} the king of Israel, would be quite
as offensive to a Hebrew ear as it would be to your
Grace to hear "the my house," or "the his brother."
But though the Noun in the State of Construction
cannot, yet the Noun with which it is construed may,
have the Definite Article ; so that we may say D^Tiri yjl
lit. tree of the life, which stands for the tree of life ; and
in like manner TQ. a daughter, ^\Tfe 1~Q a daughter of a
king, "=|b®n 1"G lit. daughter of the king, which stands
for the daughter of the king, or the king's daughter.
5. It may also be here observed that two or more
Nouns in the State of Construction may come before the
Absolute one to which they all ultimately refer ; e.g.,
D^VZ? i"Q lit. daughter of king of Egypt, which
stands for the daughter of the king of Egypt.
6. Let us now consider how a noun will be declined
in the Singular Number, when in the definite state,
i.e., when it has the Definite Article. That it will have
no Genitive Case is a matter of course, there being no
Genitive Case in The Language (§ 2): and it will also have
no State of Construction, as was just now stated 4) ; so
that, with the exception of the prefixes D 7 2 3 then
assuming the punctuation proper to them when before a
noun in the definite state (see Letter xvii. § 12), the only
Case in which the Declension of the Definite Noun will
differ from that of the Noun when not defined, is the Ac
cusative ; inasmuch as in the former, (a mere mark
having no signification) may precede that Case ; I say may,
as it is by no means necessary that it should do so. The
Noun the house, will, therefore, be thus declined;—
i
102 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

jrgrt Nom., The house ;

tV2b Dat., To the house ;

or simply ^Accus. The house ;

In, or with the house

From the house ;
Comparative, As, or like the house.

(A noun in the definite state can hardly admit of a

Vocative Case.)
7. Hitherto we have seen the declension of a Noun in
the Singular Number ; but before I can lay before your
Grace the declension of a Noun in the Plural Number,
I beg to be allowed to make a few remarks on Gender
and Number generally. On this point, too, I shall not
say more here than is absolutely necessary, though I may
have somewhat more to say upon it hereafter.
8. In Hebrew there are only two genders, the Mas
culine and the Feminine ; the former is not distinguished
by any peculiar mark, but the latter has in most cases
the distinguishing mark of a quiescent P! at the end
of the word, preceded by a Long-Kawmets ; this is
particularly the case with Feminine formed from Mascu
line Nouns, as a lord, HT^I a lady, the punctu
ation of which noun remains, with the exception of
the last syllable, as it was before ; in some cases, however,
the formation of the feminine requires a total change in
the punctuation of the noun ; e.g., a boy, a
damsel ; a king, HS'pD a queen.
There are some few other terminations of feminine
nouns, which will be mentioned in due time.
9. Feminine Nouns, which are not derived from Mas
 LETTER XVIII. 103

culines, are sometimes without any distinguishing mark ;

e.g., 38 a father, Dtf a mother ; |3 a son, J"Q a daughter.
10. As to the classification of Nouns with regard to
their gender, those of which the gender can be posi
tively asserted are only,—
I. Proper Names of men, and functions of males,
which are of course masculine ; e.g., nj Noah, H$D
Moses, a king, a prophet.
11. Proper Names of women, and functions of females,
which are of course feminine ; e.g., brn Rachel, nvh
Leah, a queen, a prophetess. To which
may perhaps be added Abstract Nouns ending in a
quiescent il preceded by Long-Kawmets ; as HO^n
wisdom, nj?"1V righteousness, TVy\2% might.
II. With regard to other Nouns expressing inani
mate objects, a very few only can be named as occurring
in The Scriptures with decidedly only one gender, and
were any one to assert that Inanimate Nouns are all of
them of common gender, he would have an authority to
appeal to no less than that of Aben Ezra, who in plain
language says,—

All (i.e., everything) in which there is no breath of life,

make it male or make it female ; i.e., use it in either
gender.
Modern writers, however, have agreed to assign to
nouns that gender in which they mostfrequently occur in
The Scriptures, a rule which certainly ought to be
observed in composition.
1 2. We now come to consider the Numbers, of which
The Hebrew Language has three, the Singular, the
i 2
104 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Plural,* and the Dual.* The Singular is of course the

natural state of the Noun ; the Plural has two marks,
one for Masculine and the other for Feminine Nouns.
That for the Masculine is D preceded by Long-Cherik,
which, when affixed to Nouns, in some instances leaves
the vowel points unchanged, and in others produces a
complete change in the punctuation ; e.g. ,12 a stranger(m),
Plur., D^jJ strangers (m), where the punctuation is not
changed ; but a king gives D^PJ© kings, and a
prophet, DWiJlJ prophets.
13. Nouns terminating in a quiescent PI drop it on
receiving the Plural termination ; e.g., PI^J££) a deed,
Plur. D'ifjj/D deeds.
14. The mark of the Plural feminine isH preceded by
Chowlem, which likewise, when affixed to a Noun, leaves
in some instances the punctuation unchanged, and in
others alters it entirely; e.g.,!^ a well, Plur. ]Tn{?3 wells,
where the original pointing is unchanged ; whereas in
Feminine Nouns terminating in a quiescent PI preceded
by Long-Kawmets, both the PI and the Kawmets are
thrown off, and are superseded by T\ preceded by Chow
lem ; e.g., n'jirQ a virgin, Plur. niVirQ virgins.
In some instances the punctuation of the Noun will
undergo a still greater change; as in Pp'pD a queen,
which becomes HiD7D queens.
15. The Dual is applied to Nouns which represent
things that are double, whether by nature or by art ; its

* The Plural is treated of by Hebrew Grammarians before the

Dual, and perhaps justly so, since the latter is, as they say, only
a particular kind of Plural ; besides, the Plural is common to almost
all languages, whereas the Dual is peculiar to a few.
 LETTER XVIII. 105

mark is D1 preceded by Pathach (in pause Long-Kaw-

mets), and is the same for both genders ; e.g., T a hand,
Dual D?T hands (in pause D?T); bf} a foot, Dual
El2P. feet; a wing, Dual D?E>33 wings; ^ an eye,
Dual D?yj7 eyes.
Things however which are double by art have no
Singular; as for instance D^TKD scales of a balance,
tongs.
16. In all the instances here mentioned with regard
to the Dual, the Plural cannot be used; but we find
Vtyp. #3"!$ [Levit. xi. 23] four feet, the Pathach being
changed into Kawmets by the pause-accent Ethnach
(Letter ix. § 4) ; 0^233 [Isaiah vi. 2] six wings ;
TO [Zech. iii. 9] seven eyes.
17. Some Nouns admit of both Dual and Plural ; e.g.,
DV a day, D^DJ days, U]12V two days ; a year,
years, DTOttf two years.
18. By a freak of language, the Dual termination is
sometimes affixed to Nouns in which there is no double
sense ; e.g., D)D water, D]DU} heaven, and others.
19. Some Nouns can only be used in the Singular,
and again others only in the Plural Number ; e.g.,
UtQti} sun, moon, PJ? summer, 3HT gold, P?K dust,
and others, are used only in the Singular ; while D1^
countenance, D^nT mercy, D^n life, and others, can
only be used in the Plural.
20. There are Masculine Nouns which take the mark
of the Feminine Plural, and again Feminine Nouns
which take the mark of the Masculine Plural :—
Examples of the former are a father, fil3ij fathers ;
2iK a necromancer, niiX necromancers ; D# a name,
T\)12tf names ; "1J a lamp, r\i^3 lamps.
106 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Examples of the lalter are nt^N a woman, or wife,

D^tSto women, or wives; t^J^Q a concubine, D,t2^5 concu
bines ; !Tli31 a foe, D^id"5] tees.
21. There are Nouns which take sometimes the mark
of the Masculine, and sometimes that of the Feminine
Plural; e.g., Pl^g a sheaf, Plur. and nlS^if ;
ifil a generation, Plural DVIil and flhil .
As I dare not trespass longer now on your Grace's
time, I must beg leave to return to this subject in my
next.

P.S. (a). The Dative Case is sometimes expressed by the Noun's

taking before it the full particle to, instead of having the prefix V ,
just as the Ablative may be expressed by the full particle 1? from,
instead of the prefix B (Letter xvii. § 13).
P.S. (b). Although, as mentioned above (§ 4), nothing more offends
a Hebrew ear than a Definite Article placed before a Noun in its State
of Construction, still it cannot be concealed from your Grace that a
few instances do occur in The Bible in which the Definite Article is
so found; as, for example [Gen. vi. 17] GOD said to Noah, "And,
behold, I, even I, do bring (n^a VaiarrnM)iit. theflood [of] waters;
where we must suppose another VlSlO understood, so as to have
bran b-13iarrnS i.e., theflood, [even] a flood of waters.
P.S. (c). The particle f"IN when pointed with Tsayre under the M ,
as given above (§ 6), must, of course, have an accent, or else the
Tsayre could not be followed by the quiescent Shvah understood under
the letter J"l (Letter xii. § 6.) Whenever, therefore, this particle
drops its accent (when, of course, it must be followed by Makkiph,
Letter ix. § 13), the Tsayre must be shortened into Segol, thus Tlfr?.
The Accusatives only of Nouns in the Definite State ought by right to
have the choice of taking this particle, but yet we find a few instances
in which it stands also before the Accusatives of Nouns not defined ;
as, for example [Exod. xxi. 28] &irn# "Tittf HZ) ^"l and if an ox
gore a man.
P.S. (d). The Plural form is used for God, and also some
times for an angel, and for a judge.
 LETTER XIX. 107

LETTER XIX.

We have seen (Letter xviii. § 8) that an affixed H pre

ceded by Long-Kawmets is frequently used as a mark of
the Feminine Gender ; the same mark however is also
used to denote motion to a place, towards, to, into, and
then becomes almost synonymous with the prefix 7 to. In
some instances it does not affect the punctuation of the
Noun ; as ]h)£ north, HjiDlf northwards ; 7iSt^ [the] pit,
rh*\ilU? to [the] pit; and in some cases it does change
the punctuation ; as 3^3 south, H333. southwards ; DTIVO
Egypt, nOTfift? to, or towards Egypt, almost synonymous
with DnyV?.'
2. This affix may be used with Nouns in the Definite
State ; as JT3n the house, PUTSn into the house ; and
also with a Noun in the State of Construction ; as
f]Di> 1T3 [the] house of Joseph, *\DV nrP3 into [the]
house of Joseph.
3. This affix again is sometimes joined to words
merely for the sake of Euphony without any signification
attached to it; in which case it is denominated fl
Paragogic. In some instances it does not change the
vowels of the word ; as DH they (m), sometimes HSH ;
1P3K I will try thee (m), sometimes n3Ip3X [Eccles. ii. 1] ;
and in some instances it does change them, as "lfct{>£ /
will keep, or guard, sometimes n"U3## [Psalm xxxix. 2].
4. Affixes are also used for Possessive Pronouns ; the
only letters used for this purpose being D s 1 3 3 H , as
seen in the following Table, which exhibits the declension
108 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

of a Masculine Noun with the Possessive affixes both

in the Singular and Plural Number.

Singular. Plural.

a song. Qpyttf songs.

ty^U) my song. sTtf> my songs, in

1"V*# thy (m) song, in pause •

pause ?JT# . thy (m) songs.
TT# thy (f ) song. thy (f ) songs, ia
1T# his (or its m) pause ^I?T{^ .
song, elegantly VTttf his (or its m)
songs.
iTT# her (or its f ) .TT#her (or its f)
song. songs.
13T# our song. I^T^ our songs.
DSTti' your (m) song. D^PTttJ your (m) songs.
IDTti* your (f ) song. ]yTt^ your (f ) songs.
D~V|ti? their (m) song. D'TT."1^ tne^r (m) songs,
yvw their (f ) song. poetically i»T# .
1<7T# their (f ) songs.

5. A Feminine Noun terminating in a quiescent n

preceded by Kawmets is declined with the Possessive
affixes in the following manner :—
 LETTER XIX. 109

Singular.
minT a law.
■'rni.n my law.
TJJTTin thy (m) law, in
pause I£n1fl •
^n"lin thy (f ) law.
in~lin his (or its m)
law.
flJTTin her (or its f ) law.
13min
" T our law.
D3D"iin your (m) ^aw-
JDHliD your (f ) law.
DHTin their (m) law.
jrnin their (f ) law.
Plural.
rnin laws.
^nhin my laws, in pause
AT
^"•rjnin thy (m) laws,
finhin thy (f ) laws, in
pause TJEpifl •
Vrnifl his (or its m)
laws.
irrhin
TV her (or> its f ')
laws,
irflhifl our laws.
DS^nnin your (m) laws.
pVpifl your (f ) laws.
Drrrnin* their (m) laws,
poetically iDflhin .
irptfrtat tneir (f ) laws-

6. Nouns Masculine taking the mark of the Feminine

Plural will, of course, be declined in the Singular
Number like T# , and in the Plural like rnlM ; e.g.,
1J a lamp, gives "HJ , 1"1J , &c. ; and its Plural DilJ
lamps, gives ^ilj i TP^~'3 > &c-
7. In like manner Feminine Nouns, which do not ter
minate in quiescent H , are declined in the Singular
Number like T# , and in the Plural like rniO; e.g.,
183 a well, gives "HI*? , 1183 , &c. ; and its Plural
Mix? gives '■ntis? , TQftg? ; &c.

* Sometimes, for the sake of brevity, Dnhin .

t Sometimes, for the sake of brevity, )Q > *F1 ,
110 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

8. The Dual Number is declined exactly as the Plural

Masculine; so that wbllfeet, will give ^"l, 1^1, &c.
9. Nouns terminating in a Furtive Pathach will, of
course, drop it on receiving the affixes ; thus JH a friend,
gives Un, TUn> &cv and the Plural friends, gives "5TT[
(where the Pathach is Natural, not Furtive), *pjn , &c.
10. Nouns terminating in quiescent D preceded by
$e<70Z drop the fl on receiving the affixes ; e.^r., H'Tfe' a
/eZrf, with affixes becomes Hk> , TpTti> , &c., Plur. nilfc> ;
nt^p. a deed, with affixes becomes ifc^D or,
in pause, I^D, &c, Plur. D^J9.
Nouns having this termination, when taking, in the Sin
gular Number, the affix for the Third Person Singular (m),
prefer taking it after the form !iTT>B> , and not after the
form iTtf ; thus nils' gives Am /efcZ ; H^jQ gives
infegS Am <Z«<?<Z; for i"T{f or IfeflJp would read harshly.
11. A Noun, on taking any of the Possessive affixes, is
considered definite, and, therefore, cannot take the
Definite Article. It may, however, be declined with the
prefixes D ^ 33, and, in the Accusative, may even take
the particle (Letter xviii. § 6) ; e.g., viffl my song ;
iTB>3 in, or with my song; TB^ to, orfor my song, &c. ;
"•Ttt* fiSI song (Accus.).
12. Proper Names are so definite that they can take
neither the Definite Article nor a Possessive affix, but
are very fond of the particle in their Accusative Case.
13. Nouns terminating in a quiescent H preceded by
Kawmets generally change the il into fi , and Kawmets
into Pathach, when put in Construction ; e.g., Pnifl a
law, HWD rnifi \_the~\ law of Moses ; niyp a command
ment, ni!"P r>lV? [*Ae] commandment of JEHOVAH.
14. Some Nouns, however, having this termination,
change, when in Construction, the H into fi and the
 LETTER XIX. Ill

Kawmets into Segol; which is especially the case in Nouns

consisting of more than two syllables and having another
Kawmets before that preceding the quiescent H, in
which case this other Kawmets also becomes Segol ; e.g.,
npn'pD war, nSt^pp dominion, HD^DD a kingdom,
rninZ3 a chariot, H/QD a ram, rnNDfl beauty, give
respectively in the State of Construction npn^D ,

15. The forms of such Nouns, when they take

Possessive affixes, are derived from their Constructive
State, thus V-VpTJ??? , VfoftR » 1fi?^?P , &c.
16. The Plural Masculine as well as the Dual Number
of Nouns, when in the State of Construction, drop the
D, and then terminate in ^ quiescent preceded by
Tsayre ; thus D^lttf princes, "Httf princes of Moab ;
Wf]r\feet, ~\ty2Q ^jH \the~\feet of one(m) bringing good
tidings.
17. The mark of the Plural Feminine, on the con
trary, remains unaltered in the State of Construc
tion, although, in some instances, the punctuation of the
word may in other respects be disturbed ; thus 7\hjf a
hurnt-offering, Plur. TY^V , in Construction D^N Hi1?]/
hurnt-offerings of rams, where the punctuation is alto
gether unchanged ; on the other hand, a damsel,
Plur.ninjtt damsels, nhjttt [the'] damsels ofEsther,
where the Plural Noun undergoes a change, though the
Mark of the Plural is itself unchanged.
18. I have hitherto taken care to quote as examples
such words as undergo either no change at all, or very
trifling changes in their various declensions ; but I must
not keep back from your Grace that some Nouns
altogether change their appearance when they are put in
112 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Construction, as well as when they take the Plural form

or the Possessive affixes. Before, however, bringing
before your Grace's notice one or two Nouns of this
description, I will beg your attention to the following
features of The Language : —
I. In general, when words are increased by syllables
affixed to them, some of the vowels of their primitive state
are changed into Shvah.
II. A word in the State of Construction, as it must be
read in close connexion with the word following, is con
sidered as being thereby burdened and increased in the
number of its syllables, and, therefore, is frequently
lightened by the changing of, in some instances, Long into
Short vowels, in others vowels into Shvah, and again in
others by its undergoing both these changes at once ;
e.g., blood, JTHZin D1 blood of the covenant; here a
long vowel is changed into a short one ; ]ihl2 a lodging-
place, DTPN ji1??? a lodging-place of wayfaring-men ;
here a vowel is changed into Shvah : again, "Q"n a word,
DVftfc [The] Word of GOD; where we perceive
the two changes occurring together.
III. Words increasing the number of their syllables
by taking either the mark of the Plural, or the Possessive
affixes, in most instances change that vowel into Shvah
which is to the right of the vowel preceding the one
that has the accent ; while Nouns when assuming their
Constructive form most frequently change into Shvah
that vowel which is penultimate.
19. Having premised these few remarks, I beg to quote
as an example the full declension of the Noun ■Q'H
a word, to which I shall affix the accents, in order to
illustrate the statement just now made (III.).
 LETTER xix. 113

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
"ljTl a word. D'HSI
r t : words.
In construction In construction
"HI word of. "Hyi* words of.

With affixes With affixes

"Hyj my word. ^Tin my words, in
*|"!)jn thy (m) word, in pause ^y^. .
pause 'Qin. • ^^njn-n thy (m) words.
thy (f) word. thy (f ) words, in
pause VSFl •
his word, Vim t : his words.
jtt : her word. min
t r.* t : her words.
IJT.^'n our word. l^l.m our words.
D^ll'l your (m) word. D^llll* your (m) words.
\y^21 your (f ) word. DTP"5!* y°ur (f ) wor(ls-
DIDT their (m) word. Dp^ini* their (m) words.
]")21: their (f ) word. their (f ) words.

20. I will now introduce a Noun which, in the

Singular, does not change its punctuation when put in
Construction.

• In these five forms the Short- Cherik, being in the place of Shvah,
is, of course, a Slight Vowel, and, therefore, the Shvah following is
moving (Letter xiii. §§ 2 and 4).
114 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Singular. Plural.

Absolute Absolute
■i^5J a king.
D^P kings.

In construction In construction

king of. "97P* kings of.

With affixes With affixes

v-j'pQ my king. "^P my kings, in
tJ^V© thy (m) king, in pause "O^P .

pause ^37? . sp^J? thy (m) kings.

&c, &c, &c.

D^P37P* your (m) kings.

I^SVP* your (f ) kings.

DpN?7P* their (m) kings.

IjTpVp* their (f ) kings.

21. I shall now beg your Grace's leave to lay before

your notice a few Nouns which are altogether irregularly
declined.

* In these five forms the Pathach, being in the place of Shvah, is

a Slight Vowel; consequently the following Shvah is moving, and,
therefore, the 3 without Dagesh-Lene.
 LETTER xix. 115

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
2X
T a father. fiiZIN fathers.

In construction In construction

^Ji* father of. ITtaN fathers of.

With affixes With affixes

\3X my father.
?p5« thy (m) father.
^2$ thy (f) father,
his father, or
I.TgX elegantly.
rP3N
T - T her father.
our father.
DD\3i$ your (m) father.
]y2$ your (f) father.
DJT3K their (m) father. DITfllaS* their(m)fathers.
)rp3$ their (f ) father.
"TH^S my fathers.
TpniaX thy (m) fathers.
■^nilJK thy (f) fathers.
Vnin»
T -i his fathers.
HTlinS
t v -: her fathers.
^VTHK our fathers.
D5^i3^ your (m) fathers.
l?"1^** your (f ) fathers.
poetically iDT\i3».
IC^I^t their (f) fathers.

* Sometimes CHUM for the sake of brevity,

t Sometimes for the sake of brevity.
116 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
nK a brother. brothers.

In construction In construction
YIN brother of. Tl$ brothers of.

With affixes With affixes

T is declined in the Sin- TIN my brothers.
gular exactly like , ?pHS thy (m) brothers.
but differs from it in !pH8 thy (f ) brothers.
the Plural. VnS
T V his brothers.
iTntf
TV- her brothers.
our brothers.
DJTJN your (m) brothers.
]5,nSt your (f) brothers.

DfJTjK their (m) brothers.

ICPOJJ their (f ) brothers.
 t xix. in

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
H3 a daughter. nl33 daughters.

In construction In construction
The same. m'33 daughters of.

"With affixes With affixes

\T13 my daughter. V?133 my daughters.
5JfO thy (m) daughter. 5p$i33 thy (m) daughters.
^£13 thy (f) daughter.

13f)3 our daughter. 13^)133 our daughters.

your (m) daughter. D37Ti33 your(m) daughters.
]3fi3 your (f ) daughter. &c, &c.
&c, &c.

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
ti^N a man, or husband. O^JS men, rarely .

In construction
In construction ^3K men of.
The same.
With affixes
With affixes ^Vfyti) my men.
Declined regularly like ?P#}*j thy (m) men.
y&2$ thy (f ) men.

our men.
03^3 N your (m) men.
|3^3» your (f ) men.
&c, &c.
118 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
H&'X a woman, or wife ; D^J women, or wives.
rarely .

In construction In construction
rwX wife of. wives of.

With affixes With affixes

V^l* my wife. *>W2 my wives.
TJf^S thy wife, ?p$3 thy wives.
his wife. Vt^j
T T his wives.
13^2 our Avives.
DO"1^ your wives.
DiTttfj their wives.

Singular. Plural.
Absolute Absolute
H§ a mouth. DVS , mouths, used only of
the edge of the sword.
In construction
mouth of.

With affixes
1% my mouth.
?P2) thy (m) mouth,
f?> thy (f ) mouth.
And so the rest, like 3&
a father.

* Metaphorically used, in a few instances, for the edge of the

sword as consuming and devouring.
 LETTER XIX. 119

22. From what has hitherto been said, your Grace will
see that what I said of the intricacy of the Nouns was
not exaggerated. The only rules which can be relied
upon may, perhaps, be reduced to the following few : —
I. Dissyllabic Nouns of the form a king (i.e.,
having for their vowels two Segols) never change in the
Singular when in the State of Construction, as i\bl2
a king , ^ijnfc'? king of Israel ; though they may
change when taking the affixes or the mark of the
Plural Number ; as my king, kings, Sec, as
shown above 20) : and again "7J3 a garment, TJ3
a garment ofpurple, my garment, D"HJ3 garments.
This is also the case with Dissyllabic Nouns of the
form 1JJ& a gate (i.e., having two Pathachs for their
vowels); as iT# TgJtt> [the] gate of his city, "HJ^ my
gate, D'HJ^ti' gates.
II. This is also the case with Dissyllabic Nouns of the
form a book (i.e., having for their vowels Tsayre and
Segol).
III. The same rule applies also to Dissyllabic Nouns
of the form SJ'lp holiness (i.e., having for their vowels
Chowlem and Segol).
IV. Nouns ending in quiescent H preceded by Segol
change the Segol into Tsayre when put in construction ;
e-9-> ntyynawork, ox deed; DVj1^ ntyJJJO [the] work
of GOB. '
Some of them, however, undergo other changes
besides that just mentioned ; thus, for example, Hlii' a
field, SKID !"Htp [the] field, or country, of Moab.
V. Nouns of two syllables, of which the first has
a short vowel followed by Dagesh, will retain that short
vowel permanently through all the inflections, although
the vowel beneath the Dageshed letter may undergo a
k 2
120 HEBKEW GRAMMAR.

change; e.g., a Sabbath, |in3ttf TQVt} a Sabbath of

rest ; 133 a plain, jyVH 1?? [the~] plain of the Jordan.
Thus I conclude what I have to say here upon the
Nouns, and I can assure you, my Lady Duchess, that
when I look back upon what I have written in this
Letter, I feel almost vexed with myself for having
detained you so long. My only consolation is that what
I have said is absolutely necessary to ensure a safe and
satisfactory progress.
23. Before, however, closing the Letter, I must call
your attention to a very important and peculiar feature
of The Language, and this is, that some Prepositions
even are declined with Possessive affixes. Those, which I
shall here quote, are the following ; —D# with, r\X with,
between, bil upon, Vtf to.
The Preposition DJ7 with, is thus declined, —
with me, rarely "HB^. with us.
with thee (m), in with you (m).
pause ^£J/ .
1{1?S! with thee (f ). ]3BJ? with you (f ).
IDI? with him. DHEJ/ with them (m).
PISH/ with her. JHp; with them (f ).
The Preposition with (which, in its simple state,
can only by the context be distinguished from ns the
mark of the Accusative Case [Letter xviii. § 6]) is
thus declined,—
^fltf with me, *JJ1i$ with thee (m) (in pause ^fiN), ^,TU$
with thee (f), &c, . . . UfiN with us, D3J?lN withyou (m),
)3fiS with you (f), DflN with them (m), jflS tvith them (f).
The Preposition p3 betiveen, is declined (but only with
Singular affixes) exactly like TB* a song, given above
(§ 4) ; for instance,—
 LETTER XIX. 12 L

^3 between me, ?J3\3 between thee (m)

^3\J between thee (f), &c. . . .
Now, strictly, these signify respectively my between, thy
(in) between, thy (f) between, &c, which is extraordinary
enough ; but what will your Grace say when you hear
that a Preposition bj} upon, is declined, not after the
manner of T£^ a song, vTt# my song, &c, but after the
manner of DVTJ£> songs, "H"^ my songs, &c., i.e., with
Plural affixes ; thus,—
upon me, ^hjl upon thee (m), ^hjf upon thee (f),
&c Bp"^ upon you (m), upon you (f),
DiT^ upon them (m), \iVL})l. upon them (f).

which, strictly, signify respectively my upons, thy (m)

upons, thy (f) upons, &c.
The Preposition to, is in like manner declined with
Plural affixes ; thus,—

^8 to me, to thee (m), to thee (f), &c

D$^8 to you (m), to you (f), Onty to them (m),
to them(f).
which, again, in strictness, signify respectively my tos,
thy (m) tos, thy (f) tos, &c. Surely a caprice of
language greater than this can hardly be imagined !
I am fully aware that, in order that the rules laid
down in this as well as in my preceding Letter should
become fully impressed upon your Grace's mind, Practice
upon them is absolutely necessary, but how can I trespass
further now upon your Grace's valuable time ? Permit
me, therefore, to defer this to my next.

P.S. (a). The Hebrew Language has a Plural of excellency,

i.e., applies sometimes a Noun in the Plural Number to a
single person by way of respect; thus, for example, D,3tTy lords
 122 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

[the Plural of "pIM a lord~\, is in Exod. xxi. 4 applied to one single

individual n^M ^V]^. VbttJ DS if his lord (lit. lords) should give
him a wife. The Plural with the affix of the First Person would of
course be like but when applied to HIM who is LORD
of Lords, it is always distinguished by taking the form which it has
in the pause, viz., .
P. S. (b). In Hebrew there are four Nouns signifying man :—
1. D"J^? (probably on account of his being taken from '"'E'lH
ground), which signifies man in general, answering to the Latin
homo.
2. a man, in a dignified sense of the word, answering to the
Latin vir.
3. "Q? (probably from the Verb *"l?2 he was strong), as a being
who has " dominion over the fish of the sea, and the fowl of the air
.... and over all the earth."
4. (probably from the verb BWtt he was weak), as one who,
though the lord of Creation, is, nevertheless, frail and encompassed
with infirmity. HPf has, as we have seen, two Plurals D^ttTN and
ENMfc} , the latter of which is probably borrowed from the Verb ,
and is perhaps intended to express weak and infirm men, in contra
distinction to the first DHP^N f which denotes excellence, as dis
tinguished or dignified men.
P.S. (c). To suppose that Ht^N a woman, is derived from a
man, would be a very great mistake indeed, as it then must have been
na^N . As the punctuation is now, there can be no doubt that it is
derived from (possibly to denote the delicacy of the female
frame), so that stands for HttJpN , the Dagesh in the &
showing that the 3 is struck out (this being one of the functions of
Dagesh, as will be shown hereafter). This becomes quite clear
from the letter 3 appearing in the Plural of <"tt2?N , which is EFBfa .
"When, therefore, our first progenitor said [Gen. ii. 23], " She shall be
called nt&M Woman, because she was taken BPtJO out of Man," the
similarity of the sound only could have been alluded to, and by
no means the derivation of the word.
P.S. (d). Some Proper Names of places and rivers are found with
the Definite Article prefixed, as "'SH Ai, )TJOT ike Jordan, and a few
others. It may be fairly supposed that these names had formerly a
meaning (now lost to us), and could therefore take the Definite
Article ; or, perhaps, such forms are elliptically used to express the
cixr Ai, the bivek Jordan, &c.
 LETTER XX. 123

LETTER XX.

Bearing in mind the promise made in my last, I here

with send two Exercises, the one to be translated from
Hebrew into English, and the other from English into
Hebrew. As the latter consists of detached words only,
I have nothing particular to observe upon it. It is not
so, however, with regard to the first, which contains
short and disconnected sentences taken from The Bible,
such as will henceforth form the Exercises which I shall
have the honour of presenting to your Grace for transla
tion into English : in construing, therefore, and trans
lating which Exercises, your Grace will, in fact, construe
and translate The Hebrew Bible. Now that The
Hebrew Bible is of all books the most difficult will not,
I think, be by any one denied ; and since the Exercises
will consist of detached and totally disconnected sentences,
to translate them will, of course, be more difficult than to
translate the same passages as they stand in The Bible,
inasmuch as, from the connexion of the complete sentence
being here unknown, there will be nothing to direct the
ideas into the proper channel.
In stating, however, this, my Lady Duchess, it is by no
means my intention to discourage you, but, on the contrary,
to inspire you with greater confidence by assuring you that
after you shall have been able to go through such Exer
cises, the translating of The Bible will be a comparatively
easy task ; and as to the pleasure that you will feel in
making your way through these Exercises, I need
scarcely tell you that it will be double of that you would
at present experience in translating The Bible itself; for,
124 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

as you will feel that, in the case of these detached

sentences, your power of translating must be commensu
rate with your progress in The Language (since memory
here cannot much forestall the exercise of the mind),
so will you also feel, and be delighted with the feeling,
that all you may do here will be entirely your own work.
As regards myself, it will be my duty always to render
every possible assistance by never requiring from you
anything which I may not reasonably expect you to
know from what may have been previously laid before you.
2. The method I intend to pursue in these Exercises
is the following :—
I. To accompany them with Notes and References,
giving the meaning of each word, so far as it cannot be
made out from rules previously given, and leaving it to
your Grace to find out by degrees all the rest.
II. To give no reasons whatever for the changes
which Nouns undergo in their inflections ; all relating to
this subject, your Grace must please to take for granted
at present.
III. To employ figures, 1, 2, 3, &c, to refer to the
Notes and References ; and letters a, b, c, &c, to show
the order of construction, wherever transposition may be
required.
IV. To insert the mark of a cross (thus +) to show
where the Substantive Verb to be (in any of its inflexions
am, art, is, Sec. , was, were, &c.) is to be supplied ; since
this Verb is generally omitted in Hebrew, and must
be supplied in a translation ; thus e.g., —
ll^S \will stand for I [am! a
king I J

She [is] a queen.

 LETTER XX. 125

V. The Hebrew Verb, like the Latin, always con

tains the Person in itself, so that the Verb can never
be divested of the Person, a feature which causes in
Latin, as your Grace is aware, a redundance whenever
we wish to be strictly literal, as, for instance, if we
wished to give an interlinear translation of Deus guber-
nat mundum, we must write GOD — He governs \the~\
world ; in Hebrew, moreover, in nine cases out of ten,
the idiom requires that the verb should precede its
Nominative Case, as an instance of which I may quote
the very first verse in The Hebrew Bible,—

the heaven GOD He created In beginning

the earth

to construe which we must go about in this manner, —

In beginning
812 He created
(viz.) GOD created
DIP^H fig the heaven
n^l and
n$'"7 Me earth >

therefore, in such like cases, the Nominative Case thus

coming after the Verb will, in the Notes, have the mark
(viz.) to the left, and the meaning of the Verb given in
brackets to its right.
In conclusion, I will beg of your Grace to commit to
memory the Personal Pronouns here given, since they
occur very frequently, and, therefore, will not be given
in the Notes.
126 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Singular. Plural.
(or I Ufl3§ We
nriK Thou (m) DflK Ye (m)
flijt Thou (f ) Ye (f )
Nin He, or it (or nSH) Dn They (m)
N\T She, or it. (or nsn) \n They (f)

The negative particles ^7 and will also not be

noticed in the Notes. I beg, therefore, here to observe
that the latter signifies not, and must always be taken
with a verb ; whereas the former, when taken with
a verb, signifies not, and when standing alone signifies
no. It may also be observed that til , when it takes the
Interrogative H, so as to become N7n , answers to the
Latin nonne ? (whether not ?) and when it takes the
prefix 1 , so as to become , it answers to the Latin
neque (and not, or nor) ; these two should likewise be
committed to memory, as they will not be given in the
Notes.
Several of the Prepositions declined in my last will
likewise, owing to the frequency of their occurrence,
remain unnoticed in the Notes ; your Grace will there
fore do well to commit to memory the following :—
Dj; with, 7« to, iy_ upon (also because, or on account of).
The Preposition |Q from, or of, will likewise not be
mentioned in the Notes.
Please also to bear in mind that, in consequence
of there being in Hebrew no Neuter Gender, the
Personal Pronouns Sin he, and N\n she, must sometimes
be translated by it; and that the Possessive affixes
expressing his and hers, must sometimes be rendered
by its.
 LETTER XX. 127

EXERCISE IV.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

'W-inn :9d^Wit 8nan 7^ 6n^"t«

I7nw : ,6-m I5^g "nr. + Vft|>n : "it^an "onym

21inna :20nk>3P "Stpai 19,|pyj;£ 19dv;/ + 18Dj/an

"^Tryi 27^n S6r)?p«i : 25^^ ^iryp. 23^h« S

Y-dj1? 36Dii 350-iD«m :3nT ^ 34m3 S5Vihi

I v- : ■ - v - tt - t- V
41rnBn :4VftaV^n^ 39^y + *Sw '-"iW
4?n^n : 46ia:f 45it "nft : 'Va 4°ti?p
n« "cont^ '"n^ari 49ni?^ Vr n« 48on-oK
S3 : >n + S?> 53nan + 15^a 'V> ^ /Sa
61ni 60xa:i : >n s% "nyfop 65nat?
M^-n : "ninnb* 63toK 15vn 6V?i 62ir^«i 'Vjai
+ "mrfrina mdtu83 + 68,™i • • • • "ni^a + 66p^

76unnK 'i75^1? 74nh >7 to ":nrt«a

81Dn^iiH 3m + "onjig "TO "w : +

+ "p 83nn-;?a 3t S$ + "rn^0 7V#3
Vn :"^B^"y3D 87*fc :86i^» "mm
t : • : • t * : « -.: t :
tf? "^3 ^TtfPVB "omfjh^i MT3Pk "d^o

99 98 97 J 3
nan mn^n jtpani : Dm^n*] ornr wrni
128 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

>3K I,7TOi Sw S?* V» 'Vri 'n?

: "nyo^n " "wo "Wihi mfirm UTa«D 116ote

"Sb^i "atei "Vittfc : "fy™ 122Dn|?n "0^3

+ "Vj'h 127na "mm : Vty "mrr 'Vya

A voice.—2Jacob.—3*P a hand, in constr. "P, Dual

in constr. ""T .—4 Esau.—5 what ?— 6 shall I liken? — 7 to
thee (f). — TIS a daughter. — 9 Jerusalem. — 10 a deaf
man.—11 hear ye (m).—12 "•3? a blind man. — 13 look ye.—
14 this (m).— 15 )? a son.—16 David.—17 this (f ).—18 now.—19
bone.—20 ik?? flesh.—21 open thou (f ).—22 to me.—23 nin« a
sister.—24 >Tp!1 a female companion.—25 H3V a dove.—26And thou (m)
Bhalt gather.—27 1?? corn.—28 tth*»J-l new wine.—29 "in?"! oil.—
30 cause thou (f) me to sip.—31 1 pray.—32 a little.—"BUS water.—
34 "1? a pitcher.—35 and she caused to descend, i.e., let down.—
35 And she said.—36 also.—37 b03 a camel.—38 I will draw.—39 03? a
people.—4°0>ri1?M God.—41 DIO Death.—42 shall cause, or make a
separation; i.e., shajl separate.— 43 1*3? between.—44 TFI a male friend.
45 he went down.—46 1? a garden.—47 And he stretched forth.—
48 viz., Abraham (stretched forth).—49 and he took.—50 flb^O a knife.
51 for the purpose of slaying.—62 For.—53 one (m) dead.—64 *n one
(m) living.—58 "G^ a word.—66 attend thou (m).—57 D"1"}*?^ sayings.—
58 incline thou (m).—89 1^ an ear.—60 And he came.—61 viz., Noah
(came).—62 i"lt#N a woman, or wife (see the Declension of this Noun).
_63j-|« Prep, with.—64J"DFI an ark.—68 TJTtt (f ) a way.—66Zion
67b?N one (m) mourning.—68lH3 a priest. —69 sighing (m).—^nbina
a virgin.—71 afflicted (f ).—72 this (m).—73 it was.—74 languid 75 viz.,
2b heart (was languid).—76 ninM a sister.—77 thou (f ).—78 Behold.—
79 an eye.—80 a man servant.—81 lilN a lord (see Letter xix.
P.S.a).—82amaid-servant.—83 n"i3aamistress.—84so.—85JEHOVAH.
 LETTER XX. 129

—86 D^ilbM God.—87 Lift thou (f) up.—88 round about.—89 and see.—
90And they shall be.—91 viz., ^9 king (shall be).—92 ]Ek a nursing-
father.—93 rrnBJ a princess.—94 n^ya lit., one (f) causing to suck, i.e.,
a nursing-mother. —95 HDtnnJa a thought.—96 And they shall wash.—
a foot. —98 And they (f ) drew near.—99 viz., the handmaidens
(drew near).—100 T?J a male child.—101 virtue.—102 a crown of. —103^52
a master, or a husband.—104 Hear thou (f ).—105 and incline thou (f ).
—106 And forget thou (f).—107 n>3 a house, in constr. fT2 ._«« 3S a
father.—109 lit., and he shall desire, i.e., shall delight in.—110 viz., the
king (shall delight in).—111 ^ beauty.—112 and bow thou (f ) thyself
down.—113 to Him.—114 "S3 a rock.—115 and he dreamed.—116 a
ladder.— 117 lit., caused to stand, i.e., placed.—118 earth "9K?rfl
a head, or top.—120 reaching.—121 D?!?^ Heaven.—122 OT^? poured
out.—123 when, or if.—124 thou (m) shalt do.—125 2it3 good 126 "IE*
right, or upright.—-127 how ?—128 excellent.—129 CB? a name.—130 73
(or 73 , when without an Accent) all.

* For the force of the prefix H in this instance, see Letter xvi.
P.S. (b).
f For the force of the affix H in this instance, see Letter xix. § 1 .
J For the force of the prefix n in this instance, see Letter xvi.
P.S. (a).

EXERCISE V.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

Ti"T , Plur. D^TPt, a male friend, also an uncle.

To my friend.—From her friend.—In his friend.—Like her friend.
Their (m) friend.—To their (f ) uncles.—And to their (f) uncles.

BID , Plur. WtfO , a horse.

My horses.—From thy (f) horses.—And to her horses.—His
horses.—And from our horses. — With your (m) horses.— (Whether)
their (f ) horses ?
130 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

"Q , Plur. rri-13 , a lamp.

Her lamp.—From my lamp.—And to their (f ) lamp.—In our lamp.
—And from your (f ) lamps.—And his lamps.—(Whether) to their (f )
lamps?—Like my lamps.—To her lamps.—And with our lamps.—
And like her lamp.—(Whether) like his lamps ?

nb? , Plur. niV? , a daughter-in-law, or a bride.

And my daughter-in-law.—To her daughter-in-law.—In his
daughter-in-law.—(Whether) thy (f) daughter-in-law?—To thy (m)
daughter-in-law. —And thy (f) daughter-in-law.—In our daughters-
in-law.—And like his daughters-in-law.—Their (m) daughters-in-law.
—My daughters-in-law.—And to their (f ) daughters-in-law.

, with affixes ^1 &c., Dual D^?f] , afoot.

And to thy (f ) foot.—(Whether) in her foot ?—To our foot.—In
his foot.—(Whether) in her feet ?—Their (m) feet.—And with your
(f ) feet.—From his feet.—And from his feet.—To your (m) feet.—
Like my feet.
 LETTER XXI. 131

LETTER XXI.

Adjectives in Hebrew, as in other languages, define the

Noun to which they refer, with respect to quality,
quantity, place, rank or order, descent, and origin ; e.g.,

DH warm, Dn UT}j warm bread ;

3"1 much, 21 Dil much people ;
near, ptj' a near neighbour ;
\}# second, UV second day ;
^intf^ Israelitish, ^Slfe". an Israelitish man ;
Ephrathite, ^^5$ an Ephrathite man,
i.e., a man of Ephrath.

2. From the examples here quoted, we observe that

the Adjective generally comes after the Noun, to which
observation it may be added that the Adjective ought to
agree with the Noun in Gender and Number; as, for
example,—
3iC0 tt^N a good man ;
rniD PlJi'Nl a good woman ;
D^ltO good men ;
ni3i£0 D^J good women.

3. When the Noun thus qualified by an Adjective is to

be understood in a Definite sense, the Adjective too must
receive the Definite Article, otherwise the Substantive
Verb to be would be understood before it ; thus,—
132 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

an °ld man;
IpTH ty^n the old man ;
|pT t^SH maw is oZ<Z.
|CDi?n 133 fo's fo'ftZe sow ;
]£0j? 133 Aw sow is little.
"HVP tt^N aw Egyptian man ;
"H¥$n B^^H the Egyptian man ;
"H.VP Qfrlkn the man is a» Egyptian.

4. In like manner, when the Adjective precedes the

Noun, the Substantive Verb must be understood ; though,
not before, but after, the Adjective : thus,—

nirp P^V [Psalm cxlv. 17]

Righteous is JEHOVAH in all His ways.

5. From the examples hitherto quoted it appears that

the Feminine termination in the Singular, and the Mas
culine as well as Feminine terminations in the Plural,
are the same in the case of Adjectives as in that
of Nouns. ^l.VP , however, gives in the Feminine
JVnyp nn?# [Gen. xvi. 1] an Egyptian handmaid;
and' ^Snti0. likewise gives IT^S"}^. nt£>K [Levit.
xxiv. 10] an Israelitish woman. Gentilic names gene
rally, such as ^~\2y a Hebrew, and others, receive
Dagesh in the ^ when they take the Feminine form, in
the Singular as well as Plural ; thus a Hebrew
woman, fTf'H.3# Hebrew women.
6. Gentilic names may receive the Definite Article in
the same way as Adjectives; e.g., rp'pfcn^O nt^KH
[Levit. xxiv. 11] the Israelitish woman.
7. When more Adjectives than one refer to one
Noun, they ought all to be placed after it ; e.g.,—
 LETTER XX I. 133

DHj? rrisn^ m>*n niajy d^|V [Gen. xii. 23]

(a)
ears-of-corn withered, thin, blasted of (i.e., by) [the] east
wind.

8. Hebrew Adjectives may be used as concrete, i.e.,

as having tbe Noun understood, but not expressed,
before tbem ; and this may be the case in the Singular
as well as in the Plural Number; e.g., wicked,
ti^S [Prov. xxi. 29] a wicked man ; p^V just, or
righteous, p^V ttf1** [2 Sam. iv. 11] a just, or righteous
man. In these two instances the Noun is expressed;
but it is understood before the same two Adjectives in
the following passage [Psalm xxxvii. 21]:—

Hi1? Borrowing \ English, A wicked man

[is a~] wicked man, )is borrowing,
dW? iOl and he will not pay [again] ;
p'H.Vl but [a] righteous [man]
]3"in [is] showing mercy
\r\Sy\ and giving.

Your Grace will perceive that this passage is here

translated literally ; in The English Bible it is more
freely rendered, " The wicked borroweth, and payeth not
again : but the righteous sheweth mercy, and giveth."
This proves at once that at the time of James I. the
English language had the privilege of using Adjectives
as concrete in the Singular as well as in the Plural
Number, and that it consequently was then more con
sistent in this respect than it is now.
9. A Noun may sometimes be qualified by another
Noun, by being put in Construction with this latter ; the
second Noun, in this case, serving as an Adjective to the
L
134 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Noun in Construction with it : for instance, 7}£ a gar

ment, Plur. D^"T33. garments, this, when put in Construc
tion with the Noun ttf*l'p holiness, gives W"p *>1J2 [Exod.
xxviii. 2], lit. garments of holiness, which stands for
holy garments. In like manner yjl [Gen. i. 11] lit.
a tree of fruit, stands for a fruit tree ; "H^ [Psalm
cvii. 34] lit. a land of fruit, for a fruitful land.
10. Likeness or Similitude is expressed by the prefix
3 ; as riJDt?S3 firon [Lam. i. 1] she hath become as a
widow ; V?T [Psalm xxxv. 5] they shall be like
chaff ; 2"in3 ITnn [Prov. v. 4] sharp as a sword.
11. What is commonly called the Comparative De
gree, is expressed in Hebrew by the prefix D bearing
Short- Cherik followed by Dagesh, or bearing Tsayre in
cases where the Dagesh is inadmissible ; as tt'S'np pin^
[Judges xiv. 18] lit. sweet more than honey, i.e., sweeter
than honey ; U£ [Judges xiv. 18] lit. strong more
than a lion, i.e., stronger than a lion ; fTinE HIED [Prov.
xvi. 16] lit. good more than gold, i.e., better than gold
(or rather, than dug gold).
As an illustration, it may be observed that this is in
fact a use of the Ablative Case very similar to the
use of the same in Latin : as in Vilius argentum est auro,
where auro is used instead of qudm aurum /'the chief differ
ence being that in Hebrew the D , ■ the mark of the
Ablative Case, involves also the magis of the Comparison,
and, therefore, stands for magis qudm.
12. The full particle \T2 is sometimes used for the
same purpose instead of its abbreviated form the prefix
Q ; as imn ]Q D?J#n D^ait: [Eccles. iv. 9] lit. good
[are] the two more than the one, i.e., two (a married couple)
are better than one (i.e., who remains single).
13. The Superlative Degree is expressed by the
 LETTER XXI. 135

prefix 3 signifying in, or among; e.g., HZprftS

[Prov. xxx. 30] lit. strong among the beasts (or rather,
among the brute creation), i.e., strongest of beasts ;
0^33 rniCSn lit. the good \one~] among the women, i.e.,
the best of women.
14. Your Grace may perhaps have heard the old
phrase " Like master, like man," which expresses in fact
an exact similitude between the two individuals ; it will
be a matter of surprise to you to learn that this is
precisely similar to the Hebrew usage, which in like
manner applies the 3 of Comparison to two Nouns to
express exact similitude between them ; e.g.,V21$2 "T^IJ?
[Isaiah xxiv. 2] lit. like servant like his master, i.e., as
the servant so his master.
This, however, is by no means the only instance in
which Hebrew idioms are observable in the English
language ; an interesting fact to which I shall have
more than one opportunity of hereafter calling your
Grace's attention.

P.S. (a). Sometimes an Adjective occurs having the Definite

Article, while the Noun qualified by it has not ; in this case either
the Definite Article must be understood before the Noun, or the n
prefixed to the Adjective must be considered as equivalent to the
Relative Pronoun (Letter xvi. P.S. a); e.g., DDbn n*15 [Genesis
xli. 26] must be considered either as equivalent to rDtSH mSH the
good kine, or as signifying \the~\ hine which [were] good; ,U?»n
[Gen. i. 31] must either stand for wwfj EVn the sixth day, or
signify [the'] day which [was] sixth.
P.S. (b). The definite n, prefixed to an Adjective, must always
be understood as a Eelative Pronoun, when the Noun to which it
refers has a Pronominal affix ; thus I^U "? ? which stands for his
little son, strictly signifies his son who is little ; so n21tsn VUSOJjl
L 2
130 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

[Judges ix. 11], which is very properly rendered my good fruit,

strictly signifies my fruit which is good.
P.S. (c). In Poetical language the Particle IE? is used to express
as or like, instead of the prefix 3 ; thus 1?N 113? [Exod. xv. 5] like
a stone.

EXERCISE VI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
CCr" For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

ovi;j;jj>3 : VnpK 'bios 47?n Tip,"? 'ids? '*pj£

"ma tt ,3ru2vO tt • - "rw tt : "ilpy v^»« 8^7j/ "Vyanai • - : • : 'xuft v v '"by •• -:

21 a . 20 t b 19 18 17 16 15
• : - J7B>3 v v• DS3B>3
• t - Da^COTI v •* t W : • DK■ I nans t - -
26 25 17 a 24 b 23 t 22 16
rrnT1 tynam
Tt - : : vm* nova v v - jnina t - lon^ • : - dk*
• 32 31 30 29 28; . 27
aitsn ]Dtf3 : niwn r\r\ 73p dv$
S3 J 35 32 31 34 32 33 .
nrp vnrn'i : into ipwio d#+ aiD : twin
40 39 38 37 32 34
an?a ononan : maaoi ryaao aits • • • •
TT • " T V; V - T ■ •T •
32 . 46 45 44 43 42 41
+ alto : b*m n^ai t^a*np D^inpi an Tapi
54 , 58 . 52 51 . 50 4D 48 47
: ia nvavn t : * : Diaat iwd• dg? t nan«i t -: - : pT l •.•'•* nms ■ s -:
60 59 , 58 57i 56 * 55
maa Tjyvn +"i33si n^pa rnn+ ^a)x nan
87 66 . 03 64 . 63 62 * 61
nnaao
T : * - va-ma
T - naya
V V - jnaa 1 oya*r T irm TT : : n» • T
73I i+ 72 .» 71 t 70 69 68
^aiat : ni?a nv?aa -Disa naipa nrnaaa
. t 79 78 77 + 76 75 t 74
id? laya : W7j> in : ispp yd? : nip
81 f . 80
: uv\2 la
 LETTER XXI. 137

1 It shall drop.—2 rain.—3 viz., doctrine (shall drop).—

4 it shall distil.—5 dew.—6 viz., my speech (shall distil).—
'On^ rains.—8 the poetical form for upon.—9 grass. —
10 Dvava-l showers. — 11 herb.—12 fair. — 13 rmb moon.—14 clear.—
is nan Sun.—16 if.—" they (m) shall be.—18 viz., N^D [Plur. OWaq]
sin (shall be) 19 O^ttJ scarlet 20 snow.—21 they shall be white.
—22 they (m) shall be red.—23 sVifl crimson.—24 "IBS wool.—
25 ^'r?? a serpent.—26 he, or it, was.—27 subtle.—28 bb all, or every.—
29nsTn beast.—30 nib field.—31]??5 oil.—32 2112 good —33 OWn
head.—34 a name.—35 and I will give.—36 to them (m).—37 13 a son.
_38 na [Plur. ni32] a daughter.—39 1»D3 [a thing] to be desired.
4<>2rTT gold.—41 ta fine gold.—42 much —43 and sweet. —44 ttf3^
honey.—45 and dropping of.—46 honeycomb. —47nn~lN a meal.—
48 green herb.—49 and love.—50 therewith. —51 Tltt? an ox.—52 stalled.
53 and hatred.—54 with it.—55 behold.—56 ffc# a thousand.—57 b^J
poor.—58 nffifoZ? Manasseh.—59 T>2?S young.—so n?2 [jn Constr.
fl"1?] house.—61 a father.—62 and there shall be 63 people.—
64 a priest—65 a man-servant.—66 his master 67 a maid-servant.—
68 her mistress.—69 one (m) purchasing, i.e., a purchaser.—70 one (m)
selling, i.e., a seller. —71 one (m) lending, i.e., a lender.—72 one (m)
borrowing, i.e., a borrower. —73 ^O.f. a fly.—74 death.—75 Critt men.—
76 number.—77 mountain. —78 &"}fi holiness.—79 they stood.—80 a heap.
81 viz., flowing [waters] (stood).

* In this sentence the significations of the words alone, without the

prefixes 3 , are given in the Keys ; the 3 occurring so often will at
once be seen to be the prefix (§ 14).
f See § 9. t See P.S. (c).

EXERCISE VII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
J3?f The English idiom will be entirely sacrificed to the Hebrew
in this and all the following Exercises.
[The abbreviation i.e. will be used for "in construction," and w. aff.
for "with affix." Words standing in square brackets are not to be
138 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

translated ; and English words enclosed in round brackets or joined

by hyphens are all comprehended in the Hebrew word or words
placed under them] .
A high wall.—The high wall.—The wall [is] high.—A fenced
raatoa
t t : ■ rrain
t rrfisa
t :
city.—And as a fenced city.—From a fenced city.—The fenced city

—The city [is] fenced.—An old and excellent king.—The old and
IE* "l^N tf??
excellent king.—The king [is] old and excellent. Great as the
binaT
sea [is] thy (f ) ruin. Wise as an angel of
-^#w.aff. ,,T?#,&c. can ytiin , i.c. Tis^ia
God. — Sweet as honey.—Sweet more than honey.—Bitter as
DTibN v: ipinat u$3*r
- : matt
b
wormwood.—Smooth more than oil. (They were swift)
na?b pbn .ibp_
a b
more than eagles, (they were strong)
"it?? , Piur. ontfa rna
a
more than lions. (They were pure) more than snow.—Thy
Piur. ntny tst abttf
wife [is] as a fruitful vine.—The greatest of the
ntte, w. aff. ""H^.&c. nnb m biia
giants (see § 13).—The handsomest of the women (see § 13).
D^pa? noj nata, piur. n^?
 LETTER XXII. 139

LETTER XXII.

Having gone through the Adjectives, our next subject

is naturally the Numerals, as some, if not all of them, are
Adjectives. Had this not been the case, I should willingly
have put them off to a later period, since, next to the
Nouns, they form the most intricate subject of HebreAv
Grammar. I shall, however, do my best to smooth them
down as much as possible.
I commence by laying before your Grace the Cardinal
Numbers from One to Ten in four columns ; the first, to
the left, containing the Absolute Masculine, the second
the Absolute Feminine, the third the Construct Mascu
line, the fourth the Construct Feminine.

Absolute. Constructive.
MASC. FEJi. MASC. FIX.
T V One ins
Two
t : u>b\t>
T Three V
Four
Five
T • m. Six
Seven
T Eight
Nine
Ten

The first thing that will strike your Grace in looking

over this list will doubtless be that, contrary to what
140 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

takes place with Nouns and Adjectives, PI is used here

as the termination of the Masculine. Attempts have
been made by some Grammarians to account for this
strange phenomenon, but, for my own part, I confess
that I always read such useless refinements with caution,
and I strongly recommend your Grace to do the same.
Languages will have their whims and caprices, and as
whims and caprices we must not try to account for them.
2. To the columns containing the Absolute numbers
I have, as will be perceived, annexed their correspond
ing values in English. 1 have not done so in the case
of those containing the Constructive, and with very good
reason, for by far the greater part of them cannot be
adequately expressed in English ; I might indeed, for
"9$ and V\\t^ have used the expression a couple of ; for
nighti and uhu? a triad of; and for and itojt a
decade of (a translation which would sound sufficiently
pedantic, were it adopted wherever they occur in Scrip
ture), but as for the others there is actually no means of
expressing them ; indeed it would seem that the Sacred
Penmen themselves used the Absolute and Constructive
forms quite indiscriminately : thus, for example, the
chief butler tells his fellow-prisoner Joseph that he saw
in his dream " a vine, and in the vine were D^ltf ftwhli/
[Gen. xl. 10] three branches," thus using the Absolute;
while Joseph, referring to the same three branches in his
interpretation, uses the Constructive, and speaks of them
as tpyntyn nwby [Ibid. ver. 12]. Rabbi Solomon
Heyney indeed attempts to account for it, but Ben Zev
justly denominates what he says upon the subject as a
mere display of ingenuity.
3. The Cardinal Numbers, from Eleven till Nineteen
inclusive, are exhibited in the following columns :—
 LETTER XXII. 141

-\'vy
T *T "rnx
- ~ Eleven
t t »: Twelve
T T Thirteen
T T TT : - Fourteen
T T T * -: Fifteen
Sixteen
ntojj riots' Seventeen
Eighteen
Nineteen

Here, as far as regards"Itt^ and nifctfj , the Feminine

re-asserts its right, and, depriving the Masculine of the
H , takes it to itself.
4. The following Table exhibits the numbers from
Twenty to Ninety inclusive, which are the same for the
Masculine and the Feminine :—

OnlffJl Twenty
CPOtyft Twenty-one
Untyjft D13tf> Twenty-two
nwhv Twenty-three

Thirty
Forty
Fifty
Sixty
Seventy
Debts' Eighty
Ninety
It will here be observed bat the double, triple, quad
142 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

ruple, &c, of the number Ten are expressed by the

termination of the Masculine Plural.
5. The following Table exhibits the numbers from
One Hundred to Nine Hundred inclusive ; —
nSD A Hundred, in constr. JINQ .
HIND ^TW Two Hundred, or better expressed (in
accordance with Scripture language) by
the Dual D^KD .
nitf£ ttf1?^ Three Hundred.
niN£> #3P.K Four Hundred.
niKD BfloVj Five Hundred.
niSD WU) Six Hundred.
m'»5 J73# Seven Hundred.
niX© njb^ Eight Hundred.
niND J/tffl Nine Hundred.
We here observe that the double, triple, quadruple,
&c, of the number Hundred is expressed by the Femi
nine Plural of HiJO .
6. The following exhibits the numbers from One
Thousand to Ten Thousand inclusive :—
A Thousand.
E"1?1^ Two Thousand, or better expressed (in
accordance with Scriptural usage) by
the Dual D?aVS •
O^K Tvfof Three Thousand.
Df^JJ ' r\i;3"l« Four Thousand.

D^N Ten Thousand ; or, rn^") and ItfSn a

myriad.
Here the double, triple, quadruple, &c, of Thousand
is expressed by the Plural Masculine.
 LETTER XXII. 143

n2in , however, again takes the Plural Feminine ; as

nielli "^n1? 0- ^am- xvi"- ®] They have given (i.e.,
ascribed?) to David Tens of Thousands.
7. Before proceeding to treat of the Ordinal Numbers,
permit me to make a few remarks on the Cardinals.
I. The Cardinal Numbers must agree in gender with,
and are generally placed before, the Noun to which they
refer; e.g., D1?! na^ttf [Gen. vi. 10] three sons,
ni33 tihti [Job. i. 2] three daughters.
II. The number IftNl one, is, however (with only one
or two exceptions), uniformly placed after the Noun to
which it refers ; as "Tn^ UV [Gen. i. 5] one day.
III. When various articles are enumerated in a kind
of list, specifying so much of each article, the Cardinal
Numbers may elegantly be placed after the Noun to
which they refer. Thus we read [Gen. xxxii. 15, 16]
that Jacob selected as a present for his brother Esau,

D?rmD DHJ? She goats .... 200

Dntya/ DNftyp He goats .... 20
DTI
* - SBt D^m
* •■ : Ewes 200
: XS*y#H Rams 20
c b .a 5 «
Wtihtf DiTJpl ftipT£ nn>!?$ Milch camels I
c r 30
and their colts j
D^31« ni-13 Kine 40
mtoy
t t -: on* aT Bulls io
nih» She asses .... 20
rpjyy Wy£ Foals 10

IV. A Noun following any one of the Cardinal

Numbers from Two to Ten inclusive is put in the
Plural ; but after a number higher than Ten, in the
144 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Singular; e.g., T\]QVf [Gen. viii. 10] seven days ;

DP D\y2ttf [Gen. 1. 3] seventy days (lit. seventy day).
8. We come now to the Ordinal Numbers, which are
given here, Masculine and Feminine, from First to Tenth
inclusive.

MASC. KEM.
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Seventh
Eighth
Ninth
Tenth

Ordinal Numbers are treated exactly as Adjectives,

viz.,
I. They are placed after the Noun, with which they
must agree in Gender and Number.
II. They take the Definite Article when the Noun is
denned; e.g., fl^cnn PI^Pl [Ezek. i. 2] the fifth year ;
D^ttfinn D^fl [Num. vi. 12] lit. the first days, i.e., the
days that were before.
III. When the Ordinal has the Definite Article, while
the Noun is undefined, as in ^t^fi DV [Gen. i. 31],
either the Definite Article must be understood before
the Noun, the sense being the sixth day, or the PI
prefixed to the Ordinal must have the force of a Relative
Pronoun, as mentioned in my last (P.S. a), when the
meaning would be, a day which was sixth.
 LETTER XXII. 145

9. To express the Ordinals above Ten, the Cardinal

numbers are used, but then they are generally placed
after the Noun and take the Definite Article ; thus
^IPJl rtnsn rwni [1 Kings vi. 38] and in the eleventh
year, though it is not certain that here also the H before
nnx is not to be taken in the sense of a Relative
Pronoun, in the year which was eleventh.
10. Again, the Ordinal numbers are sometimes ex
pressed by Cardinals followed by the Noun with b pre
fixed to it; as ttfnn1? Ityj! nj/31N3 [Exod. xii. 18]
lit. on fourteen day [belonging] to the month, i.e., the four
teenth day of the month.
11. "TitW/ means a decade of days, or months; as
[Gen. xxiv. 55] " Let the damsel abide with us a [few]
days, "lif^Ji IN or ten [days]," or, as some will have it,
[months].
Again, Titf)/ is used to denote the tenth day of the
month ; thus Uffrh T\1VJ$ [Lev. xvi. 29] on the tenth
day of the month.
12. The Fractional numbers are,—

Masc. "'VO half in constr. \!fn ;

Fern. nyDQ , in constr. n^nib or fvyno .

Other Fractions are expressed by Feminine Ordinals

placed before the Noun ; as WW1?!? [Neh. x. 33]
a third of the shekel ; pnn [Num. xv. 5] a fourth
of a hin.
A fourth part is also expressed sometimes by 1/3"! and
Jjyi ; as pnn J!2"\ [Exod. xxix. 40] a fourth of a hin ;
Vs"}^"! #3/1 [Num. xxiii. 10] fourth fart of Israel.
1 3. As we have just touched upon Fractional numbers,
it will not be amiss to speak a little here upon the word
b'3 (or, when deprived of its accent *73) all, whole, and
146 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

also every ; as tt^X~73 [Josh. i. 18] every man ; n*JJ77I"73

[Levit. xxiv. 16] all the congregation, i.e., the whole con
gregation.
With a Negative particle it stands for not ant ; as

HDS^-1?-) ntyin lib [Exod. xx. 10] thou (m) shalt not

do any work.
With affixes it is declined thus :
"hi the whole of me. 13^3 the whole of us.
syVib the whole of thee (m). D3?3 the whole of you (m).
"=173 the whole of thee (f ). ]373 the whole of you (f ).
i73 the whole of him. Dv>3 thewholeof them (m).
P173 the whole of her. the whole of them (f).

I conclude this subject by recommending your

Grace to practise the Numbers in Genesis, chap, v.,
vers. 4 to 21 inclusive, with the assistance of the
Vocabulary here given, arranged alphabetically ; all the
words not to be found in this Vocabulary are either
Numbers or Proper Names.
"nns after, ViT] and they (m) were.
which. "T^Vl and he begat.
^8 ") ameremark of the "»JT1 and he lived.
y Accusative Case. nb"TT- and he died.
"H he [was] living.
0^3 sons.
"'EP days of.
HiJ3 daughters.
iT^in his begetting. or fall.
73)
a year, Plur. .

P.S. (a). Instead of 1»S TIlM and rnfyy nn« for the number
Eleven, 7?$? and rntpy ,PID?r are sometimes used ; this word
ViltPV is by ^46cn .Ezra and Kimchi derived from the Verb flWs <0
 LETTER XXII* 147

think, though the ideas are different which they connect with it. As,
however, Ben Zev disapproves of the opinions which they offer, I
shall not dwell upon them here.
P.S. (b). In one instance we find WJ a myriad, for NTSn . "We
also find E^rijTl tivo myriads.
P.S. (c). S?D half, is sometimes found in the Absolute, as we read
in the Judgment of Solomon, " Divide the living child in two, and
give (rinsV >?qn m\ nn«b n«) lit. the half to one, and the
half to one (i.e., to the other)."
P. S. (d). In a few instances the Noun to which the number refers
is repeated for the sake of perspicuity ; as BP "it£?37 Caip DV2 [Num.
vii. 78] on the twelfth day, which may perhaps literally imply, " on
[thej day [which was the"] twelfth day."
* n™ is the Pause form of fins .
148 HEBREW GRAMMAR,

LETTER XXIII.

Your Grace having, I doubt not, committed to memory,

in accordance with my request, the Personal Pronouns
given in one of my former Letters (xx. $ 2), I now
beg permission to go through their respective De
clensions.

FIRST PERSON.
SINGULAR, COMMON GENDER.

(or ^38) ^8 Nom. I; in pause

Y Dat. to, or for, me.
THK Accus. me.

PLURAL.
13^3$ Nom. we; rarely 12n:, in pause WHO.
13^ Dat. to, or for, us.
UfliK Accus. us.
133 } AM . ftWj »»'^, or ws.

Compar. like us.

 LETTER XXIII. U9

SECOND PERSON.
SINGULAR MASCULINE.

n£W Nom. Thou ; in pause rWN .

"^7 Dat. to, or for, thee ; in pause ^7 .
fl^lS Accus. ^ee ; in pause ^HiK .
?|3 } Ablat (itt,with,orbythee;impa.vLse'i\jl.
y\12D 5 " I from thee ; in pause *f$Q*.
^jiD3 Compar. ZiAre fAee.

PLURAL MASCULINE.
Dfil* Nom. Ye.
Dp1? Dat. or for, you. 1
Dprii* Accus. you ; rarely D3JTitf .
D33 ) ^lat f*n» with, or yo«.

(orD3iZ33) D33 Compar. like you.

SINGULAR FEMININE.

JpN Nom. 2%ow ; in pause J^N .

Dat. to, or yor, ^ee.
Accus. thee.
fa "1 . , , fin, with, or 6w, ffoe,
-J* Ublat. \ ' "

Compar. like thee.

M
150 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PLURAL FEMININE.
\F\Vt
1 •' , more
, fre-
w "1^Nom.
„ Tr
Ye.
quently nJJFIN J
Dat. to you.
Accus. you.
]03 | [in, with, or by, you.
]|D J ' \ from you.
]3iC2 Compar. like you.

THIRD PERSON.
SINGULAR MASCULINE.

Kin Nom. ife.

i"7 Dat. to, or /or, Aim.
iniX Accus. him.

J ' (./rem Aim ; poet. m;ip .

iniD3 Compar. like him.

PLURAL MASCULINE.
DH Nom. they ; sometimes nsn .
DH1? Dat. #o, or for, them ; poet. 1oS .
(or DnnK)DJ^1S Accus, ?Am.
(or DH3) D3 ^| rin,with, or 6y, ?Aem; poet.l'E3.
J ' ^/row ^Aerra ; poet. .
DIliD3 Compar. like them ; sometimes DH3 .
 LETTER XXIII. 151

SINGULAR FEMININE.
NTT Nora. She ; in the Pentateuch K1J"f ,
which is pronounced as N^H .
!*6 Dat. to, or for her.
nniS Accus. her.
PI2"1 ... , fin, with, or by her.
^Ablat. \ , . ■ *
n|ao J Ifrom her.
niD3 Compar. like her.

PLURAL FEMININE.
(generally 1*725) 1 CJ Nom. They.
\T}b Dat. to, or /or
10"^ Accus. them; rarely infYiX
JHS "I ^jjiat [in, with, or by them.
I'D© J ' fAem.
|HiD3 Compar. ZiAre them.

2. The Dative Cases of the preceding Declensions are

all, as your Grace will observe, expressed by V with
an affix; as,
'h to me, ^} to thee (m), "j1? to thee (f), "h to him,
to her, &c,
but in one of the preceding Letters (xix. § 23) we have
seen that the same may be expressed by the Preposition
b$ to, with Plural affixes ; as,
1*2$ to me, to thee (m), "I?1?** to thee (f), vb$ to him,
n^S to her, &c.
and it would not be an easy task to lay down strict rules,
when the one and when the other mode of expression
should be used ; I shall, however, mention here a few
m 2
152 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

instances where only the former, and not the latter, can
be employed. The prefix v , among the various ideas it
expresses, has also that of respecting, concerning ; thus,
the Psalmist says [Ps. iii. 3], " Many are they that say
(,ti'52l7) respecting my soul, there is no help for him in
his GOD ; " so that ^ , rf? , &c, may express, respect
ing me, respecting thee (m), Sec, which
&c, never can.
Thus the Patriarch Abraham said to Sarah [Gen.
xx. 13], " This is thy kindness which thou shalt show
unto me ; at every place whither we shall come, say (,l7)
respecting me, He is my brother." Now had he used
here "^N instead of ^ , the signification could only have
been " say to me," and not " respecting me," for
though 78 does, when absolute, in a few instances,
signify respecting, it does not when with affixes.
3. Again, *h , rfj , Sec, sometimes express belonging
to, which ^8 , , &c, never can. Thus GOD said
[Haggai ii. 8] 2H\n ^1 *10|n ^ To Me [belongs] the
silver, and to Me [belongs'] the gold. The Psalmist also
says to GOD [Psalm lxxxix. 12] JHN ^) «]K D?Dtt> ^ To
Thee (m) [belong the] heavens, also to Thee [belongs] the
earth.
4. Again v , f\b , See, express the having or possess
ing a thing, answering to the Latin, Est mihi, Sunt
mihi; as we read in Gen. xix. 8, "h lit., to me
[there are, i.e., I have] two daughters. This could not be
expressed by
N.B. In all the Exercises to be turned into Hebrew
which I shall have the honour of sending to your
Grace, 7, ?|?, &c, are always to be used, except it
be expressly mentioned that 7$ is, in any particular
instance, to be employed.
 LETTER XXIII. 153

5. The Accusatives of the preceding Declensions are,

as your Grace will perceive, formed from the particle
n$ , the mark of the Accusative Case, which in its
natural state can only by the context be distinguished
from the Preposition J"IN with, mentioned in one of my
former Letters (xix. § 23) ; but on being declined it can
no longer be mistaken for the Preposition, for it gives
Tn'X , ^riiN , &c, whereas the Preposition gives M^tf ,
1#K , &c.
6. The Ablative of ^HJN we, and that of NtH he, are
the same, so that the context only can determine
when ^ZBD signifies from us and when it signifies from
him.
7. When two of the Comparative Cases are brought
together, it is meant that a precise equality or identity
exists between the two persons or things referred to
(Comp. Letter xxi. § 14). So we read [1 Kings xxii. 4]
?pD3 lit. like me like thee (m), i.e., Iam as thou art.
8. For the sake of emphasis, the Pronoun is sometimes
placed after the word which is intended as its predicate ;
e.g., DftN D^VinD [Gen. xlii. 9] Spies ye are (i.e., not
men with any honest intentions) ; NIH "TIN [Gen. xx. 13]
My brother he [is] (i.e., not my husband).
I conclude by begging your Grace to translate the
two Exercises hereto annexed ; and have the honour to
remain,
&c, &c.
154 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE VIII.
(TO BE TBANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
KJ* For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

87 : TP"!1?: ^« j'tO^ nirp + \?iK

10 1 • [ S I 7 • .« Si C .
npS7 D?7fTJ T^O D?rK • D30 + "038 7£>3
M,a tj1? "Tan '\? : "qj '^yn "nTTia nrm : + ^38
21 20 ; j 10 18 , 3 17 . l>
: nam t t : ^787 •■ : - : «n• -: + n8: - lannK -; : + nn» t t tf>vf"
24 I 28 14 22
8in : + Kin tir • T s7 na« •; • : n8
: T + ^o• -lawi
V
• 1 20 » 28 27t , 2* f 24
t? + ni.T : + 8^n ^a na : 7383 pn fa ^ n3na
89 35 31 t 83 & fb 82 SI SO .t
pan : d"T8 ^7 nfrjn no ktk 87
18 89 . 1 S8j [ 97 J 29 t
mn» t : n87oi t ; 73n ^7 : i37os : • 0^370 • t : sa* : ^3
IS•SI70
■ •78 42 oatn.T .. 22 "i08si : ^300 41 npnv : natop 1371
40

: 'Vcid? 45,piD3 "*iO#3 "ypj/3 ?|i03 ^3i03 "78-1^1

50 49 48 » 47 46 44
t^8 *sa 1373 : TjJrjna iwrj ^\m. + i3n38
52 , i 22 52 51
3pJ£ DOV? : + 13n38 0^33 +13113 1)18
n3n« : + d#8 "d^tk : "on1??^ vto "0.738
9 54 59 58 . 48} 16 57
o^a : i^as: n8 ^nay ^na 733 ^3 ipy-p
64 . 63 62 61 60 ,
ronatpn Tfttfarn : ^a ij/tfs oni ^aaiTi w^a
68 33 67 66 . 35 65 f
njn D"T8n jn : njnas ?po3 ^3 : innTi nan
71 . TO 2 .t f 69 51
+ i3oa w&3 njan D^n78 78 ^8 : 1300 "rnss
: 'V\int^

1 Jehovah.—2 BTi1?^ God.—3 to-day.—4 1 have begotten Thee

(m).—inferior.—6 1"!? an eye, Dual D??"1? .—7 I was.—8 a blind
man.—9 ban a foot, Dual 0^3*1 ._io nOQ a lame man.—11 hast
 LETTER XXIII. 155
divided.— strength, or power ; with aff. VW, &c.—13sea.— 14 who ?
—15 hath told.—16 that.—17 naked.—18 HITO a sister, with aff. "iThfcf,
&c—19 be thou (f ).—20 ff&* a thousand. Plur. D"»BbN —21 a myriad.
—22 and he said.—23 say thou (f ).—24 n« a brother.—25 gave.—26 V?
a tree.—27 and I did eat.—28 a daughter (the same in Constr.).—
29 a king. —30 1 will fear.—31 what ?—32 can he do.—33 viz., man (can
do).—34 He will deliver me.—35 because.—36 He is delighting.—37 they
reign.—38 world.—39 and its fulness, i.e., and the fulness thereof.
40 little. —41 she hath been righteous.—42 viz., Jehoshaphat (said).—
43 Israel.—44 a people.—45 DTO a horse.—46 sheep (the same in
Constr.).—47 Thy (m) pasturage.—48 ^3 all ; with aff. &c—49 7? a
son ; Plur. D"1?^1 sons, or children.— 50 a man.—51 one.—52 true [men].
— Jacob (said).—54 a father ; with aff. "'SH, T?N, &c—S5 Ye
(m) have bereaved.—56 TP a witness.—57 know.—58 03 strength.—59 I
have served.—60 I have reared. —61 and have brought up.—62 have
rebelled.—63 and they (f) drew near.—64 viz., nnptp a handmaiden
(drew near).—65 TV a male child; Plur. B>lJ\ .—66 Pharaoh.—67 lo !
—68 hath become.—69 truly.—70 is looking in calm resignation.—71 viz.,
soul (is looking in calm resignation).—72 ns^l salvation.

EXERCISE IX.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
Kr* See the note at the head of Exercise vii. page 137.
I [am] a righteous [man].—We [are] righteous [men].—Thou

[art] my father. —Thou [art] his aunt.—He [is] my brother.—[Is]

as rrrft TO
he thy (f ) uncle? (Hebr. [Whether] thy (f ) uncle [is] he?).—[Is]

she his aunt ? (Hebr. [Whether] his aunt [is] she ?).—Ye (m) [are]
thieves.—Ye (f ) [are] brides.—They (m) [are] husbandmen.—They
aaa
T- nbs
T- ISM
T*
(f) are virgins.—.[Is] she my bride? (Hebr., [Whether] my bride
t :
[is] she ?)—[Are] we thieves ? (Hebr. [Whether] thieves [are] we ?)
—[Art] thou his bride ? (Hebr. [Whether] his bride [art] thou ?)—
[Is] he her uncle? (Heb. [Whether] her uncle [is] he?)— [Is] she
thy (f) aunt? (Hebr. [Whether] thy (f ) aunt [is] she?).
156 HEBREW GRAMMAR. «

He said to me.— She gave to him.—Thou (f ) saidst to us.—>

-iiaN
-t nana
t :t mos
: :- t
We sold to thee (m).—Ye (f ) gave to her.—We said to thee (f ).—
•la-iaa ]nna -WDM
They (f) sold to you (m).—They (mj gave to you (f).—Ye (f) declared
rpo iana WW7
to them (m).—We gave to them (f ).
siana

They (m) slew them (f ).—We saw you (m).— They (f ) cursed us.
la-in sow JibVp
— He deceived me.—She delivered him.—He smote her.—I blessed
na-i nV»sn rran "•ns-ra
you (f ).—Thou (m) hast-redeemed them (m).—He chose thee (f ).—
wbsa
t : -t ma
-T
He hated him.—We have loved thee (m).
N3tp 'wans

There-is-no iniquity in us.

There-is-no deceit in them (f ).

nana
t :•
There-is-no sin in him.
san
There-is-no perverseness in her.
bnoa
t:•
There-is-no craftiness in me.
nans
t :t
There-is-no wickedness in thee (m).

There-is-no slyness in you (f ).

nara
t•:
There-is-no faithfulness in you (m).
lias
 LETTER XXIII. 157

I bought the field from her.—The wood which was-taken-away

NT?;? rnto rry -utfs npb?
_b a
from us.—For he [is] stronger than I (Hebr. from me).— Thou (m)

art-just more than he (Hebr. from him). —We heard from you (m).
t ': -t : -T
—The man who concealed from thee (m). — The house
b^n -iitfN in? n^a
which was-taken-away-violently from you (f).—We are-rash
iby b»? C'jnp}
more than they (m) (Hebr. from them (m) ).

I will-be like thee (m) Thou-(f )-shalt-not-speak like her.—

rpns "nam bs
b
For he [is] a great king like him.—He also [is] rich like us.
•»s bi-ia rcbo d* *vtth>
• T I « ... - " T
b a b a
—She [is] strong like you (f ).—She [is] beautiful like thee (f ).—
np»n
'TT — nc T*
c a
There-is-not [one] like them (m).—She [is] the-daughter-of

b
a king like me.—I have-not-seen like them (f).—For [thou (m) art]
vr*n rib rs
like him (Hebr. for like thee (m) like him).—We [are] slaves,
135, pi. O^??
we as well as you (m) (Hebr. like us like you (m) ).
158 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXIV.

The Hebrew Language, in addition to its using some

times the mark of the Definite Article to express a
Relative Pronoun, as mentioned to your Grace before
(Letter xvi. PS. a), has also the word "lt^X signifying
who, which ; a Relative Pronoun which may refer to
Persons as well as things in either Number and in either
Gender: e.g.,
"131 "ItPK t£^n the man vino spake ;
fnS'n IttfS ntSton the woman who spake ;
m^pi D^DSH the men who spake ;
TlZn "I^K D^'SH the women who spake ;
|33 "It^N W/ri the tree which \is] in the
garden ;
l&X D^PT the trees which [are] in the
forest.
2. In order that your Grace might see how to express
to whom, or to which ; whom, or which ; in or with whom,
or, in or with which ; from whom, or from which ; like
whom, or like which ; it would be necessary to go through
these Cases with each of the Persons, I, thou (m), thou
(f), he, she, &c. ; to save time, however, I shall only go
through them with the Third Person, and I doubt not
that these will afford a sufficient guidance for expressing
the Cases with any of the other Persons.

12n "l^X B^jtn the man who spake ;

<h VWJ "HJ'S lit. the man which / gave

to him, i.e., to whom Igave;
 LETTER XXIV. 159

iJTin n^K ty'WPh I the man whom I saiv ;

1ni« "l^K
&§T\)\the man which I saw him,
( i.e., whom I saw;
13 ^DEQ B^H lit. man which Itrusted
in him, i.e., ifi 7<>Aom J
trusted ;
13/29 ViHW tt^n lit. the man which J con
cealed from him, i.e., from
whom I concealed ;
im'D3 "I^K t^NH lit. the man which there-is-
not like him, i.e., ft&e
there-is-not.

3. By comparing the above with the Declension of the

PersonalPronouns given in my last,it will be observed that
the oblique Cases of "IJ^X can only be expressed by joining
this word with the Dative, Accusative, Ablative, and
Comparative Cases of those Pronouns; with the exception
however of the Accusative, in the case of which the Per
sonal Pronoun may be spared : thus, for example, in Gen.
xxii. 2, it is said to Abraham, " Take now thy son, thine
only [son] Isaac (JI^HiJ whom thou lovest ;"
where had the expression IfiiN fpHK Ittfi* which
thou lovest him been used, the signification would
have been exactly the same. Again [Gen. xlv. 4],
Joseph said to his brethren, " I am Joseph your brother
(VliN DJTI.DO which ye sold me, i.e., whom ye
sold ;" where the signification would have been exactly
the same if the Accusative ifiiN had been omitted.
Now, as we see to be the case here, when the Relative
refers to the First Person, the Cases of the Personal
Pronoun of the First Person are used, as
'k , , s3 "l&'S , &c. ;
160 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

but if to the Second Person, then those of the Second

Person must be employed, as
t[) TfniK "lEte, ?J3 &c. ;

and so with all the rest.

4. In the forms given above,§ 2,the Case of the Personal
Pronoun is seen to be separated from by the Verb ;
this is done by way of elegance, and I would advise
you always so to write in the Exercises ; though
had, for example, "^ru 1*7 ti^NtH been written
instead of I1? ">F\n2 "It^N ^Nil ,' and so in the other
instances also, there would have been no error in the
arrangement, thus we find [Isa. xlix. 3] "I^K 'jijHCi^
*|3 lit. O Israel which in thee Iwill glorify- Myself,
i.e. in whom I will glorify-Myself where the Case of the
Personal Pronoun follows closely upon the "l^K :
but in Ps. xli. 10 we read, " My own familiar friend
(13 ^nDa lit. which I trusted in him, i.e., in
whom I trusted," where the Case of the Personal
Pronoun and the "Itt^ are separated by way of
elegance.
5. When the Relative is coupled with a Preposi
tion, these are likewise in general separated ; thus [Gen.
xxiv. 14} " And let it come to pass, that the damsel
( '7 y# "IK^ ) lit. which I shall say to her,
i.e. to whom I shall say." And so [Gen. xxviii. 13]
n^T 33t£> Jim *1t^ p^n lit. the earth which
thou (m) [art] lying upon it (f), i.e., upon which thou
(m) art lying."
6. To express in Hebrew the English whose, the
Relative is coupled with a Noun having a Pos
sessive affix: e.g. V^tf1 iTyj? "l#J* [Job v. 5].
lit. which his harvest, (i.e. whose harvest,) a hungry
 LETTER XXIV. 161

[maw] shall eat up; so [Job iv. 19] "How

much less, [in] them that dwell in houses of clay
( D^iDI "1^3 ) whose foundation is in the dust,"
which should of course be construed,—( D"7iD^. "l^X )
which theie foundation, i.e. whose foundation [is]
(~IQ#3) in the dust"
7. The "IJi'tf is often elegantly omitted, as in Gen. xlii.
28,' Kbt 0Vf7K
• v: 'ntoV
T T nt*T J1D
- What [is]
L J this GOD hath done
unto us f and so again [Job xxvii. 18], "He buildeth his
house as the moth { n2p5l ) and as a booth a
keeper maketh." Here the Relative Pronoun in English,
as well as Hebrew, is elegantly omitted ; and thus we see
another remarkable instance of a Hebrew idiom having
crept into the English language, an idiom too which is
not, I think, to be met with in any of the other languages
with which I know your Grace to be acquainted.
It must, however, be admitted that in Hebrew much
greater liberties are taken with "lii'X than are in English
taken with the Relative Pronouns who, or which ; the
ItyS being frequently left out in places where the
English Relative must needs be expressed : e.g. [Prov. iii.
13], " Blessed is the [man]( HD^n KVD ) lit. hath found
wisdom," which stands for ( HD3n N¥D "lti>N ) " who
hath found wisdom" Again [Ps. xxxii. 2], " Blessed is
d c a b a
the man (jitf i1? HIPP 2&ni *h) lit. JEHOVAH
b c d
will not impute to him iniquity," which stands for
b , a a b
Oty i1? Tt\TY\ 2il/W K1? lit. which to him (i.e.
to whom) JEHOVAH will not impute iniquity.
8. In a few instances we find the Relative Pronoun
I^X declined with prefixes, as irP3 I^N1? l®m
[Gen. xliii. 16], lit. and he said to [him] who [was]
162 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

over his house, i.e., to the ruler of his house. Again [Isa.
xlvii. 13], " Let now the astrologers, the stargazers,
the monthly prognosticators, stand up, and save thee
from [those things] which shall
come upon thee (f)."
9. Iti'K is used in a comprehensive sense ex
pressing the English whomsoever, whatsoever: thus
ll^fl "l&'Nl flN [Num. xxii. 6], whomsoever thou
(m) shalt bless, [he is~\ blessed; also [Num. xxiii. 1 2] , fil*
121) "lbtt'S iJlS >53 flirp D^; whatsoever JE
HOVAH shallput into mymouth, that will Iobserve to speak.
10. Instead of the full form "lt£>N , the abbreviated
form # , as a prefix followed by Dagesh, is sometimes
used, in which case letters which cannot receive Dagesh
in general refuse to make Compensation for it (Letter
xvi. § 5) ; thus ITPP&f Sin .TH^ HD [Eccles. i. 9],
lit. tfAatf which has been, it [is] what shall be (i.e., that
which has come to pass will come to pass again).
11. The same word "lt^N , which is used for a Eelative
Pronoun, is used also as a Conjunction, signifying in
some instances that, and in others for, because ; and it is
only by the context that the signification can be deter
mined, just as in English it is only known by the context
when the word that is a Pronoun, and when a Conjunc
tion: e.g. [Exod. xi. 7], " In-order-that ye (m) may know
be a a b c
( HilT, Thp\ I^S ) that JEHOVAH will make distinc
tion^' and Hp) ^| -IB^H r\K "7H
[1 Kings xv. 5], because David did that-tvhich [was]
right in [the] eyes of JEHOVAH.
12. As a Conjunction too, sometimes takes
prefixes: e.g., n\n8 H^JO VT^n '
[Josh. i. 5], like as I have been with Moses, [so] will I ,
 LETTER XXIV. 163

be with thee (m) ; and so, ifWK jn« "1(^X3 [Gen.

xxxix. 9J, inasmuch-as thou [art] his wife ; and again,
"T.iO n~]J>l [Isa. xliii. 4], lit. by-reason-that
(i.e., because-that) thou (m) hast been precious in Mine eyes.
13. The prefix $ followed by Dagesh is sometimes
used also for It^N when a Conjunction : e.g. [Cant,
i. 6], " Look not upon me because I am swarthy
a a
( t^pt^n "OJ^Dtti^ ) for the sun has looked upon me (i.e.
for I am sunburneoiy

P.S. (a). In a few instances the 27 used as a prefix instead of the

Conjunction is found with a Pathach followed by Dagesh; as
rnirq *riQ0 -r? [j„d. v. 7] until that I arose [viz. T] Deborah ;
and in one instance, the 07 takes Kawmets instead of Pathach
by way of Compensation [Jud. vi. 17], "Then give me a sign
~iyra nnNKT*) that thou (m) are talking with me."
PS. (b). 273 followed by Dagesh is sometimes used as a Conjunction
for -itt/y?, and ??» followed by Dagesh for "1?>N.» : e.g. [Eccles. ix. 12},
" So are the sons of men snared in an evil time (D^OP Or,,,l?? ViBfltP?)
AS (i.e. when) it shallfall upon them suddenly," where VteflttT"? stands
for Visn ">ata?. And again [Eccles. v. 4] , " Better is it that thou
shouldest not vow (Q^?7^ rfbl. Tni-IBT*!? ), than that thou shouldest
vow, and not pay," where."1'1'''????? stands for "li'TJ? "itpyt? .
P.S. (c). ?? followed by Dagesh is sometimes prefixed to the
Dative Case of a Personal Pronoun to express belonging to, as
"•Vtt? >9"5? [Song i. 6] my vineyard, lit. my vineyard which is (or
belongs) to me, i.e., my own vineyard, where "^V? stands for ^? "^K^ .
164 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE X.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
K?* For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

Yr$3m na1? 'n^i ngtei uVa "tc^n

to 9 8 7 » a a
: wi nrw van "^an -^jt/a aovi -w«
fitf] 'sn*nn ,4I?a n$i "na n$ Vrftg "nap]

"h$ : "n?fl3 "to* + ">^$ "nanan 'Sa

20 6 22 . 21 , , 12 ,| 20
mm
t : « *»• matt
• t nriK
t am •* ymvi
Iv v: mm
t :
"man "oHajpn n« ""^an : na + "tC^S
SO 29 28 27 . f 26
: Tin naa "itfg ntf$n "latfm : om7# paa
85 84 84 88 , 82 81
: ij?ttf pa? + uiwi lai. oma n^
89 SB f St 37 36
: im nvhn
t : t owi
t * nar
t • + omma « • ittw
v -:
'•^n W1? "n^?.i 42naa "t^b1? **iK"|j?i£

+ ""naii "it?** ni* '%t *\p : ""hj^a "pan

53 , I fit f 51 50 , 49
c\pv 7$ 137 : -isv inn *s|-pa

20 , 60 , 46 t9 I , II i
mm
t : arw ■ vj v itsto
v i v ^a* : iwa •• - iWan
: - : -i^k v -:
» 64 63 29 62 61
on1?vt na«*i
v * : nym v »• la
1 •• V a^mt : mai1
»
66 67 66 J 65
naa^ '•a ^qn. n« ^/fnn m*n
17 70 69 1 12 .»
wia n» VtfypO : onww en1?**
73 19 72 19 f fl I
om-pn p« n» ^aa pv$ n$ orr? nrh
"iDiy + njn» -it^^ "oipan "••a : na Yi|
80 • C 79 b 46 * 78 C , 77 b .
nasnjn -in ^a : + Kin ttfnp na"jst
84 83 82 t 81 .» 29 &
noriK
V VJ V niv
• to • : oaT p»
■ "\ ™ k? D^a
• T + nan
T "
 LETTER XXIV. 165

"onvo "n$ "hVij "n^y "nrwq : 13

01 BO 89 .*
92
: ma^i
T S- *

i tt^N a man. Plur. E^PJN..—2 has consumed us.—3formed-a-

malicious-plan.—4 ■"'"15? a damsel.—5 shall be pleasing.—6 T.^L an eye.
Dual D??"? 77T^? a king.—8 she-shall-be-queen.—9 instead of.—
10 Vashti.—"and He remembered.—12 viz., God (remembered).—
13 Noah.—" all.—15 n»n beast.—16 nan? cattle.—,7nt? (prep.) with.
—18 an ark.—19 land (absolute and constructive the same).—
20 Jehovah.—21 [is] caring-for.—22 continually.—23 cause me to feel,
i.e., let me feel.—24 . or » » pillar.—25 a house.—26 [is]
founded, or firmly placed.—27And she said.—^viz., !"lt#N a woman [said].
—29?3 a son (with aff. ^ &c. ; Plur. D,32)._3othe living [one].—31 nB
a mouth (with aff. ,? , &c).—32 hath spoken.— 33 vanity.—MrPJ a right
hand ; in constr. —35 falsehood. —36 "TJ a hand.—37 wickedness.
—33 was full of.—39 bribery.—40 And they shall call out.—41 before
him.—42 Thus. —43 shall be done.—44 [is] delighting.—45 "tyt glory.
—45 for.—47I know (Lat. nov'i).—48 thou (m) shalt bless.—49 one
(m) blessed.—60 thou (m) shalt curse.—51 he will be accursed.—62 go ye
(m). —53 Joseph.—54 he shall say.—55 ye (m) shall do.—56 ye (m) will
bake.—57 bake ye (m).—58 ye (m) will boil.—59 boil ye (m).—60 he
will love.—61 he will correct.—62 even as a father.—63 he may delight in.
—64 and it said.—65 viz., JT| an olive tree (said).—66 should I hold
back ?—67 W?- fatness ; (with aff. "Ottfa , &c.).—68 they (m) are wont to
honour.—69 I have caused to stand, i.e., established.—70 JVJ? a
covenant.—71 to give 72 Canaan.—73 their (m) sojournings.—74 they
sojourned.—75 Q,,P? a place.—76 standing.—77 n97*3 ground ; in
constr. HOIN .—78 holiness.—79 a generation ; (absolute and con
structive the same).—80 perverseness (lit. perversenesses).—81 faith
fulness.—82 H>N God.—83 "AS a rock.—84 1 will trust.—85 And there
shall be.—86 a cry. — 87 great.—88 Egypt.—99 there has been.—90 so.
—91 shalt thou (m) do.—92 thou (m) hast spoken.—
16(i HEBREW GRAMMAR

EXERCISE XL

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

{Cj* See the note at the head of Exercise vii., page 137.

b a
The male-child whom thou-(m)-slewest.—The great cedar which
VV nmn
t: _T b"naT nw V•
[is] in Lebanon.—The hyssop which [is] on the wall.—The man who
yiaab nits •••a -P|7 t^s
came to thee (f).—The slave whom thou-(m)-boughtest for twenty
K2 btf w. aff. "»35 • • • 2 UntoS
[pieces of] silver.—The woman whom (Heb., which her) thou-(m)-

betrothedst to-day. — The horse upon which (Heb., which upon him)
rians nvn dsid b?w.aff.
he-rode.—The bed upon which (Heb., which upon her) thou (m) [art]
a?n HK)P(f) 7? w. aff.
lying.—The officers with whom (Heb., which upon them) the king was-
apittf D>1D bs w. aff. "ilbn
angry.—The woman whose (Heb., which her) husband was-slain last-
note tt^H anna
night.—The blind [man] whose (Heb., which his) son
ttfc« "i?.? 13, w. aff. N>?&c.,
deceived him twice.—The city in which (Heb., which in her) thou-
nEP O^nVQ -1*2 (f )
(m)-reignedst Any man in whom (Heb., which in him) [there is] a
robta
t : -T bsT bpn
capital-crime (Heb., judgment-of death). —Every [thing] in whose
BBK?a
- : rnn
VT bsT
nostrils [there is] the breath of life (Heb., which [has] breath-qf
nn
life in his nostrils). The fruit of-which (Heb., which from it) thou-
D^n TO.dual^BN ^(m)
(m)-didst-eat.—A locust like-which (Heb., which like it) [there] has-
^b?M nans (m)
 LETTER XXIV. 167

not-been, and [there] shall-not-be.—The prophet to-whom (Heb.,

irn
T T tfb rvrp rib
which to him) I-shall- speak my word. The cup from
bHw.aff. ^w.aff.'TO'^&c.
which (Heb., which in it) my lord usually-drinketh. —
lil«,w.aff.,'?tTN&c.
The woman whose hand (Heb., which her hand) hath-withered.
nres T(f) nab;

n 2
168 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXV.

The Demonstrative Pronouns are

UK. FEU.
HJ this, in Poetry It . PXT this, rarely rit .
H^X these, common to both Genders.
2. These Pronouns may either stand without a Noun,
when the Substantive Verb to be is understood before
them; as
nr ^ Who [is] this (m) f nKT ^ Who [is] this (f) ?
\g Who [are] these (com.) ?
or, they are followed by a Noun (defined or not), and
then the Substantive Verb to be is understood after
them ; as
tt^i* PJ| Mis [is] a man. HtS>i? nXf Mis [is] a wo
man.
ninn ntMis[is]MefAiwa(m) . nyj/n nW Mis [is] Me
counsel (f).
^2 Pl^K Mese [are] mysows. ^nij3n.v>8 Mese [are] wj^
daughters.
3. When the Noun precedes the Demonstrative Pro
noun, the Substantive Verb is not understood ; but then
the Demonstrative Pronoun (like Adjectives), and gene
rally also the Noun, must have the Definite Article ; as
njH t^Sn Mis man. rWH ntS^rl Mis woman.
^9 these my sons. "'£133 Mese my
daughters.
 LETTER XXV.

4. These pronouns may also be declined with

fixes, thus,—
MASCULINE.
Nom. this.
Dat. to this.
ni)
Accus. this.
ht ni*)
' nà fin, with, or by this.
Ablat.
1 from this.
Compar. as, or like this.

FEMININE.
nSÎ Nom. this.
riXÎ1? Dat. to this.

Accus. Mis.
nm nil
^^^1 Ablat ■[*"' or ^ ^***
DSîÇJ ' \/rom Mis.
Compar. fo'Are Mis.

COMMON TO BOTH GENDER8.

H1?** Nom. Mese.
Tlfyçb Dat. to Mese.
nj8)
« l Accus. Mese.

n^3~) j fira, wiM, or by these.

n^NQJ a ' \from these.

Compar. as, or like these.

170 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

5. When the word thing is understood after the

Demonstrative Pronoun, i.e., when we wish to express
this thing, the Feminine J"1ST is generally used ; so [Gen.
xlii. 18] Joseph says to his brethren, l^ni It^J/ J1S? this
[thing] do ye (m) and live.
6. When a distant object is pointed out, i.e., when,
instead of this, or these, we wish to say that, or those, the
Personal Pronouns Sin and S'H with a Definite Article
(Compensation for Dagesh not being here granted) are
used in the Singular, and DH and JH with the Definite
Article (Compensation being here granted) in the
Plural Number ; thus

Sinn- iS^NPl
• T that man. KTIH
• - n$Nn
T * T that woman.
Dnn DHS^Kn those men. jnn D^an fAose women.

When forms such as these are to be declined with

prefixes, the prefixes must be placed before the Noun,
and not before the Pronoun ; as
Sinn to that man, Sinn ^S3 in that man, Sec. ;
njn t&^S1? to this man, ns?n n$S2 in this woman, &c.

7. When a Demonstrative Pronoun opens a clause

introduced for the purpose of explaining more fully a
sentence immediately preceding it, Sin , S\n , &c,
are used instead of nj , nST , &c, as expressing greater
emphasis ; in this case the Pronoun is generally followed
by the mark of the Definite Article used as a Relative
Pronoun (Letter xvi. P.S. (a) ), and it may then be
translated sometimes by that, and sometimes by even
that; as, [Gen. ii. 13] "And the name of the second
river [was] Gihon (23iE>n Sin), that [is it] which [is]
encompassing the land of Ethiopia." So also [Esther i. 1]
"And it came to pass in the days of Ahasuerus
 LETTER XXV. 171

EVEN THAT AJlUSUeVUS WHO WOLS

reigning from India to Ethiopia."
8. These Pronouns are also very frequently used in a
supplementary clause at the end of a sentence, to express
identification, and must then be translated by that is,
e.g. [Gen. xxxvi. 1], " And these are the generations of
Esau (DilX Kin) that is Edom."

P.S. (a). In a few instances we find Hjbn this (m) [Gen. xxiv. 65];
also *?n this C/J [Ezek. xxxvi. 35] ; and *Vn this (common to both
genders) [Judg. vi. 20, and 2 Kings iv. 25].
P.S. (by The 2 , the 3 , and the V in the Declension of nrfT, and
the 21 and the 3 in that of n v>N f sometimes take Kawmets, instead of
Shvah as given in the Table above.
P.S. (c). For n^N these, is sometimes found, but only when it
has the Definite Article ; as [Levit. xviii. 27].
P.S. (d). Some Grammarians are disposed to give occasionally to
the Demonstrative Pronoun W the sense of a Relative. For my own
part, I am not aware of any instance in which it is absolutely neces
sary so to do. This form occurs in Poetical language only, and by supply
ing after it the Relative ""JrS , which in Poetical language is almost
always omitted, the Pronoun W may always retain its Demonstrative
signification ; e g. [Isai. xlii. 24], " Who gave Jacob for a spoil, and Israel
to the robbers ? did not JEHOVAH ("ft> ttN&n iffy (which, if
be supposed to be understood after W , would signify literally) " [even]
this [JEHOVAH which] we have sinned before him, i.e., He against
Whom we have sinned?" as it is very justly translated in The
English Bible. Indeed it appears to me unaccountable how those who
would make IT sometimes a Relative, overlook the quite as strong
reasons for making nj in like manner to bear at times a Relative
sense ; in such instances as [Prov. xxiii. 22] TT'r. HT T^W1? SB^t? .
But the fact is, that the usual and proper sense of HJ may be
retained also here by supplying the Relative after it ;
thus, " Hearken to thy father [even] this (i.e., the same) [whoj begat
thee (m)." It must, however, be admitted that HT sometimes usurps
the function of an Adverb; e.g. [Gen. xliii. 10], "Except we had
lingered, surely now we had returned ( D1!??? H|) already twice,"
" Schon Zweimal," as it is translated by Mendelssohn.
172 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE XII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
CCr* For the plan of the Exercises see Letter xx. § 2.

'nirp 'S'aj£ "ijt : in 'i»3? 'd^v 'nlrr^

it "at? "l^pn? Mjvna : "n^j? ir "a? U")3H£ "tp

"nsn+'Njaai "■>nn "■oa m "rngk+ntft : "n1?^

22 I 19 18 20 18 21 .t 17
nttnf : "Tin+ ^aai npn+ ^33 sa »7 rnpk+ntfn
27 vmyi
, t : 26 p»n Mf73 2* nvsa nwoi
» 23 na. 18 •■aa+rrcK
;
SI ; SO ; j t 2B , 28
unam : - -:- d^did3• - rnm vn* 1 33*13 v vt n?K v *• : n7K7 v-t nw« v v:v not
•8 . ,| 85- 84 S3 » ft d 1 7 . C 32 b
mo7nn ^3 nan : Tara wqt$ mn; db>3
41 f 40 39 ; 38 28 87 j
W73n
• : • ; - n« v ns* v- "lew v -: ts^s? • T ntwn V t" no- : »a+nnn T vt -
28 48 . | 44/ t . 43 42 . . t t
n?+ nn nnptt^i 7Tinp+ ^npK pinlp : nn
'Vk : 'VniK "]3 "by 'V? 7$ "d^« ntfr : "nvy
S3 . 54 , « 53; 52 -t 51
mn ovn : nro rm paj K7 tpp* jr-p K7 -un
: njn ntyn iwv wnn 55 ova
59 58 : 57 "H^a 7 nirp 58 ••"lap";
f 63 28 82; 61 t 60 55
17 wlWJ hd : 7tn^a ^79 onn D*-p*a
88 65 67 I 68 ; 65 64
n\T
v Kinn- ova- : D*7an
• T I ts>7tf T nr 'arpan ■ T • • *3•
99 12 . 69
: TV loan • im
TV mrr T

'Vh God.—4 and I will glorify Him.—3 God.—4 a

father.—6 and I will extol Him.—6 a gate.—7 nirp. Jehovah.—
8 P><:J? a righteous man.—9 they shall come.—10 until.—11 he, or it,
shall pass over.—12 viz., D? people (shall pass over).—13 Thou (m)
hast gotten.—14 Thou (m) hast guided.—15 ""©H loving-kindness; w. aff.
*7?TJ, &c.—16 Thou (m) hast redeemed.—17 saying.—1 8*3 a son ; Plur.
D^a.—wniiving.—2°nOdead.—21but, for, that.—22 three.—23 Noah.
 LETTER XXV. 173

i—24 was overspread.—25 all.—26 Y"?!? earth.—27 a daughter ; Plur.

ni33: to be translated here, and as to my daughters.—28 HO, HQ t HI?,
what ?—29 shall I do?—30 2?T! chariot.—31 DW a horse.—32 BV? a name.
33 we will make mention.—34 behold !—35 man of.—36 E"ibn a dream.
37 coming.—38 shall be done.— 39 t£TN a man.—40 he shall smite.—
4i W^b? a Philistine.—42 pin?; laughter.—43 1 said.—44 mad—
45 nniSH? mirth.—46 doing [i.e., for our good.]—47 1 will put, or take.—
48 2b heart.—49 13 b? therefore.—50 will I wait.—61 brutish.—62 he
will know.—53 b^D? a fool.—54 he will understand.—55 DP day ; Plur.
CEP .—86 He will deliver thee (m) over.—67 T a hand.—58 it shall be
sung.—59 viz., "W? a song (shall be sung).—60 there was not—61 a
king.—62 in Israel.—63 have I done?—64 that.—65 thou (m) hast
smitten me 66 three.—67 times.—68 He will be.—69 one.

EXERCISE XIII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
See the note at the head of Exercise vii. page 137.

This [is] the boy— This [is] a boy. —This boy.—This [is] a virgin.
— nb-ma
t :
This [is] the virgin.—This virgin. —These virgins.—Those virgins.—
This husbandman.—That husbandman.—This [is] a husbandman.—

This [is] the husbandman.—These [are] the husbandmen.—Those

[are] the virgins.—These [are] the virgins.—These husbandmen.—
Those husbandmen.—This damsel. — That damsel.—This [is]
m»a,
T_. J-piu. nhy?
T.
the damsel.— These damsels.—These [are] the damsels.—Those
damsels.—Is not this (Heb., Whether-not \is~] this) the thing
13? (m)
which I-have-spoken ?—Not this [is] the way, and not this [is]
"•Jjria^ Tp/! (m) nV
the city.—Is not this (Heb., Whether-not [ts] this) the damsel who
-vy(f)
came to thee (f ) ?—Are not these (Heb., Whether-not [are]
nsa bs w. aff.
174 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

these) the virgins whom they-(m)-betrothed to-day ?—This (m) shall-say,

To Jehovah I [belong], and this (m) shall-call [himself ] by [the]

rrirv
t Hnp"1
t': • •••a
b
name-of Jacob And-one-shall-say on that day, Behold this [is]

a
our God, we-have-hoped for Him, and-He-will-save-us.
 LETTER XXVI. 175

LETTER XXVI.

The Interrogative Pronouns are signifying Who?

and HQ, HD , DD , signifying What? e.g.,

Din^D S3 nj [Isai. lxiii. 1] Who [is] this

(m) coming from Edom ?
""I^O rj; npi B>3^0 pinp Ha [Judg. xiv. 18] lit. What is
sweet more than honey, and
what is strong more than a
lion ? i.e., What is sweeter
than honey, and what is
stronger than a lion ?
"13*!^ HO [Isa. xxxviii. 15] What
shall I speak ?

2. "'D. Who? may be declined in the following

manner ; —

Norn. Who ?
Dat. To whom ?

Accus. Whom ?

vi\ Ablat. (By whom?

\From whom ?

3. The English Whose ? is expressed either by putting

a Noun in Construction before the Interrogative "'D , or
by putting the Dative of the Interrogative "'D before the
word to which the question refers ; e.g.,
176 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

SJ^O HSV; V TV2^7 [Job xxvi. 4] lit. spirit o/whom (i.e.,

whose spirit) has gone forth from
thee ? [where DDtftl is the construct
form of '"'Dtt'J breath, or spirit].
nriX ip1? [Gen. xxxii. 18] lit. to whom (i.e.,
whose) art thou (m) ?

4. From HD, HD , and !"1D are formed the following

Particles :—

and tV22 6y what ? PFS3 Zi&e what? i.e., how much,

or Aow> maw^ ? HsS /br ? i.e., why f

5. flD is also frequently used as an Adverb of Excla

mation and Admiration ; as,

tit D| dtik oyj npi nico no njn [Ps. cxxxiii. l]

Behold, how ^oot? and pleasant [is the] dwelling of
brethren, even [their dwelling] together.

P.S. (a), is generally used before words beginning with H or

37 bearing Kawmets, and HO at the end of a sentence, and also before
words beginning with M , H f or n . Before the Pronouns Wn and
Nsn t however, Hfi is always used.
P.S. (b). To the prefix is, in one instance, joined, i.e.,
"•pbtt?? [Jon. i. 7], which stands for "l^7N2 in consequence of, or
because of, whom ?
 LETTER XXVI. 177

EXERCISE XIV.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
Kr* For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

: Vta
vf - Siw
T : V 'napa+^n
T T "nUr
T : *ub»2
• "T naba+'c
T T
: "mfe
TT "o»aa
•T npavi
't • " 'on-ias1?
T t: - : '770
■■ • ^o noitro
"mat -t ^o* "vaana
t:t: "nm - "»p»
' - T ^o• 'tti —— Votf• - T "nto T T ^o
25 ■nK+^p?
. j : yn» '•pss 73 D^pn ^p n70fra IS o^p
24 23 22f 21 20 t
M 29 t 28 » « / 26 |
D3nt• •t : • : rrtp+w
- • : d^to+^07
•t : • • : isk+w
-: • :
S6 t 85 84/ 33 I 82 81 f t t
d^37 j*n 7# Dnn»D7 d^ik r\i?7an+',2?7
41 40 89 88 37 •
toi wm_ v n« '•rij?^ ^p nx : ^opp mpm
"m^ sso "wi "nlH+'mrp : "nab 4Vinp7 ^n
51 50 . 49 48 47 3
n»+s» na -lori'i : maa isd »n nyo+mrp
: - - v - t : v 1 . -- ^ t t :
10 55[ II i 50 . I 58 52
nr+^p |a nm ixy ymn udwi : «a ">Tan
"naa73
tt:- "na"1
tt "nnttf
- t "ina "naptfan
t 't ; • • ntfr+ND : 6 D7j/n
v"t t
60 . J 65 64 50 63 02
-• ^-m7- maa- no- rmir T I -joifci
■/ : nana
T - - ma TT
70 3 • 69 , 50 68 67
;hk nog nyp '•aiK np*n : pnoya npi nana

^>+naa : "vana 7$ n? "nvnir noa : "na#TK "^a

nyi&§ nn : ""•ajjnh 'Visbm "^a "niNDm "niaij?
B2 81 * 80 79 3 t
iao no : wbn^i ia; no : ni.T7
: M7Kn^ "spnaaaflp "aj?jt£ "t^?**

'For I*3!?, the H being Paragogic. God.—3 Jehovah. —

* Glorious.—5 B'Tf' Holiness.—6 and she said. —7 would have said.—
8 Abraham.—9 [that] she should have given suck to.—10 1? a son,
in constr. 1?.—11 viz., Sarah (should have &c ).—lshath
178 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

ascended [to].—13 Heaven. — 14 and hath descended.— 15 hath gathered.

—16 [the] wind.—17 in his figts.—18 hath hound up. — 19 [the] waters. —
20 nbpb a garment.—21 lit. hath caused to stand, i.e., established !—22 all.
—23 [the] ends of.—24 (the) earth.—28 woe.—26 wretchedness.—27 con
tentions.—28 babbling.— a wound.—30 without cause.—31 redness
of.—32 1?? an eye.—33 to those who stay late.—34 over.—35 T.. wine.—
36 to those coming. — 37 for the purpose of inquiring after.—38 mixed
[liquor].—39 have I oppressed ?—40 lit. have I broken, i.e., ruined ?—
4 1 "P a hand ; in constr. "P .—42 have I received ?—43 usually a ransom,
but here a bribe.—44~li« light 45 salvation.—46 shall I be
afraid ?—47 strength of.—48 D"?? life.—49 shall I be in dread ?—50 and
he said.—daughter (the same in constr. as absol.)—62 tell thou (f ).—
53 I pray.—84 king.—55 ask.—56 ob? youth.—87 the one (f ) looking
forth.—88 as.—89 [the] morning dawn.—60 fair (f ).—61 moon.—
62 bright (f).—63 sun.—64 Judah.—68 shall we say?—66!™ a lord
(Letter xix. P.S. a).—67 shall we speak ?—68 shall we justify ourselves ?
—69 lit. my Lords ; used here for Lord, applied to God in the Plural
for the sake of reverence (Letter xix. P.S. a).—70 shall I know?—
71 that.—72 1 shall possess it (f ).—73 should reconcile himself ?—
74 T>? iniquity.—78 nstan and nWten gin.—76 37t?B trespass.—77 make
me to know.—78 shall I return ?—79 beautiful are, lit. were ?—80 thy
(f ) footsteps, a sandal.—82 goodly are, lit. were ?—83 briS a
tent ; Plur. obilN .—84 Jacob.—85 thy (m) habitations.—86 Israel.

* After >3*T?? the name Jehovah is pointed as it is here, and is then

pronounced by the Jews as though it were O^bs ; whereas, when it
is pointed Hirp , it is pronounced by them as though it were ,3tT^ .

EXERCISE XV.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
Kr> See the note at the head of Exercise vii. p. 137.
Who [is] this (m)?—Who [is] this (f).—Who [are] these (m)?
-Who [are] these (f)?—What [is] this (m) in thy (m) hand?—
T
 LETTER XXVI. 179

This [is] a rod.—[Whether is] this the rod with which (Hebr.
n^a (m)
which with it) thou-(m)-hast-performed the signs in Egypt?
rpbv nis (f ) nyiSP
—To whom [belongs] this house?—To whom shall-I-give these
(m) 1PIM
fields ? To whom [belongs] this field ?—"Whom
nito(m),Piu.ni-m?.
hast-thou-(m)-reproached ? —Whom did-he-slay ? — From whom
ntnn
t : -•• am
-t
didst-thou-(m)-hear this thing?—What [art] thou (m) seeing?—
nsattf "u^ (m) nsin
What [am] I hearing ?—How awful [is] this place !—How great-are
?ait£? s-jia nipa (m) -lbna
Thy (m) works [O] Jehovah ; very deep-are Thy (m)
nt»?n ; Piur. o%?» nirr ihp npor
thoughts.
rat£rrn; piur. with aff. vrhtpnn, &c.
180 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXVII.

The technicalities of Grammar cannot be always

explained satisfactorily by tracing their etymology ; for
instance, the term Verb is derived plainly from the
Latin verbum, which however is not limited to any
particular part of speech, but signifies a word generally.
The Germans more appropriately designate a Verb
Zeitwort, lit. a time-word, i.e., a word which is modified
by time : Hebraists term it (from b'US to act, work,
perform,) i.e., a part of speech implying action. From
this it would seem that, according to the notions of the
Hebrew Grammarians, every Verb (Neuter Verbs even
not excepted), expresses action or performance of some
kind or other : thus, for example, one sleeping they would
consider as one engaged in an act which people name
sleeping ; and, one standing would be considered by them
as engaged in the act of standing. They distinguish,
however, between an Active and a Neuter
Verb by designating the former lit. a
going (i.e., a transitive) Verb and the latter by
112J! tyh lit. a standing, i.e., an intransitive Verb.
2. The term is moreover used by Hebrew
Grammarians as a sort of emblem of all words consisting
of three radical letters, its letters being employed to
represent the respective positions of the letters of such a
triliteral word : thus, in the word $21 honey, 1 , the first
letter of the word, is said to be the 2 ; 3 , its second
letter, is said to be the V ; and 11} , its third, to be the
 LETTER XXVII. 181

7 of the word. Again in the verb "lb^ to keep, {1}

would be said to be the S , D the V , and *1 the h
of the word ; so that in fact the three letters of the word
are used instead of figures, S to denote the first,
]} the second, and 7 the third letter of a word having
three radical letters.

3. In English, and in the other modern languages

with which I know your Grace to be acquainted, the
Infinitive is, as I scarcely need remark, considered as
the root of the Verb, but this is not so in Latin : thus
were you asked from what verb he went is formed, you
would answer, from the Verb to go, but if you were
asked the same question respecting the Latin ivit, you
would hardly think of answering from ire, but, from eo ;
and most Latin Dictionaries are arranged according to
this principle, which is of course merely conventional.
In Hebrew the Third Person Singular masc. of the Past
Tense is generally made use of, as the root of the Verb ;
e.g., we have "TpS to visit, "7j?S he visited ; now if a Hebraist
should be asked from what root such a word as n3"TpDfl
they (f) shall visit is formed, he would seldom say from
T'pS , but rather, from . This is of course a mere-
convention, but with it most Hebrew Lexicographers
comply.
4. Having made these few prefatory remarks, I now
proceed to observe that a Hebrew Transitive Verb
(provided it be complete) may be conjugated in seven
different forms, which the Hebrew Grammarians term
D"^33 njyD^ lit. seven buildings, or structures, which
however I will beg to denominate seven Voices, three of
which are Actives, three their respective Passives, and
one Reflective, e.g. —
o
182 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IpS he visited, Tp?? he was visited.

"Tj5S he diligently visited, *Tj?S Acmjosdiligently visited.
TpsJ'T' caused to vistf, "TJ?9n was caused to visit, or
was caused to be
visited.

"7j5Snn he visited himself.

5. Permit me, my Lady Duchess, to represent to you

the same forms one under another in one column ; and
to the right of each, in a second column, the name of the
Voice, as it is designated in Hebrew ; and to the right of
each of these again, in a third column, the same name
illustrated by means of figures :

I. "TJ?! he visited, tys (3 \ i)

II. "rj?5J he was visited, ^93 (3 a i J)
III. "7j?$ he diligently visited, (3 .? i)
IV. 1(52 he was diligently visited, ^^C3-i)
V. Tj?£in he caused to visit, ^J/OH (3^1 n)
VI. "Ip^'T was caused to be visited, T^SSn (3 ? i PJ)
VII. "Tj?.ann vmted AmseZf, tysflfl (3 2] jpn)

Where the figures plainly shew that,—

The first Voice is termed Paw-al, merely because in
the Third Person Singular Masc. (considered as the root,
see above), the first radical letter bears Kawmets, and
the second radical, Pathach ;
The second Voice is termed Niph-al, because it has
the letter 3 (bearing Short- CMrik) prefixed, the first
radical letter bearing Shvah, and the second Pathach ;
 LETTER XXVII. 183

The third Voice is termed Pi-dl, because the first

radical letter bears Short- Cherik, and the second,
Tsayre ;
The fourth Voice is termed Pu-al, because the first
radical bears Kibbuts, and the second Pathach ;
The fifth Voice is termed Hiph-el, because it has the
letter PI (bearing a Short-CMrik) prefixed, the first radical
letter bearing Shvah, and the second, Long-Cherik ;
The sixth Voice is termed Hoph-al, because it has
prefixed the letter PI with Kawmets, the first radical letter
bearing Shvah, and the second, Pathach ;
The seventh Voice is termed Hithpa-dl, because it has
the syllable J^H prefixed, the first radical bearing
Pathach, and the second, Tsayre,
6. Your Grace will please to observe that (the
Voice termed Pi-dl), "Tj?2 (the Voice termed Pu-al), and
"fj^Sfl1'? (the Voice termed Hithpa-dl), have each a
Dagesh inserted in their second radical as a mark of
their respective Voices; so that, with the exception of the
first, every one of the Voices is encumbered either with
some letter or letters prefixed, or with Dagesh-Forte, or
with both, as their respective characteristics ; and the first
Voice is consequently known and distinguished fromall the
others byhaving wopeculiar characteristic mark, i.e.,bynot
being encumbered with either a prefix or a Dagesh-Forte,
for as to the Dagesh in the letter 2 , it is merely a Dagesh-
Lene to regulate the pronunciation of the letter, and
has no Grammatical import whatever, as was observed to
your Grace in one of my former Letters (x. $ 2) ; and
had the Verb begun with any other letter than one of
n S 3 1 i 3 (which have an inherent Dagesh), there
would have been no Dagesh at all in the first Voice, as,
o 2
184 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

for example, Ifch he learned, IDJ^ he kept ; hence

the term most generally used to designate the first Voice
is Kal, Hebrew 'jj? (which signifies light, not encumbered
with any particular mark,) by which name I shall, with
your Grace's permission, always in future designate this
Voice. For the sake of brevity, I shall also in future
use:

Niph. for Niph-al ;

Pi. — PUl ;
Pu. — Pu-al
Hiph. — Hiph-el
Hoph. — Hoph-al, and
Hithp. — Hithpd-dL

In conclusion, I beg to present your Grace with a

Conjugation of the Verb "Tj5S , complete through all its
seven Voices, with which Your Grace will do well to
familiarise yourself before I have the honour of addressing
you again, when I intend to enter more fully into details.

P.S. Though the Hebrew Grammarians have adopted the Third

Person Singular masc. of the Past Tense as the root of the Verb, yet
they acknowledge that it is the Infinitive from which the forms all
flow, by naming it Tip?? (i.e., the spring, orfountain) : and it will be
found further on that there actually are some Irregular Verbs which
it is much more convenient to represent as having the Infinitive
Mood, rather than the Past Tense, for their root. Your Grace,
therefore, must not be surprised, if you frequently flnd me use the
Infinitive as the root of the Verb. I shall also in general give without
points the root of a Verb, of which the Infinitive Absolute never occurs
in Scripture.
 LETTEK XXVII. 185

Conjugation of the Regular Verb "TpS to visit.

Letters (a), (b), (c), &c, are attaohed to forms alike in appearance,
but of different meanings. The numbers (1), (2), (3), &c, refer to variations
of forms assumed sometimes by the Regular Verb.
KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
IpS To visit.
Constructive.
(»>1pS Visiting.
Declined with 0^33.
lj?5)3 In visiting.
As (or like) visiting.
"Tp ji^ For the purpose of visiting.*
"t^SD From visiting.

PAST.
He (or it m.) visited.t
•"Hi?? She (or it/.) visited.
rjipa Thou (»».) visitedst.
Thou (/.) visitedst.
^npa I visited.
npa They (m. and/.) visited.
crnps Ye (ot.) visited.
\iriii Ye (/.) visited.
IJlp.S We visited.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT,
^p.ib One (?n.) visiting.
mpj5)

DHj3^ Plur. (m.) visiting.

rn7p£) Plur. (/.) visiting.

* Or, in order to visit

t Or, hath visited, or would (or might) have visited.
186 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
"TIpS One (m.) visited.
i*nip2 One (/.) visited.
DHIp? Plur. (m.) visited,
niltpa Plur. (/.) visited.

IMPERATIVE.
(a) ip&(2) Visit thou (m.)
"HpS Visit thou (/.)
npS Visit ye (m.)
n:"Tj53 Visit ye (/.)
-
FUTURE.

Ip5? <3> He (or it m.) will visit.*

(b) "TpSri She (or it/.) will visit.
(b) "TpDH Thou (m.) wilt visit
s"!j?5>C t11011 (/•) wilt visit-
"rpDSW I will visit.
Hp?yM5) They (».) will visit.
(c) njl'p^n They (/.) will visit.
Hp5? Ye (m.) will visit.
w njnpbn Ye (/.) wm visit
"TppJ We will visit
(1.) y??J he was willing; fap^ he was little. In pause, the second radical of
tpB takes Kawmets in all the Persons of the Past Tense except those of the
2 Plur. masc. & fem.
(2.) SS? approach thou (m.J : "With n Paragogic (See Letter xix. § 3), roip ;
also nstp* hear thou (m.J.
(3.) he will approach ; "i£>2,l he will stand ; 335; it (m.) m*"W oe pleasant.
(4.) With Paragogic n , nro*} I will keep ; in Pause rn&tfM.
(5.) In Pause . With Paragogic \ , yawp] they (m.J will hear.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must visit

 LETTER XXVI L.

NIPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute & Constructive.
d) fpan To be visited.

Declined with D b 2 3.

"Tj?.an3 In being visited.

As (or like) being visited.
For the purpose of being visited.*
From being visited.

PAST.
"TpEiiO He (or it m.) was visited,f
n*Ip53 She (or it/.) was visited.
PH. Thou (m.) wast visited.
F)"TpS3 Thou (/.) wast visited.
^fJIPM I was visited.
np53 They (m. Sr /.) were visited.
OjPlPS)? Ye (m.) were visited.
jfHpSJ Ye (/.) were visited.
^*Tp53 We were visited.

PARTICIPLE.
Tp23 One being visited.
!"H£?j! <2> One (/.) being visited.
D^p53 Plur. (m.) being visited.
nil£53 Plur. (/.) being visited.

• Or, in order to be visited.

t Or, would (or might) have been visited.
183 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.
(d) *7j52>n Be thou (m.) visited.
V7P§||,7 Be thou (/•) visited.
npSn Be ye (m.) visited.
n3"Tp2n Be ye (/.) visited.
FUTURE.
"Tj?S^ He (or it m.) will be visited.*
(e) *lj?.2fl She (or it/0 wiU be visited.
(•) "7j?§fi Thou (m.) wilt be visited.
^"Tp2Il Thou (/.) wilt be visited.
"Tj?3N (3) I will be visited.
VlfpaV*) They (m.) will be visited.
(f) ni"Tpan They (/.) will be visited.
VfpEJI/l Ye (m.) will be visited.
(f) njlpBn Ye (/.) will be visited.
*Tp23 We will be visited.
(1). In Pause, the second Radical takes Kawmets in all the Persons of the
Past Tense, except the second Plur., Masc, and Fern.
(2). Sometimes rnpc: .
(3) . I will escape ; in Pause, I will be honoured.
(4). They will be created.
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be visited.

PI-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute and Constructive.
(g) To visit diligently.
Declined with 0 V 2 2 .
*Ij?S3 In visiting diligently. *
As (or like) visiting diligently.
For the purpose of visiting diligently.\
"TJpSP From visiting diligently.
+ Or, in order to visit diligently.
 LETTER XXVII.

PAST.

(i) He (or it to.) diligently visited.*

PHj?2 She (or it/.) diligently visited.
J^*Tj?S Thou (m.) diligently visitedst.
rTTpS Thou (/.) diligently visitedst.
V^HjP^ I diligently visited.
They (to. and/.) diligently visited.
DfnpS Ye (to.) diligently visited.
|ijnj?S Ye (/.) diligently visited.
We diligently visited.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

*Ij?2P One (to.) diligently visiting.

One (/.) diligently visiting.

D^7j?DO Plur. (to.) diligently visiting.

ni"Tj?S!5 Plur. (/.) diligently visiting.

IMPERATIVE.

Visit thou (m.) diligently.

Visit thou (/.) diligently.
Visit ye (m.) diligently.
Visit ye (/.) diligently.

* Or, would (or might) have diligently visited.

190 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.

"fj?J^ He (or it w.) will diligently visit.*

(h> She (or it/.) will diligently visit.
<h) "T^SA Thou (m.) wilt diligently visit.
HP&fl Thou (/•) wilt diligently visit.
"T]?2K (J) I will diligently visit.
l*Tj?Q^ They (m.) will diligently visit.
(k) ni"T)?bri They (/.) will diligently visit.
T"Tj?D£l Ye (m.) will diligently visit.
(k> nnj^an Ye (/.) will diligently visit.
"TpD3 We will diligently visit.
(1.) 13* he brake.
(2.) rreptj JWW declare; in Pause rnsw I will hymn.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must diligently visit.

PU-AL.

INFINITIVE.

"7j?S To be diligently visited.

Declined with D 7 3 3

*Tj?S3 In being diligently visited.

"Tp23 As (or like) being diligently visited.
"TpD1? For the purpose of being diligently visited.f
"IpSO From being diligently visited.

t Or, in order to be diligently visited.

 LETTER XXVII. 191

PAST.
"1J?3 He (or it m.) was diligently visited.*
She (or it/.) was diligently visited.
Thou (m.) wast diligently visited.
Thou (f.) wast diligently visited.
I was diligently visited.
They (m. & /.) were diligently visited.
DJp^pS Ye (m.) were diligently visited.
Ye (/.) were diligently visited.
We were diligently visited.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
"IjJSJpw One (m.) diligently visited.

One (/.) diligently visited.

rnj?£ju;
D"H(52P Plur. (m.) diligently visited.
nlTj??)ib Plur. (/.) diligently visited.

FUTURE.
"Tj?^ He (or it m.) will be diligently visited,f
(1) "fj^fi She (or it/.) will be diligently visited.
(1) Thou (m.) wilt be diligently visited.
"I7i?5^ Thou (/.) wilt be diligently visited.
"7j5Dfc? I will be diligently visited,
nj?^ They (m.) will be diligently visited.
(m) n3"7|?2fn Thev (/•) wil1 be diligently visited.
nj?2I|1 Ye (m.) will be diligently visited.
m n^"Tp2£1 Ye (/.) will be diligently visited.
We will be diligently visited.
(1). ^« consumed.
• Or, would (or might) have been diligently visited.
f Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be diligently visited.
192 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HIPH-EL.
INFINITIVE.
"TpS!! (i) To cause to visit.

Declined with D ^3 3.
Tp5|)n3 ^n causing to visit.
T^PJinS As (or like) causing to visit.
^PSjnV For the purpose of causing to visit.*
TPQn© From causing to visit.

PAST.
"T^pDH He (or it m.) caused to visit,f
iTppJJPl She (or it /.) caused to visit.
n"TJ7DrT Thou (m.) causedst to visit.
£H£2n T1>ou (/.) causedst to visit.
,|]^*Tj?2n I caused to visit.
n^pDD They (m. and /.) caused to visit.
D£]!*TpJ5n Ye (m.) caused to visit.
I£|*7p2n Ye (/.) caused to visit.
^3"7p5'!' We caused to visit.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
TpSlE One (m.) causing to visit.

HTp5? 7 One (/.) causing to visit.

rnpsp )
D^^pD^ Fhxr. (m.) causing to visit.
ni"Pp5£? Y^1- (/•) causing to visit-

• Or, in order to cause to visit.

f Or, would (or might) have caused to visit
 LETTER XXVII. 193

IMPERATIVE.
"TpS'"' Cause thou (m.) to visit.
""TP^L1 Cause thou (/•) to visit-
TPpDi"! Cause ye (m.) to visit,
njlp^n Cause ye (/.) to visit.

FUTURE.
T'p.51 <2> He (or it m.) will cause to visit.*
(n) "Pjpan She (or it/) will cause to visit.
<n) Thou (m.) wilt cause to visit.
^TpSin Thou (/.) wilt cause to visit.
Tp2tf I will cause to visit.
IT'pi^ They (m.) will cause to visit.
(p) nnp5b They (/•) wiU cause 10 visit-
IT'pSn Ye (m.) will cause to visit.
(p) n3"Ip.5n Ye (/.) will cause to visit.
"Pp23 We will cause to visit.
(1.J Sometimes ipon .
(2.) Sometimes itf? .
» Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to visit.

r
HOPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
(,) "fp5C)
■ T > To be caused to visit, or to be caused to be visited.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
^"?2)n3 In being caused to visit.
Tp5H3 As (or like) being caused to visit.
^p5H 7 ^0T tne PurPose °f being caused to visit,f
TpDHiO From being caused to visit,
t Or, in order to be caused to visit, or be visited.
194 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PA8T.
He (or it m.) was caused to visit.*
She (or it/.) was caused to visit.
Thou (m.)wast caused to visit.
Thou (/.) wast caused to visit.
I was caused to visit.
They (m. &/.) were caused to visit.
Ye (m.) were caused to visit
Ye (/.) were caused to visit.
We were caused to visit.
PARTICIPLE PAST.
TpS0(2) One (m.) caused to visit.

J. ' J ? One (/.) caused to visit.

rnpjjD)
D^"7p5p Plur. (m.) caused to visit.
r\ilj?59 plur- (/•) caused to visit.

FDTURE.
Hp^ (8) He (or it m.) will be caused to visit.f
(r^p5^ She (or it /.) will be caused to visit.
W npSjn Thou (m.) wilt be caused to visit.
"'"IpSJfi Thou (/.) wilt be caused to visit.
^p5^ I will be caused to visit.
npD"* They (»».) will be caused to visit.
(,) rWTpsjiri They (/.) will be caused to visit.
np5^ Ye (m.) will be caused to visit.
(s) n3"Tp3i^ Ye (/.) will be caused to visit.
Tp23 We will be caused to visit.
(1). ■qWn He (or it m.) was cast down. In Pause, the second Radical takes
Kawmets in all the forms ofthe Past Tense, except the 2 Plur., Masc. and Fem.
(2) . "typo One (m.) cast down.
(3) . He (or it m.) icill be cast down.

* Or, would (or might) have been caused to visit (or be visited),
f Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to visit.
 LETTER XXVII. 195

HITHPA-AL.

INFINITIVE.
Absolute & Constructive.
I'HjJSnn t1) To visit one's self.

Declined with □ 7 3 3 .
In visiting one's self.
As (or like) visiting one's self.
For the purpose of visiting one's self.*
From visiting one's self.

PAST.
(t) "Ij?Snn He (or itm.) visited himself.|
n"1j?3nn She (or iff.) visited herself.
rnjP^nri Thou (m.) visitedst thyself.
P"lj?Srin Thou (/.) visitedst thyself.
■,Jl'lj?Srin I visited myself.
nj?Snn They (m. &/.) visited themselves.
DJFnpsSnn Ye (»».) visited yourselves.
jillpSnn Ye (/.) visited yourselves.
!)2"T(?3J'pn We visited ourselves.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
"lj?Snp One (m.) visiting himself.
JT^sgl^jpj 0ne (/•) visiting herself.
D","Tj?2PP Plur. (m.) visiting themselves.
ninj?2JpP Plur- (/•) visiting themselves.

* Or, in order to visit one's self.

+ Or, would (or might) have visited himself.
196 HEBREW GRAMMAR

IMPERATIVE.
(t)l(?2rin Visit thou (m.) thyself.
"Hj^S.nn Visit thou (/.) thyself.
np?2nn Visit ye (m.) yourselves.
n3"Ij?Slin Visit ye (/.) yourselves.

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will visit himself. '
(u> igaoi? She (or it/.) will visit herself.
Thou (m.) wilt visit thyself.
Thou (/.) wilt visit thyself.
<2) I will visit myself.
njfah'! They (m.) will visit themselves.
They (/.) will visit themselves.
npann Ye (to.) will visit yourselves.
(t> nnpann Ye (/.) will visit yourselves.
1 "Tpjnj We will visit ourselves.

(1) When the first radical is (as ifctf to guard), the form is lontfn.
When the first radical is D (as "ifiD to hide), „ „ inncn .
When the first radical is 2 (as Pis to he just), „ „ P"ro«7 .
When the first radical is o (as nob to he unclean), „ „ m?sn .
(2) With Paragogic n , nJjrrariN I will gently guide myself.

The Infinitive Constructive of the Kal, *Tp3 , on

taking the Possessive affixes, gives,—

"»"Tj?a my visiting, TTR^ thy (m) visiting, "^"T^S thy (f)

visiting, 8gc,
like the Declension of T# (Letter xix. § 4).

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must visit himself.
 LETTER XXVIII. 197

LETTER XXVIII.

From the Conjugation of the complete Transitive Verb

"Tj?S , given in my last, your Grace will have perceived
that the Niph-al is the passive of the Kal. There are,
however, Verbs which have no Kal ; in such the Niph-al
has, in general, a Kal signification, and, consequently,
they may be looked upon as in some manner Hebrew
Verbs Deponent, i.e., having a Passive form, but not a
Passive signification ; e.g. [Gen. 1. 24], " The land
which (V2#2) He sware to Abraham," &c.
Again, there are Verbs which, though used in the
Kal, have in Niph. the same signification ; e.g., [Ps.
xxxv. 1 ], Dn1? " Fight thou (m) against those that fight
against me " (Kal) ; and [Judg. ix. 38], " Go out, I
pray now, (CPlSlI) andfight" (Niph.).
2. Again, the Niph. is sometimes used in a Reflective
sense instead of the Hithp.; as [2 Sam. xx. 10] "But
Amasa (lOtf'J $h) took no heed (i.e., did not guard him
self) against the sword that [was] in Joab's hand."
3. The Pi., as appears from the Conjugation alluded
to, properly imparts intensity to the action expressed by the
Verb ; but in some cases the Verb has in the Pi. a signifi
cation altogether different from that which it has in the
c b a _ b a
Kal ; e.g., p"T$ 1D7 ^3 [Isa. xxvi. 10] He learned not

righteousness (Kal) ; Ifeb [Eccles. xii. 9] He taught (the

people knowledge) (Pi.).
Verbs which have no Kal can scarcely be said to
have in the Pi. any signification of intensity; e.g.t
p
198 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

P1V [Ps. Xl. 10] 1 HAVE ANNOUNCED, Or DECLARED,

righteousness.
4. The Hiph. too ceases to have a Causative sense in
Verbs not used in the Kal ; as T7^H [Lament, ii. 1],
" JHe AatfA cast down (from heaven [to the] earth)," &c.
5. And so too the Hithp. loses its Reflective sense in
words which have no Kal; as [Isa. xxxvii. 21],
" Whereas (ri^SHn) thou (m) hast prayed."
I may as well mention here that the Hithp. is some
times elegantly used to express feigning, or pretending ;
as [Prov. xiii. 7], " There is ("l^J/HD) one-(m)-making-
himself-rich {i.e., pretending to be rich), and yet hath
nothing."
6. Having thus taken a hasty survey of the Voices,
let us now consider the parts of which they are composed.
Here our eye first meets with the Infinitives, of which
there are two sorts, viz., the Infinitive Absolute and the
Infinitive Constructive; as 7p§ to visit, *Yp5 visiting.
The latter is called Constructive, because forms of this
kind, assuming the nature of a verbal Noun, may be in
Construction with a Noun ; thus [Gen. v. 1], " In the
day of DViVg ik")2) lit. [the] creating-of God {i.e.,
God's creating) man," that is to say, " On the day when
God created man ; " [Ruth i. 1], " Now it came to pass
in the days of (D'tp$t£>n lit. [the] judging of the
judges (i.e., the judges judging)," that is to say, " In the
days when the judges judged."
In the two instances here quoted, $12 is the Infinitive
Constr. of 812 to create, and CObCf* the Infinitive Constr.
of Dbft* to judge.
For the same reason, i.e., because the Infinitive Constr.
assumes the nature of a verbal Noun, it may be declined
with Possessive affixes ; as
 LETTER XXVIII. 199

"HpS my visiting, 'jlpS thy (m) visiting, ^"[p S thy (f)

visiting, &c.

7. Your Grace will also perceive from the Table of

the Conjugation that the Infinitive Constr. may be
declined with the prefixes D ^33, in the same way as
Nouns are. They may also be declined with both prefixes
and affixes at once ; as

"HpS? in my visiting, ^IpQS as thy (m) visiting,

"•H/Py? for the purpose of thy (f) visiting, &c.

8. The Infinitive Absolute is sometimes used instead

of an Imperative ; as n?tf? Di1 n« "liDT [Exod. xx. 8]
Remember [the] day of the Sabbath ; which, strictly
speaking, signifies, " [It behoves you] to remember [the]
day of the Sabbath," something like the Latin Gerund
in dum when connected with est.
9. I cannot dismiss the subject of the Infinitives with
out mentioning to your Grace that their Absolute forms
are sometimes coupled with a Tense to express Emphasis ;
a b a b
as D^yjt/n 13} n ^l^n [Judg. ix. 8] the trees indeed went,
&c. Here ^i/H is the Infinitive Absol., and l^'pn tne
c a b
Past, of the Kal. Again, D^pX D\i^ Tp^ "7p3
a b c
[Gen. 1. 25] God will surely visit you (m). Here "IpS is
the Infinitive Absol., and lp2i] the Future, of the Kal.
10. After having dwelt a little upon the Infinitive, we
will proceed to notice the Imperative Mood. Here we
perceive that the Hebrew has an Imperative only in the
Second Person, the philosophy of The Language not
admitting the idea that one could command himself, or a
p 2
200 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

person not present (commonly called the Third

Person).
The Future Tense must, therefore, be used to express
the First and Third Persons of the Imperative ; thus, the
young Prince Shechem says to Jacob and his sons
a a
[Gen. xxxiv. 11], DpT-P ]n NVJ?S " Let- me-find
favour in your (m) eyes." Here *s *ne First
Person Singular Future Kal of the Irregular Verb K¥D
to find, and strictly means I will, or may find (i.e., May I
find favour in your eyes). Again, Lot says to the angels
[Gen. xix. 20], " This city is near to flee unto, and it is
a little one, (HD'pDS*) let me escape {thither)." Here
Htp'pDSI is the First Person Singular Future Niph. (with
H Paragogic [Letter xix. § 3] ) of the Verb to
escape, and strictly signifies, / will, or may escape (i.e.,
May I escape). So also [Gen. xli. 35], Joseph says
to Pharaoh, 1!f3j?1T And let them gather (all the food,
&c); where l^p"! is the Third Person Plur. Masc.
Future Kal, properly signifying, and they (m) shall
gather.
Before proceeding, I must crave your Grace's indul
gence for having introduced, in the first of these in
stances, an Irregular Verb, which of course you cannot
compare with the Table of "T££ . I may probably
hereafter also be guilty of a few such anticipations
by way of illustrating the nature of the Moods and
Tenses. As, however, it will in such instances be
always mentioned when the Verb is Irregular, no
difficulty can arise from my so doing ; and, of course, all
the difficulties arising from the different forms of the
Irregular from those of the Kegular Verbs will be
cleared up in due time. To quote another instance
 LETTER XX VI 1 1. 201

illustrating the mode of expressing the Third Person

Singular of the Imperative,—the Prophet Isaiah says
[1. 10], "Who is among you a fearer-of JEHOVAH . . .
(nBT) let him trust (in [the] Name of JEHOVAH) ; "
where flD^T being the Third Person Singular' (m)
Future Kal, is used Imperatively.
11. There is another remarkable feature in the use of
the Hebrew Imperative, namely, that it cannot have a
Negative Particle before it, so that a Negative Imperative
must be expressed by a Future Tense with a Negative
Particle ; thus nStf'n "lb? [Deut. ix. 7] Remember
thou (m) [and] forget not, where nst^ri is the Second
Person Singular (m) Future Kal, so that T\ypp[ bit
would strictly signify, thou shalt not forget.
12. Of the Participles I have only to observe that
in consequence of l£2 signifying strictly one (m) visiting,
this part of the Verb has the privilege of now and
then assuming the character of a Noun, for one visiting
is in fact a visitor ; so that, for instance, "l©t£> may some
times signify one (m) keeping, and may, in that significa
tion, govern an Accusative Case ; as V3 TDti' [Prov.
xxi. 23] one (m) keeping his mouth; but it also may
signify a keeper, and as such may be in Construction
with a Noun ; as *j5$ T1X "WC? [Gen. iv. 9] Whether
[the] keeper of my brother am If i.e., Am I my brother's
keeper? Again, from ®hW to judge, we have £D2fc>
[a man] judging, and, therefore, also ajudge; Plur. D^PDJi'
[men] judging, and, therefore, judges, and hence in
Construction p.K ODDitf [Ps. ii. 10] judges-of [the] earth.
This observation, of course, refers to both Participles of
the Kal, as well as to those of the other Voices, in either
Gender, and in either Number.
13. Before noticing the Tenses, I would beg to
202 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

observe that it is with the luxuries of Language as it is

with the luxuries of life ; when we have them we could
not well do without them, but when we have them not
we do not feel the want of them. A well-bred European
would not know what to do were he to sit down to
a well-served table but miss his knife and fork ; while,
on the other hand, many a luxurious Asiatic would con
sider it the greatest punishment to be forced to use
such, to him, most formidable instruments. Imperfect,
Perfect, and Pluperfect Tenses, as well as Indicative,
Conditional, Subjunctive, and Optative Moods un
questionably make those languages which have them
very full and elegant, and, doubtless, afford to those who
know the use of them, great ease and precision in
the expression of their ideas ; but the Hebraist who has
only a Past and Future Tense at his disposal is quite
happy with them, and does not want anything more ;
common sense and the context teaching him when
to consider them as Indicative, and when as Conditional.
When the wicked man, reproved by Moses for smiting
his neighbour, said to him [Exod. ii. 14], " Intendest
thou to kill me as (f)J"in) thou killedst [the Egyptian) ? "
it is evident that J^IH (the Past of the Kal) is used in
its Indicative sense.
On the other hand, when the angel said to Balaam
[Numb. xxii. 33], " And the ass saw me, and turned
from me these three times : unless she had turned away,
surely now even thee I should have slain,"
cannot be taken in any other sense than Con
ditional.
14. In like manner, all the various shades of signifi
cation assigned in the Table to the Future, are, without
any difficulty, distinguished by the context: e.g. [Gen.
 LETTER XXVIII. 203

xliv. 8], " Behold, the money, which we found in our

sacks' mouths, we brought again unto thee out of the
land of Canaan ; how then should we steal out of
thy lord's house silver or gold ? "— [Ps. lvi. 12], " In
c b 1
God have I trusted, I will not fear : What (?) D"TK ftfy£!)
a b a c
can man do to-me ? "— [Gen. xxix. 26], " And Laban
c a b a b a c
said (|5 nt^,J£| X7), iY-must not he-done so in our country,
to give the younger before the first-born."
In the instances here quoted, who can mistake the
proper force of the Verb ? I should, however, mention
that in the last two cases the Verb quoted is from the
Irregular Verb nJPJ/ to do, of which nj^Jp is the Future
Kal, and n{ffl£ the Future Niph-al.
I have not yet said half of what I have to say upon the
Table presented in my last ; but fearing lest a multiplicity
of rules without practice upon them should tire your
attention and become obliterated from your memory
through a want of exercising them, I think it right to in
terrupt my remarks in the midst of them, as it were, by
introducing a few sentences, by means of which the rules
given above may be illustrated, and be thereby more
firmly impressed upon your Grace's mind. Before
doing so, however, I beg to lay before you those
forms in the Table which, having the same appear
ance, but different significations, are there given
with the same letters respectively attached to them to
mark their similarity, so that if in the course of your
reading you meet with one of them, the meaning of which
appears unsuitable to the context, you may be at once
directed by these letters to the other similar form, which
will probably be the one which the context requires.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

KAL.
*JpB Visiting (Inf. Const.).
Visit Thou (m).
"TpSfi She will visit.
Ip^ri Thou (m) wilt visit.
n27p$n They (f) will visit.
n3!p5£l Ye (f) will visit.

niph-Xl.
-rpsn To be visited (Inf.).
"Jpsn Be thou (m) visited.
"Tp.SH She will be visited.
"Tp.2ri Thou (m) wilt be visited.

nnpSfl They (f) will be visited.

n3*Tp.Sn Ye (f) will be visited.

PI-A.L.
IpS To visit diligently (Inf.).
"Tj?2 Visit thou (m) diligently.
■JpQfl She will diligently visit.
npiJil Thou (m) wilt diligently visit.

nnpa^ They (f) will diligently visit.

nJIpan Ye (f) will diligently visit.

pu-Al.
Ip^r* >S%e will be diligently visited.
"IpSH Thou (m) wilt be diligently visited.
n3"lpDn They (f) will be diligently visited.
71-npDO Ye (f) will be diligently visited.
 LETTER XXVIII. 205

HIPH-EL.
TpSP She will cause to visit.
Tpar) Thou (m) wilt cause to visit.
n3*Tj?.s5r\ They (f) will cause to visit.
njlpDn Ye (f) will cause to visit.

HOPH-AL.
"fpSf) She will be caused to visit.
"Tj?Dr) Thou (m) wilt be caused to visit.
nj"fj?5r) They (f) will be caused to visit.
H31j?5ri Ye (f) will be caused to visit.

HITHPA-AL.
*^i?Snn To visit one's self (Inf.).
"7j?Snn He visited himself.
"Ti?.2nn Visit thou (m) thyself.

l(?3nri She will visit herself.

1j?2r\in Thou (m) wilt visit thyself.

'"l^jJSnri They (f) will visit themselves.

i"13!j5.2nr\ Ye (f) will visit yourselves.

P.S. In Gen. xxxi. 30 we find nriQp?3 Fp3D thou greatly longedst,

where the anomalous form stands for H??"!1 Infin. Niph., and
nF\*p?3 stands for W?D?? Past Niph. So too we find [1 Sam.
xx. he earnestly asked, where the anomalous form
stands for ^Wt^n Infin. Niph. We also find [Prov. xxiv. 17]
VJt^SM and on his stumbling, for i^Sn?'! .
206 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE XVI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
Kj* For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. §. 2.

: 'tt 'ruts'
tt "duo-ik
• t : - ,5i37E3
~ :t: Tn+'nattf
• t tt 'wurbtf 'n
■v
"■.3 'Ni^T "nan "n^j/i : 'pv»n V Vo^to+^ryn

typn : ,57*n^ V. °i7pp "VnpNp : 5^i7pfi 5^7p

"on: "nimi : 133 "Vtfpn "7ittfo "dx 9ir^ '^Dn
22 21 . . lit 8t 2«i . 8 * IS
281 27 26 t St 2flt . 24 22 18
73 .* d?p ^72 in 7in^ mm : mm+
run •• ; : iT3 t: nai7^
t : 131m : - : : 3-invt ^7t^+n7«
•• : v ■*
28 » C ITf b 16 88 * 85 8/ 84 , 33 . 32
T?5>n dk : "r? n&sp 7# 3rpri pns
49 I 42 IS IS, 41 t 40 I S4 39 a
&bvn : 1 »3 t ^3 mm t : ^D7 : • : 013*0
t: - : 3n3"«
*• t ■ 31D
"a; r^rai V3 "nim 4,to&^ :'n$C
49 « 47 43 46 44 44
-is-n : j/an ito^ns : ip-is prn ^3
39 52 . 51 t 49 50t -t 15j 1 .
: 3ico is in -13^ 7313 x? : 7*n^ M3 7K
55 8r 54 53 8t 52o t 42 11
: m^33n pspp onnn 7j/_ J7ip S3 nj n^n
• 59 59 13 58 57t 52 t 56
p»0 "^333 333 ^3 : nD2 7'S3 J7T TK
63 62 61 ; . 60
rnapp ^3"ipn IP nty rw ^p : Dn3#n
68 .[ . 67 8 t 66 t 18 65 . t 64
m7"i3 msb • t -; Dm7i? Twn i * : mmi
t : moto t : ib
66 j 71 74* 68 I OS
r?37^n : nn« ri37^n ^nft] • D^P?n |p
76 I 75 74 73 72
njo^nri Kinn dvs : 3j/n? iv33 ?n3i?p
81 . 80ft 79 78 77 I
m3m:3 77n3 oagvnns : m3>n rn7in3n
87 86 , 85 » * 84 ,t 83 82
3^3nri3 : n3 ^nnn D\n?gn n$ : tj;
18 . 83 88
: mm 13^3 01/
 LETTER XXVIII. 207

1 1? a son ; in constr. 11} ; when in regimen with a number of

years, it signifies so many years old.—2 thirty.—3 year (Letter xxii.
§ 7, Rule iv.).—4 David. —6 'T'B Kal, to reign ; in Hiph. to cause to
reign, i.e., to appoint or make king.—6 forty.—7 And Athaliah.—
8 upon, over.—9 earth, land.—10 And now.—11 behold.—12 lit.,
I knew, stands for / know, like the Latin novi. —13 that, because,
when.—14 1 have rejected him.—15 Israel.—16 Whether?, if.—17 to
rule.—18 nin"; Jehovah.—19 He repented.—20 Saul.—21 "ibtP to keep,
guard.—22 simple [men].—23 and he shall be.—24 V? a tree.—25bhtp
to plant.—26 streams-of.—27 water.—28 all. —29 to draw 30 3"TT
a sword ; with aff. "'Sin , &c.—31 T a hand.—32 a name (the same
constr. as Absol.).—33 Aaron.—34 2h3 to write.—36 7"II2n a rod ; in
constr. <"tI2!? .—36 Levi.—37 to (lit. upon).— a king.—39 good,
pleasing.—40 to destroy them (m).—41 before.—42 [He is] coming.—
43 taStp to judge.—44 T*9 between. —45 I pray.—46my vineyard.—47 may
he (i.e., let him) come forth.—48 wicked.—49 "CH (in Kal used only in the
Partic.) in Pi. to speak. —60 We shall be able, we can.—51 evil.—62 or.
—sflhl Pi. to leap.—53 "in a mountain.—54 V?l2 Pi. to skip.—55 i"I3J?3
a hill.—66 then.—57 V« a hart.—68 a lame [man].—59 223 to steal.—
eo *nas a Hebrew.—61 one (f) coming up.—62 "13113 a wilderness.—
63 "lt2)7 to burn incense, also to perfume-with.—64 myrrh.—05 naisb
frankincense.—06 ~] (not used in Kal) Hiph. to throw, cast
67 1?*? a ;3tone.—08 great, Plu. (f ).—69 D^Btt? heaven.— 70 behind—
71 1? a back.—72 "tyl. a grave ; w. aff. &c—73 ">??. a branch—
74 lit, being abominated, i.e., abominable.—75 Hi*1 a day.—76 in
Hithp. to faint.—77 rfj»in? a virgin.— 78 HOJ Masc, HD> Fern., fair,
beautiful.—79 1°^ in Hithp. to swoon.—80bbn a wounded [man]
si rim. a wide-street.—82 a city.—83 HN prep. with 84 God.
85lbn (in Kal as well as Hithp.) to walk.—86 Noah—87 213 in
Hithp. to offer oneself willingly.—88 a people. —m bless ye (m).

* For 7F\?njpn . The word having been deprived of its accent,

the Tsayre is changed into Segol, because there cannot be a quiescent
Shvah after a long vowel, unless this vowel have an accent.
208 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE XVII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

Kf* See the note at the head of Exercise vii. (page 137).
[N.B. Henceforth no Personal Pronoun is to be expressed as the
Nominative Case to a Tense, or as defining an Imperative Mood,
unless there be written beneath it Pronoun expressed."]

They (m) shall not learn. — They (f ) shall not teach

them (m).—We taught you (f).—If thou (f) hast not learned,
EH
learn now.— She learned and also taught wisdom. — Ye (f)
nny
t- Da- nann
t: T
shall not learn, and shall not teach.—Learn ye (m), and also teach ye

knowledge.—I have-chosen you (m) for-the-purpose-of-teaching $

you my law.—I-came to-thee (f ) in-order-to-learn §.

rnin visa b«w.aff.

* In Kal signifies to learn, and in Pi. to teach.

t Construed with
% Inf. with the > of the prefixes 0 b 3 3 .
§ Inf. with i of o ■> 3 a .
 LETTER XXIX. 209

LETTER XXIX.

In resuming my observations on the Hebrew Tenses,

I beg to call your Grace's particular attention to this
peculiar feature of the Future Tense, viz., that it is very
often used to express frequent, continued, or habitual
action ; e.g. [Exod. xviii. 26], " And they judged the
people at all seasons: the hard cause ( |WIP ) they-vsvo-
to-bring to Moses, but every small matter ( DH ICDISti'? )
they [themselves] vsED-to-judge " where is the
Third Person Plur. Masc. Future Hiph., with |
Paragogic, of the Irregular Verb Ni3 to come, and
literally signifies, they (rn) used to cause to come, i.e., they
used to bring ; and ICDISI^I (which stands for ICOSStf^ ) is
the Third Person Plur. Masc. Future Kal of the Verb
b c a a
to judge. So [Job i. 5], 2VX Ht^y; Ihm
b c
Job vsED-to-do ; where iltyiH is the Third Person Sing.
Masc. Future Kal of the Irregular Verb to do.
2. Another remarkable feature of the Hebrew Tenses
is that of their changing parts on taking the prefix 1 ,
with one punctuation when it changes a Future Tense
into a Past, and another when it changes a Past into a
Future ; this 1 is from these properties termed T
Conversivum.
3. "When the "\ converts a Future Tense into a Past,
its punctuation is either Pathach (followed by Dagesh),
or Kawmets by way of Compensation (Letter xvi. § 5, n.b.)
when the following letter cannot admit Dagesh; thus,
Abraham said to his servant : [Gen. xxiv. 7,] The LORD
210 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

God of Heaven ( nty ROT) He 8HALL-SEND HlS

Angel, &c. ; but, with 1 Conversivum, D^H^D 2pgl n^T.
a a
[Gen. xxxii. 4], and Jacob sent Messengers, &c. . . . :
a a
So PUT 7$ [1 Sam. xii. 17], i-will-cry to
JEHOVAH ; but ?1*T| 7ip3 [Gen. xxxix. 14],
a
and-i-cried with a loud voice.
4. When the 1 which changes the Future into a Past,
happens to stand before a 1 bearing Shvah, the Dagesh
which the * should receive is dispensed with ; e.g. [Exod.
vii. 2], " Aaron thy brother ( 13T) shall speak; " but
with 1 Conversivum, DN^/N 137?) [Gen. viii. 15], And
a
GOD spake, where the 1 does not receive Dagesh, in con
sequence of its bearing Shvah.
5. 1 bearing Shvah, when prefixed to a Future, does
not affect the Tense, but is merely Conjunctive ; as,
a a
DSnzn. 13n3^ [Gen. xlii. 16], "And your words
a
shall-be-proved : " Here l^n^. retains its natural and
original signification as Third Person Plur. Masc. Future
Niph. of the Verb ]PI3 to prove.
6. The 1 which converts the Past Tense into a Future
has for its point Shvah ; thus [Gen. iii. 3] " But of the
fruit of the tree which is in the midst of the garden
a a
( Dtf7|J 1DK ) GOD nxm-said, Ye shall not eat of it,

&c— ;" but rijn:S -IDS"! [Exod. xiv. 3], and Pharaoh
a
will-sat of the children of Israel, &c.—So again [Gen.
xxi. 17], " What aileth thee, Hagar ? fear not ; for
( DVj7g StDU} ) god HATH-heard, &c. ; " but it is said of
 LETTER XXIX. 211

the king of Assyria [2 Kings xix. 7] nj^Dt^ JJDtf} and

HE-SHALL-HEAR a TUmOUT.
7. This 1 Conversivum, viz., that which converts the
Past Tense into a Future, seeing that its natural point is
Shvah, is liable to all the changes of punctuation which
the 1 Conjunctive may undergo, as was mentioned in a
former Letter (xvii. § 3—6) ; viz.—
Before any of the labial letters, and before any letter
bearing Shvah, it becomes Shurik ; as
MTHj?S I have visited,
[Exod. xxxii. 34] "'rnpSfl " And (or rather, then) I shall
visit (upon them their sinJ."

Dfn.DC^ Ye (m) have observed,

[Exod. xii. 17] DJ-J"]5tl^ And ye (m) shall observe [the
feast of~\ unleavened bread.
Before a letter bearing a Compound Shvah it takes
the corresponding short vowel ; as
Dfl^N Ye (m) have eaten,
[Exod. xii. 11] D^DS:.] And ye (m) shall eat (it in
hasteJ.
Before ^ bearing Shvah, the 1 takes Cherik ; and the
1 then dropping its Shvah blends with the Cherik
preceding it, and thus forms Long- Cherik ; as,
E£iyT Ye (m) have known,
[Exod. vi. 7] DEUTpl And ye (m) shall know (that
I [am] the lord your god).
8. From all the instances here quoted your Grace will
perceive that the 1 Conversivum, whether it converts a
212 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Future into a Past or a Past into a Future Tense, always

retains at the same time its Conjunctive sense.
9. What I have said in this and in my preceding
Letter respecting the Tenses, and what I have said
here upon the 1 Conversivum, constitutes the most vital
part of Hebrew Grammar; but attempts have un
fortunately been made in our days to do away with this
altogether, and so to overthrow all the bulwarks of
Grammar raised up by such men as Kimchi, Jarchi,
Heytiey, Ben-Zev, and others of the same eminent class,
whose words I have been almost re-echoing, as it were,
without adding one iota of my own. I say unfortunately,
for without the rules here laid down it is perfectly
impossible to go through any six consecutive verses of
even the most easy Historical Books of The Hebrew
Bible ;• and the greater the fame and learning of those
who have made the attack, the greater is the misfortune.
Insignificant as I am in comparison with such men, I
shrink not from lifting up my humble voice against their
attempts, feeling, as I do, that I should not be responding
to the confidence reposed in me by your Grace, were I
not to show you the unreasonableness as well as the
complete failure of the attack ; for the purpose of doing
which with better effect I must beg to recur to this
subject hereafter. Suffice it for the present to assure
you that, hitherto at least, as often as the highly-
distinguished Originator of the new Theories has favored
the Public with translations of any parts of The Old
Testament, he has given to the 1 Conversive the force
agreeing with the rules laid down in this Letter. Indeed
I feel not the slightest hesitation in saying that were even
the stanchest adherent of the new Theories publicly to
translate the very passages quoted as examples upon the
 LETTER XXIX. 213

^ Conversivum in this Letter, he must, nolens volens,

render them as I have done, or the translations would be
unintelligible to the Reader.
One more remark on the 1 which converts the Past
into a Future, and I shall, for the present, dismiss the
subject.
10. Just as the Future (as said above, § 1)
may have and very often has a Frequentative sense,
so also the converted Past, which in fact represents a
Future may have, and often has the same sense ; e.g.,

a
[Gen. ii. 6]. And a mist used-to-ascend from the earth,
b
and-used-to-water [the] whole face of the ground.
Here both fl^ (the Third Person Sing. Masc. Future
Kal of the Irregular Verb rhv to ascend) and nj?tf>rp (the
Third Person Sing. Masc. Past Hiph. of the Irregular
Verb Hptf to water, with 1 Conversivum) are used in a
Frequentative sense.
Again n##p iftflft VJ? 13^1 [Job i. 4]. And
; ' b
his sons used-to-go, and-used-to-make a feast. Here
IS^m (the Third Person Plur. Past Kal of the Verb
rfrn to go with 1 Conversivum), and iJt^l (the Third
Person Plur. Past JKa/ of the Irregular Verb Htl^ fo do,
or make, with 1 Conversivum) are both used in a Fre
quentative sense. Had it not been the intention of the
Sacred Penman to express here Frequency, he would
have used the converted Futures 13^1 and they (m)
went, IttfJTl and they (m) made or did, as in Chapter
xlii. 9 is actually done in a passage where Frequency is
not implied, viz Ifcflf!!, .... t^1?** ^\
Q.
214 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
a b
And Eliphaz, Sfc, went, and they did (according as
Jehovah commanded them) ; where both are Future
Tenses converted into Past—the first from the Irregular
Verb "iV to go (synonymous with iS"!), the other from
to do, or make —, and both denote a thing once
done, without expressing any idea of Frequency.
11. It must have appeared extraordinary to your
Grace on looking over the Table of the Verb which
closed my last Letter but one, that there was no Present
Tense to be found in it. This is indeed extraordinary,
but still more so is it that the Present Tense is formed in
Hebrew by means of the Participle in exactly the same
manner as is sometimes done in English ; a fact which
affords a striking example of the similarity of the two
Languages, to which I have had the honour of calling
more than once your Grace's attention.
The Present Tense is expressed in Hebrew in the
following manner :

SINGULAR.

Ipb I [am one m.^ visiting.

f rnpb * "^K I [am one f. ] visiting.
"Ij?b nriNt Thou [art one m.~\ visiting.
f n"Jj?S Thou [art onef.~\ visiting.

She [is one f.~\ visiting.

* Or "ObN.
t Orrrjjjb.
 LETTER XXIX. 215

PLDRAL.
DHpb l^n^H We [are Plur. m.] visiting.
nilpb We [are Plur. /.] visiting.
Wlp.h DriS Ye [are Plur. m.] visiting.
ni"7j?& Fe [are Plur./.] visiting.
&ip$ on ■)
or merely, QVJȣ > [ar<J P'w. W.] Visiting.

or merely, J^-jpS) f Plur./.] visiting.

12. As the Hebrew Participle involves within

itself the nature of a Noun (Letter xxviii. § 12),
therefore when it is applied to the First or the Second
Person, it is absolutely necessary that the Personal
Pronoun should be expressed, whereas when it is applied
to the Third Person, the Pronoun may be spared. Permit
me to express myself more fully upon this important
Subject.
Of the Verb 2h2 to write, the Present Participle 2T\'3
strictly speaking means [a man] writing, so that—
3£0 strictly means I [am a man] writing,
2r>b nfiijt „ „ Thou (m) [art a man] writing,
where the Pronouns evidently cannot be spared; but
when we say 2T>2) YlQD lit. the king [is a man] writing,
the Pronoun 81 n is not required.
13. The Substantive Verb to be (as I have had occasion
to mention already) is generally not expressed but under
stood in Hebrew ; and so it is before the Participle when
used to form the Present Tense, as appears from the
216 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Table just laid before your Grace's notice; but as to

whether the Substantive Verb is to be understood in a
Present or a Past Tense, this the Context only can
decide: thus when Esau said, TV\Db "^in HUH
[Gen. xxv. 32] lit. Behold, I [am] going to die, (i.e. I am
about to die), the Present am is plainly understood before
the Participle "SfylH .
On the other hand when we read [Gen. xli. 1], " And
it came to pass at the end of two full years (D^h njtn.21 )
and (or rather that) Pharaoh [was] dreaming,'' the Past
Tense was is plainly understood before the Participle.
14. After having gone through all the Moods and
Tenses, let us now consider the points in which all the
seven Voices agree.
The Infinitives may be declined with the prefixes
D 7 3 3 , in all the seven Voices.
The Imperatives (in the Voices having them) have
neither First nor Third Person, and also cannot be used
with a negative particle (Letter xxviii. § 11).
The Participles may all be occasionally used as
Nouns.
The past Tenses have (in all the Voices) the Third
Person of the Plural common to both Genders ; and the
several Persons are expressed not by prefixes, but by
affixes, with the exception of the Third Person Singular,
which has neither prefix nor affix to express the Person.
The future Tenses have in all the Voices the
same form for the Third Person Sing. Fem., and the
Second Person Sing. Masc. ; likewise for the Third and
Second Persons Plur. Fem. The Persons are expressed
by prefixing one of the letters ] n 1 and in some
instances by affixing moreover some of the letters H 3 1 s .
 LETTER XXIX. 217

15. On comparing the Imperative with the Future,

your Grace will find that the latter is formed from the
former : thus in Kal,

if stripped of the
npsin
letters 3 1 8 "TpS Imper. 2 Sing. Masc.
will give

f if stripped of
the T\ of ]TVX nnpa 2 Plur. Fem.
will give

r if stripped of
^J?^ \ the n of irra HP9 „ „ 2 Sing. Fem.
(_ will give

if stripped of the
np^
11 and D of jJVN 2 Plur. Masc.
npan
will give

which last two forms, viz. Hp£ and HpS , would of

course be the natural forms for the 2 Sing. Fem. and 2
Plu. Masc. Imperative (as coining from IpS , the 2 Sing.
Masc.) ; but since two Shvahs cannot possibly stand
together at the beginning of a word, the first of these
Shvahs (being forced in each case to become a Slight
Vowel) takes the form of Short-Cherik, giving there
fore HpS and HpS : when, however, the T\ or the
of the |]TN is prefixed to either of these Imperative
forms to produce the 2 Sing. Fem., or the 3 or the 2 Plur.
Masc. of the Future, the necessity for the above-
mentioned Shvah retaining its Vowel form under the
218 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

character of a Slight Vowel, exists no longer, and,conse

quently, we have the Future forms "HpSfi > IfR?"! ,
npDri , in each of which the first radical re-assumes its
Shvah which, in the Imperative forms from which these
are derived, it was compelled to disguise under the form
of a Slight Vowel (Letter xiii. § 2).
The same will be seen with reference to the formation
of the Futures of the Pi., Niph., Hiph., Hithp., by
comparing them in the Table with their respective
Imperatives ; the prefix il of the Imperatives of the last
three Voices being dropped in forming the Future Tenses,
and its point given to the prefixed letters ] r\ i H .
16. The characteristic of the Niph. being 2 prefixed
to the root of the Verb, this 2 (as will be seen in the
Table) is always dropped when another letter is again
prefixed to form a Tense or a Mood, and its place is then
supplied by Dagesh in the first radical letter ; thus we
have,
Infinitive "Tj?.2>r» for ^Q3«?.
Imperative "Tgan , Hpgn , &c, for IgMJJ, Hj?D3n, &c.
Future , "Jj?.B£l , &c, for 1$$?. , lpS?F , &c.
17. When the first radical letter happens to be one
incapable of receiving Dagesh, Compensation must of
course be made for this Dagesh, which cannot then
stand ; the Short- Cherik and Segol therefore of the
prefixed letters are then changed into Tsayre ; thus, for
example, ihj! to intreat gives in the Niph.

Infinitive ">f?#n to be intreated.

Imperative "iry/H be thou (m.) intreated.

Future , 1$%$ , &c, he, I, %c, will

be intreated.
 LETTER XXIX. 219

18. The Voices Pi., Pu., and Hithp., have each of

them a Dagesh in the second radical letter through all
their respective Moods and Tenses, and are therefore
sometimes designated the Dageshed Voices. This
Dagesh, the Characteristic of these three Conjugations,
must of course be compensated for, when the second
radical letter of the Verb is one of those which cannot
receive it; thus, for instance, the verb *J~I3 to bless
gives in
PI-AL.
Infinitive t[~\3, to bless.
Past "^3 he blessed.
Participle Present T!!?P one (m.) blessing.
Imperative "spS bless thou (m.).
Future he will bless.

PU-AL.
Infinitive "^"IS to be blessed.
Past "yo. he was blessed.
Participle Past ^"PP one (m.) blessed.
Future 1TP^\ he will be blessed.

HITHPA-AL.
Infinitive "5fl3^n to bless oneself.
Past ^n.3J^n he blessed himself.
Participle Present^^D one (m.) blessing him
self.
Imperative "nSfln bless thou (m.) thyself.
Future he will bless himself.

N.B. The above instances of Compensation for

Dagesh in the Niph., Pi., Pu., Hithp.,
220 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

serve to illustrate the rules given in a former Letter

(xvi. § 5, n.b.) respecting Compensation for Dagesh,
viz., that Pathach is then generally changed into
Kawmets, Short Cherik and Segol into Tsayre, and
Kibbuts into Chowlem.
19. The letters fl and n , however, sometimes obsti
nately refuse to make Compensation for the Dagesh
which they ought to receive but cannot ; thus,—

rnnz? [Gen. xxvii. 20] (2 Sing. Masc. Past Pi.)

thou hast hasted ;
"nnO [Gen. xviii. 6] (2 Sing. Fern. Imper. Pi.)
hasten thou ;
PSrnp [Gen. i. 3] (Partic. Pi. Sing. Fem.) hovering ;
dnT [Hosea xiv. 4] (3 Sing. Masc. Fut. Pu.) he
will be pitied ;

in all which instances no Compensation is made for

Dagesh. This is also sometimes the case with these
letters in the Niph-al.
20. In the following three cases the Hithp. has a
peculiar formation through all its Moods and Tenses;
viz.,—
I. When the first Radical is V/ , t£> , or D , the cha
racteristic H of the Hithp. changes places with the first
radical letter of the Verb ; as,—

"ifott* to keep, Hithp. "ISfiJf'n he kept himself, instead of

yi'W to entwine, Hithp. }~}fttyn it (m) entwined itself,

instead of .
")hD to hide, Hithp. irU?pn he hid himself, instead of
 LETTER XXIX. 221

II. When the first radical letter of the Verb is ¥ , it

changes places with the characteristic fi of the Hithp.,
and this fi is besides changed into D ; as

p1¥ to be just, Hithp. p?.C0¥n he justified himself, instead

of nvr»n .
III. When the first radical letter of the Verb is CD ,
the characteristic H of the Hithp. fa dropped, and its
place supplied by a Dagesh in the CO ; as,

"into to be pure, Hithp. inton he purified himself, instead

of "ineipn .

There are still many minutiae and peculiarities to be

mentioned to which the Regular Verb is subject ; but
bearing in mind that I must not heap rules on rules
continually without giving at intervals practice upon
them, I shall defer treating of those peculiarities and
minutiae to my next Letter ; before concluding, however,
I beg to observe that some modern Grammarians are
anxious to have the letters ) D s X , which are prefixed,
as well as the letters H 3 1 \ which are affixed to the
Verb in forming the several Persons of the Future
Tense, all and each of them recognised as fragments of
the several Personal Pronouns corresponding to these
Persons. In Tp?8 I will visit, they tell us that the
K is a fragment of I ; in lp§P> thou (m) wilt visit,
that the Fi is a fragment of njftN thou (m) ; in il3"Tj35ri
ye (f) will visit, that the prefix T\ and the affix ITJ are
fragments of ye (f) ; and lastly, in "Tp22 we will
visit, that the prefix 2 is a fragment of 13rT3 we.
Thus far chance has favoured them most admirably.
But in "fp5? he will visit, the prefix 1 is sadly refractory,
and will have nothing to do with SIH he ; in *Tj?Dfl she
222 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

will visit, the fl too refuses to belong to the Pronoun

she ; the affix 11 in "HpO^ thou (f) wilt visit, is very
annoying, and refuses to belong to the Pronoun FIN thou
(f) ; the affix 1 in TT£5>n ye (to) will visit is not less tire
some, refusing to have any connexion with DflN ye (to) ;
not less troublesome is the prefix fi in iTnj?pri they (f)
will visit, which does not make its appearance in any man
ner in ]PI or D3n they (f) ; and last, though not least
perplexing, are both prefix and affix in Hp ^ they (m)
will visit, of neither of which can the slightest trace be
found in DH or ilQn they (to). It is actually amusing
to see the vast displays of ingenuity and the mighty
array of languages appealed to by the Grammarians to
whom I allude in order to prove that after all, and in
spite of what the wisest of men has declared to the
contrary, " That which is crooked can be made straight."
Their intention surely could not have been to aid the
student by providing him with a kind of memoria technica,
for it must have been clear to them that to bear in
mind all they have said upon the subject would require
a far more retentive memory than would be requisite for
getting up all the forms of all the Tables. Suppose
that any one should indulge in similar speculations in
Latin, and maintain that the o in amo is a fragment of
ego, the * in amamus a fragment of nos, and that in
amatis a fragment of vos, would he not be set down as a
trifler, and would not the remaining parts of the
Present Tense stare him in the face as utterly incom
patible with his theory % And yet these learned theorists
stand on no better ground ; nay, they stand on far worse
ground, for the Future is evidently formed from the
Imperative, and in that Mood, the only form which
possibly can have aught to do with the Corresponding
 LETTER XXIX. 223

Personal Pronoun is n3"Tp9 , which in their imagination

may have something to do with nJPN ye (f); the two
other forms which have affixes are against them, and
the remaining form lp2, having no affix whatever,
sufficiently proves that the several affixes were not
appended according to any plan, but that they were
taken arbitrarily from among the Servile letters to dis
tinguish between the several Persons ; and, therefore, one
was left to be distinguished from the others by having no
mark at all; just as is the case with TpS in the Past Tense.
Considering, therefore, how little ground the learned
theorists in question have to stand upon, how much
more reasonable is the philosopher in Goldsmith's
" Citizen of the World," who would convince us that
the Chinese were originally a colony planted by Noah,
by the following weighty arguments : —
" First, from the vast similitude there is between
" the name of Fohi, the founder of the Chinese
" monarchy, and that of Noah, the preserver of the
" human race : Noah, Fohi, very like each other truly ;
" they have each but four letters, and only two of the
"four happen to differ. But to strengthen the argu-
" ment, Fohi, as the Chinese chronicle asserts, had no
" father. Noah, it is true, had a father, as the Bible
" tells us ; but then, as this father was probably
" drowned in the flood, it is just the same as if he had
"no father at all; therefore Noah and Fohi are the
" same."

P.S. (a). Efl^n ye (m) have been (Second Sing. Masc. Past Kal of
the Irregular Verb to be), on taking the 1 Conversivum, gives
DO^rn [Gen. iii. 5] andye (m) will be.
224 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

P.S. (b). Some even of the first-rate Hebrew Grammarians (I

mean those who wrote their Grammars in Hebrew) mention that the
1 bearing Shvah ceases to convert the Past into the Future, when
immediately preceded by a Past. I venture to entertain some doubts
of this being so, but reserve to myself the privilege of laying my
suggestions on this point before your Grace's notice when I shall
come to discuss the subject more fully hereafter.
P.S. (c). The ft of the Hithp. is also dropped, and its place
supplied by Dagesh in the first radical of the Verb, when that letter
is T or ft ; thus from "CH to speak, we find the Participle Hithp.
"la'ip [Num. vii. 89] for "I2^D; and from DOD to be perfect, we
find the Future Hithp. Oftftft [pg. xviii. 26].
P.S. (d). Ben Zev indeed tells us that the letters 1 ^ n 3 B N n (in
which, as will be observed, are contained the letters H3V ] i"l ^ N, used
in forming the Persons of the Future Tense) are nibj2Q D'nta.S
cut-outfrom the Personal Pronouns ; but most surely in saying so he
cannot have meant that in the Third Person Sing. Masc the prefix 11
is cut out from he ; or that in the Third Person Sing. Fem. ft is
cut out from H"n she ; &c, &c, &c. Ben Zev was a very great
Hebraist and a very great Hebrew Grammarian, but not Philosophi
cal Grammarian enough to spin out such cobwebs as are
done in our day, calculated only to bewilder the learner,
and entangle him in endless subtleties ; all that Ben Zev
meant to express was, that neither vrDENPl t ^fPH , nor H3V , have
any meaning, but that they are mere collections of Servile letters which
may all be found in the Personal Pronouns. Perhaps also he
alluded to the peculiar fact that, with the exception of the letter n in
nSTON we> all the letters of which the Personal Pronouns are com
posed are Serviles (Letter xvi. § 3) ; and as, instead of 13^3$ ,
may be used, the Personal Pronouns are the only part of speech
which might be said to be composed of mere Servile letters with
out any Radical letters among them.
 LETTER XXIX. 225

EXERCISE XVTII.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

Kf* For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

'll? ^ftnnp 'crt?*? 8nin^ **?ip rig

,0p-i3T 9idd "arj^n Vrim agi
UK¥93 ui3iii 'Vp.Ti : "orinsi 9isd3 8 arpsi

ns "j-naf] Qjty Vpti*i ^« Vpttf

20 » 19 18 18 17
na"1
tt nvisi
t : -t : ddtsi ^a+itra
* " v -i vma • :
26 ftf 24 2S # 22 * 21 *
r\n2tt>D
; : 73t ?p ' : 131331
:: • : H3J31
t :.v t H32V1
t t : .1D1P1 t : »■• t
29 SO t 29 28 27
- t t v : - -: - rv :- : t t t
"^3 : njn "i3in n# "Drn»#i : "Vjp^ '^pa
88 » 87 t 36 S5 .
ns n&n7 S137 n?.n riN onaxr + djik
"np : "orntt*! nnx "on^-m
'^n + 'nimi : "n^ Nftin + "gisi ^
"icy + Kim : "py ""iiisys "dei"1 "cms1?
64 t 53 62 SI »0 f .
PV 7$ ^rwna : ypn nnri Drr^/
,I 57 t 42 50 42 55 .
X7H : pipy? npi i3"T3 no : djipk
. 60 33 56 SB
: ^33» - t + tik
• t itii/n -: : upyt*^ innpa
- - : ■ + m • T
69 63 . 62 S9 2*» 61
tik n« : aat^p na>jp K7 p»n 73 Eogttfn
66 Ofl 64i IS ,
: c*n T- mw3 " I ?Bno + rma T - : vp2n I" - ; + "ojkT
67 67 68 67
: nnx ^3131 : m + .131131 ^p#B + ^na
67 fl 25. , 70. , 69 »
n$ jn 73p sn« 7wn "^pn
39 Wt . 25r . 28 67 72
: p»C ^ 73 ^iT3 I3i3nii: : unyin
226 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

i 2BH? he heard, he hearkened.—2 Voice.—3 Jehovah.—4 God.—

5 TJ^n to go. 6 1? a garden. 7 2ttfp £ra Hiph., to hearken attend.—83J"I3
to write.—9-|5P a book ; viz., a book was written (the same in
Constr.).—10 remembrance, record.—12Ohn to seal.—13 t^p3 in
Pi., toseek, investigate.— 14 "EH a thing.—15 NsB to find, to find out.—
16-ibt to remember. 17 nna a covenant. 18 r? between. 19 V*1? to break
forth, spread abroad.—20 sea, also West.—21 D^p. or D7!p East.—
22 ibS North.—23 333 South.—24 T2 to bless.—25 All.—26 nnQt?7D a
family. Plur. ninBtt7!3._27 HB^ ground, earth.—28 3HJ seed ; with
aff. VT& , &c—29 to say.—30 thus.—31 1? a son.—32 Joseph.—
33 "lBtp to keep, observe.—34 for.—35 "O? t0 Pass> Pass over.—36 the
Jordan.—37 for the purpose of coming.—38 for the purpose of pos
sessing.—39 Y"3? earth, land.—40andye (m) shall possess.—4I2t£7Jto sit,
to dwell.—42 What, also how.—43 wilt thou (w) give.—44 childless.—
45 before them (m).—46 in the day time.—47 TIB? a pillar (the same in
Constr.).—48 Cloud.—49"lb? to stand.-60 Under.—51 V? a tree.—
52 TJOtZ? to pour out.—63 ^23. soul, life.—64bosom-of.—55 EN a mother.
_6« -m in Pi. to speak.—57P'T? to be just.—58 David.—59 TID to hide.
—60 n« a brother. Plur. DTIN ._«> tSQttf to judge.—62 He shall do—
03 Justice.—64 Vfo'B to rule.—65 pride (the same in Constr.).—
66 sea.—67 TO to bless.—68 BStt reason, counsel.—09 "ST^B an
angel.—70 ?N3 to redeem.—71 evil.—72 "^?3 a youth.—73 a nation.—
nntfi* a woman. Plur. 0^3 Jael.—76 rDH? to forget.—77 V>IB?
reward, benefit.—78 lit. it (rri) shall be, i.e. let it be.—79 name of.

* See Letter xix. § 1.

t The preposition ^? stands here in the sense of by or near.
J For the more usual form pros: .
 LETTER XXIX. 227

EXERCISE XIX.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
Kf* See the note at thehead of Exercise xvii. page 137.
We (f) [are] learning, and they (m)[are] teaching.—I (/) [am]
nab *
learning, and my father [is] teaching.—They (f) [are] teaching, and
1 2 I_
ye (f) [are] learning. — My father has-caused me to-learn.—

Ye-(ra.)-shall not cause them (f) to learn.—Did-they-cause us to-learn ?

Did he [indeed] t cause thee (f) to-learn ?—Will he not } cause you (f)
2
to-learn ?—He-[is]-not knowing for he was not taught.—

I (f) [am] taught.—

Pual

* In Kal signifies to learn, in Pi. to teach.

t Emphasis is expressed by coupling the Infinitive with the Preterite,
the Interrogative n being prefixed to the Infinitive.
X The Interrogative n, prefixed to #> .
228 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXX.

When I had the honour of instructing your Grace in

the French language, it was the verb parler (to speak),
which, if my memory deceives me not, was taken as a
standard for the Verbs of the First Conjugation, and the
verb alter (to go) pointed out as being Irregular. There
are however some French verbs of this Conjugation,
which, without being considered as Irregular, still differ
in some respects from the standard verb parler; for
example, manger (to eat) preserves the e in the Perfect
Tense, and gives je mangeai, whereas parler gives je
parlai : again, the verb percer (to pierce) would require a
Cedille under the letter c in the Perfect Tense je perpai.
All this is done, as your Grace knows, for the sake of
sound, and therefore no one would think of pronouncing
either manger, or percer, to be on this account Irregular
Verbs. In like manner the punctuation of some Verbs
in The Hebrew Language differs slightly, for the sake of
Euphony, from that of *fp2 to visit (chosen here as the
standard of Regular Verbs), without those verbs being on
that account considered as Irregular. This is par
ticularly the case when one of the letters J!DH occurs in
the root ; a subject to which I now beg to call your
Grace's attention.
2. When the first Radical is ]} , it will receive
Chateph-Pathach, or Chateph-Segol, and in the Hoph-al
Chateph-Kawmets, in every instance where the first
radical of lp£ has simple Shvah ; and the Serviles
preceding it will then receive the corresponding short
 LETTER XXX. 229

vowel, with the sole exception of the 12 of D b 3 3 which,

by way of Compensation for Dagesh, takes Tsayre ;
thus, for example, TDJ! to stand gives,

KAL.

Inf. Abs. to stand ; Constr. lb^/ standing.

And Declined with the prefixes D *7 3 3

"Tfejtf.3 in standing.
as standing.
IbVh for the purpose of standing,
from standing.
In the Past Tense, the only difference of punctuation
is in the Persons where the first radical of "7j?2 has
Shvah, viz., the second Persons Plural, masculine, and
feminine, where we have :
EF\1D}?: ye (m) have stood.
|J!nDjt/ ye (f) have stood.
In the Imperative, the only difference is in the Second
Person Singular masc, and the Second Person Plural
fern., where we have:
7t)V stand thou (m).
HJ*Tto^ stand ye (f).
In the Future we have a difference in punctuation
throughout ; as follows,
"Tibj£ he will stand.
"Tfcl/ri she will stand.
Ifoyn thou (m) wilt stand.
HPJW thou (f) wilt stand.
Ito^S I will stand.
B
230 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HDl^ they (m) will stand.

n3*]bj/Jl they (f) will stand.
HPJ/fi Ye (m) will stand,
nppp'n Ye (f) will stand.
We will stand.

3. Your Grace will perceive that in the forms

hot , np#: , hot

the Chateph Pathach, beneath the ]} is changed into Pa-

thach, because a Chateph Pathach (which in fact is nothing
but a moving Shvah) could not stand immediately before
a Shvah ; this Pathach therefore being instead of Shvah,
and consequently a Slight Vowel, the Shvah under
the D is moving and therefore the ^ following is
without its Dagesh-Lene (Letter xiii. § 2).
4. You will also perceive that in the First Person the
i! takes Chateph-Segol, and the N preceding it, Segol.
5. In the Past of the Niph. the letter J! takes every
where Chateph-Segol, the characteristic 2 of the Niph.
taking Segol : thus, for example, 3ty to forsake gives

PAST NIPH-AL.
3Tjt?3
he wasforsaken.
rDTjpshe was forsaken.
fPJgJthou (m) wast forsaken.
fOJJfJ
thou (f) wast forsaken.
"\P3T#3
I was forsaken.
13T^3
they (m Sf f) were forsaken.
D^Qy/J Ye (m) were forsaken.
Ye(f) wereforsaken.
133^3 We were forsaken.
 LETTER XXX. 231

Here too in the forms

my) ,n?#a

the Chateph-Segol beneath the i! is, for reasons given

above (§ 3), unavoidably changed into Segol, which
is of course a Slight Vowel, and therefore the Shvah
under the T is moving, and consequently the 2 following
it, without its Dagesh-lene.
Examples enough have been adduced to shew clearly
to your Grace the nature of the changes of punctuation
in consequence of the first radical being )} , so that there
will be no need for marking them in the remaining
Voices : I therefore proceed to observe that—
6. In Verbs, the first radical of which is H as Din to
pull down, spn to push away, "=lbn to overthrow, to turn,
similar changes of punctuation take place; with this
difference only, that usage and experience alone can tell
us where to give a Chateph-Pathach or a Chateph-Segol
to the first radical, since no definite rule can be given in
this case.
7. When the first radical is H , it takes in some »
instances Chateph-Pathach, and in others Chateph-Segol,
where the first radical of has a simple Shvah, and
is not preceded by a servile letter. Thus, for example,
3{^n is the Inf. Const, of 2il/n to think ; but when it is
preceded by a servile, the H will mostly have simple
Shvah, while the servile will generally have Pathach in
the Future of the Kal, and Segol in the Past of the
Niph. as DJJ'rV he will think, nt^nj he was thought: and
so too in the verb ibn to desire, the n takes almost
always simple Shvah in the Future Kal, and the prefixes
1 and n , generally Pathach ; while the prefixes K and 2
r 2
232 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

generally prefer Segol ; as TbTT he will desire, ifan^ I

will desire, "T&n^ we will desire.
8. That, independently of the changes of punctuation
just noticed, alteration must also be sometimes made in
the punctuation of the serviles, arising from Com
pensation for Dagesh, mention has been made in my
preceding Letter (§ 17).
9. When the second radical is any one of the letters
V n il X (which are incapable of receiving a simple Shvah
moving), it takes Chateph-Pathach in every instance
where the second radical of the Verb *7pS has a moving
Shvah ; as will be seen in the following few instances
quoted as examples, from which your Grace will be able
to judge of the change in all other analogous cases.

butti to ask, gives:—

ibSC' they asked.
l^Vl they (m ) will ask.
ask thou (f).
V?^ ask ye (m).
■)h{p to be pure, gives:—

V"IH£? they were pure.

'"iDtp? they (m) will be pure.

phk' to laugh, gives :—

*
tpnfc' they laughed.
Ipntf? they (m) will laugh.

pj/l£ to cry, gives:—

IplfV they cried.
'PJypT they (m) will cry.
 LETTER XXX. 233

That Compensation for Dagesh must be made in such

cases in the Dageshed Voices Pi., Pu., and Hithp., has
already been mentioned, in my preceding Letter (§ 18).
10. When the third radical is n or ]1 , it takes a
Furtive Pathach in all instances in which the third
radical of terminates the word, and is preceded
by either Tsayre, Long-Cherik, Chowlem, or Shurik; or,
to be more concise, where it is preceded by any one of
the long vowels excepting Kawmets. This will be seen
in the following few instances selected as examples,—

Tjhti} to send, gives :

rvhw sent (Past Partic. KaT).

to send away (Infin. Pi.).
nW he sent away (Past PL).
n^tyi he will send away (Fut. Pi.).

rns to blossom, gives :

he will cause to blossom (Fut. Hiph.).

J^bty to hear, gives :

#fot^3 in hearing (Inf. Kal).

JJtittfS as hearing (Inf. Kal).
pEJi'n he has caused to hear (Past Hiph.).
.PQtf'D one (m) causing to hear (Partic. Pres.
Hiph).
Jtnj to sow, gives :
JIMI sown (Past Partic. Kal).
234 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

11. When the long vowel preceding the Furtive

Pathach is Tsayre, the Tsayre is very frequently dropped,
for the sake of brevity, and the Furtive Pathach put in
its place : thus
nWll in sending away, instead of n"?#3 (Inf. Pi.).
nW send thou (m) away, ,', nW (Imper. Pi.).
nW"! he will send away, „ n-?t^ (Fut. Pi.).
J!$h one (m) spreading out, „ (Partic. Pres.
Kal).
ri2Fi$nb for the purpose of praising oneself, instead of
rgru^ (inf. ttthp. of nnu/).

12. In the Singular Fern, of the Participles Present,

where both the second and the third radical of "Tp£> have
Segol (such as rnj?k one (f) visiting), the two Segols are
each changed into Pathach when the third radical is
either n or V ; thus,
From nhS to blossom, nrn_S one (f) blossoming,
for nrn£ (Partic. Pres. Kal).
FromJ/fa^ to hear, r\]yt2W one (f) hearing,
for (Partic. Pres. Kal).
And so too, when the third radical is n or V , the Second
Person Sing. fem. of the Past Kal, instead of having
two Shvahs, as £H£S , changes the one that would stand
beneath the third radical into Pathach, as
thou (f) hast forgotten.
f\J/Ottf thou (f) hast heard.
13. When the third radical is PI (i.e. PI with Mappik)
it also receives Furtive Pathach when, on terminating a
word, it is preceded by either Tsayre, or Long-Cherik ;
thus,
 LETTER XXX. 235

rn| he was high, gives

to cause to be high (Infin. Hiph.) ;
H3jrt cause thou (/re) to be high (Imper. Hiph.) ;
PT3jn he caused to be high (Past Hiph.) ;
one (m) causing to be high (Partic. Hiph.) ;
he will cause to be high (Fat. Hiph.).

14. All the seven Voices have this common property,

namely, that some Persons in them may receive an
additional D , and others an additional 1 , by way of
elegance ; these are termed Paragogic letters ; thus,
15. In the Past Tense the Second Person Singular
Masc. may take a Paragogic H without undergoing any
change in punctuation ; as,

nrnpa for mj?2 ,

n^"[)?53 for ijfgsg ,
&c, &c.

In the Imperative, the Second Person Singular (m)

may also take a Paragogic H , which causes here a
complete change in the punctuation ; as

rnzpttf keep thou (m), for ,

njtfjpti' hear thou (m), for JJDty (as will be seen presently
in this Letter).

In the Future the First Persons only, both Singular

and Plural, may take a Paragogic PI ; and here, too, a
change of punctuation is made ; as,

mDtfS I will keep, for Ifctf'l*;

ns^n} we will pursue, for ffrjj ;
Pl|?03fl$ -T will gently guide myself, for S^jriN ;
np3nrij we will behave ourselves wisely, for DSPinj .
236 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

In a few instances the Infinitive of the Kal, when

declined with the letters 0^33, takes a Paragogic il ;
as,
nj?^1? for the purpose of cleaving [Deut. xi. 22], which
stands for p3*7? .

16. In the Future, the Third and Second Persons

Plural Masculine may take a Paragogic J , without suffer
ing any change in punctuation ; as,

JIT]??? they (m) will visit, for Hp?? ;

]1Sy^ they (m) will be found, for ;
ye (m) will visit, for Hpprt ;

17. On the other hand the H is sometimes dropped in

the Second Person Plural Fern, of the Imperative, and
in the Second and Third Persons Plural Fern, of the
Future ; and in these last, more particularly when they
have 1 Conversivum ; as,

tH!?3 visit ye (f), for n2"|j?S;

THpDl!l they, or ye (f) will visit, for n3"Tp?f1;
JlpDJ^l and they, or ye (f) visited, for nJlpSfl] ;

Such forms as these are called Apocopated.

18. In all the seven Voices the Pause Accent may
elegantly produce a change in the punctuation, which
consists in making short vowels long, and changing
Shvahs into long vowels; with the exception of the
forms ending in D£1 and ]F) , and those in 0*1 — and Di - ,
which are never affected by the Pause Accent. The
changes in all other cases take place according to the
following rules :—
I. The vowel beneath the second radical letter is, in
 LETTER XXX. 237

the Regular Verbs, the only one that is affected by

the Pause Accent.
II. When this second radical has Pathach, its vowel
is changed into Long Kawmets ; as,

"Tj33 he visited, for ;

rH£TS thou (m) visitedst, for fHR? >
J?j?n¥ thou (f) didst laugh, for ripnV ;
we were pursued, for
&c, &c.

III. When the second radical has Shvah, respect

must be had to the vowel which is attached—
(a). In Tenses—to the second radical of the Third
Person Sing. Masc. of each Tense ; and
(b). In Participles—to the second radical of the Sing.
Masc. form of each Participle : —
(1) . When this vowel is Pathach the Shvah of the
second radical will be changed by the Pause into Kawmets
(the same vowel as that into which the Pathach of the
second radical, in the forms to which the reference is
made, would also be lengthened by the pause) ; thus,—

rnj?3 she visited, for '"HipS ;

TJj?T2 they (m and f) visited, for H/32;
nj?j33 they (m and/) were visited, for nj?93 ;
Sec, &c. ;
where the Shvah of the second radical is changed
into Kawmets because this is the vowel into which the
Pathach of the second radical in the Third Sing. Past
would also be lengthened by the Pause :
(2). When the second radical in the Third Person
Sing. Masc. of a Tense, or in the Sing. Masc. of a Par
238 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

ticiple, has a long vowel, the Shvah is changed into the

same long vowel; thus,—

in Kal., >VT\>& one (f) visiting, for '"Hfr^ ;

in Pi. rnjSJJSQ one (f) diligently visiting, for !"Hj?QJp ;
in Hithp.,n~l£.2r\D one (f) pretending to be a
stranger, for i"n33flU;
where, in consequence of the second radical in the Sing.
Masc. form having Tsayre, the Shvah is by the Pause
lengthened into that same long vowel.

Future Kal. thou (f) wilt visit, for ;

HpD? they (m) will visit, for Hp?? ;
lTj?an ye (m) will visit, for Hp?ri ;

where, in consequence of the second radical of the Third

Sing. Masc. having Chowlem, the Shvah is lengthened
into Chowlem by the pause.
Future Niph. Hpjsri thou (f)wilt be visi
ted, for HJ?Bfl,&c;
Future Pi. "lTi5J5^ thou (f) wilt dili
gently visit, for Hp?ri , &c. ;
Future Hithp. HpQflfi thou (f) wilt visit
thyself, for Hj?Sflfl; &c;

where again, in consequence of the second radical of the

Third Sing. Masc. having Tsayre, the Shvah is by the
Pause lengthened into Tsayre.
(c). In the Imperatives, respect must be had to the
vowel attached to the second radical of the Second
Sing. Masc. ; thus,—
in Kal, Hj?S visit thou (f), for Hp.?, &c. ;
where the Second Person Sing. Masc, having Chowlem
 LETTER XXX. 239

to its second radical, the Shvah is, by the Pause, length

ened into that vowel (the Slight Vowel of the first
radical returning again to its original form Shvah) : —
in Niph. HjjJSfl be thou (f) visited, for "HpBn , &c;
Pi- ^"Tj^.S visit thou (f) diligently, for "H^S, &c,
HithpMJp^r\il visit thou (f) thyself, for "Hjpaiin, &c. ;
where the Second Person Sing. Masc., having Tsayre to
its second radical, the Shvah is lengthened by the Pause
into that vowel.

After having mentioned features in which all the

seven Voices participate, I will, by your Grace's leave,
now go through the minutiae belonging to the Voices
severally.

KAL.
19. There are some Verbs in which the Third Person
Sing. Masc. of the Past (which is considered as the root)
is pointed otherwise than the word chosen as the
standard of the Regular Conjugation ; as, for example,—
fDH he was willing, bb) he was able ;
in the former case, the first radical having Kawmets,
and the second Tsayre for its point, the Verb is therefore
said to be of the form ( 3 ? 1 ) ; and in the latter,
the first radical having Kawmets, and the second
Chowlem, the Verb is said to be of the form ^j/S (32 1),
The form ^jjn gives the other Persons :—
&c wan, riysn, n^n
the same as those of "Fj?3 ; but of bb) we find the First
Person V^bj I was able [Jud. viii. 3), and of J£Dj? we
find the first Person "•fljbj? I was little [Gen. xxxii. 11].
240 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

20. The Verbs of the form have the same forms

in the Kal for their Infinitives, their Third Persons Sing.
Masc. Past, and their Sing. Masc. Present Participles ;
so that fSjn may stand for to be willing, he was willing,
or one (m) willing.
The full Declension of the Present Participle is,—

^Sri one (m) willing ;

D^an one (f) willing ;
D^V^n Plu. (m) willing ;
niV|jn Plu. (f) willing.

21. Many instances might be quoted in which

Kibbuts unaccountably supplants Shurik. Amongst
others, in the Past Participle Kal we find,

hD2 one (m) weaned [Ps. cxxxi. 2], for b^Di;

nnbt^ one (f) sent, or let loose [Gen. xlix. 21], for Pini^;
D-gV? Plu. (m) blessed [2 Sam. ii. 5], for DoW|.

22. The second radical of Intransitive Verbs gene

rally prefers taking Pathach in the Imperative and
Future wherever the second radical of the Regular
Verb has Ckowlem ; as, —

^11? approach thou (m) ; 33t^ lie thou (m) down ;

he will approach ; he will lie down ;
TlpNt I will approach, &c. □Stf'iSt I will lie down, &c.

23. When the third radical is n , it is dropped.in the

Past Tense in those Persons which have VI , T\ , D ,
Dfl , and jf} for their affixes ; e.g., fPIS to cut, gives
rns, ••fro, &c.
 LETTER XXX. 241

N1PH-AL.

24. In a few instances the H of the Infinitive, when

it is declined with D / 3 3 , is dropped, and its point
given to the prefix ; as,

^£$73 on beingfaint [Lam. ii. 11], for ;

1^33 on his stumbling [Prov. xxiv. 17], for 1^3113,

In a few instances, the X of ] 2"l , N in the Future

takes Short- Cherik instead of Segol ; as,

J/3t£^ I will swear [Gen. xxi. 24], for .

When the third radical is "1 , the Tsayre under the

second radical is changed into Pathach in the Third and
Second Persons Plural Feminine ; as,

n:P3?fl they or ye (f) will be remembered [Is. lxv. 17],

for na-gjtf .

PI-AL.

25. In a few instances the second radical takes in the

Infinitive a Chowlem instead of Tsayre ; as
"lb? to chastise [Ps. cxviii. 18], for "){?\

The second radical in a few instances takes Pathach

instead of Tsayre in the Third Person Singular of the
Past ; which is particularly the case when the third
radical is V or 1 ; thus
JH3 he cut down [2 Chron. xxxiv. 7], for .
"I3# he brake [Psalm cvii. 16], for "I3#.
242 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PU-AL.
26. In a few instances the D , prefixed to form the
Participle Passive is dropped ; as,
*72S Sing. Masc. consumed [Exod. iii. 2], for ;
r\^7 Sing. Masc. taken away [2 Kings ii. 10], for nj?tyo .

HIPH-IL.
27. The second radical sometimes takes Tsayre instead
of Long-Cherik in the Infinitive; as,
$3(5 H to cause to be holy, i.e., to consecrate [Jud. xvii. 3].
And so, too, in the Future, the second radical some
times takes Tsayre instead of Cherih ; as,
and he caused to divide, i.e., made a division,
[Gen. i. 7.]

hoph-Xl.

28. In a few instances the H which forms the Past

takes a Kibbuts ; as,

nSt^H he was caused, or made, to lie down [Ezek. xxxii. 32].

The D likewise, which forms the Participle Past,
sometimes takes Kibbuts ; as,
Sing. Masc. caused to lie down [2 Kings iv. 32].
Some Grammarians give also as a Participle Past the
form "Tj^sn or ; but these, as we are told by
Kimchi, are merely conjectural forms, as they are not to
be found in Scripture. At all events such forms should
never be used in Composition.
 LETTER XXX. 243

In the Future the prefixes ] H X are found also with

Kibbuts ; as,
^3*7^] ond thou (f) wast cast [Ezek. xvi. 5].
When the first radical is one of those letters which
cannot receive simple Shvah moving, Shvah always
becomes Chateph-Kawmets where the first radical of
"7p2 has a Shvah ; thus, for example, Ibj/ to stand, gives,
Inf. USgty ;
Past. ipjn Third Sing. Masc, &c. ;
Partic. T^'.O Sing. Masc, &c. ;
Future T$£ Third Sing. Masc, &c.

HITHPA-AL.
29. In a few instances the second radical takes
Pathach instead of Tsayre ; as,
Past pinnn he strengthened himself [2 Chron. xv. 8] ;
Imper. pjnnn strengthen thou (m) thyself [1 Kings
xx. 22] ;
Future p?nf"^l and we will strengthen ourselves, or and
let us be strong [2 Sam. x. 12].
The peculiar formation of this Voice, when the first
radical is either of the letters \& V) )£ D £3 *T was noticed
in my last Letter (§ 20, and P.S. c).
In some instances we find the first radical with a
Euphonic Kawmets instead of Pathach, in which case
the Dagesh of the second radical is dropped ; as,
Hp2Jpn and Hpsrw [Judg. xx. 15], for Hpann and
HpBJTI .
The form n^BflPJ occurs also in a few instances ; as
1 Kings xx. 27.
244 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

P.S. (a). Paragogic 1 is in a few instances found with the Second

Person Singular Feminine of the Future ; as

thou (f) shalt cleave [Ruth ii. 8], for "i??*!^ ,

the Kawmets under the 2 being merely Euphonic.

P.S. (b). In the Infinitive Kal, the second radical sometimes takes
Pathach instead of Chowlem ; as

33tpb for the purpose of lying down [Ruth iii. 7].

P.S. (c). In the Present Participle Kal, the second radical, in a
very few instances takes Long-Cherik instead of Tsayre ; as,
TPOVI one (tn) sustaining [Ps. xvi. 5].
P.S. (d.) In the Second Person Sing. Fern, of the Imperative Kal,
the first radical takes Kawmets in a few instances instead of Short-
Cherik ; as,
"O^B reign thou (f) [Jud. ix. 10].
P.S. (e). The Paragogic letters H and ) , in such instances as have
been quoted in this Letter, are legitimate, and may, therefore, in
similar instances be introduced in Hebrew composition by way of
elegance; there are, however, other Paragogic letters which are
altogether anomalous, and such examples must by no means be
imitated ; as,
NSD^nrj those which went [Josh. x. 24], for s,:,1?i7!7 ;
•Hpi* one (m) binding [Gen. xlix. 11], for "Ipto ;
ianM lit. son, or young, ofhis she-ass, i.e., his colt [Id.] for "fahlN ]2l ;
1372 13? son of Beor [Numb. xxiv. 8J for 1»2
 LETTER XXX. 245

EXERCISE XX.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
Kr" For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. § 2.

11 11; 10 . 9 , 8 7.6
vaa 7j/ mrn -i3j£] : Drnnpi onincp d^d
'r>3#fi itt'g "Di»3 "njni : '"i^i : Vij??i
22 21 » 20 18 t 19 17 16
in» D337 h^pi oil? na nnpHI : H-l-'T1 n$
26 25 . 24 . 9 23 .; 9
: ^S3 lmai 133 T3#o ?|3 : najfn
34 33 32t 81 . 30 29 28 27
: noan onj/3 73X njna t nrm 13 nsyyi
10 * 88 b , 37 10 * III 24 35
+ <Tj»T Jnv s3 : rnir 7» 7tnk^ NS3 ipj/m
44 48 . J 42 . J 41 40 39
V$ • Tviy n^a1? sa» ^riiaj? : "H^
61 50 49 48 47; 46 ; 45
-td&"
•• t * dwi *^ t : rv3 ** : noa^
- *• t • - 7a'i «- 0137t niara
t: t :
68 f 67 56 65 54 53 52;
: "Til? HE >TP¥* :
64 68 .. 62; 61 60 69
70 69 68 6T 66 66 f
78 ; 77 . 76 . ; 75 73 72 71 ;
^37 + ;i33 : "HQtf nnsm ^3 nyj^
73 80 78 ; 77 , 79 .;
: msrai
t •• --: - nrtfK
t • t ^37+
• • n3a
It dm7» v:

i a'ny to mix.—2 among the heathen.—3 "fob to learn.—4 np5J» a

work, Plu. .—6 p^T to sprinkle.—6 water.—7 pure.—8 "inB to
be pure.—9 to pass, pass over, pass on.—10 Jehovah.— 11
before him.—12 and He proclaimed.—13 by thee (f ). —14 and it shall be.
—-15 OV a day.—16 the Jordan.—17 andl will take, fetch.—18 amorsel of.
—19bread.—2°137D to support, refresh 21 2? a heart (w. aff. ^V, &c).
—22 afterwards.—23 tfSB to find.—2413 a son(w. aff."'??, &c); Plu.
—28 n? a daughter (with afF. VI?, &c.).—26 ^« fire'.—27 to heap
up.—28 corn.—29 under.—30 hand of.—31 Pharaoh—32 [for] food.—33 "P?
a city ; Plu. Dn» ._34 ibttf to keep.—35 p'SJ to cry.—36 Israel.—
S
246 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

—37 for, because.—38 ?*P to know, to notice.—39 way of.—40 P^? a

righteous man.—41 1 arose.—42 CriS to open.—43 TPT a friend.—44 and
it was, or came to pass. —45tbn to hasten, make haste.—46 for the
purpose of fleeing.—47 and [or rather, that] he fell.—48 n'DQ to halt ;
Niph. to be made lame.—49 [the] house of.—50 a wicked man.—
h "TEE* in the Niph. to be destroyed.—62 and [the] tabernacle of.—
63"itp} an upright man.—54 n'~)5 to flourish.—55 there, or then.—
66 nbS to spring up, to grow.—67 a horn.—68 for David.—69 rf")T to
rise.—60 the sun.—01 *lfc>M to gather together.—62 and in.—63 n3"top a
dwelling (for men), a den (for beasts). —64 V^"1 to lie down, crouch.—
«5 nbw to send, to send forth.—66 nVl spirit.—67 N^fi to create.—
68 "ibj to remember ; Hiph. to bring to remembrance, make mention
of.—69 affections.—70 nbb to rejoice.—71 V*?? to exult.—72 For
1? , there being here a Pause accent. —73 "IS* in Pi. to hymn.
_75Dtt; a name.—76 [0] Most High !—77 firm.—78 3*? a heart.—
79 [0] God.—80 1 will sing.

EXERCISE XXI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBKEW.)
See the note at the head of Exercise xvii. p., 137.

We kept thy (m) commandments.—They (m) shall keep thy (m)

TOHf rma (f )
laws They (f ) will not keep my words. They (m) will
nniw (f ) -a^ Plur. Dn:n:
£_ » 2 1_ 2
not keep her words.—They (f ) will not keep our commandments.—
Keep ye (m) our laws.—Keep thou (f ) their (m) words.—I shall
keep thy (f ) words.—Ye (m) shall keep my covenant.—Keep thou

» 1 1 2! J_
(f) his covenant.—They have not kept our laws.—Ye (f ) have not
2_
kept his words.—We shall keep thy (f ) words.
 LETTER XXXI. 247

LETTER XXXI.

" How is it "—your Grace condescends to ask—" that in

"the forms CO&tf1? , nh?1? introduced in the Exercises
" on the Regular Verb, the Dagesh Dene is retained in
" the second radical ? As the original point of the
" prefix 7 is Shvah, the Cherik which it bears in these
" two instances, is, I should think, a Slight Vowel, and
" therefore the Shvah after it, Moving : if so, there ought
" to be no Dagesh following it."
This is a very fair and judicious question, and a ques
tion too, which I confess I should have been unable to
answer, had I not the authority of the incomparable
Ben Zev (who is, I think, the only one of the Hebrew
Grammarians who has felt this difficulty) to tell your
Grace that the original point of the letters 7 3 3 , when
prefixed to the Infinitive of the Kal, is Short Cherik and
not Shvah.
Indeed there is no reason that, because in the case of
Nouns, and in that of the Infinitives of other Voices, the
natural point of these prefixes is Shvah, therefore this
should also be the natural point in the case of the
Infinitive Kal. Your Grace will, a little further on, find
that in the Infinitives Kal of some Verbs, the prefix 7
always takes Kawmets ; a thing which cannot be ac
counted for, but which, as in the case of the Short-
Cherik here, should be taken as a simple fact. I can
only say that the very many instances that occur in
which the second radical receives a Euphonic Dagesh in
s 2
.248 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

analogous cases, must rather be admitted as affording a

very strong presumption in favour of the truth of Ben
Zev's remark, than be looked upon as so many cases of
Anomaly.
Happy as I am to find Ben Zev come to my assistance,
that happiness, I can assure your Grace, is nothing, com
pared to that which I feel in perceiving, from so
judicious a question, the sound and satisfactory progress
your Grace is making, and the diligent attention
with which you receive my observations. With
renewed confidence I therefore proceed in the pleasing
task to which your Grace has condescended to call me.
2. After having gone through the Verb , selected
as a standard for the Conj ugation of the Regular Verbs,
we have now to direct our attention to those Verbs,
which being affected by some peculiar circumstances,
deviate more or less from the Regular Conjugation, and
which may therefore be termed Irregular.
The peculiar cases, in which a Verb deviates from
the Conjugation of the Regular Verb TpS , are the
following : —
First, when the first radical is 3 ; as, e.g., t^JJ to approach.
Secondly, when the first radical is X ; as, e.g., to eat.
Thirdly, when the first radical is 1 ; as, e.g., 3t£* to or
dwell.
Fourthly, when the second radical is quiescent 1 ; as, e.g.,
Dip to rise.
Fifthly, when the third radical is X ; as, e.g., KVD to find.
Sixthly, when the third radical is quiescent H ; as, e.g.,
T to reveal.
^Seventhly, when the second and third radicals are the
same letter; as, e.g., 22D to surround, or
encompass.
 LETTER XXXI. 249

3. For want of a better expression I have termed

these seven Conjugations Irregular, but I was, perhaps,
wrong in doing so, as I see no reason why a verb,
because it is not conjugated like "Fp2, should on that
account be set down as Irregular. One modern Gram
marian of distinction would have them designated by the
names, Second Conjugation, Third Conjugation, &c,
which I think is by no means to be approved of ; for
another may please perhaps to have them arranged in a
different order, and so the first Conjugation of one might
be the seventh of another, and so on ; thus there would
be in fact nothing but confusion.
Permit me, my Lady Duchess, to mention to you the
manner in which the Hebrew Grammarians class the
Verbs.
I. (whole, or entire) is the term by which
they designate all verbs following the Conjugation of
"7pS ; because each and every one of the three radical
letters is both seen in the word, and heard in its pro
nunciation, through the whole Conjugation. .
II. D^.pn (wanting) is the term applied to all verbs
following the Conjugation of tW3 to approach; as, in
this Verb the first radical 2 is in some forms dropped.
III. D^nj (quiescents) is the name by which those
verbs are designated which have one of their radicals a
quiescent letter, i.e., bDX to eat, to sit, or dwell,
Dip to rise, K¥p to find, T)bl to reveal : there being in
all these verbs some forms in which the quiescent letter
is dropped, and some forms in which that letter, though
standing, is not heard in pronunciation.
IV. (doubled) is the name given to the verbs
of the form 33D to surround, or encompass ; as in these
the second and third radicals are the same.
250 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

4. These are general terms used by the Hebrew

Grammarians for the four classes into which they divide
the Verbs ; but before giving the particular names by
which they designate the several Conjugations, I beg to
repeat what was said in a previous Letter (xxvii. § 5),
namely, that in every trilateral verb, the first radical is
termed D , the second radical is termed V , the third
radical is termed b . They therefore call :—
First, 2"2 TIPD (wanting the first radical 3), all verbs
having 2 for their first radical; as W22 to
approach ;
Secondly, ^2 (lit. quiescents of the first radical X ,
i.e., having for their first radical N) , all verbs
having X for the first radical ; as bitf to eat ;
Thirdly, v2 ^T\2 (lit. quiescents of the first radical 1 , i.e.,
having for their first radical all verbs which
have 11 for their first radical ; as 2$^ to sit ;
Fourthly, YJJ Tli (lit. quiescents of the second radical 1 ,
i.e., having for their second radical 1 quiescent),
all verbs which have 1 quiescent for their second
radical ; as Dip to rise ;
Fifthly, H"b ^2 (lit. quiescents of the third radical H , i.e.,
havingfor their third radical N) all verbs which
have X for their third radical ; as S¥D to find;
Sixthly, iTh TI3 (lit. quiescents of the third radical fl , i.e.,
having for their third radical quiescent fl), all
verbs which have quiescent fl for their third
radical; as to reveal ;
Seventhly, D^IQJ (doubled), all verbs having the same
letter for the second and third radical '; as 22D
T
to encompass.
I think therefore that I cannot do better than follow
 LETTER XXXI. 251

the example of these Grammarians ; only, by way of

conciseness, using : —
to designate verbs of the form tt*J3 ,
K'3 „ „ » • » » ,

—1 >5 55 55 55 55 "* T '

yn „ „ „ „ „ op,
«4 „ „ „ „ „
„ „ „ „ „ rity;
The Verbs having their second and third radicals the
same, like 22D , I shall call Geminata. With regard to
the verbs following the Conjugation of , I shall
continue to call them Regular for the sake of distinction.
The Conjugation of the Verbs 3"D will form the
subject of my next Letter ; for the present I beg to lay
before you two Exercises, and to conclude with the
following remarks on the manner in which the 1 Conver-
sivum is to be used in translating the English Exercises
into Hebrew.
5. An English Future Tense, coupled with a Con
junction and, may be expressed in Hebrew in two ways,
namely, either by a Future Tense with a 1 Conjunctive,
or by a Past Tense with a 1 Conversive (Letter xxix. § 6) ;
thus, for example, of the Verb Ifob to learn, when we
wish to say and he will learn, we may express it

either by Tb^l,
or by "TD7| ,

each of these forms signifying and he will learn. The

first is, of course, the direct, and the second the indirect
mode of expression ; when, therefore, the second one is
to be used, directions to employ it will be given in the
252 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Exercise ; and where no such directions are given, the

first form is always to be made use of.
On the other hand, when an English Past Tense with
a Conjunction and is to be rendered into Hebrew, no
directions will be required, as the only means of ex
pressing it will be by the Future Tense, with a 1 Con-
versive (Letter xxix. § 3) : thus, for example, when we
wish to express in Hebrew and he learned, we cannot
do it otherwise than by the form "lb1??] ; for were
written, this would signify and he will learn.

EXERCISE XXII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
K?" For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. § 2.

^ib^i 'p^v1? V^t + Tin • ofi? + 'n^s 131?

: • t **t ' *• tt :- - - :
27 25 . 26 25 24 23 t 22
\3 mm ^nbh : mm mtyp n» nrw7 tp
82 31 28 t 30 29 & 28 r b
: t -: : • * : -: t t -: : ■
32 B8 . » S2 35 31 . f 32 33 .
n*T| 3iin7 AH : j/icoa npjn run nj;p7
41 .1 25 40 39 38 t IT . f
: !pfl7£ mm narm ru/atsn rnaw : sis-i?
: 4Vn "rijyotf N7n : "7Pixn "nna + "mifcn
47 51 SO 1 25 49 f 48 47 .
iWQ mn ram : mm "•as? ti inr
57 56 t 55 j 54 53 52
: nainn
t - lira - : T'N
■ v " iwd't ; wm nan •• • : nasnsa tT :v-
63 f 62 ; 6) 60 . 6tl 68;
: vrina D37 ia d?7J-i ^a ip-m iyx DipD 73
99 I 68 67 66 60 , 65 64* j
irjn : parn maa Dbntf T"ni? ;nsi 7ntt> ?j£
 LETTER XXXI. 253
71 1 74 7t n 71 ( 70
. . T . . ( . .... ; . - "T
71 t 78 ,1 77 T6| » .1 17
nip? mar «? : tyaa jfatf-T? ^
82t r SO 81 , .» 27 80 . 78 79 I
Tisttr? n^a afcjn N7 ^ : -ijw 121 03127
* 88 87 87 88 . 85 . t 84 89 .»
?pa« jrn : nrw niirrc ^Tpn inn N7
91 I 90 89 J 81 . 27 M . I
t t 7jn: rrcra
t *• pK7
I vt t arjm
-: - ^ : au/n -8 • 7«"
38 I 94 27 41 a » H & . 27 92
D??3« ova ^a + D\-n»s jfr • °$nn
97 96 95 88 95

107 106 :u 25 105 , 104 f 10S

: *pna#np ippj; "mp , rnrr TtWJO "II n2
SI . SI . 80 105 108 f
: -mp n?T + ^931 + o^??

1 A sepulchre.—2 nhs to open.—3 7*13 a throat ; with aff. "'pba .—

4 light. —5 ? it to sow.—6 for the just [man],—7 and for [the] upright
of.—8 heart.—9joy.—10 nbtP' to send, send away ; also, to put forth. —
11 0$ a mother, a dam.—12 1? a son ; also, the young of animals. —
13 thou (m) mayest take.—14 for , there being a Pause Accent.—
15 if.—16 thou (m) art not.—17 OS a people.—18 lit. And it was, i.e.,
and it came to pass.—19 Pharaoh.—20 how ?—21 thou (m) didst fear. —
22 a hand.—BnntS pi, to destroy.—24 anointed-of.—25 Jehovah.—
26 heal thou (m) me.—27 for, that (Conjunct.).—28 bn2 in Niph. to be
troubled.—29 my bones.—30 a soul.—31 very, greatly, ex
ceedingly.—32 a time.—33 to plant, to uproot.—36 ?*33 to
plant.—36 to slay.—37 to heal 38 bbN to eat.—39 VOW to be
satisfied.—40T°P;. to bless.—41 BV}Sh. God.—42 And Sarah.—43 Vbw'
to hear, listen.—44 [at the] door of.—45 bnh a tent—46 n2 a daughter.
_«iby to stand.—48 alive.—49 before.—50 ffco a king.—51 he was.
_52n23nK) a chariot.—53 behold.—54 8*1+1 a head.—55 l^W in Hiph.
to cast.—56 over.—57 Plain a wall.—58 all, every.—59 place.—60 "il'l^T to
tread.—61 [the] sole of.—62 ^?.~! a foot ; with aff. ^1 &c—63 1 have
given it (m).—64 an old lion.—or,7rj? an adder.—60 D!3"1 to trample upon.
—67 a young lion.—68 V^Z) a dragon.—69 b'ln to cease.—70 to do evil
7i "Tab in Kal, to learn ; in Pi. to teach.—72 to do good.—73 UniT to
254 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

inquire, seek, or search after.—74 justice.—75 in Niph. to swear.—

76 by Baal.—77 truth.—78 "OT in Pi. to speak.—79 VW^ a tongue;
with aff. &c—80 falsehood 81 aVy to forsake, leave.—82 to
[the] pit.—83 thou (m) wilt suffer.—84 "VDn a pious, holy [man] ;
with aff. ''TPn &c.—s,r> to see.—86 corruption.—87 "Sn a friend (in
Constr. the same).—88 thy (m) father.—89 to the earth.—90 eggs.
—91 dust.—92 COn in Pi. to warm.—93 ?V| to know.—94 Of1 a day.
(The same in Constr.).—95 npS to open.— 90 VO an eye. Dual
D^J ._97 both of them.—98 nmn a sin.—99 he shall die.—100"£>| to
remember.—101 n[7"T? righteousness : Plu. ^ipiS .—102 he hath
done.—103 how?—194 Via to be great.—105 ntpED "a work. Plur.
D"»3?D._locpby to be deep.—107 n2»na a thought. Plur.
ni2Bno.—los Wonderful.

EXERCISE XXIII.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

See the Notes at the head of Exercise xvii., page 137.
No man [was] speaking a word.—And I will remember My
r« tz^N nan -ot -dt*
covenant. And his name shall not be remembered
JV12 dW w. aff. &c.
any-more.—Remember thou (f) [that] which I spake to thee.—
TiS -OT Pi-al ^ with aff.
2 1
Thou (f) shalt [well]! remember my words.—My son hath-surely-
13^. Plur. ]2W. affix ^a.
6eera-torn-in-pieces.—And water [was] not sprinkled upon-him.—
rpia i n>a pit pu-al. bs w. aff.
Speak ye (f) to him.— Speak ye (m) to her.
"On Pi-dl w. aff. with affix. '

* Past Kal with 1 Conversivum.

f Emphasis expressed by coupling the In/in. with the Future Kal.
% Emphasis expressed by coupling the In/in. Kal with the Past Pu-al.
 LETTER XXXII. 255

LETTER XXXII.

The Table annexed to this Letter exhibits the Conjuga

tion of the Verb to approach, selected by almost all
Grammarians as a standard of the Verbs J"3 (Letter
xxxi. § 4). On comparing this Table with that of the
Regular Verb , your Grace will easily discover that
the chief distinguishing feature of the Verbs I'D consists
in this, that (with the exception of the 2 Plu. Masc. as
well as Fem. of the Past Kal, and the Plu. Masc, and
Sing, as well as Plu. Fem. of the Past Participle Kal), they
drop the first radical ( 3 ) in all the forms in which the
first radical of a Regular Verb bears Shvah or a Slight
Vowel. Thus, for example,—

KAL.
From the Regular Verb | While from t£>JJ to ap-
to draw near, proach,
we have we have
21$ Infin. Constr
21$ Imper. 2 Sing. Masc. ... ttf3
^IJ?* Imper. 2 Sing. Fem ">#|
n")J?* Imper. 2 Plu. Masc. ... 10|
njyip, Imper. 2 Plu. Fem. . . n#j
21$1 Future 3 Sing. Masc. ... t^P
21J>$ Future 3 Sing. Fem. . . VZ_r\
&c, &c.

* The Short- Cherik here is a Slight Vowel, the form being deduced
from the 2 Sing. Masc. ^li? .
256 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

(I prefer quoting the Regular Verb 21pT here as an

example, instead of IpD , because taking a Pathach
(Letter xxx. § 22), to the second radical in the Imperative
and Future, is more similar to J^JJ .)
Before I proceed, I beg to call your Grace's attention
to the important difference there is between the Dagesh
in the 2 in the case of the Future, and in that of
the Infinitive and Imperative : in the Future the Dagesh is
preceded by a letter bearing a vowel, and therefore is Da
gesh Forte, doubling the J ; and it has too a grammatical
import, by showing that the first radical 2 is dropped—an
import which it will always have, throughout this Conjuga
tion, when preceded by a letter bearing a vowel ; — where
as in the Infinitive and Imperative the Dagesh in the 2 is
inherent, and has no grammatical import whatever, being
merely Euphonic, and serving perhaps in former times to
determine the pronunciation of the letter. To prove
this, we need only consider the Verb to draw off,
which gives in the Imper. 2 Sing. Masc. [Exod. iii. 5] ;
where no Dagesh is to be seen in the letter W , because
it is not one of the letters F\ S 3 1 2 2 . Let us now
follow up the difference between the two Conjugations :—

NIPH-AL.

21pr gives,— I while t#J3 gives,—

31J?3 Past 3 Sing. Masc. tt>|3

runpj Past 3 Sing. Fern. rn^J
&c, &c.

3"lp3 Partic. Pres. Sing. Masc. -E^J

nnnj?: Partic. Pres. Sing. Fern. nu/Z2
&c.', &c.
 LETTER XXXII. 257

Your Grace will perceive that in these instances the 2

is the characteristic of the Niph., and not the first
radical, this being dropped, and its omission supplied by
the Dagesh in the H .

HIPH-EL.
Infin. □1i?n Btyl
Past 3 Sing. Masc. 3*n|?n
Past 3 Sing. Fem. ~n3vTJ?n H^Iin
&c, &c.
Partic. Pres. Sing. Masc. nnpD fc^Q
Partic. Pres. Sing. Fem. nnnpp Pia*$Q
&c, &c.
Imper. 2 Sing. Masc. 3"lJ?n ttfjjrr
Imper. 2 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
Future 3 Sing. Masc. 3"nj£ B^ft
Future 3 Sing. Fem. 3"nj?f) {tf\3fi
&c, &c.

HOPH-AL.
Infin. 2"Tpn 0jg
Past 3 Sing. Masc. 31j?n Bttfl
Past 3 Sing. Fem. , nsnjjn HB^i!
&c, &c.
Partic. Past Sing. Masc. 2~$0 0|O
Partic. Past Sing.
O Fem. nSlPO
T Tl: T PTBtoO
T TX
&C, &C.
Future 3 Sing. Masc. m_f£
Future 3 Sing. Fem. 2"$n
&c, &c.
258 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

In all the parts of the Verb not mentioned here, ttf}\

will have the same forms as the Regular Verb 3h]5 or
"Tj?S ; but to recapitulate,—
t^J3 will deviate from 3hj? and "Tj?S in—
The Infinitive-Constructive, the Imperative, and
Future, Kal ;
The Past Tense, and Participle, Niph-al ;
The whole of Hiph-6l ;
The whole of Hoph-al.
t^J3 will agree with 21 ft and in—
The Past Tense, the Participle Present, and Participle
Past, Kal;
The Infinitive, Imperative, and Future, Niph-al ;
The whole of Pi-dl, Pu-al, and Hithpa-dl.
2. The Verbs 7^3 to fall, and 733 to wither, give
respectively,—
Infin. Kal. (with D733), 7&33 , &c, 7333 , &c.
Fut. Kal. 7&? , &c, bh\ , Sec.
The Verb #D3 to move, journey, gives in the Future
Kal VD) , VVT\ , &c. ; but in the Infinitive Kal (with
□ 7 3 3), JJ&33 , &c.
3. The Verb ~)ifJ to #eep, preserve, gives in the Future
JKaZ both , &c, and Tiffl , &c.
4. Many verbs having for the second radical a
guttural letter, do not drop the 3 in the Future Kal ;
thus,
fi*3 to despise, gives Ptf3? , &c.
3H3 to ^tntfe, gives XTS\ , &c.
DH3 to roar, gives DH3? , &c.
pil3 to era?/, gives piTT , &c.
7H3 to possess, gives 7H3? , &c.
Dj/3 to be pleasant, gives DjtfJP , &c.
and so also ^83 gives , &c.
 LETTER XXXII. 259

5. The Verb Hpl to take, follows the Conjugation of

tfi'JJ in the Infinitive, the Imperative, and the Future of
the Kal, with this difference only, that in the Infinitive
Constructive Kal it takes, owing to its third radical being
guttural, two Pathachs instead of two Segols ; i.e.,
Inf. Constr. Kal nnj? , nnj?3 , &c. ;
Imperative Kal J"lj? , "Tip , &c. ; sometimes npb , Tlj?'?;
Future Kal nj?"1. , nj?jn , &c. ;
At the foot of the Table of t^J3 your Grace will find
all these forms in full.
6. The verb \r\2 to give, grant, drops in some forms the
first radical, in others the third, and in others both first
and third at once : as,
Infin. Constr. Kal, T\ft, , &c, also ]hj .
Imper \F\ , "Olp , &c, ....
Future . . . ...\T\), irifi,&c, ....
These forms too your Grace will find in full at the
end of the Table of given in this Letter.
When treating of the Eegular Verb Tp2 , I called
your Grace's attention to the circumstance that the
Future is derived from the Imperative ; indeed the very
affixes used in forming the Persons of the Imperative
are also to be seen in those of the Future. On
examining the principal verbs dwelt upon at some length
in this Letter, your Grace will also be convinced of the
truth of this remark ; for what can be plainer than, that
$2] is derived from tt'J .
!"lj5? „ from T\\> .
„ from ]F) .
All this we see with our own eyes, and all this the
Hebrew Grammarians tell us, all of them, to a man ;
 260 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

but for the modern Philosophical Grammarians to say

the same, would, I suppose, be beneath their dignity, and
so they tell us that the Future is derived, not from the
Imperative, but from the Infinitive Constructive, though
in some instances the Infinitive Constructive and the
Future no more resemble each other, than ablack-a-moor
does a European ; so, in the instances before us, U}2\ looks
indeed very like , but very unlike r\W$ ; jJT looks
very like \Fi , but very unlike fifl ; and again Hj^ looks
very like to l"lp_ , but unlike rinp ; and other verbs will
occur presently in which the disparity will be equally
great ; yet thus we are told, for no other reason, it must
seem, than for the sake of saying something which
others have not said.
7. In conclusion, I beg to observe that the Imperatives
2 Sing, masc, ttf| , Hj5 , ]£l , on taking the Paragogic fl
become respectively il^l , !inp: , .

P.S. In the verb to move, journey, mentioned above (§ 2), the

Third Person Plural masc. Future Kal is deprived of the Dagesh in
the second radical : so that we always find and Wp*l without a
Dagesh in the D ; (and so too we find from npb to take the forms
and inj/?5 without a Dagesh in the P). This, however, is owing
to the Shvah which stands beneath the letters D and P ; and it will be
well to remark here, that when a letter bearing Shvah should have a
Dagesh, the Dagesh is very often indeed, by a most unaccountable
liberty, dropped ; thus we find that a river, when taking the
Definite Article, is "^n without a Dagesh in the , ; and so that
D*V? Levites is written with the Definite Article Oil1??!' without a
Dagesh in the v : the Shvah beneath the letter, being, in each of
these, the cause of the Dagesh being omitted. Your Grace will do
well to become early reconciled to such little irregularities, which are
of frequent occurrence.
 LETTER XXXII.

Conjugation of the Verb $22 to approach.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
\i?22 to approach.

Constructive.
approaching.

Declined with D b 2 2 .
nt^J3 In approaching,
nij'^? As (or like) approaching.
Ty$2 7 For the purpose of approaching.*
fitt^Q From approaching.

PAST.
t£^JI3 He (or it m.) approached,t
Htt'JJ She (or it /.) approached.
&e., &c, regular, like •

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

tt'JJ One (m.) approaching.

Hti'jj One (/.) approaching.
&c, &c, regular, like "IpS '

* Or, in order to approach.

t Or, would (or might) have approached.
262 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
Ct*1J3 One (to.) approached.
HC^US One (/.) approached.
&c, &c, regular, like IpS "

IMPERATIVE.
^|(") and ti>^(l) Approach thou (m.)
and Approach thou (/.)
iJJ/j and Approach ye (to.)
i"l3J£>! Approach ye (/.)

FUTURE.

tt'iP He (or it to.) will approach.*

tE^Jjl She (or it /.) will approach.
tt'lH Thou (to.) wilt approach,
^iri Thou (/.) wilt approach.
11}£ SI I will approach.
IK'S1 They (to.) will approach,
natt'iri They (/.) will approach.
Itt'SI? Ye (to.) will approach.
Ye (/.) will approach.
1^33 We will approach.

(1). With n Paragogic ntia .

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must approach.
 LETTER XXXII.

NIPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute and Constructive.
ti'JSri To be approached.

Declined with D 7 3 3.
tt^3n3 In being approached.
&c, &c, regular, like ^3 ■

PAST.
C£^33 He (or it m.) was approached.*
Hti'ilJ She (or it/.) was approached.
I^'J/Sl Thou (m.) wast approached.
JHti'ilJ Thou (/.) wast approached.
V1t&02 I was approached.
TEfi33 They (m. and/.) were approached.
DF\WZ2 Ye (m.) were approached.
Ifitf'SJ Ye (/.) were approached.
13^*33 We were approached.

PARTICIPLE.
tl^3 One (m.) being approached.
HJi'IlJ One (/.) being approached.
D^ilJ Plu. (m.) being approached,
fiityil} Plu. (/•) being approached.

IMPERATIVE.
tt'JSn Be thou (m.) approached.
''B'jin Be thou (/.) approached.
&c., &c, regular, like •

* Or, would (or might) have been approached.

T 2
264 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
t^JD^ He (or it m.) will be approached.*
She (or it /.) will be approached.
&c, &c, regular, like ^"?S •

• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be approached.

PI-AL.
Regular, all through, like lp2 ■

PU-AL.
Regular, all through, like •

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.
and ti'iin To cause to approach.

Declined with 0^33

12^3 H3 In causing to approach.
£1^,3 H 3 As (or like) causing to approach.
t£^3D 7 F°r the purpose of causing to approach.f
B^iHiQ From causing to approach.

f Or, in order to cause to approach.

 LETTER XXXII.

PAST.
He (or it m.) caused to approach.*
She (or it/.) caused to approach.
rutton
t : - • Thou (m.) causedst to approach.
Thou (/.) causedst to approach.
I caused to approach.
They (m. and /.) caused to approach.
Ye (m.) caused to approach.
WW Ye (/.) caused to approach.
We caused to approach.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

ti^ilD One (m.) causing to approach.

rvi^o ) 0ne ^ causing to approacl1-

Q^J£^-|0 Plu. (m.) causing to approach.

nity^D Plu. (/.) causing to approach.

IMPERATIVE.

{jh-in and ti^n Cause thou (m.) to approach.

^B^lil Cause thou (/) to approach.
!)J2'',3n Cause ye (m.) to approach.
n^$Hn Cause ye (/.) to approach.

• Or would (or might) have caused to approach.

260 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.

?p or ftfjp He (or it m.) will cause to approach. *

ti^il]? She (or it/.) will cause to approach,
ti^iljn Thou (to.) wilt cause to approach.
"•Ci^Sf! Thou (/.) wilt cause to approach.
t£^ili< I will cause to approach.
IJi^iP They (to.) will cause to approach.
il2lt/^Fi They (/.) will cause to approach.
Iti^iin Ye (m.) will cause to approach.
D2W%F\ Ye (/.) will cause to approach.
tt'^iD We will cause to approach.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to approach.

HOPH-AL.

INFINITIVE.

To be caused to approach.

Declined with D 33.

jy3n^ For the purpose of being caused to approach.t"

tl^HD From being caused to approach.

t Or, in order to be caused to approach.

 LETTER XXXII.

PAST.
He (or it m.) was caused to approach.*
She (or it /.) was caused to approach.
Thou (m.) wast caused to approach.
Thou (/.) wast caused to approach.
Wan I was caused to approach.
They (m. and/.) were caused to approach.
Ye (m.) were caused to approach.
Ye (/.) were caused to approach.
We were caused to approach.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
One (m.) caused to approach.
One (/.) caused to approach.
Plu. (m.) caused to approach.
PIu. (/.) caused to approach.

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will be caused to approach, f
She (or it/.) will be caused to approach.
Thou (m.) wilt be caused to approach.
Thou (/.) wilt be caused to approach.
I will be caused to approach.
They (m.) will be caused to approach.
They (/.) will be caused to approach.
Ye (m.) will be caused to approach.
Ye (/.) will be caused to approach.
"We will be caused to approach.
#2}

HITHPA-AL.
Regular throughout, like *Tp3 •
» Or would (or might) have been caused to approach.
t Or, shall, may, might, can, or must be caused to approach.
268 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The Verb nj?|? to take, gives,—

KAL.

INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIVE.
Taking.

Declined with D *7 3 3 .
In taking.
nnj?3 As (or like) taking.
For the purpose of taking.
nngip From taking.

IMPERATIVE.
nj?(D and npb Take thou (to.)
tjlf) and snj?1? Take thou (/.)
trij? Take ye (m.)
njflj? Take ye (/.)

FUTURE.
nj?^ He (or it to.) will take.
rij?J1 She (or it/.) will take.
nj?fl Thou (to.) wilt take,
^nj?^ Thou (/.) wilt take.
nj?§ I will take,
inj?^ They (m.) will take.
^211)5^ They (/•) vill take.
injSflW Ye (to.) will take,
nankin Ye (/.) will take,
npj We will take.
(1). With n Paragogic nnp, .
(2). Generally drops the Dagmk of the p .
 LETTER XXXII.

From the Verb to give, we have,—

KAL.

INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIVE.

fiJT) Giving; in a few instances jj^J .

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
nn3 In giving.
As (or like) giving.
For the purpose of giving.
From giving.

PAST.
He (or it m.) gave.
She or it (/) gave.
JTiri3(i) Thou (m.) gavest.
Thou (/.) gavest.
I gave.
MTU: t They (m. and/.) gave.
djvu Ye (m.) gave.
WO? Ye (/.) gave.
We gave.

IMPERATIVE.
|$(*) Give thou (m.)
"^fl Give thou (/.)
Uf) Give ye (m.)
Give ye (/.)

(1). Once nPID (with n Paragogic), 2 Sam. xxii. 41.

(2). With n Paragogic n:n .
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will give.
inn She (or it/.) will give.
m Thou (m.) wilt give.
Thou (/.) wilt give.
I will give.
un: They (m.) will give.
nan'n
T" " They (/.) will give.
Ye (m.) will give.
nan]?
T Ye (/.) will give.
in? "We will give.

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. gives,—

''ntt'^l My approaching.
^nti'il Thy (to.) approaching.
"j|n^ Thy (/•) approaching.
&c", ' &c.

The Infin. Constr. nn|? gives,—

"*nnj? My taking.
Tjnnj? Thy (m.) taking.
"Sinnj? Thy (/) taking.
&c.', &c.

The Infin. Constr. nn gives,-

^nn My giving.
?jnn Thy (m.) giving.
•?|nn Thy (/.) giving.
&c, &c.
 LETTER XXXII. 271

EXERCISE XXIV.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

Kfp For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. §. 2.

Vfl 'on^\ '7#a ^p x'tfft 87 Viatpn 78

Van : 'metei
t •• " ; ^• 'ntfa
t : : 4ia jwa
-: - : dtp^k
v *• -:
'mm 78 o^aan ffjnbn 'oai : "rrjirn 1^8
: "iCnfcl n3n "ninatfn "nj^jj?! : "lB^giv
Mwfr« nim "jnan : "m'n lsn87 w Vam
vj t : - .- T VT . T .. - - • -
14 » . f 18 14 t 18 17 IS
: jnea -npj?? nin ny^S r\y : iij/a ja
35 i 24 t t 20 22t 21t t 20
: na^p rnjy ^ nnj? : 72^0 ?sp ?p np
SOt ,29 f 28 27 28 t 20
7*niPT ^a 78 is*!! J onp nyati' DD7 inp
"npinfl ,5Qsn"7s Vrim "799 i'Vidtiji sl? "inpi
88 , S7 . » 86 20 35 84 t
nap»i vrtpvp *in8 np*i jtf^i onijri 7#
43 20 42 40 89 .
46 4529 44 7 20 f
iDip : ^a HJTn n$ Da ^Di??!
:MDmia8 "o^p "j/pn :4p*)8 'Vu n« "nayi
82t . 54 54 SOt . 58 46
7b3a : *\id D?p 7int^ rwo
58 t 52 82} , 67 . t 66
vaa 7# ori-ja« ?an : np^n 78 ?pri8
63 62 , 61 J 47 59
nym nnrt^n on^a? nay 8"»m : pnyn
ft t 67 66 2. 66 65 64
i^ai 87i : vn8 Ttf lfutfa D^pjtfa j/attf
"ly : 'V"JPT 2,73 e"7# Vitttfn "in?"? ^8
f 75 58 » 74 9 . 73 72
dji : n»n«n "oa dim mm run dv
"fi8 n» on"? "nrb oris Vrna M8 \ibjsj
272 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

"inns "^22) Vt rfyj i1? "|nri "lina r'tyj?

nlir ron nyjn 77:3 ^ 17
Tl 0? t , TS M 15 .f
nn» snnip t? nnk wi + mo : wrr?$

1DK71 T3«7 Tan X7T : -in« b*N7

88 Sit • A 88 89 83
nntfy iw»
■TV-; 73 ^ Tan
- •-. "ran
T- s : nfcw
t^ v -:
"vi?n "3%^ Vi^ "ran : "^nion "n»
102 101 100 88 , SOf t 88
~ t : • -t: t ■• t: • : t t : •
108 ■ 89

1 The altar.—2 ^3 t0 approach, also to withdraw, to draw back.

—3D'n;n ^pa lit>) an owner-of words, i.e., a pleader.—4i2 MB
fall on him, i.e., kill him.—5 And I will sit down, or that I
may dwell.—6 Judah.—7 P} also.—8 the priests 9 Jehovah.—
10 trip t« Hithp. to keep oneself holy.—11 nnCB? a handmaiden.—
18 "l!?; a child. Plu. D,T^ .—13 Leah.—14 ?b3 to plant.—15 God.—
16 a garden.— 17 in Eden.—18 a time.—19~ip37 to uproot.—20 Dpb to
take.—21 ^3 or 7S all.—22 food.—24 a heifer.—25 three years old.—
26 seven.—27 IS a bullock.—28 "m in Pi. to speak.—29 1? a son.
Plu. D^a ._8o Israel.—31 a heave offering.—32 ^ba to fall.—33 a
deep sleep.—34 CIN man.—35 and he slept.—36 one.—37 a rib.
Plu. ni*b? .—38 -ftp to close up.—39 flesh.—40 instead thereof.—
*2 B59 little.—43 a husband, a man.—44 EMfTVto mandrakes.—
45 arise ye (m).—46 ?D3 to move, journey.—47 ">2y to pass over.—
48 river.—49 Arnon.—61 from thence.—52 Abraham. — 63 Moses.—
54 tfio n;n lit. from [the] sea of reed, i.e., the Red sea.—56 S.ViN an
enemy.—57 ITOW to rejoice 68 B^B face—59ph2 to laugh.—61 before
them(m).—62 and he bowed himself down.—63 totheearth.—64 seven.—
65 times.—66 until, also even to.—67 his brother.—68 ,HD in Pi, to minister
(Compensation not made for Dagesh).—69 near—71 mt sacred [things.]
—72 day-of.—73 ?n3 to give.—74 rain.—75 the ground.—76 I have
established.—77 TH21 a covenant.—78 land-of.—79 Canaan.—80 it shall
be displeased.—81 viz. thy heart (be displeased).—82 for.—83 because-
of.—84 "D^ a thing, word.—85 he will bless thee (m).—86 good.—87 for
, on account of the accent.—88 another.—89 123 in Hiph. to tell,
declare, shew ; in Hoph. to be told.—90 to his father.—91 and to his
 LETTER XXXII. 273

mother.—92 he had done.—93 thou (f ) hast done.—94 with.— 95 thy (f )

mother-in-law.—96 to Jacob.—97 ph a statute. Plu. E^n.—
98 UBttJp a judgment. Plu. CaBttfo .—99 [O] my Lord.—100 D^nsb
(Dual) lips.—101 nhS to open.—102 and my mouth.—103 nbnjjl praise.

No English Exercise to be translated into Hebrew is attached to

this Letter, nor will there be any given until we reach the end of all
the Verbs ; as it is thought that these Exercises will be more
useful if made to bear promiscuously on the different parts of the
entire subject.
274 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXXIII.

We come now to consider the Verbs (Letter xxxi.

§ 4), i.e., those of which the first radical is X : and here
I would beg to refer your Grace to one of my former
Letters (xxx. § 1 , 2, 6, 7), in which mention was made
of slight modifications which the forms of the Regular
Verb undergo when the first radical is one of the
guttural letters V H H , namely that these letters take
Chateph-Pathach, Chateph-Segol, and, in some cases,
Chateph-Kawmets, where the first radical of lp§ has
Shvah ; and that the Serviles preceding those letters
take in such cases the corresponding vowels.
Now X , being likewise a guttural letter, it may at
first sight be supposed that Verbs whose first radical is
X do not vary from the Regular Verb, except in accord
ance with the modifications mentioned above : in fact, it
is the case that most of the Verbs do not undergo
any other modifications than these, and, consequently,
these Verbs would require no separate Conjugation
were it not for about five or six of them (of which I
shall for the present mention only to eat, "itoK to
say, to perish, and TriN to seize, lay hold), which, in
the Future Kal, giving Chowlem to the Serviles ] fl 1
make the first radical quiescent in all the Persons, and
drop it in the first Person Singular. Of this small
cluster of Verbs the Hebrew Grammarians have all
agreed to give a separate Conjugation, taking for its
 LETTER XXXIII. 275

standard the Verb bbii to eat, a Table of which is

annexed to this Letter.
As in all forms where the first radical has a vowel in
the Regular Verb, the Verbs N'D do not differ at all
from it, and as enough has been said in my Letter
mentioned above with regard to the changes caused by
the guttural letters (of which S is one) in cases where the
first radical of *T|?E) has Shvah, I shall here limit myself
to noticing merely the following peculiarities, viz., —
2. In the Infinitive Kal of the Verb ~!bNl to say, the b
of the D b 3 3 takes Tsayre, the N becoming quiescent ;
thus,
"lfotf^ for the purpose of saying (generally used for
saying), instead of "ibg!? ;
(comp. Letter xvii. 10.)
As I am not aware of any word of more frequent
occurrence in The Hebrew Bible than ")b»S , I beg to
call your Grace's particular attention to it.
3. From the Table attached to this Letter, your Grace
will perceive that the Future Kal of *?blj is VdN1 , bsSft ,
&c. ; this in Pause becomes » > &c. Of the
Verb "lbS to say, we find the form IDS'1! .
4. It was said just now that most of the Verbs S "5
undergo no further change than those do whose first
radical is any other of the gutturals ; of these Verbs I
shall mention here only to gather, and to love;
the Future Kal of each of which is given at the foot of
the Table.
5. Of the Verb Di^X to be guilty, we find the extra
ordinary forms EiUtW , D£^£l , &c, the K having a
simple Shvah ; a thing of very rare occurrence.
6. I would mention, in conclusion, though it seems
scarcely necessary, that in those parts of the Niph. in
276 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

which the characteristic 3 is dropped, and its place

supplied by Dagesh in the first radical of the Regular
Verb, Compensation must here be made for the Dagesh,
since the N cannot admit it (Letter xxix. § 17).

P.S. (a). In addition to the Verbs "^N, and men

tioned above (§1), there are also the Verbs nbM to bake, and H2K to
be willing, which give Chowlem to the 1 1"! 11 N in the Future Kal :
but as these will have to be treated of when we come to the Doubly
Irregular Verbs, we need not notice them at present.
P.S. (b). Of the Verbs ION to say, and thN to seize, or lay hold,
we find instances in which the H is dropped in the Future Kal in
other Persons than the first, as,
»Oh! [2 Sam. xx. 9] it (/.) laid hold, and *")I?fo [2 Sam. xix. 14]
ye (m) shall say.
All this, however, may be regarded as anomalous, since none of the
Persons have a right so to do; except the First, in order that the
concurrence of two Alephs may be avoided.
P.S. (c). Of the Verbs "VTH to tarry, 2hN to love, we find the
anomalous forms "^HSJ [Gen. xxxii. 5] and I tarried, for "in^MT ;
SUN} [Mai. i. 2] and I loved, for ; 3TTN [Prov. viii! i7]
/ will love, for , the Pathach being lengthened into Kawmets
by the Pause.
P.S. (d). Of the Verb thM to seize, lay hold, we find the form tflMfl
[Eccles. vii. 18] thou (m) shalt lay hold.
P.S. (e). As in my last Letter I exposed the absurdity of sup
posing the Future to be formed from the Infinitive Constructive
instead of from the Imperative, it may perhaps excite a little surprise
to see in the case before us the dissimilarity which exists between the
Future and the Imperative . I might indeed say to this,
that those who would form the Future from the Infinitive Construc
tive are no belter off, this too being ; but, instead of so doing, I
will rather write you what Kimchi says upon the matter. He tells
us that the usual similarity of the Imperative and Future is here
disturbed on account of the harshness which would result from
retaining in the Future the Chowlem which the second radical has in the
 LETTER XXXIII. ' 277

Imperative, since the ) 1 ^ taking Chowlem here, we then should

have two consecutive Chowlems &c, which would not
sound well. In those Verbs in which the ) H ^ S do not take
Chowlem, the similarity between the Future and Imperative remains
quite undisturbed ; as, for instance, from to love, Imperative
3-3$ , Future ^L^?. , whereas the Infinitive Constructive is shy .

Conjugation of the Verb hbR to eat (also to devour,

to consume).

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
bbHT To eat.

Constructive,
to* Eating.

Declined with 0^33,

In eating.
tegs As (or like) eating.
(I) For the purpose of eating.*
From eating.

PAST.
SDS: He (or it m.) ate. +
i"60Nl She (or it/.) ate.
&c, &c, regular, like "fpS •

* Or, in order to eat.

t Or, would (or might) have eaten.
U
278 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
fa* One (m.) eating.
One (/.) eating.
&c, &o., regular, like lp2 •

PARTICIPLE PAST.
^IDN One (m.) eaten.
nblDX One (/.) eaten.
&c, &c, regular, like lp2

IMPERATIVE.
fas Eat thou (in.)
>fa« Eat thou ( /.)
*fax Eat ye (»«.)
n^5« Eatye(/.)

FUTURE.
fa* (2) He (or it m.) will eat.*
fatffi She (or it /.) will eat.
fa^fl Thou (m.) wilt eat.
"fatftt Thou (/.) wUt eat
fafc I will eat.
ifafcO They (m.) will eat.
Hjfaita They (/.) will eat.
'ifatfjl Ye (m.) will eat.
njfarifl Ye (/.) will eat.
fa& We will eat.
(1). "*« to say, gives "toN^ for the purpose of saying (which stands for saying).
(2). In Pause ty** .
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must eat.
 LETTER XXXIII.

NIPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute and Constructive,
^JSn To be eaten,

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
^pijriS, In being eaten.
&c, &c.

PAST.
'pp^J He (or it m.) was eaten.*
n^DS^ She (or it/.) was eaten.
r^DS^ Thou (m.) wast eaten.
fl1??^, Thou (/.) wast eaten.
I was eaten.
173X3 They (m. and /.) were eaten.
D^VpNi, Ye (m.) were eaten.
|Cv3$*3 Ye (/.) were eaten.
10^3X3 We were eaten.

PARTICIPLE.
*73N^ One (m.) being eaten.
nS3S5 One (/.) being eaten.
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
^3^C Be thou (m0 eaten<
^2^.r\ Be thou (/.) eaten.
&c., &c.
• Or, would (or might) have been eaten.
u 2
280 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
bin He (or it m.) will be eaten.*
^SXf} She (or it /.) will be eaten.
&c, &c
• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be eaten.

PI-AL.

Regular, all through, like ^2

PU-AL.
Regular, all through, like

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.
7^pl$n To cause to eat.

Declined with 0 V 3 3
VON H3 In causing to eat.
&c, &c.

PAST.
^D^H'1* He (or it m.) caused to eat
n^pHiJ She (or it/.) caused to eat
&c, &c.
 LETTER XXXIII. 281

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
^^^^ One (m.) causing to eat.
"3NQ One (/.) causing to eat.
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
'lOXrj Cause thou (m.) to eat.
^PSH Cause thou (/.) to eat.
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
^pio 01 He (°r il m-) wil1 cause to eat-*
VOXfl She (or it /.) will cause to eat
&c, &c.
(1). From "oh , we find in one instance 'n^jw [Isai. xlix. 26] and 1 will
cause to eat.
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must Cause to eat.

HOPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
- t: T To be caused to eat.
Declined with D 3 3 .
'jpSH^ In being caused to eat.
&c, &c.

PAST.
He (or it rn.) was caused to eat.
She (or it/.) was caused to eat.
t: T T

They (m, and/.) were caused to eat.

&c, &c.
282 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
'jDSJp One (m.) caused to eat
n^pSp One (/.) caused to eat.
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will be caused to eat.*
She (or it/.) will be caused to eat.

"^DN^
• : t T Thou (/.) wilt be caused to eat.

I^JNJ They (m.) will be caused to eat.

I*?JiW
&c., T Ye (m.)
&c. will be caused to eat.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to eat.

HITHPA-AL.
Regular throughout, like "Fp2
 LETTER XXXIII.

The Verb rpX to gather, gives,—

FUTURE KAL.
?]b<St.1 He (or it m.) will gather.
spiKn She (or it /.) will gather.
f|bjNJn Thou (m.) wilt gather.
"'tiDNf? Thou (/.) wilt gather.
f]b.N^t I will gather.
IQP^ They (m.) will gather.
n35b.^Cl They (/.) will gather.
ISP^fi} Ye (m.) will gather.
H3il6j?CI Ye (/.) will gather.
Pp£J We will gather.

The Verb 2hi* to love, gives,—

FUTURE K.AL.
Sn^U He (or it m.) will love.
..... She (or it/.) will love.

*lm3 Thou(/)wiltlove-

-lan&j ^y(«o wdi love,

un^n
•■• » i _
Ye ,(m). will
....love.

&c.', &c.

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infinitive Constructive ^.Sl gives,
My eating.
^SDX Thy (m.) eating.
•^pK Thy (/.) eating.
&c, &c.
284 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE XXV.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

Kr" For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

Sti : alto 87 'niann Vni: 'Sbx

IB . 17 II , II U It . I Hi L
mrr
t : im■ 1- : wart :• uai
vv 73K7 v: v oro
vv 1
li . 23 22 201 . 8 f 19 t 11 .f
73$ ]an y# 73p -ibsS cnxn by ortix
27 1 8 . 28 * 25 24 If .
nyftn -ips"] 78 1338 8*ij??i : 738m
80 It . 28 22 29 28 If
18D?i : 7DK3 jan 737 nap : yyn 738m
MDT| "ffTas "-ifca "7?i»n : 'Spfc 87 la^]
88 87 1 I . 9 86 85
: ona t :• owa• t n3738h
t: - D8 : nmx v : v omnj/
^
43 42f t 1) Ml 20f f 89
pa T'nan? : 738.1 "l^S 738a 73p ^ nj? nri8i
"rnriri "psi 'r638jn "win 4V?i ""inisn "pai "sptsn
:483bj; ^ 'V^n "■'pn1? '7318 : '73«ri 87 -ia>8
*2t a if0. 40 b 11 1 is 49
78 ' + 8in H738 t: t^8
»i v V:TM78 m.T
t : ^3
8 f a 55 <1 1 tC , 54 b 58
U/P7 : + 8in CPaBh"1 ™8 p.8 : 83p.
: 137P3 D3J18 ^?38n 1^ DH^n r>8 18T
^38i ^Vj^a ri8 "Tgia r»8 V738rn
8 . 9 11 ./ 18 62 80
-)b8t D8T
• : : ?pPl78
i v v; m.T
t : ^8v fl313T
t : - '• flj/atsn
t :t t :
"mtt>8
: • n8v *VtK-: M8 v "VOTM
• : - t "layr?t '-ioio
. _ 88 67 t 8 . 49 66
DTian.+ can ^13373 -ie«n s3 : \23 nai
'Vptf "rnfc ^8 8-)D8n -i#8 M73 : n^n

73 : w0t Ti87 m |np«n na : n7p3

 LETTER XXXIII. 285

8 52f 79f 78f t 6 t 8

npxn] : 78 7^2 no 78-itir?i -ipiP
85 84 83 82 81 89 ■
■ 82 88 87 J 86 j 82
78 vgw] yyn n^sn 78 iw ^b*n
: 78 "=10^5 ^8. Dirfyj '-iptf'i : "nag
93 a 48 C 92 b . 75 48 02 . po
: na 2j?jp3 Trw : itoy 3p#3 n.rrm iti
96 * 18 »» , 8 94 92
mo - : mir• vi ^18
t iD8it : injnnsi : v v t in nmtat -: t
97 18 . 64 49 81
: irgv mm arw n8 : 83
64 . 99 75 . 98 64
ran» + ng:rn • • • • r>8 pny? 3rj8>i
64 I 102 100 . 6
: nnnn 78 rurntp : 3piP n»
20 1 105 . 106 105 . 104 103
7? nziw p : . i28n o^an TYT!
110 109 . 108 64 , 18 107
: imaja t •. : • bwiv v - navs•• : + Tanw r -. : mm r s vifik 1 v:

1 To eat, devour, consume.—2 honey.—3 strictly Infin. Hiph. of

the Verb n3"l, here used adverbially for much. —4 good.—5 "1*13 to
vow.—6 Jacob.—7 a vow.—8"122S to say. — 9 if, also as an Inter
rogative particle whether ?—10 he will be.—11 viz. God (will be).—
12 with me.—13iri3 to give —14 onb bread, with afif. "'prpb &c.—
15 "f?3> a garment.—16 ti?27 to put on.—17 and he laid a command.
18 Jehovah.—19 En« a man.—20 ^3 f or ^3 , all, every.— 22 atree (the
same in construction).—23 "1? a garden, lengthened by the accent.—
24 and he called out.—26 viz. Abner called out.—26 Joab.—27 whether
for _ ever ?—28 a sword (f).—29 "H? fruit.—30 f„ Pi, t0 refuse.—
32 -1B72 flesh ; in constr. .—33 strong [bullocks].—34 blood ; in
constr. O^T .—38 rams.—36 will I drink ?—37 Htps and ^I^N a woman,
a wife ; (with affix sntpN &c. Plu. ■="■??)•—38 standsfor VT$ their
(f) fruit.—39 nfb to take.—40 food.—42 ^12 in Hiph. to T make a
distinction.—43 between.—44 N£Ip unclean.—45 ")hto clean.
46 H»n a beast.— in Z7ipA. to raise up.—48 a heel ; (in
constr. ).—49 for, because, a/so if.— 50 ^« (f) a fire.—62 God.—
63 jealous 64 a land.—65 to dwell, inhabit.—56 in order that.—
"they (m) may see.—68"13"|? adesert,—59those(m) afflicting thee (f).
286 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
w> snip to be satisfied.—"2 "P3 in Pi. to bless.—03 1?S a slave.—
64 2hN to love.—65 I'TM a lord.—66 1? a son. Plu. 0"??.—67 22*? a
heart (with aff. "'^D1? ).—88 numerous.—69 the nations. —70 Sarah.—
72 ?btt? to hear.—" % a voice.—'4 thus.—75 1^5 Esau.—76 (f)
a bone. Plu. rnOSV. ft Ut.f about this time, i.e., now.—
w ^Vnfr Israel.—79 VfcB to work.—80 to glean.—81 now ; like
wise, Iprat/.—82 *lfoN to gather.—88 among the sheaves.—84 after. —
85l'2|? to reap.—86 ^ a foot. Dual 0^1.—wn^D a bed.—
88 3n'a to expire.—80 D? a people.—90 T B hand.—92 M*TH to lay hold.
—93 a snare.—94 and I slew him.—95 [0] Lord.—96 ffop to forgive.—
97 He will correct.—98 Isaac—99 and Rebekah.—100 n3n2?J an oath.—
108 falsehood.—103 "HI a way (f) ; (the same in constr.) 104 Slth a wicked
[man].—105 "fas to perish.—100 so.—107 3?> an enemy. Plu.
—108 like [the] going forth of, i.e., [the] rising of.—109 E???t£* sun.—
no rri^ might.
 LETTER XXXIV. 2S7

LETTER XXXIV.

In taking a survey of the Conjugation of the Verb

to sit, or dwell (attached to this Letter), which is selected
as a standard for the Verbs v2 (Letter xxxi. § 4), it
will be well to consider how far this Verb deviates from
the Regular Verb "fpS : —
First, In those forms in which the first radical of "TpS
bears a vowel ;
Secondly, In those in which that first radical bears a
Shvah, and is not preceded by a Servile ;
Thirdly, In those in which that first radical bears Shvah,
and is preceded by a Servile.
In those forms in which the first radical of "Tj?2 has a
vowel, 211/1 does not differ from it in the slightest
degree, so far as punctuation is concerned; in the
Niph-al, however, where the first radical of "TpS is
Dageshed, the ^ of 2W\ is changed into 1. Thus, in
the,—
NIPH-AL.
"Ip£ to visit, 3tS^ to sit, or dwell,
gives,— gives,—
INFINITIVE.

&c. &c.
IMPERATIVE.
"Jp.sn

&c. &c.
288 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.

&C &c.
2. Since in the Pi., Pu., and Hithp., the first radical of
IpS has always a vowel, it follows from the above that
in these Voices 2&1 is conjugated precisely like the
Regular Verb ; the verbs J/T to know, however,
and ny to reprove, to reason, change throughout the
Hithp. the s into 1 , and respectively give the forms
jninn &c, nsijin &c.
The verb PIT also gives in the Hithp. HTnn he con
fessed himself, but this will be noticed among the
Doubly Irregular Verbs.
3. The first radical of 2W\ is dropped in the forms
corresponding to those in which the first radical of *Tp2)
has either a Shvah or a Slight Vowel (not preceded by a
Servile) ; with the exception of the 2. Plu. m. & /. Past
Kal, and the Sing. /. and the Plu. m. as well as f.
PastPartic. Kal, just as was the case in the Verbs 3*2.
(Letter xxxii. § 1); thus, in Kal,—
"JpS gives,— | gives,—
INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIVE.

IMPERATIVE.
npa

npa* Up

* In these two instances the Short-Cherik of the Q is a Slight Vowel ;

the original form, from which they are derived, being "'p? .
 LETTER XXXIV. 289

Before proceeding to the remaining case, I will just

observe to your Grace, that the Infinitive Constructive
rOtl* retains its form when declined with the D b 3 3 ,
viz.; ^3^3, ^3^3, &c.
4. In those forms in which the first radical of *7pS has
Shvah and is preceded by a Servile, the 1 of 3^ in
the Kal disappears, but is understood as a quiescent
after the Tsayre which is then given to the prefixes
\ n X ; thus,—
l'p£) gives,— | 3fc^ gives,—
FUTURE.
3^:
3#£
&c. &c.
where the first radical 1 , though not seen, is under
stood as a quiescent after the Tsayre given to the ] n 11 N .
5. In the Niph-al, the 1 of 3B^ is changed into 1, which
is made quiescent after the Chowlem given to the Servile ;
thus, —
"Tj?S gives,— | 3t£^ gives,—
PAST.

H3^iJ
&c, &c.
PARTICIPLE.

&c. &c.
where we see the Serviles receiving Full Chowlem,
which is, in fact, Chowlem followed by a quiescent 1
(Letter viii. § 5).
290 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

6. In Hiph-el too the i is changed into 1 made

quiescent after the Chowlem given to the servile ; thus,
lp% gives,— | afch gives,—
INFINITIVE.

Tpana a^ina
&c. &c.'
PAST.
a^in
T &c.
&c.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

T&c.
&C.

IMPERATIVE.
a#i n

&c. &c.

FUTURE.

a'wifl
&C. &C.

where also we see the servile taking a Full Chowlem,

i.e., a Chowlem followed by a quiescent 1 .
7. In Hoph-al the ^ is changed into Shurik (which is
in fact a dot in the midst of the line blended with 1
quiescent) (Letter viii. § 5) ; thus,—
 LETTER XXXIV. 291

1'pS gives,— | 2i& gives,—

INFINITIVE.

ipzr\2
&c. &c.
PAST.

&c. &c.
PARTICIPLE PAST.

■r t
&c. &c.
FUTURE.

&c. &c.

8. Verbs of this Conjugation, having for their third

radical J! or n , receive in some forms the Pathach Fur-
tivum, as usual, beneath that third radical ; but in some
forms they undergo a complete change of punctuation ;
thus, for instance, to know gives—

KAL.
Infin. Constr. AIH &c, corresponding to , &c.
Imperative &c, „ „ 2# , &c.
Future JfT &c, „ „ 3tj>: , &c.

NIPH-AL.
Infin.
Imper. -IHin
T or JHVl &c,
&c, corresponding
„ „ to 3#ir7
2ti/}H,, &c.
&c.

Fut. my. or V1V &c., „ „ 2ti}\, &c.

292 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

So also in the Hiph. we have,—

JTTn> JH1n> correspondingto TtiMH, 3#in, .
And in the Hithp. we have, —
jninn or jn]J>l , &c, corresponding to a^fin , &c.

In like manner the verb riD^ to reprove, to reason,

gives in Hiph.—

rrgin, n?in, irgfr corresponding to 3*#1n, 3tt>in, .

9. Although most verbs of this Conjugation, as was •

stated above, have the first radical ^ not expressed, but
understood in the Future Kal after the Tsayre which is
given to the prefixed letters ] H , S, yet there are some
which retain the ^ after a Cherik given to the letters
| Ty 1 K , or, in other words, there are some in which the
letters \ n ■> X, take Long-Cherik, and in which con
sequently the first radical of the Verb is always visible ;
thus,—

piP to suck, makes the Future Kal, , p^fl , &c.

3bJ to be good, „ „ „ „ „ 3C?"^, 3E£Ptf, &c.

These Verbs, in the Hiph-el give Tsayre to the let

ters | n 1 X , and retain the 1 at the same time ; thus,
fij^1!!' she caused to suck, i.e., she suckled ; Hj^p , or
np^P , one (f) causing to suck, i.e., a nurse ; ^p^H cause
thou (f) to suck, i.e., suckle thou (f) ; p^ri she will cause
to suck ; i.e.; she will suckle.
3,^,n he caused good, i.e., he did well ; 3^^ he will
cause good, i.e., he will do well.
10. There are however some Verbs, which, though
they have in the Future Kal Long-Cherik to the
 LETTER XXXIV. 293

| n s N , give nevertheless in the Hiph-el a Chowlem to

the servile letters ; thus,

t£>T to possess gives in the Future Kal tfch^ , t^TA ,

&c. /yet in the Hiph-tt it gives, tfniPl , B^t1, B^lUl , &c.

Likewise, lt/2^ to be dry gives in the Future Kal

t^ITf! , &c. ; but in the Hiph-el, attain, ti^3i\ t^aif), &c.
11. There are some Verbs (having mostly V for their
second radical) which drop the and supply its omission
by a Dagesh in the second radical, after the manner of
the Verbs 3*2 ; thus,
3SP to stand, gives Niph. 2T£2 , Hiph. 2^n
to stand, gives Hiph. ryn
J})?* to spread out, gives Hiph. jU^V'T1
pV"1 to pour out* gives Kal p)P. , Hiph. p"^
"VP to form, gives Kal "liP , also "1^^
filT to kindle, burn, gives .KaZr*V? , iVipA. HK? ,
Hiph. rvyn .
To these, some Grammarians add to place, to leave,
which gives in the Hiph. rP3n .
As I shall have to return to the subject of the V'D in
my next, I beg to mention in conclusion that the Second
Person Sing. Masc. of the Imperative Kal, 2$ , on taking
Paragogic PI becomes PI 2$ ; so also we find Pill. , and
in Pause PIT! , for the Imperative T] of the verb "IT to
go down.

* Used in Hiph. with the sense of placing, setting, in a few instances.

X
294 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

P.S. (a). Of the Verb to know, the regular form of the Infin.
Constr. Kal with the 7 of O ? 2> 2 is of course FIST? ; we find,
however [Exod. ii. 4], the form instead of it. In like manner,
from the Verb "l"">J to go down, we find [Gen. xlvi. 3] for nTJO ,
the legitimate form of the Infinitive with the O of D ' 3 2 .
Of the Verb <^ to be able, we find [Numb. xiv. 16] the anomalous
form n^b* for the Infin. Constr. Kal. So also we find [Gen. viii. 7] nt?2,:
as the Infin. Constr. of to dry up (Intrant.); with the 2 of 0 7 3 2
however, we find [Isaiah xxvii. 11] the form 272s2 , which agrees
with the regular form "ifr?? , the only difference between them being
that the first radical , , dropping its Shvah, blends with the Cherik of
the prefix, thus forming Long- Cherik, according to the rule laid down
in a preceding Letter (xvii. § 8, Rule iv.).
P.S. (b). Of the Verb 2h; to give, we find [Prov. xxx. 15] for the
Imperative Second Person Sing. Masc, 2fJ ; for the Second Person
Sing. Fern., we find [Ruth iii. 15] ,?n ; and for the Second Person
Plu. Masc, we find [Gen. xlvii. 16] isn . The Second Person Sing.
Masc, on taking n Paragogic, becomes n2/(7 » and it then sometimes
assumes altogether the nature of an Interjection, answering to the
Latin Age, or to the English Come on, as appears from the context in
the following passages in which it occurs, as Gen. xi. 4, Exod. i. 10;
and, consequently, it does not in those instances agree with the
Person or Persons to whom it refers.
P.S. (c). From psj to pour out, we find the Second Person Sing.
Masc. of the Imperative Kal in one instance [2 Kings iv. 41] P?;
and in another [Ezek. xxiv. 3] ps^ .
P.S. (d). Of ipj to go, the Second Person Sing. Masc. of the
Imperative Kal is Tj1? , and with n Paragogic ns^, which last
dropping the Paragogic H assumes sometimes the form 1?, as
Judg. xix. 13, and must then be carefully distinguished from the
Personal Pronoun iV , the Dative of nriN .
The Second* Person Plural Fern. ^Jpb also, dropping the H ,
assumes sometimes the form Tl?l? [Ruth i. 12].
P.S. (e). The Verb n'""P to throw, or shoot, does not change the ,
into 1 in the Niph-dl, but gives [Exod. xix. 13] ; this will be
noticed among the Doubly Irregular Verbs.
P.S. (f). Of the Verb iWj to be right, or straight, we find
 LETTER XXXIV. 295

[Psalm v. 9] * the Second Person Sing. Masc. of the Imperative Hiph .

~^Wl*l , which is very similar to the regular form "T?9n .
Of the Verb 3^ to be good, we find [Job xxiv. 21] the anomalous
form , Third Person Sing. Masc. Future Hiph., instead of
3*1*5 (§ 9>
P.S. (g). Of the Verb 3^ to stand, place, we find [Exod. ii. 4] the
anomalous form Third Person Sing. Fern. Future Hithp.
with 1 Conversivum, instead of 25£^ppn .
• According to the Margin, where the correct form is given.

Conjugation of the Verb 3Jt^ to sit, to dwell.

KAL.

INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
3fc"T To sit.

Constructive.
DDt^d) Sitting.

Declined with D b 3 3 .

n5^3 In sitting.
n3ti*3 As (or like) sitting.
For the purpose of sitting.*
rOte'D From sitting.

* Or, in order to sit.

x 2
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

3t£^ He (or it m.) sat.*

She (or it /.) sat
&c, &c, regular, like Tj?5 .

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

2WV One (m.) sitting.

nat^i"1 One (/.) sitting.
&c., &c, regular, like npQ .

PARTICIPLE PAST.

31 One (m.) seated.

"121 CS^ One (/.) seated.
&c, &c., regular, like "TpS .

IMPERATIVE.

3#(3) Sit thou (to.)

13$ Sit thou (/.)
13$ Sit ye («.)
H33^ Sitye(/.)

* Or, would (or might) have sat.

 LETTER XXXIV.

FUTURE.
3jf>V*) He (or it m.) will sit*
She (or it /.) will sit.
Thou (m.) wilt sit.
Thou (/.) wilt sit.
3#t? I will sit.
They (m.) will sit.
They (/.) will sit.
Ye (m.) will sit.
njatffl Ye (/.) will sit.
a#j We will sit.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must sit.

(1). rm, from 3?i; to know.

(2). In a few instances ra«ft .
(3). an , from vr to know.
(4). *3I , from ?X to know; , from SB' to be good.

NIPH-AL.

INFINITIVE.

3tmn
** T • To be seated.

Declined with D h 3 3 .
3Bhn3 In being seated.
3^3 As (or like) being seated.
3#inl7 For the purpose of being seated.*
3^ri» From being seated.

* Or, in order to be seated.

 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

3^13 He (or it m.) was seated.*

n3tyi3 She (or it/.) was seated.
.Ppji'ij Thou (m.) wast seated.
Dlltifa Thou (/.) wast seated.
TOtiHi I was seated.
13 1^13 They (m. and/.) were seated.
DrQJi'iJ Ye (m.) were seated.
irUtiMj Ye (/.) were seated.
133tiM3 We were seated.

PARTICIPLE.

H^ij
T One (m.) being seated.
TT One (/.) being seated,
D'aaMa
•T piu. (m.) being seated.
(/.) being seated.

IMPERATIVE.

3t2Mn Be thou (m.) seated,

^tt'in Be tbou (/.) seated.
'Qtf'jn Be ye (m.) seated.
n33^1H Be ye (/.) seated.

* Or, would (or might) have been seated.

 LETTER XXXIV.

FUTURE.
3$V(0 He (or it m.) will be seated.*
She (or it /.) will be seated.
D^lfl Thou (m.) wilt be seated.
'^JJ'Ifl Thou (/.) wilt be seated.
3trlX I will be seated.
*\2WV\ They (m.) will be seated,
njjtgfyn They (/•) wiU be seated.
13!i*T.Jn Ye (m.) will be seated.
HJDa'in Ye (/.) will be seated.
3t*/13 We will be seated.

(1). and STJ , from to know ; rn» , from rfv to shoot.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be seated.

PI-AL.

Regular all through, like "ij'S .

pu-Il.

Kegular all through, like *Tj?2 ■

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.
n#in & n^irid) t0 cause to sit.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR,

Declined with D *7 3 3 .
3,5i'ii"l3 In causing to sit.
3^1 H3 As (or like) causing to sit
3"'t^in7 For the purpose of causing to sit.*
3,£i'inZp From causing to sit.

PAST.
2^in (2) He (or it m.) caused to sit-t
nytfMf] She (or it /.) caused to sit.
JJ13^in Thou (m.) causedst to sit.
riit^in Thou (/.) causedst to sit.
^JjOffnn I caused to sit.
131!i'iri They (m. and /.) caused to sit.
Dri3ti'in Ye (m.) caused to sit.
jjlil^'in Ye (/.) caused to sit.
W^ltfin We caused to sit.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

3,ti'i*0(3) One (m.) causing to sit.

HT^IO? Qne causing to sit.
ornn^io)
D^TtiMO Plu. (»».) causing to sit.
ni3^t^iD Kn- (/•) causing to sit.

IMPERATIVE.
3$1riW Cause thou (m.) to sit.
''TtJ'in Cause thou ( /.) to sit.
1 3^1 11 Cause ye (m.) to sit.
rU^in Cause ye (/.) to sit.

* Or, in order to cause to sit.

f Or, would (or might) have caused to sit.
 LETTER XXXIV. 301

FUTURE.
3^1MS) He (or it m.) will cause to sit.*
3"iaMfl She (or it/.) will cause to sit.
T^in Thou (m.) wilt cause to sit.
"Q^iri Thou (/.) wilt cause to sit
TtiMtf I will cause to sit.
131tt?1^ They (m.) will cause to sit.
n23t£Hfi They (/.) will cause to sit.
!)31t£'lP Ye (m.) will cause to sit.
nJH&'iJ^ Ye (/.) will cause to sit.
t:
3,t£'i3 We will cause to sit.

(1). jnin , from Jt to know ; a'sm , from aw to be good.

(2). S*"pn , from to know ; aipTi , from aw to be good.
(3). a'Tp'D , from atD' to be good.
(4). srrtn , from STJ to know ; awn , from aw to be good.
(5). Sometimes a*' ; spT* , from SX to know ; from as* to be good.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to sit.

hoph-Xl.

INFINITIVE.
Zlti'in To be caused to sit.

Declined with D "7 3 3 .

3ttHn3 In being caused to sit.

3Cin3 As (or like) being caused to sit.
3^1iT? For the purpose of being caused to sit-x
Dti'inZJ From being caused to sit.
f Or, in order to be caused to sit.
302 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

He (or it m.) was caused to sit.*

She (or it/.) was caused to sit.
Thou (to.) wast caused to sit.
Thou (/.) wast caused to sit.
I was caused to sit.
They (m. and/.) were caused to sit.
Ye (m.) were caused to sit.
Ye (/.) were caused to sit.
We were caused to sit.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
3t£")D One (to.) caused to sit.
rOtt'lD One (/.) caused to sit.
D^3tffyQ Plu. (to.) caused to sit.
riUtpiD Plu. (/.) caused to sit.

FUTURE.

DJfP He (or it to.) will be caused to sit.f

Ht^lf! She (or it/.) will be caused to sit.
Thou (in.) wilt be caused to sit.
"Qtyifl Thou (/.) wilt be caused to sit.
DCt'ltf ' I will be caused to sit.
TDtt'T They (m.) will be caused to sit.
n3?!^W They (/.) will be caused to sit.
I^ti^n Ye (to.) will be caused to sit.
Hjati'in Ye (/.) will be caused to sit.
We will be caused to sit.

* Or, would (or might) have been caused to sit.

f Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to sit.
 LETTER XXXIV. 303

HITHPA-AL.
Regular all through, like *TpS ; except that J/*T to know gives IHIfiili
andn^^i nSlfin he reasoned.

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. fi3t£> gives,—
"^3$ My sitting.
Thy (m.) sitting,
^fipi^ Thy (/.) sitting.
&c, &c.

The Infin. Constr, rgS , from "fr to go, gives,-

My going.
Thy (in.) going.
lEpJ T°y (/•) going-
Ac, &c.

The Infin. Constr. Pijn of JHJ to Araow, gives,—

VfU^ My knowing.
Uftt^l Thy (in.) knowing.
lEUn Thy (/.) knowing.
&c.', &c.
304 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXXV.

In all the Future Tenses of Verbs Regular as well as

Irregular, those forms, which have no affix, take the
Accent always upon the Ultimate, that is the last
syllable; as,

»"jgang >tj?^ >ij?a? '1^1

/* t ■ J- •• -: - r —.- r- r* t ■

where your Grace will perceive the accent to be on

the Ultimate. Now when the 1 Conversivum (Letter
xxix. § 3), is prefixed to one of such forms that has
only two vowels, so that there would be only one vowel
between the 1 Conversivum, and the vowel having
the accent, it (the 1 Conversivum) has the power of
drawing back the accent from the Ultimate to the Pen
ultimate, i.e., from the last to the last syllable but one, so
as to have the accent close to itself—provided that the
vowel which otherwise would separate the accent from the
1 Conversivum be not immediately followed either by
Shvah or by Dagesh-Forte ;—and on such a withdrawal
of the accent, the long vowel, to which it was originally
attached, is changed into a short one; e.g., 3tj£! he will
sit, is a word having only two vowels; and the 1
Conversivum, on being prefixed, would be separated
from the vowel having the accent by only one vowel not
followed by either Shvah or Dagesh-Forte, consequently
the 1 will have in this instance the power of drawing
 LETTER XXXV. 305

back the accent from the Ultimate to the Penultimate

syllable, in which case the Tsayre of the W will be
changed into Segol, and we shall have the form 3^1 .
The reason why the Tsayre of the 0} is changed into
a short vowel is obvious—for otherwise, there would be a
Shvah quiescent understood beneath the 3 after an unac
cented long vowel, which (Letter xii. § 6) is impossible.
In like manner, of "TT to go down, or to descend, the
Third Person Sing, of the Future Hiph-el is "riV , but
with the T Conversivum it becomes Tji/l .
2. Should, however, the vowel which would separate
the 1 Conversivum from that having the accent be followed
immediately by a Shvah, so that the withdrawal would
cause the accent to pass over the Shvah, the 1 has no
power to move the accent, which will consequently
remain upon the Ultimate, as it was before ; e.g., "Tj?51 he
will visit,—if the accent were to be drawn back to the
Penultimate syllable, it would have to pass over the
Shvah beneath the £ , which the 1 Conversivum cannot
make it do ; the form will therefore remain as it was,
and give "T]?5^! and he visited.
3. In like manner, when the vowel which would sepa
rate the 1 Conversivum from the one having the accent is
immediately followed by Dagesh-Forte, as for instance
in CtfiP he will cause to approach, the form on its receiving
1 Conversivum will remain the same, and give . The
reason for this is clear from what has just been said, for
as every Dagesh-Forte doubles the letter in which it
stands, t^JjP in fact stands for ttfJ~,JP from which it follows,
that were the 1 to draw back the accent from the £1 to the
1 , it would virtually draw it over a Shvah, which (as
said before) it cannot do.
306 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

4. We find instances in which this withdrawal does

not take place, even when the letter, which follows the
vowel separating the 1 Conversivum from that having
the accent, has not a Dagesh, but ought by right to have
one if it could admit it : as, "IHO^I [Gen. xviii. 6] and
he hastened, [Ps. lxxviii. 26] and he led ; these
two forms being of the Pi-dl Voice should by right have
Dagesh in the second radical, if the fl could admit it, and
therefore no withdrawal of accent takes place.
5. When more vowels than one separate the T Con
versivum from the vowel having the accent, the 1 in
general loses its power of drawing the accent back ; as,
"TjfLSIl [1 Sam. xx. 25] : should there be found a few in
stances not in accordance with this, they should be
considered rather as exceptions to the Rule, than as con
tradictions of it.
6. When the Accent is a Pause-Accent, the 1 also
loses the power of drawing it back ; thus in D"n3i? Y?!}
[Gen. xii. 4] and Abram went, the accent, being
not a Pause-Accent, is withdrawn ; but in
< "fe nj>3"! n« l^yn Plj?M [Gen. xxiv. 61] and the
servant took Rebekah, and went, the accent is not with
drawn, on account of its being a Pause- Accent : as for
the Pathach beneath the b , it is merely Euphonic.
7. As I treated of this most important of all prefixes,
the 1 Conversivum, in an earlier Letter [xxix. § 3], your
Grace will doubtless wonder, for what reason I have
delayed till now to speak of its drawing back the accent.
Avery little consideration, however, will shew thatl could
not, at an earlier period, have spoken of this with
drawal, for you will observe that I have not previously
had any forms in which the withdrawal could take place,
on account of either a Shvah or a Dagesh interfering, or
 LETTER XXXV. 307

on account of two vowels intervening between the 1 and

the vowel having the accent ; as is the case in such forms
as :
&c. , 'roiw > b£*i » Tj?Q?i i "1)55*1 ' nj?p*i
This I think will serve as an ample excuse for my
having deferred speaking of this matter until now,
since I could not earlier have elucidated it by
examples.
8. There is another point of Grammar, which having
been slightly touched upon in a preceding Letter, I am
now able to illustrate by an example. On pointing out
to your Grace that the Futures are formed from the
several Imperatives [Letter xxix. § 15], I stated that
in the Future of the Hiph-61 the characteristic (H) of that
Voice is dropped and the vowel which it has in the Im
perative transferred to the letters 1 H X . According
to this, or , the Third Person Sing. Masc.
Fut. Hiph. of the verb , would stand for (the
Imperative being 3t^in); and, similarly, ^[DV He will
add, 3 Sing. m. Fut. Hiph. of to add, would stand for
IPi'T (the Imperative being HPin). Now if this full
form ^piiT actually occurs in The Bible for ^Di1 , we
have at once a proof of the principle thus laid down;
and it does so occur, for Rachel [Gen.xxx.25] called her
son—^QV, saying (Hirp IP'"1) Jehovah shall add to me
another son, and so he is usually called ^JDi"1 ,—but we also
find the same name given in full ^piiT with the charac
teristic H of the Hiph., as ^pifpg [Ps. Ixxxi. 6], where
the prefix 3 takes Long-Cherik by the blending of its
Short- Cherik with the following of ^PifP . [Letter
xvii. § 8, Rule iv.]
9. So, too, we find JT#i<T [1 Sam. xvii. 47] the full
308 HEBEEW GRAMMAR.

form of J^#V he will save, the Third Person Sing. Masc.

Fut. Hiph. of JJItn .
10. It may here be observed, that in no part of speech is
greater liberty taken with the punctuation than in Proper
Names. Thus the name of Joshua the son of Nun is gene
rally pointed J^iiT which is an unaccountable form of
jjP{f>1rV he shall save, but this very same Joshua the son of
Nun is called [Nehem. viii. 17] J/I&'.Ij which consequently
must also stand for JT^irp he will save ; and this name
J^t^l ,— allow me, my Lady Duchess, to call yourattention
to this most important fact,—is The Name of our Lord
and Saviour,—"And she shall bring forth a Son, and
" thou shalt call His Name Jesus ; for He shall
" save [Jtrcyirp ] His people from their sins." [Matth.
i. 21.]
11. As I happen to be dwelling on the verb J/tf1, I
will just mention that its Imperative Hiph., J/BMil {save
thou m.), followed by the particle S3 (signifying I pray)
would read together S3 save, I pray ; which two
words have been blended together into one to form the
word H OS ANNAH.
I too well know your Grace's love for your New Tes
tament, and your anxiety to understand fully every word
contained in it, to imagine that any apology is needed
for this digression.

P.S. (a) As the 1 which converts the Future into a Past shifts
the Accent, as seen above, from the Ultimate to the Penultimate syl
lable,—so, on the other hand, the 1 which converts the Past into a
Future shifts the accent, in some instances, from the Penultimate to
the Ultimate syllable, but without causing any change in the punc
tuation ; thus [Gen.xxxii. 13] JJHpN Thou (m.) didst say (accent on
the Penultimate), but [Gen. xliv. 4] and thou (m.) shalt say,
(accent on the Ultimate).
 LETTER XXXV. 309

P. S. <b) When the 1 Conversivum is prefixed to the First Person

Singular of the Future (when the Dagesh is of course inadmissible,
and Compensation must be made for it) the 1 loses the power of with
drawing the accent ; therefore, with the Conversivum, gives
f ■• r

EXERCISE XXVI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
Kr" For the plan of the Exercises see Letter xx. § 2.
Yi^na sisy bp '"attfi 4m :sns 2«a 'attf
- tt - • ; ■ : t
: u,>T5fD "rftaro 'nattf "sa dip : 87aa 'na
: • " • t : t: t : t * *.* t
"ny "na'pa ""warn "liann Vte "dp1?
1 22 20 ,f 19 IS / IT 16 .
att? mm nn» "sjaa nbty : na
1 1 .t 25 24 2S (
aatfn : 13 atfri K7i: naan n^a : "wpa
SO li 1 29 28 27 26
: TO D"1^ iarm n^a.n
84 1 SO S3 1 .. .f
?p3K na aann psn ap^iaa : naona 87
37 J 36 30 1 , 35
n» Dtt> att^vi : ;tw p;»a ia^ ?pn» nxi
42 40 1 39 15 j S8r 10
riprap nm ^7 vunjrj xi$n : 7*ot^ ^a

'Vpi*1 "dw^pi : 'V? "nina 'na nV

47 , 55 54 63 52 62; A0» .
njrjs p^n : ta-n te D^aaa tyai ripn
47 . 59 54 58 57 .1 56
: njria \ri?a -i:nn ap^i : Di7p nam
58 58 46 60 , 58
a^K - atoM
•• *• max
t ; - T nnsi T - : : nttf*n T V at^m
V •• -
65 ^■lar 64
: jpaa . nv-ia S 15 I
n?77 I 63 i»y.?i : 62 ^isa;
22■nns 15^37t 69 yttyrhp ./ t 68 nans 67 TnW 66 "rpn ^7I
73 72 .J 30 70
n« + rona : njynr K7 p«a laisa
310 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
n , . 75 , BO 59 7 74 . f
pt^K-in |p ltingn ^pn jjia^n mm?
•• 85l BO 70 78 15 f 77 ? T
ogi 71 dk oninan nn« n?? ^v??
87 86 ■ M 84 , 83
98 . 92 m t BO 8fl| . 88 .1
pjK3 *p7n : D^prna 7*2 ™7j?pn
B7 * BB 94 . 80 . . .

,yn3
- : 7K")^ •• t : • nx v D3 t mD37 -: mirT : rnrr
106 . . _ 106 104i , 10t 102 M .
ppu raa Tysa nfc^ tost^p mrr;
t 100 .1 74 108 107
: on? VWTia K7 m.T ^p$n : ytfn
«0 lit 113 17 110 . 100 100
?pn?3 |n vwyp ^ was jnv np3i
84 100 15 t .» 114
1?1JD J™?! ! 13P^ ^D73 K7H Tjpjn "UK
IIS .1 117 i 11» / 5» 118 I
182. » 118 , 121 120 119 SO
3j?r. nnjn : V3« nup p.$3
137 124 ,i 125 , 124 . 129
: nnt^n nnjg iv. vzy ttn$ p3£?i
182 19 128 . 128 19 f 100 .1
d"tktt |3
Iv : rrrwaa t : crantt t ^37
'. * jrnirn
- ■ :
100 , 132 ISO 1 100
runini : rrniaipn dwt n;$ jnin
185 194 . 15 t 183 f
caw 21 : po «dt "^nn n$ orn
199 188 137 188 100
TPO '3)?T ns nj??] : npDn wht
108 . 142 70 140
n** DH3 jm o^^-ian n»i "isipn ^p
27 , 124 . 146 .i 145 143
ma bt'R ipy »7i : map ^wax
U8« 148 85 * 147 . 100
lot? n$ *nj5*n : vns 7$ f|pv jninna
: in« |3 7 ni/p »|pv -itoK7 ^pv>
H9 .1 158 I 15!. a. 1« .° 151 b
158 I 155 .( 12» . 154 . 1 155
160 H» . f » 158/ .1 4 157
van n» 3^7 Tivan w «7 : rrn 13*1

* For t^i2i3 according to Kimchi.

 LETTER XXXV. 311
101 d^zik '"rrits^a : 'rmj ,M73ia xh ' "lotfai
186 .1 17 185) 1 100 164 ,,
znns S7 ^3 mn ?n]?n ?3 vpi :
I 74 46 74 104 167
mmt : -)ON"i , - : mrp t : ytfhm
- T : n^nm • -
46 t 17S 172 170 169 168 , ,
: -ion? n#o rntfp pa ;a Jtftthrr
168 . 176 178 . t" 17 174 1
_ ... ^ . \- : •• -
178 164 88; ltf 177 170 169
?p}2# jHpnn : 7«n^ \?3 1? pa |3
188 180 182 . 180 179 158 .1
+ oyp noi 3i£3 no nan : nm
187 166 ♦ 18.1 184 184 85 1
nxo nn» : im oa o^rm nn^
""73 "mm "rv33 '^3^ ""mix nni» Nnlm
t t : ** : • : • J.. - t t t :
191 190
. «n ^
1 to sit, dwell, inhabit.—2 I pray.—3 here.—4 "iV to go down,
descend.—5 dust.—6 nVin? a virgin.—7 f1? a daughter (the same in
Construction) with affix ''^2 &c.—8 Babylon.—9 arise thou (m).—
io bbM to eat.—11 of my venison.—12 to,* or for, you (m).—13 "lion an
ass.—14 "l?? a youth, lad.—15 ?jV! to go ; Hiph. to cause to go, i.e. to
carry.—16 H3 IV as far as there.—17 for, because, that. —18 Solomon.
—19 15 a son, in Constr. 1? (in a few instances 1? ) . Flu. .—
20 'T??? to reign.—22 after me.—23 my throne.—24 fi?? a house, in
constr. JT2._"thou (m) shalt build.—26 rn?3 a damsel.—27 HS
with ; with off. &c.—28 [some] days. —29 afterwards.—30 earth,
land (the same in Construction as when Absolute).— 33in [the] best
[part] of.—34 thy (m) father.—36 ns a brother. Plu. DTM ._
36 Goshen.—37 there.—38 Israel.—39 and shall I call 40 a woman.—
42 py\ in Kal to suck ; in Hiph. to cause to suck, i.e. to suckle.—43 the
Hebrew women.—4&"V.J a male child.—46"ibM to say.—47 Pharaoh.—
48 a fowl, bird (the same in construction as when Absolute).—
49QViB? heaven.—50bip voice, report.—52 D?S» b?3 lit. an owner
of wings, i.e. a winged thing.—53 in Hiph. to declare, tell.—
54 a word, thing, matter.—55 to awake.—66 and behold.—67 a
dream.—58 2t£P in Kal to be good, to be pleasing ; in Hiph. to cause
good, i.e. to do well, also to adorn, to attire.—591?3? an eye. Dual
* This Dative Case, giving a Reflective sense to the preceding
Verb, cannot be expressed in English.
Y 2
312 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

S?3,y .—so ttfrf~l a head. — 62 for IP?, the change being caused by the
Pause.—63 and they went forth.—64 Canaan.—65 "Of to remember.—
66 kindness (the same in Construction as when Absolute) ; with off.
^PC &c.—67 thy (f) youth.—68 love.—69 thy (f.) espousals.—
70 na-rp n wilderness.—72 S^T to sow.—73 to bless.—74 nlrP Je-
hovah.—75 l*hnH latter.—76 pt£*W1 first.—77 in not.—78 after.—79 the
young-men.—80 whether, or.—82 poor.—83 rich.—84 P^J to pour out.
_s»n*n spirit.—80 Jn.T seed; with aff. ''Tf-, &<s.—"W in Hiph.
to place.—88 the rods.—89 «B in Pi. to peel.—"in the troughs.—
92 whether to bend ?—33 lb?M a bulrush.—94 PW sack-cloth.—95
ashes.—96 2!P in Hiph. to spread out.—97 the nations.—98 ny m
/7?pA. to leave, place.—99 for the purpose of trying.—100 ¥ t^mi Kal to
know, in Niph. to be known, become known ; in Hiph. to cause to
know, instruct, teach, a/«o to punish.—102judgment.—103 he hath done,
executed.—104 in [the] work of.—106 1? a hand. Dual D^BS .—
loo t£7|T jw A'ipA. to be entangled, ensnared.—107 a wicked [man].—
108 and [by] My Name.—109 and by what?—110 now.—112 1 havefound.
—118 favour.—114 D? a people.— 115 to Mordecai.—116 to Esther.—
117 "^?^P a queen.—118 Jacob.—119 sojournings of. —120 his father.—
121 jn*1 in Niph. to be left.^-122 by himself.—133 P=N in Niph. to
wrestle.—tu a man.—126 until.— 1,6 [the] rising of.—187 "1027 morning-
dawn.— 188 D"JN a man.— ls9His mighty [deeds].—130 Jerusalem.—
133 her abominations.—133 irj5 a way. (After this word the relative
is here understood).—134 a multitude of.—13S years.—136 wisdom.
_«37 np^ to take 138 elders of.—139 "TO a city.—140 V"ip a thorn,
Flu. D^Sip .—1« the briers.— 143 men of. -146 Succoth.—146 lb? to
stand.—147 Joseph.—148 and she called.—148* 0# a name ; wrcYA
•»DBJ &c.—149 *\0* in Kal as well as Hiph. to add—160 another.—
151 a testimony.—152 He set it [for].—163 there is not.—144 V*ia to
take off.—,s>D^nbN God.—156 TT^B a king.—157 131 in Pi. to speak.
_158bb; in Kal and Hoph. to be able.—169 2h> to leave m his
father.—,M souls of.—183 a needy [man].—»« SUP ,„ #jpA. t0
save.—166 an assembly.—,663^.r? a sword. —167 JTOq a spear
I*8 Joshua.—'69 son of.—170 Nun.—172 ITiW in Pi. to serve.—173 Mo
ses.—174 n3D a booth.—176 they did.—176 from [the] days of.—
177 so.—'78 a servant ; with off. ^n?, &c—179 behold.—180 how ?
—182 g00d, —183 pleasant.—184 even [their dwelling] together.—185 one
[thing].—186 vtfB? to ask.—187 from.—188 t&p3 in Pi. to seek, require.
_189 aii._"» days-of.— 191 V*D life.
 LETTER XXXVI. 313

LETTER XXXVI.

The pleasure felt by your Grace, as you have con

descended to tell me, in tracing the etymology of The
Sacred Name of The MESSIAH cannot possibly have
been greater than is mine at hearing you express your
self in such a manner as you do; and when you consider
that the pleasure thus enjoyed by you is the fruit of a
few weeks' attention and perseverance, and that only a
very short time ago it would have been utterly im
possible for me to have led you step by step through
the contents of my preceding Letter, you will, I have no
doubt, agree with me in thinking that those are very
much to be pitied who, though of the deepest Piety, and
the most fervent Zeal in the cause of Religious Truth,
yet hold back from applying themselves to the study of
The Language of The Old Testament, either imagining
its difficulties to be too great, or considering themselves
too far advanced in life, for them to be able to master it.
Although it is perfectly true that the difference is very
great between being master of a language, and knowing
only something of it, yet far, very far, greater is the dif
ference between knowing something and knowing nothing
of it. With a little attention and a small sacrifice of
time, those who have the desire may gain sufficient
knowledge of Hebrew to enable them to judge for them
selves, and not be obliged, as though blindfolded, to
take for granted every thing that is told them with
regard to the true meaning of That Sacred Word, the
which to know, and truly understand, may well be
described as " The Whole Duty of man."
314 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The Conjugation of the Verb Dip to rise, stand,

stand up, annexed to this Letter, is to serve as a standard
for the Verbs VJ7 , at which we have now arrived ; that
is, of such verbs as have for their second radical a
quiescent 1 . I crave your Grace's attention to the
Emphasis given to the word quiescent, for when the
second radical is 1 not quiescent (i.e. 1 heard in pro
nunciation) the verb is Conjugated regularly like "IpS ,
as will appear by and by in this very Letter.
2. When treating of the Verbs , , and v'2 ,
we compared them with the Conjugation of "l'p£ in
order to see where they agreed, and where they dis
agreed with the Regular Conjugation ; it would be
idle to attempt to do this in the case of the verb Dip ,
which has not one single form resembling in the slightest
degree the corresponding one of "TpQ . I shall therefore
limit myself to sketching out its chief features, which
are :—
First, In some instances the second radical is altogether
dropped, as is the case in the Past Tense and
Present Participle of the Kal, in a few not
very frequent forms of the Past Tense of the
Hiph-el, and throughout the Hoph-al.
Secondly, Instead of the second radical being Shurik
(which is in fact a dot in the midst of the line
of Consonants blended with a 1 quiescent, —Let
ter viii. § 5 —), it is in someinstances made Full-
Chowlem, that is 1 quiescent after Chowlem ;
as is the case in the Infinitive, Participle, Im
perative, and Future of the Niph-dl, in a few
forms also of its Past Tense, and likewise
through the whole of the Pi-al, Pu-al, and
Hithpa-Al.
 LETTER XXXVI. 315

Thirdly, The 1 is changed into 1 , which either appears,

being made quiescent after a Cherik, or is
understood as quiescent after a Tsayre, received
by the first radical ; as is the case (with the
exception of a few not frequent forms), through
the whole of the Hiph-el.
Fourthly,—The most distinguishing feature of the Con
jugation Ti! ,—the third radical is doubled
throughout the Pi-dl, Pu-al, and Hithpa-dl
Voices, which is supposed to be done in order
to make up for the Characteristic Dagesh of
these Voices which the second radical, being
here quiescent, cannot receive.
3. Having thus taken a general survey of the nature
of these Verbs, we will now proceed to consider each of
the seven Voices separately.
KAL.
Infin. Absol. Dip , also Dip [Jerem. xliv. 29].

Infin. Constr. Dip, Dip?, &c.

PAST.
Third Persons.
D£ Sing. Masc.
npj? Sing. Fern.
IDj? Plu. Masc. and Fem.

Second Persons.
riDp Sing. Masc.
ripp Sing. Fem.
DflDp Plu. Masc.
l^Dp Plu. Fem.
316 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

First Persons.

V??P_ Sing.
WOP Plu.

Here we see the peculiar feature of the Third Persons

all taking Kawmets, and the Second and First Persons
all taking Pathach, under the first radical letter.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
D£ Sing. Masc.
HOj? Sing. Fem.
UVJ> Plu. Masc.
niD|5 Plu. Fem.

The Third Person Sing. Masc. of the Past has nothing

to distinguish it from the Sing. Masc. Participle, and
only the context therefore can decide the signification of
the word Dj? in any particular instance : it is not so in
the case of hpj5 ; for by observing the accents (which are
given here for the purpose of shewing the distinction
between the two forms), you will see that in the Third
Person Sing. Fem. of the Past the accent is on the Pen
ultimate syllable, but in the Sing. Fem. Participle, it is on
the Ultimate.

PARTICIPLE PAST.

Dip Sing. Masc.

HO'lp Sing. Fem.
D^p Plu. Masc.
niDIp Plu. Fem.
 LETTER XXXVI. 317

IMPERATIVE.
Dip Sing. Masc, with Paragogic PI ,

"•Dip Sing. Fem.

IDIp Plu. Masc.
n:pp Plu. Fem.
In the case of the form PIDIp too, the accent decides
whether it is the Sing. Fem. Participle Past, or the Second
Person Sing. masc. of the Imperative with Paragogic PI ;
the accent being ultimate in the former, and penultimate
in the latter.

FUTURE.

DipJ * 3 Sing. Masc.

Dipfi 3 Sing. Fem. & 2 Sing. Masc.

n3D)?n 3 & 2 Plu. Fem.

lEfipn 2 Plu. Masc.
&c, &c.

The verb. Tlti^ to return usually gives the Third Person

Sing. masc. of the Future Kal 31 £1^ ; we find, however,
the form 3Ji^ , as Eccles. xii. 7.

N1PH-AL.

INFINITIVE.
Dipri , Dipn? , &c.

n •orrfflj
sT. he will rest; ?^3J he will move ; when the third radical is
318 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.
Third Persons.
Dip3 Sing. Masc.
npip: Sing. Fem.
1Dip2 Plu. Masc. & Fem.

Second Persons.
fliClpJ Sing. Masc.
niDIp} Sing. Fem.
DniDipj Plu. Masc.
iniDlpJ Plu. Fem.

First Persons
V?iD1pJ Sing.
iMDipi Plu.

Here, too, we see the particular feature of the charac

teristic 2 of the Niph-al taking in the Third Persons
Kawmets, and in the Second and First Persons Shvah.

PARTICIPLE.
Dip3 Sing. Masc.
nnipj Sing. Fem.
D^pip^ Plu. Masc.
niDip^ Plu. Fem.

IMPERATIVE.

DipH 2 Sing. Masc.

^ip."I 2 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
 LETTER XXXVI. 319

FUTURE.
Dip} 3 Sing. Masc.
Dij?]? 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

PI-AL.

INFINITIVE.
DDlp, D&ip3, &c.

PAST.

DZDip 3 Sing. Masc.

HDBlp 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
DDipP Sing. Masc.
HDDipQ Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
D&ip 2 Sing. Masc.
""PPip 2 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
DQip^ 3 Sing. Masc.
DDiptf 3 Sing. Fem., & 2 Sing. Masc.
''PpipP 2 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
320 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PU-AL.
INFINITIVE.
DOip, DQip3, &c.
PAST.
DQlp 3 Sing. Masc.
HOpip 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
The Table annexed to this Letter will shew that it is
only in the Third Persons Singular masculine that there
is any difference in punctuation between the Past of the
Pu-al and that of the Pi-dl ; as for all the other Per
sons it can only be ascertained by the context whether
they be Pi-dl or Pu-al.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
DEipD Sing. Masc.
HOCripP Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
FUTURE.
UDip) 3 Sing. Masc.
DDipJj! 3 Sing. Fem., and 2 Sing. Masc.
^pip^l 2 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
Here, too, your Grace will perceive, by referring to
the Table annexed to this Letter, that it is only in those
forms in which the third radical {i.e., that one of the
doubled letters which stands to the right) has a vowel,
that the nature of the Conjugation is shown by the punc
tuation ; in those forms in which that letter has Shvah,
it can be ascertained only from the context.
 LETTER XXXVI. 321

HIPH-EL.
INFINITIVE.
Dp_n, D^rqi, &c.

PAST.
Third Persons.
D^pH Sing. Masc.
np^jpn Sing. Fern.
1D"j?n Plu. Masc, and Fern.

Second Persons.
niD^jpn Sing. Masc.
niD^n Sing. Fern.
DQl&pn Plu. Masc.
ini^jpH Plu. Fern.

First Persons.
"•jniD^pn sing.
ijiD^n Plu.

Here we see that the characteristic H of the Hiph-tl

too has one Punctuation in the Third Persons, and
another in the Second and First Persons ; in the former
having Tsayre, and in the latter a compound Shvah.
This is the general and most usual form ; there are,
however, Verbs which assume an altogether different
form in the Infin. Constr., and through the whole Past,
of the Hiph-el: as, for example, the Verb "112 to
break, frustrate, which gives,—

INFINITIVE.
lS>n, 15>?3, &c.
322 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.
3 Sing. Masc, also TW or ")£>n .
nngn 3 Sing. Fern.
r)"1Qn 2 Sing. Masc.
JTjan 2 Sing. Fein.
Vjn^ri 1 Sing.
&c, &c.

where the characteristic H of the Hiph-el has Tsayre in

all the Persons of the Past, as will be seen in the Table.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
D^J?JP Sing. Masc.
np^P Sing. Fem.
DW? Plu- Masc-
nlCpD Plu. Fem.

IMPERATIVE.
Dj?n 2 Sing. Masc.
"•P^pn 2 Sing. Fem.
ID^n 2 Plu. Masc.
njppn 2 Plu. Fem.

FUTURE.
3 Sing. Masc. gives HSJ .)
D^jpn 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

HOPH-lL.
INFINITIVE.
Dj?in, Dgin?, &c.
 LETTER XXXVI. 323

PAST.
DplH 3 Sing. Masc.
nCJJin 3 Sing. Fern.
&c, &c.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
Sing. Masc.
Sing. Fern.
&c.

FUTURE.
spy 3 Sing. Masc.
3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

On your Grace's comparing the Hoph-al of Dtp with

that of 2W) you will perceive that there is not the
slightest difference between them in any of the forms ;
so that in the Hoph-al Voice the Verbs VJ7 agree in
every particular with the Verbs v3 .

HITHPA-AL.
INFINITIVE.
opiprin, Dftip^n?, &c.

PAST.
DOipnn 3 Sing. Masc.
DDipip^n 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.
324 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
Djpipnp Sing. Masc.
nppipjpp Sing. Fern.
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
D^ipnn 2 Sing. Masc.
^pipipnn 2 Sing. Fern.
&c, ' &c.

FUTURE.
DOlpJV 3 Sing. Masc.
D£ip?fl 3 Sing. Fem.
&c, &c.

4. DIJ?^ , as we have seen, is the 3 Sing. Masc. of the

Future Kal, and, therefore, signifies he (or it m.) will stand
up, or rise ; the accent of course must be on the Ultimate
Syllable, as mentioned in my last Letter (§1). On the
1 Conversivum being prefixed, the accent is drawn back
to the Penultimate syllable, when of course the Shiirik
is changed into a short vowel, which is here Kawmets-
Chatuph, or Short-Kawmets, so that we then have Dj?^1 ,
signifying, and he did stand up, or rise.
5. D^, as stated above, is the 3 Sing. Masc. of the
Future Hiph-el, signifying therefore he (or it m.) will
cause to stand up, i.e., will raise, or establish; but here
when the accent is withdrawn from the Ultimate to the
Penultimate syllable by the 1 Conversivum, the Long-
Cherik is changed into Segol ; and consequently we
have then the form Dj?£L, signifying and he (or if m.) did
cause to stand up, i.e. , did raise, or establish.
6. So important will the two forms just considered
 LETTER XXXVI. 325

become when your Grace begins to read The Hebrew

Bible, that I must beg to illustrate them by another
example. The Verb 31^ to return, gives 3 Sing. Masc.
Fut. Kal 31 tf^ he (or it m.) will return, which, on taking
1 Conversivum, becomes 3£>;H [Gen. xxxvii. 29] and he did
return ; while the 3 Sing. Masc. Fut. Hiph. 3^ he (or
it m.) will cause to return, i.e., bring back, or restore, on
taking 1 Conversivum, becomes 3B£] [Gen. xiv. 16] and
he did cause to return, i.e., did bring back, or restore.
7. This difference in the punctuation of the Converted
Future Kal and Hiph. does not, however, exist in verbs
which have for their third radical any one of the letters
"1 P n ; these letters are so fond of the broad sound of the
Pathach that, on the withdrawal of the accent, they change
the long vowel into Pathach in both the Kal and Hiph-el;
e.g., ni3 to rest, makes the Future Kal nir he (or it m.)
will rest, which, on receiving 1 Conversivum, becomes
nyi [Exod. xx. 11] and He rested ; the Future Hiph-el
n\P he (or it m.) will cause to rest, also becoming njPI
[Josh. xxi. 42], and He caused (or gave) rest, on taking 1
Conversivum.
In like manner, the Verb HD to turn, depart, gives the
Future Kal "lip^ he (or it m.) will turn [Intransitively],
and with 1 Conversivum "IC^l [Judg. xiv. 8] and he
turned aside [Intransitively] ; the Hiph-el Future TD^
he (or it m.) will cause to turn, i.e., he will remove, also
giving with the 1 Conversivum "ID'H [Gen. viii. 13] and
he caused to turn, i.e., and he removed.
8. As in the Regular Conjugation there are Verbs
which, as we have seen (Letter xxx. § 19), take in the
Kal, some Tsayre, and some Chowlem, to the second
radical, so there are some of the Verbs 1 "V which take
Tsayre, and some which take Chowlem, to the first
z
326 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

radical in some parts of the Kal ; thus HiD to die,

gives,—
KAL.
PAST.
riD 3 Sing. Masc.
nnp 3 Sing. Fern.
2 Sing. Masc.
P\D 2 Sing. Fern.
^fliD 1 Sing.
&c, &c.
PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
r\D Sing. Masc.
Sing. Fern.
U>T\Q Plu. Masc.
nir\D Plu. Fern.
At the foot of the Table your Grace will find the
forms of the Past Tense Kal of this Verb in full, where
you will perceive that the third radical fi is dropped in
those forms which take the affixes '•fl , fl , Jjl , DJ1 , ]F)
(Letter xxx. $ 23).
9. The Verb t£H'3 to be ashamed, gives,—
KAL.
PAST.
ttfiia 3 Sing. Masc.
n^lil 3 Sing. Fem.
PlVs 2 Sing. Masc.
klip} 2 Sing. Fem.

2 Plu. Masc.
IfWi 2 Plu. Fem.
&c, &c,
as given at the foot of the Table, where it will be seen
 LETTER XXXVI. 327

that in all the forms the first radical has Chowlem, with
the exception of the Second Persons Plural Masc. and
Fern., where it has Short-Kawmets, because, since the
affixes Dtt and |fl always have the accent, there would
otherwise be a quiescent Shvah after a long vowel with
out the accent, which cannot be.
The most surprising feature, however, of the verb
is, that in the Future Kal the prefixed letters \ H 1 K
take always Tsayre ; thus, ££03.1 , t^'Ori , &c.
10. In the heading of the seventh Psalm we find " Shig-
" gaion of David, which ("1^) he sang, &c. ;" where, as ~lti>
looks precisely the same as Dj? , we might reasonably
suppose it to be the 3 Sing. Masc. Past Kal of the verb
TIG? :—and so in Prov. xxv. 20, we find, " As he that
" taketh away a garment in cold weather, &c, so is ")!^
" one (m) singing songs to a heavy heart : " where
looking precisely like Dj? the Sing. Masc. Participle
Present Kal, we might again be justified in supposing its
Infinitive to be Tlttf . But [Ps. lix. 17] we find " I
" will sing of Thy Power ; " where TttfK , agreeing in form
with D^jpst , would seem to be the 1 Sing. Fut. Hiph-el of
"ntt* , though it cannot here have a causative sense : this
however would be no source of embarrassment to the
scholar, since there are many verbs having the same sig
nification in Hiph. as in Kal. But [Exod. xv. 21] we
find nlJT7 Sing ye to Jehovah, where we are at a
loss what to say of the form ITI^ which looks neither
like Kal nor yet like Hiph-el, ; for had it been Kal, it
should have been V)Vt} agreeing with IDIp 2 Sing. Masc.
Imper. Kal ; and had it been Hiph-tl, it should have
been ITt^H agreeing with lO^H 2 Plu. Masc. Imper.
Hiph. Nor can it be supposed an anomaly, since it is a
form which occurs so very frequently. The opinions
z 2
328 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

therefore of the Hebrew Grammarians are divided upon

the subject. Some say that ITlp' stands for TT2>n and
is therefore of the Hiph-6l Voice ; so that the verb T)t£>
is, according to their opinion, used in the Kal Voice as
far as regards the Past Tense and the Present Participle,
and in the Hiph-Sl as far as regards the Imperative and
the Future ; while others say that the root actually is
Ttt> (Verbs of this kind being denominated by them
>JV , i.e. verbs having a quiescent ^ for their second
radical), so that in the Past Tense and the Present Par
ticiple Kal it drops, but in the Imperative and Future
retains, the quiescent s , just as the verb Dip does the
quiescent 1 .
Ambiguities of this sort are found in more than one
verb; for example, the forms ir3 understand ye (/».),
he will understand (forms which very frequently occur),
are said by some to be Hiph-kl forms of J13 , and by others
to be Kal forms of p3 (a Verb of the class denominated
by them VJJ ^nj , as just now observed).
Compared with such men as those are who embrace,
some of them one of these opinions, and some, the other,
I am too insignificant for my opinion in the matter to be
anything worth ; and indeed if I had an inclination to
adopt one of these views in preference to the other, I
should be unwilling to bias your Grace by laying it
before you : whenever therefore such verbs may occur in
the course of our reading, I shall always speak of them
as Doubtful.
11. There is another Class of Verbs the origin of
which, to me at least, seems doubtful. In Gen. xlv. 10 and
11, we find Joseph sending word to his father, " Thou
shalt dwell in the land of Goshen (V?v5»?Jfl)j and I will
nourish thee," &c. ; now here the affix \fl plainly shews
 LETTER XXXVI. 329

the form to be a Past Tense, which is converted into a

Future by the 1 prefixed. This is all we can say of it
with certainty ; but if the affix and prefix be taken
away, the body of the verb will doubtless strike your
Grace as one of a different form from any that has ap
peared in any of the Tables I have had the honour to
transmit to you ; nor will you find any form of this sort
in any of the Tables which I hope yet to lay before you.
Most Grammarians tell us that the root is 713 , which
dropping its second radical, i.e. the quiescent 1 , and
repeating its first and third radicals, gives as the Third
Person Singular Masculine of the Past h^hS a Voice to
which they give the name Pilpdl [ ],' i.e. a Voice
which, dropping the second radical, gives to the first
radical Short-Cherik, to the third radical, Shvah, then
again to the first radical repeated, Tsayre, and then
repeats the third radical, (3} ? } , Letter xxvii. § 5).
Kimchi indeed in his Lexicon gives this form under
the root ^13 , but as he mentions it again under the head
of the quadriliteral rodts, it is plain that he could not
make up his mind as to whether its root is 7^2 or b^hs ;
I beg leave therefore to follow the example of so great a
man, by in future considering such forms, whenever they
occur, as of a Doubtful root.
12. In Esther iv. 4 we read naSsn hnbnnm and the
queen was grieved (or more lit., grieved herself); here,
too, some Grammarians suppose the root to be 7in ,
which would give for the 3 Sing. Masc. Past the form
^n^nfirr in a Voice called by them Ilithpal-pdl
(^S'parin , or in numbers 3 1 3 l j-| n). Ben Zev is
however of opinion that the root is , so that only the
first radical ( H ) is doubled, and as to the other letters,
that the first 7 is the second, and the other the third
330 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

radical; if so, the Voice must be called ^9J/Snn (or

3 l 2 i[ft n ).
13. At the very opening of my remarks upon the
Verbs V V , I stated emphatically that in this Conjugation
those verbs only are included which have for their second
radical a 1 quiescent, observing that those Verbs whose
second radical is ^ not quiescent, but heard in pronuncia
tion, are Conjugated regularly like "7pS; I begleave to con
clude the subject by naming to you some of these latter.
Your Grace will perceive that they have in general
either their first or their third radical a guttural.
J/13 to expire. "IT# (Pi-dl) to blind.
inv (Pi-dl) to cry aloud. "llnT to be white.
I"HJJ (Pi-dl) to pervert. niy to cry.
wrong. ni"l to be at ease.
There are also some Verbs in which the second radical
is 1 heard in pronunciation, and these, too, are conju
gated like Regular Verbs; as to be an enemy to,
DJj? (Pi-dl) to confirm, Sec.
P.S. (a). When the ^ Conversivum is prefixed to the First Person
Singular of the Future (when of course Compensation only can be
made for the Dagesh, which the N cannot receive), it ceases to exercise
its influence on the accent, which remains therefore on the Ultimate
syllable ; so that WpN gives DljpNJ (comp. Letter xxxv. P.S. b).
P.S. (b). In one of my former Letters (xxvii. P.S.) I mentioned to
your Grace that it is sometimes more convenient to use the Infinitive
as the root of the Verb than the Third Person of the Past Tense. I
have done so perhaps more frequently than you would have expected
me to have done ; but I think that you will see in the case of this
Conjugation a good reason for naming as the root the Infinitive
rather than the Past, since in the former, Dip , all the three radicals
are seen ; whereas in the latter, D|7 > only two of them appear.
P.S. (c). The Sing. Fern. Participle Past Kal nplp is distinguished
(as seen above, § 3) from na^p } the 2 Sing. Masc. Imper. with n
 LETTER XXXVI. 331

Paragogic, by the former having the accent on the Ultimate, and the
latter having it on the Penultimate syllable. In like manner f
the 2 Sing. Masc. Imper. Kal, with H Paragogic of the Doubtful
Verb V12 or , is, by having its accent on the Penultimate syllable,
distinguished from the Noun ^"'^ understanding, which has the
accent on the Ultimate.
P.S. (d). In declining the Infin. Constr. J"fiD, orHitt, with D b 3 3 ,
I give the forms filD? f rflJ23 as found in Scripture ; however, as the
Noun death also gives in Construction, it is doubtful whether
the forms HID? , HTOS may not signify, in the passages where they
occur, in [the'] death of, like [the] death of.
P.S. (e). The Verb 3W"1 has in the Hiph-el two significations:—
the one is, to cause evil, that is, to do harm, and it then takes the forms,—
Past ?nn or 3nn 3 Sing. Masc, WEJ 3 Plu. ;
Fut. Y% or 3 Sing. Masc, W?4 3 Plu. Masc, &c.
the other signification is to make a loud noise, or to blow the trumpet,
and then, for the sake of being distinguished from the former, it
takes the forms,—
Past. »"nO 3 Sing. Masc, Wnn 3 Plu. ;
Fut. T~?l 3 Sing. Masc, 3 Plu. Masc, 8cc.
Thus are we told by Kimchi, Buxtorf, and Ben Zev ; a modern
Lexicographer gives the former signification, with the corresponding
forms, under the root 3731 . Those with whom he has greater weight
than the three authorities just mentioned may receive his opinion.
P.S. (f). Thereare some few Verbs which are decidedly quadriliteral :
as to gird, put on, of which we find the form b3~l?ip [ 1 Chron.
xv. 27] ; 0D"I3 to lay waste, of which we find the form n3pp"l?1
[Ps. lxxx. 14], and a few others.

Conjugation of the Verb dp to rise.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
Dip 01 Dip To rise.

Constructive.
Qlp ■ Rising.
332 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Declined with D 3 3
Dlp3 In rising.
Dlp3 As (or like) rising.
Dip*? For the purpose of rising.*
DIpP From rising.
PAST.
Dp(l)He (or it m.) rose.t
DQP She (or it/.) rose-
fi^R Thou (m.) didst rise.
£!7pp Thou (/.) didst rise.
I rose.
IDp They (m. and/.) rose.
D.HDp Ye (m.) rose,
j^jpj? Ye (/.) rose.
13 )pp We rose.
PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
Dp(2) One (m.) rising.
HP)? One (/.) rising.
D^Cp Plu. («•) rising.
niDj? Plu. (/) rising.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
Q!)p One (m.) risen.
Pipip One (/.) risen.
D^DIp Plu. (m.) risen.
niDip plu- (/•) risen-

IMPERATIVE.
Qi)p(3) Rise thou (m.)
ipip Rise thou (/.)
iDip Rise ye (m-)
njPj? Rise ye (/)

* Or, in order to rise, f Or, would (or might) have risen.

 LETTER XXXVI. 333

FUTURE.
DIp^W He (or it m.) will rise.*
Dlpfl She (or it /.) will rise.
Dlpfl Thou (to.) wilt rise.
^Ipfl Thou (/.) wilt rise.
DIpS I will rise.
IDIp^ They (to.) will rise.
rtiOpfl They (/.) will rise.
IDIpfl Ye (to.) will rise.
njlDj?f1 Ye (/.) will rise.
D1p3 We will rise.
(1). no he died ; <wa he was ashamed ; f» it (m.) shone, or was light :
2io it (m.) was good.
(2). nn one (m.) dying, or being dead; siia one (m.) being ashamed.
(3). With Paragogic n , npijj .
(4). rro> h»7Z res£ ; yo; Ae jct'W mow (Intrans.) ; Ae will be ashamed.
aiuS to return has the Future awlj he will return, generally ; but in a few
instances we find the form s&i; .
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must rise.

niph-Xl.
INFINITIVE.
Dlpn To be raised.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
Oipn? In being raised.
DipH3 As (or like) being raised.
Dipn^ For tne purpose of being raised.*
Dipn£? From being raised.
* Or, in order to be raised.
334 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PA8T.

Dip3 He (or it m.) was raised.*

nDipJ She (or it/.) was raised.
rnOipjl Thou (m.) wast raised.
niDlpJ Thou (/.) wast raised.
THDipj I was raised.
IQTpJ They (m. and/.) were raised.
DHiOlpJ Ye (m.) were raised.
IfliDlpJ Ye (/.) were raised.
IJIDIpJ We were raised.

PARTICIPLE.

Dip3 One (m.) being raised.

HDip3 One (/.) being raised.
O^DipJ Plu. (m.) being raised.
niDipJ Plu. (/•) being raised.

IMPERATIVE.

Dlpn Be thou (in.) raised.

">Dipn Be thou (/.) raised.
IDipH Be ye (m.) raised.
naDlpn Be ye(/.) raised.

* Or, would (or might) have been raised.

 LETTER XXXVI. 335

FUTURE.
Dip* He (or it m.) will be raised.*
Dips She (or it/J will be raised.
Dipn Thou fm.J wilt be raised.
Thou (f.) wilt be raised.
Dips I will be raised.
They (m.) will be raised.
They (f.) will be raised.
Ye (m.) will be raised.
Ye (f.) will be raised.
Dip? We will be raised.

• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, be raised.

PI-AL.

INFINITIVE.

DDIp To raise.

Declined with D b 3 3 .

D01p3 In raising.
DQip3 As (or like) raising.
DDlpV For the purpose of raising.^
DOipP From raising.

t Or, in order to raise.

 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

He (or it m.) raised.*

She (or it/.) raised.
ripaip Thou (m.) raisedst.
i?b»ip Thou (/.) raisedst
^DDip I raised.
They (m. and/.) raised.
Df»©Dlp Ye (m.) raised.
Ye (/.) raised.
We raised.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

One (m.) raising.

nzppipDi
One (/.) raising.
or mpeipps
Plu. (m.) raising.
niDpipb Plu. (/.) raising.

IMPERATIVE.

QDip Raise thou (to.)

">!?Pip Raise thou (/.)
IDDlp Raise ye (m.)
i-US&rip Raise ye (/.)

Or, would (or might) have raised.

 LETTER XXXVI.

FUTURE.

He (or it m.) will raise.'

DDipri She (or it /.) will raise.
D&ipJp Thou (to,) wilt raise.
^Bipii Thou (/.) wilt raise.
D&ipS I will raise.
IDDip^ They (m.) will raise.
njzp&ip? They (/.) will raise.
ibpipn Ye (m.) will raise.
Ye (/.) will raise.
We will raise.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must raise.

PU-AL.

INFINITIVE.

DDip To be raised.

Declined with D 7 2 2 .

DDTp3 In being raised.

DD1p3 As (or like) being raised.
For the purpose of being raised, f
DDIpZJ From being raised.

t Or, in order to be raised.

338 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.
DDlp He (or it m.) was raised.*
HDPip She (or it /.) was raised.
riD Dip (Thou m.) wast raised.
J^£ipip Thou (/.) wast raised.
^DDip I was raised.
IDDIP They (w. and /.) were raised.
DHPDip Ye (m.) were raised.
jfipQip Ye (/•) were raised-
UPPip We were raised.

PARTICIPLE PAST,
DDipD One (m.) raised.
HDDip9)
or nppippj 0ne (/0 raised-
D^PDipp Plu. (m.) raised.
m'DDipP Plu. (/.) raised.

FUTURE.

DD^p^ He (or it m.) will be raised,f

DDIp]^ She (or it /.) will be raised.
DDlpP Thou (m.) wilt be raised.
SJP Di PF\ Thou (/.) wilt be raised.
DPipi? I will be raised.
IDPip? They (m.) will be raised.
njPPip^i They (/.) will be raised.
IDPipri Ye (»n.) will be raised.
rnPPiptf Ye (/.) will be raised.
DDip3 We will be raised.

* Or, would (or might) have been raised.

t Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be raised.
 LETTER XXXVI. 339

HLPH-EL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
Dj?n To eause to stand up, i.e., to raise, to establish.

Constructive.
D^pnC) Causing to stand up.

Declined with 0^23.

D^pHill In causing to stand up.
D^jpnj As (or like) causing to stand up.
D^pn? -F°r purpose of causing to stand up.*
D^pHJ? From causing to stand up.

PAST.
0*P£M) He (or it m.) caused to stand up.f
HD^pn She (or it /.) caused to stand up.
niD^pn Thou (m.) causedst to stand up.
TllD^pn Thou (/.) causedst to stand up.
VliD^PD I caused to stand up.
1 D^p fj They (m. and/.) caused to stand up.
DplD^pH Ye (m.) caused to stand up.
]HiD^pn Ye (/.) caused to stand up.
13iD,pn We caused to stand up.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
D^pjg One (m.) causing to stand up.
nD^pJp One (/.) causing to stand up.
D^D^pQ Plu- (»*•) causing to stand up.
niD^pQ Plu- (/•) causing to stand up.
* Or, in order to cause to stand up.
f Or would (or might) have caused to stand up.
340 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.

Cp.n Cause thou (m.) to stand up.

^P^pn Cause thou (/.) to stand up.
IQ^pn Cause ye (m.) to stand up.
ri3Jpj?n Cause ye (/.) to stand up.

FUTURE.

D^p1'3' He (or it m.) will cause to stand up.*

D^pJI She (or it /.) will cause to stand up.
D^pn Thou (m.) wilt cause to stand up.
Vp^pn Thou (/.) wilt cause to stand up.
D^pX I will cause to stand up.
IH^p^ They (m.) will cause to stand up.
n3£ppn They (/.) will cause to stand up.
ID^pfi Ye (m.) will cause to stand up.
n^Opn Ye (/.) will cause to stand up.
D^p3 We will cause to stand up.

(1). ite to break, to frustrate, gives "cn; and with obii , isrfj , &c.
(2). lie gives,—
15? (W, or Tpn), men, rpcn wen;
«n, Dn-iort, J?ncn,
(3). lis gives -B< , -en , &c.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to stand
 LETTER XXXVI.

HOPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Dpin To be caused to stand up.

Declined with D b 3 3 .
Dj5li"0 In being caused to stand up.
Dpin3 . As (or like) being caused to stand up.
For the purpose of being caused to stand
DpIHiQ From being caused to stand up.

PAST.
Dj?tn He (or it to.) was caused to stand up.f
nDj?in She (or it/.) was caused to stand up.
riZpplH Thou (to.) wast caused to stand up.
r^pin Thou (/.) wast caused to stand up.
^flDpin I was caused to stand up,
IDpin They (m. and /.) were caused to stand up.
D£1£Ppin Ye (to.) were caused to stand up.
IPPpH"! Ye (/.) were caused to stand up.
UDpin We were caused to stand up.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
DpIZD One (m.) caused to stand up.
npplJD One (/.) caused to stand up.
D^ZpplQ Plu. (to.) caused to stand up.
niOj^lD Pin- (/•) caused to stand up.
* Or, in order to be caused to stand up.
t Or, would (or might) have been caused to stand up.
A A
342 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.

DpV He (or it m.) will be caused to stand up.*

Dplfl She (or it /.) will be caused to stand up.
Dpin Thou (to.) wilt be caused to stand up.
^plfl Thou (/.) wilt be caused to stand up.
DpIN I will be caused to stand up.
IDpT They {in.) will be caused to stand up.
HJCpin They (/.) will be caused to stand up.
IDplfl Ye (m.) will be caused to stand up.
HJDpin Ye (/.) will be caused to stand up.
Dp13 We will be caused to stand up.

Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to stand up.

HITHPA-AL.
INFINITIVE.
DEHprVl To raise oneself up, to set oneself up.

Declined with D b 3 3 .
DDIpJlHS In raising oneself up.
DlO'ip.nrO As (or like) raising oneself up.
D/^iprin'? For the purpose of raising oneself up.t
DOip^nD From raising oneself up.

f Or, in order to raise oneself up.

 LETTER XXXVI.

PAST.

Djpiprin He (or it m.) raised himself up.*

HODipnn She (or it /.) raised herself up.
flODiprin Thou (m.) raisedst thyself up.
flDDiprin Thou (/.) raisedst thyself up.
Q 01 pT\ p"t I raised myself up.
IDDlpr^n They (m. and/.) raised themselves up.
DriZDQTprin Ye (m.) raised yourselves up.
]F\DDipT}il Ye (/.) raised yourselves up.
IJDDipJin We raised ourselves up.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

DDlpnp One (m.) raising himself up.

^npplpnoj One (/Ora.smg herself up.

D^P^ipnP Phi. (»».) raising themselves up.

JliD^ipniP Plu- (/•) raising themselves up.

IMPERATIVE.

DDiptfH Raise thou (m.) thyself up.

^ppiprin Raise thou (/.) thyself up.
Raise ye (m.) yourselves up.
rnp©ipfln Raise ye (/.) yourselves up.

f Or, would (or might) have raised himself up.

A A 2
344 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
DOTpfV He (or it m.) will raise himself up.*
D£3ipriri She (or it /.) will raise herself up.
E^ipfW Thou (m.) wilt raise thyself up.
"•iPOipnfl Thou (/.) wilt raise thyself up.
DDipHK I will raise myself up.
IQ^ipn? They (to.) will raise themselves up.
njpQipn^ They (/.) will raise themselves up.
1!2iQipnf1 Ye (to.) will raise yourselves up.
njQfjiplijI Ye (/.) will raise yourselves up.
DDipri3 We will raise ourselves up.

• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must raise himself up.

HiD to die, gives in the I*/T3 to be ashamed, gives

Kal — the Kal,—

INFINITIVE. INFINITIVE.

Absolute. Absolute.
B>13
&c.
Constructive.
m'D or ma

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
niD3
niD3
 LETTER XXXVI. 345

PAST. PAST.
T)D 3 Sing, (m.)
#13 3 Sing, (m.)
nnp 3 sing. (/.) nt£n£ 3 Sing. (/.)
riD 2 Sing, (to.) jn^3 2 Sing, (to.)
tfD 2 Sing. (/.)
iyp3 2Sing.(/.)
I^O 1 Sing.
VH^S 1 Sing.
3 Plu. (m. and/)
Itf13 3 Plu. (to. and/.)
2Plu.(m.)
Dfit£>3 2 Plu. (to.)
lino 2 piu. (/.)
]'r\^2 2 Plu. (/.)
13170 lPlu.
iVi lPlu.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT. PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

TV2 Sing, (m.) ttM3 Sing, (to.)

nrjD Sing. (/.) Sing. (/.)
DTIB Plu. (m.) D^i3 Plu. (to.)
rrino piu. (/) Plu. (/)

IMPERATIVE. IMPERATIVE.
ma 2 Sing- («■) 2 Sing, (to.)
&c, &c, like Dip • 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.
FUTURE, FUTURE.
1-)!)^ 3 Sing, (to.); in pause ]"| hi ; BM31 3 Sing, (to.)
JT AT
with 1 Conversivum TiT"> &>i3fl 3 Sing. (/.)
and in pause njb'l • ££>T3n 2 Sing, (to.)
A T- 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c, like Qlp .
j^i3S 1 Sing.
1t2>i3i 3 Plu. (to.)
3 Plu. (/)
2 Plu. (to.)
n;ti'i3n 2 Plu. (/.)
T tyi3j
1 Plu.
346 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

ON TAKING P088ESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. Dip gives,—

^Dlp My rising.
?|Q1P Thy (m.) rising.
■5J01P Thy (/.) rising.
&c, &c.

The Infin. Constr. JT)D gives,—

"THQ My dying.
1^10 Thy (m.) dying.
TJOID Thy (/.) dying.
&c, &c.

EXERCISE XXVII.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

G^* For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. §. 2.

nam
.... j'ntttoa
.. . 'to-ii^a
.. T . . . 'my»- 'iraa
.T 'dpiT .
18 12 11L 10 • 8 7>i
na a« )3 : rasp ds] sf?S7« npj?

"rrwi
v: « S31
tt 'Va
t : "nnbna
t -: - 1W
t - 14ns«a
t • "nip
jt't
24 1 23 . t 22 . I I 20
82 t SO 29 28 . 27 26 25
: ran d# ats^ aw : ;nn.n:» a$n
34 28 28 3S I 28 2B
:ia nmai TOTW ^aittf w
29 98 87 86 95 » 20
vow
• : • ru^T
r : -t nrm t- : Tax
» * t rra mznatt:- ^nv
* ;
: "^ip "mynttf nap]? "rri35Kt£> 'Wj : 'wi
 LETTER XXXVI. 347

"»3 noipa : "i? "nnin1? Dips "rhb "nivn

3"i#3 on? o^pa ^32 : Tjtn naaiD*n
nate "oipon 71* ogp :?p03 "on^n^
10 f 59 58 . 1 67 ,/ | 56
^a? .pttno rnrn Djrn : DWgn 17 -ion
63 62 45 f I 60 1 4f
TO IPS! HT7 TU/3 Dpm : 7*nti"
S 66 b 65 94 1 36 I
70 69; 28 68 . f 67 28
tfa-in
■•. : t 73 t n«v aawv /t- : man- 7» pian i •■ : atvn
t ;t-
74 28 70 . 73 72 8
id*i
-jt- : an^n * " wan *■- : vna
'T 017 v djt
-:
78 . 74 77 76 t 75 I
n« ru nD"i
- /t- : nn»n •■ : - t rnao
vv - n» *• nlirn : •
83 82 . '64 i 60 79
50 T 29 87 f , I 56 85 ; 84 t
>nu7i
"*r : aanm
t o^tthT?
•- t -loant tnvn■ : - vok70
t t : -
1■uriDTprn : 1 Dpips
. 90 mma"irn 89 n^jan 68 rnvn
1 96 a , 85 b 94 D3 92
,<ppip?0!) "qjk j/tfna vp : u^m vina n»
99 1 1 98 97i
100 58 , 92 100 100 92
T?n mm : rrna nan : -lan ^m-ia
103/ . 83 f 100 102 83
106 105 100 , 104 100
: d) ?i$a rnma nrm : inmn mgn
4; . 10 108 109 108 69» . 107
7^n^ ^a rnpppi d^VP naj?p 73 non
107 65 111 t 110 109 107 j
no ^3 o^it^ari ikti : nnx no >*7
65 lie , 115 111 113 . 112
>3 nitfaa riKva \mi : ipri oniaa
t 120 119 . 119 118. 117 107
v nan : ]a iza^' *npm nno
125 124 . 107 128 122 10
^pa-rn ia P33« nno p» oki o^a
109 20 107 127 t 107 126
130 107 107 . 129 j 128 65
jnjp\ : mon mo ispp ^aa era vg
58 , 135 . 134 . 133 132 107
mm «\an : naio nzpfcqi on-ias no>i
 348 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
118 I 1ST » 85 C 107 b 107 i90.
173*1 r *" : njn *T T yah T T nninn" 1 : nfri |T- 723TT ri8
1« I0T . 142 I 142 140 , 189 »
: inns nniDp 173 Kfctt] irov '•327
145 Mr , . 10T 1*7 144
ran iniD3 nrcpn -ltfg trnpn i\mi
147 1*7 14« 187
opn^ T t. nnom T „ .. . : vna t- : iron • •• ntpais
v -: ••
1M 20 1*7 14t 148
: WW 3$na *npni : -rn8 e^83 -njn
156 187 144i 184 158 f 152
Kim mp* ■t 7Km "T-: 3nnn v v •• B7oant T* " mmtt :
187 117 . t 187 1M 184 153 t
nci v/r- : ^b^7» t v: rcD"1 • t Kin"1■■ :nnD v v *■ D7D3ni
t : * - :
148 188 188 128
npn : t^8 n^pni D^bttf sinn ova
lilt 12 . 107 .t 180 128 107 *
iv. nia« mpv 87 : myj? ^a mpn
148 , IS 162; 107 .i 10 10
ann ma8 7j/ inp^ 87 o^ai d\o
158 J 184 122 107 168 ,
n8 to7pp t^8 D8 : inov i8c?n3
187 f 107 188 165 ft 116
U?P7 : npia + nrw nnp nT?n ^33
65 172 r B 168 168 168
*3 *np733 oai : n&bi natri
168 176 .f 175 174 173
t^T nny t - 8? : mj/a
t ^: nam - :v vmfeo t t
89! 168 179 178 176 .1 177 .
73 1^3"! : mim V3a ring 87i: 3j?j£
IBS t 148 184 . IBS . 182/ 180
: inw D^agm ">i8 -ij?an : 7dq n3u
1 90 188 65 188 184 , 65 187 186
^PJtfB *3 ^ 1"1» ^3 83 18"l
i 58 . 194 . 198 152 192
Djtyv mm t : tvEf t "itf83
v -: - mm tt : : mn v- E>3n
- :
194 . 197 196 f 195 *
]3 D3n8 niann7i D3n8 a^n?
1W , i 198 J i 58
: Dpn8 Tptfn7i D3n« T38n? DS^jtj mm
194 147 194 87 t 200 »
!W : ,>P#3 sl?tt>fcn DW1T3 ^731
205 . 204 t 1 208 208 200 ;
: Dtp ^n8 ^7???1 • f# frji
207 206 204; ;
1T3:i : D3SD D81 03^8 73738 ">338
2|S 212 . 210 . 209 ; 208; t t
^ria : n8p n37pn 7n7nnrn n?
216 , 215 .; 214 130 50
: ®$wn t : • nun: 87 vnttf•- : una tt ' t
 LETTER XXXVI. 349
219 218 217 96 , 96
wfeffl awn is-pi : fjk m» wtn
222 20 223; 222 220
Dip)] : TO D"3j?l nW n8
228 f 57 . 58 . 222 22$ 224
1711 : ni.T lODTI : D^")3
228 118 . . 222 . 227 Ml
: nrv t: - iDty: noonai
t : : ^8
• • mrpb
t -
• Kibbuts here supplants Shurik. (Letter xxx. § 21.)
1 rap to rise, to arise, to stand up ; in Hiph., to cause to stand up,
i.e., to raise, establish ; in Hithp., to raise oneself up (against one).—
2 a prophet. —3 again, any-more.—4bH"ltjP. Israel.—5H^a Moses.—
6 njJil behold.—7 naby a sheaf.—8 DJ also.—9^ (conjugated like
Verbs 3'Q) in Niph., to stand up ; in Hiph., to set up, to place.—10 7?
a son ; Plu. raja sons, or children.— n baa Pi., to dishonour, vilify.
—12 2K a father ; Plu. HhN .—13 a daughter.—14 DM a mother ; with
aff., ^ISS , &c.—15 a bride, a daughter-in-law.—16 against her mother-
in-law.—17 ? >a to move.—18 TO to wander.— 19 shalt thou (m.) be.—
20 V"?M earth, or land.—22 nhs to open.—23 TiT a friend, a love.—
24seven._25 nattf a year ; Plu. D^attf .—™ famine.—27 after them (f.).
28 to return.—29 3&T to sit, abide, dwell—30 with.—32 ?lb» a king.
—33 O Shulammith.—34 and we will look, or that we may look —35 a
widow.—36 f"l?2 a house, a household ; in Constr., ^3 , which stands
here for fT33._ 37 thy (f.) father.—38?'^ to know.—39 H^S a
woman; Plu. D^?.—M Plu. Fern, at ease.—42?btt? to hear.—
«bip a voice. — 44 [in] half of, i.e., in the midst of.—45 night.—
46 for the purpose of giving praise.—47 for Tb , on account of the
Pause.—48 now.—49 and I will go round.—50 a city ; Plu. CIS .
—52 from [the] midst of.—63 a brother ; Plu. ranN ._*< -fy to go.
55Dip» a place.—66 IBS to say.—67 God.—68 Jehovah.—
svyvji in Hiph. to save. —60 while yet [it was].—C27na to give.—
63 food.—64 "|3^ a word, thing, matter.—65 for, because, that (Con-
j unct.) — 66 righteous. — 67 Reuben. —68 ~ii3 a pit.—69 all.—70 tt?3"]
substance.—72 Lot.—73 his brother.—n"l:lD to turn (Intrans.) ; in
Hiph. to cause to turn, i.e., to remove. —75 for the purpose of seeing.
—76 [the] carcase of.—77 n^lH a lion.—78 Noah.—79 cover, [the] co-
vering-of.—80 nan an ark.—82 "T3? a servant ; with aff. , &c._
83712? counsel; in Constr. HSE .—84?TNb» a messenger.—86 aba? to be
complete; in Hiph. to complete, establish.—wB}bo£rP Jerusalem.—
88 Judah.—89 they (f.) shall be built.—90 and its (f.) desolate [places].
350 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

—92 n,"l21 a covenant 93 with you (m).—94 lit. he shall be, i.e., let be.
—95 yan wicked [man]. 90 D^N to be an enemy to.—97b-137 an iniquitous
[man].—98 only.—"lOttf to keep, guard.—100 ife in Hiph. to break,
frustrate.—102 [the] heathen.— 103 Ahithophel.—104rnin a law.—105 by
Thy strength.—100 [the] sea.—107 HID to die ; in Pi. to slay ; Hiph. to
cause to die, i.e., to put to death.—108 napJ? cattle. —109 Egypt.—109*one.
—110 and they saw.—lnviz., the Philistines (saw).—llaT)33 a mighty
man, hero.—113 DM to flee.—114 and it was, i.e., and it came to pass.—
ll6on the going forth of.—"r't^P3soul, life; with off. my soul (also
myself), &c.—117 and (or rather, that) she called.—n« Dtp a name;
with off. "'Dtp, &c.—ll9,3lN ]2 Ben-oni (i.e., son of my sorrow).—
120 DtP to give (Letter xxxiv. P.S. b).—122 CN if.—'23 not.— 124 lest.—
125 it (£) should overtake me.—12fi viz., the evil (should overtake me).
—m would that.—128 Di* a day (the same in Construct.) ; Plu. .
_i»bbH to eat.—130 ?ia to expire.—132 Abraham.—133 na% old-
age 134 good.—135 iba to smite.—,3f' Nabal 1S7 evil.—138 bb? to
fall.—"9 before.—140 Jonathan.—148 O^p Nfefo lit. [one (m.)] bearing
arms, i.e., an armour-bearer.—143 after him.— 144 and they were.—
145 many (whenfollowed by D , more).—146 in his life.—147 DV people.—
148 t£TN a man, sometimes [each] man. Plu. D'ttfat* .—>« one '*> thy
(f.) root.—152 and it shall be [that].—153 Dbn in Niph. to escape ; in
Pi. to deliver.— 154 =^.0 a sword.—155 Hazael.—"6 Jehu.—157 Elisha.—
156 eighty.— 159 and five.—lm harvest.—168 on account of.—163 because of
his [own] sin.—164 thou (m.) art not. — 16S lit. the night, i.e. to-night.—
166 to-morrow.—167 in order that.—168 Tj| to remember.—169 ttfia to be
ashamed.—172 Db3 in Niph. to be confounded. —173 1 have borne.—
w HS-in reproach.—175 my youth.—176 now.—177 Jacob.—178 DS3S a
Plural noun signifying countenance. — 179 Tin to be white, pale.—
iso ~|hiy to serve, worship.—162 a carved image.—183 the morning. — 184 TIN
to be light, to shine.—186 nbtp to send, send away. —186 see ye (m.)—
iw now.—196 V.V an eye. Dual D^y ._>» D$D to taste.—'"a little.
—198 honey.—193 just as.—m &P or to rejoice.—195 DDJ m Kal
to be good ; in Hiph. to do good to.—196 and to multiply.—197 so.—
i* lbs to perish.—199 fDttf in Hiph. to destroy.—200^13 or V* to be
glad.—408 1? ''I? for ever and ever.—204 VlS 0r bsbsto sustain,
nourish.—205 there.—206 flD little ones.—207 133 i„ to tell.—
208 or V?n to be grieved.—209n3b:D a queen.—210 very, ex
ceedingly.—818 a priest. Plu. DMH3 ._»» ),?T an old man, an
elder. Plu. DMpT ._814 [The] Almighty.—2,5 H?.? Pi. to pervert.—
 LETTER XXXYI. 351

216justice.—217 and they (m ) increased.—218 viz., the waters (increased).

—819 and they bore up. —220 the ark.—222 OT1 in Kal to be high, to rise ;
in Pi. to extol; in Hiph. to cause to be high, to exalt.—223 from upon,
i.e. above.—224 O^N"! some noble animal the nature of which is not
exactly hnown to us, generally translated a unicorn.—226 my horn.—
aae Vl2 in Kal to be great ; in Pi. to magnify, attribute greatness.—
227 with me.—228 together.
352 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XXXVII.

Your Grace condescends to ask me, Must the 7 in the

Infinitive Kal of the Verbs V'JJ always have Kawmets as
given in the Table in Dip1?, —or may it sometimes take
Shvah, as in the Verbs V'D we may have ri^t^V some
times instead of rQfc^ • —I ara n°t prepared to say that
in the whole Hebrew Bible there may not occur a form
corresponding to Op^ ; but this I can say, that should
a few such forms be found, they ought to be considered
rather as anomalies, and that the legitimate point of the
7 is exclusively Kawmets. I am, however, very glad
to find your Grace observing this peculiar punctu
ation of the 7 , which goes a great way towards
establishing the truth of Ben Zevs remark, mentioned
in an earlier Letter (xxxi. § 1), that the prefixes 7 2 2
have in the Infinitive Kal an independent and original
punctuation of their own.
2. The Verbs which will form the subject of my
present Letter are those termed N"7 , that is, those whose
third radical is X ; of these S¥D to find, is the Verb
selected as a standard, the Conjugation of which I beg
to annex.
3. The chief features of this Conjugation are that,
First, Wherever the third radical of *FpS has Shvah
(expressed or understood), the third radical ( K here)
is quiescent after a vowel. Secondly, as the X prefers
being quiescent after Kawmets or Tsayre, the Vowel
attached to the second radical, if not already one of these
two, is mostly changed into one of them. And, Thirdly,
 LETTER XXXVII. 353

in a few instances only the third radical ( X ) is

quiescent after Chowlem, Shtirik, Long-Cherik, or
Segol.
4. After having taken this brief, comprehensive view,
let us now descend to the examination of particulars by
comparing the Conjugation of N¥D with that of "TpS .

KAL.
IpS gives,— while tfVD gives,—
Infin. Abs. Tp2 to
Constr. I'pi , , &c. to , to} , &c.

This is the only instance in this Conjugation in which

X is quiescent after Chowlem.

PAST.

TO T T

rnpa
T T
&c. &C.

We here see that in each instance where the second

radical in the Past of "Tj?2> has Pathach, that of N2fiD has
Kawmets.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
fpi> to
rnpfc
&c. &c.
Before proceeding, I beg to observe that instead of
354 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

riSVfo (corresponding to the form J"nj?£) we find

[2' Sam. xviii. 22] nSVfa and [Cant. viii. 10] myiD .

PARTICIPLE PAST.
Tips T
&c. &C.
This is the only instance in this Conjugation where N
is quiescent after Shurik.

IMPERATIVE.

»V9
t :

We here see Chowlem changed, in the Second Person

Sing. Masc, into Kawmets, and in the Second Person
Plu. Fern, into Segol.

FUTURE.

T &c.
&c.

On examining all the forms of the Future, as given in

the Table annexed to this Letter, your Grace will observe
that in all instances where the second radical in the
Future of *1p£ has Chowlem, that of N2fD has Kawmets,
except in the Third and Second Persons Plu. Fem.,
where the Chowlem is changed into Segol.
 LETTER XXXVII. 355

You will also perceive that the second radical of NVO

takes Segol in the 2 Plu. Fern. Imper. of those Voices
which have an Imperative, and in the 3 and 2 Plu. Fem.
Future of all the Voices.

NIPH-AL.

INFINITIVE.

&c. &c.

PAST.

&c. &c.

On comparing all the forms of the Past, as given

fully in the Table, with those of the Regular Verb, your
Grace will perceive that the Pathach under the second
radical in the Regular Conjugation is changed into
Kawmets only in the 3 Sing. Masc, but in all the other
Persons into Tsayre.

PARTICIPLE.

ay?}
T T
&c. &c.
356 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.

FUTURE.

T &c. T &c.

PI-AL.

INFINITIVE.

&c. &c.'

PAST.

n*Tj?9

&c. &c.

On referring to the full Table, your Grace will observe

that in every Person where the second radical of the Re
gular Verb has in the Past Tense Pathach, it is changed
here into Tsayre.
 LETTER XXXVII. 357

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

T&c.
&c.

IMPERATIVE.
K¥9

FUTURE.

TV-:
&c. &c.

It will appear from the Table hereto annexed, that

this Tense of S¥£ differs only from that of IpS (so far
as Punctuation is concerned) in that the second radical
of the 3 and 2 Plural Fern, has Segol instead of Tsayre.

PU-AL.
INFINITIVE.

&c. &c.

We see here the Pathach of the second radical

changed into Kawmets.
B B
358 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

N¥9

&c. &c.

The ftill Table will show that the Pathach of the

second radical in the Regular Verb which in the 3 Sing.
Masc. of this Tense of N¥D is changed into Kawmets, is
in all the other Persons changed into Tsayre.

PARTICIPLE.

T&c. TT XT
&c.

FUTURE.

TO
t x :

T !&c.'
&c.

It will be seen by the full Table that in this Tense the

Pathach of the second radical of "TpS is here made Segol
only in the Second and Third Persons Plural Fern., but
that in all the other Persons it is made Kawmets.
 LETTER XXXVII. 35!)

HEPH-EL.
INFINITIVE.

&c." &c.

PAST.

T &c. T &c.

It will be seen from the Table annexed hereto, that in

this Tense of the second radical has Tsayre in the
forms corresponding to those forms of "Tj?S in which the
second radical has Pathach.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
wan
Trypan
T&c. T&c.

IMPERATIVE.

• > • • •

B B 2
360 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
TP?:

T&c.
&c.
It will be seen from the full Table that the only
change, as far as regards Punctuation, in this Tense, is
that in the 3 and 2 Plural Fem. the Tsayre of the second
radical of "Tp^ is here made Segol.

HOPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
np_s>n
rpan
&c. &c.

Here we see the Pathach of the second radical of the

Kegular Verb changed into Kawmets.

PAST.
"TP?0
'"Hi?21? n«vpn
rnpbn
&c.
It will be apparent from the full Table that in those
forms of this Tense in which the second radical of has
Pathach, this Pathach is changed into Tsayre, in all
the Persons except the 3 Sing. Masc, where it is made
Kawmets.
 LETTER XXXVII. 361

PARTICIPLE.
TOP
"TRW? TT : T
&c. &c.

FUTURE.

t : t

T&c! &c.T

The Table shows that the Pathach of the second

radical of "Tj?S is, in this Tense, always changed into
Kawmets, with the exception only of the Third and
Second Persons Plu. Fem., where it is changed into Segol.

HITHPA-AL.
INFINITIVE.

&c. &c.'

PAST.

&c. &c.
It will be seen by the Table that in this Tense,
the second radical of has Tsayre wherever that of
has Pathach.
3G2 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

T&c.' T &c.

IMPERATIVE.

nnpann
t :'*■* " : •

FUTURE.

T ' &c.

As far as Punctuation goes, the only change in this

Tense, as will be perceived from the Table, is that
in the 3 and 2 Plu. Fem., the Tsayre of the second radi
cal of "Tj'S is here made Segol.
5. Before dismissing this general survey, permit me,
my Lady Duchess, to call your attention to this im
portant circumstance, that in forms in which the third
radical has no vowel, and in which the Punctuation
even is precisely the same for the corresponding forms
of *Tj?S and 8¥O —as for instance, and N¥£ ;—
"!j?S and TJg^ and &c.;—there is still
this difference which must not be lost sight of, viz.,
that in every such instance the third radical of the
Regular Conjugation has Shvah understood beneath it,
 LETTER XXXVII. 363

while the X here is quiescent, and, therefore, has no

JShvah understood beneath it.
6. Just as in the Regular Verbs we have seen
(Letter xxx. § 19) that some Verbs take in the
3 Sing. Masc. Past of the Kal (considered as the root)
Tsayre under the second radical, and are therefore said
to be of the form ^3 ; so also in this Conjugation some
Verbs have Tsayre under the second radical of the Past
Kal ; as, for instance, he was thirsty, N^/Sp he was
full, ox complete, W2tD, he was unclean, KJfe' he hated, &c.
7. The Present Participle of. the Kal in the first
named of these Verbs is,—

K£¥ Sing- Masc-

nx^y Sing. Fem.
D^py Plu. Masc.
rriSEV Plu. Fern.

Such also will be the forms of the Present Participles

of the other Verbs here mentioned, with the exception
of NJjy , of which the Participle Present is, —

HIV Sing. Masc.

Sing. Fem.
U*ijto Plu. Masc.
ni»5fe' Plu. Fem.

Its Past Tense is, however,—

KJfcr 3 Sing, (m.)
3 Sing. (/.)
nx'lh 2 Sing, (m.)
nxill? 2 Sing. (/)
&c. &c.
364 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

8. In conclusion, I beg to mention that of the Verb

S^p , we find the Infin. Constr. nxVp , and of
once nfaty .

P.S. (a). On comparing the Second Person Plu. Fern, of the

Imperatives with the Second Person Plu. Fern, of the Futures, your
Grace will find them (with the exception of the prefixed letter PI of
|JVH , which the latter receive) to be precisely the same ; thus,—
Kal, Imper. njH$9, Future n3N!»n .
Niph., Imper. n3N2Bn > Future n3S2afl (which of course
stands for naSSBH^ * ) ;
Pi., Imper. n3S??» , Future n3H&Dfl •
Hiph., Imper. TOMSttn , Future n3S?pri (which of course
stands for TOHSprW » ) •
Hithp., Imper. naNgttJ^n, Future njHgDJ^U-l (which of course
stands for n3N2»nnjp*).

This, I think, proves to a demonstration that the forms of the

Futures are borrowed from those of the Imperatives, and not from
the Infinitives Constructive, as a modern Grammarian of note would
persuade us. The form too is evidently borrowed from the
Imperative , as also and NifpS ( and not from the Inf.
Constr., which is .
P.S. (b). Of the Verb N^lj? to call, we find [Judg. viii. 1] the
Infin. Constr. ritVlp ; thus it is that Kimchi quotes this word in his
Grammar : in Van der HoogMs Edition of the Hebrew Bible, which I
have before me, the letter 1 is inserted before the last letter, which is
of course an anomaly, and ought to have been mentioned as such in
the Notes, as it really is in some Editions.
P.S. (c). Of the Verb to find, the Present Participle Kal
occurs once with Segol instead of Tsayre, viz., N^ilB [Eccles. vii. 26],
which in some Editions, however, is pointed with a Tsayre, aa
it should be.
* See Letter xxix. § 15.
 LETTER XXXVII. 365

Conjugation of the Verb K¥Q to find.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
K¥DT To find.

Constructive.
NVJDd) Finding.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
K¥D3 In finding.
N¥Q3 As (or like) finding.
For the purpose of finding.*
NViSZ? From finding.

PAST.
He (or it m.) found.+
n$¥£(3) She (or it/.) found.
riSifD Thou (m.) didst find.
riNVp Thou (/.) didst find.
TtKlfO
• TT I found.
ixv? They (m- and /•) found-
DriSVO Ye (m.) found.
JI^VP Ye (/.) found.
lijNVQ We found-

• Or, in order to find.

f Or, would (or might) have found.
366 HEDEEW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
One (m.) finding.
nSyb<«) One (/.) finding.
ONjtyb Plu. (m.) finding.
niSVb Plu. (/.) finding.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
One (m.) found.
niJIVO One (/.) found.
DW¥p Plu- (»»•) found.
ni«iv6 Plu. (/.) found.

IMPERATIVE.
K¥J!p Find thou (m.)
^V? Find thou (/.)
Find ye (m.)
na«V9 Find ye (/)

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will find.*
SVpfl She (or it /.) will find.
NVPri Thou (m.) wilt find.
^KVOJI Thou (/.) wilt find.
t : v I will find.
INVE^ They (m.) will find.
HJXVbn They (/.) will find.
INVDfl Ye (m.) will find.
njKyjpfl
T Sypj Ye (/.)
■ We will find.
wiU find.

(1). Of tfijj <o call, we find once .

(2). wto Aatei, toas thirsty, and a few more of the same form.
(3). Of to call, we find rwTjrj [Isai. vii. 14] and she shall call, for rwnp .
(4). Also rwst) , and nwffi (for nt$t> , or rwsto).
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must find.
 LETTER XXXVII. 367

ntph-Xl.
INFINITIVE.
SVQH To be found.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
In being found.
WW* As (or like) being found.
For the purpose of being found.*
From being found.

PAST.
He (or it m.) was found, t
n^VP? She (or it/.) was found.
flN^D? Thou (m.) wast found.
riX^bj Thou (/.) wast found.
TIKVEJ 1 was found-
They (m. and /.) were found.
DPNVPJ ^e (m-) were f°und-
IflNVPJ Ye (/•) were found-
13X^03 We were found.

PARTICIPLE.
Xlf D3 One (m.) being found.
PJN^ZpJO) One (/.) being found.
D^5f 6?(2> Plu- (»».) being found.
n1SVD3 Plu. (/.) being found.

* Or, in order to be found.

f Or, would (or might) have been found.
368 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.

Be thou (m.) found.

Be thou (/.) found.
Be ye (m.) found.
Be ye (/.) found.

FUTURE.

8]t1p\ He (or it m.) will be found*

DO She (or it/.) will be found.
N# Sft Thou (m.) wilt be found.
"WVEpfl Thou (/•) wilt be found.
I will be found.
ISV^. They (m.) will be found.
n^SVan They (/.) will be found.
INV^ri Ye (m.) will be found.
njN^fpfl Ye (/.) will be found.
K^aj "We will be found.

(1). From n^d to be wonderful, we find n»|*a , and ntfcj.

(2). More frequently D'tsoj .

• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be

PI-AL.

INFINITIYE.

NyjD<U To find out.

 LETTER XXXVII. 369

Declined with D b 3 3 .

In finding out.
N5fP3 As (or like) finding out.
N^Jp1? For the purpose of finding out.*
NJfPP From finding out.

PAST.

N^P He (or it m.) found out.-f

She (or ^ /•) found out-
Jl^yD Thou (m.) didst find out.
r\K^D Thou (/.) didst find out.
TlN^P I found out.
IN^P They (m. and/.) found out.
DHNVP Ye (»»•) found out-
Ye (/•) found out-
UX^P We found out.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

NJiPP One (m.) finding out.

PlSJfOp One (/.) finding out.
D^VPP Pin- (m.) finding out.
Til 8yPP Pin. (/.) finding out.

* Or, in order to find out.

f Or, would (or might) have found out.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.
N?fP Find thou (m.) out.
"WVP Find thou (/.) out.
W¥P Find ye (m.) out
njX^O Find ye (/.) out.

FUTURE.
N5fP? He (or it m.) will find out.'
NVOJji She (or it/.) will find out.
N^Ptf Thou (m.) wilt find out.
"•ijtVPfl Tnou (/•) wilt find out.
I will find out.
W^P} They (m.) will find out.
n^OXl They (/.) will find out.
Wypfl Ye (m.) wiU find out.
n:^jfpih Ye (/.) will find out.
NVP'} We wiU ^ out-
(1). to bejealous.
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must find out.

PU-AL.
INFINITIVE.
N¥P
T X To be found out.

Declined with D *7 3 2 .
S In being found out.
NlfD2) As (or lite) being found out
H^D7 F°r tne purpose of being found outf
S^^D From being found out.
t Or, in order to be found out.
 LETTER XXXVII. 371

PAST.
fc^Q He (or it m-) was found out.0
niJV£ Sne (or it/-) was found out-
r\X]^D Thou (m.) wast found out.
riN2f£5 Thou (/.) wast found out.
"T^V^ * was f°und out-
TSV^ They (m. and/.) were found out.
DJHX^^i Ye (m.) were found out.
]nN#D Ye (/.) were found out.
IJXJfQ We were found out.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
NlfCD One (m.) found out.
n^VDip One (/.) found out.
D^SV^lb Plu. (w.) found out.
ni8V9P Plu- c/o found out

FUTURE.
8^9? He (or ** m-) wU1 be found oul"+
KVOri She (or it/.) will be found out.
NJfOfl
tn : Thou (»».)' wilt be found out.
"'KVD^ Thou (/.) wilt be found out.
N'kDK I will be found out.
^VO? They (m.) will be found out.
njN#bfl They (/.) will be found out.
1 XXDF\ Ye (m.) will be found out.
njKVD^ Ye (/.) will be found out.
N-ybj We will be found out.

* Or would (or might) have been found out.

t Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, be found out.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.
N^VOn To cau8e 10 find-

Declined with D 7 3 3 .

K,yi!5n3 In causing to find.

fc^yOnS As (or like) causing to find.
^yC1™''? For the purpose of causing to find.*
iOVPCD From causing to find.

PAST.
fcOy^'!' He (or it m.) caused to find.t
PliOypn She (or it/.) caused to find.
riKVPn Thou (m.) causedst to find.
118V?3n Thou (/.) causedst to find.
^Nypn I caused to find.
Wybn They (m. and /.) caused to find.
DflNyHpn Ye (m.) caused to find.
jriNyZpn Ye (/.) caused to find.
M8VP <7 We caused t0 flnd-

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

iO¥D!3 One (m.) causing to find.

rWyO? One (/.) causing to find.
C^VPP Plu- (m0 causing to find.
nifc^yOQ Pin- (/•) causinS t0 find-

* Or, in order to cause to find.

f Or, would (or might) have caused to find.
 LETTER XXXVII. 373

IMPERATIVE.
N^PH Cause thou (m.) to find.
"WVPn Cause thou (/.) to find.
liOVP'f Cause ye (m.) to find.
i"!38VPn Cause ye (/.) to find.

FUTURE.
{^VP1 He (or it m.) will cause to find.*
J^VP^D She (or {t /•) wiU cause to flnd-
X^ypn Thou (m.) wilt cause to find.
"•lOybin Thou (/.) wilt cause to find.
K^VP*? 1 will cause to find.
IN^P? They (m.) will cause to find.
njKyPP They (/.) will cause to find.
Wypn Ye (m.) will cause to find.
n^SVpn Ye (/.)
wU1 will
causecause to find.
TR,VP3 We to find-

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, cause to find.

HOPH-AL.

INFINITIVE.
NVpno To be caused to find.

Declined with □ 7 3 3 .
SVP/13 In being caused to find.
Nypn3 As (or like) being caused to find.
For the purpose of being caused to find.f
KVPnp From being caused to find.
t Or, in order to be caused to find.
C C
374 HKIiREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.
Sypn<2) He (or it m.) was caused to find.*
n^VPr' She (or it/.) was caused to find.
JnSJfZpn Thou (to.) wast caused to find.
JINypn Thou (/.) wast caused to find.
V^XjjTDrj I was caused to find.
IXypn They (in. and /.) were caused to find.
DnS^^pn Ye (m.) were caused to find.
]JlXypn Ye (/.) were caused to find.
UltyDn We were caused to find.
PARTICIPLE.
N¥DC<3> One (>«.) caused to find.
nKVOD
tt : T One (/.)
" ' caused to find.
D^VDD Plu. (m.) caused to find.
nixvipp plu- (/•) caused to find-

FCTURE.
J^\fQM<) He (or it m.) will be caused to find.f
t :t
N^'DF! She (or it/.) will be caused to find.
Thou (»».) wilt be caused to find.
Thou (/.) wilt be caused to find.
I will be caused to find.
They (m.) will be caused to find.
They (/.) will be caused to find.
Ye (m.) will be caused to find.
Ye (/.) will be caused to find.
We will be caused to find.
T :t
(1). Or, xscn.
(2) . Or, nspri.
(3). Or, »?np.
(4) . Or,
* Or, would (or might) have been caused to find.
f Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to find.
 LETTER XXXVII.

HITHPA-AL.

INFINITIVE.
K¥Or\H To find oneself.

Declined with 0^53.

SlfDrin? In finding oneself.

i<yj?]inip As (or like) finding oneself.
For the purpose of finding oneself.*
fc^DJiriJp From finding oneself.

PAST.
N^Enn He (or it m.) found himself.t
nSV^nn She (or it/.) found herself.
riSJfDrin Thou (m.) didst find thyself.
nKVOnn Thou (/.) didst find thyself.
"•riN^^ri I found myself.
INyOfln They (m. and/.) found themselves.
OriNlf^r^ Ye (m.) found yourselves.
lflNV^fl Ye (/•) found yourselves.
138i?Dnn We found ourselves.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

One (m.) finding himself.

One (/.) finding herself.
Plu. (m.) finding themselves.
Plu. (/.) finding themselves.
* Or, in order to find oneself,
t Or, would (or might) have found himself.
C C 2
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.
Find thou (to.) thyself.
Find thou (/.) thyself.
Find ye (m.) yourselves.
Find ye (/.) yourselves.

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will find himself.*
She (or it f.) will find herself.
Thou (m.) wilt find thyself.
Thou (/.) wilt find thyself.
I will find myself.
i avoir They (m.) will find themselves.
They (/.) will find themselves.
Ye (to.) will find yourselves.
Ye (/.) will find yourselves.
We will find ourselves.

• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must find himself.

NDV to be thirsty gives in -STflZ :

PAST.

nxpi 3 Sing. (/.)

2 Sing, (mi.)
n8»$ 2 Sing. (/.)
&c,
 LETTER XXXVII. 377

(the second radical always taking Tsayre in those forms

where, in the corresponding forms of , the second
radical has Kawmets).

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

X£¥ Sing- (»•)

riSDV Sing. (/.)
D"i0V Plu. (m.)
m»»v Plu. (/.)

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. NVP gives,—
^VD-wasy finding, ^£¥9 (m.) finding, ^NVB (/•)
finding, &c.

EXERCISE XXVIII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)
Kf* For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. § 2.

'nrcfo
ttt • : n^j-i
t: - •- : 'niao
*t 'rum
t- 'rowo-
t:i

: "nnan
-it- 'to1? "la1™
:•- : "neon
i:t 'ukvq
t t 24;n£Kn
;
378 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
82 90 2 29 * 28 , * 24 .
: o^ynn n« 83 8yp p lij/a? lo^"!
28yiD? M^rnp8 ,57jt/ 'W : "nniap
4* .1 M . 3 9 38 37r r
: laanan
IT f 87 \tn»• 8*pn
TT • ^' : mT 77^TT

"ctfwi : 'Vtk "wa 10in 28*D3 "urnnn

"irrp sin "its "»V9?
: M&>83 "irni 50i33 49T3i[P ?p 28yp^ & : 4"T3#
"irntsto 87 24-iD8,i Mn*3^ 5W 2]i«y^ s4,i?i8
*iT3 28^pn 28yan s"dk : "miiwn 5Sii2yz
fi4- Mi 2 rixvp? : G3 D7^*
I • • • • 60 naaan

: 68Di7B> 'nayiP? "vyjfa 66m : 65nk>£>na

: "^pn "dj; ' r6 "ling + ^ "-inp1? ' md:i:

*Vl£ ^7 : "cam^n 7<W8-i3 "oipp dh^ 74|r>n

sotf2) & : "afe£ "iP^ ffTttf
84 83 * 70 73 L I
mrp nnifl nac?3 i8")j?»i : ^7an 78
: 878&h "p^C 'tftityj 24ip8>i : 'oirrfyj
:"d$")317? MH$Cn Vpt^H "nn^n + nj>8
06 84 " I flS 82
: -131
tt miro
t : *• vb&n
" t»-: : inst'^i
:*: D*T8n ttt 83nm
•• - : • -
• on go a o9 n
87 Di^n ?jiyp ^?:8 -1^8 nwn niypn
daki ^78 I01on83 I08j;wd : ?;pp 8in "nsbaa
s 10S,™ 10%b ' "nw^ ' : ™ 102Dn83^
,09ni:rip 102*W imw I028^7 mu2)

"W: ,,3Titi> V8«? "Jpnn ' "Sj : 110,tit

:mm$iais> "Wii" u6rmn$ "Wn
mnnn "Vi'Sie* :'Vi 102n8^ + "Vrtrn
v: v : t : ■ tj : t :
 LETTER XXXVII. 379
: >20ym ™ I02«^r> & : '"ate
102TS^d '"w^i' m^?:i >rn 123naip

t •• : ... * :- t : t
• Kibbuts here supplants Shurik (Letter xxx. § 21).
f The Apocopated form of ™S?p .
t For V1S1D2.
1 DTf?S God. —2 to find, to find out —» li? iniquity.—* a
servant ; Plu. .—5 a dove.—6 a resting-place.—7 sole
(the same in Constr.).—8 a foot ; with off". ^jn , &c.—9 for, because,
that, also it.—10 grace, favour.—M T.V an eye; Dual 'O'lTV. .—12 evil.
—1S"TV> to go.—14 three.—15 DV a day; Plur. ISTp a
wilderness.—17 water.—18 if not.—i»ttf"in'to plow.—20 '"^^V a heifer.
—22 HTn a riddkW3 lest.—24 "lbs to say.—25 wisdom.—26 and they
(m.) were weary, i.e., laboured in vain. — 27 fri? a door.—28 a
young man, lad ; with aff. v-3¥.3 . — 29 Vs1"1 to run.—30 now.—32 VCT an
arrow.—33 rest, ease.—34 M or to rejoice, to be glad.—
35 because of.—36 rnBH a word, a saying.—37 spoil.—38 much.—89 a
man.— 40 thou (m.) shalt bless (salute) him.—42 HTOtP a handmaiden.—
43thou(m.)hastcausedusto live, i.e., hast savedour lives.—44 my lord.—
45 svpa a cup.—4«"P a hand.—47 he shall be.—49-OS to pass.—50]? a
son; with aff. "O^ , &c.—52 f"l2 a daughter; with aff. ^3, &c.—
S3 t£7S fire.—54 perchance, peradventure.—55 there.—56 ten.—57 in
Pi. and Hiph. to destroy.— 58 for the sake of.—59 if.—60 n2?.| a theft,
thing stolen.—62 twofold. —63 D^ttf in Pi. to pay, repay.—64 also.—
65il?Q]q to seize, take hold of.—66 then.—67 1 was.—68peace.—69 for to-mor
row.—70 to call, invite ; also to read.—72 together with.— 73 a
king.—74 to give.—75 a place.—76 at [the] head of.—77 any more.
—78 thy (m.) name.—79 Jacob.—80 to come.—82">SP a book (the same
in Constr.)—83 rnifl a law.—84 JEHOVAH.—8« SEh in Hiph. to
cause to sprout, to produce.—86 Y~$. earth.—87 grass.—88 generations of.
_89 traitf heavens.—90 ^"13 to create 92 n in Hithp. to hide oneself.
—93 D"1S a man.—94 and his wife.—95 ^bs in Niph. to be wonderful ;
also, to be hard, difficult.—96 a thing.—97 rn?D a commandment.—
380 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

98 [am] commanding thee (ra.).—99 to-day.—100 wherefore ?—101 have ye

(m.) come.— 10S*Ok to hate.—103 all, every one iw'b&B to work,
do.—105 mischief, iniquity.—10(1 Tjbn to turn.—107 dh a heart;
with aff. >H, &c. — 108 a people. — 109 nDJ-ID a gift.
— 110 he shall live. — 1,1 if. — 112 there should be. — 113 two.
—»* wives.—115 the one.—116 2hN to love.—117 [the] fear of.—
1,8 evil.—119 good.—120 thy (m.) brother.—122 2nb a heart; with aff.
"•a?1?.—123 Op to arise.—m to disperse.—125 to be an
enemy to.—126 D13 to flee.—127 from before Thee.—128 cause thou
(f.) me to drink.—129 I pray.—130 a little.—132 N»S to be thirsty.—
133 Ho !—134 my soul.—136 btf God.—136 living.
 LETTEK XXXVIII. 381

LETTER XXXVIII.

This Letter will be devoted to the Verbs ft"1? , i.e.,

verbs having for their third radical a quiescent PI . The
Conjugation of ri^3 to reveal (also to go into captivity*) the
verb selected as a standard, will be found by your Grace
attached to the sheet.
Before proceeding, I beg to call your attention to the
stress laid upon the word quiescent, since those verbs in
which the last radical is PI not quiescent i.e. having
Mappik (as, for instance, H33 he was high, and a few
others), are conjugated exactly like the Regular Verbs,
with the only exception that in some forms the H takes
a Furtive Pathach, like n and V when either of them
is the third radical of a verb (Letter xxx. § 10
and 13).
2. Verbs, in which the third radical is quiescent PI ,
are distinguished by the following characteristics :—
First, The quiescent PI may be retained only in those
forms which either have no Gender, Number, and Person
(as, for instance, the Infinitive Moods), or in those which
do not express the Gender, Number, and Person by any
letter, or letters, affixed; and provided also that the
second radical has not for its point Shurik :
Secondly, in the Past Participle Kal, where the
second radical has Shurik, the PI is changed into 1 :
Thirdly, in forms which express Gender, Number, and
Person by a letter, or letters, affixed, the quiescent PI is
either altogether dropped, or it is changed in some cases
* Or, as it will be given in the Table for brevity's sake, to go captive.
382 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

into T) , and in others into 11 which in some forms is

quiescent, and in others receives a vowel-point, being
then of course heard in pronunciation.
I would now beg your Grace to take the annexed
Conjugation of before you, and to allow me to pass
rapidly over it with you, comparing it with "7pS , and
now and then arresting your attention at those forms
which require particular notice.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute ii7| to reveal, corresponding to "IpS .
Constr. revealing, „ „ lp2> .

&c, &c.

You will here see that, as I stated above, the fl may

be retained in those forms to which there are no affixed
letters, as in the Infin. Absol. "rhl , but also that it is by
no means necessary that it should be so retained, since in
the Infin. Constr. the H is not retained, though
there is no affixed letter.

PAST.
rh% 3 Sing, (m.) corresponding to "T£S .
rvfya 3 Sing. (/.) „ „ rnj?2.
tfil 2 Sing, (m.) „ „ mp£).

I1?! 3 Plu. (m. and /) „ „ Hj?2 .

&c. &c.

Here we see that in the Third Person Sing. Masc,

 LETTER XXXVIII. 383

where no letter is affixed, the D is retained, but that in

those forms to which a letter is affixed, the fl is changed
sometimes into fl , as in the Third Person Sing. Fem.,
and sometimes into quiescent \ as in the Second Person
Sing. Masc, and sometimes is dropped altogether, as in
the Third Persons Plu. Masc. and Fem.
3. Before proceeding to the other parts of the Verb, your
Grace will permit me to call your particular attention to
the accent on the word 1^3 , which, as you will perceive, is
.placed on the ultimate syllable. On comparing this
form with the form 1DpT (Letter xxxvi.), the Third
Person Plu. Past Kal of the verb Dip to rise, you will
see that the only difference is in the position of the
accent, i.e., that in l^il the accent is Ultimate, and in
lEp^ Penultimate ; now this observation will be of the
utmost importance to your Grace in reading The Hebrew
Bible, as cases occur in which it altogether determines
the signification of a verb ; thus, for example, 13$
(Jonah hi. 10) has the accent on the Penultimate, and
we consequently know it to be the Third Person Plu.
Past Kal of 31 £2/ to return, or turn, and therefore to
signify they returned, or turned ; on the other hand, in
l^ (Gen. xxxiv. 29) the accent is on the Ultimate, and
therefore this is the Third Person Plu. Past Kal of H2ltf
to take captive, and signifies they took captive.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

n^j Sing, (m.) corresponding to .

nbz sing. (/.) „ „ rnp>
&c, &c.

Here we see that in the Sing. Masc, where there is

384 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

no affixed letter, the ft is retained ; but in the Sing.

Fern, it is dropped, for the H which there appears is
that of the Feminine termination, and by no means the
third radical.
PARTICIPLE PAST.
Sing, (m.) corresponding to TlpS .
iT<fy Sing. (/.) „ „ rVTipSS.
&c, &c.

The second radical here has ShUirik, and the H , as

mentioned above, is changed into 1 , which in the Sing.
Fem. and the other forms even takes a vowel.

IMPERATIVE.

nbli 2 Sing, (m.) corresponding to "tp? .

2 Sing. (/) „ „ np? .
i1?! 2 Piu. (»».) „ „ nps .
&c. &c.

Here the fl is retained in the Second Person Sing.

Masc, which has no affix ; but in the Second Person
Sing. Fem., and Second Person Plu. Masc. the H is
dropped.
FUTURE.
Tlhyi 3 Sing, (m.) corresponding to "TpE^ .
H^n 3 Sing. (/.) and 2 Sing. («.) „ „ lp$r\ .
2 Sing. (/.) „ „ Hj?5>fi.

iV^ 3 Plu. {m.) 91

n^JD 3 and 2 Plu. (/.) It »
&c, &c.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 385

We here see that the H is retained in those forms

which have no affixes, but in those that have affixes it
is either dropped, as in the forms 2 Sing. Fem. and
3 Plu. Masc, or is changed into ^ quiescent, as in the
3 and 2 Plu. Fem.
As I hope that what was said respecting the charac
teristics of this Conjugation above ($2) has now been
sufficiently elucidated, and as it is just the same in the
other Voices, the parallel between and lp2 hitherto
drawn, need not, I imagine, be kept up any farther ;
I therefore omit the comparison of the two Conjugations,
in proceeding with the

NIPH-AL.
INFINITIVE.
Absoi. nbzn .
Constr. ni^an.

&c.'

PAST.
r\b}; 3 Sing, (m.)
rmfjj 3 Sing. (/.)
JT^jj 2 Sing, (hi.)

Diytya 2 Plu. (m.)

ir1?^ i Plu.

We see here that the 1 is quiescent sometimes after

Tsayre, and sometimes after Cherik.
380 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE.

pfyj Sing, (m.)

PI^J Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

4. Your Grace will perceive that the Sing. Fem.

Participle is of tha same form exactly as the Third
Person Sing. Masc. of the Past ; so that n"7J3 may
signify she (or it f.) being revealed, or he (or it m.) was
revealed, and the particular signification in any instance
can only be decided by the context. The similarity, how
ever, is only in appearance, for, as far as Grammar is con
cerned, they are widely different, since in the latter the
H is radical, but in the former the radical PI is
dropped, and the PI which appears is the Fem. termina
tion.
IMPERATIVE.

2 Sing, (m.)
■ton 2 Sing. (/.)
•T*
&c, &c.

FUTURE.

VT • 3 Sing, (m.)
VT * 3 Sing. (/.) and 2 Sing, (m.)

T• 3 Plu. (m.)
T VT * 3 and 2 Plu. (/)
&C, &c.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 387

PI-AL.

INFINITIVE.
Absolute PJy3 .
Constr. niv»3 .

&c.

PAST.

,1^ 3 Sing, (m.)

3 Sing. (/)
jyffl 2 Sing, (m.)
&c, &c.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

n^JO Sing. (fM.)

n^jp Sing.(/.)
&c, &c.

Here, too I beg to observe that the il in the Sing.

Masc. is radical, but that in the Sing. Fem. is the mark
of the Feminine Gender, the radical PI being dropped.

IMPERATIVE.

nb* 2 Sing, (m.)

M 2 Sing- (/•)
&c, &c.
388 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
3 Sing, (m.)
3 Sing. (/.) & 2 Sing, (m.)
• • •
• • •
' " Iv^ 3 Plu. (m.)
nyfon 3 & 2 Plu. (/.)
&c, &c.

pu-Il.

INFINITIVE.

lib} Absolute.
ivhz Constructive.
rvta
&c.

PAST.

nj»| 3 Sing, (m.)

rm<?a 3 Sing. (/.)
2 Sing. (».)

3 Plu. (w. & /.)

13^1 1 Plu.
Here too we see the 1 quiescent sometimes after
Tsayre, and sometimes after Cherik.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 389

PARTICIPLE PAST.

D^JO Sing, (to.) (the PI radical.)

H^JD Sing. (/) (the PI the mark of the
feminine gender.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.

Pl^l 3 Sing, (to.)

nb:h 3 Sing. (/.) & 2 Sing, (to.)

tofl 3 Plu. (to.)

HJ^iji 3 & 2 Plu. (/)
&c, &c.

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.

n|7jn Absolute,
ni^jn Constructive.

&c, &c.

PAST.

nh)H 3 Sing, (to.)

nn^n 3 sing. (/)
D D
391) HEBREW GRAMMAR.

n^jn 2 Sing, (m.)

DroVjn 2 Piu. (m.)

1 Plu.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
fVpjp Sing, (tw.) (H radical.)
n^O Sing. (/.) (H the mark of the
feminine gender.)
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
rh;n 2 Sing, (m.)
^5 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
n^J 3 Sing. (m.)
n^Jn 3 Sing. (/) & 2 Sing, (m.)

I1?^ 3 Plu. (m.)

nstyfi 3 & 2 Plu. (/)
&c, &c.

5. On opening the Table and comparing the Future

of the Hiph-el with that of the Kal, your Grace will
 LETTER XXXVIII. 391

perceive that the only means of distinguishing the one

Voice from the other is furnished by the punctuation of the
letters ] H 1 X , which in the Kal take Segol to the X and
Short-Cherik to the other three letters, and in Hiph-tt
take JPathach to all four of them. Now as we have seen
(Letter xxx. § 2, 6, 7) that when the first radical is a
guttural it receives, in some cases, Chateph-Pathach, and
then the points of the letters ] fl "> X are by way of assi
milation changed even in the Kal into Pathach, it
follows that when the first radical of a Verb H*7
happens to be guttural, all the forms in the Kal, without
exception, will have precisely the same punctuation as
the corresponding forms in the Hiph-Sl, and therefore it
can only be known by the Context to which Voice they
belong : thus, for example, of the verb ii/JJ to ascend, go
up, the form iVi^l is shown by the context, in Gen.
xlv. 25, to be of the Kal, signifying and they (m.) went
up ; but in Gen. xxxvii. 28 the sense requires precisely
the same form ibj^l to be of the Hiph., and to signify
and they (m.) caused (or made) to go up ; in each of
which cases it is the context alone by which we are guided
to the true signification of the word.

hoph-Xl.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute,
rn^jn Constructive.

&c.
PAST.
n))n 3 Sing, (m.)
nr^n 3Sing. (/)
D D 2
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

JT^n 2 Sing. («.)

2 Plu. (m.)

tttyn 1 Plu.

PARTICIPLE.

H^JD Sing, (m.) (H radical.)

n^D Sing. (/.) (n mark of the
feminine gender.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.

njj5 3 Sing, (m.)

nS^ri 3 Sing. (/.) & 2 Sing, (m.)

l^j; 3 Plu. (m.)

rn^n 3 & 2 Plu. (/.)
&c, &c.

HITHPA-AL.

INFINITIVE.

H?3rin Absolute,
niv'iinrt Constructive.

&c, &c.
 LETTER XXXVIII.

PAST.

n"?arin 3 Sing, (m.)

nnbirn 3 Sing. (/.)
n^ann 2 Sing, (m.)

air^nn 2 piu. (m.)

w-wnn 1 Plu.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

n^arip Sing, (m.) (fl radical.)

n^a.np Sing. (/.) (n the mark of
the feminine gender.)
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
n^ilpn 2 Sing, (»w.)
^|jnn 2 sing. (/)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.

pfysn) 3 Sing, (m.)

H v»|nn 3 Sing. (/.) & 2 Sing, (m.)
394 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

i^arn 3 Piu. («.)

ny^nb 3 & 2 Plu. (/.)
&c, &c.

A great many useful features of this Conjugation

yet remain to be noticed, but fearing lest I should
trespass too much upon your Grace's valuable time, I
beg to reserve the remarks which have yet to be made
until I have the honour of addressing you again.

P.S. (a). With regard to the Third Person Sing. Fem. of the
Past Tenses, ""If?1?? , &c, it is the opinion of Ben-Zev that the H
changed into ri in order to avoid the concurrence of the two similar
letters is not the radical H , but rather the H which marks the feminine
gender, so that by right the form should have been f^ba 5 but tnat>
since it is not usual for a H with a vowel to stand after a letter bearing
Shvah, therefore the H changes places here with the n and thus
gives rtri^Pa . His reason for entertaining this opinion he states
to be, That in the whole of The Scriptures we do not find a radical
n changed into a fi . Kimchi seems also somewhat inclined to think
thus, although he does not express himself so positively respecting it.
Should your Grace be disposed to embrace this opinion, I would beg
you to consider the fi in the Infinitives Constructive also as not
proceeding from a change of the radical n , but as being added only
as a mere form, —the same as that of the Infinitives Constructive nt£?3
from t^2? , ^0 from , &c,—and the H to have been altogether
dropped.
P.S. (b). Of the Verb nt£?3? to make, produce, we find [Levit. xxv.
21], the Third Person Sing, (f.) Past Kal converted, under the form
ntiJVl And it (y.) shall produce, which evidently stands for J"irt!£?S1
and goes a great way towards proving the truth of Ben-Zev's remark
just mentioned, viz., that it is the feminine termination n which is
changed into H .
P.S. (c). When treating of the Regular Verbs I mentioned (Letter
xxviii. P.S.) the anomalous forms of the Infinitive Absolute Niph.
^DD3 and Vsp?, for flPSH andbst^n, respectively; I should therefore
not do rightly were I to neglect to mention here that we find also the cor
responding form in this Conjugation, viz., rf^3 [l Sam. ii. 27] for
rnan .
 LETTER XXXVIII. 395

P.S. (d). We find instances in which the H is retained in the

Infinitive Constructive of the Kal ; as for instance nbp [Prov. XVI.
16] (from Hb^ to purchase, get); HEN?. [Prov. xxi. 3] from to
do; nfo-l [Gen. xlviii. 11] (from nVn to see).
P.S. (e). The letters ^ 1 n S termed quiescents (Letter viii. § 2.)
are very frequently, though unaccountably, interchanged ; we have
had several instances in this Conjugation in which H ig changed into
^ , it is sometimes also changed into 1 : e. g. [Lament, i. 2] 132 for
ri32 to weep ; and [Prov. xxxi. 4] ID?? for l^iVp the Infin. Constr.
Kal of nnti? to drink (See the preceding Postscript).
As we are just considering the interchanging of these four letters
with each other, it may be well perhaps to notice a few instances in
which, more generally, letters of the same Organ of speech (Compare
the five classes given at the close of my remarks upon the Alphabet
[See page 18] ), sometimes interchange among each other :—Thus
p5~li£ and ph'w both signify to laugh, the ^ and & being both of them
Dentals; ">$? and both signify to scatter, the 2 and the S being both
of them Labials; so for D?? anger (the usual form) we find [Job. v. 2]
, the D and being both of them Dentals ; and from the verb
, in the Pi-al signifying to abominate, we find [Amos vi. 8] the
Pi. Partic. instead of the correct form 2?ril? , the N and »
being both of them Gutturals.—The letters B and 3 though not from
the same Organ of utterance, sometimes interchange, from their, both
of them, having somewhat of a Nasal sound ; as [Prov. xxxi. 3] we
find Vpba for D"1?^ .

Conjugation of the Verb Tihi to reveal, to uncover, also

to go captive.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
To reveal.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Constructive.

Revealing.

Declined with D 7 3

In revealing.
ni7J3 As (or like) revealing.
For the purpose of revealing.
ni7Jip From revealing.

PAST.

TT He (or it m.) revealed.f

nJ17il <') She (or it/.) revealed.
TVh* Thou (m.) didst reveal.
JV^S Thou (/.) didst reveal.
W^il I revealed.
1^3 They (m. and /.) revealed.
Dn^^il Ye (m.) revealed.
\T\*h$ Ye (/.) revealed.
U^il We revealed.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
One (m.) revealing.
Tv>\ <2> One (/.) revealing.
D^l) Plu- (»»•) revealing.
Plu. (/.) revealing.

* Or, in order to reveal.

t Or, would (or might) have revealed.
 LETTER XXXTIII. 397

PARTICIPLE PAST.
One (to.) revealed.
One (/.) revealed.
Plu. (to.) revealed.
Plu. (/.) revealed.

IMPERATIVE.

Reveal thou (m.)

Reveal thou (/.)
Reveal ye (to.)
Reveal ye (/.)

FUTURE.

(3) He (or it to.) will reveal.*

H/JJ^ She (or it/.) will reveal.
(*) Thou (to.) wilt reveal.
Thou (/.) wilt reveal.
nVjS I will reveal.
They (to.) will reveal.
They (/.) will reveal.
Ye (to.) will reveal.
H3\V^ Ye (/•) wU1 reveaL
ri^JJt5' We will reveal.

(!•) ^757 (from rrcn to *r«s<^).

(2). rpsa (from rfa to weepj.
(3) . Apocopated to; (from nirt) to Aare respect to) ; fp_ (from nte to go
up) ;—with i Conversivum we have (from nip to fern) ; stf'i (from ni«5 to
take captive) ; (from rintfl to drink).
(4) . Apocopated fpn (from nip to turn).
(5) . With l Conversivum JB1J (from n;s to turn).
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, reveal.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

NIPH-AL.

INFINITIVE.

Absolute.
To De revealed.

Constructive.
Being revealed.

Declined with D 7 2 3 .

ni7iin3 In being revealed.

niSSH? As (or like) being revealed,
nl'jin'j' For the purpose of being revealed.
Jli7Jn^5 From being revealed.

PAST.

il^JJ He (or it m.) was revealed,t

She (or it /.) was revealed.
Jv'j'Jj Thou (m.) wast revealed.
n,t7J3 Thou (/.) wast revealed.
IJV^JJ I was revealed.
17J3 They (m. and/.) were revealed.
DIV^- Ye (m.) were revealed.
|n^J3 Ye (/.) were revealed.
1j^Vj3 We were revealed.

* Or, in order to be revealed.

t Or, would (or might) have been revealed.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 399

PARTICIPLE.
One (m.) being revealed.
One (/.) being revealed.
Plu. (to.) being revealed.
ni1? Plu. (/.) being revealed.

IMPERATIVE.
nSiin Be thou (m.) revealed,
^'p^n Be thou (/.) revealed.
'l'jiirT Be ye (to.) revealed,
n^^an Be ye (/.) revealed.

FUTURE.

n^iP(l) He (or it m.) will be revealed.*

n|?|ri She (or it /.) will be revealed.
Thou (to.) wilt be revealed,
^ifl Thou (/.) wilt be revealed.
I will be revealed.
They (m.) will be revealed.
ny^JJfl They (/.) will be revealed.
I^Iin Ye (to.) will be revealed.
HJ^ilfl Ye (/.) will be revealed.
Pl^iD We will be revealed.
V T*
(1). Apocopated na; (from nnn to blot out).

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be revealed.

 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PI-AL.

INFINITIVE.

Absolute.
n^|(i) To reveal.

Constructive.

Revealing.

Declined with D 7 2 3 .

In revealing.
As (or like) revealing.
For the purpose of revealing.*
From revealing.

PAST.
He (or it m.) revealed.f
y'il She (or it/.) revealed.
Thou (m.) didst reveal.
JTyjl Thou (/.) didst reveal.
I revealed.
They (m. and/.) revealed.
DJn^^i) Ye (m.) revealed,
jn^il Ye (/.) revealed.
"We revealed.

* Or, in order to reveal.

f Or, would (or might) have revealed.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 401

PARTICIPLE.

n j*JJ5 One (m.) revealing.

One (/.) revealing.
Plu. (m.) revealing.
Plu. (/.) revealing.

IMPERATIVE.

n^|(2) Reveal thou (m.)

t -»| Reveal thou (/.)
Reveal ye (m.)
fl^jj Reveal ye (/.)

FUTURE.
W He (or it will reveal.*
She (or it/J will reveal.
'"I^IF^45 Thou fmj wilt reveal.
Thou f/J wilt reveal.
H >>JN> I will reveal.
1 vO1. They fmj will reveal.
nj^Jfl They f/.; will reveal.
TVJJTI Ye fmj will reveal.
nr^JP Ye (J.) will reveal.
PI •J'JJ We will reveal.
(1). rift <o Aqpe.
(2) . Apocopated1'?.
(3). With i Conversivum ta;: (from f*J tofinish, end).
(4). Apocopated Varji .
• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, reveal.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

pu-Xl.

INFINITIVE.

Absolute.

n V1^ To be revealed.

Constructive.

Being revealed.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
n1^J3 In being revealed.
ni^3 As (or like) being revealed.
niVj1? For the purpose of being revealed.*
From being revealed.

PAST.

nVi)
TV. He (or
V it m.)' was revealed, f
She (or itJ'.) was revealed.
JV 7*3 Thou (m.) wast revealed.
TS^}\ Thou (/.) wast revealed.
^fV v>3 I was revealed.
They (to. and/.) were revealed.
Dry1!?! Ye (m.) were revealed.

We were revealed.

* Or, in order to be revealed.

t Or, would, or might have been revealed.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 403

PARTICIPLE PAST.

One (m.) revealed.

i"l;7JP One (/.) revealed.
D^JJP Plu. (»».) revealed.
Di V»J9 Plu. (/.) revealed.

FUTURE.

nhS) He (or it m.) will be revealed.*

H./'JP She (or it/.) will be revealed.
n.1?^ Thou (m.) wilt be revealed,
"i V>Jlp Thou (/.) wilt be revealed,
ll 7J8 I will be revealed.
They (m.) will be revealed.
ny^Jjl They (/.) will be revealed.
iV^lH ^e wiJl be revealed,
ny^n Ye (/.) will be revealed.
nVj3
v \: We will be revealed.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be revealed.

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.

Absolute.

cause to go captive.
404 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Constructive.

Causing to go captive.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .

In causing to go captive.
As (or like) causing to go captive.
For the purpose of causing to go captive.*
From causing to go captive.

PAST.

He (or it m.) caused to go captive. t

She (or it/.) caused to go captive.
JVyjn Thou (to.) causedst to go captive.
Thou (/.) causedsj^to go captive.
Ml yJH I caused to go captive.
I/^IH They (to. and/.) caused to go captive.
Ye (to.) caused to go captive.
I^^lpjn Ye (/.) caused to go captive.
We caused to go captive.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

n?JQ One (to.] causing to go captive.

n^JO One (/.) causing to go captive.
D^?JO Plu. (to.) causing to go captive.
ni^JE Flu- (/•) causing to go captive.

* Or, in order to cause to go captive.

f Or would (or might) have caused to go captive.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 405

IMPERATIVE.

H/^HW Cause thou (m.) to go captive,

ton Cause thou (/.) to go captive.
Cause ye (m.) to go captive,
niton Cause ye (/.) to go captive.

FUTURE.

(3) He (or it m.) will cause to go captive.*

She (or it/.) will cause to go captive.
Thou (m.) wilt cause to go captive.
Thou (/.) wilt cause to go captive.
I will cause to go captive.
They (m.) will cause to go captive.
They (/.) will cause to go captive.
I^jn Ye (m.) will cause to go captive.
Hj^yP Ye (/.) will cause to go captive.
We will cause to go captive.

(1). Also rfan.

(2) . Apocopated Ijn (from nai <o increase).
(3) . With i Conversivum ^3 ; to (from rfty <o jro «/>). Apocopated, without
i Convertivum, FBI (from fine fo be wide, to be expanded). The verb npo which
in the Hiph-el signifies to cause to drink, to water, on taking l Conversivum,
gives the form fwi!l .
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to go captive.

E E
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

hoph-Il.
INFINITIVE.

Absolute.
To be caused to go captive.

Constructive.
ni^jn Being caused to go captive.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
In being caused to go captive.
As (or like) being caused to go captive.
For the purpose of being caused to go captive.*
From being caused to go captive.

PAST.
i"lj?jn He (or it m.) was caused to go captive.f
HH/fin She (or it /.) was caused to go captive,
n^ipjin Thou (in.) wast caused to go captive.
/V^n Thou (/.) wast caused to go captive.
VV^jn I was caused to go captive.
I^jrj They (m. and /.) were caused to go captive.
DlJ Ye (m.) were caused to go captive.
JjTVjpjn ^e (f'^ were cause<* to 8° captive.
13 V«in We were caused to go captive.

• Or, in order to be caused to go captive.

■f Or, would (or might) have been caused to go captive.
 LETTER XXXVIII.

PARTICIPLE.
One (m.) being caused to go captive.
One (/.) being caused to go captive.
Plu. (m.) being caused to go captive,
f^i^ip Plu. (/.) being caused to go captive.

FUTURE.

He (or it m.) will be caused to go captive.

She (or it/.) will be caused to go captive.
n'jJPJ Thou (m.) wilt be caused to go captive.
Thou (/.) wilt be caused to go captive.
TI^JX I will be caused to go captive.
They (m.) will be caused to go captive,
fl^ yJJJI They (/.) will be caused to go captive.
I^jn Ye (m.) will be caused to go captive,
ny^pn Ye (/.) will be caused to go captive.
J"lj7J3 We will be caused to go captive.

(1.) Also njjp.

HITHPA-AL,
INFINITIVE.
Absolute.
uncover oneself.

Constructive.
niViinrj Uncovering oneself.
E E 2
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
In uncovering oneself.
As (or like) uncovering oneself.
For the purpose of uncovering oneself.*
T^h^ryHQ From uncovering oneself.

PAST.
He (or it m.) uncovered himself.t
nn^3nn She (or it /.) uncovered herself.
PvinnC] Thou (m.) uncoveredst thyself.
Thou (/.) uncoveredst thyself.
I uncovered myself.
They (m. and /.) uncovered themselves.
DfvVlinn Ye (m.) uncovered yourselves.
]£V^3nn Ye (/.) uncovered yourselves.
IJ^Snn We uncovered ourselves.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

PJ^iinP One (m.) uncovering himself.

H v'Snp One (/.) uncovering herself.
D^JinJiP Plu. (m.) uncovering themselves.
ni7iin]!p Flu- (/•) uncovering themselves.

* Or, in order to uncover oneself.

t Or, would (or might) have uncovered himself.
 LETTER XXXVIII.

IMPERATIVE.
(*) Uncover thou (m.) thyself.
Uncover thou (/.) thyself.
Uncover ye (?n.) yourselves.
Uncover ye (/.) yourselves.

FUTURE.
(3) He (or it m.) will uncover himself.*
f ^sT^ She (or it /.) will uncover herself.
ri!?3r^(4) Thou (m.) wilt uncover thyself.
Thou (/.) wilt uncover thyself.
I will uncover myself.
1 ^JIV They (m.) will uncover themselves.
nj^Vanri They (/.) will uncover themselves.
i v>ann Ye (m.) wm uncover yourselves.
Ye (/.) will uncover yourselves.
il^jirU We will uncover ourselves.
• Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must uncover himself.
(1). In the forms given here with a Cherik to the third radical, and in the
corresponding forms of the Pidl, Tsayre might be used instead.
(2). Apocopated ^nf? (from rftn to be sick).
(3) . With 1 Conversivum ^rvi .
(4). Apocopated innn (from nin to be inflamed with anger).

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. T\\% gives,—
My revealing.
TJfn^il Thy (m.) revealing,
^ni^jl Thy (/.) revealing.
&c, ' &o.
410 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The Verb rpn to be, is thus conjugated in—

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute !"Pn .
Constr. rriVj .
nvro .
&c.

PAST.
ITn 3 Sing, (m.)
nrpn 3 Sing. (/.)
n"n 2 Sing, (m.)
&c., &c.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
nin sing, (m.)
.Tin Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

IMPERATIVE.
(or nin) ,Tn Sing, (m.)
«rj Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
nvr (1> 3 sing, (w.)
n?nri 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing, (w.)
WJ? 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.
(1). Apocopated ^H"1.; with 1 Conversivum T^l ; in Pause TJ^J.
 LETTER XXXVIII. 411

The Verb nTJ to live, is thus conjugated in—

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute fT>n .
Constr. nvn .

&c.

PAST.
flTI 3 Sing, (m.)
nivn 3 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

PARTICIPLE.
Tl Sing, (m.)
rvn Sing.(/.)
D^n Plu. (m.)
(ornvn)nvn Plu. (/.)

IMPERATIVE.
n.in Sing.
«rj Sing.(/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
ilTP (1) 3 Sing, (m.)
n:.nb 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing, (m.)
v'ni? 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

(1). Apocopated ; with 1 Conversivum ; and in Pause

412 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The Verb to bow down, takes in the Hithpa-dl

the letter T after the second radical through all its Moods
and Tenses, and gives—

INFINITIVE.

Absolute ninrit^n .
Constr. ninnyn

&c.

PAST.

ninflfn 3 Sing, (m.)

n^nn^n 2 Sing, (m.)

wnr\#n 1 sing.
Tinrwn 3 Plu. (m. and/.)
D^n^^O 2 Plu. (m.)
&c, &c.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

ninri^? Sing, (m.)

nrnnvn Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.
 LETTEK XXXVIII. 413

IMPERATIVE.
mnjp^n 2 Sing, (m.)
^nri^n 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE. .
njnJFHfh 3 Sing, (m.)
ninn^n 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing. («.)
"•lnn^n 2 Sing. (/.)

nnritp^ 3 Piu. (m.)

&c, &c.

With T Conversivum the 3 Sing. Masc. of the Future

is iT.nr)t£^l , but by far more frequently injnt^l , and
the 3 Sing. Fem. irwtf^ni always. These are the only
instances in which the T , inserted in the Hithp. of this
Verb after the second radicals, is made Shurik. The
form TiriCi^T should be carefully distinguished from
nrWJ^I , the Third Person Plu. Masc. Converted, in
which the T is again heard in pronunciation. That the
D of the Hithp. changes place with the first radical ,
throughout this Voice, is a matter of course (Letter xxix.
§ 20).

The Verb PINH to see, is Conjugated all through,

exactly as .Pi1?! , and requires notice only with regard to
the very peculiar changes it undergoes when 1 Conversi
vum is prefixed to the—
414 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
rm-P J)3 Sing, (m.)
n$-\n <2> 3 Sing. (/), and 2 Sing, (m.)

n$"RJ (3) 1 Sing.

n*T)3(M Plu.

(1). Apocopated HTJ ; with 1 Conversivum Hn^J, which, it should

be well observed, is of the same form as the Converted Future
Hiph-el.
(2). Apocopated WJTJ ; with 1 Conversivum M^PJI .
(3). With 1 Conversivum n|pM, and NnNl .
(4). "With 1 Conversivum nijfijl.

NIPH-AL.
n»"V <»> 3 Sing, (m.)
Hjn^ 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing, (jw.)

n«-lS <*> 1 Sing.

&c", &c.
(0. Apocopated WT.1 ; with 1 Conversivum
(2). With 1 Conversivum N^MI .
 LETTER XXXIX. 415

LETTER XXXIX.

In the last Postscript of my preceding Letter I mentioned

the interchanging which frequently takes place among
the letters 1 T il S . Permit me, my Lady Duchess, to
give you here a few more examples. The verb HhS to
come, sometimes changes the H into N and gives he
came [Is. xxi. 12]; on the other hand, of the verb
to heal we find the Imper. Kal 2 Sing, (m.) ilSf! heal
l^hou (m.) (the breaches thereof) [Ps. lx. 4], for .
That the Pi of the Verbs n"b is changed into , we have
seen in many instances in the Table of the Conjugation
of tihi given in my last; but we find also forms in
which the PI is changed into 11 though in the cor
responding forms of ri1?! there is no 11 to be seen ; thus,
for instance, of the verb Plbn to trust, we find [Ps. lvii.
2] the Third Person Sing. Fern, of the Past Kal, PPDn
(corresponding to the form HriV| ) ;—of the verb Plbil to
weep, we find [Lament, i. 16] the Partic. Pres. Kal
Sing. fem. J"PJ13 (corresponding to mil) where we see the
radical H changed into ^ , the PI which appears being
that of the feminine termination. In the Future, too, we
frequently find a ^ of this sort inserted, especially in
Pause, and when the form has ] Paragogic (Letter xxx.
§ 14), as [Is. xxxiii. 7] for 13?: 3 Plu. Masc.
Fut. Kal of nbij to weep ; ^Drr [Is. xvii. 12] for IDHj
3 Plu. Masc. Fut. Kal of Hfon to make a noise.
Of the verb JVFl to be, your Grace will have observed
in the Table given in my last, the forms fljjl Sing. Masc.
416 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Participle Present Kal, and PPn 2 Sing. Masc. Imper.

Kal in which the radical s is changed into 1 .
2. The verb !"Pn to live, noticed also in the Table,
forms the Present Participle of the Kal in quite a
peculiar manner, vis-.
"if? Sing, (m.), n\n Sing. (/.), D\TI Plu. (?».), ni^n and
m»n piu. (/.).
3. The verb rini£> to bow down, inserts throughout
the Hithpa-dl (as your Grace will have perceived from
the Table) a 1 after the second radical, which 1 is, in
every instance, heard in pronunciation, with the excep
tion only of the two forms in which it becomes 1 as
mentioned in the Table ; it, of course, transposes the H
of the Hithpa-dl by making it follow instead of precede
the first radical, ttf (Letter xxix. § 20), and gives
therefore :—
Infinitive Hinri^H, &c.
Past ninfltf>n, &c.
Participle nirif^p , &c.
Imperative n)nJ1t£'n , &c.
Future HlPlfi^ , &c,
as noticed in the Table.
4. That the 1 which converts the Future into a Past
has the power of drawing back the accent, and of
causing a change in the Punctuation, we have seen
when treating of the Verbs V'D and Ytf ; in neither,
however, of these two classes of Verbs does it exercise
its power so much as in the Verbs n"b of which we are
now treating, inasmuch as here it not merely in general
strikes out the third radical H , but also, in some in*
stances, disturbs the punctuation to such an extent, as to
change entirely the appearance of the word : thus,
 LETTER XXXIX. 417

for example, of the verb nj£) to turn, the Third Person

Sing. Masc. Fut. Kalis, but with 1 Conversivum
and he turned [Exod. ii. 12] ; in the Hiph-el, the
Third Person Sing. Masc. of the Future is which
with 1 Conversivum prefixed takes, the form IJW and he
caused to turn [Judg. xv. 4].
ft. When the second radical is a guttural, the first
radical receives in the Converted Future of the Kal,
Pathach instead of Segol : thus, ^Jj!^. (from rij/ltf to have
respect to) gives Vty\ and He had respect to [Gen. iv. 4].
6. This is also the case when the first radical is n ;
thus rnn to be inflamed with anger gives in the Converted
Future Kal "injH and it (m.J was-inflamed [Gen. xxx.
2] ; but in Hiph-tl "in'l and He caused to be inflamed
[Job xix. 11].
7. This clue, serving to distinguish the Hiph-il form
from that of the Kal, is however lost when the first
radical is either H or J! : thus the Verb H'/JJ to go up, or
ascend, gives in the Future Kal, the Third Sing, (m.)
"T^K > and with 1 Conversivum awrf wew? «p, or
ascended [Judg. xiii. 20] ; but the corresponding form
in Hiph-il is also H1?^ , which with 1 Conversivum is also
7|£] awe? hecaused to ascend, i.e., and he offered [Ibid. v. 1 9].
8. In some instances the letters | H ■> S take Tsayre in
the Future of the Kal on its taking 1 Conversivum :
thus of the verb H3S to turn, we find awrf J turned
[Deut. ix. 15] ; Ipjjfl we turned [Deut. ii. 1]. Of
the verb rij/FI to wander, go astray, we find arad sAe
wandered [Gen. xxi. 14].
9. In the verbs !"PH to be, and PPPI to Zive, the dis
turbance in the punctuation of the Future caused by the
1 Conversivum is greater still : thus, ITJT he (or it m.)
will be, on receiving 1 Conversivum becomes '■rPl and it
(m.) was [Gen. i. 3], and in Pause [Ps. xxxiii. 9].
418 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

In like manner, JTJT; he will live, becomes [Gen.

xlvii. 28], and in pause VIJJ [Deut. iv. 38], and he lived.
10. More striking still are the disturbances caused
by the 1 when converting the Future of the verb riKT
to see: thus FFJS"£ he will see gives S"TH ara<? Hi? saw
[Gen. vi. 5], which, your Grace will please to observe,
can only be distinguished by the context from the
Hiph-il and he caused to see, i.e., he shewed
[2 Kings xi. 4] ; i"TJl*^ she will see, gives and she
saw [Gen. iii. 6] ; '"IjOX I shall see, gives K"ljSn and I
saw [Gen. xxxi. 10]; of the First Person Plural, how
ever, nS"|3 we shall see, we find the form undisturbed
by the 1 Conversivum, as fljgnjl and we saw [1 Sam.
x. 14].
11. In the Niph-al too, the H is usually struck out by
the influence of the 1 Conversivum ; thus, HNT he will
be seen, i.e., will appear, gives NT1 and he was seen,
or appeared [Gen. xviii. 1] ; ngHN I shall be seen,
i.e., shall appear, gives and I was seen, i.e.,
appeared [Exod. vi. 3].

N.B. The English Verb to show, can only be ex

pressed in Hebrew by the Hiph-el of DX"1
to see, signifying in the Hiph-el to cause to see
{/aire voir) ; and the Passive to be shown, can
only be expressed by the Hoph-al of that Verb.
Again, the English word to appear can only be
expressed in Hebrew by the Niph. of Hkl,
i.e., in Hebrew we must say, to be seen, or to
become visible, i.e., appear.
12. When, by the influence of the T Conversivum, the
H is struck out in the Future Pi-dl, the Dagesh which
this Voice takes in the second radical must also be taken
out ; e.g., of hVd , which in the Pi-dl signifies to finish,
 LETTER XXXIX. 419

end, the Future Third Person Sing. Masc. n-?^. gives

b^ll and He ended [Gen. ii. 2]. The reason for the
Dagesh being here taken out of the H is evident, since
otherwise the Shvah understood beneath that letter
would be moving (Letter xii. § 2), which is impossible.
13. Exactly the same applies to the Dagesh of the
second radical in the Hithpa-dl : thus, from we find
the Third Person Sing. Masc. of the Converted Future
Hithp. b&Fl [Gen. ix. 21].
14. We have seen (§ 3) that the verb nnttf to bow .
down, inserts a 1 in the Hithpa-dl after the second radical,
which 1 is heard in pronunciation through all the Moods
and Tenses. There are, however, two instances in
which this 1 , through the power of the 1 Conversivum,
is made quiescent, viz., the Third Person Sing. Masc.
njnj|Jlf^ which gives inFltt^lin Forty out of the Forty-one
cases in which thisPerson of the Verb occurs in Scripture,
and the Third Person Sing. Fem. ninptf'fi which gives
irwt^ril in every instance in which it is found converted.
So great, my Lady Duchess, is the sway which this
simple letter 1 —so much despised, ridiculed, and nick
named by some in our day—has over the Tenses to
which it is prefixed ! It is, however, much more easy
to load it with opprobrious names than to deny its
Conversive power.
If indeed your Grace will be at the pains to open The
Bible, and attempt to construe even the few passages
quoted as examples in this Letter (and given in the
Exercise attached hereto) without allowing to the 1 its
Conversive power, you will, I think, find that to do this
is no easy task.
15. In the Pi-dl and Hithpa-dl the third radical PI is
sometimes elegantly dropped in the Second Person Sing.
Masc. of the Imperatives: thus, of ri7| we find [Ps.
 420 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

cxix. 18] hi uncover, or open Thou (m.) for fly| ; of the

Verb ri^n to be sick, we find [2 Sam. xiii. 5] /nnPP
(properly ^nnni , the Kawmets being only given on
account of the Pause) and make thou (nr.) thyself sick,
i.e., pretend to be sick (Letter xxviii. $ 5) for fl^nflni .
This is said to be the Apocopated form (Letter xxx.
§17); that in such forms the Dagesh must be taken out
of the second radical is plain from what has been said
above (§ 12).
16. Your Grace knows from one of my former Letters
(xxviii. § 10, II) that there are no First or Third Persons
in the Hebrew Imperative Mood, and likewise that
a Negative Imperative cannot be used, but that these
must all be supplied from the Future Tense. Now when
this happens in the case of the Verbs , your Grace
will in general find the fl apocopated ; as,—
Of n!n to increase, we find 27. for nyy it (to.) shall increase,
i.e., let it increase.*
„ 7m to be, „ V, for rrrr it (m.) shall be, i.e., let
there Je.-f
„ rrn to live, „ V, for njrp he shall live, i.e., let him
live.%
„ rim to see, look out, or at, „ for rwrr he shall look out, i.e., let
him look out. §
&KiB St for n*nn b« thou (to.) shalt not look
at, i.e., look not at. \\
„ roe to turn, „ ]cn by for rain S» Thou (to.) shalt not
turn, i.e., turn not.
„ rin§ to expand, enlarge, ,, r*C for iw TlEshallmakelarge,i.e.,
let Him enlarge. 9 *
„ rirra to blot out, „ try1, for nrra^ it (to.) shall be blotted
out, i.e.,letitbe blotted
„ rrn to fret, „ innn b« for rnnnn H» thou (m.) shalt notfret
thyself, i.e., do not
fret thyself.\ %
• Gen.i. 22. t Gen. i. 3. I 1 Sam. x.24.
I Gen. xli. 33. [| Prov. xxiii. 31. • % Numb. xvi. 15.
Gen. ix. 27. tt Psalm cix. 13. Xt Ps- »»vii. 1.
 LETTER XXXIX. 421

N.B. It must be borne in mind that the Apocopation

in the case of the Negative Imperative (i.e., a
Future preceded by a Negative Particle) is
caused by the Negative Particle bit only, and
never by

We here see that sometimes, in the Apocopated

forms, the letters ) D , S take Tsayre, the same as they
do when the Future is Converted 8).
All the instances just quoted, your Grace will find
given at greater length in the Exercise, where the full
bearing of each will be more distinctly perceived ; it
will be easily seen that they are all Futures used in an
Imperative sense. Your Grace will observe that I lay
some stress upon the word Futures, as I most heartily
wish that your Grace could bring yourself to endeavour
to construe all these forms as Presents. I would give any
thing to have the honour to stand at that time near you,
that I might witness the surprise you must feel at the
idea of the name Present being given to a Tense which
so incontestably is used in numberless instances for an
Imperative, and that, not as a matter of taste or idiom, but
from absolute necessity, there being no other way of ex
pressing the Imperative First and Third Persons and a
Negative Imperative, except by means of the Future
Tense.
17. When the second radical is one of the seven
letters 3E0 pi *]P2 (or, in Alphabetic order
npSSCOTS) then both the first and second
radicals receive Shvah in the Apocopated forms of the
Future, and especially on its receiving 1 Conversivum :
thus,—
F F
422 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

COti'.l [Prov. vii. 25] it (m.) shall swerve (from nbt£>

to swerve) ;
■^P.".] [Gen. xxvii. 38] and he wept (from 7\22. to
weep) ;
Ijllf^l [Gen. ix. 21] and he drank (from 7\'n& to
drink) ;
TP, [Psalm lxxii. 8] and He shall have dominion
(from n*P to have dominion) ;
[Num. xxi. 1] and he took captive (from nhty
to take captive).

Here, then, my Lady Duchess, I bring to a close my

second Letter on the Verbs 1T7 ; but before your taking
in hand the Exercise hereto annexed, I would re
commend you to glance over again my preceding Letter
on this subject, since, from the intimate connexion
which subsists between these two Letters they may
almost be considered as one.

P.S. (a). On referring to the Table sent with my last, your Grace
will perceive that the 2 Sing. Masc. Imper. of the Verb rprt
to be is Tin or TX)T\ , in which last the 11 is changed into 1 ; in Job
xxxvii. 6, however, we find the anomalous form MJO be thou (m.),
where moreover the third radical n is changed into M . In Eccles. xi. 3
we find the still more anomalous form Wnl it (m.) will be, which would
seem to stand for n?T^ , and sufficiently shows how great is the pro
pensity of the letters 1 n N sometimes unaccountably to interchange.
P.S. (b). As at the very opening of this Letter I happened to
touch upon the word >^TM or NflN he came, I may perhaps be allowed
to mention that Maran-atha [1 Cor. xvi. 22] represents the two
words 1"J9 , signifying \the~\ Lord (or, our Lord) is coming
(the ambiguity arising from there being in the Talmudic language
two words for " Lord," viz., "IE and "Ql^ , so that we cannot feel sure
whether or not the 1 is the Possessive affix). I call this the Talmudic
 LETTER XXXIX. 423

language, because all such expressions occurring in the New Testa

ment are quite as well derived from the language of the Talmud as
from the Aramean languages ; and I see no reason whatever why
they should not the rather be traced to that language, which was at that
time the language of the Rabbins and the vernacular language of the
Jews.

EXERCISE XXIX.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

Kr* For the plan of the Exercise see Letter xx. § 2.

t : t :T •• t : • • T TT V

"nam : Vrf] "d^Jj "oTftg "\?$d "flsrn

"ovftgfl 9K-p_ : 5 nina "jrattf "nity 60-i^n ;p

v ** : V| T- T v: t " T
F F 2
424 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

: "iSan Mp n» Dnfc "m<n : "win 64;)3^

• If v t : t- i t
n« : l9m? sYl« "cnvsp "ltys
+ 76aito wng T4no?n "njj? : 'Sian ;p

"rrtbjf : "^Daz? 79nna? "r^a 73rrijj?i "fnno

"ofraj : 86n3TD
-t • "rrtn^
t:- 79-inn:
t : • + "Eoatfoi
t : r "npny
,tt:
".Ton : *uwf) "p» "ovftj "nirr "nits^.
"njap >H : "njtfa + w nV« 9217jJ ' : "W
: 95inD-!X Sw 2n^ ^| : >W >
: "rmiW ^mfc* n» : 97irva "Via? V».
"Vgto ,4V?gy : "W
"Via 'V>'T "niirS"ita "100n?T"Viax1? ,0°ian
"Vqtia >t■ 99dk
Ma

ns '> V* "W "<a Vn "*nai

• • • "'otyitf "nino "W "Wi : "Vffln

™nr^ : Mni.T "inn "njjp sp : "typn

"Viai "'id/ m^n >nnn '1,s^ "V"^
n« "rol«?'",nRi :,Brn» p|? "> Spm
"Sum "hi wnpMpn ngi "trw? ,28na

,04n3Tan Sjro "bote ' *nfy3 ' Nm J 8W>

:59I73
"Varan '"arte>i
n* w^ "nirr >fop
T : mm 4Vi "VaJ

'"tan "rum ISVaM r'onve 95^™

:,40is« 9% "nrn :Srna '>r 'V "tei

x1? "Vh-ii ,44oWi V "W "o*
 LETTER XXXIX. 425

to "'njg : mnp* ,47™p "nfe : "Vta^n

152 r»i "'-il^1? 1V ' : ^a1? *>a«] M8pin >ir
,Mn^3»i Si : "nntf ,53W3 'n»T toi
4W '"V n« ls9i? V^nniw? 157ni^
59/ 39 88 162 L LI
■Swfn TwDi'? 48D\ito

*6 : 39px3 373T ""^ni : "fifty

'num
t : "roa
- : "im
vv- : >b ft "pot
v :-
"few :Sbi6 ana u9wi :"Wi "rrawn

:180nDn3ni "'dikh ,wot# '"iDsrm '.•'"Vinrn

190 I I 23 a 189 188 66

uVn ' : "nib: toi '> ; ""w

i 1Q9 159 21 1 ec
na>l : id#:i my wn ^rn -iok Kin \p
200;;^n : uoiix Vl "^Ik > Vito
*Wi' 205Tna "Sana oflto 20St?ip 2V

1S&kS•• i1? "Vpw : 193™ rumt - "rmoi!

t : - t 173->t^2
193 90 . 39 210 ■ 193 70 . 209 ■
: rm tf^j jn»n iwn : v + tpv iv
:ilsn)W >n d$ + 59|?3i on "Vrjii
S5v? T '"jvnaj/n + "'Wan ' 6W?:> tf? S

""Wl 202dW . "itatj '2> : + nan 193ni*n

426 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

V Sfr" : "rn^en "iwi ,Mis3] : 42->nn

+ -rm S Mm;rr Vn :22jntf ,a8-m ^-rpz

: mt7?$$ "fin + 763iD S Mnmn 'tnr\\

+ 'VriVxn nate : Ha3pip_ tyj 242pny^ ^ ""nn-iziK

n« ininrq : runs ns ninn nfe*/

M«> "'ntn1? 9n>nn rip*' :™in«fo "Slaa

102Djn 49,?3 "ty-vi : VfrW + «^ "^Vr

"Una 9>o; "VirSin :2,iWn 'V 'r^
u«i '9»nr> W :2S2Dom "fa Vk

■?n 105|Dn to "niPP "?k Sotf*] : "Vwjt

: 258Dpt* 25W '256nn* 25Sm :1S0Dnmp

: "n^'-n 260p^ : 259Dy-iP3 13Snnn

>n p ""Wi :93i^ "Hfop *W "x^i
s68on^ : "tb >p 26%t.1 ' : "V*
272rto 270dji ' : ™vv upp MW?1 ^3
•brtu 27W : ml^n ni 273pi^ ^ "V^j
M^ Sap'tiS : 279d^ 278^n«3 ' "wptfi 37
: 284naip3 "Vina 283-ib* 2> : WW mm rti

^577 "inaj ' ,72p 89p«P "o?e? 280in3J S

:2W "a& "to "Stf "VaaS : "awo
9 29«, 289 . 2SO 288 •
t nan
t« : ts^h *;• mamt- : naan rnattfn
ttt-
9 295 , 294 293 292 172
nion • • • • an p»j; d» : inpn |?
 LETTER XXXIX. 421
298 297 92f 292 I 298
I
n»py : j>Bnn 7% naiin 78 na^isa
187 300 J 299 9S . »
85 286 r 1ST SOS . 802
305 S04 9 168 200 48 ./
>®rn »jrp na ^pttf : sprrcg
27 ■sj7sn
i 308with 807"spaa 97 202"1$/ 806^3^1
.1 .1 187 310 . 55 309
314 46 SIS 312; r 1B7
ttfDtfn nam : -irm 7K? rnnn^n
» IB r 817 S16 . S18 S15
: D^nnt^p
• D^aaia•t law
t *r ii-iki
- -: m»m
- •• t - :
85 286 f IS? S19 • SIS
: nvr \5537 "Paa ie^i
320; 39 202 286 ; 240 1ST
187 S28 . S9 187 , 322 82>
ninntft
I wa : njn.s infill n^a
12 82 . . 85 286 j 825 *24
iDpn : ufev rriir ^pr nanaa njn^
i 326 42 i 187 . 48 .t 86
M .; 85 S27
: write rnrr + anng

1 to say.—2 ribs in Kal to reveal, to uncover, depart, migrate,

go captive ; Niph. to be revealed ; Pi. to disclose, uncover, reveal ;
Hiph. to cause to migrate, lead captive ; Hoph. to be led captive ;
Hithp. to uncover oneself.—3 honour, glory.—4 ^T^l Israel.—
5 Judah.—6 by reason of affliction.—7 Q,ipE a place ; with aff". ^ vP ,
&c.—8 another.—9 HNT in Kal to see, look out, look at, consider ;
Niph. to be seen, to become visible, i.e. to appear ; Hiph. to cause to
see, i.e., to show ; Hoph. to be shown.—10 [the] channels of.—
11 waters.—12 [the] foundations of.—13 [the] world.—14 T^H to go.—
15 tale bearing.—16 a secret.—17 2,1 contest, cause.—18 31"! or 3S7 to
contend, plead.—19 ?T1 a companion.—20 a man.—22 a Jew.—23 H^H to
be.—24 DypKfT)^ Jerusalem.—25 nVS captivity.—26 Jeconiah.—27 a king
(the same in Construction).—28Nebuchadnezzar.—29Babylon.—30 VQn
to delight, have pleasure.—32 a fool.— 33 HMDi-l understanding.—
34 CN >3 except, but.—35 ^7. a heart, mind (with aff! ,2.1? , &c ).—
36 n*1B to be fruitful.—37 to be numerous, to multiply, to
428 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

increase.—38 H^a in Kal to be full; Pi. to fill, replenish.—39 VIS

earth, land, ground. —40 HIE to die.—42 "in a mountain (the same in
Constr.) ; Plu. D"Hn .—« ribs in Kal to go up, ascend ; Hiph. to
cause to go up, i.e., to offer.—44 thither.—45 "I2np wilderness.—46 nan
behold.—47 TJt?b» an angel (i.e., "TJM^!?)._48 God.—49 lV to go down,
descend.—50 "wP a river.—M seven.—63 rpS a Cow.—54 ntPSO a work,
deed ; Plu. Cfrrt?.—55 ,3 for, because, if, that.—56 2=107 to return, turn.
—87 T?.? a way (with aff. T)^ , &c. )—68 51 , mn evil.—59 all.—60 their
substance, wealth.— 62 their little ones.—63 I*!B?M a woman, a wife ;
Plu. Ctpa .—M nbtp to take captive.—65 and despoiled.—66 1? a son ;
in Constr. 7? ; Plu. .—67 BPJfQ Egypt.—68 and they (m.) came
[to].—09 Canaan.—70 Joseph. —72 a pit 73 nb|7 to purchase, get.
—74 wisdom.—75 how.—76 good.—77 ^""7 g°ld (dug out).—78 under
standing.—79 "ihSl to choose, prefer.—80 HP? silver.—82 T1W2 to do,
make.—83 righteousness.—84 EBtpp justice.—86 nirp Jehovah.—
86 n2T sacrifice.—87 DT a day (the same in Construction).—88 heaven.
_89nbn to trust.—90 2ta3 a soul (with off". M^M, &c.).—92 over, on,
upon, on account of, against.—93 <"!32l to weep.—94 Rachel.—95 nt3TM
ground, a land (with off". VB"!^ t &c).—96 produce, increase, wealth
(the same in Construction).—97 H1;? a house (in Constr. f"P3 ; with aff.
WJ, &c)._98"1^S Assyria.—99 if, whether ?—100 nba to build.—
101 in vain.—102bby to labour.—103 Noah.—104 an altar.—105 nbf to
turn.—106 H31 nb this way and that.—107 there is not, was not.—
108 and he smote.—109 the Egyptian.—110"tbb to take, to catch.
—111 three.—112 hundred.—113 73W8$ a fox.—114 a tail 115 T\Pr a
firmament.—116 and now.— to sit, abide.—118 I pray
"9 123? a servant (with aff. , &c.).—120 instead of.—122 "1?? a
lad.—»24PT« a lord (with aff ^B, &c.).—126 his brethren.—
126 npb to take. — I27Manoah. — 128 a kid of.—129 the goats.—
i3onn?a an offering.—132 "W2 a rock.—133 2nb a flame (the
same in Construction).—134 [one m.] intelligent.—135 knowledge.—
ise n'Sti to have respect to.—137 Abel.—138 Cain.—139 rhn in
Kal to burn, to be inflamed [with anger] ; Hithp. to fret.—
140 anger of.—142 Jacob.— 143 whether ?—144 the burning coals.—
145 V) a foot (with aff. , &c. ; Dual D^ba/l).— 7TD in Niph.
to be scorched. —147 Hp in Pi. to wait for, hope.—148 P»n to be strong.
)49 V"bS to be firm.—150 "rlH light.— 152 and there be none.—163 [the]
eyelids, of. —154 [the] morning dawn.—155 7??? an eye ; Dual .—
156 1323 ^ Hiph. to see, behold.—157 wonderful [things].—]58 VTpF\ a
 LETTER XXXIX. 429
law.—159 HIS in Pi. to command, charge.—162 in Pi. to finish,
end.—163 their (m.) host.—164 the seventh.—165 His work.—166
fowl.—167 CTO a horse.—168 J"I2 a daughter (the same in Construction).
—169 lamentation.—170 and wailing.—172 so. —173 as, according to what.
i742bU7 tolie.—175 thy (m.) couch.—176 nbn to be sick.—177 HDS to cover.
— 178 sackcloth.—179 D^K a man.—180 nan? cattle, beast.—182 *P3>3 a
veil.—183 for a rock of.—184 strength.—185 a lord.—186 to thy (m.)breth-
ren.—187 nnttf in Hithp. to bow oneself down, to make obeisance, to
worship.—188 amother {with aff. nI8M , &c).—189 nins a sister (with
aff. VyfTTN f &c.).—190 into thousands of.—192 myriad (according to the
Eng. Idiom, myriads).—193 n"1!! to live, to be lively.—194 viz., Reuben
(shall live).—196 TfsBfy seventeen.—198 year (according to the
Eng. Idiom, years).—™ TbV to stand.—200 Sbttf to hear.—202 OS or
D? a people.— a voice (the same in Construction).—204 "137 in
Pi. to speak.—205 from [the] midst of.—206 tf« fire.—208 TO in Hiph.
to tell, declare.—209 yet, still.—210 it (f.) shall cause to come out, i.e.,
let it bring forth.—214 "flj to go down.—216 Vsi?7 [the] pit.—216 the
Egyptian (Plu. f.)—217 the Hebrew (Plu. f.)—218 Ho !—219 multitude
of.—220 many (Plu. m.)—222 HCil to make a noise, to roar.—223 sea;
Plu. ._224 SD3 to move, journey.—226 rf?) to go.—227 n&JJl to
wander, err.—228 S3K? -IS3 Beer-sheba.— 229 great (Sing, f.)—
230 rtvn evil, wickedness.—232 0™ man.—233 and I lifted up.—235 Oi^n
a dream.—236 W a tree.—237 for food. —238 in [the] oak-groves of.—
239 Mamre.—240 Abraham 242 Isaac—243 Pharaoh.—244 riches,
richness (the same in Construction).—245 T133 honour, glory (in
Constr. Th3)._246 his kingdom.—247 V*V to know.—248 »i"l in Hiph.
to shout.—250 intelligent.—252 E?n wise.—253 wine.—234 ffTS in Hithp.
to be red, to sparkle with red. —255 a generation.—256 another.—
25? nha to blot out, destroy.—258 B# a name (with aff. VSttt , &c.)_
259 against the evildoers.—260 nb» to swerve.—262 and he lifted up.
—263 viz., Esau (lifted up).—264 nhttf to drink.—265 ">3» to be drunk.
—266 nlTT to have dominion 267 1? E*0 from sea to sea.—
268 onb i» JTaZ awrf Niph. to fight.—269 captivity, also a body of
captives.—270 and also.—272 rib •! to draw (water).—273 npttf in Hiph.
to cause to drink, i.e., to water.—274 1^ a flock.—275 nhlQ in Hiph.
to make wide, to enlarge.—27e Japheth.—277 to rest, or abide.—
278 in [the] tents of.—279 Shem—280 n32 he (or it m.) was high, lofty,
proud.—282 0=11 to be high ; in Pi. to extol.—283 ~>#N W. because that.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

—484 in stature.—285 for [as].—288 before.—287 breaking down, ruin.—

288 the low (f.), i.e., that which is low.— 289 the lofty, i.e., that which is
lofty.—290 (more properly ^Btpn , from) hbw to be low.—298 nan he
wondered, or was amazed. —293 if.—294 [the] oppression of.—295 a
poor man.—296 npiQ a province.— 297 the matter.—298 to thirst.
Has he (or it m.) longed.—300 my flesh.—302 [the] threshold of.—
MS -|ya) a gate.—304 and incline thou (f.)—305 1»« an ear (wi/A q^".
, &c.)—306 to forget.—307 thy (f.) father.—308 nW in Hithp.
to desire, to have delight in.—309 ^ beauty {with aff. , &c.)-—
310 thy (f.) Lord (Plural of excellency).— God, here a god.—
3» another.—314 ttfatf [the] sun.—3" rTT [the] moon.—™p'WV Tn«
eleven. —317 a star.—318 and they rose up early.—319 ~>i?2 morning.
_3Jobb3 to fall.—322 B-33 plu. a face.—323 come ye (m.)—324 »'"»? to
bow down.—325 T« to kneel.—328 U?7|? holiness (w"</i ^It?, &c.)
—327 holy.
 LETTER XL. 431

LETTER XL.

We have now arrived at the last of the Irregular Verbs,

viz., at that class of Verbs which, owing to their having
the same letter for their second and third radical, are by
the Hebrew Grammarians termed D^IS? (doubled), and
which we agreed (Letter xxxi. § 4) to designate by the
name Geminata. Attached to this Letter your Grace
will find a Table of the Conjugation of the Verb 220
to encompass, intended to serve as a standard.
2. The chief peculiarities of those Verbs of this
Conjugation which follow the Standard Verb 220 may
be briefly summed up thus : —
I. In four out of the seven Voices, viz., in the Kal,
Niph-al, Hiph-el, and Hoph-al they drop the second
radical, and supply its omission by a Dagesh in the
third radical in all forms in which this letter has a
vowel.
II. In the remaining three voices, viz., in the Pi-dl,
Pu-dl, and Hithpa-dl they take through all the Moods
and Tenses forms similar in appearance to the corre
sponding forms in the Conjugation of the Verbs TV ,
though widely differing from them in Grammar.
3. There are, however, some Verbs of this Conjugation
which, instead offollowing the Standard Verb 220, follow
the Conjugation of theRegular Verblj?S; and again others,
which in some instances follow the Conjugation of 220,
and in others that of *Tp2, as your Grace will presently see.
Indeed the Standard Verb 22D itself is not free from
this caprice, as it too is in some instances conjugated
432 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

quite regularly, and in some instances regularly and

irregularly as well.
4. Your Grace has condescended to approve of my
plan of comparing the Irregular Verbs with "Tp£ as far
as it can be done, and to observe that by this means
their forms are much more deeply impressed on your
mind. Were I to attempt to draw a parallel between
the present Conjugation, and that of "7p£) , I should be
able to do so only in the Kal, and perhaps also in the
Past of the Niph-al ; all the other parts are so completely
dissimilar as not to allow of any comparison at all. But
even in the Kal the Present Participle must be excepted,
for on the second radical being dropped (which in fact
is characteristic of this Conjugation) this also becomes
so unlike the Participle of the Regular Verb as to bear
no comparison with it. As to the other parts of the Kal,
the following rules may be laid down: —
Whenever the second radical is dropped, the point
which the first radical then takes is—
In the Infinitive—the same that the second radical
has in the Infinitive Absolute of *Tj?B i.e. Chowlem ;
In the Past—the same that the second radical has in
the Third Person Sing. Masc. of the Past of Tp£ , i.e.,
Pathach ;
In the Imperative—the same that the second radical
of *TpS takes in the Second Person Sing. Masc. of its
Imperative, i.e. Chowlem ; the Second Person Plu. Fem.
being alone excepted, in which (for reasons to be given
presently) the first radical takes Kibbuts :
In the Future—the same that the second radical of
TpS has in the Third Person Sing. Masc, i.e., Chowlem;
and here too the Third and Second Persons Plu. Fem.
 LETTER XL. 433

must be excepted, in which the first radical takes

Kibbuts, the same as it does in the Imperative, and for
the same reason.
6. Let us now see how far what has been hitherto
said of this Conjugation will be borne out by a more
particular examination of its parts, beginning with—

KAL.
INFINITIVE.
Absolute 22D
Constructive 2D
2D2
2D2
2thT or 22Db
: •
2DD
Here we perceive, in the first place, that, the second
radical being dropped, the first takes Chowlem, which is
the vowel that the second radical of "TpS takes in the
Infinitive Kal. Again we see that when the second
radical is dropped, the 7 of D 7 3 2 takes Kawmets, as
it also does in the case of the Verbs YJJ (Letter xxxvii.
§ 1). But what most strikes us is, that we find also the
form 22pb , which is altogether regular like Ippb .

PAST.
20 3 Sing, (m.), also 22D .
nap 3Sing.(/.)
n'3D 2 Sing, (m.)

13D 3 Plu. (m. & /.), also .

&c, &c.
434 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

On referring to the Table your Grace will find that

through the whole of the Past Tense the first radical
takes Pathach, which is the vowel that the second
radical of 1p3 takes in the 3 Sing. masc. of the Past ;
again, that in all the forms in which the third radical
has a vowel, a Dagesh is put into it to show the omission
of the second radical, which of course cannot be done
when the third radical, terminating a word, has no
vowel, as the Dagesh would cause the Shvah understood
beneath it to be moving (Comp. Letter xii. § 2, Rule 1),
which is impossible at the end of a word.
Here, too, we see that the Third Persons both Sing,
and Plu. take sometimes the regular forms like those of
Tps.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

2D Sing, (m.), also 22^D

rop Sing. (f.), . . . fpyto or rgpio
&c, &c.
Here also, on the second radical being dropped, a
Dagesh is put in the third radical whenever it has a
vowel ; and here, too, we see two forms introduced, viz.,
the one in which the second radical is dropped, and the
other in which it is preserved. In the former cases the
forms 1 have no resemblance at all to those of "Tj?S ,
whereas in the latter case they agree with them entirely.
But what is most remarkable is that in The Bible we find
only the latter forms, i.e., those resembling the Regular
Verb, so that the others are given here merely as a form
for other verbs of this Conjugation, and especially (as
Ben Zev remarks) for those of which the Participles are
used as Adjectives ; thus,
 LETTER XL. 435

Dfi one (m.) perfect from Cfafl to be perfect,

^i? one (m.) light from Hhj> to be light,
&c, &c.

Before leaving the Present Participle I may as well

observe that the 3 Sing, (f.) Past Kal, is distinguished
from the Sing. (/!) Participle by the accent being in the
former Penultimate, and in the latter Ultimate ; just as,
in the case of the Verbs TJJ , the position of the accent
was seen to be the only means of distinguishing between
the 3 Sing. (/.) Past Kal npj5 and Hp]? the Sing. (f. )
Participle Present.

PARTICIPLE PAST.

313D Sing, (m.)

Sing.(/.)
&c, precisely the same as that of Ipp .

IMPERATIVE.

3D 2 Sing, (m.)
2 Sing. (/)
13b 2 Plu. (m.)
n^ap 2 Plu. (f.)
&c, &c.

With the exception of the 2 Plu. (/.) the first radical

is seen to have in each Person Chowlem, the same vowel
as that taken by the second radical of IpS in the cor
responding Persons ; the reason for the first radical's not
having Chowlem in the 2 Plu. Fern, is, that a long Vowel,
436 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

such as the Chowlem, could not, if unaccented, stand

before the Daaesh of the following letter (Letter xi. § 8),
and it must have been unaccented here from its forming
part of the Antepenultimate syllable, which of course can
never have the accent. Consequently then, the Dagesh
in the third radical being here indispensable, in order to
show the omission of the second radical, the long vowel
Chowlem is necessarily changed into the short vowel
Kibbuts.

FUTURE.

3ft 3 Sing, (m.)

2br\ 3 Sing. (/.) & 2 Sing, (m.)
<JHI 2Sing.(/.)

13ft 3 Plu. (tn.)

nrsipjn 3 & 2 Piu. (/.)
&c, &c.
Here too we see that, with the exception of the 3 & 2
Plu. Fem., the first radical has Chowlem, the same vowel
as is taken by the second radical of *TpS in the 3 Sing.
(m.) of its Future. In the 3 & 2 Plu. Fem. the first
radical takes Kibbuts instead of Chowlem ; the same as it
does in the Imperative, and for the same reason. As to
the | n ^ N , they take here Kawmets in all the Persons
except the 3 & 2 Plu. Fem. where, since it would have to
stand immediately to the right of the vowel which pre
cedes that having the accent, the Kawmets is changed
into Shvah (Letter xix. § 18).
 LETTER XL. 437

niph-Il.
INFINITIVE.
nun

&c.
Of the Verb DDE to melt, we find [2 Sam. xvii. 10]
the form DSH ; and of pp3 to empty, we find [Isaiah
xxiv. 3] the form pi3H .

PAST.
3D3 3 Sing, (m.)
nag3 3 Sing. (/.)
nibl 2 Sing, (m.)

^r\2D2 1 Sing.
13pi 3 Plu. (m. and/.)

i:?p? 1 Plu.

This being the last part of the verb in which a com

parison with "TpS is in some measure practicable, I
beg to call your Grace's notice to the fact of the first
radical taking here Pathach, which is the vowel taken also
by the second radical in the 3 Sing, (m.) Past Niph. of
"Tp2 . The punctuation, however, of the 2 of the Niph.
is quite different in the two Conjugations ; for in the Past
Niph. of *TpS it takes Short-Cherik, whereas it here takes
Kawmets, except in those forms in which it would have
either one or two vowels between itself and the vowel
having the accent, in either of which cases it is changed
into Shvah (comp. Letter xix. § 18, Rule 3).
G G
438 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

6. "We find, however [Ezek. xxvi. 2], the form n2P3

3 Sing. (/.) Past Niph., where the first radical has
Tsayre instead of Pathach ; and of the verb Hhl to roll,
we find [Is. xxxiv. 4] the converted Past Niph., Third
Person Plural, Iv'jj'l , the first radical taking Chowlem
instead of Pathach.
PARTICIPLE.
2D: Sing. (m).
nap? sing.(/.)
l^3D3 Plu. (m.)
niapii Plu. (/.)
Here we see that the Kawmets is changed into Shvah,
in every instance in which, if it were attached to the 3 of
the Niph-al, it would have to stand immediately to the
right of the vowel which precedes the one that has the
accent [Letter xix. § 18].
Of the verb DbQ to melt, we find [Nahum ii. 11] the
Sing, (m.) Participle Niph. DJ?2 ; and of the standard
verb 22D we find [2 Chron. x. 15], the Sing. Fem. Par
ticiple rop? , where the first radical takes Short- Cherik
instead of Pathach.
IMPERATIVE.
. 3DH 2 Sing, (m.)
\3pH 2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
2D) 3 Sing, (m.), or
2 Sing.(/.)or 2bn.

• • • ■
12D\ 3 Plu. (m.)
&c, &c.
 LETTER XL. 439

7. I ought now, by right, to proceed to the Pi-dl, and

JPu-al, according to the regular order of the Voices, but
as the Pi-dl, Pu-dl, and Hithpa-dl have exactly the
same forms here as in the Verbs 1 "V , so that I have
very little to remark upon them, I prefer making my few
observations upon them collectively, by and by, and
proceed at once to the

HJPH-EL.
INFINITIVE.

&c.

PAST.
3pn 3 Sing, (m.)
rapn 3 Sing. (/.)
r&pn 2 Sing, (m.)

13DH 3 Plu. (m. and /.)

DpSpn 2 Plu. (m.)
&c, &c.

The natural point of the first radical is here Tsayre,

which is changed into Short- Cherik in those forms in
which, were the Tsayre to stand, it could not have the
accent, and, consequently, could not be followed by
Dagesh.
Of the H too the natural point here is Tsayre, which
is changed into Chateph-Pathach in those forms in
g g 2
440 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

which the Tsayre, if retained, would have either one or

two vowels between itself and that which has the
accent.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
apE Sing, (m.)
Sing.(/)
&c, &c.

As in the Participles the accent is always on the

Ultimate syllable, the Tsayre of the first radical, when
not in the Ultimate syllable, is changed into Short-
Cherik in order to allow the Dagesh to stand in the
third radical.
Again, the Tsayre of the D is changed into Shvah for
the 6ame reason that the Tsayre of the H in the Past
was changed into Chateph-Pathach.

IMPERATIVE.
3pn 2 Sing, (m.)
v?pn 2Sing.(/.)
ispn 2 Piu. (m.)
nygpij 2Piu. (/.)

FUTURE.
UP? 3 Sing. («.)
3pn 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing, (w.)
^PJI 2 Sing. (/.)

lap; 3 Plu. (m.)

nj^pH
T&c.,' 3 and
&c.2 Plu. (/.)
 LETTER XL. 441

Your Grace will perceive from the Table that in the

Imperative as well as the Future (which, as you are
aware, is formed from the Imperative), the Tsayre of
the first radical is changed into Short- Cherik in all those
forms in which it does not take the accent, and that the
Kawmets of the H in the Imperative, and that of the F\ of
J n s K in the Future, are changed, the former into
Ckateph-Pathach, and the latter into Shvah in those
forms in which the Kawmets, were it to remain, would
stand immediately to the right of the vowel preceding
the one that has the accent.
Before parting with the Hiph-el, I would beg leave to
observe that the Future of this Voice, as well as that
of the Kal, is affected by the 1 Conversivum in exactly the
same manner as the Future of the Verbs YJ! in these
Voices (Letter xxxvi. § 4, 5): viz., the 3 Sing, (m.)
Future Kal 2pl , on having its accent removed from the
Ultimate to the Penultimate syllable by the 1 Conversi
vum, gives 2D^\ and he encompassed; and the 3 Sing,
(m.) Future Hiph. 2D^ gives 2D*\ and he caused to en
compass (though we find in several places the unaccount
able form 2Dl\).
Exactly the same would be the case with the other
Persons of these Futures which have no affix.

HOPH-lL.

INFINITIVE.

aping
&c.
442 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.
3DW 3 Sing, (m.)
napin 3 sing. (/)
&c, &c.

It will appear from the Table that the Third radical

takes here also Dagesh in all cases in which it has a
vowel.
PARTICIPLE.
3010 Sing, (m.)
nSDlO Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

FUTURE.
3DT 3 Sing, (m.)
2DW 3 Sing. (/.), and 2 Sing, (m.)
2 Sing. (/.)
&c, &c.

8. On comparing the Infinitive, the 3 Sing, (m.) Past,

and the 3 Sing, (m.) Future of the Hoph. in this Verb,
with the corresponding forms of the Verbs V'S and TJJ , as
given in their respective Conjugations (Letter xxxiv.
and xxxvi.), it will be seen that the punctuation
of each is exactly the same in all the three Conjuga
tions; i.e.,—

The Infinitives 3pifl , 3B>in , DpJlD have in each Con

The Pasts 3pin , 3t^n , Dj?in jugation the same
The Futures 2DV , 3B"P, Dj?T J Punctuation ;

whence it sometimes happens that a word will occur of one

 LETTER XL. 443

of these forms, in the case of which, we can only know by

means of the context what is the root, and, consequently,
to which of these three Conjugations it belongs.
9. The Pi-dl, Pn-al, and Hithpa-dl of this Conjuga
tion are, as mentioned before (§ 7), exactly the same as
those of the Verbs IT : thus,—

PI-AL.
Infin. 3?1D [DDip].
Past , nziniD , &c. [ opip , npoip , &c]
Partic. H33iDP , &c. [DDipP \ nDOipD , &c]
Imper. 22iD, ^3iD , '&c. [DPip, ^ppipY&c'.].
Fut. 23)D) , 22iDf\ , &c. [ D»ip^ , DDipfl , &c]

PU-AL.
Infin. nnio [DDip].
Past 33iD , I1331P , &c. [ DDip , HDHpip , &c.].
Partic. 2^Dd] n^niDp, &c. [DDipp/nDQipp, &c.].
Fut. 22^, '22iDft, Sec. [DDip% DDipK, &c.].

HITHPA-AL.
infin. nyinpn [Dpiprvn],
Past 33inpn, n^topri, &c. [opipnn, nppipntf,
&c.].
Partic. Pres. 33ifipp , nzqi^PP, &c. [Dpip^P,
nppipnp , &c.].
imper. iininpn , "g^iflpn , &c. [opipjpn , ^Qip$n ,
&c.].
Fut. 33inp^. , asinpn , &c. [ opipjr , opiprun ,
&c.].
10. To the several forms of our present Verb I have
444 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

purposely given here, in juxtaposition, the corresponding

forms of the Verbs TJJ that your Grace may perceive
the exact similarity in appearance which exists between
them. With respect to the n of the Hithpa-dl changing
places, in our Verb, with the first radical, this is of
course merely accidental, owing to the letter D being
one of those which always in the Hithpa-dl require this
transposition (Letter xxix. § 20) ; any other Verb of
the Geminata, having a first radical not requiring this
change, would not in the Hithpa-dl deviate in the
slightest degree from the form CDipJlH ; as, for instance,
from Hbi to roll we have the Hithpa-dl VjHiinn , &c.
11. But though in appearance precisely the same, yet
in point of Grammar the Pi-dl, Pu-al, and Hithpa-dl of
the Geminata differ very widely from those of the Verbs
TV . In the latter, one only of the double letters is
radical, and one (probably that to the right) intended to
make up for the Dagesh which these three Voices
require in the second radical ; whereas, in the former,
both of the double letters are radical, and the Dagesh is
made up for by the 1 quiescent after Chowlem given to
the first radical; e.g., from Dip we have the Pi-dl Past
DClp , HDDip, &c, where the D to the right is not
radical, but intended to make up for the characteristic
Dagesh of the Voice ; but in the Pi-dl Past 33iD ,
HIJDiD , &c, from 22D , the letters 2 are both of them
radical, and the Dagesh is made up for by the 1
quiescent after Chowlem given to the D . The same
difference exists between the Pu-al DDip , HDpip ,
&c. ; and 33^ , •"'33iD , &c. ; and similarly in the case
of the Hithpa-dl Vtfpftn, nntfpnn , &c.j and
■?i?i2nn , n^i-inri , &c.
12. This similarity of appearance creates sometimes
 LETTER XL. 445

doubt as to what is the root of the Verb, e.g., [Psalm

lxxiv. 13] we find jTH!i3 , of which word all that we
know with certainty is that it is a Past Tense and 2
Person Sing. Masc. ; that it is of the Pirdl and not
of the JPu-dl (for this Person has the same form in both
Voices) we know from the context, as it governs an
Objective Case ; but as to the root there are doubts,
some taking its root to be "11 S to break, and so making
it agree with the form f^£^P > while others suppose the
root to be Yl 2 , and compare it therefore with the form

13. Some Verbs of this Conjugation, as was men

tioned above (§ 3), in some instances follow the Conju
gation of 22D , and in others that of the Regular Verb
"7p2 ; thus, for example, of the Verb ]2~l to sing, we find
[Isai. xxxv. 6] for the 3 Sing. Fem. Fut. Kal the form
pjn agreeing with 2D.F1 , but of the Pi-dl we find the
3 Sing. Fem. Fut. [Ps. li. 16] which is of the same
form as IpDfl .
14. The Verb 7?n in the acceptation to praise, is
only used in the Pi-dl, Pu-al, and Hithpa-dl, and then
it follows the Conjugation of the Regular Verb "IpS;
with this difference only, that in those forms where the
second radical receives Shvah, the Dagesh of the second
radical is dispensed with (comp. Letter xxxii. P.S.) :
thus,—

Pi-dl S^rp Fut. 3 Sing. (».), &c. ; I^PPSHu. (m.),&c.

Hithp. ^rjJT Fut. 3 Sing, (m.), &c. ; lV?riJT.3Plu.(?».), &c.

So at least we find these forms in the best editions of

The Bible.

N.B. As we are touching upon this Verb it will be

well to mention that the word Hallelujah is
446 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

composed of the two Hebrew words iV^n 2 Plu.

(m.) Imper. Pi-dl, and JT Jah (one of the names
of GOD) signifying therefore, Praise ye (m.)
Jah. These two words are in some copies
blended together so as to be read PJJl'?'?n . This
is not the only instance of two words being
blended into one, as we see the same thing done
in such words as rozpbv, which stands for *7¥
shadow of, D^D death, and others like it.

15. The Verb V/J? in the sense of lightness, swiftness,

and vileness is used in the Kal, Niph., and Hiph. ; and
then follows the Conjugation of 220 ; as "T^P. 1 Sing.
Past Kal [Job xl. 4] ; ^fhptf 1 Sing. Past Niph. con
verted [2 Sam. vi. 22] ; *7pn 2 Sing. (/».) Imper. Hiph.
[1 Kings xii. 4] ; forms which severally agree with the
corresponding forms of . But this same Verb, in
the acceptation of cursing, is used only in the Pi. and
Pw., and then follows the Conjugation of the Regular
Verb "7p2 , with this difference only, that here too the
characteristic Dagesh of these two Voices is dispensed
with in those forms in which the second radical has
Shvah ; thus,—

3 Sing. (».) Fut. Pi. [Levit. xx. 9] ;

tyfr) 3 Plu. (m.) Fut. Pi. [Ps. cix. 28] ;
typn 3 Sing. (/.) Fut. Pu. [Job xxiv. 18] ;

forms agreeing, all of them, with the corresponding

forms of Ipp .
As several things relating to this Verb remain still to
be mentioned, I must beg leave to make them the
subject of my next Letter, with which I will also send
the Exercise.
 LETTER XL.

Conjugation of the Verb 33D to encompass.

KAL.
INFINITIVE.

Absolute.
220 To encompass.

Constructive.
2D Encompassing.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .

3D3 In encompassing.
3bi> As (or like) encompassing.
22Db) 2bh For the purpose of encompassing.*
3DD From encompassing.

PAST.
33D, 3D He (or it m.) encompassed, f
She (or it/.) encompassed.
r\i3p Thou (m.) didst encompass.
nisp Thou (/.) didst encompass.
^i3D I encompassed.
133D, 130 They (m. and/.) encompasse
DJ113D Ye (m.) encompassed.
Ye (/.) encompassed.
1213D We encompassed.

• Or, in order to encompass.

f Or, would (or might) have encompassed.
448 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
3D or 33lD One (m.) encompassing.

One (/.) encompassing.

D^D or D^aiD Plu. (m.) encompassing.
rnaporniiqiD Plu. (/.) encompassing.

PARTICIPLE PAST.
3130 One (to.) encompassed.
HaiaP One (/.) encompassed.
D^aiaP Plu- (to.) encompassed.
Jniaiap Plu. (/•) encompassed.

IMPERATIVE.
3D Encompass thou (to.)
^aDC Encompass thou (/.)
Encompass ye (to.)
nj'aD Encompass ye (/.)

FUTURE.
3D^2) He (or it m.) will encompass.*
3D.H She (or it /.) will encompass.
3DFI Thou (to.) wilt encompass.
"QDn Thou (/.) wilt encompass.
3DX I will encompass.
laP^ They (to.) will encompass.
nj^apjp They (/■) wil1 enc°mPass-
laPO Ye (m.) will encompass.
H T3^3
JV DF\
\ Ye (/.) will encompass.
aD3 We will encompass.
(1). Of the verb ft to sing, we find the forms ^ 2 Sing. (/.), and
2 Plu. (to.)
(2). IK from "n£ to incline one's head (by way of reverence).
* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must encompass.
 LETTER XL.

niph-Il.
INFINITIVE.
3Dn(0 To be encompassed.

Declined with D 7 3 3.

3DH3 In being encompassed.

3Di"73 •^■8 (or like) being encompassed.
3Jpn'? For the purpose of being encompassed.
From being encompassed.

PAST.

He (or it m.) was encompassed,f

n3D3(s) She (or it/.) was encompassed.
rp^ipj Thou (m.) wast encompassed.
J113D3 Thou (/.) wast encompassed.
VT13D2 I was encompassed.
(') They (m. and/.) were encompassed.
D^)i3Dp Ye (m.) were encompassed.
|ni3DJ Ye (/.) were encompassed.
1ii3D3
i - ■ "We were encompassed.

PARTICIPLE.

3D3 W One (m.) being encompassed.

nSDJW One (/.) being encompassed.
Q^3D2 Plu. (m.) being encompassed.
nl3 Plu. (/.) being encompassed.

* Or, in order to be encompassed,

t Or would (or might) have been encompassed.
450 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.
Be Ihou (m.) encompassed.
Be thou (/.) encompassed.
13 Dn Be ye (m.) encompassed.
HJ^prj Be ye (/.) encompassed.

FDTDRE.
2b), 2D] He (or it m.) will be encompassed.*
, 3Dfl She (or it/.) will be encompassed.
2Dr\ , 2DF\ Thou (m.) wilt be encompassed.
^SDH Thou (f.) wilt be encompassed.
3DS I will be encompassed.
They (m.) will be encompassed.
n^BDJil They (/.) will be encompassed.
Ye (m.) will be encompassed.
n^SDl? Ye (/.) will be encompassed.
3D3 We will be encompassed.

(1). Of the Verb Dbn to melt, we find the form Dart ; and of i#a to empty,
we find the form pian .
(2). In one instance nara .
(3). Of V>i to roll, we find the Converted Past to ,
(4). Of vba to melt, we find dim.
(5). In one instance nap: .

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be encompassed.

PI-AL.
INFINITIVE.
331D To encompass.
 LETTER XL.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
331 D3 In encompassing.
33^D3 As (or like) encompassing.
33iD^7 For the purpose of encompassing.'
33iD? From encompassing.

PAST.
331D He (or it to.) encompassed,f
H331D She (or it/.) encompassed.
fi33l'D
t : - Thou (to.) didst encompass.
Thou (/.) didst encompass.
^33iD I encompassed.
1331D They (m. and/.) encompassed.
Df133iD Ye (to.) encompassed.
]fl33lD Ye (/.) encompassed.
13331D We encompassed.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
331DQ One (to.) encompassing.
H331DD n ^
or n33iD13 6 ^ enoomPassing-
D,331DP Flu. (m.) encompassing.
ni33iDp Plu. (/.) encompassing.

IMPERATIVE.
33iD Encompass thou (to.)
,,33iD Encompass thou (/.)
133iD Encompass ye (m.)
np3iD Encompass ye (/.)
* Or, in order to encompass.
f Or, would (or might) have encompassed.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR,

FUTURE.

33^D^ He (or it m.) will encompass.

DJjiDn She (or it/.) will encompass.
33i Dfl Thou (m.) wilt encompass.
,33'iDri Thou (/.) wilt encompass.
331DS I will encompass.
133iDs. They (m.) will encompass.
Dp 33iDf! They (/.) will encompass.
133TDri Ye (m.) will encompass.
n^33lDfl Ye (/.) will encompass.
331 DJ We will encompass.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must encompass.

PU-AL.

INFINITIVE.

331D To be encompassed.

Declined with 0 *7 3 3
331D3 In being encompassed.
331D3 As (or like) being encompassed.
331D1? For the purpose of being encompassed.t
33iDP From being encompassed.

t Or, in order to be encompassed.

 LETTER XL. 453

PAST.
33iD He (or it m.) was encompassed.*
She (or it/.) was encompassed.
£13310 Thou (m.) wast encompassed.
Thou (/.) wast encompassed.
"l2l33iD I was encompassed.
1331 D They (to. and/.) were encompassed.
Df}33iD Ye (to.) were encompassed.
}]]133iD Ye (/) were encompassed.
1)333iD We were encompassed.

PARTICIPLE.
331'DO One (to.) encompassed.
H33iDb One (/.) encompassed.
D'giiDp piu. (m.) encompassed.
ni33iDD
T piu. (/.) encompassed.

FUTURE.
331D^ He (or it m.) will be encompassed.-^
33iD£l She (or it/) will be encompassed.
331Dfl Thou (to.) wilt be encompassed.
,33^Df1 Thou. (/.) wilt be encompassed.
33TDS I will be encompassed.
1331D1 They (to.) will be encompassed.
i*1233iDJil They (/) will be encompassed.
;133iDJl Ye (to.) will be encompassed.
nj33iDri Ye (/.) will be encompassed.
331 D3 We will be encompassed.

* Or, would (or might) have been encompassed.

t Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must, be encompassed.
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HIPH-EL.

INFINITIVE.

To cause to encompass.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .
3t?ri3 In causing to encompass.
3PH3 As (or like) causing to encompass.
3QH^ For the purpose of causing to encompass.*
3PHJp From causing to encompass.

PAST.
He (or it m.) caused to encompass, f
She (or it/.) caused to encompass.
Thou (m.) causedst to encompass.
Thou (/.) causedst to encompass.
I caused to encompass.
i3pn They (m. and/.) caused to encompass.
Dni3pn Ye (m.) caused to encompass.
]Pi3pn Ye (/.) caused to encompass.
We caused to encompass.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.
3££ One (m.) causing to encompass.
One (/.) causing to encompass.
D^3D9 Plu. (m.) causing to encompass.
ni3DD Plu. (/.) causing to encompass.

• Or, in order to cause to encompass.

t Or, would (or might) have caused to encompass.
 LETTER XL. 455

IMPERATIVE.
Cause thou (m.) to encompass.
^D'T Cause thou (/.) to encompass.
nn,>1 Cause ye (m.) to encompass.
Cause ye (/.) to encompass.

FUTURE.

He (or it m.) will cause to encompass.*

DDri She (or it/.) will cause to encompass.
HDP Thou (in.) wilt cause to encompass.
^JPn Thou (/.) wilt cause to encompass.
DPS I will cause to encompass.
13 P^ They (ra.) will cause to encompass.
nySPJjl They (/.) will cause to encompass.
13PI^ Ye (m.) will cause to encompass.
n3\3p]|1 Ye (/.) will cause to encompass.
3P3 We will cause to encompass.

(1). Sometimes with Pathach, as ign, from "Ao to be bitter.

(2). With l Conversivum we find in several places the anomalous form
3B3, instead of 3p£, the regular form; though of ^3 to roll, we find the
proper form tap [Gen. xxix. 10].

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must cause to encompass.

hoph-Il.
INFINITIVE.
3Din To be caused to encompass.
H H 2
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Declined with D 7 3 3 .

3D1PI3, In being caused to encompass.

3,ptn3 As (or like) being caused to encompass.
For the purpose of being caused to encompass.
3pii"l£5 From being caused to encompass.

PAST.

3P1H He (or it m.) was caused to encompass, t

n3Din She (or it/.) was caused to encompass.
m3Din Thou (m.) wast caused to encompass.
ni3Din Thou (/.) wast caused to encompass.
^ni3Din I was caused to encompass.
13D1PI They (m. and/.) were caused to encompass.
D^13Din Ye (m.) were caused to encompass.
IftiSDin Ye (/.) were caused to encompass.
1313D1H We were caused to encompass.

PARTICIPLE.

3D1Q One (m.) caused to encompass.

n3D1)3 One (/.) caused to encompass.
D^SDID Flu- (»»•) caused to encompass.
ni3D1D Plu. (/.) caused to encompass.

* Or, in order to be caused to encompass.

t Or, would (or might) have been caused to encompass.
 LETTER XL. 457

FUTURE.
3pV He (or it m.) will be caused to encompass. *
301]^ She (or it/".) will be caused to encompass.
3plfl Thou (m.) wilt be caused to encompass.
"•ZlDin Thou (/.) wilt be caused to encompass.
3D1X I will be caused to encompass.
ISD'P They (m.) will be caused to encompass.
nj^Plfl They (/.) will be caused to encompass.
IHDin Ye (m.) will be caused to encompass.
Hj^Din Ye (/.) will be caused to encompass.
3DU We will be caused to encompass.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must be caused to encompass.

HITHPA-AL.
INFINITIVE.
3ijnnDn To encompass oneself.

Declined with Q 7 3 3 .
33^ftpn3 In encompassing oneself.
33inPH3 As (or like) encompassing oneself.
33ifipn'7 For the purpose of encompassing oneself.*
33inPini3 From encompassing oneself.

(a). The Hithp. of M> to roll is here given, in order to show that the
transposition of the first radical of ato with the n of the Hithp. is merely
accidental (§ 10).
• Or, in order to encompass oneself.
458 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

PAST.

DJinpn He (or it m.) encompassed himself.*

i"133Wipn She (or it /.) encompassed herself.
P33lPpn Thou (m.) didst encompass thyself.
riZ13iJipn Thou (/.) didst encompass thyself.
\P33WPn I encompassed myself.
133WPn They (m. and/.) encompassed themselves.
CFGH^P'"!' Ye (m.) encompassed yourselves.
{nZQinpn ^e (/•) enc°mpassed yourselves.
TJIl^^npri We encompassed ourselves.

PARTICIPLE PRESENT.

Q^TfiPQ One (m.) encompassing himself.

t; : * D331F1PP One (/.) encompassing herself.
D^ZLZlinpZp Plu. (m.) encompassing themselves.
nl3]2inPP Plu. (/.) encompassing themselves.

IMPERATIVE.

77l3J^i^1 33inpr? Encompass thou (m.) thyself.

">SSlapn s33inpn Encompass thou (/.) thyself.
I'j'piill^n 133ijnpn Encompass ye (?».) yourselves,
n^iann na23inPn Encompass ye (/) yourselves.

* Or, would (or might) have encompassed himself.

 LETTER XL. 459

FUTURE.
He (or it m.) will encompass himself.*
zninpri She (or it /.) will encompass herself.
rninpri Thou (n».) wilt encompass thyself.
^inpn Thou (/.) wilt encompass thyself.
nainps I will encompass myself.
They (m.) will encompass themselves.
nj^inpn They (/.) will encompass themselves.
izqinpri Ye (m.) will encompass yourselves.
nniiinpn Ye (/.) will encompass yourselves.
We will encompass ourselves.

* Or, shall, would, should, may, might, can, or must encompass himself.

ON TAKING POSSESSIVE AFFIXES.

The Infin. Constr. 2& or 32P gives,—

or ^IJOp My encompassing,
or TfinP Thy (m.) encompassing.
^I3D or ^J3PD Thy (/.) encompassing.
&c, &c.

As we do not find the Infin. Kal of sip with Possessive Affixes, we can
only judge by analogy of the form it would take. Now, as of the Verb Pi?rt to
engrave, figuratively to ordain, or decree, we find [Prov. viii. 27] the form
ipna , we might be justified in supposing that ab would give '?D , &c. j on the
other hand, as we find the form aiart [Numb. xxi. 4] agreeing with , the
other forms 'lip , &c, can hardly be deemed exceptionable.
460 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XLI.

There still remains a class of Geminata to be brought

before your Grace's notice which, in the Future of the
Kal, take a form not only entirely dissimilar in shape to
that of the Standard Verb 22D, but also based on a
principle altogether at variance with one of the chief
rules of Hebrew Grammar.
2. One great law of Hebrew Grammar is, that when
a Dagesh is used to denote the omission of a letter, it
must always denote a letter omitted before—that is, to
the right of itself ; thus we have seen that stands
for"rj?a3?, tt^H for tt^jn, '•rvtap for Tli3?D, in all
which instances the letter dropped precedes the Dagesh.
So important seems this law to have been in the opinion
of that eminent Hebrew" Grammarian Rabbi Elijah
Backdr, that he has deemed it right, in order to assist
the memory of the student, to inculcate it in the follow
ing rhyme :—

jinpnn i1? D*n£l

which, literally translated, would run thus : —

" The deficiency (i.e., the letter omitted) should precede it (the
Dagesh),
And the Dagesh [should come] after it (the omitted letter)."

3. Now there are some Verbs of the Geminata which,

dropping in the Future Kal the second radical, imply
 LETTER XLI. 461

the omission by a Dagesh in the first radical : thus, for

example,—

Of the Verb TTp to incline one's head with reverence,

we find the Converted 3 Sing, (m.) Future Kal
1)3*1 [Gen. xxiv. 26] ;
Of nrO to crush, we find the Converted 1 Sing. Future
Kal riSSI [Deut. ix. 21] ;
Of DDD to come to an end, we find the Converted 3 Sing.
(/) Fut. Kal Dftfll [Gen. xlvii. 18];
Of DDI to be silent, we find the Converted 3 Sing, (m.)
Fut. Kal Din [Levit. x. 3].
Now, in all these instances, and others like them, the
Dagesh in the first radical would seem to supply the
omission of the second radical, that is, to supply the
place of the letter omitted after the one in which
it stands—a mode of supplying the omission altogether
contrary to the genius of Hebrew Grammar, and there
fore anything but congenial to the taste of the critic.
So much was the father of Rabbi David Kimchi annoyed
by this, that he actually had the courage, in opposition
to all other Grammarians, to set down these verbs as
belonging to the instead of the Geminata, and con
sequently to make their respective roots to be lp2 , J"DJ ,
UD2 , D13 . The son, while recording in his Michlol
the opinion of his father, does not tell us whether or no
he subscribes to it himself: one thing, however, is
certain, that he was not less annoyed than his father by
these forms ; and, therefore, he suggests that the form
Dfrro , quoted above, might be the Converted Future
Niph-al, when, of course, its signification, instead of
being and it (/.) came to an end, would be and it (f.)
was ended. Had this immortal Grammarian stated this
 462 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

to be his decided opinion, I should never have ventured

to say that I differed from him, as I am not one of those
who consider themselves greater masters of Hebrew
Grammar than Kimchi. As, however, this is thrown
out by him as a mere hint or suggestion, I would beg
leave to bring before your Grace's notice the forms
ICfl?] [Deut. xxxiv. 8], and [Numb. xiv. 35], the
latter of which, agreeing exactly with , must needs
be, without any doubt, the 3 Plu. (m.) Fut. Niph. ; and
to set down the former, so different from it in punctua
tion, as from the same root, and of the same Voice,
must be quite out of the way. Unless, therefore, we go
over to the opinion of Kimchi s father, and assume the
root to be DHJ , this form ICJ^T cannot be otherwise con
sidered than as the Converted 3 Plu. (m.) Fut. Kal of
DDH , the Dagesh in the r\ supplying the omission of
the second radical ( D ) ; and if so, why should not also
DhJT be of the Kal ?
4t. The same reasoning may be applied to the form
DTI , quoted also above, which, according to Kimchi's
suggestion, might be Niph-al, when, of course, instead
of and he was silent, its signification would be and he was
silenced ; but as we find the forms 10T [Exod. xv. 16],
1ST [1 Sam. ii. 9], the latter of which must needs be
Niph-al, there is left no alternative but to allow the
former to be Kal, with either D13 or DDI for its root
(in which latter case the Dagesh in the 1 supplies the
omission of the second radical, D ) ; and if IDT be Kal,
why may not also DTI ?
5. Just as it is one of the fundamental rules of Hebrew
Grammar that a Dagesh-Forte always doubles the letter
in which it stands—that is, implies always that the
* letter in which it stands is preceded by a similar letter
 LETTER XLI. 463

bearing Shvah —so is it likewise a fundamental rule with

all Hebrew Grammarians of note, that a long vowel
has always a quiescent letter after it, either expressed or
understood. Hence in the Verbs V'D , in all forms in
which the first radical is dropped, the servile takes
a long vowel in order to supply the omission of the first
radical by the quiescent letter understood after that long
vowel ; e.g., of the verb 3t£^ to sit, the 3 Sing, (m.) Fut.
Kal is 3$.? , where the 1 , that appears, is of the prefix
letters ) T\ X (the ^ , which is the first radical of the Verb,
being understood after the Tsayre which that prefix letter
here takes); and the 3 Sing. (?«.) Fut. Hiph. is 2P#1\ where
the omitted first radical is supplied by the 1 quiescent after
the Chowlem given to the servile. And so in all other
cases.
We have however seen (Letter xxxiv. § 11) that the
omission of the first radical s is in some of those Verbs
supplied by Dagesh in the second radical, instead of by a
quiescent letter expressed or understood before it; as,
for instance, from the Verb y)t\ to pour, we have the
3 Sing (m.) Fut. Kal pV?. This is by the Hebrew
Grammarians termed ri3 JYllDfl , i.e., Dagesh
instead of a quiescent. On the other hand, we find a
quiescent letter supplying sometimes the place of a
Dagesh ; as in the Standard Verb 22 D of this Conjuga
tion, we have in the Pi-dl, Pu-al, and Hithpa-dl, 22')D ,
3IliD , and 23ifipn , where the characteristic Dagesh
of the Voices, which should by right stand in the second
radical, is supplied by the 1 quiescent before it. Indeed
the whole system of Compensation for Dagesh (Letter
xvi. § 5) is based on this principle ; for example, of the
Verb njfij to make, we have the 3 Sing, (m.) Fut. Niph.
Htyj£!, where the Dagesh, which by right should be in '
the first radical, to show that the characteristic 2 of the
464 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Niph-al is omitted, is supplied by the quiescent 1 under

stood after the Tsayre given to the servile ; in order
fully to convince your Grace of the truth of this prin
ciple, I quote here the word n^JTEl [Exod. xxv. 31], the
3 Sing, (f.) Fut. Niph., where the quiescent s is actually
expressed, though this is very seldom the case. This again
is by the Hebrew Grammarians termed 2/11 HJ ,
i.e., a quiescent (whether expressed or understood it
matters not) instead of Dagesh.
6. It was necessary for me to enter into this discussion
in order that I might be enabled to lay before your
Grace the variety of opinion which exists with regard to
the Grammar of the form ~\Ul [Isaiah xxiv. 9] (or
as it seems to have been read by Kimchi and Ben Zev),
and other like forms. All agree that the root is T)D ,
and that the quiescent (understood or expressed after
the Tsayre) supplies the Dagesh which should stand in
theD; and that, consequently, 1D2 (or "ID1]!) stands fori©?:
but as to the Voice to which the word would belong
opinions are divided ; some think that it is Niph-al, and
that the Dagesh in the D stands for the characteristic 3
of this Voice, in which case the word would signify
it (m.) shall be embittered ; but others are of opinion that
it is of the Kal, and that the Dagesh in the D stands for
the omitted second radical, according to the forms "Jpl ,
]"G$ , &c, quoted above (§ 3), when its rendering
would be it (m.) shall be bitter.
7. I will close this Letter by quoting an instance
or two in which S occurs in place of one of the double
letters of the root. Of the Verb DbD to melt away, we
have [Ps. lviii. 8] the 3 Plu. (m.) Fut. Niph. 1D$S? ;
and of TT3 to spoil, we have [Isaiah xviii. 2] the 3 Plu.
Past Kal 18$ •
 LETTER XLI. 465

P.S. (a). In Isai. liv. 1, and a few other instances, we have the
2 Sing. (/.) Imper. Kal (from to sing) ; and in Isa. xliv. 23,
and a few other instances, we find the 2 Plu. (m.) Imper. Kal ;
the Kawmets- Chatuph in each of these forms usurping the place of
Chowlem, the regular forms being f 13T .
P.S. (b). On the form WP^l [Num. xvii. 28] opinions are also
divided : some, taking its root to be DOri , say that it stands for
(agreeing with 132D) ; but the father of Rabbi David Kimchi
assumes the root to be DVl, when of course 13J3P would agree
exactly with the usual form 13J?P_ of the Verbs . This assumption
he most cleverly supports by quoting IP^OO? [Isai. xxxiii. 1] the
Inf. Hiph. with 2 of D b 3 2 and the Possessive Affix 1 — , where
the root is undeniably tJIPI , and in the signification to be at an end,
to finish, as it is also in the above-quoted instance [Numbers
xvii. 28].
P.S. (c). I beg also to mention to your Grace the following
anomalous forms :—
Of PP2 to empty, we find the Converted Past Niph. ni733'j [Isai.
xix. 3] instead of ^23"] or n|?23l ; and
Of 22D to encompass, we find the Niph. [Ezek. xli. 7] instead
of n2D31 or n2D31 . •

P.S. (d). Of the Verb to mix, co?ifound, we find [Gen. xi. 7] the
form nbaai f with regard to which there is a great variety of opinions.
Mendelssohn is inclined to think that it stands for 1 Plu. Fut.
Kal with n Paragogic, and that its signification consequently is
and we will confound, i.e., and let us confound, in which he agrees
with the English Authorized Version.
P.S. (e). In justification of my using the Infinitive Kal as
the root of Verbs in preference to the 3 Sing, (m.) Past
(Letter xxvii. P.S.), I will just observe that here also—as we saw
in the case of the Verbs 1"S (Letter xxxvi. P.S. b)—we have
all three radicals appearing in the Infin. Abs. 23,p > whereas in the
3 Sing. Past Kal 2D one of them is dropped.
466 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE XXX.

(to BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.)

(d* For the plan of the Exercise, see Letter xx. §. 2.

''il.®* W n^'7 'OTTO Sn«

V&tfm : "o^n 'lafc^ "n?7 "fl" 'o^8
n» "Drapi : "b$r$) '\ja "nizbn ,2,|t?i/p

"i3b : nn "nnri "ab Dp1? : "tjpa

17 ]« 24 2* 22 20 .
"d*^ BT#fc> "in n» "3021 : "dndi$ "p3#
82 b 16 SO 29 ; IS 28
pi#3 uapi : Djn nm 78 33p : D^ai
n» "ros&gi "^a "l^aa "yens : ,sDH?iDn

33D? — -inn mp tpd*] : ni.T ^n3tp

: "fpanhg "ds1? n» "niapn nris : "oiis ,0p.8 n^t
+ "ami : "^sp "ttji "^apn : pnp "Vaprn
62 52 61 41 | 4:i . ; 50 • 50 49
: ppn nnsn 373 + 127 rn ]3 dj
Hf 65 54 . 54 . 10 AS . 53
73 ipgai : riaii riair] p.$n piari pisn
ynv
^ _ T N7i. : dtobti
.TT- naps
v " toit: D^D^n •- t - «3¥
t:
7 .* 66 16 65 64 68 t 5 |
: ovnan cyp n3P3 nrnn « qyn 78 f?Bn
»8 . b . 70 , c | 69 a 30 «8 67
ni.T? rnfcq/7 nj? + : ^jn rnila
76 75 74 .1 7S It . 67
: la^titet np vri7p_ ;n : ^nnin ngn
82 nns 80 ]3 80 nn« • 70 nga 51 ntnjjo . 74 i7p
I 77 onatya

87 Vri1?** : "iDi*1 n« ""jv^ "irr$ n» "avs

r>» 89 64 '•a : 88 tan
. .1 68 ?|p#3 86 a^ai 74.77pri
87 j
 LETTER XLI. 467
92 88 88 . , 90 . 90
-iBK'i :">«t« 78n 7tt>8i Tpp + ^-iari -W8
87 96 95 a 94 . b 98 , , 15. 40 /
pp#a rrn dm pinaa 787^. W?
95 • OB 06 93 95 . 98 ,f
DMn ?8 : 7DP T *T nmi
- "T : &Wn VV - 07'i *- : n7"» I T-
104 . 1 101 102 95 , 46 100
onrn : 0:5^8 i^yan m ipn : t|;pj;
I0T 10 106 104 , 105 ,
: onyp TO? : INTO
HI 110 . 108 , t 10 108 104
: ^nxy, s3?8 3p7 : p.«n \q ism
114 »12 00 112 1 13 112 ,1 109 . 112
: urmn 87 ^"is oa i33!?n 8? ap oa
118 11« . II , I 111 . 117 . IK .
125 122 / 120 » 119 .f . 92 . 38 . I
laTtj/ was? ^jaj/7 + orw npiw : mm?
126 125 t St I . 118 , 116 124
138 ovn v?8 m : nnn^n rcjpi ti
132 f 180 _ 129 59; I . 128 127 j
: rnpan ^jir-a 073 77anp + 8frp#i : n7na
136 135 9; 126 59* 114 . 133
: 7837 ^ 7j;p )38n n8 7j;i 3j?j£ t^]
139 138 187 63 7 .» 16
sp : i37an ^ dj/7 rnp§ 3PM
144 . 148 I 140 II a 112., b 140
nwxit * Dntya
t t *■. : ^niDi
.s- : d\d •- iwa -:t: 77a -t
148; 147 65 146 , 140 . 145 t
7ni7 ^3 srn : 7pj?3 i7b;i : Dp;n 78
154 ./ r 148 » . 153 152 Of 150 . J 149
nvyrr?-: - : v?nn *■ : nonsn t t-: t *■ : 7j/- 377t mant tt
159 ■grip + 158 Dnurn 1571/7110 156 D8 : S8 nim?r 155 rribjf t
|«4•>5 163./ 17 168]75in 163 87 .1 162 ras1?» 160j72pj USirftnn » -i&>8
167 , 166 . | 148t 165 182 j ]60, ]60f
D^3 87P7 7mn" T8
t .* V327
tt: 7i£>f) • 7i&3f
172 169 20 , 170 189 . Ifl8 t 38
>npfcn ^37 : M3^ ^71 ^rjv : mm
•4 SS 109 175 174 04 20 173
^3 137 : 83 \33.7 ^ ]V)£ fi3
18S 1>4 , »8 . 1771 04 88 170
T8
t : abp i -. - mm t: 783
-t • mm t: ntoytt
109 188 t 182 . I 160 . 180 179) 178 ,
mfi : 078 \w) prn npa 7*83 aVr
188 88 . t 109 188 I ' 18J i"
njp-13 mm? .73373 137 : ^ity1?
in 180 S0| 109 MS 188 * 187 .
I TV) ^ 7? m) T8 : 13^ 71V1?
468 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
M .c IM » IKi lb 20 . 7 .» 192 . |
: rrirr + 77np : \v)s yip*
It4 . ( 1«T , . 1M 64 M 1«T 195 . i
: 1137 - : OT + 33iM t : • s3 niiT t : CtV
■* f<N 177m : - :
1M Wit IM 1«; t I»5 195f .
: itt i77n : - ppT 77nn! rroan
tt:- 73

1 After.—2 a word, thing.—3 l^tp to subside, to become calm,

or still.—4 [the] wrath of.—6 TT?» a king.—6 to pass.—7 GOD.—
8 wind.—9over, upon, against.— 10 Y~!!? earth, land (the samein Constr.).
—1 1 D>Q water, waters.—12 to., from against ME, i.e., from ME.—13 nabn
murmuring.—14 1? a son.—15 Israel.—16 3-D -^a' t0 turn> turn
round, encompass, go round ; Niph. to be turned, also to be
occasioned, brought about ; Hiph. to cause to turn, to cause to go
round.—17 "VS a city.—18 [it is] enough.—19 ""7 or ~>n a mountain.—
20 Zion.— 22 and encompass it (f.)—23 DV a day ; Plu. .—** the
seventh.—25 seven.—26 times. — 27 Seir. —28 many. — 29 side, quarter
(the same in Constr.).—30 sea, also west.—32p-HD a street.—
33 TBD to mourn.—34 Y^T, to wash. —35 in innocency.—36 ^1? a hand
(properly the palm of the hand) ; Dual D?Q3 .—3? n2Tp an altar.—
38 JEHOVAH.—39 ?fa3 to journey.—40 from Hor.—42 Edom.—43 sb
a heart (the same in Constr. ; with aff. , &c).—44 back, back
again.—45 My face, countenance.—46 VJz an eye ; Dual ^.TH .—*7lit. from
against me, i.e., from before me.—48 and [though] he [be].—49 even.—
80 1? lit- a son of valour, i.e., a valiant man.—61 T7.N and ,7^?
a lion ; Plur. fiv^M .—62 DDtt jV7p/<. to be melted ;fig. to grow faint.
_53 ppa to empty.—54 tVa to despoil.—55 PpE iViipA. to be dissolved.
_56 bs or b| all.—57 [the] host of.—^D^Ettf heaven, heavens.—
Bsbba to roll.—60"l?P a book, scroll.—62 Sbttl to hear.—63 OS a people ;
with aff. "V? , &c.—64 for, because, if, that.—65 nsn to be, to become.
—66 lit. from with, i.e., from.—67"*bB or "ViB Pi. and ZiKpA. to break,
i—68 by Thy strength, power.—69 [it is] time.—70 nt£?3? to do, act ;
also to perform, execute.—72 rnVl a law.—73 behold.—«bbP in Kal
to be light, worthless, vile ; also to be swift ; in Pi. to revile, curse.
—75 what ?—76 shall I return [answer to] THEE ? (i.e., what answer
shall I return to Thee ?)—77 "w? an eagle.—79 "Q2 to be strong.
—80 P ^QM afterwards 82 nhB to open.—83 Job.—84 his mouth.—
85 a judge.—86 ^tM a chief.—88 .KaJ to curse, accurse ; ffoph. to
be accursed.—89 ?'T to know.—90 ~P3 Pi. to bless ; Pm. to be blessed.
_92 "lbs to say.—93 sun.—94 in Gibeon.—98 Dbj to be silent, to be
 LETTER XLI. 469

motionless, to stop, to cease.—96 n"!} moon. —97 in [the] valley of. —

98 Aijalon.—99 *tbs to stand, stand still.—100 [the] pupil of.—
102 until.—103 ?3? Kal to touch ; Hiph. to reach, approach.—104 Q»n
to be at an end, to be complete ; also to fail ; Niph. to be finished, to
be consumed.—105 i"t3tp a year.—106 silver, money.—107 Egypt.—
108 sinners.—109 2h|? to curse.— 110 to hate, to be an enemy to.—
111 1 have called thee (m.)—112 rib D3 rib D3 neither nor—
113 thou (m.) shalt curse him.—114 thou (m.) shalt bless him 116 T*l)5
to incline the head by way of reverence.—1,7B7,H a man.—1I8nn££7
in Hiph. to bow oneself down.—119 peace.—120 "^V a servant {with
off. ""J??, &c.).—122 to our father.—123 he is yet.—124 alive
125 this day, to-day.—126 a stone.—127 great (f.).—128 and Amasa.—
129 on blood.—130 in the midst of.—132 nbpp a high-way.—133 tM$ to
approach.—134 Jacob.—135 [the] mouth of, opening of.—136 1N3 a
well.—137 [by the] way of.—138 "1?71^ a desert, wilderness.—139 who?—
14<> to measure, mete out.—142 in (or with) [the] hollow of his hand.
_i43nb^? work.—144 former (f.).—145 P'D a bosom.—146 with the
homer (a kind of measure).—147 when.—"8bbn in Hiph. to begin;
Hoph. to be begun.—149 a man.—150 3^"} to increase.—152 face of,
surface of.—153 n?"jy ground.—154 i"ibj? Kal to ascend ; Hiph. to
cause to ascend, i.e., to offer up.—155 nb& a burnt-offering.—156 if.—
157 stj gee(j ^tne 8ame in Constr.).—158 the Jews.—159 Mordecai.—
160 bb3 to fall.—162 before him.—103 ib bain «b thou (m.) shalt not
prevail over him.—164 but.— 165 then.—i66 H*lj? to call.—167 at£? a
name (the same in Constr.).—168 bits to exult, cry out for joy.
—169 fin Kal and Pi. to sing, sing with joy.—170 to sit, dwell,
inhabit. — 1?2 H01? to be glad, to rejoice. — 173 daughter of.—
174 behold ME.—incoming. — 176 He has done, executed [it].—
i"VN2 to redeem.—178 ibl Pi. to jump, leap.— 179 b»N a stag,
hart. — 180 a lame [man]. — 182 Titfb a tongue, i.e., ]itt*b .
—i83 a dumb man.—184 n,T12 righteousness (with off. Vi?*!?, &c).
—i85 lit. go ye (answering to the English come .'), from Ijbj to go
186 pyi (n Hiph. to shout, to cry aloud with joy.—187 "IIS a rock (the
same in Constr.).—188 S?£ salvation (with off. ^U?*! , &c.).—
190 a tree. — 191 a forest.—192 bbn Pi. to praise ; Pu. to be
praised.—193 222? in Kal and Mph. to be extolled, exalted.—m lit. by
Himself, i.e., alone.—195 nntpan bs let all the breath (stands here for
" Let all breath," i.e., every thing that breathes).—196 JAH (a Name
of- GOD).
I I
470 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XLII.

Having in my last transmitted to your Grace an Exer

cise upon the Geminata, which form the last class of the
Verbs generally termed Irregular, I have now to treat of
another set of Verbs which might with equal propriety
be denominated Doubly Irregular.
We have seen (Letter xxxi. § 2) that a Verb deviates
from the Conjugation of the Regular Verb "Tp2 , —

I. When its first radical is either 2 ( ), or K

or "> ( vfi ) ;
II. When the second radical is a quiescent 1 ( TV ) ;
III. When the third radical is either 8 ( ), or H
quiescent ( ni,l7 ) ;
IV. When the second and third radicals are the same
letter (D^IDS Geminata).
Now, as a Verb may happen to be affected in two of
these ways at once, we shall have to consider the follow
ing classes of combinations: —
I. Verbs of 2"D and Y'tf ; 3"2 and X"b ; and J"2
and n'"7 .
II. Verbs of K"2 and N"D and H"b; and S"2
and D"b .
III. Verbs of **B and K"1? ; v'2 and r\"b (of V'Q
and 1"J7 there are none).
IV. Verbs of YV and H"1? (of XJJ and n"h there are
none).
V. Verbs of 3"2 and Dv1&3 (Geminata).
VI. Verbs of N"2 and D^ID? (Geminata).
VII. Verbs of v'£3 and D^ID? (Geminata).
 LETTER XLII. 471

These, my Lady Duchess, are the cases we have

to consider, and we will take them in the order in which
they are here arranged; but only forms that actually occur
in The Bible will, in general, be given, by the help
of which your Grace will doubtless now be able to form
for yourself the remaining parts of the several verbs.

2. CLASS I.

3"2 and 1"J7 .

Verbs of this sort, though perhaps the most numerous

of any of the Doubly Irregular Classes, do not require
any particular notice, since no one of them ever drops
the first radical, but, on the contrary, they all, in those
forms of them which occur, follow the Conjugation of
Dip which was taken as the standard of the Verbs TJJ .
Thus, for example, the verb D13 to flee (which is to be
found only in the Kal and Hiph-et) gives the following
forms:—

KAL.

Infin. Absol. DiJ ; with D b 3 3 , Dttb , &c.

Past D3 , HD2 , &c.

Partic. Pres^Di , ilpa , &c.
Imper. D13 , &c.
Fut. Dir , &c.

HEPH-EL.

Infin. D^n , D^n? , &c.

Past D^H , &c.
Fut. , &c.
i i 2
472 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Verbs of this class having for their third radical n or

J}, of course take Pathach Furtivum in all those
forms in which these letters are preceded by Tsayre,
Long-Chtrik, Chowlem, or Shtirik (Letter xxx. § 10) ;
thus, for example, ni3 to rest, gives in the Future Kal
nir; and in the Hiph-il, Past rr?n &c., Future )T£ &c.

3"5 and X"1? .

Niph., to prophesy ; Hithp., to train oneself to
prophesy; also, to pretend to prophesy.

NIPH-AL.
Infin. H3JJJ* &c.
Past , n«35 , &c.
Partic. N33 , &c.
Imper. , &c.
Fut. K3£ &c.

HITHPA-AL.
Infin. S33nn *, K33r»n3 , &c.
Past »33f?n , r\«33^n , &c.
Partic. Pres. H22T}D , &c.
Fut. N33JT, &c.

* We find the anomalous forms VTlMMnS [Zech. xiii. 4] Inf.

Niph., and niMipnp [1 Sam. x. 13] Inf. Hithp.
 LETTER XLII. 473

Niph. to be deceived, Hiph. to deceive.

Niph. Past , &c. ; Hiph. Past VtyQ , &c. ;

Fut. W# , &c.

NtlO to bear, to lift up.

KAL.
Infin. Abs. KfcO (Constr. Kfr? and n$V) , n$ty2 ,
nxfrb, &c.
Past SlMT T ,? riXîW
T T T ,' &c.
Partie. Pres. , &c.
Partie. Past KlfeO , &c.
Imper. Nfr (and NtW * ), , &c.
Fut. Xty], &c.

NIPH-AL.
Infin. KfetëÇI, KtMPî3, &c.
Past St^3 , &c.
Partie. K&J, &c.
Imper. X&on , &c.
Fut. XlW. , &c.
PI-ÂL.
Past N&J and XtW , &c.
Partie. ( KfyjÇ j, O^SÇ , &c.
Imper. K&J , &c.
Fut. X'm) , &c.

HIPH-ÊL.
Past ( atyn ), wfrn

* By anomaly HM [Ps. iv. 7], according to Kimchi.

474 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HITHPA-AL.

Infin. Nfc^nn , Kfcttnna , &c.

Past Ktyjnn , &c.
Partic. Pres. K^?np , &c.
Fut. Kfr3JV , &c. '

3"D and n"b .

HT3 Kal, to gush out, to be sprinkled ; Hiph., to sprinkle.

KAL.
Future Hf. , apocopated P ; with 1 Convers. P] .

HIPH-EL.
PastnjH, &c.
Partic. Pres. PIJD, &c. •
Imper. Hjn , &c.
Fut. nf. , with 1 Convers. PI , &c.

nnj to lead, guide.

As this Verb in no instance drops the first radical

(2), it agrees exactly with lity, the standard of the
Verbs D"1? , in all the forms in which it occurs.
 LETTER XLII. 475

Hb3 to extend, incline, also to decline.

KAL.
Infin. Constr. niEOJ , JYta , &c.
Past ntpj , nneg , &c.
Partic. Pres. hbl , &c.
Partic. Past MEMt 7, mC03
t : 3, &c.
Imper. HCD? , &c.
Future T\t$\ , &c, apocopated t£P , with 1 Convers. DM .

NIPH-AL.
Past ( n^J ), TDJ , &c.
Fut. njp|i , &c.

HIPH-EL.
infin. niton , nitsng , &c.
Past HDH , &c.
Partic. Pres. H®D , &c.
Imper. Pl&3n , &c. ;* apocopated ton .
Fut. &c. ; apocopated £0? ; with 1 Convers. DM.

H33 Niph., Pu., and Hoph., to be smitten ;

Hiph., to smite.

Niph. Past .133 , &c.

Pu. (.133) , nnsj , &c.
f Past nsn
t x ', nnsn
T ; x ,* &c.
Hoph. ■ Partic. Past !"I3D > &c.
[Fut. n%, &c."
476 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HIPH-EL.
Infin. Absol. H3H , Const. HiSH , iriSHS , &c.
Past nar» , &c.
Partic. Pres. HSp , &c.
Imper. i"Grt , &c, apocopated fH .
Fut. &c, apocopated ^ , and with 1 Convers. ^1
(in some instances PI3?1 ).

DD2 Pi., to try.

This Verb, being used only in the Pi-dl—when, of

course, it cannot drop the 3 (Letter xxxii. § 1*),—agrees
with fl1?! , the Standard Verb of n"7 ; the only thing
that here requires notice being that the 2 Sing. Masc.
Imperative Pi-dl D2 occurs once [Dan. i. 12] instead of
npj.

i"l!f3 to flee, to fly, to quarrel, to strive.

This verb, in every instance in which it occurs in the
KAL,
follows exactly the Conjugation of fhjl , and signifies
to flee, to fly ; also to be laid waste :—in the

NIPH-AL,
it signifies to quarrel.
Partic. ( n^3), , where the 3 is, of
course, the characteristic of the Voice, the first radical
being implied by the Dagesh in the ¥ .
The Fut. agrees With that of n?j& .

* The last line of the Paragraph.

 LETTER XLII. 477

The Niph. Participle of this verb is sometimes used in

the sense of laying waste :—in the

HEPH-EL,
the verb signifies to strive.
inf. niin , riijfna , &c.
Past (nyn), '. wri , &c.

np>3 Kal and Niph., to be pure, innocent ; Pi., to declare

innocent, acquit.

KAL.
Only once found, in the Infin. Absol. flpj .

NEPH-AL,
Infin. nj?3n .
Past !"]j?3 , &c. (the 3 here is the characteristic of the
Voice, the first radical being implied by the Dagesh in
the p ).
Imper. i"lj?3n , &c.
Fut. nj?3\ &c.

PI-AL.
As in this Voice the 3 cannot be dropped, the Verb
■will agree with libz in those forms in which it is found
(Letter xxxii. § 1).
478 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nfc'} Kal, to forget, also to lend ; Hiph., to cause to

forget, also to lend.
KAL.
Past (natt), , vtf: , &c.
Partic. Pres. one lending, &c.

NIPH-AL.
Fut. H^IP he shall be forgotten, &c.

HIPH-EL.
In this Voice the verb signifies to cause to forget, also
to lend.
Past Ae caused to forget, &c.
Partic. Pres. H^D owe lending, &c.
Fut. wt7Z Zend, &c.

3. CLASS II.
K"2 and Y'J/ .
pi< in Hithp., to complain, grumble.
Partic. (piNtfE), D^JlKflP
Fut. , &c
This Verb is not used in any other Voice. Some of
the modern Lexicographers assume the root to be |JX ,
but it is given here according to the root assigned to it
by Kimchi and Ben Zev, greater authority than whom
can hardly be imagined.
 LETTER XLII. 479

yiS Kal, to hasten (Intrans., excepting only one instance

[Exod. v. 13], where the Participle Kal occurs in a
Transitive sense) ; Hiph., to urge on.

KAL.
Past yk , vny» , &c
Partic. Pres. . D^K .

HIPH-EL.
Fut. (f$:), w1**:, , —

IIS Kal, to shine, to be clear ; Niph., to be light, to be

shone upon ; Hiph., to cause to shine, to enlighten.

KAL.
Past H8 , nl* , &c.
Partic. Pres. , &c.
Imper. (Ii8), "HlS , &c.
Fut. (lis;) npl»%

NDPH-AL.
Infin. (ilHO), "lis!? (for llKtjfo.
Partic. HSJ .
Fut. nix: .
HIPH-EL.
Infin. T^H, TXH5? , &c.
Past Tijtrj , &c.
Partic. Pres. T^D , &c.
Imper. , &c.
Fut. TRJ and 1$ , TW*» , ITijP, &c.
480 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

K"2 and X"b .

NnN to come, arrive.
KAL.
Past WJ$ , C1 Plu- for
Fut. 3 Sing. Masc. with 1 Convers. Kffi! (for »n$£l).

X"2 and iY1? .

H2N fo 6e willing, to consent.
KAL.
Past ."OK , 13$ , &c
Partic. Pres. (H^S) . D^3K , &c.
Fut. n^W , H3Sn (for which we find [Prov. i. 10] the
very anomalous form N3ri).

HIS to desire.
The 1 in this Verb is not quiescent, but heard in pro
nunciation; this Verb is used only in Pi-dl and
Hilhpa-dl, and in the forms of it which occur it agrees
exactly with the Conjugation of !i'7| , the standard of the
Verbs T)"b .

riVs Kal, to curse, to swear ; Hiph., to cause to swear,

to adjure.
KAL.
inf. ribx
T ,* &c.
Past (nSN), n^X (thou /.) ,
 LETTER XLII. 481

HIPH-EL.
infin. tfbxn , ribxn) , &c.
Fut. with 1 Convers. bm .
This Verb in the Kal has also the signification to
lament ; but in this sense it occurs only once, viz., the
2 Sing. (/.) Imper. Kal [Joel i. 8].

Kal, to lament ; PL, to chance to bring ; Pu., to

happen ; Hithp., to seek occasion.

This Verb, in all the forms in which it occurs, agrees

with ri^| the standard of the Verbs n"b .

Kal, to bake ; Niph., to be baked.

KAL.
Past , &c.
ParticVres. n^X, niDK .
Imper. IDS (2 Plu. Masc. for 12$).
Fut. n$x\
NIPH-AX.
Fut. n^, n$xr\ , nr^ri ,

KAL.
IDS to pluck, to gather.

Past (n-m), vrm ,

482 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nns Kal, to come ; Hiph., to cause to come, i.e., to bring.

KAL.
Past nrm ,
Imper. Vrw (2 Plu. m. for iriH).
Fut. nrw, nmri (3 Sing./, for njngn) , vnw
(3 Plu. m^for 'iriN:) , n«H (3 Sing. tk. Con
verted, for nngn or niw).

HEPH-EL.
Imper. Vflp (2 Plu. m. for WKn or inXH).

4. CLASS III.
V'D and N',£7 .

£flZ, to go out ; Hiph., to cause to go out, to bring

out; Hoph., to be caused to go out, to be brought out.

KAL.
Infin. Abs. XT; Cohstr. flKV , rii*V3, &c.
Past , nxy; , &c.
Partic. Pres. wfr, (Sing./.), &c.
Imper. K¥ , , &c.
Fut. «VO , &c

HEPH-EL.
infin. iryin , wyin1? , &c
Past wyln , rmyin , nayin , &c.
Partic. Pres. ItfjriD (once »yiO), D^yiD
Imper. Kyifl (once Wfl), Win , &c.
Fut. ioyv and Kyi"1 , IPylfl and NyiJn , , &c.
 LETTER XLII. 483

HOPH-lL.
Past (syin), rrsyin , &c
Partic. \t*Wnh 'n»yiD (Sing. /) D^D ,
nisma
T .

ST Kal, to fear j Niph.,to be feared ; Pi., to frighten.

KAL,
Infin. Constr. XI), tiH] (more frequently HST1?).
Past XT , flKT , flKT , &c.
Partic. Pres. KT , . . . . lTKT (this Participle when
used concretely as a Noun, in the sense of a fearer, takes
in Construction the form NT for the Sing, (m.), and
HJT for the Plu. m.).
Imper. 1ST. ,
Fut. RT\STn , &c'

NIPH-AL,
Partic.
Fut. sn1jsiw,T&c.
kt,\ , n*nij , &c.
"T * * *T • '

PI-AL,
Infin. (ST), KT1? .
Past (ST), 1ST,
Partic. Pres. (KTO), .' D^TJQ .

V'D and H"1? .

iTP Hiph., to afflict.
Past ruin .
Partic/Pres. (HJia) D^lD .
Fut. found only 2 Plu. (?».) with | Paragogic .
484 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

HT Kal and Pi., to cast, throw ; Hiph., to praise, also

to confess ; Hithp., to confess oneself.

KAL.
Found only in the Imper. 2 Plu. (m.) IT .

PI-AL.
Infin. with hoiub 22, MlT^ .
Past, only found in the 3 Plu. IT (probably for IT).
Fut., only found in the 3 Plu. (m.) Converted 11*1
(probably for IT^T).

HIPH-EL.
infin. niTin , niTlng , &c.
Past (iTjin), mn , wtfn ,
Partic. Pres. iTJiD , DTlD ,
Imper. HlH (2 Plu. *».).
Fut. iTTi"' , iTjIfl , &c.

HITHPA-AL.
infin. (ni*nirin), renins , &c.
Past rninn , mnn ,
Partic. Pres. iTnitf D ff*n#9 .
Fut. rrwv , &c.

n;p .Ka? and Hiph., to oppress.

KAL.
Partic. Pres. nil'1 (Sing. Fern.)
Fut. (n$«), . /. . . nyg ,
 LETTER XLII.

HIPH-EL.
infin. (nSin) , njin1?.
Past njln , u1n
ParticVres. (flJiD), D^1D .
Put. njl\ njin', &c.

HEP i£aZ, to be beautiful ; Pi., to beautify ; Hithp., to

beautify oneself.
KAL.
Past (n^)
V T T-/ jtd1
*T is:T
Fut. (apocopated for fip^) , with T Conversivum
3 Sing, (m.), 2 Sing.'(/.).

PI-AL.
Fut. n£:?

HITHPA-AL.
Fut. (H^JT) TOfl 2 Sing. Fem.

HT Jal, to ^row, shoot ; Niph., to be shot; Hiph., to

throw, shoot, also to instruct.
KAL.
Infin. PIT , ril'T^ .
Past rr£ ,
Partic. Pres. nTP ...... Dn.V
Imper. DT
Fut. (rn^j, HT3
K K
486 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

NIPH-lL.
Fut. m«
VT*

HIPH-EL.
(In the acceptation to throw, shoot.)

Past rrjln
Partic. Pres. iTTlO , DniD
Fut. rni"1 (with i Cowv. li'i) , . . . rni« , .

(In the signification to instruct.)

Infin. with "? of D h 3 3 , rhiH1? .
Past rn1n Tnin and vv-rin,
Partic. Pres. TllD DniO
Imper. TTfin , . Din
Fut. rrvr , rn1« , &c.

5. CLASS IV.

TV and K'b .

Ki3 Kal, to come; Hiph., to cause to come, i.e., to bring;

Hoph., to be caused to come, i.e., to be broughf.
KAL.
Infin. Ki3 and S3 , K33 , XOh and Xhb .
Past , nxa , risa , &c.
Partic. N3, n#3, &c
Imper. N3 and K13 , ^3 and ^13 , &c
Fut. sir,
T ' sin
T *, n:x2n
T T ,' &c
 LETTER XLII. 487

HIPH-EL.
Infin. Kr?n , Wiy) . &c.
Past and
yiKan s^n, nx^n,
"■nfrgn , also rman
v?K3n ,and
&c. rton,
T

Partic. Pres. U*p212

Imper.
Fut. ipj; , .T , &c. nr^ajn, &c.

HOPH-AL.
Past sain , nxan (for nxnin 3 Sing. /.), naznn
(2 Sing, jw.), . . . /. 183in . . .
Partic. K31D OTjQlO ,
Fut. K3V, &c.

Sip to ^row out (by vomiting).

This Verb, in the forms which occur of the Hiph-Sl
Voice, agrees with Ni3 just noticed. It is doubtful
whether this Verb is used in the Kal, as the forms
which are by some referred to Nip , are by others, with
perhaps more propriety, referred to HKp .

CLASS V.

3"3 and D^ISS (Geminata).

222 Kal, to make hollow.
Found only in the Past Participle Kal Sing, (m.)
2122 hollowed, i.e., hollow.
K K 2
488 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

112 Kal, to move, wander, flee ; Hoph., to be caused to

move, to be chased away.
KAL.
Infill Tip . In all other forms of this Voice, in which
the Verb occurs, it is conjugated like $22 , the standard
for the Verbs 3"D .

HOPH-AL.
In this Voice the forms found correspond also to
those of $22T .
Some Lexicographers wish to use this Verb also in
the Hithpa-dl, and to make it then agree with 220 ; it
is, however, very doubtful, whether forms such as
TTU]>1 , n*]ijnn , &c, wherever they occur, ought not
rather to be traced to the Verb TO , which also signifies
to remove, wander.

DD2 Kal and Pi., to raise (a standard) ; Hithp., to raise

oneself up.
This Verb in the Kal is only used in the Pres. Partic.
Sing, (m.) Dpi3 ; in the Pi-dl and Hithpa-dl those forms
of it which occur, agree with the corresponding forms of
22D , the Standard Verb of the D^IBJ ( Geminata).

7. CLASS VI.
X"D and D^ID? {Geminata).
Kal, to encompass.
This Verb is used only in the Kal, and the forms in
which it occurs agree with the Regular Verb *Tp2) .
 LETTER XLII. 489

tPtPK Hithp., to show oneself manly.

This Verb occurs only once [Isai. xlvi. 8] in the
2 Plu. (m.) Imper. Hithp. l&WXjpH for IS^N^n .

8. CLASS VII.
"•"D and D^ISl? (Geminata.)

3T Pi., to cry aloud.

Found only in the 3 Sing. (/.) Fut. Converted 33W .

br Hiph., to lament.
Pasted
Imper. b^H , , &c.
Fut. ^ ^b.:*? l^yji ,

9. We have one Verb which might be said to be 3"S ,

V'J7 , and N"1? , all at the same time, viz., the Verb ,
which is only used in the Hiph-il, and then signifies to
disallow ; in the forms in which it occurs, it agrees with
those of Ni3 to come, given above 5).
10. Your Grace will have perceived that some of the
Verbs noticed in this Letter, independently of their being
Doubly Irregular, are also Defective ; to use therefore
such Verbs in composition, in any forms besides those
which actually occur in The Bible, would be a
very questionable practice ; at least no one of any taste
would think of so doing.
There are, however, other defective Verbs which any
490 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

good Lexicon will give, besides the above-mentioned, as,

for instance, the Verb "l^1 to go, which in the Kal can
only be used in the Infinitive Constructive fQ^ , ,
&c. ; the Imperative ^7 , "O1? , &c. ; and the Future
^j!?- 1 T?!? > &c- '< wr the Infinitive Absolute, the Past
Tense, and the Present Participle, the synonymous Verb
"•f/H must be used.
11. Again, the Verb bb) to be able, in the Kal has
no Future, and in the Hoph-dl can be used only in the
Future, blV , &c, which, strictly speaking, means
he will be caused to be able, i.e., be made able, or
be enabled.
In conclusion, I beg to apologise for the scantiness of
assistance given to the Exercise hereto annexed. This,
I can assure your Grace, is not from any slacken
ing in the endeavours to promote your advance in
the study on the part of him who has the honour
of being your instructor, but because he feels con
vinced from the satisfactory manner in which you
have succeeded with the preceding Exercises, that the
time has now arrived when it will be expedient to afford
your Grace an opportunity of trying your own resources
with the assistance of your Hebrew Lexicon. Words
therefore that may without difficulty be traced to the
forms in which they occur in the Lexicon will be
unnoticed in the Notes, and many helps which were
given in the former Exercises will be henceforth omitted.
Indeed, the less the help now given to your Grace, the
more will your advance in the Language be promoted.
 LETTER XLII. 491

EXERCISE XXXI.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF A

HEBREW LEXICON.)

-t na 'ji-idki
t:-t: 2K33n
"t* : 2n:u
t■ owaa
*i • nam
D3n« Vwfc 7$ : n?an "^ina 'rjmw : niT
nx '^i? "Npip : 'n»T 'spyig *3 ^ : f,nOT

12fihflDX nx : "«ri*i t<3*k fix : u/an

px "n^aj x1?! : ViNfr "yhzv "iu/$3 75k "twftijn
: Tpn
'* " 17|?s
V noio
T T■ "m
*- : onx
T 'mfc1?
" T "ormuo:
\2 : njrp "^bS "d^cj/s Din jp "mni
28 . 22 21 20 Id
TO "HPS ">¥ D1P?a "^H : D"1?"! D"na nr
: o;n by ?jt fix Mnt?a : 7KDip pp; "m'toa1?

: "19 "nptfE 7x1 "naj? mean "nag

: opj pnsstn ^*nfli, : it fix pnx en
, 2* 32 24 .t SI .1
itt n^ mrm t - : oarx tit nxv itsn■ xri: ij/ca> : T X7
» M 1 24 34 asI ** • S3/
73t 337
- : HXt B)*l : "IWt 72)31 -t ; nrtff
■• 7^31
- t :
S2 24 ■• . • f 24 t7
D??m ibpj : Tfynj; 7X "37 ton : utt
73 nx "cnyia px 733 "nan "ti : ^x "13^1
mi^n
v t - atyi;
v 73
t nxi
*- : nnna
t - : njn
- : dtxd
t t *■ nnfra
v t - "i^x
v -:
*W?x
t • -: 7SV 487Si^
" T; • ybn
1 VV Sdx'i
V : "nan
TT - "nan
T •
"nari x1? Sidx'',i ^ "nas "naxn cnix 'inx-ia
pn.1? "oty "naia nnx "?|f4?>p_3i "^s-ins "tvitf -i^xn
S3 . J 40 f 52 50 t . 49 ;
: dtj-tx 7X i37?i in^yi 173^1 DTaa? d^di
492 HEBHEW GRAMMAR.
M"i33« ink "nj?si "^r>v%n n« "nisnD "173 **aiitfai

: nav t iwn 7j/- ttfotsM

v v - ^ni
1 -- : 7i8ttf
t ^27 •• ; • m^a^i
• :-
"nptnn nonSpn M^aa "710 h78 "nms n8 Ki3n
'tt -i - t t : • - v t • T
• • • "nnsa mifim : "noi "nsai "nnsp "onac^

"Dt|htt> "nan : "133 87 mp^>3ni nisnrn

"nipy "13*1 : Van "tT^ ngrn : ttfy

narn : rnfya "oiratf "iy|?i "o^aa "otp ' ^nnat?1?!

-itt>« • • • • 80 dtqki 79 jrn : 78 o^ya 78 onaj/ IS D^aK N?tf

yx : rnj? n^a pn» tyi nt^e 7j;

87 86 .1 85 t
-ipart : ti d"T8 |al8rv no : nj?r 87 T^j/n?
M ft f 4* I 89 t . IS 88
a»vt nrin
t : - - 72t 137*1
:"- : in?»:s D^tvasm
-t-:t: ti8
92 .1 f 91 1 88 . 18
nty»n
t * t na»n
v 87 s7i«
- : inana
1 : v : cn7 v t -iK'i ■■- ihmki t t _: -
50 J SI 92 93 40 t t
: i73xn p«n aito cnyn^i i38n dk : nns n377
ntfg pyan n» "latfi : Djj/n n$ *V]8^ M7^i

: -nana - - "naKn v t •• itf8 v -: nnao T.: ' 73t : "on^so* - : • • "iiwrtn

t 99 a b 98 a b 97 .
: nn^ naiD3 D3T8"! M^na n8fco 833
• • • • 102 ICP33 74 ^a 181 iBD8?i : 100 na8#n B6 n8* n#7 * anj^
M8¥ "dip nny : 4,78nt^ "aa D«y nnrhnh "mvsb
r t - " t : • •* : ' t t; • - - t
104 109 , S Bfl
: ;vy niaa na^-ii na^v * nwn p.8n ]p
M . 105 96 *
«vn : T^t^n ova icpap w 78
: 197 mp7»7f 54 aty; . inn, 98 8}?n • 106 . f norna? t I
1 88 t 48t . 109 t 108 96
78 ija? : ivnitn nj; 730 D^an na»vm
nnrn : 0^178.1 "■>3B7 131 M8^in7 '""ino'1
t - : v.* t ■• : • t t : "- :
42 4*7 .75 96 40 7
: insfBD
• t ; • • 78i^ *- t ; • ^a3 "; w - - n8 v «vini
« : _ .137t ;
 LETTER XLII. 493

1 nW ^93 "W^ ^rfts ^9*1

wrrj : nnnsn Vyifi ->#S Tin * • ' ' fi$C Ti? 3Ti

: ^3 \2# '"iti "**n niaa '"inpv : "ns^pn D^yo

n« -ntfs nan... : "5-iain 7K_ naD7si
t t : - : Din^t -ia
120 119 . • • 118 .f 117 116 . f
: vr»v?n "spis? irja} 113373
120*■mas
.117^jni nisan nn^
122) . 121 .121 U ,I » . 120* .

p
I - 71/- nim T : itth T T I aito : "m* VT' "nTT is ",7pB,> I" T •
124
• • • • wapp 73 ns jn^i I 128 : ^Tna D^ran 121 rnT»
97 , 127 126 12S t 97 t
nns S3 : ]jtU3 nyis vn» prw Ts sia7
: nann 7« J • • • • 129 na. 97 fan . : nann 7K . 128 ^a 731 t
» 131 97 f 5 ISO . J
ny?nn ns ffan? no» ^nia'nx ^7i3n
1SS 97 97 .r 182 t
nnaat:* ncnsn -tt-:t nao •:■ rp san •• t- : nsa t it kti: voa1? it:
185 . . C b 97 d 114; a 1
ias¥ m-i33p sin dj wyn 73m : mm?
* t 97 t 1ST 136 t
TIT! vJ? 13 v ^stpn no : ins™*)
139 .97 t, 198 t
nan
-• • :t onso S3 t ntv "*a : nrra
t : nsan t t -J wnao
• :- ; -
143 142 . . 97 108 . 140}
cay 1310 irny : ]&fn dj/ nsa ina Trn
,2"in^3 7j/ -)t#6 '-ia>] : i»«n dj; "nss "*br\r\:
18
■3 uwMft 14S iKn^i : njvan 13 D^asn ns 97 S3n
128
. • t -: t : ■- t 1- - • t -: t v •• t
97 148 147 . 128 97
nans ~ina irae s?an : sjpr ms tfain
12 . «4 149 149* 5 . .
wnnnasa a#n s-psn na"i 71/ nasn : ?|7333
1M •nvj • • • • 151 hup Di7ri3 .1 : 07 D^saia unas IH n?n]-i3 I
lis ... 1" I I I 1 153 .
vj?n : mn*; dv anj? s3 !77n J nT7 ;v?rt3
154t t » 187 . t 114 t * 156
7^ 137 : pr w 73 iT'Trn 1331 dhis?
162 . 101 20 . 1<0 199 . »•
rnatfno s^an o^ia nyj^ Tan nin^ : 3Sid
494 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

7H : P9KAT? IT K71 : u^rpi!

"7312 k? : ,2'v3» nx '"nt^S -gran "I??'p 16V"r$
1M 145 157; # 1M I . 1
n« Tano
. . ir ms ..T 7KU0Bn
... : vrxn . T ya... nirn:•
170; . 145 169 . j
ns 7T^n )9 ^wr ^ : 7$ rr»*isn
171 145 ITS 3 171 10S
intone
.... ikt^at • : tran • - ikt :* : viko • . •• Tmua
1 v .
1U 174 .
*\1$t! ^ • ^ Wl ^ nJn: n5n'3
75 . 17* 145 175 f »
» ITT . , I f 114 . . . j
M3 mauty 7a n$ vSj; rninn^ Tin tj^ii mi by
: mrn wa ^ mix vno» : 7*n£F>
^3 wrhxn \i7s!? ,Mnin : nirr n$ "Vrrte '"oj/an
182 . 181 1 >
: - t :

1 Thy (m.) lovers, thy friends.—2 N23 iVipA. to prophesy ; Hithp. to

prophesy, to train oneself to prophesy, also to pretend to prophesy.—
3nN"J to see.—4 prophets.—5 "IBM to say.—6Nt£?3 Hiph. to deceive.—
7 Hezekiah.—8 NtM to bear, carry, lift up.—9 V? an eye j Dual ._
"> Cflp to rise.—11 *ft>» /faZ to be full of ; Pi. to fill, fill with.—12 [the]
sacks of.—13 8*"*? a man ; Plu. ._u bb; .fiTaZ to be able ; ZTopA. to
be caused to be able, i.e., to be enabled, to be able.—15 their (m.) sojourn-
ings.—16 nM Kal to gush out ; Hiph. to sprinkle.—17 stands for 7? upon.
—18 times.—19 before.—20 nations, heathen.—21 many.—22 TOV to stand.
—23 narrow.—24 <"lt03 Kal to incline, decline, stretch out ; Hiph. to
cause to incline, also to extend.—25 H3|7 to get.—26 from [the] words of.
—27 my mouth.—28 Aaron.—29 and she saw me.—30 before me.— 31 ?l3tt?
to hearken, listen, obey.—32 an ear {with off. > &c.),— 33^3
to stumble.—34 "fo to help, assist.—35 VC3 to fall.—36 [the] heart o£—
37 Judah.—38 2? a heart {with off. N?7, &c.).—39 HI? a testimony
(root "TW).—wjV1 to go, to come.—41 H33 Hiph. to smite; 2V?pA. and
Hoph. to be smitten.—42 Egypt.—43 Israel.—44 Elisha.—45 nhtp to
take captive.—46 27.n a sword {with off. ^10, &c).—47ri27|7. a
bow (wid off. ,n#|7, &c.).—48 put, set.—49 before them.—50 bbs to eat.
 LETTER XLII. 495

—52 nhttf to drink.—63 tlieir (m.) master (the Plural Number being
used by way of excellency).—54 3W to return, turn back.—55 David.
—56 the Philistine.—57 Opb to take.—58 Abner.—59 and caused him to
come, i.e., and brought him.—60 Saul.—61 Jonah. —62 3i"P to give,
set, put.—63 Uriah.—64 N?? 'WB against the front of.—65 the
strong (f.). —66 from behind him.—67 riiD to die. — 68 Ephraim.—
69 EhtD1' a root (with aff. ^-]W , &c.).—70 "OS a servant (with aff.
•>^3», &c; Plu. D"»13^).-Ji llflW an officer.—72 HD3 Pi. to try,
prove.—73 St1 a day (Plu. D,p;).—74 nn?E> a handmaid (with aff.
Tin?!?, &c). 75 1 3 a son (with aff. &c. ; Plu. D^S).
.—76 n23 JfaZ, Niph., and /Zip/*, to quarrel, strive.—77 both of them.
—78 Hebrews. — 79 Dathan. — 80 and Abiram.—81 Moses.—82 rny a
congregation (in Constr. rflV , root "TCP ).—m Korah.—84 Kal to
hasten.—85 "1271? JfaZ and i??pA. to enrich, also to be rich.—86 Hp3
.ZvaZ and Niph. to be pure, to be innocent.—87 PN Hithp. to complain.
—88 -lis Kal to shine, to be clear ; Niph. to be light, to be shone
upon ; Hiph., to enlighten. —89 ATaZ to send ; Pi. to send away.
—90 Joab.—91 in Hebron.—92 H2N to be willing, to consent, agree.
—93 after me.—94 rtbN Kal to curse, to swear ; Hiph. to cause to
swear, to adjure.—95 fTES to bake.—96 Kal to go out ; Hiph. to
cause to go out, to bring out ; Hoph., to be caused to go out, to be
brought out.—97 Ni2 and N2 Kal to come, enter ; Hiph. to cause to
come, i.e., to bring ; Hoph. to be caused to come, i.e., to be brought.—
9« in? fear (with aff. ^H? , &<!.)•—99 TIN to come, to arrive.—
100 the [women] drawing [water].—101 ICS to gather.—102 Benjamin.
_io3 n? a daughter (with aff. "'fl? , &c. ; Plu. ni32 )._iw zion
105 ErtpB a place (with aff. "^PP , &c.).—106 thy (m.) enemies
lor naiM ground, earth (with aff. S*»T»J , &c.).—108 n^S a woman ;
Plu. D^3 .—109-11^ a city ; Plu. Bn$ ._"»"inO Pi. to hasten, to be
in haste, to be rash.—111 StlpTto call, call for.—112n»2 to cutoff.—113my
life.—114 TP Kal and Pi. to cast ; Hiph. to praise, aZso to confess ;
Hithp. to confess oneself, to confess.— 115 HS^ Kal and Hiph. to oppress.
—116 in Lebanon.—U7 HQ"1 to be beautiful.—118 Vlfc greatness (tc&A
<# "l^7?> &c.).—119 his boughs.—120 1^1? to give, place, put.—
12* INS "TN232 very much, exceedingly.—121 HnJ Kalto throw, shoot;
Niph. to be shot ; Hiph. to throw, to shoot, also to instruct, guide.
496 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
_imV|5D to pelt, to stone.—123 2H3 to lead.—124 his cattle.—125 Isaac.
—126 his father.—127 Canaan.—128 iT3 a house, a household (with aff.
WJ, &c.).—129 Noah.—130 Ahasuerus.—131 Vashti.—132 before him.
—133 Cain.—134 and Abel.—136 from the firstlings of.—136 and from
[the] fat of them (f.).—137 Ntan to sin.—138 my kingdom.—139 from
Edom.—140 Rachel —142 while he was [yet].— 143 131 Pi. to speak.—
i« KT to fear, be afraid.—147 Joseph.—148 behold Me 149 ^? on
account of.—160 at the first.—181 ffO to fly, fly away.—152 T13 Kal to
move ; Hoph. to be caused to move, to be chased away.—163 like a vision
of. —164 Hiph. to lament.—155 awake ye (m.).—156 H32 to weep.—
i57rintpto drink.—,58Moab. — '59"liS Hiph. to break, frustrate.—
160 [the] counsel of.—161 Hiph. to disallow.—162 [the] thoughts of.—
i«3 pcN Hithp. to restrain oneself.—164 my lord.— 165 3V37 to leave.—
166 [the] face of.—167 and Samuel.—168 "tt3 Hiph. to declare, tell.—
169 Eli.—170 to take away violently.—171 from me.—172 many.—
173 nbs to trust.—174 and my salvation.—176 in order that.—176 "nbo
to lay, to put.—177 [the] iniquities of.—178 poetical form for ^? , lit.
upon, here with reference to.—179 my trespasses.—180 this once, now.
181 for ever.— 182 TPO mercy, kindness (with aff. ,,rPn f &c.).
 LETTER XLIII. 497

LETTER XLIII.

As soon as we concluded the Elementary Part, I

took an early opportunity, when first entering upon
the consideration of the Language itself, to intimate
to your Grace (Letter xvi. § 1), that one principal
cause of the conciseness of the Hebrew Language
consists in its making use of Prefixes and Affixes
to express complete words. The Exercises through
which your Grace has gone hitherto have, I doubt not,
sufficiently shown you how many words are spared in
this way. The new feature I am now about to disclose
to you is, that the letters DM3 D H (Letter xix. § 4),
by which the Possessive Pronouns are uniformly ex
pressed, may also be used to express Objective Pronouns.
Thus, for example, when we wish to express He visited
him, the full form for which would of course be
initf T^S , we may, by way of elegance and brevity,
express it by i"Tj?? or UTTj?^ .
2. Independently of the Table which I shall have the
honour of annexing to this Letter, I think that it will be
advisable at once to present to your Grace one of the
Persons of the Past Tense with all the Pronominal
affixes it is capable of receiving. Thus, for example,
"Tj?2 he visited, gives the following forms :—
 498 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

for 1n1« lp_2

for nni» ips

1"Ji?9 he visited thee (w.), for IfliK np_2
TJB? he visited thee (/.), for ^HiX "Tj?|
^"Ti^? Ae wstfed me, for "yilK lp_2
D*TpT2 he visited them (»».), for IpSorDniX "7p_3
HPt? Ae visited them (/.), for jn^N Ip.S
DD"Tp2 Ae visited you (m.), for DpfiN
157P? Ae visited you (/.), for pJlS Ipji
ijlp^ Ae M5, for IJpiK "Tp2

3. We here see that the Third Person Singular

admits of ten affixes, which, it need scarcely be said,
is also the case with the 3 Sing. Fem. and the 3 Plu. ; the
Second Person, however, admits of only six affixes, since
it can be followed by only six Objective Pronouns, for
we cannot say ^riiX FHp2 thou (m.) visitedst thee (m.),
for this would signify — if it could signify anything—
thou (m.) visitedst thyself; but for this there is a distinct
Voice, the Hithpa-ul, and therefore thou (m.) visitedst
thyself must be expressed by rnpSHH . That we cannot
have forms corresponding to thou (in.) visitedst thee (f),
you (m.), or you (/.), scarcely needs to be remarked.
4. Similarly the First Person can receive only eight
affixes, for we cannot use TON *.THp_£ to express I visited
myself, since this can only be expressed by the Hithpa-dl

5. The same reasoning, viz., that we cannot use an

Objective Pronominal affix to a form which cannot be fol
lowed by the corresponding Objective Pronoun, will lead
us also to the conclusion that those Voices only which have
 LETTER XLIII. 499

an Active signification can admit of these affixes, viz., the

Kal, Pi-al, and Hiph-M ; those having a Passive sig
nification, viz., the Nlph-al, Pu-al, and Hoph-al,—and
the Hithpa-dl, of which the signification is Reflective,—
being, by their very nature, incapable of receiving them.
6. But further, by the same reasoning, we are led to
conclude that even of the Voices commonly called
Active, those only of Verbs having a Transitive sense
can admit of these same affixes, since Verbs Intransitive
cannot be followed by an Objective Pronoun, and, con
sequently, cannot take an Objective Affix. Thus, for
example,—
bSR he ate, Kal ; 73 K he devoured, Pidl ;
TPKH he caused to eat, Hiph-el ;
give—
173 N he ate him, Kal ; i7?K he devoured him, Pi-al ;
1 he caused him to eat, Hiph-tl ;
but the Kal lfch he learned, could no more admit of an
Objective Affix than it could of an Objective Pronoun ;
and, consequently, only the Pi-dl, ID1? he taught, and
the Hiph-el, Tp?n he caused to learn, can receive the .
Objective Affixes, as ilE1? he taught him, iTZpfo he
caused him to learn.
After having thus taken a hasty view of the nature of
the Objective Affixes, I will now proceed to call your
Grace's attention to the Table hereto annexed; and here I
must begin by apologising for its brevity and conciseness.
When compared with the Tables which I have hitherto
had the honour of laying before you, the present one, I
confess, is anything but full: but this brevity will
perhaps be not thought unpardonable when it is con- .
sidered that to give a complete list of the Affixes to all
 500 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

the Verbs Regular and Irregular, and in all the Voices,

would require a volume—a volume which, under
the title of D'bsP&H mV A Table of Verbs, actually exists
in various forms (independently of first-rate Hebrew
Grammars) in Germany and Poland, where Hebrew
literature is in its full glory. Such a volume I should
think your Grace could obtain either through your
London booksellers or by means of your Continental
friends, and if so, I should strongly advise you to lose
no time in getting one ; but for the present, I must
crave your indulgence for having limited myself in the
annexed Table to the Kal of the Regular Verb TpS ,
with a few hints only as to the manner in which the
other Voices capable of receiving Affixes are to be
treated, and at the same time a few forms of the Verbs
7)"^ (which, as they in every case, drop the final H ,
require a particular notice), for which purpose the Verb
nfyy to make, has been selected on account of the fre
quency of its occurring with affixes.
To enable you, however, to fill up the forms not given
in the Table, I beg your attention to the following
• remarks :—
7. We have seen (Letter xix. § 18) that when a word
is increased in the number of its syllables by Affixes,
the genius of the Language in general requires that the
word should be lightened by the changing of some
vowel into Shvah, and moreover, that the vowel most
liable to such a change is that immediately to the right
of the vowel which precedes the one having the accent.
Bearing in mind this prefatory remark, your Grace
will find that, —
1. When the first radical has a vowel, not followed by
Dagesh- Forte, nor lengthened in order to make Compen
 LETTER XLIII. ' 501

sation for a Dagesh which the next Letter cannot

receive, this vowel is generally changed into Shvah
when, on the word's receiving an Affix, it would have
had to stand immediately to the right of the vowel
preceding that which has the accent ; e.g.,—
*Tj2|) he visited, gives "H£5 or inij?5 , PH^a , &c.
II. When the vowel under the first radical is followed
by Dagesh-Forte, it is never changed ; consequently,
lj?.3 he visited diligently, gives , PH^S , &c.
III. This is also the case when the vowel under the
first radical is long for the purpose of making Compen
sation for a Dagesh which the next letter cannot admit ;
so that
^"1.3 he blessed, gives i3""!3 , , &c.
IV. In Verbs v'3 , the vowel given to a prefixed letter
(that marks the Tense, Voice, &c.) remains unchanged
when Affixes are joined to the form ; thus

from 2i2h to sit, or dwell, the Hiph. Past S^iPl gives

, nzrctfin , &c. ;
„ to go out, the Hiph. Partic. S^iD gives

„ T/J to bring forth, the Hiph. Future I'h'V gives

nT"?1\ &c;
„ DtO1 to be good, the Hiph. Past 3^\T * gives
iTpvi, nn^n, &c.
V. In Verbs TJt , the first radical retains the vowel
which it has in the simple state of the word, i.e., when
without the Affix ; thus Cff , the Past Tense of the Verb
DlS^ or D^jy to put, gives,—
or incfe , HD^ , , &c.
» We find once the anomalous form for la^") [Eccles.xi.9].
L L
502 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

8. Having considered the cases in which the first

radical has a vowel, let us now consider those in which
it has a Shvah. Here we shall find that,—<
I. When the Shvah is quiescent, it will always remain
undisturbed ; thus—
"TpSP he will visit, gives i"Tj?E^ or irnpSjP or ISTfj?^ ,
rnj?^ , &c. ;
Tpipn he caused to visit, gives lTj?Qfl , ^Tpsn , &c. ;
and so through the whole of the Future Hiph-il.
II. When the Shvah is moving, regard must be had
as to whether or not the accent is shifted on the word's
receiving an Objective Affix. Here we shall see that—
a). When the accent is not shifted, the Shvah remains
unchanged ; thus,—
D£np2 ye (m.) visited, gives VWjga , ni^l^S , &c.
b). When the accent is shifted to the left, then, the
vowelbeneaththe second radical being changed intoiShvah,
the moving Shvah beneath the first radical is of necessity
changed into a vowel, which of course is a l"]v?j?
a Slight Vowel (Letter xiii. § 4) ; thus,—
"Tj?5 visit thou (m.), gives MrfS or 1i*HpS , FHpS or
rnj?a, &c.
9. Let us now consider the change which the punctu
ation of the second radical undergoes on the word's
receiving an Affix. Here we find,—
I. In those forms of the Kal, as well as Pi-dl, in
which the punctuation of the first radical remains undis
turbed, the vowel beneath the second radical, when
forming the last syllable of the word, will be changed
into Shvah on the word's receiving an Affix and the
accent's being removed to the left ; e.g.,
 LETTER XLIII. 503

"Ip?? he will visit, gives , &c, Pnp?)\ &c.;

he visited diligently, gives , &c, nnpS, &c;
"H?.^ he will diligently visit, gives i^p?"!, &c, Pnj??\ &c.

II. This, however, is not the case in the Hiph-e'l,

where the second radical receives Long-Che?ik (or
Tsayre, which in fact stands for Long-Cherik, and after
which a quiescent 1 is understood) : this vowel, being
one of the characteristics of the Voice, is not changed
into Shvah when the word takes an Affix ; wherefore—

Tj5 he caused to visit, gives iTpSn , ■"•H^jpSJ'l , &c. ;

"TJJjjn cause thou (m.) to visit gives i"T',j?Dn , or liTPpBn ,

TpJSil he will cause to visit, gives , &c. ; HTjP^ ,

&c.

10. The vowel received by the third radical on the

word's taking an Affix varies, as will be perceived from
the Table, according to the nature of the Affix.
The Affix i him, is of course joined to the third
radical as its vowel ; as—

TpB, HpT5; Tp5$, i"Ti?p*?, &c.

H her, is always preceded by Kawmets ; as—

ip.a, rnpTE>; t^?, nnp^, &c.

13 him, is always preceded by Segol ; as—

npa\ lanps^, &c.

Others are preceded by one vowel in one case, and by

another vowel in another case ; as, for example,—
l l 2
504 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

H her, gives nnj?9 they visited her, n"7j?5? wi'ZZ wis»f

Aer.
^ gives \np2 Ae visited me, "'inpD'] he will visit me.
13 us, gives 13"lfJ9 visited us, and w^7Z

D them (m.), gives he visited them (m.), and

D"[j?0? he will visit them (m.)

It must, however, be confessed that on the linking of

some of these Affixes with the Verb there exists a
looseness of Grammar, as will appear from the notes
appended to the forms given in the Table, but in Com
position it will be always better to adopt the forms given
in the Table rather than those given in the Notes.
11. Let us now consider what happens to the Prefixes
] n ^ S of the Kal and Hiph-el, and to the n and O in
the latter Voice, when Objective Affixes are appended.
As for the letters ] D ■» 8 and 0 of the Pi-dl, these
require no investigation, their point being Shvah, which
is in all cases retained.
But with regard to the letters ] J"P K in the Kal as
well as Hiph-el, and the H and D of the latter Voice, we
shall find that their punctuation will be permanent,—
I. When they are followed by Shvah (whether Simple
or Compound) ; as—

ipD:, Tpan, iTj?an; Tp&D, iTj?BD;

Tp^, iTj?^; "PP^i 1T5!£.
IT. When they are followed by a quiescent letter;
as—
in^^; i»T.> rtin, iTtyri;
 LETTER XLIII. 505

III. When, the first radical being dropped, the

second radical receives a Dagesh ; as—

"to, 'tfzv..
1 2. In forms not falling under any of these three descrip
tions, the prefixes j D ^ X of the Kal and Hiph-el, and
the H and D of the latter Voice, are found to have their
vowels changed into Shvah ; e.^.,—
^It^ to bruise, he will bruise, ISjlt&ih ftnme
?Aee (m.) ; 21 tfi' to return, Ae caused to return,
in^n Ae caused him to return ; cause thou (m.) to
return, Ifiyttfn caM^e fAow (m.) Aim to return ; Dip to
rise, D^pJ Ae m«7Z cawse to me, 13£Pp^ Ae wt'M cawse Aim to
rise, D^j?£> owe (m.) causing to rise, FJD^pJp one (m.)
causing her to rise :
33D to encompass, 2b) he will encompass, ^3D1 he will
encompass me; Dfatt' to 6e laid waste, to be destroyed,
Hiph. OBfr he will destroy, D^B^. Ae will destroy them {m.).

13. In some Verbs, particularly in those which have

guttural letters, the second radical takes, by way of
euphony, Kawmets, where by right it ought to have
Shvah ; thus, for example,—
li^Sn.^. Ae will love him, corresponding to the form

WHjy? thou (m.) wilt take him (root np^) correspond

ing to 13$^lfi thou (m.) shalt push him (root *\12) (see
Letter xxxii. § 5).
But this is sometimes the case with Verbs where no
gutturals interfere ; thus, we find of pt&'i to Am, ^pj&)
[Cant. i. 1] Ae shall kiss me, for \Jg«^ ; mp^'l [Gen.
xxxiii. 4] and he kissed him, for inj?#?] .
14. The Imperative Kal of Verbs, where the third
506 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

or second radical is guttural, differs from that of "Tp2> on

receiving the Possessive Affixes ; thus we find,—
inriZ'P [1 Sam. xvi. 12] anoint thou (m.) him,
corresponding to 1!TTj5§ ;
^UlQVjl [Gen. xxiii. 11] hear thou (m.) me,
corresponding to ;
0?'7t* [ Prov. iv. 6 ] love thou (m.) her,
corresponding to CHR? '>
^l^P [Ps. cxix. 117] support Thou me,
corresponding to NHi? £ .
15. Infinitives Constructive, partaking as they do of
the nature of Nouns, may be declined both with
Possessive and Objective Affixes, and in most cases the
context furnishes the only means for discerning to which
class the Affix in any particular instance belongs : thus,
for example, may signify sometimes his keepiing
[something), and sometimes keeping him. In the case of
the First Person Sing. Affix however the form 'HDJi'
should, in my humble opinion, be used only when the
Affix is intended to bePossessive, whereas in ^ipttf (as, for
instance ^"V?^7 for the purpose of keeping me) the Affix is
decidedly Objective. In like manner, I should think that,
in the case of the Second Person Singular Masc. Affix, the
form liptt* ought to be used only when the Affix is
intended to be Possessive, and on the other hand, that
when the Affix is intended as Objective, Tl?^ would be
the proper form.
16. The Participles too so much assume at times the
character of Nouns, that one might almost be tempted
to think that in them the Affixes are always intended as
Possessive. What I mean is, that one would be almost
always inclined to render "QnN , for instance, rather by
my lover, than by one loving me; and similarly, \3)it, rather
by my enemy, than by one hostile to me. Ben Zev, however
 LETTER XLIII. 507

(whom no point of Grammar ever escapes), convinces us

that this is not always the case by quoting forms in which
the Participle with an Affix has the Definite Article pre
fixed, and, therefore, must needs be considered as being of
the nature of a Verb with an Objective Affix, and not a
Noun with a Possessive Affix (Letter xix. § 11) ; thus,
for example, ^QNEH [Deut. viii. 16] which strictly
means The [One Who was] causing thee to eat. Many
other passages of the same kind might be quoted in
support of this very acute observation.
17. In the case of the Affix of the First Person Sing,
the same distinction should be observed in the Participle
as was mentioned above in the case of the Infinitive
(\ 15), viz., that the form \?1P5!' should always be
rendered by one (m.) keeping me, whereas ^£5^ may
signify my keeper.
18. The Sing. Fem. Participle, which has the two
forms rnp2 and rnj?&, receives Affixes only to the
latter form ; as iFHpQ , njn*7j?b , &c.
19. The subject treated of in this Letter being rather
an intricate one, I shall limit myself to sending merely
a Table with it, and shall defer forwarding you an
Exercise upon it until my next, that by this means your
Grace may have more time for making yourself familiar
with the subject, before bringing your knowledge
into actual practice. I will therefore conclude by calling
your attention to those forms which, though differing
while in their simple state, assume the same appearance
on receiving Affixes.

IN THE PAST.
JT7j?3 2Sing. (/.) \ bothgiveVrnpaorliTfllj??),
\07j?S 1 Sing. j |T£Hj?5), &c".
508 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

DrnpB 2 Plu. (m.) ) both give iniiVTpS ,

2 Plu. (/.) ) rnrnpf , &c. '

IN THE IMPERATIVE.
Hp? 2 Plu. (m.) \ both give Wtlffr ,
rnn'p? 2 Plu. (/.) ) nnpa , &c.

IN THE FUTURE.
njn'pan 3 and 2 Plu. (/.)|both give inngDfi,
np5n 2 Plu. (m.) ' ) nnpan , &c. "

P.S. (a). Although properly Transitive Verbs only ought to admit

Objective Affixes (§ 6), yet we find also in a few instances
a b
Intransitive Verbs anomalously taking them ; as 1")3j rib
a b
[Ps. v. 5] evil shall not dwell [wiYA] THEE, on which Kimchi very
judiciously remarks that it stands for TQJ
P.S. (b.) The form he visited thee (m.), in Pause is made
> ar>d sometimes 'n^l"^ . Instances are found in which this
Affix takes a Paragogic n, as [Eccles. ii. 1] I will try thee
(»».); others in which the 3 takes a Dagesh, as JT^JM [Gen. xii. 1]
I will cause thee (to.) to see, i.e., I will show thee (to.) ; and again
others in which it takes Dagesh and is at the same time followed by
Paragogic H , as ^3?! [Ps. cxxi. 6] it (m.) shall smite thee (m.).
P.S. (c). The form ^"TO? on receiving the Affixes takes sometimes
Short-Cherik under the W instead of Long-Cherih, as [Cant,
iv. 9] thou (f.) hast deprived me of my heart.
P.S. (d). The Affix D takes sometimes, mostly in poetical language,
an additional * both in the Past and in the Future ; as IBB? [Exod.
xv. 10] it{m.) covered them (m.) ; iEttf'nVl [Exod. xv. 9] it (/.)
shall dispossess them (to.)
P.S. (e). The Affix 13 him, sometimes inserts a H between the 3
and the 1, in which case the 3 taking Shvah dispenses with the
Dagesh; as VlMip'-iN [Exod. xv, 2] I will extol him. Indeed the
 LETTER XLIII. 509

Dagesh of the 3 in such forms as ^Ip?^ is by some supposed,

contrary to the genius of The Hebrew Language [Letter xli. § 2], to
stand in place of the ^ omitted.
P.S. (f ). The Affix "'P me, is sometimes found to stand in the
Future after the Paragogic 1 which the forms ""Hp?? and '"IjJBIJ often
take ; as ^^P^ they (m.) shallfind, with Paragogic 7 , and
with the Affix , [Prov. i. 28] (where the Kibbuts supplants
the Shurih of ^J?'!, Letter xxx. § 21). We find, however, this
Affix ^? anomalously preceded by a Paragogic 1 even in the Third
•Person Sing. Masc. of the Future; as^flSia^ [Ps.1.23] he will honour
ME.

It will be observed that in the annexed Table the following

marks have been used for brevity's sake :—

to represent visited or visitedst.

t „ will or wilt visit.
t diligently visited or visitedst.
§ will or wilt diligently visit,
II caused or causedst to visit,
f will or wilt cause to visit.
 sSIn
^ijs
otangs
O\3lpB
m*'JJjJf
etp—iauserm..—es, ■Cherik
'jnasj
bin
the
[Cantic
iv.
en,
<Ao«
9]
naseath
'?|"(pa
Het(m.)
*hee DD"Tpa
He*(m.)
you
Hh■♦im.e rnpa
He*her- 2"?|1pa
He*(/.)
thee 3,2^pa
He"me. 4D*lpa
(**-)
IIe*them |"Tpa
He•t(/.)
hem ]D*]pa
He»you(/.)

npa
h,<
irnpaj

^|n^pa
thShe•e (/)j
of
Table
the
Verb
IpS
Objective
with
visit,
Affixes.
to h*-Sheim. hShe«er Tjrnpa
njp"Tj?a She«the (m.)
^nipS
She*me
She*you
(m.)
]?n*T)^S
She*you(/.)
DnnpTa{stJ
'
iTTpa
She* i:jpipTa
she
impaj

ording 0Swith
places,
actosome, Short
omet—imes
KAL,
PAST,
SINGULAR. mpS
Thou(m.)« Thou(m.) Thou-,^{
(m.) Thou|
Tpg
(m.)hou
him Iter. them(/.) Thou* us.

P-:t inmpa itfHP_a{

'In
Pause
and
s^J5B,
2IotfljJB
mtwo
etoorin—mnee.s mostly
in
8Otamps
poetry.
mostly
in
poetry.
r— ,
IJWTga
T{
m
*hu°su
Thou(/.)
* him'invrjpaj C*^7i? {Th°er.(/) V^HPa
T(/)
{* me
!™P.a{Th«!
*

hast
(/.)
deprived
of
heart.
memy

I(f«.)
*thee (m.)
I*them I*(in.)you
I*him. I•her. It(/)
*hee I(/.)
*them I*(/.)
you
I*
'rmpa irrnnpa TTO.a Ttt"fpa D\Tnp_a P^7i?a D^fnpa
 f3

<"• *'•>*
w^ap^.
n j?9{Th2.(m-&/0, Tnp3H&ft*'->- TOT/!"*
TO
Hj"?
2&/.)»
They(». *i3;npTa{Thue8y

DlJTTpS
Ye(m.)*them( .)
PKAL,
PAST,
LURAL. ini^lji^
him.Ye(m.)* ninip?
her.Ye<».)« "SlfnpS
Ye(«..)
*me. |WTpS
Ye(m.)*them(/.)
I^IVTpB
Ye(m.)*u.
DJHpS
*
Ye(m.)

imn"Tj?S
Ye(/.)'him. nin"7ga
her.Yet/.)* ^in"!(?5
Ye(/.)*me. Din"!i?5>{Ye(i/rt"em
Wlflfggl
Ye(/.)«u8.
)^"Tj?a
(f.
*Ye

?p3"Tj?2
(m.)
tWe*hee DUlpS
tWe(m.)
*hem 05^115?
We*you
(m.)
imnp?
Wwe*m- niJljJS
We*her. ^13"7(?S
We»the (/.) )U*Tj55
We*them(/.) IDinj?^
We*you(/.)
 (m.)1
theeHei |
Hethem(m.) He(m.)
tyou mL^TI
^Tw
Euphomc
Ktow),
raTO
1 (root
e<gft
to
wc(root
pir:
asemalso
to
in
itheev2 Masc
^
(root
srjgn
ofa*,)
ft,
1S(see
Stss;ing.§
owith
3).-2
aoT
the
min
which
ne.fterh3,
tDayesh
Ji("Dent
TO**
casemasxxxii
noae;s s
hHetim. hHeter. tHethee
(/.) Het(/.)
them Hetyou(/.) Hetus.
f
Heme.
Het

L±
r1"
^
PTOW«
.with
Pau8«
sao[Eccles.
I«B<r«
n,
n^.
ii.
m1]
rettee
(«.)
astasthe
ioigm3eo;sgtismces
Tp^

Tj"Tp2n
Shet(in.)
thee tUf-jnrj^n
fThou
(m.)Shet
t(m.)hem 03'TpTDn
Shet(in.)you
TnTpSIyi
thim.S>he tpp^n
Shetthee jThou
(/.) (a.)
^5->J*|p2P
Shetme. Shethem(/.) P"Tp5P
Shet(/.)you
{TusU
Tjlggg
[
^ Shetus.
TPDJl
Shet

inpan) \
u■[
th■]<:em(■m.)

KAL,
FSIUNTGULRAE., inip?ri
{Thou
♦v /Thou
(m)
f
^p^ri
Thou(m.)t
him. her. \
t(/.)hem

)
!^"rp?n nnpan |ip?n
)
np
w 'Hps?
|4Dlp?^

liTHpSfl
him
Thou(/.)t iT'Tp^
hThou(/.)
ter. ^^"lpSrn
Thou(/.)tme {Ti\0f)f']
t+P"ippjn
hem
"HpSfl
Thou(/.)t 12'17P?^
Thou(/.)us.

It
t(w.)hee 1(m.)
them It(m.)you
him.>
It hIt>er. I(/.)
tthee It
t(/.)hem Ityou(/.)
It

'npa» •Hpa*?' V.PM

wjp6$, S?7P9£ 4D7P5« 1TP98
 H WEd H 00
nnp5^
(They
mother 1?inp^raM')t be t(m.)
tTfhee,«(hey 2,3^p5,1
+They
(«"•)
me T{ 1DnpS"1 pips'1 D np2:{T1jemy)(m-)tyou[ («.)
J^("»-)t hem tbem{Th(e/
)m-)t t/They
you with
Spraise
Thee
shall
lxiii.
2.
o(m.)—
[Psalm
they
4]
(m.)
the
before
maffix
Pwith
Sea3ot1.
rami;etgsisomegsic
P
h(m.)
tThey
im T^np^.
They(m.)tu8.
npEP
t
(«.)
They
2§
[Letter
shere
Shurik
the
Kcall
(the
ME
shall
[Prov.
(m.)
ui.
they
28]
i1]).
before
affix
Ppba3\arl;
xxx.the uatsgnotgsic
.'a
(/•) . i-\
(/•)

innp2ri
himThey
(/.)i nnp^n
(/Other
They {T^Hp?in
hey^/Ot he ^npQJH DHp^n |Hpan{Tf;)(/-)t hem
TheyUJtme. {T^(/-)tthem UnpEJiJl
TthueysC/.)
n3"l'pDri
t
(/.)
They
109^91?
n2,c/i>*'"

PFLKAL,URTAULR.E, nnp^H
(Yem.)ther. iHp5piY(/!r)tthem
HTnpD]?
Ye(m.)thim ^npSfl
Ye(m.)tme.
131"Tp?^
Ye(m.)tu«.
Ye(m.)t

onpitfi
{T|m<{i
t*hem + tVnpsn
hem
inVTpSjri
Ye(/.)thim. HHpari
(Ye/Other. ^H)??!?
Ye(/.)tme.
Ye(/.)us.

3TJ*TpD3
(m.)
tWethee C^pllD
tWethem
(m.) |D3."Tj523
(ro.)
Wetyou
TlTIp??
ht
W>
im.e nips?
>hWer-e
+ (/.)
theeWet |"|pD3
tWethem
(/.) (/.)
Wetyou
tWe
In
3.pause—.

TO?)
CMKAL,
IMPERATIVE.

themVisit
thou(m.)
>(«.)
him.thouVisit her.tV(m.)
flisoiut thouV(m.)ime.sit thouV(n».)
them(/.)
isit
thouV(m.)ius.sit
rthe
When
gthird
is
forms
anoint
Thou
second
T1(m.)
thou
him,
1.
a(see
support
u§
i'TODdtrareor4.)
imencut—arola ,
thou(*.)
Visit

Tp§ irnpa rnpa mpsv':t 2D1PS mps

"HP? TIP*

D1-Tp5
Visthou(/.)them(iB.)
llT'TpS)
Vthou(/.)
him.isit PI
^"Tp
3her.thou(/.)
Visit \P"7P3
thouV(/.)ime.sit I^IP?
Vthou(/.)
themisit I3^p2
thouV(/.)ius.sit

'"Fp$
thou(/.)
Visit
(mostly
Or
in
2.
to^?B
poetry),

Viyesit
them(ra.)
(«.)
V(w.)
her.iyesit V(m.)ime.yesit V(m.)
them(/.)
iyesit
(m.)
him.Viyesit Viyeus.sit
(m.)
V(m.)iyesit

innpa DHj?§
v|Hj?53

DHpS
Visit(/.)
them(m.)ye
flH£S>
her.Visit
ye(/.) ^HpSi
Vime.yesit
(f.) |TTp§
Visit(/.)
themye
inHj?9
Visit(/.)ye
him. UnpS)
Vis tye(/.)us.

nn'pS
Viyesit
(/.)
 iSis
rVowel
second
n£p_
the
of
h<S%M
noawhere
rsthee ehsca5.—tronedilk e the'
r—onhdt(m.),
to
See
-o(m.)
spin
ior2.1C1.
§ is
rWhen
third
the
<Aee
snrf$Ltonea«achd;ailschalguttural
Aaft'n#
(m.).
a(m.)
Pis
5jt«jS»
the
dorrrwunthird
When
iof
Segol. it
r(in.).
is
second
the
"When
thee
sending
a«jrW
(in.)
Adof
the
bT&ayre
irsecond
soneacej
oatdlsuitcenasl

CIONSFTIRNUICTIVE.
theeV(m.)isiting Q"lpS
Vthem(m.)
isiting Viyousiting
(m.)
iTpQ
Wm.Visiting HHPS
her.Visiting (/.)
vtheeisiting thcm1
'
v^"1
2
p
iBiting /Viyousi>.ting
(
)
Vime.siting 1J"TPS
Vius.siting
^2
Visiting.

*:•t'

xix.
and
4(Letter
§
like
ao»yv
the
with
ddt*
Plural
fis
The
Masc.
se),ocinlxoie*nsed
vtheeOne(m.)isiting visiting
themOne(m.) J32Tp,l3
v(m.)
0neiyousiting
vOnehim.(m.)
_ifsi.tiln.g vt':,i>siting
her.One(m.) vOnethee(/.)
(m.)isiting One(m.)
vime.siting vthem(/.)
One(m.)isiting v(in.)
(/.)
Oneiyousiting 13"Tp_
vOneius.siting
(in.)
n
p
3
vOisneiting.
)
(wi.
See
14.
(m.)
3.
§
rtakes
thee
Pe(m.)
8.7.adt—eoneashamcihn;g
MASCULINE.
KAL. xix.
(Letter
5§
like
laws
rniifB
Fern.
Plural
the
fr).tfn
^IpSj
iipa) Til's nnpa ni?a
jrip-)
PARETSIECNPTL.E

?j£PTj?Si
v(/.)
thee(m.)
Oneisiting Dmp£)
vOne(/.)isiting
them(m.)
H^Tp
her.v/O(
3
isne.)iting "^^"TP^
theev(/.)
Oneisiting vOneisiting Cjr^p^
|r\"Tp&
them(/.) (m)
(/One.you(vis ting
|3f\"Tp^
(/.)
vOneiyousiting l^nTpJi
v(/.)
Oneius.siting
1IT1p£l
him.v(/.)
Oneisiting ^ffl?H
v(/.)
Oneirsoitei.ng
*rHj?.£)
vOneisiting.
(/.)
FEMIN E.
 llpS
They
&/.)t
(m Thim.hey(m.)§ nnpS^
innpS"1. They
her. PThe
Sing,
I&C,
hp,
gives
and
&c.
(m.)
hi?C»
Sing.
naTBS
W?
r*nj[P?,
nipe
f(/.)
rnijpa
gives
eitnsietcin,viteple
HpS"!
They
(m.)
§
hHeJim. Hip?
ilpS Heh}er. innpscns^0 &c,ate. him. Hips?
npS,.«e§ He§
her.
Src,
Sic. &c,
Sic. 'Sic.
&c.,'
Ip3
HeJ
lpS>
He{
the
texactly
The
Ia&c.
those
of
to
the
mfKal,
wi-pa,
p-aresameaseirxgaetsoi,ve

§im. nnpQf}
innj?|)]p
(/)
hThey h(/.)
Theyer.
§
i"irnpS
her.
Shet llpSri
hShe§im. PHpS#
hShe§er. 'Sic.Sic., '"^"Tp.sri
They(/)§
HIPS
Shet "&c.Sic, &c\,
Sic.
Ip.Sfl
She§
inrnps?

Thou(m.)thim nri"!)?S
hThou(ra.)
Xer. SFPIUNTG-ULAREL.,
SPING-ULALR.,
PAST, iFHpS
Ye(m.)thim. rnn"tp_2
Ye(m.)
her.
t Th§oim.u(m.) nipDJ^Thoa(m)§her.
iTpDfl PFLUIT-RUARLE.,
JVTpS
t
Thou(m.) PLIU-RAL.,
PAST, TnlFHpS lpSPThou(m.)§ hYe(m.)im. nnpSri
inHpSiH
§ Y§her.e(m.)
D£Hi?S
Ye(m.)
t HpSfl
Ye(m.)§
Sc.',
&c. &o.\
Stc. &c,&c. 'Sic.Sic.,

Thou(/.)thiro. lTrnj?2
V^lpS hThou(/.)
ter. Thou(/.)§1nm. '"^"TpS]^
liTHpSf} Thou(/.)
her.
|
rnps
Thou(/.)t Ye(/.)thim. nwjps
tninlf?^ hYew
1er "Hpsri
§
Thou(/.) innj?£lO
Y§him.e(/.) HUpS^
Ye(/.)§her.
^"IpS
Ye(/.)
t n2"Tj??lJn
§
Ye</.)
&c.',
&c. Sec'.,
Sic. 'Sic.&c., '&c.&c.,

him. ni3"Tj?J}
liTIJT/pS
Wet Wether. him. ITljjDi
i"TpS3
We§ hWe§er.
V^lpS
1him. H^'TjJS
h11er. Sic'.,&c. ^IPS
WeJ &c.',
&c. Hhim. HlpS*?
ilpSN I§her. &c\,
'&c. &c.,'
'&c.
^rqps
it "Tp.S$
i§
 —I

TT'pDH
They
(m.«t/.)| ITpS^
They
(m.)
n tonjjon
gives
&c.
athe
The
Inexactly
asjhose
fmof
to
ip.prr
but
Kal,
all
in
pTPwhere
iareesameExr.Baestjoi,nvse
iTpSH
Hehim.|| ^TP^'l
He||
her. ini-r^p2n{Th 7m<*n-&^» Henhim. PITJ?^
ITJJSJ^ Henher.
&c.,"&c. Sic. Tj?$C
Hen *8rc.
Sic, "ft.Sic.
Tj?5n
He|| Igives
The
nPSec.
Tfgives
The
rrpprT
Sing,
3iaiTj?Bp
nrj(m.)
T^pj
&c.
and
eig;
rtsEmpED
inev,r.c-nipt,)slme
rits
second
the
has
in
simple
form
this
aTsayre
Tsayre,
into
changed
is
Lwhen
doaffix
is
ainpgcan-aOelhnedreikd.

fee,

irh;p$ri/She
him-11 nri^pDil njlpSri
(/.)n
They
She||
her. Shenhim. nypbri
iTpDO shenher.
nTpan
sheH TSc.,
'&c. Tp$ri
Shen 'Sic.&c., Sic,Sic.
i'n ^n{Th2,.(/)

SFHIUPNTGHU-LREAL., PFHLUIPTRHU-AREL.,
SPAST,
IHNGPUHL-AERL., PPAST,
LHUIRPAH-LE.L, Thou(m.)n iTpDn{Th °m"M-)f Ye(m.)nhim. niTpSli?
Ye(m.)1Ther.
«"■>«
H™.
nnnpan him.Ye("•)« nUTTpSlil
imn"Tp5'"J Ye(m.)| her. "PpQ^ iniT'pSri
rilpD^
Xhou(m.)
|| ITpDfl
(».)
nYe
i.) T&c.,
'&c.
'Sic.
feci, &c. &c,Sic.

rnpsn
Thou(/.)
J rnnipDH
her.
II
Yet/0 1Ti?5^D
Thou('->
T nn^ri
{Thou
</.)n Ye(/)nhim. HITpari
imTpSri rher.e(/.)l
ii imrnpDn
l£Hp$n
Ye(/o Ye(/oni™. n^7p.?i?
Ye(/-)n
T&c'.,
■&c. "&c.&c, "&c.&c.,

»
W"rp?n

him. nlJ'Tpibn
im3"Jj?5)n
Well her.We|| Welihim. HT'pOJ
n^plJ] hWener.
him.III 7Wi?Sn
"Pfng^n Iher.11 '&c.Sc., him.IH nTJ?5»
iTpDX inher. '&c.&c, "PpS?
We1J "&c.Sc.,
UlpDiT
We||
 thee|
*
(He /&They
(m..j
He*«him. Htyj/
"inj^i/ her
He** L¥.->
him.Hett Het he t tHehe (m.)|
na&gf which
coforms
inthose
affix
in
ntheir
rof
class
this
Verbs
the
seall
in
dropped
rcanThe
isparts
;
qonaenudievnctilanylg

itc. mty^ift.*'-' Hett 8cc.

ntyy
He* ityj;{Th/.
niyyv
&c.

nntfj/
*«herShe her.
&-c.,'
&c. n^yrj
shet ttt
>she
affixes.
Objective
with
make
Verb
The
HtM/
to nntfj/
She' (m.) S.-C.

intern) belongs
it
the
affix,
not
root.
tonoac urs,
mwiltforwillttmadea*sorktdaen.sdts,
tee.,

SFKAL, "u(m.)t (m.)

IUNTGULRAE.,fiontyjw Thou1t C^nj
Thou(-.)
t
SPAST,
KAL,
INGULAR. PKAL,
PAST,
LURAL.
Thou(m.)« Thou(m.)*
JTJi^ nri ti'i;{Th e0ru(m)*
him. tec. is^nj
him-

tec, Ice.,

tt
Thou(/.)
^fe^rj
Thou(/.)t
JVU/Q
(Thou/.)*< iw^{Th r.(/)* be. him.
|D^g^
(Ye/.)*«

Sc., &c,

T[1J1^{We
t*hee
h*Ier. ;1,yhee
I* him. n>ri>|^
Vn'tW him.We** nirti'^
iniytfj/ her.We** TJtj^l^
(m.)
theeItt
him.
fel . (in.) &c. Itt '&c.,'
&c.
u^tspj;
We*

Sc.,
 im^:{Thm .(m-)t (m.)
Makethoume
PFThe
a&c.
eMft?
Irgives
mPgives
nito
n<jw
irms;
^nto?
tiaf&c.
The
npresent
rorcitnt,peiclv,ieple
itfj/?
They
1
(m.) MakethouMakethou(/.) in^:{Mhfm.th0U(m-) ((n.)
ti'jy.
I~I
(m.) thou|Make
ntfj/
&c.&c, &c.&c,
nrics
.&c.
taws
forms
the
give
pall
affixes,
nirfr
is
would
found
rwith
it
hut
oif
notbintoao,werebciluitry,

n^^ri
They(/.)t SINGULAR.

&c.
tec., ^t^J/
(/.)
Makethoume.

^
thoun^tiM/
{M*ke 8cc.&c,

PFKAL,
LUTRUARL.E, rntJ^ri
Ye(m.)t her.
iffjt/FI
Ye(».)t
Sc.&c,• IMPERATIVE.

Makeye niCfJ/
inilKH
Mm.(m.) her.Makeye "Olji^
(m.) Makey (m.)me.
n^^tj
ifefj/
M(m.)
Makeakyeeye(/.) &c.
&c,

initttgft
Ye(/.)t him. nijyjjrfl
Ye(/.)t her.
nrtj^Fi
Ye</.)t

PLURAL.
Makey (/.)him. 111^
llTltl^. Makey (/.)her. ^llKK
Makeme.ye
(/.)

Wet he (m.) &c,&c.

ntsy/3.
wett "&c.Sc.,
520 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XLIV.

In transmitting to your Grace the Exercise on the

Objective Pronominal Affixes promised in my last, I beg
to observe that this will be the last Exercise you will
have to translate from Hebrew into English. You are
now quite competent to read and construe with ease
and comfort an Elementary Work (published by John
W. Parker, West Strand, London) entitled " —
The Guide of the Hebrew Student." This Volume,
which is selected from Hebrew School-books written in
the purest Biblical Hebrew and most extensively used
on the Continent, is now generally read by the students
at the University of Cambridge, by way of preparing
themselves for reading THE BIBLE, and I know it to
have been acknowledged by more than one student who
has afterwards greatly distinguished himself in Hebrew,
that unless he had first gone through this volume, the
difficulties of the Hebrew Bible would have been almost
disheartening to him. By means of the assistance given
in the Glossary at the end of the Elementary Work
alluded to, your Grace will be able to go completely
through it without using a Lexicon. On the other
hand, however, as we advance with the particularities of
the Grammar and the Syntax of the Language, I shall
continue to practise you in Hebrew Composition by
still supplying you with English Exercises to be trans
lated into Hebrew, one of which will be appended to
this Letter. I may perhaps take the liberty of occasion
 LETTER XLIV. 521

ally troubling you with more than one of these Exercises

at a time.
2. In my last Letter it was shown how Verbs may be
declined with Pronominal Affixes, which are decidedly
Objective, i.e., which decidedly point to an Objective or
Accusative Case ; I must not, however, omit mentioning
to you that there are two Verbs which admit of Pro
nominal Affixes that are by no means Objective ; Affixes,
that is, which refer not to the Accusative, but rather to
the Nominative Case of the sentence (these two words
indeed are by Grammarians generally designated Par
ticles, and not Verbs, but as all agree in giving them the
same signification as I am about to do, I may perhaps be
allowed to denominate them Impersonal Verbs, as I see
no reason against their being considered as such) : these
are (or, when deprived of its accent, there is, or
there are, sometimes there was or there were ; and pft
there is not or there are not, sometimes there was not or
there were not : of which
ttf? gives l3fc* he is, 1^ thou (m.) art, S^^ye (m.) are ;
and
gives iay§ he is not, (133/8 she is not, thou (m.)
art not, ^8 thou (f.) art not, I am not,
D3/i$* they (m.) are not, MjP$ ye (m.) are not,
ISrX we are not.
From all these instances we perceive that the function
here performed by the Affix in each case is, that it makes
the Indefinite Verb Definite by referring it to the Person
expressed by the Affix. This being the case, it is clear
that it would be in the highest degree absurd to denomi
nate these Affixes Objective. The Hebrew Grammarians,

Poetically iO?.^.
522 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

while defining, as has been done here, the nature of

these Affixes, have not put themselves to the trouble of
finding a proper denomination by which to denote them ;
not so the Philosophical Grammarians of our day, by
some of whom we are told that these are Possessive
Pronominal Affixes, the matter being thus explained :—
E^. , they say, is a Noun-Substantive, denoting existence,
and similarly )?S non-existence ; and therefore that 13$^ ,
*[ti^ , &c, though strictly signifying his existence, thy
(m.) existence, &c, respectively stand for he is, thou art,
&c. ; and so , , &c, though strictly signifying
his non-existence, thy (m.) non-existence respectively,
stand for he is not, thou (m.) art not, &c. Of all the
fanciful things told us by these Philosophical Gram
marians, this may perhaps be the least exceptionable,
since we also find (contrary to all reason) the Prepositions
D# with, and upon, declined with Possessive Affixes,
as we have seen in an earlier Letter (xix. § 23). The
cases, however, are not altogether similar, for ,
^SJLf , &c, have, as far as the Affixes are concerned,
exactly the same appearance as iTltf, 1T$> &c., and
T^JJ > > &c-5 tne same appearance exactly as VT^ ,
*PTltf , &c. ; but i3t#1 surely does not altogether look like
iTtfi' , nor do IS^K , "O^N look exactly like iTttf , ^Tttf :
here the troublesome letter 2 creeps in, and spoils the
matter completely ; we are told indeed that the 3 is Epen
thetic, but if i3$J signifies properly his existence, and IH^X,
(forms of such frequent occurrence) properly signify
his non-existence, my non-existence, then B^J and are
Substantives, and let these same Grammarians adduce,
if they can, as frequent examples of Epenthetic 3 given to
Nouns-Substantive, i.e., of a 3 introduced between a Noun
and its Pronominal Affix, before they take upon them-
 LETTER XLIV. 523

selves to speak of so unheard of an occurrence. But is

it so absolutely necessary to reduce to strictness of reason
and logical propriety every instance in which the usage
—not always fettered by precise abstract rules—the usage,
I say, of Language departs at times from the ordinary
principles by which it is regulated ? Though none will
hesitate for a moment to designate as Possessive the
Pronoun that occurs in the compound words myself,
thyself, yet can the nature of the Pronoun in himself
and themselves be so exactly defined ? Can this be
accounted for otherwise than by the Usage of Language ?
Your Grace has doubtless heard of the Talmud, and
likewise perhaps of the great amount of nonsense which
that stupendous work contains; from this vast heap,
however, of rubbish, a few pearls may now and then be
picked up. One of the inculcations of the Talmud runs
in the Rabbinical dialect thus :—

177V 'i'b irni -piDi 7r>i

(in Hebrew—

Teach or train thy tongue to say, " I do not know."

A sentiment which evidently points to the sad but

undeniable truth, that to some sapient people it is
actually hard, nay impossible, to utter these few simple
and harmless words, " / do not know." Had either
Kimchi or Ben Zev (both of whom so clearly define the
nature of the Affixes now under consideration) been asked
to what class of Pronouns they strictly belong, and what
should be their denomination, the answer would in all
probability have been JHTP "^{J • Our Philosophical
Grammarians appear animated by an altogether different
 524 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

spirit ; every one of them seems to think it his duty to

account for everything, to have a positive answer to
every question, and to say anything whatever, rather
than " I do not know."

P.S. (a). Even without an Affix the Verbs & and "P*? cease to be
Impersonal when the word connected with either of them is—
I. A Proper Name, or one of The Attributes of GOD ;
II. A word defined by the Definite Article, or by a Possessive
Affix ; or by its being in the state of Construction ;
III. A Demonstrative Pronoun.
These observations will be elucidated by the following examples :—
Thus [Exod. ii. 12], "And he saw that (Bhj "pH) there was no
man." Here the Noun not being defined, the Verb 1U is Im
personal ; but in [Prov. vii. 19] » the manis not (at home), the
Noun, being defined, is not merely indefinitely connectedwith, but actually
the Nominative Case to, the Verb which consequently ceases to
be Impersonal. In like manner [Esther ii. 20] fT^l? "^P*? PM
Esther was not telling, &c. ; [Gen. xxxvii. 29] TIM HP"^ Joseph
was not in the pit. And so [Gen. xxxix. 23] nsn -inbn rva p«
the chiefof [the~\ house ofthe prison was not looking to, &c. Again [Gen.
xxviii. 17] ONjfo? n"»5 QS >3 nt f^N this is none [ofAer] but [the~\
house ofGOD; [Gen. xxviii. 16] cipaa nirf) vfr JEHOVAH
is in this place, &c. ; [Job xvi. 4] °?t?'?3 # & if your souls (or
persons') were, &c. In all these instances it is clear that PN and
lose their Impersonal character, and that the words connected with
them actually stand as their Nominative Cases.
P.S. (b). The form >2&) is found synonymous with in Esther
iii. 8, where we read—

There is a certain (lit. one) people scattered abroad and dispersed

among the nations,
where the Affix 13 is plainly not intended to perform the office of a
Pronoun, but rather is altogether pleonastic.
 LETTER XLIV. 525

EXERCISE XXXII.

(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF A

HEBREW LEXICON.)

'nasi
t • : *iT3N
t • t niD3i
: : "inS^
t : D\i78v: 87 ngn
tyi? : nin? 87 : ra1? 17 \3T|9 ^Cif?

11 •nay D\7?g
.1 10nyjn on .9l$y.
• n3'T 8n3i?j/
uirnn83 : ^in ^j8 n&>8 ron Tyi? "Nnottfi

: 'oSij? "ndi 73 17Ds^ri "d^ sin "inSipnai

jn aitD "ini$p| : tfiK "tin. "f^a nin; '9,;n:
34 . 23».i * a. ' b.l 2« IS ( •
WBW 871 EDItf "U?T 87 3TI3 I ITTI ^ 73
K7i : ^nnfcri *n#5¥ 7b? "fe^ni : nnt T^g
30 29 28« 28) V* . 23

: "injg^ ""H^V ?V *7a?] "inj?3n^ "in^-jp1?

78 : 31,^D^ ^'T8 87 : 8in m *a "inrwzp "Dip
45 . 44 ; I 43 U 8

n« ^3^1 ^33^ "oti : ""ilfcaroi sa *1*y|3fl

N^3(9Q pv8p "itfylsn TO7^ n5'T
"napjij "np1? "a^a ^8 " J?"|P8 : 13793 s,;d

87i "vnjns : nV? 6\nh8: \]?^ : nnjpfeq

"yian Tj?a 61D^33fc>n Vnptfn "jsvd : 69i32n8
"^wa^. d^s? 7# : "-1D8 rung : " jiitfa •
"n^8 871 ~W)J>) T8 : 1^"! ]383 WP)i3fl
526 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nn»i with mn : "aaayj^ ah "^int^

nj : "wMiD^ "rpn nima "npisn : 3p;/ "taaiEto
71npT3"! npi : "inapn'im. ^ "nmaht'i
"rrMrn
t : - • ivr
t vt "nan
• : • n1?t "un: : *rann*i
t v t v: v- n&xh
t * : i1? "Mm
; -

la/it : "nnott^i "to]/1? "iTl? 1J3 "intJW : VST1-

"na^ \s : "nip
T T tt
TT nttfan
V V - : "intw/
1 T mm; o*n
T-

"ma Vn : ^znsm. 'Tina ^j1? "ife^ij'i : "aifctfj

>338 "d^dV "baflK rf7i : "p1?1? 13^ DipD f?K
"i3&* n^K "rig s9 ♦ ♦ * • niton rnsn ns wrn>

d» : "oi'n usw na " 33 n^a "nm, • • • • na

om * • * "nn-|3 "hm Vn« n$ "n^p "ik*

ns.m non "ci^y "dd^ d$ nnjn : "vo k1? Vi^b/d

83 1 82 90 90 I 89 . 80,
^jjhj rnan lanrj *a oa : 17 H\an *yi$ rm
ntfg riQnsn pi "nninipn nionsn p : 31j/pk>
: 95.
na I7X 9« 94 . 94 D?aa>. • • • • 93 nnhcp
. 83 naa;^
'"

100 100 83 . 99
rvg dk ^3 nr pa njn oipsn 8nia nn
: ■ own
IT T - -w
" - nn
Vi
 LETTER XLIV. 527

PSALM LXVII.

104 I 109 10!» 102

: nip

yyn jn»a "r^nS 2

: ""^la* DMa ^33

106 I MB .
: Dv>3 1HV
ios« i mw 107 . j
o^my i33Ti inpi^ 4
110nfcftp o^u ,
ofcttfr. ■»?

: ""nte "onjn 'fi«3 "'d^sk1?!

10> t 105 .
: D73 D^j; ?IHV

n1?^ nana p» 6
: irn^s D^n% 7ia3-i3^

d^k
• v; 'las-a"1
•• : t I 7
113 I 112

PSALM CXXL

: •nrJJ M»i3j "^kd

 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

nim ""dud h$ 2
: p.io D?ptf "n&y

tyi "bib1? 3
12 . . 116 r
: JlptT OUJ 7N

jttf* N7i "dijj N7 nan 4

: bmfr 'Spy

) 119 119) 118 I

^D) T 7# T|7V mm
120 • .f 120 . n
nSS"1 K7 tMDts>n DDT> b
TV - V V - T
: n^?3 rrm
t : t - - «t :
106; 12 , _.
jn 730 TW! mm 7

"l^iai ^nxv ,2"i?^ mm 8

122 f . 122 121
: D7W Tjn nru/o

NUMBERS VI. 24—26.

:"?qp#y| nim 'i3"0^

: "^ami ra?p^8 via nim ,02-i^
123
j 17
T7K
* V " vaaT.T mmT : kbt»
T •
121 .f . 124 I 124 .
: dw ^7: Qfi^l
 LETTER XLIV. 529
1 nba? to send.—2 HID to die.—3 her father.—4 DM a mother (with
off". ""BW, &C.). —8 npb to take.—6 Mordecai.—'T2 to bless.—
8 DVy to forsake.—9 ^~TJ to call.—10 n^n to be (when construed with
b to become).—11 with me.—12 ""lOB? to keep, preserve.—,3n2nN love.
—14 nbttrj compassion.—15 b^3 to redeem.—16 btS3 Pi. to lift up.—
n to bear, carry, to lift up.—18 Dbto [the] days of old.—19nh3
Kal and Hiph. to guide.—20 rP2 stands here for fVJ b$ [*Ae] ^owse
q/*.—21 [the] brethren of, i.e., kindred of.—22 Vd| to requite, a&o to
confer upon, bestow upon.—22 •D^nUfe.—»?*TJ to know [in this
sentence the Relative Pronoun must be understood after the
word 2^3],—23 * lit., and not, i.e., nor (neque).—™ iVttf to behold.—
24* 1?? an eye (in Constr. TV.).—25 to do, make.—26 HIS Pi. to
command.—27 her mother-in-law. —27* Jacob.—28Kachel.— 28* 233 to
steal.— 29 HS"i to see.—30 lit. thy (/.) appearances, i.e., thy coun
tenance.—31 to hear.—32 VaM Pi- to strengthen.—33 with (poetical
for the prefix 2).—33* HQ a mouth (with off. % &c.).—34 V*"1 to run.—
-34> Esau.—35 to meet him.—30 p2PI to embrace.—37 bb3 to fall.
—38 his neck.—39 P^3 to kiss.—40 Dip to rise.—42nfe"» to anoint.—
*2* 2hN to love.—43 "^3 to keep, preserve. —44bbD t0 raise, extol (see
Letter xxxvi. § 1 1 and 12).—45 DTI Kal to be high, to be lifted up ; PL
to elevate, to exalt, extol.—46 "*22 Pi. to honour.—47 nbtpto forget.—
48 rfSJ Kal to go out ; Hiph. to cause to go out, to bring out.—49 Egypt.—
sobbS to eat.—51 manna.—52 IDS to say, also usedfor to think.—53 2b a
heart (with aff. >2lb , &c.).—64 "P*" to go ; the H is here Paragogic ; this
word is here used Interjectionally for go to, come.—85 HD3 Pi, to try
(see Letter xliii. P.S. b).—56 22b Pi., to deprive one of one's heart.—
57 ninS a sister.—58 tflS to seize, lay hold of.—89 HQ"! Hiph. to let
l00Se.— to find.—61 22D to go round, encompass.—02 HD3
Hiph. to smite, beat.—63 ?'2Q to wound.—64 3hn to slay.—65 ^33 to
dash.—68,W'"lpT to call, call upon (see Letter xliii. P.S. f.). —
66 nby to answer.—67 TIE? PY. to seek early, or diligently.—
68 PflW to bruise 69 ntS2 t0 trust) t0 be confident.—70 and I will
glorify HIM.—71 Kebekah.—72 1^13 to give, to yield.— 73 bbn
Pi. to praise.—73* n^?" a work (Plu. D>bs»)._74 r& Hiph. to place
(see Letter xxxiv. § 11).—75 Eden.—76 "123? to serve, also to till.—
77 rib? to do, make.—78* "fcj to form, shape.—78 ty. there is.—79 rP2
530 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

stands for ^22 in [the'] house of.—*0 to lodge.—80* The HH here

is the Preposition with.—81 by yourselves, alone.—82 J"T)3 to cut,
make (with regard to a covenant).—83 Tfc? there is not.—84 this day,
to-day. —8S nbttf to send.—86 our brother.—88 to go down.—
89 "U3 Hiph. to declare, tell.—90 =? even if, although.—92 TOH
Hiph., to make many, to multiply.—93 "linta clean.—94 D?2# U^X§ two
[by] two.—96 W2 to come, come-in.—95 Noah.—97 verily 99 awful.—
ioo DM ,3 but, anything else than.—101 ]in to be gracious to, to be merci
ful to.—102 ">iH Kal to shine ; Hiph. to cause to shine.—102* D^S (Plu.)
a countenance.—103 lit., with us (according to the English idiom upon
us).— 104 A word not admitting translation, it being supposed to be
merely a musical mark. — io»*n91tth salvation.—105 TTV Hiph. to
praise.—106 Vs all, the whole of (with off. "^3, &c.) >°mbk to
rejoice.—108 ]^Pi. to shout with joy.—I08*nations.—109 fcbltf to j udge.—
110 righteously 111 and [as for the] nations.—112 to fear.— 113 [the]
uttermost parts of.—113*T!? an eye (Dual D'^?).—114 from whence ?—
lH*\\t.from with, i.e.,from.—ll5to1J3a wavering, a tottering (Noun Sub
stantive).—116 W to slumber.—117^ to sleep.—118 b§ a shadow,
shade, defence (with qff.^, &c.).—119 1fV\ T- ^ lit. on [the]
hand of thy right [side], i.e., at thy right hand.—120 by day, i.e.,
in the day time.—,20# >^33 Hiph., to smite, to strike (see Letter xliii.
p.S. b).—121 from now, i.e., henceforth.—122 D^iS T?1 lit. even
to eternity, i.e., for ever.—123 lit. to thee (m.) ; according to the
English idiom upon thee.— D??^ lit., and may HE
appoint to thee peace, which stands for and may HE give thee peace.
 LETTER XLIV. 531

EXERCISE XXXIII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
See the notes at the head of Exercise xvii. page 208 ; also
Letter xxxi. § 5.
N.B. Objective Affixes are never to be used excepting when directions
to that effect are given in the Exercises.

Take-ye-(m.)-care to-yourselves lest you-should-forget [that]

TOW Niph-al Hebr. to you 1? ' r?3W Put. Kal
which I-have-spoken to you here.—And I-kept-myself from
"OT Pi.&l b« with aff. n'S TOW Hithpa-dl
my iniquity.—Also thou (f.) shalt-keep -thyself from
7*137 * Q3 Pronoun expressed

thy iniquity.—Were we not guarded there from every evil ?—

112W Niph-al DW b| V-\
"Wilt thou (/.) not keep my commandments?—I heard them (m.)
nisQ vbw
2 1 a
speaking to-thee (/.).— He shall not speak
~QT Pi-al bN with aff. Pronoun expressed

to her .—Ye {/.) [are] speaking to us.— We (m.) are

bs with aff. by with aff.

speaking to them (/)

by with aff.

* Kawmets changed into Chateph-Pathach, when the word takes

Affixes.
532 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

LETTER XLV.

Attached to this Letter your Grace will find a list of

Particles which I would very strongly recommend you
to get up by heart, that is, to endeavour to become so
familiar with them as to know their meaning whenever
they occur in the course of your reading: the reason
for my recommending you to do this is that most of
them are of very frequent occurrence in The Bible, and
to be able to know their meaning at the first glance
must save the learner a very great deal of time and
trouble. The list, as your Grace will perceive, is made
up promiscuously of Prepositions, Conjunctions, Adverbs,
and Interjections, arranged Alphabetically, and divided
into three classes, namely,—
First, Particles which take Singular Affixes ;
Secondly, those which take Plural Affixes ;
Thirdly, those which take no Affix.
As to the Prepositions and Conjunctions, most of them
have already been touched upon, and I shall hereafter
have an opportunity of speaking of them again. I shall
therefore limit myself here to the following few remarks
upon Adverbs :—
2. Some Adverbs are formed from Nouns, while
others actually are Nouns which usurp the function of
Adverbs; thus, for example, DDi1 in the day time, is
formed from the Noun DV a day ; but the Noun Tyh
night, is itself used Adverbially to express by night ; so
also the Noun ^TH a way, is used Adverbially to
express by the way of.
 LETTER XLV. 533

3. Again, the Nouns Di1 and H^1? , with the Definite

Article prefixed (strictly speaking the day and the
night), are used, DVH to express To-day, and fl^vfi to
express ro-night. Thus [1 Sam. xix. 11] Michal says
to David, " If thou save not thy life H7^n to-night, to
morrow thou [shalt be] slain ; " as for QVH in the sense
of to-day, it occurs too frequently to need examples. If
the English to-day and to-night are, as some suppose
them to be, corruptions of the day and the night, then
here will be another instance in addition to those noticed
in former Letters, in which Hebrew idioms have crept
into this language.
4. Some Adverbs are, in fact, nothing but parts of
Verbs used Adverbially ; as, for instance, n3"in much,
which, strictly speaking, is the Infinitive Hiph-el of the
Verb HQ"! ; "irjO quickly, which, strictly speaking, is
the Infinitive Pi-dl of "lilO .
5. Pronouns, too, are sometimes used for Adverbs and
Conjunctions ; thus, for example, the Relative Pronoun
"l^S who or which, is used for how or when, as [Deut.
xi. 6] "And what he did unto Dathan and Abiram . . . .
(It^X) when (or how) the earth opened her mouth," &c. ;
and again, in the signification that, as [Gen. xi. 7]
" Let us go down, and there confound their language
that they may not understand one another."
6. There are some Verbs which, when coupled with
another Verb, are used Adverbially to express the
continuation and repetition of the act denoted by the
other Verb ; thus, for instance, of the Verb 31 ££*
to return, we find [2 Kings i. 13] vhv^. 3#J! lit., and he
returned and sent, for and he again sent. Of the Verb
*p) to add, we find TVflb ^Qft] [Gen. iv. 2] lit., and she
added to bear, for and she again bare. Of the Verb f??
N N
534 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

to go, we find [Gen. viii. 5] liDJII T|?n continually

decreasing.
7. HJP ^ lit., wAere /row this, is used to express
Whence? Thus [Job ii. 2], GOD said to Satan,
Hip *8 JFAence contest thou ? or rather, Whence
mayest thou come ? On which Jarchi comments that it
stands for ,S Where [is the place of which thou couldest
say that] i"IJP from this {thou comest) ?
8. This able commentary of Rabbi Solomon Jarchi
suggested to Ben Zev the idea that when we read
[2 Kings vi. 13] " Go ye and spy Kin nb"1*? where he is,"
the strict meaning is, " Go and spy "'X where [the place is
of which one could say] H3 here (or there} Nin he is."
The same reasoning is of course applicable to the Par
ticle Hb^Nl where ; thus when [Gen. xxxvii. 16] Joseph
said to the man who found him wandering in the field,
"I seek my brethren; tell me, I pray thee, (TljTH)
where they are feeding [their flocks] ; " the meaning
strictly is, " Tell me where [is the place of which
one might say], Here {they are feeding their
flocks)."
Doubtless such explanations must be pleasing and
refreshing to the student, and the more likely to
satisfy the mind since nb^K and njytf are plainly
compounded respectively of ""X and H3 , and of "'K and
nb , blended together to form one word, a thing
which is not uncommon in Hebrew, as was mentioned
in a former Letter (xl. § 14, N.B.). I wish that I could
say as much of what a modern Grammarian attempts to
make of the Particle ^12 when ? He wishes to make this
to consist of HP what, and nj£ time, but for my part, I
must confess that to me at least Tip looks no more like
flP and r\y than it looks like ftp and rip , or HP and
 LETTER XLV. 535

PiT) , or any other two similarly sounding short words

which fancy might suggest.
Another Philosophical Grammarian of our day suggests
that the Particle HOISD anything, or something, is made
up of riDI HQ what and what, or perhaps of HD IX
what or what. But in the first place, neither HD1 HD
nor flO T HQT look much like DDItfQ;
T : ' and in the
second place, neither what and what nor what or what
appear to me to express well anything or something.
Now this is altogether trifling with The Language, and
if allowed thus to turn, twist, force, and mangle words,
we may indeed make of them anything we please, just as
children, when gazing at the clouds, fancy that they
discover the shapes and figures which they were predis
posed to see in them.
But this mode of proceeding, of which the first
founders of Hebrew Grammar never dreamt, this
right, assumed only of late years by Philosophical
Grammarians, of not only dissecting words, but of
altogether altering their parts when dissected—in
dependently of its being unworthy of them as men
of genius and learning—has also been productive of
great and, I fear, of lasting mischief, since it has been
indulged in by men of such fame and celebrity as
to justify the belief of the unwary student that he may
blindly follow them wherever they lead. Of the many
instances I could quote, I beg to mention only one, viz.,
what has been said and made of the Particle ^18 .
9. The Particle vIK is one which very frequently
occurs, and which, with only one apparent exception, to
be presently noticed in this Letter, uniformly signifies
peradventure, perchance, if by chance. Were I to quote
all the passages in which this Particle occurs, I should
N N 2
536 IIEBREW GRAMMAR.

have to fill whole sheets ; I will therefore limit

myself to the six instances in which it occurs in one
chapter of Genesis, and one other passage in Genesis in
which it is immediately followed by tih .
In Genes, xix., where Abraham intercedes for Sodom,
we read,—
" , Peradventure there be fifty righteous within
the city " (verse 24).
" i^TX , Peradventure there shall lack five of the fifty
righteous " (verse 28).
" ''Six , Peradventure there shall be forty found there "
(verse 29).
" ''718 , Peradventure there shall thirty be found
there " (verse 30).
"^IX, Peradventure there shall be twenty found
there" (verse 31).
" , Peradventure ten shall be found there "
(verse 32).
Again [Gen. xxiv. 5] on Abraham's giving charge to
his servant to take for his son Isaac a wife from Padan-
aram, the servant replies,—
" ii1? ^SlX , Peradventure the woman will not be willing
to follow me."
It is thus that these passages always have been and
always must be translated to give any sense, and it is
only of late years that a highly distinguished
Grammarian and Lexicographer has discovered that
which, as he tells us, Winer could not see, viz.,
that \?W is compounded of IN and "6 —where IX
stands of course for 1N, and *b for tih — and, therefore,
must signify or not. I am too humble an individual to
offer a comment upon a discovery so important, and
 LETTER XLV. 537

made by so great a man ; I shall however take the

liberty of translating after this fashion all the instances
quoted above, which would then run thus :—

" or there be not fifty righteous within the city "

(verse 24).
" ^IS or there shall not lack five of the fifty righteous "
(verse 28). .
" or there shall not be forty found there "
(verse 29).
" "^IX or there shall not thirty be found there "
(verse 30).
" ^18 or there shall not twenty be found there "
(verse 31).
" ^IX or there shall not ten be found there "
(verse 32).

And the passage quoted from Gen. xxiv. 5, where

occurs with the negative particle N1? , would read
thus :—

or the woman not will not be willing

to follow me."

I think that I may safely leave it to your Grace to

appreciate the amount of benefit the learner must derive
from this new discovery.
10. I mentioned above that with one apparent excep
tion, the particle ^IN , which very frequently occurs,
uniformly signifies, peradventure, perchance, if per
chance ; this apparent exception occurs in Numb,
xxii. 33, where at the first glance would appear to
have a negative sense, and to be synonymous with
it1?]1? if not, unless, as in fact it is rendered in the
538 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

English Translation, which is, "And the ass saw

me and turned ( ^S1?) from me these three times :
(■^P nritpj "T^K) unless she had turned from me,
surely now also I had slain thee, and saved her alive."
Your Grace will perceive that the sense unless is here
given to "'VlX .
Now even had this rendering been correct, and even
had it been absolutely requisite to give the negative
sense to the particle in this single instance, yet it would
not be allowable to recommend the student (as he
actually is recommended by the distinguished Lexi
cographer referred to) to take the anomalous as the
standard signification of the word, and so most ano
malously to force the anomaly into all the numerous
passages in which the word occurs. But Ben Zev most
ably and clearly shows that even in this passage [Numb,
xxii. 33] there is not the least occasion to consider the
word as used in an anomalous signification, but that, on
the contrary, the strict translation of the verse actually
requires that "'VlX should be rendered here according to its
usual sense. The comment offered by that great Gram
marian upon this passagel cannot help thinking one of the
most beautiful pieces of Grammatical criticism that has
at any time come before the public. I hope therefore
that your Grace will allow me to develop here his ideas
more fully than he has himself enunciated them in his
celebrated Work n3J/ \wb TlE^n .
11. Human beings, as well as brutes, while going or
running, when suddenly startled by some frightful object
that comes in their way, are apt to make twodifFerent kinds
of movement—either to move backwards or sideways, too
much horror-struck in the presence of the object of terror
to be willing to pass onwards,—or to start sideways
 LETTER XLV. 539

with the intention ofgetting past the object and so to move

on. A movement of the first kind would in Hebrew be
expressed by \3$^ Hb3 to turn away, or aside, before
[an object] ; whereas the second kind of movement
would be expressed by "^D riC03 to turn away, or aside,
from before [an object], i.e., to move in such a manner
as to get from before, (i.e., beside) the object of fear, and
so pass it. Now the movement of the ass in each
instance was of the first kind, so that, in spite of all his
efforts, Balaam could not induce her to pass the Angel ;
and this, as he was afterwards informed by the Angel,
saved his life. The passage under consideration would
therefore, if rendered strictly, run thus: —" And the ass
saw me ( and she declined (i.e., made a side
ward movement) before Me these three times ;
( "OSP nrj£03 vTN) if perchance she had declined from
before Me (i.e., moved sideways so as to endeavour to
get past me), surely now also I had slain thee and saved
her alive."
Ben Zev ends this beautiful piece of criticism by observ
ing that, "Those who think that "^IX in this instance must
needs have a negative sense, and be synonymous with
ah^h (signifying if not), labour under a mistake, owing
to their not having attended to the difference between
^D1? before me, and away from before me.
Such criticisms your Grace may expect to find when
you shall have so far advanced in The Language as
to be able to read Hebrew Grammars, i.e., Grammars
written in Hebrew by such master-pens as those of
Kimchi, Elijah Bachur, Solomon Heyney, Ben Zev, and
others ; you will not find anything of this sort in the so-
called Philosophical Grammars of our day ; you may
find there a great many allusions to the Arabic, Syriac,
540 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Samaritan, Coptic, Malayese, New Zealand, and to a score,

it may be, of other languages, but very little Hebrew, at
all events not one line of Hebrew from the pen of the
Philosophical Authors themselves. Least of all will you
find in them observations which throw any real light
upon the original of the Old Testament ; but many an
eccentric meaning given to Hebrew words, and many a
new theory which, if applied to passages in the Old Testa
ment Scriptures, may make them signify anything or
nothing.
Your Grace will find annexed hereto twenty-seven
Exercises to be translated into Hebrew, my apology for
intruding so much on your valuable time being, that I
shall now make a pause for some few weeks in order to
allow your Grace leisure to make some progress in the
Elementary Heading-book mentioned in a former Letter
(xliv. $ 1). The fact is, my Lady Duchess, that you have
gone through a complete course of Hebrew Grammar, and
that there is not any Part of Speech which we have not
touched upon ; there remains, however, a great deal
yet to be said both in regard to gathering up the ends
that have been left unfinished as we passed rapidly
along, and also in regard to the more especial bearing
upon the Syntax of The Language of the matter which
has already been brought before your notice. To furnish
this concluding portion of the subject will be my pride
and pleasure so soon as your Grace may do me the honour
of informing me that you have gone through at least half
of the Elementary work alluded to.
I have the honour,
&c, &c.
 LETTER XLV. 541

PARTICLES.
THOSE 'WHICH TAKE SINGULAR AFFIXES.
ns.M where?—With aff. i"« where is he? (and with 71 para-
gogic nS*M) where art thou (m.)? E*N where are they (m.) ?
DQM without, nothing more, none besides.—With aff. ^DSH none
besides me.
b^M by the side of, near.—With aff. ^5?$ near him, 7^7^ near her.
DS (without the accent OH). Preposition with. —With aff.
with him, HOS with her, -"WriS with us.
■TIN (without accent fiW). Mark of the Accusative Case.—
With aff. iniS him, HniH her Or}0$ (or CniS)
them (m.), DPpS you (m.), 'QHiM us.
because of.—With aff. because of thee (f), &c.
* 1N3 between.—With aff. between him, I?"1? between thee (m.), &c.
besides.—With aff. besides me, TjElbs besides thee (m.).
oh "^V2
TOS? /or <Ae safe o/.—With aff. nr^Q5?/<w Aer safe, TT3P3??/or
thy (/.) safe.
"T^a through, for, in behalf of. —With aff. "HS? through him, or ira
behalf if h im-, 1"!?? through thee (m.), &c.
] enough.—With aff. enough for thee (»».), D^T enough
) for them (m.)
,Tt? <fe abundance of.
VI? according to the abundance of, in proportion to.
SK9 as o/ifere a*.
70 1 Z», fefeta /—With aff. isn ^feZd Ann, fan oeA0/d
nan j <fee (m.), &c.
r?Plt besides.—With aff. besides me, l^lVw besides thee (m.), &c.
bis (without accent *?3) aZZ, <fe whole.—With aff. ^3 the whole
of him, Tibs the whole of thee (f), &c.
■J- l3Sb slowly.—With aff. "^N1? at my slow pace.

* In a few instances nia"1? , which, on taking affixes, gives OH^a,

D3',rii3,,2 , Vfri^a . ^a too is found anomalously with Plural affixes
in the two forms V^a , TPfpa . When referring to several persons or
objects (even though taken collectively as one class or party) the takes
the Plural form with the Plural affixes ; as BWTS , , .
f From this some derive ^ba [Ruth iii. 7] gently, softly.
542 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

l?b alone.—With aff. fa?1? by himself, or he alone, *Ff?*? by

thyself (m.), &c.
"T3b:J? besides.—With aff. fa?bfi besides him.
lSK>b; for the sake of—With aff. ^J?1?for my sake, ^VT^Pfbr thy
(m.) sake, &c.
nayb opposite to.—With aff. ^T^? f opposite to him, &c.
DMl?1? to meet (obviam).—With aff. "inSnpb to meet him, I^N^pb
to meet thee (m.) &c.
19 from.—* With aff. IHJjn from him, nn?nfrom them (m.)

bsiJSta } °Ver a9a*nst'—With aff- over against me.

"T33 before.—With aff. fa??, before him, TP? before thee (m.), &c.
J"C3 in the presence of.—With aff. "in?3 in his presence.
liV yet, whilst, still.—With aff. =13"$ Ae 4<itf, thou (/».)
sftV/, &c.
with.—With aff. in? with him, ^IpV with thee (m.), OrVBV
(and OS?) wi<A them (m.), CPE? yow (m.), ^33?
to&A iw.
ins (only with affix) ''TIM? wi<A me.
* The forms 'ISStt , natal? , &c., might perhaps be also classed
here, the 3 of in being elided.

THOSE WHICH TAKE PLURAL AFFIXES.

">™ 1 a/ter, behind.—With aff. VnlTH &>Ai«<2 Aim, T^CM SeAiwd
n.QH ) thee(m.), &c..
Sf? (poetically "'b.S) <0._With aff. to Aim, to ifAee
(m.), .... np^by to y0M (m.), &c.
"nips OA, Aou> happy [is] /—With aff. "PTjtfH Oh, how happy is
he ! or Blessed is he, T"?.?^ Oh, how happy art thou
(m.) ! or Blessed art thou, &c.
"•isbs without, except.—With aff. fa?1?? without me, it is not in
me, *Ffa.?7? without thee (m.)
130b before.—With aff. V3sb Ae/bre Aim, before thee (m.),
crroab. before them (m.), &c.
^J.Stt because of, also/rom before.—With aff. because of him,
also /rowi before him, . . . Q!T3Sn because of them (in.), &c.
 LETTER XLV. 543

3»?D (PIu. rrta^Sl?) round about— With aff. Vnh'OP round

about him, strictly speaking the parts round about him.
"T? (poetically TTS) until (with reference to time) ; asfar as, even-
to, to (with reference toplace).—With aff. even-to me,
TH? even-to thee (m.)
(poetically ^5 ) upon, near to.—With aff. ftyf upon htm,
T//? upon thee (m.), .... OfTy/? upon them (m.), &c.
» nnn under.—With aff. under him, l^ripi under thee
(m.\ &c.
» We find also the Sing. Aff. DPinri [Job xl. 12], which, however,
is better translated in their (m.) place, i.e., where they stand; and
again we find the anomalous form "^Wqn [2 Sam. xxii. 37]
under me.

THOSE WHICH DO NOT TAKE AFFIXES.

bns but, also indeed, "lins back, backward,
behind.
rris, "'is' ah ! woe , alas ! ;TJninS: backwards.
nn, nwj "•bqs | Oh that ! Would

or. ^OS ) <Aa* .'

iS—IS either—or. ES gently.
JTniN (always preceded "'S where ?
n$ •'S wAere?
bybs)ni-riN by
n{P "'S whence
on account of.
''blS perchance, per- (§ 7).
"•S i ( for VS) there is
adventure (§ 10
and 11). "'S j not.
cb^S but, nevertheless.
mr^s,
T T " » n^s (
,
T \ then, .
, time.
at that
nb^s wAere (§ 8).
TSJ? ever since, of 13? nothing.
old. "|*S£3 Ze« <Aa» nothing.
TS iS lit. or then, rsa ^
rsp" ! |I Jfor want of.
J
stands for
then indeed s^s now.
[Lev. xxvi. ris^s where (§ 8.)
41]. but, only.
 544 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

1?N truly, but truly. b* not.

bH not. without.
lbs if. •baa^
woe '. "'.nbaia f with°ut-
CM if After an oath that not. 103 (poetical for the prefix
IS DS ,/«,. 3) in, with,
rib CM if not, unless. C3 also, even.
□a'—DS both—and.
nsrs ( verily> irwly- CS D3 even if.
verily, certainly; Amen. \3 OS * although.
ttfcy last-night.
ma«ncr.
TON I w^ther ? also wAen ?
TT ) [the] way of (§ 2).
IN "IV ] <iW when, i.e., behold ! here is.
nan
TV aha ! ha !
nan
TT come on ! go to !
| I beseech, Ipray. ban vainly (§ 2).
F|H afoo. nn ah!
^ F|W much more, or much ho!
less; also yea surely. cvn lit. the day, stands for
<Aa£, ira orrfer <Aa<, a«, to-day (§ 3.)
when, how (§ 5). TO how, used but rarely for
1t£7M3 inasmuch as. the legitimate form .
""•{Pi?? a*, when. nsbn
t: t farther on, beyond,
UXD "ItpN where. Dibn hither, here,
EE? "iBJsa [the place] nan hither, here.
where. n?0^ nan here and
biDfiH ^ there, hither
ViBfl I yesterday. and thither.
Ittaa securely, safely; strictly nan hitherto,
speaking, confi nam in great abundance
dence. (§4).
"2 i>ray. outside.
* When the E? is at all separated from the s? by a Distinctive Accent,
these two words do not form one phrase, but must be rendered separately
each with its own meaning ; as, for instance, Ruth ii. 21, where "'S I D|
stands for also surely. The same remark applies to DM "'S .
 LETTER XLV. 545

rtSMnn abroad, i.e., out l?b therefore.

of doors. iab (poetical for the prefix
^•"\ni3from without. b) to.
... 13 Y^n besides, except. rrab ^
t^n hastily, quickly, soon. nabnt ;
Dan for nothing. ^D/ according to, in pro
• • } before. portion to.
E^asb formerly.
DBl< oy<%(§2). m vain.
IND wry, exceedingly.
11 together.
tV*)3 "INP3. m a wry
t: -
7?^ because. AiyA degree.
"IDS already. "iMp ) »ery exceed-
rO thus, also Aere. -fajpb 1? j myZy.
nbl 7V3this way andthat. np^MJ? anything, something; with
"'S <Aaf, ij, Aw/, although, a negative particle
surely. nothing at all (§ 8).
ON N3 ow/, owZy, unless. 1?NP from whence?
J-D3 *Aws. rP2l? within.
ffl33 Aow »wcA, Aow mawy. JJVTQ wAy «
i»3 (poetical for the prefix np Aow ?
?) as. -inn 7
I'D IDS likewise. n-ina j luickhj ^ 4^
]3 so, thus. "inn to-morrow.
IP iOS in ZiAe manner. ntan
T " below.
■J3 bs therefore, also ntan ntan Zow>er a«<Z
seeing that. lower.
13 by s3 seeing that. downwards.
^03 according to. ntSipbp from below.
rfb wof. ]!V ^p (lit. w>Ao would grant
rfbn whether not? [that]) Oh, that! Would
(nonne ?) that! (Utinam.)
slb icouZffJ <Aaf, sometimes if. ">%tF}\ ^ Oh, that I
Sv!lb j/" no*, unless. were!
nV? by night (§2) fjpn^ in Oh, that thou
nVbn lit. <Ae m'grA/, wast !
stands for to-night (§ 3) "D3?P on the other side, across.
 544 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

1?N truly, but truly. ba not.

bN not. ^ba without.
M if. ■'bap ^
woe '. \nbao ( without.
ON if. After an oath thatnot. IDa (poetical for the prefix
1? ON if so. ?) in, tc&ft.
>4b CN if not, unless. 02 a/so, evew.
ON ) D3/_D3 both—and.
OSES i eer*^» 'rM^- EN 03 ejjew j£
T |T >
]OS verily, certainly; Amen, "•a 02 * although.
last-night.
mararaer.
| whither ? also icAen ?
TT J T£J [rte] way of 2).
"|N TV \ till when, i.e., Nil behold ! here is.
H3N IV \ how long. ™n aAa / Aa /
nan come <w / <?o to I
I beseech, Ipray. ban vainly (§ 2).
also. aA/
''S *]N much more, or much ■•in Ao/
less; also yea surely. CVn
lit. <Ae day, stands for
~>t£7S tfoj^ orrfer tfto, as,to-day (§ 3.)
when, how (§ 5). TTO
how, used but rarely for
ipS2 inasmuch as. the legitimate form TM .
""^t?? as, when. nsbn
farther on, beyond.
oibn
hither, here.
Dtt? "l^S:3l in [the place'] Hart
hither, here.
where. narn nan here and
biBfiN there, hither
binn | yesterdav- and thither.
nOS securely, safely; strictly- nan TV hitherto.
speaking, witfA confi ■"l^n^ in great abundance
dence. (§4).
^ I pray. V^n outside.

* When the 03 is at all separated from the "'S by a Distinctive Accent,

these two words do not form one phrase, but must be rendered separately
each with its own meaning ; as, for instance, Ruth ii. 21, where "'S I 03
stands for also surely. The same remark applies to ON ^a .
 LETTER XLV. 545

nSinn abroad, i.e., out 1?b therefore.

of doors. iab (poetical for the prefix
V^nn from without. b)fo.
a Y^n besides, except, nab ^
nab why?
hastily, quickly, soon, IT T J
nan
T * for nothing. ^sb according to, in pro
portion to.
before.
E-i.a? ) COOb formerly,
nav
T by day (§ 2). in vain.
lHa wry, exceedingly.
together.
iNa ISaa m a wry
IT. because, high degree.
133
T : already, *lNa IV 1 very exceed-
na thus, also here. ifcab IE j ingly.
way and that, na^Ma anything, something; with
■«3 that, if, but, although, a negative particle
surely. nothing at all (§ 8).
CM ^3 but, only, unless, ^Sa yVow whence?
rD3T T thus. JT2a within.
nas how much, how many. SVta why ?
in? (poetical for the prefix na Aow ?
3) as. -ina
\D ia? likewise, n-ina j 9™'°% (§ 4)-
1? so, thus. "ina
T T to-morrow.
]3 iQ3 in like manner. ntaa
T " below.
]3 therefore, also ntsa
T - niaa
T * fou>er a»d
seeing that, lower,
seeing that, downwards.
according to. n^abayrom below.
ab not. ]SV sa (lit. wAo would grant
rfbn whether not? [that]) Oh, that! Would
(nonne ?) that! (Utindm.)
»b would that, sometimes if. ^}F)\ *n Oh, that J
if not, unless, were!
nVb by night (§ 2). 7J?£P ''a Oh, that thou
nVbil lit. the night, wast !
stands for to-night (§ 3) "135a on the other side, across.
540 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

BSC a-little. now, i.e.,

IS?!? tDS» fttffe and henceforth.
little. dbis 121 nflpp henceforth
bsa •> even for
nb?n 1 above- ever.
rhvp nb^C Aio7ter ana" nb here.
higher, n'spl nba on <Ai* side
upwards. and on that
/ate/y, recently. side.
Yin «>Aen? (§ 8). nb 12 40 /ar as
^na ritt roAen ? how Aere, thus
long ? far.
M3 now (see also ^S5).
Q,?f in front, forwards (see
^j/orerer. also "\3?b under " Those
taking Plural Affixes").
TOP "T37 fc> eternity, for
D'33 bs D^B face to
ever and ever.
face.
nbD 5WaA. A word not ad C25 at-a-time.
mitting translation ; sup nnH D2B once.
posed by the best Com E^a2B twice.
mentators to be a mere D2B . . . D2B sometimes....
musical mark. sometimes.
until. D2 En ;Ais ft'mc, now,
-IttJH "T37 } <Aii once.
\J ^ Y until that.
C252 D2B3 as at other
ever, for ever. times.
ever. OiMriS suddenly.
"121 Dbl2bfor ever and 2riB in a moment.
ever. DiMHS 2nB very sud-
obirn *roi
t t -: I Tobisna to all eter- , denly.
nity. Oli?. before, aforetime, in old
2p.5 in the end, in consequence time.
of, because ; alsofor ever. DTfta o/oZrf.
3p2 TS to the end, even 3"] much.
for ever. nsn greatly.
nop now. VT] in a moment.
nrTSI? lit. from 23"!. ia? as in a moment.
 LETTER XLV. 547

y*T). ^IQ/or a moment. oWbtt? binn? as yesterday

[and] the
Qpv-1 | in rain, to no purpose.
day before,
p"] 6w£, on/y. i.e., as here
Dittjbttj <ne day before yesterday tofore.
(always joined with Dtt>bttJ binJnn in time past,
which see). beforetime.
00? <Aere. Uwbw C2 Viian ca both yester
Dttf "lt£7M where. day and the
UW Kin ~1B?S3 in [the day before,
place"] where i.e., in time
he is. past.
TTEiyy thither. Tnri continually.
biari yesterday, also of yester D^ari perfectly.
day.

EXERCISE XXXIV.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
25= See the directions at the head of Exercise xxxiii. page 531.

The child [is] eating.—The woman goes.—I(/.) [am] hearing,

(m.) bsN nt^s -jbn VTZW

—My father [is] speaking. —The king is writing.—The

princesses [are] dancing. —Keep thou (/.) the flock.—Remember

rnjjj? 1\T\Pi-al "l»E7 ^2 1ST

ye (/».) the law of Moses.—Listen ye (/.) to the voice of your

rnin note vcw bip
548 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

husbands.—They shall keep my statutes. —We have eaten the bread.—

by.?* (m.) nj?n nob
1 _1_ 2
They (J.) shall not bless themselves in him.
rtb to •

* Pathach beneath the letter "9 is changed into Chateph-Pathach

on this Noun's receiving Affixes.

EXERCISE XXXV.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
I said to-him.—The angel spake unto-us. —They (/.) will
-ICN bMwithaff. -nipi. b« with aff.
lend to us.—They (/".) shall pour-out their hearts.—Lest ye (m.)

[should] be-cut-off from the ground.—We will make (Heb., cut) a

rro no"w rro
covenant with-you (/.)—And I shall say unto-him. —And we sent
IVm DJ? with aff. btf with aff. nbt£7
to thee (/.) — And thou (/.) didst seek to thee
bg with aff. tPpapi.
_2 1
other gods. —And we said unto-you (/.)—And ye (/.) shall
insf nvibs b« with aff.
say unto-them (/.)
-ION* b# with aff.

* Past Kal with "I Conversivum.

f Pathach changed into Chateph-Pathach in the Plural.
 LETTER XLV. i)49

EXERCISE XXXVI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

Cast-ye (m.) him into this pit which [is] in the desert but' hand

i 1 2
not(Heb., ye */taZ/ no< put-forth) on him (Heb., in Aim).—Thou (m.)

wast-caused-to-be-cast-out from thy grave. —And it

"f?» ">?p. , with aff. "nap., &c.
was on JEHOVAH'S overthrowing (Heb. on [the] overthrowing of
rvn* isn f
JEHO VAH) the-cities-of the plain.—And they (m.) sought
nim. T>s , Plu. n'ns is? rcpn
to lay hand on the king.

* With 1 Conversivum apocopated,

f Infinitive Kal with 3 of D^M .
% Infinitive Kal with b of 0^32 .

EXERCISE XXXVII.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

What shall we say, and what shall we speak ? And how shall we
np nan nan n. na
Justify ourselves?—And ye (m.) shall serve Him, and ye shall
ptS 132 *
2
hearken to (Hebr. in) His voice.—Speak my Lord, for thy servant

o o
550 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
1
heareth.—Who shall proclaim (Heb. cause to hear) all His praise !—
yaw WW bs nbnn
t ■ :
Speak thou (/!) to-him. —Te (m.) are speaking, and
by with aff.
they (f.) [are] hearing.
(Pronoun expressed)

* Past Kal with 1 Conversivum.

t With affix "J""?!! , &c.
t With affix «F5? , &c.

EXERCISE XXXVHI.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)
a l 2
Said I not to-you (»».), Sin ye not (Heb. ye (m.) shall
"WSM by with aff.
1 _2
not sin) against the child ?— [Is] not this the thing which I said
bs start ...3 "tV; n^T(m.) "ion
2 _1
to-you (m.), saying, Ascend ye not?—[It is] not time [for the]
by with aff. "ibsb nb» bt* ny
being-gathered-together-of the herd, water ye (m.) (Heb. cause ye (m.)
inf. Niph. njpa
to drink) the flock and go ye, feed ye.—And he approached, and
npw )&s lb"1 rrcn um
he-caused-to-roll [away] the stone.— Speak ye (/.) not.
bb: 15« -art pi bs
 LETTER XLV. 551

EXERCISE XXXIX.
(TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.)

Have ye (m.) eaten the meat ?—Have ye (/.) drunk the water ?—
bss -lira
T T nnt» pb
Could we [indeed *] know that he would say, Bring ye («».) down
TTV ^ ~i»s
(Heb. cause ye to descend) your-brother ?—In-vain will they (/.)
TP B^nS Slt^b
2 J 2
justify themselves; we will not believe them (Heb., to them).—
P12 PS Hiph.
And he fell, [namely] the man, upon his face [Heb. faces'] and
boa. nJ"N• by trae
■T
wept and said, Forgive, I-pray, my (Hebr. to my)
nm Kal \ "IBS SIM S3
iniquity only this-time.—And he purchased the field and the
)iyj *js DSBn. nap rn.ip(m.)
wood which [was] in it for a hundred and twenty [pieces of ]
\rs(«.)
silver.
HP?
* Emphasis expressed by coupling the Inf. Kal with Fut. Kal.
f See Letter xxxix. § 17.
% Withaff. "OiS, &c.

EXERCISE XL.
TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.
1
And he returned into* the house and took the child and caused
■■svOf n?a npb "»!?;(*».)
o o 2
552 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
£_ 1_
it (Ileb. him) to return to its mother. —And he turned
31»t °« with aff. "*H , &c. n3D

here and-there and he saw that there-was-no man, and he slew

I_ 2
the Egyptian and hid-him in the sand.—And the king
nya lata with aff. in Aim. bin -ybn
_J
said, Take ye (m.) a sword and cut ye the child into-two-[parts], and
nan npb ann -na Tb> a?3itfb

give ye the half to one [woman] and the [other] half to the other

(Heb. to one).
nns
TV

* The preposition into should, in this instance, be expressed by

affixing to the Noun the letter n preceded by Kawmets (Letter xix.
§ 1) ; the Short- Cherik beneath the s being then changed into Shvh
f See Letter xxxvi. § 6.
| See Letter xxxix. § 10.

EXERCISE XLI.
And he refused to comfort himself and said, Surely I shall go-down
1NZ2* am -IDH >3 TV
1
to my son mourning J into the grave.—And he said, I know
bN 1?| b?N bistf W Past Kal
1 2 1 2
not JEHOVAH, and also Israel I will not send-away.—And he
wb nim
IT . na- bKibi
t.: ■ nbrc j*.
* *•
 LETTER XLV. 553
2 2 1 2
answered and said, But-behold they (m.) will not believe me
nay ini Ion Hiph.
1^ 2 1 2
(Hebr. to »ie) and they will not listen to my voice, for they will
WW ...2 Vip •>?

3 2_ J_ 2
say, JEHOVAH hath not appeared (Heb. was not seen) to-thee (»».)—
"1»H nsi with aff.

There-is-no man with us, see thou (m.) GOD [is] witness
TS> tr^s ns with aff. ntn n^riby nj?

between me and thee (Heb., and between thee).—And he commanded

V9 with aff. nl2§
them (m.) saying.

* Pi-al construed with ? .

f With aff. s?2 , &c.
J This Preposition should be expressed by affixing H preceded by
Kawmets to the Noun (Letter xix. § 1).
§ Pi. (the 1 in this Verb is not quiescent).

EXERCISE XLII.
And she came for the purpose of watering the flock for
H13 n,"» Hiph.
2 1
she [was] a shepherdess (Heb. [one] feeding).—And
Pron. expressed HV")

he finished to charge bis ' sons, and he gathered [up] his

nba Pi. rm * 1? piu. caa fp»

feet into the bed and gave-up-the-ghost and died.—

bri-t by naa Sin the t not quiescent rilE
554 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

And it was on-her-speaking to-him day [by] day

rrn -on j bw with aff. ov ov

1_ 2 1
that he listened not to-her. —All [that] which I shall say
....1 WW bN with aff. bs "las

unto-thee (/.), thou shalt do.

b« with aff.
* Inf. Pi-al, with 7 of nb33 ; the 1 is not quiescent.
+ With affix ^fl , &c.
J Inf. Pi. with 3 of nb33 and Possessive Affix.

EXERCISE XLIII.

Send thou (m.) [away] My people, and they shall

nb» Pi. US (m.)

celebrate-a-feast to Me in the desert. —Whosoever shall lick of

:nn lyri? into bs ppb 71?

2__ 1
the water as the dog would-lick, thou shalt set him
Up TB^S 3b? Fut. Kal XPHiph*

2 1
apart. — I had not (Heb. there-was not to me) bread to-eat or
•nb rpn rtb onb bswj ....1

water to drink.—Drink ye (w.) and make-ye-merry [0 my] friends.

nnrcf nnw -aw Tn

— By these [men] will I save you (m.), and I will give

.... 3 tf^. ?n: J
 LETTER XLV. 555

[up] Midian into (Heb. in) thy (m.) hand.—Thou (m.) shalt [indeed]

1 2 1 2_
give to him, and thou-shalt not shut [up] thy hand.

.* Conjugated like ^23 (see Letter xxxiv. § 11).

t Inf. with V of obaa .
J Past Kal with 1 Conversivum.
§ Emphasis expressed by coupling the Infinitive Kal with Future

EXERCISE XL1V.
2 1 2
Rise thou (m.) go-down into the camp.—I shall not be able
Dip Tn by n?na rfb ^Hoph.

to go-down by-myself.—Thou (m.) shalt not again do (Heb.

tv * nab

2 1 2_
<Aom sAa/< «o£ ae/a") to do this thing.—And they were
b« tp^Hiph. TWVi (m.)

s 1
gathered-together all-of-them [like] one man, and they made
jp« bbj Bfa«
1 » 1
Abimelech king (Heb. and they caused Abimelech to reign)—
■sjbp'aN ibn

2 1
The trees went [indeed] for the purpose of anointing over themselves
556 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

(Heb. over them) a king, and they said to the olive-tree,

b?withaff. "5^0 IBM ^l(m.)
Reign thou (m.) over-us.
■f»| b*withaff.

* Infinitive with b of sb33 .

t Inf. with b of ob33 .
J With Affixes, &c.
$ Emphasis expressed by coupling Inf. Kal with Past Kal.
|| Imperative Kal with H Paragogic.

EXERCISE XLV.
What hast thou (m.) seen that thou hast done this thing ?—And

the man [was] wondering keeping-his-peace for the purpose of

trr*H ntw mthp. vnn mPh.
i t i
knowing whether JEHOVAH had caused to prosper {i.e., had
2V nirp
t : ^ rib's
8 _I_
made prosperous) his way or not.—Imagine thou (J1.) not to
•sj-H* dm rib nan Fut. Pi. bM

escape in the house of the king.—And he [was] rolling

tabDf /T2{ tjbo Pron. expressed bVa
himself in the-midst-of the high-way.—And he caused to approach

[it] (t.e., brought [it] near) to-him, and he did eat.

b»* with aff. bsM

* With Affix "TH, &c.

t Infinitive Niph. with b of Db33 .
J In Construction rP2! .
 LETTER XLV. 557

EXERCISE XLVI.
i
Rouse thou (/.) thyself, rise, utter a song.—Why
-Y)V ""15 Kal 131 .R. l"# np
wilt thou (/.) droop [0] my soul, and why wilt thou moan
nn» mthp. ^?3(/.)* non^
within me? Wait for GOD.—Behold ye (m.) [are] passing
bSwithaff. "hrvHiph. ...b nvtbs nan -122
[over] this river for the purpose of taking possession of (Heb.,
ina (m.)
for the purpose of inheriting) the land.— Go ye (m.) and see ye
urn mPh. yifi nsi
the land.—And they (»».) went, and came into the house of a
Mia by n>a f
woman and they lay [down] there.—That-which ye (m.) will
nttfM
T ' asw nzsttf
T T -itris
V -; ns
bake, bake ye ; and that which ye will boil, boil ye.
nDM boa pi.

* With Affix "#B3 , &c.

f In Construction iT'S .

EXERCISE XLVII.
And he slept and he dreamed a second-time.—And he awoke
far* * nbn rrottf VP"1*
J_ 2 i
and his spirit was troubled.—And they (».) saw that-which he did
n-n(/.) D3?oiVtpA. nsi -i^m: nM nwv
and they feared greatly.— For all the dwellers of the land have
M"V* 1MB "»2) b3 2©''+ V1M
558 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

been melted (i.e., have become utterly disheartened) before-you (»».) —

210 Niph. . 051330

And thou (m.) hast not [indeed] delivered them —Take

^sa Hiph.% npb

thou (/.) an harp and go-round [the] city.

lias mo -vy

* The letters 1 H "» K take Long-Cherik.

t Part. Act. iTa/, Plu. (m.) in the state of Construction.
\ Emphasis expressed by coupling the Infin. with the Past Tense ;
the Negative Particle should be placed between the two parts of
the Verb.

EXERCISE XLVIIL

Stand ye (m.) [up] and see ye the salvation of JEHOVAH.

221 map, nwi rmsi\ nirr

—And he said, Swear thou (m.) unto me, and he sware unto
ISM »2» Niph.*

him.—And I said to-him, Also I will swear.—

with aff. Pron. expressed.

Fear thou GOD [0] my son, and thou shalt not fear any-thing.
Nil ET^S? l3t NTKirfJ^b N?B23

—I (m.) [am] going to-meet-them (m.)— Do thou (/.) this

if?n ns-jn1? with aff. ntcj? (/)

2 1 2
for-my-sake.—I have not heard him, nor have I
. N-sa1? »»» with Obj. Aff.
 LETTER XLV. 559 •

seen him. — Do ye (m.) this.—See and hear thou [O]

rwn with Ohj. Aff. rmy (/)
my daughter.
/IS, with aff. &c.

* With Paragogic H .
f With aff. ""S? , &c.
| The letters 1 H " S take Long-Cherik.

EXERCISE XLIX.
And why wilt thou (m.) domineer (Heb. make thyself a ruler)
nab TWffithp*
over me.— GOD said to-me, Bless him, and I did
b? with aff. D'tfWt ins by with aff. T^t
bless him.—And thou (»».) shalt tie [up] the money and bring
TQf -lisJ S|PJ
(Heb. cause to come) [it] in thy hand.— Thou (m.) knowest
N1=§ TJ Pron. expressed VTPaatiTa/

that he [is] stronger than I (Heb., /rom me).—I shall not be-able
s? P|n rf? ^Hoph.
to stand before-him.—Ascend thou (/) to the top of the
nip || vasB nb? bs aWi f
mountain and sit [down] there.
-inT ate"1 nttf
T
* Regular, like "fpB .
f Pi-a/, with Affix in .
\ Past ^TaZ with 1 Conversivum.
§ Past Hiph. with 1 Conversivum.
|| inf. tfaJ with b of obaa .
% This word does not change in Construction.
 560 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE L.

Perchance we shall be-able to fight with him.

"•bw by Hoph. onb *

Perchance the woman wiil not be-willing to go.—And I saw

nttfN tom ns-if

and lo an angel [was] standing before-me, and his

nan Tjsbo toy

sword drawn in his hand, and I fell upon my face (Heb.,

faces).— And if thus thou (m.) [art] doing to me of-what-use [is]

B9B§ dm n33 ntry nab
2 _ 1
life to me ?—Stand ye (/.) here until I shall return.—For
D^n "TD3? nb -ijjJn ~rs sw ra

t j 2 4
they (»».) [are] but provoking me.—And behold
Pron. expressed 'HM DJ73 Hiph. nan

thy (m.) servants [are] caused to be beaten.

* inf. iVt>A. with b 0f oban .

f Inf. with b of DbD2 .
% See Letter xxxix. § 10.
§ A Plural Noun.
|| With Affix "a^n f &c.
f Plural .
 LETTER XLV. 561

EXEKCISE LI.
I shall go now, and I shall see whether there-hath-come-to-pass
lb« S3 ns-i dn irn mph.
2 1
[a thing] like this (/.), whether this great abomination hath been done.
rnyifi (/) nwv
—Look ye (m.) and see ye whether-there-is a grief like my
mph. ntn d?n akpa
grief which has been inflicted on me (Heb., to me).—For they have
V?y Pu. *a
driven me [away] to-day from-joining in the inheritance of
wot nsDt nbna
JEHOVAH.—Unto-Thee will I cry, and unto-Thee will I
nirP. bSwithaflF. S1E£?§ VNwithaff.
look up.—An ox or a lamb if it shall be born.

* Future with H Paragogic.

t Pi-aZ with Affix.
J Inf. #t%. with a of Db32 .
§ Pi-al, 1 not quiescent.

EXERCISE LII.
Look after (Heb., visit ye m.) this accursed [woman] and bury ye
nps tin* -iap+
3 1 2
her, for she [is] the-daughter-of a-king.—Open ye (wt.) to me
13 na "H^a nns
the-gates-of righteousness, I will enter them (Heb., / will come in
562 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

them), I will praise JAH.—Yea in-the-night-time

have my-reins instructed me.—JAH hath [indeed] corrected me

inV1?? TCJ -ID"1 §

but unto death (Heb., wwto <Ae death) He hath not given me
..."> rno t4b ]ro ||
2
[up]. —Hearken ye (m.) to me for I will utter noble [things].

* Participle Past JiTaZ.

t With Objective Affix.
X Pi-al with Affix.
§ />t-<M with Affix, emphasis expressed by coupling Inf. Pi. with
Past Pi.
|| With Objective Affix.

EXERCISE LIII.

1 2 1
I sought him but found him not.—I shall
VP* Pi. withaff. ...1 N2Bwithaff. *$b

consume them (m.) in-about a-moment's-time.—Approach ye (/!)

nba pi. with aff. in? tcaa

hither, why will ye stand at-a-distance ?—Ye (/.) have not known me,
nan nab tbs pirn? »t with aff.

nor (Heb., and not) have ye seen me. —They have

mn with aff.
1 2 1
beaten me, they have wounded me.—And he knew not
TIDlHiph.with aff. Kal -with etf. W rfb
 LETTER XLV. 563

that she had stolen them (m.)—Why art thou (/.)

^ Pron. expressed 232 Past Kal with aff. nab

pretending to be a stranger (Heb., making thyself strange), whereas

"133 ....1
I have known thee these (Heb. this, m.) thirty
Pron. expressed ST with aff.

years (Heb. year) ?

raw
TT

EXERCISE LIV.

With the rod the fool must be corrected. — Queens have

tsstf V>p? "iD>Fut. Niph. n3^Bpiu.ni:>bp

loved me, daughters have pronounced-me-happy. —

2HS Kal with aff. n2 piu. ni33 -lt»N Pi. with aff.

By-a-multitude-of words will be known the fool.—

ail? -o^i piu. tann^i w V>ps

Take-thou-(»i.)-care to thyself (Heb., to thee) lest thou shouldest be

•KWNiph. 1...

impoverished.—Thou (/.) shalt not be known to any one (Heb., to

WV Niph. b« ST

\any~\man).—Look ye (m.) at me and see that-which I (m.)

tE^S 1233 Hiph. ^ with aff. HK1 l^yTIM

[am] doing, so shall ye do, even ye.

13 rim} D3 pron. expressed.
 564 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

- EXERCISE LV.
1 2 1
And he was left by-himself and a man wrestled with him
"WMph. 'H?1? B^H P^Niph. D? with aff.
until the rising-of the morning-dawn.—And he said,
IS rhl Inf. Constr. Kal "inttf IDS
2 1
Send thou (m.) me [away] for the morning-dawn hath risen.— And
rhw Pi. with aff.
he said, I will not send thee (m.) [away] except thou
nbw Pi. with aff. DH •>?
hast blessed me. — And he fell upon his-neck and
T° Pi. with aff. ^33 TnHJS
kissed him, and they wept both-of-them.
P»3 Aa/ with aff. in 7132 Qn^d

EXERCISE LVI.
Why will ye comfort me [with] vain [words] ?—
nab ona pi with aff.* ban
2 1 2
He will not faint nor will he be-tired.—And he arose and went

1 2 1
[away] and despised thebirthright.—And the men feared because
ma nT32 d^sn wi^jKa/t
they were brought (Heb., </tey were caused to come) [into the] house-of

Joseph.—Behold the money which we found have we restored (Heb.,

F|pv nan f)D3 msb
 LETTER XLV. 565

have we caused to return) unto thee (m.), and how [then] should
31B? btf with aff.
we steal from the-house-of thy-master silver or gold ?—How shall I
333 JTS TPifS TyN
go-up to my father ?
"by} b^

* The n refuses to make Compensation for Dagesh.

t IH^S take Long-Cherik.
\ The first radical takes Chateph- Segol in 1 Pers. Sing. Fut. Kal.

EXERCISE LVII.
Rise thou (f.), go-out from [the] midst-of the overthrow.—
rap ns-< Tjin rnsna

The king has brought me (Heb., has caused me to come) [into]

rft? N12 with aff.
his chambers. —I have taken-hold-of him and I will not
*nn piu. ra-nq tns Kal with aff.
let-him-loose. —They (m.) do not turn (Heb. will not
T131 Hiph., with aff. «
be turned) in their going.—And I said unto him, Open-widely
33D Fut. Niph. -fV» IBM bs n2D
thy-mouth and eat. — And I saw, and behold a hand
Tpe bas ns-i nan T(y.)

stretched-out. —Take thou (/) and go.

nbtn Partic. Past Kal npb ■jb'1

* Inf. AaZ with 2 of DbD2 and Possessive Affix.

P P
566 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE LVIII.
And I will cut [down] the groves which ye
»T3 Past Kal with 1 Conv. Tnti* (/.)
(m.) have planted, and I will overthrow the pillars
3*23 ISn Past Kal with 1 Conv. (/.)
which ye haveraisedup(Heb., Aa»ecaw*e<f fo«<aw</wp).—Take thou (m.)
rap npb*

for me(Heb., to me) this damsel for a wife. —He chose not to take her.
rnya n^s ms rib npb+
—And HE raised up (Heb., caused to stand [up~] ) for them (m.)
(Heb., to them) a Saviour (Heb., one (m.) saving).— Save Thou,
vvy mph. vrs> mPh.
[ we ] pray. — Save Thou us, and we shall
N3 SW> Hiph. with Obj. aff.
be saved. — Do thou (f.) according-to-what I com-
yw Mph. nwv ip$3
naanded-thee.
Pi. with aff. ; 1 not quiescent.
* Imper. Kal with n Paragogic.
f Inf. Kal with V of 0^32 and Objective Affix.

EXERCISE LIX.
2 I
Lift thou (/.) [up] the child and go.—The waters shall be gathered
Ntw iV ran mp*

[together].— Heal Thou us and we shall be healed.—

ND"l Imper. Kal with aff.
 LETTER XLV. 567

Incline thou (/.) I-pray thy pitcher and I will drink. —Drink thou
naa Hiph. va -® nnw Kal nnw

(m.) and also thy camels will I water (Heb., will I came
na baa
t t piu. n'baa
- -:
to drink). — Her hast Thou appointed for Thy
"P» TXT Hiph b

servant. —Deliver Thou me I-pray from the

, with aff. , &c. b23 Hiph. with aff. «3
hand of my brother.
T in Constr. T n«

* The 1 not being quiescent, the Verb is conjugated like <"lb3 .

EXERCISE LX.

Hasten thou (f.) do [that] which I commanded thee, tarry

"ina Pi * HWV nl2f Pi. with aff. 1^9Kal

not —Why will ye (m.) stand here? go ye to your work.—

nab
TT 1 lay1 n's -iV
1 n-rtas
t -:

And they (f.) caused him to drink water.—All the-days-of your (m.)
npw n>a b|

being in the desert.—All the herds were collected thither—

rrnj lana ~nj? piu. n^-insr nap
i_ j i
And ye shall be collected unto-me like one man.—[Let] this [be]
bs with aff.
568 HEBREW GRAMMAR.

thy (/.) kindness which thou (/.) shalt do to me

•rer? (m.)> with aff. &c. nwv

(Heb., with-me).—Yesterday on my being with-him in the field,

"Has Via^i rrnfl nswithaff. nito

* The n refuses to make Compensation for Dagesh.

•)• The letter 1 is not quiescent.
% Inf. Kal with Possessive Affix.
§ Past Niph., with 1 Conversivum.
II Inf. Kal with 3 of B^M and Possessive Affix.

END OF VOLUME J.

Macintosh, Printer, Great New-street, London.